NPAG

Chapt1-2-3
18/06/02
17:34
Page 3
Introduction
Relay hardware is becoming even more standardised, to the point at
which versions of a relay may differ only by the software they contain.
This accurate prediction in the preface to the Third Edition of the Protective
Relay Application Guide (PRAG), 1987, has been followed by the rapid
development of integrated protection and control devices. The change in
technology, together with significant changes in Utility, Industrial and
Commercial organisations, has resulted in new emphasis on Secondary Systems
Engineering.
In addition to the traditional role of protection & control, secondary systems
are now required to provide true added value to organisations.
When utilised to its maximum, not only can the integration of protection &
control functionality deliver the required reduction in life-time cost of capital,
but the advanced features available (Quality of Supply, disturbance recording
and plant monitoring) enable system and plant performance to be improved,
increasing system availability.
The evolution of all secondary connected devices to form digital control
systems continues to greatly increase access to all information available within
the substation, resulting in new methodologies for asset management.
In order to provide the modern practising substation engineer with reference
material, the Network Protection & Automation Guide provides a substantially
revised and expanded edition of PRAG incorporating new chapters on all levels
of network automation. The first part of the book deals with the fundamentals,
basic technology, fault calculations and the models of power system plant,
including the transient response and saturation problems that affect
instrument transformers.
The typical data provided on power system plant has been updated and
significantly expanded following research that showed its popularity.
The book then provides detailed analysis on the application of protection
systems. This includes a new Chapter on the protection of a.c. electrified
railways. Existing chapters on distance, busbar and generator protection have
been completely revised to take account of new developments, including
improvements due to numerical protection techniques and the application
problems of embedded generation. The Chapter on relay testing and
commissioning has been completely updated to reflect modern techniques.
Finally, new Chapters covering the fields of power system measurements,
power quality, and substation and distribution automation are found, to reflect
the importance of these fields for the modern Power System Engineer.
The intention is to make NPAG the standard reference work in its subject area
- while still helping the student and young engineer new to the field. We trust
that you find this book invaluable and assure you that any comments will be
carefully noted ready for the next edition.
Network Protection & Automation Guide
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:42
Page 4
Fundamentals
of Protection Practice
Introduction
2.1
Protection equipment
2.2
Zones of protection
2.3
Reliability
2.4
Selectivity
2.5
Stability
2.6
Speed
2.7
Sensitivity
2.8
Primary and back-up protection
2.9
Relay output devices
2.10
Relay tripping circuits
2.11
Trip circuit supervision 2.12
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:42
Page 5
Fundamentals
of P rotection P ractice
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of an electrical power system is to generate
and supply electrical energy to consumers. The system
should be designed and managed to deliver this energy
to the utilisation points with both reliability and
economy. Severe disruption to the normal routine of
modern society is likely if power outages are frequent or
prolonged, placing an increasing emphasis on reliability
and security of supply. As the requirements of reliability
and economy are largely opposed, power system design
is inevitably a compromise.
A power system comprises many diverse items of
equipment. Figure 2.2 shows a hypothetical power
system; this and Figure 2.1 illustrates the diversity of
equipment that is found.
Figure 2.1: Modern power station
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:42
Page 6
Hydro power station

G1
G2
R1
R2
T1
T2
380kV
L2
L1A
Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice
L1B
380kV
380kV
L3
T5
L4
T6
110kV
T3
C'
T4
B'
33kV
CCGT power station
Steam power station

G3
G4
G5 G6
R3
R4
T10
R5
T7
T11
220kV
L7A
G7
R6
R7
T8
T9
380kV
T14
L6
380kV
Grid
substation
F
L7B
L5
T15
T12
T16
T13
T17
L8
33kV
D'
Grid
380kV
110kV
F'
e 2.
G'
Figure 2.2: Example power system
Figur
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:42
Page 7
Figure 2.4: Possible consequence of inadequate protection
The definitions that follow are generally used in relation

to power system protection:
a. Protection System: a complete arrangement of
protection equipment and other devices required to
achieve a specified function based on a protection
principal (IEC 60255-20)
b. Protection Equipment: a collection of protection
devices (relays, fuses, etc.). Excluded are devices
such as CTs, CBs, Contactors, etc.
Figure 2.3: Onset of an overhead line fault
c. Protection Scheme: a collection of protection

equipment providing a defined function and
including all equipment required to make the
scheme work (i.e. relays, CTs, CBs, batteries, etc.)
Many items of equipment are very expensive, and so the

complete power system represents a very large capital
investment. To maximise the return on this outlay, the
system must be utilised as much as possible within the
applicable constraints of security and reliability of
supply. More fundamental, however, is that the power
system should operate in a safe manner at all times. No
matter how well designed, faults will always occur on a
power system, and these faults may represent a risk to
life and/or property. Figure 2.3 shows the onset of a fault
on an overhead line. The destructive power of a fault arc
carrying a high current is very great; it can burn through
copper conductors or weld together core laminations in
a transformer or machine in a very short time some
tens or hundreds of milliseconds. Even away from the
fault arc itself, heavy fault currents can cause damage to
plant if they continue for more than a few seconds. The
provision of adequate protection to detect and
disconnect elements of the power system in the event of
fault is therefore an integral part of power system
design. Only by so doing can the objectives of the power
system be met and the investment protected. Figure 2.4
provides an illustration of the consequences of failure to
provide appropriate protection.
In order to fulfil the requirements of protection with the

optimum speed for the many different configurations,
operating conditions and construction features of power
systems, it has been necessary to develop many types of
relay that respond to various functions of the power
system quantities. For example, observation simply of
the magnitude of the fault current suffices in some cases
but measurement of power or impedance may be
necessary in others. Relays frequently measure complex
functions of the system quantities, which are only readily
expressible by mathematical or graphical means.
Relays may be classified according to the technology
used:
a. electromechanical
b. static
c. digital
d. numerical
The different types have somewhat different capabilities,
due to the limitations of the technology used. They are
described in more detail in Chapter 7.
This is the measure of the importance of protection

systems as applied in power system practice and of the
responsibility vested in the Protection Engineer.
2 . 2 P R OT E C T I O N E Q U I P M E N T
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:42
Page 8
In many cases, it is not feasible to protect against all

hazards with a relay that responds to a single power
system quantity. An arrangement using several
quantities may be required. In this case, either several
relays, each responding to a single quantity, or, more
commonly, a single relay containing several elements,
each responding independently to a different quantity
may be used.
Busbar
protection
ec
Feeder
ed
protection
(a) CT's on both sides of circuit breaker
The terminology used in describing protection systems

and relays is given in Appendix 1. Different symbols for
describing relay functions in diagrams of protection
schemes are used, the two most common methods (IEC
and IEEE/ANSI) are provided in Appendix 2.
2 . 3 Z O N E S O F P R OT E C T I O N
Feeder
ed
protection
(b) CT's on circuit side of circuit breaker
To limit the extent of the power system that is

disconnected when a fault occurs, protection is arranged
in zones. The principle is shown in Figure 2.5. Ideally, the
zones of protection should overlap, so that no part of the
power system is left unprotected. This is shown in Figure
2.6(a), the circuit breaker being included in both zones.
Figure 2.6: CT Locations
the circuit breaker A that is not completely protected

against faults. In Figure 2.6(b) a fault at F would cause
the busbar protection to operate and open the circuit
breaker but the fault may continue to be fed through the
feeder. The feeder protection, if of the unit type (see
section 2.5.2), would not operate, since the fault is
outside its zone. This problem is dealt with by
intertripping or some form of zone extension, to ensure
that the remote end of the feeder is tripped also.
Zone 1
The point of connection of the protection with the power

system usually defines the zone and corresponds to the
location of the current transformers. Unit type
protection will result in the boundary being a clearly
defined closed loop. Figure 2.7 illustrates a typical
arrangement of overlapping zones.
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Feeder 1
Busbar
protection
e
Zone 7
Feeder 2
Zone 6
Feeder 3
Figure 2.5: Division of power system

Figure
2.52.6
into protection zones
Figure 2.7
For practical physical and economic reasons, this ideal is
not always achieved, accommodation for current
transformers being in some cases available only on one
side of the circuit breakers, as in Figure 2.6(b). This
leaves a section between the current transformers and
Figure 2.7: Overlapping zones

of protection systems
Alternatively, the zone may be unrestricted; the start will

be defined but the extent (or reach) will depend on
measurement of the system quantities and will therefore
be subject to variation, owing to changes in system
conditions and measurement errors.
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:42
Page 9
2.4 RELIABILITY
2.4.4 Testing
The need for a high degree of reliability is discussed in

Section 2.1. Incorrect operation can be attributed to one
of the following classifications:
Comprehensive testing is just as important, and this

testing should cover all aspects of the protection
scheme, as well as reproducing operational and
environmental conditions as closely as possible. Type
testing of protection equipment to recognised standards
fulfils many of these requirements, but it may still be
necessary to test the complete protection scheme (relays,
current transformers and other ancillary items) and the
tests must simulate fault conditions realistically.
a. incorrect design/settings
b. incorrect installation/testing
c. deterioration in service
The design of a protection scheme is of paramount

importance. This is to ensure that the system will
operate under all required conditions, and (equally
important) refrain from operating when so required
(including, where appropriate, being restrained from
operating for faults external to the zone being
protected). Due consideration must be given to the
nature, frequency and duration of faults likely to be
experienced, all relevant parameters of the power system
(including the characteristics of the supply source, and
methods of operation) and the type of protection
equipment used. Of course, no amount of effort at this
stage can make up for the use of protection equipment
that has not itself been subject to proper design.
2.4.5 Deterioration in Service
2.4.2 Settings
Testing should preferably be carried out without

disturbing permanent connections. This can be achieved
by the provision of test blocks or switches.
Subsequent to installation in perfect condition,

deterioration of equipment will take place and may
eventually interfere with correct functioning. For
example, contacts may become rough or burnt owing to
frequent operation, or tarnished owing to atmospheric
contamination; coils and other circuits may become
open-circuited, electronic components and auxiliary
devices may fail, and mechanical parts may seize up.
The time between operations of protection relays may be
years rather than days. During this period defects may
have developed unnoticed until revealed by the failure of
the protection to respond to a power system fault. For
this reason, relays should be regularly tested in order to
check for correct functioning.
It is essential to ensure that settings are chosen for

protection relays and systems which take into account
the parameters of the primary system, including fault
and load levels, and dynamic performance requirements
etc. The characteristics of power systems change with
time, due to changes in loads, location, type and amount
of generation, etc. Therefore, setting values of relays
may need to be checked at suitable intervals to ensure
that they are still appropriate. Otherwise, unwanted
operation or failure to operate when required may occur.
The quality of testing personnel is an essential feature

when assessing reliability and considering means for
improvement. Staff must be technically competent and
adequately trained, as well as self-disciplined to proceed
in a systematic manner to achieve final acceptance.
Important circuits that are especially vulnerable can be
provided with continuous electrical supervision; such
arrangements are commonly applied to circuit breaker
trip circuits and to pilot circuits. Modern digital and
numerical
relays
usually
incorporate
selftesting/diagnostic facilities to assist in the detection of
failures. With these types of relay, it may be possible to
arrange for such failures to be automatically reported by
communications link to a remote operations centre, so
that appropriate action may be taken to ensure
continued safe operation of that part of the power
system and arrangements put in hand for investigation
and correction of the fault.
2.4.3 Installation
The need for correct installation of protection systems is
obvious, but the complexity of the interconnections of
many systems and their relationship to the remainder of
the installation may make checking difficult. Site testing
is therefore necessary; since it will be difficult to
reproduce all fault conditions correctly, these tests must
be directed to proving the installation. The tests should
be limited to such simple and direct tests as will prove
the correctness of the connections, relay settings, and
freedom from damage of the equipment. No attempt
should be made to 'type test' the equipment or to
establish complex aspects of its technical performance.
2.4.6 Protection Performance

Protection system performance is frequently assessed
statistically. For this purpose each system fault is classed
9
2.4.1 Design
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:45
Page 10
as an incident and only those that are cleared by the

tripping of the correct circuit breakers are classed as
'correct'. The percentage of correct clearances can then
be determined.
2.5.1 Time Grading

Protection systems in successive zones are arranged to
operate in times that are graded through the sequence of
equipments so that upon the occurrence of a fault,
although a number of protection equipments respond,
only those relevant to the faulty zone complete the
tripping function.
The others make incomplete
operations and then reset. The speed of response will
often depend on the severity of the fault, and will
generally be slower than for a unit system.
This principle of assessment gives an accurate evaluation

of the protection of the system as a whole, but it is
severe in its judgement of relay performance. Many
relays are called into operation for each system fault,
and all must behave correctly for a correct clearance to
be recorded.
Complete reliability is unlikely ever to be achieved by

further improvements in construction. If the level of
reliability achieved by a single device is not acceptable,
improvement can be achieved through redundancy, e.g.
duplication of equipment. Two complete, independent,
main protection systems are provided, and arranged so
that either by itself can carry out the required function.
If the probability of each equipment failing is x/unit, the
resultant probability of both equipments failing
simultaneously, allowing for redundancy, is x2. Where x
is small the resultant risk (x2) may be negligible.
2.5.2 Unit Systems

It is possible to design protection systems that respond
only to fault conditions occurring within a clearly
defined zone. This type of protection system is known as
'unit protection'. Certain types of unit protection are
known by specific names, e.g. restricted earth fault and
differential protection. Unit protection can be applied
throughout a power system and, since it does not involve
time grading, is relatively fast in operation. The speed of
response is substantially independent of fault severity.
Where multiple protection systems are used, the tripping

signal can be provided in a number of different ways.
The two most common methods are:
Unit protection usually involves comparison of quantities

at the boundaries of the protected zone as defined by the
locations of the current transformers. This comparison
may be achieved by direct hard-wired connections or
may be achieved via a communications link. However
certain protection systems derive their 'restricted'
property from the configuration of the power system and
may be classed as unit protection, e.g. earth fault
protection applied to the high voltage delta winding of a
power transformer. Whichever method is used, it must
be kept in mind that selectivity is not merely a matter of
relay design. It also depends on the correct coordination of current transformers and relays with a
suitable choice of relay settings, taking into account the
possible range of such variables as fault currents,
maximum load current, system impedances and other
related factors, where appropriate.
a. all protection systems must operate for a tripping

operation to occur (e.g. two-out-of-two
arrangement)
b. only one protection system need operate to cause
a trip (e.g. one-out-of two arrangement)
The former method guards against maloperation while
the latter guards against failure to operate due to an
unrevealed fault in a protection system. Rarely, three
main protection systems are provided, configured in a
two-out-of three tripping arrangement, to provide both
reliability of tripping, and security against unwanted
tripping.
It has long been the practice to apply duplicate
protection systems to busbars, both being required to
operate to complete a tripping operation. Loss of a
busbar may cause widespread loss of supply, which is
clearly undesirable. In other cases, important circuits are
provided with duplicate main protection systems, either
being able to trip independently. On critical circuits, use
may also be made of a digital fault simulator to model
the relevant section of the power system and check the
performance of the relays used.
2 . 6 S TA B I L I T Y
The term stability is usually associated with unit
protection schemes and refers to the ability of the
protection system to remain unaffected by conditions
external to the protected zone, for example through load
current and external fault conditions.
2.7 SPEED
2.5 SELECTIVITY
The function of protection systems is to isolate faults on

the power system as rapidly as possible. The main
objective is to safeguard continuity of supply by
removing each disturbance before it leads to widespread
loss of synchronism and consequent collapse of the
power system.
When a fault occurs, the protection scheme is required

to trip only those circuit breakers whose operation is
required to isolate the fault. This property of selective
tripping is also called 'discrimination' and is achieved by
two general methods.
10
21/06/02
10:45
Page 11
As the loading on a power system increases, the phase

shift between voltages at different busbars on the
system also increases, and therefore so does the
probability that synchronism will be lost when the
system is disturbed by a fault. The shorter the time a
fault is allowed to remain in the system, the greater can
be the loading of the system. Figure 2.8 shows typical
relations between system loading and fault clearance
times for various types of fault. It will be noted that
phase faults have a more marked effect on the stability
of the system than a simple earth fault and therefore
require faster clearance.
Figure 2.8
Phase-earth
Load power
Phase-phase
Phase-phase-earth
Three-phase
Time
Figure 2.8: Typical power/time relationship
for various fault types
System stability is not, however, the only consideration.

Rapid operation of protection ensures that fault damage
is minimised, as energy liberated during a fault is
proportional to the square of the fault current times the
duration of the fault. Protection must thus operate as
quickly as possible but speed of operation must be
weighed against economy. Distribution circuits, which
do not normally require a fast fault clearance, are usually
protected by time-graded systems. Generating plant and
EHV systems require protection gear of the highest
attainable speed; the only limiting factor will be the
necessity for correct operation, and therefore unit
systems are normal practice.
2.8 SENSITIVITY
Sensitivity is a term frequently used when referring to
the minimum operating level (current, voltage, power
etc.) of relays or complete protection schemes. The relay
or scheme is said to be sensitive if the primary operating
parameter(s) is low.
With older electromechanical relays, sensitivity was
considered in terms of the sensitivity of the measuring
movement and was measured in terms of its volt-ampere
consumption to cause operation. With modern digital
and numerical relays the achievable sensitivity is seldom
limited by the device design but by its application and
CT/VT parameters.
2 . 9 P R I M A R Y A N D B A C K - U P P R OT E C T I O N
The reliability of a power system has been discussed
earlier, including the use of more than one primary (or
main) protection system operating in parallel. In the
event of failure or non-availability of the primary
protection some other means of ensuring that the fault
is isolated must be provided. These secondary systems
are referred to as back-up protection.
Back-up protection may be considered as either being
local or remote. Local back-up protection is achieved
by protection which detects an un-cleared primary
system fault at its own location and which then trips its
own circuit breakers, e.g. time graded overcurrent relays.
Remote back-up protection is provided by protection
that detects an un-cleared primary system fault at a
remote location and then issues a local trip command,
e.g. the second or third zones of a distance relay. In both
cases the main and back-up protection systems detect a
fault simultaneously, operation of the back-up
protection being delayed to ensure that the primary
protection clears the fault if possible. Normally being
unit protection, operation of the primary protection will
be fast and will result in the minimum amount of the
power system being disconnected. Operation of the
back-up protection will be, of necessity, slower and will
result in a greater proportion of the primary system
being lost.
The extent and type of back-up protection applied will
naturally be related to the failure risks and relative
economic importance of the system. For distribution
systems where fault clearance times are not critical, time
delayed remote back-up protection may be adequate.
For EHV systems, where system stability is at risk unless
a fault is cleared quickly, multiple primary protection
systems, operating in parallel and possibly of different
types (e.g. distance and unit protection), will be used to
ensure fast and reliable tripping. Back-up overcurrent
protection may then optionally be applied to ensure that
two separate protection systems are available during
maintenance of one of the primary protection systems.
Back-up protection systems should, ideally, be
completely separate from the primary systems. For
example a circuit protected by a current differential relay
may also have time graded overcurrent and earth fault
relays added to provide circuit breaker tripping in the
event of failure of the main primary unit protection. To
maintain complete separation and thus integrity, current
transformers, voltage transformers, relays, circuit breaker
trip coils and d.c. supplies would be duplicated. This
ideal is rarely attained in practice. The following
compromises are typical:
a. separate current transformers (cores and secondary
windings only) are provided. This involves little extra
cost or accommodation compared with the use of
11
Chap2-4-15
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:45
Page 12
common current transformers that would have to be

larger because of the combined burden. This practice
is becoming less common when digital or numerical
relays are used, because of the extremely low input
burden of these relay types
b. voltage transformers are not duplicated because of

cost and space considerations. Each protection relay
supply is separately protected (fuse or MCB) and
continuously supervised to ensure security of the VT
output. An alarm is given on failure of the supply and,
where appropriate, prevent an unwanted operation of
the protection
The majority of protection relay elements have self-reset

contact systems, which, if so desired, can be modified to
provide hand reset output contacts by the use of
auxiliary elements. Hand or electrically reset relays are
used when it is necessary to maintain a signal or lockout
condition. Contacts are shown on diagrams in the
position corresponding to the un-operated or deenergised condition, regardless of the continuous service
condition of the equipment.
For example, an
undervoltage relay, which is continually energised in
normal circumstances, would still be shown in the deenergised condition.
c. trip supplies to the two protections should be

separately protected (fuse or MCB). Duplication of
tripping batteries and of circuit breaker tripping coils
may be provided. Trip circuits should be continuously
supervised
A 'make' contact is one that closes when the relay picks

up, whereas a 'break' contact is one that is closed when
the relay is de-energised and opens when the relay picks
up. Examples of these conventions and variations are
shown in Figure 2.9.
d. it is desirable that the main and back-up protections (or

duplicate main protections) should operate on different
principles, so that unusual events that may cause
failure of the one will be less likely to affect the other
Self reset
Hand reset
Digital and numerical relays may incorporate suitable

back-up protection functions (e.g. a distance relay may
also incorporate time-delayed overcurrent protection
elements as well). A reduction in the hardware required to
provide back-up protection is obtained, but at the risk that
a common relay element failure (e.g. the power supply)
will result in simultaneous loss of both main and back-up
protection. The acceptability of this situation must be
evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
`make' contacts
(normally open)
`break' contacts
(normally open)
Time delay on
pick up
Time delay on
drop-off
Figure 2.9: Contact types
A protection relay is usually required to trip a circuit

breaker, the tripping mechanism of which may be a
solenoid with a plunger acting directly on the
mechanism latch or an electrically operated valve. The
power required by the trip coil of the circuit breaker may
range from up to 50 watts for a small 'distribution'
circuit breaker, to 3000 watts for a large, extra-highvoltage circuit breaker.
2 . 10 R E L AY O U T P U T D E V I C E S
In order to perform their intended function, relays must be
fitted with some means of providing the various output
signals required. Contacts of various types usually fulfil
this function.
The relay may therefore energise the tripping coil

directly, or, according to the coil rating and the number
of circuits to be energised, may do so through the
agency of another multi-contact auxiliary relay.
2.10.1 Contact Systems

Relays may be fitted with a variety of contact systems
for providing electrical outputs for tripping and remote
indication purposes.
The most common types
encountered are as follows:
The basic trip circuit is simple, being made up of a handtrip control switch and the contacts of the protection
relays in parallel to energise the trip coil from a battery,
through a normally open auxiliary switch operated by
the circuit breaker. This auxiliary switch is needed to
open the trip circuit when the circuit breaker opens
since the protection relay contacts will usually be quite
incapable of performing the interrupting duty. The
auxiliary switch will be adjusted to close as early as
possible in the closing stroke, to make the protection
effective in case the breaker is being closed on to a fault.
a. Self-reset
The contacts remain in the operated condition only
while the controlling quantity is applied, returning
to their original condition when it is removed
b. Hand or electrical reset
These contacts remain in the operated condition
after the controlling quantity is removed. They can
be reset either by hand or by an auxiliary
electromagnetic element
12
21/06/02
10:45
Page 13
Where multiple output contacts, or contacts with

appreciable current-carrying capacity are required,
interposing, contactor type elements will normally be used.
In general, static and microprocessor relays have discrete
measuring and tripping circuits, or modules. The
functioning of the measuring modules is independent of
operation of the tripping modules. Such a relay is
equivalent to a sensitive electromechanical relay with a
tripping contactor, so that the number or rating of
outputs has no more significance than the fact that they
have been provided.
2 . 11 T R I P P I N G C I R C U I T S
There are three main circuits in use for circuit breaker
tripping:
a. series sealing
b. shunt reinforcing
c. shunt reinforcement with sealing
These are illustrated in Figure 2.10.
For larger switchgear installations the tripping power

requirement of each circuit breaker is considerable, and
further, two or more breakers may have to be tripped by
one protection system. There may also be remote
signalling requirements, interlocking with other
functions (for example auto-reclosing arrangements),
and other control functions to be performed. These
various operations may then be carried out by multicontact tripping relays, which are energised by the
protection relays and provide the necessary number of
adequately rated output contacts.
Electrical indicators may be simple attracted armature

elements, where operation of the armature releases a
shutter to expose an indicator as above, or indicator
lights (usually light emitting diodes). For the latter, some
kind of memory circuit is provided to ensure that the
indicator remains lit after the initiating event has passed.
With the advent of digital and numerical relays, the
operation indicator has almost become redundant.
Relays will be provided with one or two simple indicators
that indicate that the relay is powered up and whether
an operation has occurred. The remainder of the
information previously presented via indicators is
available by interrogating the relay locally via a manmachine interface (e.g. a keypad and liquid crystal
display screen), or remotely via a communication system.
52a
TC
PR
52a
TC
52a
TC
(a) Series sealing
(b) Shunt reinforcing
PR
2.10.2 Operation Indicators

Protection systems are invariably provided with
indicating devices, called 'flags', or 'targets', as a guide
for operations personnel. Not every relay will have one,
as indicators are arranged to operate only if a trip
operation is initiated. Indicators, with very few
exceptions, are bi-stable devices, and may be either
mechanical or electrical. A mechanical indicator consists
of a small shutter that is released by the protection relay
movement to expose the indicator pattern.
PR
(c) Shunt reinforcing with series sealing

Figure 2.10: Typical relay tripping circuits
For electromechanical relays, electrically operated

indicators, actuated after the main contacts have closed,
avoid imposing an additional friction load on the
measuring element, which would be a serious handicap
for certain types. Care must be taken with directly
operated indicators to line up their operation with the
closure of the main contacts. The indicator must have
operated by the time the contacts make, but must not
have done so more than marginally earlier. This is to stop
indication occurring when the tripping operation has not
been completed.
With modern digital and numerical relays, the use of
various alternative methods of providing trip circuit
functions is largely obsolete. Auxiliary miniature
contactors are provided within the relay to provide
output contact functions and the operation of these
contactors is independent of the measuring system, as
mentioned previously. The making current of the relay
output contacts and the need to avoid these contacts
breaking the trip coil current largely dictates circuit
breaker trip coil arrangements. Comments on the
various means of providing tripping arrangements are,
however, included below as a historical reference
applicable to earlier electromechanical relay designs.
13
Chap2-4-15
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:45
Page 14
is countered by means of a further contact on the

auxiliary unit connected as a retaining contact.
2.11.1 Series sealing

The coil of the series contactor carries the trip current
initiated by the protection relay, and the contactor closes
a contact in parallel with the protection relay contact.
This closure relieves the protection relay contact of further
duty and keeps the tripping circuit securely closed, even if
chatter occurs at the main contact. The total tripping time
is not affected, and the indicator does not operate until
current is actually flowing through the trip coil.
This means that provision must be made for releasing the

sealing circuit when tripping is complete; this is a
disadvantage, because it is sometimes inconvenient to
find a suitable contact to use for this purpose.
2.12 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION

The trip circuit includes the protection relay and other
components, such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary
switch contacts, etc., and in some cases through a
considerable amount of circuit wiring with intermediate
terminal boards. These interconnections, coupled with
the importance of the circuit, result in a requirement in
many cases to monitor the integrity of the circuit. This
is known as trip circuit supervision. The simplest
arrangement contains a healthy trip lamp, as shown in
Figure 2.11(a).
The main disadvantage of this method is that such series

elements must have their coils matched with the trip
circuit with which they are associated.
The coil of these contacts must be of low impedance,

with about 5% of the trip supply voltage being dropped
across them.
When used in association with high-speed trip relays,

which usually interrupt their own coil current, the
auxiliary elements must be fast enough to operate and
release the flag before their coil current is cut off. This
may pose a problem in design if a variable number of
auxiliary elements (for different phases and so on) may
be required to operate in parallel to energise a common
tripping relay.
The resistance in series with the lamp prevents the

breaker being tripped by an internal short circuit caused
by failure of the lamp. This provides supervision while
the circuit breaker is closed; a simple extension gives
pre-closing supervision.
Figure 2.11(b) shows how, the addition of a normally
closed auxiliary switch and a resistance unit can provide
supervision while the breaker is both open and closed.
2.11.2 Shunt reinforcing

Here the sensitive contacts are arranged to trip the
circuit breaker and simultaneously to energise the
auxiliary unit, which then reinforces the contact that is
energising the trip coil.
PR
Two contacts are required on the protection relay, since

it is not permissible to energise the trip coil and the
reinforcing contactor in parallel. If this were done, and
more than one protection relay were connected to trip
the same circuit breaker, all the auxiliary relays would be
energised in parallel for each relay operation and the
indication would be confused.
52a
TC
(a) Supervision while circuit breaker is closed (scheme H4)

PR
52a
TC
52b
(b) Supervision while circuit breaker is open or closed (scheme H5)
The duplicate main contacts are frequently provided as a

three-point arrangement to reduce the number of
contact fingers.
PR
52a
TC
Alarm
(c) Supervision with circuit breaker open or closed
with remote alarm (scheme H7)
2.11.3 Shunt reinforcement with sealing
Trip
This is a development of the shunt reinforcing circuit to

make it applicable to situations where there is a
possibility of contact bounce for any reason.
Trip
Circuit breaker
52a TC
52b
Using the shunt reinforcing system under these

circumstances would result in chattering on the auxiliary
unit, and the possible burning out of the contacts, not
only of the sensitive element but also of the auxiliary
unit. The chattering would end only when the circuit
breaker had finally tripped. The effect of contact bounce
(d) Implementation of H5 scheme in numerical relay

Figure 2.11: Trip circuit supervision circuits.
14
Chap2-4-15
21/06/02
10:45
Page 15
In either case, the addition of a normally open pushbutton contact in series with the lamp will make the
supervision indication available only when required.
Schemes using a lamp to indicate continuity are suitable
for locally controlled installations, but when control is
exercised from a distance it is necessary to use a relay
system. Figure 2.11(c) illustrates such a scheme, which is
applicable wherever a remote signal is required.
With the circuit healthy, either or both of relays A and B
are operated and energise relay C. Both A and B must
reset to allow C to drop-off. Relays A, B and C are time
delayed to prevent spurious alarms during tripping or
closing operations. The resistors are mounted separately
from the relays and their values are chosen such that if
any one component is inadvertently short-circuited,
tripping will not take place.
The alarm supply should be independent of the tripping

supply so that indication will be obtained in case of
failure of the tripping supply.
The above schemes are commonly known as the H4, H5
and H7 schemes, arising from the diagram references of
the Utility specification in which they originally
appeared. Figure 2.11(d) shows implementation of
scheme H5 using the facilities of a modern numerical
relay. Remote indication is achieved through use of
programmable logic and additional auxiliary outputs
available in the protection relay.
15
Chap3-16-29
1/07/02
8:22
Page 16
Fundamental Theory
Introduction
3.1
Vector algebra
3.2
Manipulation of complex quantities
3.3
Circuit quantities and conventions
3.4
Impedance notation
3.5
Basic circuit laws,

theorems and network reduction
3.6
References
3.7
Chap3-16-29
1/07/02
8:23
Page 17
Fundamental Theor y
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The Protection Engineer is concerned with limiting the
effects of disturbances in a power system. These
disturbances, if allowed to persist, may damage plant
and interrupt the supply of electric energy. They are
described as faults (short and open circuits) or power
swings, and result from natural hazards (for instance
lightning), plant failure or human error.
To facilitate rapid removal of a disturbance from a power
system, the system is divided into 'protection zones'.
Relays monitor the system quantities (current, voltage)
appearing in these zones; if a fault occurs inside a zone,
the relays operate to isolate the zone from the remainder
of the power system.
The operating characteristic of a relay depends on the
energizing quantities fed to it such as current or voltage,
or various combinations of these two quantities, and on
the manner in which the relay is designed to respond to
this information. For example, a directional relay
characteristic would be obtained by designing the relay
to compare the phase angle between voltage and current
at the relaying point. An impedance-measuring
characteristic, on the other hand, would be obtained by
designing the relay to divide voltage by current. Many
other more complex relay characteristics may be
obtained by supplying various combinations of current
and voltage to the relay. Relays may also be designed to
respond to other system quantities such as frequency,
power, etc.
In order to apply protection relays, it is usually necessary
to know the limiting values of current and voltage, and
their relative phase displacement at the relay location,
for various types of short circuit and their position in the
system. This normally requires some system analysis for
faults occurring at various points in the system.
The main components that make up a power system are
generating sources, transmission and distribution
networks, and loads. Many transmission and distribution
circuits radiate from key points in the system and these
circuits are controlled by circuit breakers. For the
purpose of analysis, the power system is treated as a
network of circuit elements contained in branches
radiating from nodes to form closed loops or meshes.
The system variables are current and voltage, and in
17
Chap3-16-29
1/07/02
8:25
Page 18
The representation of a vector quantity algebraically in

terms of its rectangular co-ordinates is called a 'complex
quantity'. Therefore, x + jy is a complex quantity and is
the rectangular form of the vector |Z| where:
steady state analysis, they are regarded as time varying

quantities at a single and constant frequency. The
network parameters are impedance and admittance;
these are assumed to be linear, bilateral (independent of
current direction) and constant for a constant frequency.
3 . 2 V E C TO R A L G E B R A
A vector represents a quantity in both magnitude and
direction. In Figure 3.1 the vector OP has a magnitude
|Z| at an angle with the reference axis OX.
sin =
Equation 3.3
e j e j
2j
e j e j
2
it follows that Z may also be written as:
Z = |Z|e j
It may be resolved into two components at right angles

to each other, in this case x and y. The magnitude or
scalar value of vector Z is known as the modulus |Z|, and
the angle is the argument, or amplitude, and is written
as arg. Z. The conventional method of expressing a vector
Z is to write simply |Z|.
Equation 3.4
Therefore, a vector quantity may also be represented

trigonometrically and exponentially.
3 . 3 M A N I P U L AT I O N
OF COMPLEX QUANTITIES
This form completely specifies a vector for graphical

representation or conversion into other forms.
Complex quantities may be represented in any of the

four co-ordinate systems given below:
For vectors to be useful, they must be expressed
algebraically. In Figure 3.1, the vector Z is the resultant

of vectorially adding its components x and y;
algebraically this vector may be written as:
Z = x + jy
Equation 3.2
cos =
Figure 3.1: Vector OP
Fundamental Theor y
and since cos and sin may be expressed in

exponential form by the identities:
|Z|
From Equations 3.1 and 3.2:
Z = |Z| (cos + jsin )
Y 3.1
Figure
(x
+ y2
y
= tan 1
x = Z cos
y = Z sin
Z=
Equation 3.1
a. Polar
b. Rectangular
x + jy
c. Trigonometric
|Z| (cos + jsin )
d. Exponential
|Z|e j
The modulus |Z| and the argument are together known

as 'polar co-ordinates', and x and y are described as
'cartesian co-ordinates'. Conversion between coordinate systems is easily achieved. As the operator j
obeys the ordinary laws of algebra, complex quantities in
rectangular form can be manipulated algebraically, as
can be seen by the following:

Equation 3.5
Z1 + Z2 = (x1+x2) + j(y1+y2)

Equation 3.6
Z1 - Z2 = (x1-x2) + j(y1-y2)
where the operator j indicates that the component y is

perpendicular to component x. In electrical
nomenclature, the axis OC is the 'real' or 'in-phase' axis,
and the vertical axis OY is called the 'imaginary' or
'quadrature' axis. The operator j rotates a vector anticlockwise through 90. If a vector is made to rotate anticlockwise through 180, then the operator j has
performed its function twice, and since the vector has
reversed its sense, then:
j x j or j2 = -1
(see Figure 3.2)
whence j = -1
18
1/07/02
8:25
Page 19
Z1Z2 = Z1 Z2 1 + 2
Z1 Z1
=
1 2
Z2 Z2
3.3.2 Complex Numbers

A complex number may be defined as a constant that
represents the real and imaginary components of a
physical quantity. The impedance parameter of an
electric circuit is a complex number having real and
imaginary components, which are described as resistance
and reactance respectively.
Equation 3.7
|Z2|
y2
|Z1|
y1
0
x1
x2
Figure 3.2: Addition of vectors
Confusion often arises between vectors and complex

numbers. A vector, as previously defined, may be a
complex number. In this context, it is simply a physical
quantity of constant magnitude acting in a constant
direction. A complex number, which, being a physical
quantity relating stimulus and response in a given
operation, is known as a 'complex operator'. In this
context, it is distinguished from a vector by the fact that
it has no direction of its own.
Because complex numbers assume a passive role in any
calculation, the form taken by the variables in the
problem determines the method of representing them.
3.3.1 Complex variables
3.3.3 Mathematical Operators
Some complex quantities are variable with, for example,

time; when manipulating such variables in differential
equations it is expedient to write the complex quantity
in exponential form.
Mathematical operators are complex numbers that are

used to move a vector through a given angle without
changing the magnitude or character of the vector. An
operator is not a physical quantity; it is dimensionless.
When dealing with such functions it is important to

appreciate that the quantity contains real and imaginary
components. If it is required to investigate only one
component of the complex variable, separation into
components must be carried out after the mathematical
operation has taken place.
The symbol j, which has been compounded with

quadrature components of complex quantities, is an
operator that rotates a quantity anti-clockwise through
90. Another useful operator is one which moves a
vector anti-clockwise through 120, commonly
represented by the symbol a.
Example: Determine the rate of change of the real

component of a vector |Z|wt with time.
Operators are distinguished by one further feature; they

are the roots of unity. Using De Moivre's theorem, the
nth root of unity is given by solving the expression:
|Z|wt = |Z| (coswt + jsinwt)
11/n = (cos2m + jsin2m)1/n
= |Z|e jwt
The real component of the vector is |Z|coswt.
Differentiating |Z|e jwt with respect to time:
d
Z e jwt = jw Z e jwt
dt
= jw|Z| (coswt + jsinwt)
Separating into real and imaginary components:
d
Z e jwt = Z ( w sin wt + jw cos wt )
dt
Thus, the rate of change of the real component of a
vector |Z|wt is:
where m is any integer. Hence:

2 m
2 m
+ j sin
n
n
where m has values 1, 2, 3, ... (n-1)
11/ n = cos
From the above expression j is found to be the 4th root

and a the 3rd root of unity, as they have four and three
distinct values respectively. Table 3.1 gives some useful
functions of the a operator.
-|Z| w sinwt
Fundamental Theor y
Chap3-16-29
19
Chap3-16-29
1/07/02
8:25
Page 20
For example, the instantaneous value, e, of a voltage

varying sinusoidally with time is:
2
j
3
3
1
a= + j
=e
2
2
4
j
1
3
a2 = j
=e 3
2
2
j0
1=1+ j0 = e
e=Emsin(wt+)
where:
Em is the maximum amplitude of the waveform;

=2f, the angular velocity,
is the argument defining the amplitude of the
voltage at a time t=0
1+ a + a2 = 0
1a = j 3a2
At t=0, the actual value of the voltage is Emsin . So if

Em is regarded as the modulus of a vector, whose
1a2 = j 3a
argument is , then Emsin is the imaginary component

of the vector |Em|. Figure 3.3 illustrates this quantity
as a vector and as a sinusoidal function of time.
a a2 = j 3
j=
Equation 3.8
a a2
3
Figure 3.3
Table 3.1: Properties of the a operator
|Em|
Fundamental Theor y
3.4 CIRCUIT QUANTITIES

AND CONVENTIONS
X'
Circuit analysis may be described as the study of the

response of a circuit to an imposed condition, for
example a short circuit. The circuit variables are current
and voltage. Conventionally, current flow results from
the application of a driving voltage, but there is
complete duality between the variables and either may
be regarded as the cause of the other.
Em
t
t=0
Y'
Figure 3.3: Representation

of a sinusoidal function
The current resulting from applying a voltage to a circuit

depends upon the circuit impedance. If the voltage is a
sinusoidal function at a given frequency and the
impedance is constant the current will also vary
harmonically at the same frequency, so it can be shown
on the same vector diagram as the voltage vector, and is
given by the equation
When a circuit exists, there is an interchange of energy;

a circuit may be described as being made up of 'sources'
and 'sinks' for energy. The parts of a circuit are described
as elements; a 'source' may be regarded as an 'active'
element and a 'sink' as a 'passive' element. Some circuit
elements are dissipative, that is, they are continuous
sinks for energy, for example resistance. Other circuit
elements may be alternately sources and sinks, for
example capacitance and inductance. The elements of a
circuit are connected together to form a network having
nodes (terminals or junctions) and branches (series
groups of elements) that form closed loops (meshes).
i=
Em
Z
sin (wt + )
Equation 3.9
where:
Z = R2 + X 2

X = L
= tan 1 X
R
In steady state a.c. circuit theory, the ability of a circuit

to accept a current flow resulting from a given driving
voltage is called the impedance of the circuit. Since
current and voltage are duals the impedance parameter
must also have a dual, called admittance.
Equation 3.10
3.4.1 Circuit Variables

From Equations 3.9 and 3.10 it can be seen that the
angular displacement between the current and voltage
vectors and the current magnitude |Im|=|Em|/|Z| is
dependent upon the impedance Z . In complex form the
impedance may be written Z=R+jX. The 'real

component', R, is the circuit resistance, and the
As current and voltage are sinusoidal functions of time,

varying at a single and constant frequency, they are
regarded as rotating vectors and can be drawn as plan
vectors (that is, vectors defined by two co-ordinates) on
a vector diagram.
20
1/07/02
8:26
Page 21
'imaginary component', X, is the circuit reactance. When

the circuit reactance is inductive (that is, wL>1/wC), the
current 'lags' the voltage by an angle , and when it is
capacitive (that is, 1/wC>wL) it 'leads' the voltage by an
angle .
When drawing vector diagrams, one vector is chosen as
the 'reference vector' and all other vectors are drawn
relative to the reference vector in terms of magnitude
and angle. The circuit impedance |Z| is a complex
operator and is distinguished from a vector only by the
fact that it has no direction of its own. A further
convention is that sinusoidally varying quantities are
described by their 'effective' or 'root mean square' (r.m.s.)
values; these are usually written using the relevant
symbol without a suffix.
Thus:
2
2
E = Em
Equation 3.11
The 'root mean square' value is that value which has the
same heating effect as a direct current quantity of that
value in the same circuit, and this definition applies to
non-sinusoidal as well as sinusoidal quantities.
I = Im
3.4.2 Sign Conventions

In describing the electrical state of a circuit, it is often
necessary to refer to the 'potential difference' existing
between two points in the circuit. Since wherever such
a potential difference exists, current will flow and energy
will either be transferred or absorbed, it is obviously
necessary to define a potential difference in more exact
terms. For this reason, the terms voltage rise and voltage
drop are used to define more accurately the nature of the
potential difference.
steady state terms Equation 3.12 may be written:
E = I Z
and this is known as the equated-voltage equation [3.1].

It is the equation most usually adopted in electrical
network calculations, since it equates the driving
voltages, which are known, to the passive voltages,
which are functions of the currents to be calculated.
In describing circuits and drawing vector diagrams, for
formal analysis or calculations, it is necessary to adopt a
notation which defines the positive direction of assumed
current flow, and establishes the direction in which
positive voltage drops and voltage rises act. Two
methods are available; one, the double suffix method, is
used for symbolic analysis, the other, the single suffix or
diagrammatic method, is used for numerical
calculations.
In the double suffix method the positive direction of
current flow is assumed to be from node a to node b and
the current is designated Iab . With the diagrammatic
method, an arrow indicates the direction of current flow.
The voltage rises are positive when acting in the
direction of current flow. It can be seen from Figure 3.4
that E1 and Ean are positive voltage rises and E2 and
Ebn are negative voltage rises. In the diagrammatic

method their direction of action is simply indicated by an
arrow, whereas in the double suffix method, Ean and Ebn

indicate that there is a potential rise in directions na and nb.
Figure 3.4 Methods or representing a circuit
Z3
I
Voltage rise is a rise in potential measured in the

direction of current flow between two points in a circuit.
Voltage drop is the converse. A circuit element with a
voltage rise across it acts as a source of energy. A circuit
element with a voltage drop across it acts as a sink of
energy. Voltage sources are usually active circuit
elements, while sinks are usually passive circuit
elements. The positive direction of energy flow is from
sources to sinks.
Z1
Z2
E1
E2
E1-E2=(Z1+Z2+Z3)I
(a) Diagrammatic
Zab
Iab
Kirchhoff's first law states that the sum of the driving

voltages must equal the sum of the passive voltages in a
closed loop. This is illustrated by the fundamental
equation of an electric circuit:
Zan
Zbn
Ean
Ebn
n
Ean-Ebn=(Zan+Zab+Zbn)Iab
(b) Double suffix
Ldi 1
iR +
+
idt = e
Equation 3.12
dt C
where the terms on the left hand side of the equation are
voltage drops across the circuit elements. Expressed in
Equation 3.13
Fundamental Theor y
Chap3-16-29
Figure 3.4 Methods of representing a circuit
21
Chap3-16-29
1/07/02
8:26
Page 22
Voltage drops are also positive when acting in the

direction of current flow. From Figure 3.4(a) it can be

seen that ( Z1+ Z2+ Z3) I is the total voltage drop in the
loop in the direction of current flow, and must equate to

the total voltage rise E1- E2. In Figure 3.4(b), the voltage
drop between nodes a and b designated Vab indicates

that point b is at a lower potential than a, and is positive
when current flows from a to b. Conversely Vba is a

negative voltage drop.
Symbolically:
Vab = Van - Vbn
Vba = Vbn - Van

where n is a common reference point.
component of current, and is known as 'reactive power'.

As P and Q are constants which specify the power
exchange in a given circuit, and are products of the
current and voltage vectors, then if S is the vector
product E I it follows that with E as the reference vector
and as the angle between E and I :
Equation 3.16
S = P + jQ
The quantity S is described as the 'apparent power', and

is the term used in establishing the rating of a circuit.
S has units of VA.
Equation 3.14
3.4.4 Single-Phase and Polyphase Systems

A system is single or polyphase depending upon whether
the sources feeding it are single or polyphase. A source
is single or polyphase according to whether there are one
or several driving voltages associated with it. For
example, a three-phase source is a source containing
three alternating driving voltages that are assumed to
reach a maximum in phase order, A, B, C. Each phase
driving voltage is associated with a phase branch of the
system network as shown in Figure 3.5(a).
Fundamental Theor y
3.4.3 Power
The product of the potential difference across and the

current through a branch of a circuit is a measure of the
rate at which energy is exchanged between that branch
and the remainder of the circuit. If the potential
difference is a positive voltage drop, the branch is
passive and absorbs energy. Conversely, if the potential
difference is a positive voltage rise, the branch is active
and supplies energy.
If a polyphase system has balanced voltages, that is,

equal in magnitude and reaching a maximum at equally
displaced time intervals, and the phase branch
impedances are identical, it is called a 'balanced' system.
It will become 'unbalanced' if any of the above
conditions are not satisfied. Calculations using a
balanced polyphase system are simplified, as it is only
necessary to solve for a single phase, the solution for the
remaining phases being obtained by symmetry.
The rate at which energy is exchanged is known as

power, and by convention, the power is positive when
energy is being absorbed and negative when being
supplied. With a.c. circuits the power alternates, so, to
obtain a rate at which energy is supplied or absorbed, it
is necessary to take the average power over one whole
cycle.
If e=Emsin(wt+) and i=Imsin(wt+-), then the power
equation is:
The power system is normally operated as a three-phase,

balanced, system. For this reason the phase voltages are
equal in magnitude and can be represented by three
vectors spaced 120 or 2/3 radians apart, as shown in
Figure 3.5(b).
p=ei=P[1-cos2(wt+)]+Qsin2(wt+)
Equation 3.15
where:
P=|E||I|cos
and
A
Q=|E||I|sin
A'
Ean
Ecn
From Equation 3.15 it can be seen that the quantity P

varies from 0 to 2P and quantity Q varies from -Q to +Q
in one cycle, and that the waveform is of twice the
periodic frequency of the current voltage waveform.
N'
N Ebn
B
C'
Phase branches
B'
(a) Three-phase system

Ea
The average value of the power exchanged in one cycle

is a constant, equal to quantity P, and as this quantity is
the product of the voltage and the component of current
which is 'in phase' with the voltage it is known as the
'real' or 'active' power.
Direction
120 of rotation
120
Ec=aEa
120
Eb=a2Ea
(b) Balanced system of vectors
The average value of quantity Q is zero when taken over

a cycle, suggesting that energy is stored in one half-cycle
and returned to the circuit in the remaining half-cycle.
Q is the product of voltage and the quadrature
Figure 3.5: Three-phase systems
22
1/07/02
8:26
Page 23
Since the voltages are symmetrical, they may be

expressed in terms of one, that is:

Ea = Ea
Eb = a2 Ea
Ec = a Ea
system impedances may be converted to those base

quantities by using the equations given below:
MVAb 2
MVAb1
2
kVb1
Zb 2 = Zb1
kVb 2
Zb 2 = Zb1
Equation 3.17
where a is the vector operator e j2/3. Further, if the phase

branch impedances are identical in a balanced system, it
follows that the resulting currents are also balanced.
where suffix b1 denotes the value to the original base

and b2 denotes the value to new base
The choice of impedance notation depends upon the
complexity of the system, plant impedance notation and
the nature of the system calculations envisaged.
3.5 IMPEDANCE NOTATION

It can be seen by inspection of any power system
diagram that:
a. several voltage levels exist in a system
b. it is common practice to refer to plant MVA in
terms of per unit or percentage values
If the system is relatively simple and contains mainly

transmission line data, given in ohms, then the ohmic
method can be adopted with advantage. However, the
per unit method of impedance notation is the most
common for general system studies since:
1. impedances are the same referred to either side of
a transformer if the ratio of base voltages on the
two sides of a transformer is equal to the
transformer turns ratio
c. transmission line and cable constants are given in

ohms/km
Before any system calculations can take place, the
system parameters must be referred to 'base quantities'
and represented as a unified system of impedances in
either ohmic, percentage, or per unit values.
2. confusion caused by the introduction of powers of

100 in percentage calculations is avoided
3. by a suitable choice of bases, the magnitudes of
the data and results are kept within a predictable
range, and hence errors in data and computations
are easier to spot
The base quantities are power and voltage. Normally,

they are given in terms of the three-phase power in MVA
and the line voltage in kV. The base impedance resulting
from the above base quantities is:
2
kV )
(
=
Equation 3.18
ohms
MVA
and, provided the system is balanced, the base
impedance may be calculated using either single-phase
or three-phase quantities.
Zb
Equation 3.20
Most power system studies are carried out using

software in per unit quantities. Irrespective of the
method of calculation, the choice of base voltage, and
unifying system impedances to this base, should be
approached with caution, as shown in the following
example.
The per unit or percentage value of any impedance in the

system is the ratio of actual to base impedance values.
11.8kV
Hence:
MVAb
(kVb )2
Z (% ) = Z ( p.u .) 100
11.8/141kV
132/11kV
132kV
Overhead line
Z ( p.u .) = Z (ohms )
11kV
Distribution
Wrong selection of base voltage

Equation 3.19
11.8kV
132kV
11kV
Right selection
where MVAb = base MVA
11.8kV
141kV
141 x 11=11.7kV
132
kVb = base kV
Simple transposition of the above formulae will refer the
ohmic value of impedance to the per unit or percentage
values and base quantities.
Figure 3.6: Selection of base voltages
Having chosen base quantities of suitable magnitude all
Fundamental Theor y
Chap3-16-29
23
Chap3-16-29
21/06/02
10:28
Page 24
From Figure 3.6 it can be seen that the base voltages in

the three circuits are related by the turns ratios of the
intervening transformers. Care is required as the
nominal transformation ratios of the transformers
quoted may be different from the turns ratios- e.g. a
110/33kV (nominal) transformer may have a turns ratio
of 110/34.5kV. Therefore, the rule for hand calculations
is: 'to refer an impedance in ohms from one circuit to
another multiply the given impedance by the square of
the turns ratio (open circuit voltage ratio) of the
intervening transformer'.
3 . 6 B A S I C C I R C U I T L AW S ,
THEOREMS AND NETWORK REDUCTION
Most practical power system problems are solved by
using steady state analytical methods. The assumptions
made are that the circuit parameters are linear and
bilateral and constant for constant frequency circuit
variables. In some problems, described as initial value
problems, it is necessary to study the behaviour of a
circuit in the transient state. Such problems can be
solved using operational methods. Again, in other
problems, which fortunately are few in number, the
assumption of linear, bilateral circuit parameters is no
longer valid. These problems are solved using advanced
mathematical techniques that are beyond the scope of
this book.
Fundamental Theor y
Where power system simulation software is used, the

software normally has calculation routines built in to
adjust transformer parameters to take account of
differences between the nominal primary and secondary
voltages and turns ratios. In this case, the choice of base
voltages may be more conveniently made as the nominal
voltages of each section of the power system. This
approach avoids confusion when per unit or percent
values are used in calculations in translating the final
results into volts, amps, etc.
3.6.1 Circuit Laws

In linear, bilateral circuits, three basic network laws
apply, regardless of the state of the circuit, at any
particular instant of time. These laws are the branch,
junction and mesh laws, due to Ohm and Kirchhoff, and
are stated below, using steady state a.c. nomenclature.
For example, in Figure 3.7, generators G1 and G2 have a

sub-transient reactance of 26% on 66.6MVA rating at
11kV, and transformers T1 and T2 a voltage ratio of
11/145kV and an impedance of 12.5% on 75MVA.
Choosing 100MVA as base MVA and 132kV as base
voltage, find the percentage impedances to new base
quantities.
3.6.1.1 Branch law
The current I in a given branch of impedance Z is
proportional to the potential difference V appearing

across the branch, that is, V = I Z .
3.6.1.2 Junction law
a. Generator reactances to new bases are:
The algebraic sum of all currents entering any junction

(or node) in a network is zero, that is:
(11) =0.27%
100
26
66.6 (132 )2
2
I =0
b. Transformer reactances to new bases are:
3.6.1.3 Mesh law
100 (145 )
12.5
= 20.1%
75 (132 )2
2
The algebraic sum of all the driving voltages in any

closed path (or mesh) in a network is equal to the
algebraic sum of all the passive voltages (products of the
impedances and the currents) in the components
branches, that is:
NOTE: The base voltages of the generator and circuits

are 11kV and 145kV respectively, that is, the turns
ratio of the transformer. The corresponding per unit
values can be found by dividing by 100, and the ohmic
value can be found by using Equation 3.19.
E = Z I
Alternatively, the total change in potential around a
closed loop is zero.
Figure 3.7
T1
G1
3.6.2 Circuit Theorems
132kV
overhead
lines
G2
From the above network laws, many theorems have been

derived for the rationalisation of networks, either to
reach a quick, simple, solution to a problem or to
represent a complicated circuit by an equivalent. These
theorems are divided into two classes: those concerned
with the general properties of networks and those
T2
Figure 3.7: Section of a power system
24
21/06/02
10:28
Page 25
concerned with network reduction.
3.6.3 Network Reduction
Of the many theorems that exist, the three most

important are given. These are: the Superposition
Theorem, Thvenin's Theorem and Kennelly's Star/Delta
Theorem.
The aim of network reduction is to reduce a system to a

simple equivalent while retaining the identity of that
part of the system to be studied.
3.6.2.1 Superposition Theorem

(general network theorem)
The resultant current that flows in any branch of a
network due to the simultaneous action of several
driving voltages is equal to the algebraic sum of the
component currents due to each driving voltage acting
alone with the remainder short-circuited.
3.6.2.2 Thvenin's Theorem
(active network reduction theorem)
Any active network that may be viewed from two
terminals can be replaced by a single driving voltage
acting in series with a single impedance. The driving
voltage is the open-circuit voltage between the two
terminals and the impedance is the impedance of the
network viewed from the terminals with all sources
short-circuited.
For example, consider the system shown in Figure 3.9.

The network has two sources E and E , a line AOB
shunted by an impedance, which may be regarded as the
reduction of a further network connected between A and
B, and a load connected between O and N. The object of
the reduction is to study the effect of opening a breaker
at A or B during normal system operations, or of a fault
at A or B. Thus the identity of nodes A and B must be
retained together with the sources, but the branch ON
can be eliminated, simplifying the study. Proceeding, A,
B, N, forms a star branch and can therefore be converted
to an equivalent delta.
Figure 3.9
2.55
A
0
Zbo
Zco
Z12
1
Z13
c
(a) Star network
0.45
E'
E''
18.85
Any three-terminal network can be replaced by a delta or

star impedance equivalent without disturbing the
external network. The formulae relating the replacement
of a delta network by the equivalent star network is as
follows (Figure 3.8):

Zco = Z13 Z23 / (Z12 + Z13 + Z23)

and so on.
Zao
B
0.75
3.6.2.3 Kennelly's Star/Delta Theorem

(passive network reduction theorem)
0.4
1.6
N
Figure 3.9: Typical power system network
Z AN = Z AO + Z NO +
Z AO Z NO
Z BO
= 0.75 +18.85 +
0.75 18.85
0.45
= 51 ohms
Z23
Z BN = Z BO + Z NO +
(b) Delta network
Z BO Z NO
Z AO
Figure
3.8:Star-Delta
Star/Delta
network
reduction
Figure 3.8:
network
transformation
= 0.45 +18.85 +
The impedance of a delta network corresponding to and
replacing any star network is:

Zao Zbo
Z12 = Zao + Zbo +
Zco
and so on.
0.45 18.85
0.75
=30.6 ohms
Z AN = Z AO + Z BO +
Z AO Z BO
Z NO
= 1.2 ohms (since ZNO>>> ZAOZBO)
Figure 3.10
Fundamental Theor y
Chap3-16-29
25
Chap3-16-29
21/06/02
10:28
Page 26
Most reduction problems follow the same pattern as the

example above. The rules to apply in practical network
reduction are:
2.5
1.6
0.4
1.2
A
51
E'
a. decide on the nature of the disturbance or

disturbances to be studied
B
30.6
E''
b. decide on the information required, for example

the branch currents in the network for a fault at a
particular location
The network is now reduced as shown in Figure 3.10.
c. reduce all passive sections of the network not

directly involved with the section under
examination
By applying Thvenin's theorem to the active loops, these

can be replaced by a single driving voltage in series with
an impedance as shown in Figure 3.11.
d. reduce all active meshes to a simple equivalent,

that is, to a simple source in series with a single
impedance
Figure 3.10: Reduction using

star/delta transform
1.6 x 51
52.6
Figure 3.11
1.6
A
A
51
E'
52.6
51
E'
With the widespread availability of computer-based

power system simulation software, it is now usual to use
such software on a routine basis for network calculations
without significant network reduction taking place.
However, the network reduction techniques given above
are still valid, as there will be occasions where such
software is not immediately available and a hand
calculation must be carried out.
In certain circuits, for example parallel lines on the same

towers, there is mutual coupling between branches.
Correct circuit reduction must take account of this
coupling.
Fundamental Theor y
(a) Reduction of left active mesh
0.4 x 30.6
31
0.4
B
30.6
30.6 E''
31
E''
Figure 3.13
Ia
I
Zaa
Zab
Ib
(b) Reduction of right active mesh
Zbb
Figure 3.11: Reduction of active meshes:

Thvenin's Theorem
(a) Actual circuit
The network shown in Figure 3.9 is now reduced to that

shown in Figure 3.12 with the nodes A and B retaining
their identity. Further, the load impedance has been
completely eliminated.
Q
Z Z -Z2
Z= aa bb ab
Zaa+Zbb-2Zab
(b) Equivalent when ZaaZbb
The network shown in Figure 3.12 may now be used to

study system disturbances, for example power swings
with and without faults.
Q
Z= 1 (Zaa+Zbb)
2
(c) Equivalent when Zaa=Zbb
2.5
Figure 3.12
1.55
0.39
Figure 3.13: Reduction of two branches

with mutual coupling
A
1.2
0.97E'
Three cases are of interest. These are:
0.99E''
a. two branches connected together at their nodes

b. two branches connected together at one node only
c. two branches that remain unconnected
Figure 3.12: Reduction of typical

power system network
26
21/06/02
10:28
Page 27
Considering each case in turn:
The assumption is made that an equivalent star

network can replace the network shown. From
inspection with one terminal isolated in turn and a
voltage V impressed across the remaining terminals
it can be seen that:
a. consider the circuit shown in Figure 3.13(a). The

application of a voltage V between the terminals P
and Q gives:
V = IaZaa + IbZab
Za+Zc=Zaa
V = IaZab + IbZbb
Zb+Zc=Zbb
where Ia and Ib are the currents in branches a and

b, respectively and I = Ia + Ib , the total current
entering at terminal P and leaving at terminal Q.
Za+Zb=Zaa+Zbb-2Zab
Solving these equations gives:
Solving for Ia and Ib :
Za = Zaa Zab
Zb = Zbb Zab
Zc = Zab
(Zbb Zab )V
Ia =
2
Zaa Zbb Zab
from which
-see Figure 3.14(b).
(Zaa Zab )V
Ib =
2
Zaa Zbb Zab
c. consider the four-terminal network given in Figure

3.15(a), in which the branches 11' and 22' are
electrically separate except for a mutual link. The
equations defining the network are:
and
I = Ia +Ib =
V (Zaa + Zbb 2 Zab )

2
Zaa Zbb Zab
V1=Z11I1+Z12I2
so that the equivalent impedance of the original

circuit is:
2
Zaa Zbb Zab
V
Z= =
I Zaa + Zbb 2 Zab
V2=Z21I1+Z22I2
I1=Y11V1+Y12V2
I2=Y21V1+Y22V2
Equation 3.21
where Z12=Z21 and Y12=Y21 , if the network is

assumed to be reciprocal. Further, by solving the
above equations it can be shown that:
(Figure 3.13(b)), and, if the branch impedances are

equal, the usual case, then:
Z=
1
(Zaa + Zab )
2
Equation 3.23
Y11 = Z22
Y22 = Z11
Y12 = Z12
= Z11Z22 Z122
Equation 3.22
(Figure 3.13(c)).
b. consider the circuit in Figure 3.14(a).
Zab
Equation 3.24
There are three independent coefficients, namely

Z12, Z11, Z22, so the original circuit may be
replaced by an equivalent mesh containing four
external terminals, each terminal being connected
to the other three by branch impedances as shown
in Figure 3.15(b).
Zaa
A
C
B
Zbb
(a) Actual circuit
Za=Zaa-Zab
1
1'
Zc=Zab
Z22
(a) Actual circuit
Zb=Zbb-Zab
(b) Equivalent circuit
Z11
Z12
Z12 Z12
2'
1'
Z21
Z22
Z12
2'

Figure 3.15 : Equivalent circuits for
four terminal network with mutual coupling
Figure 3.14: Reduction of mutually-coupled branches

with a common terminal
Z11
27
Fundamental Theor y
Chap3-16-29
Chap3-16-29
21/06/02
10:28
Page 28
In order to evaluate the branches of the equivalent

mesh let all points of entry of the actual circuit be
commoned except node 1 of circuit 1, as shown in
Figure 3.15(c). Then all impressed voltages except
V1 will be zero and:
defining the equivalent mesh in Figure 3.15(b), and

inserting radial branches having impedances equal
to Z11 and Z22 in terminals 1 and 2, results in
Figure 3.15(d).
I1 = Y11V1
3.7 REFERENCES
I2 = Y12V1
3.1 Power System Analysis. J. R. Mortlock and

M. W. Humphrey Davies. Chapman & Hall.
If the same conditions are applied to the equivalent

mesh, then:
3.2 Equivalent Circuits I. Frank M. Starr, Proc. A.I.E.E.

Vol. 51. 1932, pp. 287-298.
I1 = V1Z11
I2 = -V1/Z12 = -V1/Z12
These relations follow from the fact that the branch
connecting nodes 1 and 1' carries current I1 and
the branches connecting nodes 1 and 2' and 1 and
2 carry current I2. This must be true since branches
between pairs of commoned nodes can carry no
current.
By considering each node in turn with the
remainder commoned, the following relationships
are found:
Z11 = 1/Y11
Fundamental Theor y
Z22 = 1/Y22
Z12 = -1/Y12
Z12 = Z1 2 = -Z21 = -Z12
Hence:
2
Z11 = Z11
Z
-Z
22
12
_______________
Z22
Z22 = Z11
Z22-Z212
_______________
Z11
Z12 = Z11
Z22-Z212
_______________
Equation 3.25
Z12
A similar but equally rigorous equivalent circuit is
shown in Figure 3.15(d). This circuit [3.2] follows
from the fact that the self-impedance of any circuit
is independent of all other circuits. Therefore, it
need not appear in any of the mutual branches if it
is lumped as a radial branch at the terminals. So
putting Z11 and Z22 equal to zero in Equation 3.25,
Z11
1'
Z12
Z11 Z12 Z12

C
-Z12
-Z12
Z12
2
Z12
(c) Equivalent with all

nodes commoned
except 1
2'
(d) Equivalent circuit
Figure 3.15: Equivalent circuits for

four terminal network with mutual coupling
28
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 30
Fault Calculations
Introduction
4.1
Three phase fault calculations
4.2
Symmetrical component analysis

of a three-phase network
4.3
Equations and network connections

for various types of faults
4.4
Current and voltage distribution

in a system due to a fault
4.5
Effect of system earthing

on zero sequence quantities
4.6
References
4.7
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 31
Fault Calculations
4.1 INTRODUCTION
A power system is normally treated as a balanced
symmetrical three-phase network. When a fault occurs,
the symmetry is normally upset, resulting in unbalanced
currents and voltages appearing in the network. The only
exception is the three-phase fault, which, because it
involves all three phases equally at the same location, is
described as a symmetrical fault. By using symmetrical
component analysis and replacing the normal system
sources by a source at the fault location, it is possible to
analyse these fault conditions.
For the correct application of protection equipment, it is
essential to know the fault current distribution
throughout the system and the voltages in different
parts of the system due to the fault. Further, boundary
values of current at any relaying point must be known if
the fault is to be cleared with discrimination. The
information normally required for each kind of fault at
each relaying point is:
i. maximum fault current
ii. minimum fault current
iii. maximum through fault current
To obtain the above information, the limits of stable
generation and possible operating conditions, including
the method of system earthing, must be known. Faults
are always assumed to be through zero fault impedance.
4 . 2 T H R E E - P H A S E F A U LT C A L C U L AT I O N S
Three-phase faults are unique in that they are balanced,
that is, symmetrical in the three phases, and can be
calculated from the single-phase impedance diagram
and the operating conditions existing prior to the fault.
A fault condition is a sudden abnormal alteration to the
normal circuit arrangement. The circuit quantities,
current and voltage, will alter, and the circuit will pass
through a transient state to a steady state. In the
transient state, the initial magnitude of the fault current
will depend upon the point on the voltage wave at which
the fault occurs. The decay of the transient condition,
until it merges into steady state, is a function of the
parameters of the circuit elements. The transient current
may be regarded as a d.c. exponential current
31
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 32
superimposed on the symmetrical steady state fault

current. In a.c. machines, owing to armature reaction,
the machine reactances pass through 'sub transient' and
'transient' stages before reaching their steady state
synchronous values. For this reason, the resultant fault
current during the transient period, from fault inception
to steady state also depends on the location of the fault
in the network relative to that of the rotating plant.
be added to the currents circulating in the system due to

the fault, to give the total current in any branch of the
system at the time of fault inception. However, in most
problems, the load current is small in comparison to the
fault current and is usually ignored.
In a practical power system, the system regulation is
such that the load voltage at any point in the system is
within 10% of the declared open-circuit voltage at that
point. For this reason, it is usual to regard the pre-fault
voltage at the fault as being the open-circuit voltage,
and this assumption is also made in a number of the
standards dealing with fault level calculations.
In a system containing many voltage sources, or having

a complex network arrangement, it is tedious to use the
normal system voltage sources to evaluate the fault
current in the faulty branch or to calculate the fault
current distribution in the system. A more practical
method [4.1] is to replace the system voltages by a single
driving voltage at the fault point. This driving voltage is
the voltage existing at the fault point before the fault
occurs.
For an example of practical three-phase fault

calculations, consider a fault at A in Figure 3.9. With the
network reduced as shown in Figure 4.2, the load voltage
at A before the fault occurs is:
Consider the circuit given in Figure 4.1 where the driving
voltages are E and E , the impedances on either side of
fault point F are Z1 and Z1 , and the current through
point F before the fault occurs is I .
Figure 4.2:
2.5
1.55
0.39
A
B
1.2
Figure 4.1:
0.99E ''
0.97E '
Z '1
Z ''1
Fa u l t C a l c u l a t i o n s
N
E'
E''
Figure 4.2: Reduction of typical

power system network
V = 0.97 E - 1.55 I
N
Figure 4.1: Network with fault at F
The voltage V at F before fault inception is:

V = E - I Z = E + I Z
After the fault the voltage V is zero. Hence, the change
in voltage is - V . Because of the fault, the change in the

current flowing into the network from F is:
1.2 2.5
V = 0.99 E '' +
+ 0.39 I
2.5 + 1.2
For practical working conditions, E 1.55 I and
E 1.207 I . Hence E E V.
Replacing the driving voltages E and E by the load
voltage V between A and N modifies the circuit as shown

in Figure 4.3(a).
The node A is the junction of three branches. In practice,
the node would be a busbar, and the branches are
feeders radiating from the bus via circuit breakers, as
shown in Figure 4.3(b). There are two possible locations
for a fault at A; the busbar side of the breakers or the
line side of the breakers. In this example, it is assumed
that the fault is at X, and it is required to calculate the
current flowing from the bus to X.
Z1' + Z1''
V
= V
Z1
Z1' Z1''
and, since no current was flowing into the network from
F prior to the fault, the fault current flowing from the
network into the fault is:
I =
If
Z1' + Z1'' )
(
= I = V
The network viewed from AN has a driving point

impedance |Z1| = 0.68 ohms.
Z1' Z1''
By applying the principle of superposition, the load
currents circulating in the system prior to the fault may
The current in the fault is
32
V
Z1 .
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 33
Let this current be 1.0 per unit. It is now necessary to

find the fault current distribution in the various branches
of the network and in particular the current flowing from
A to X on the assumption that a relay at X is to detect
the fault condition. The equivalent impedances viewed
from either side of the fault are shown in Figure 4.4(a).
Therefore, current in 2.5 ohm branch

1.2 0.563
= 0.183 p.u.
3.7
and the current in 1.2 ohm branch
=
2.5 0.563
= 0.38 p.u.
3.7
Total current entering X from the left, that is, from A to
X, is 0.437 + 0.183 = 0.62 p.u. and from B to X is
0.38p.u. The equivalent network as viewed from the
relay is as shown in Figure 4.4(b). The impedances on
either side are:
=
2.5
Figure 4.3
0.39
1.55
Figure 4.4
1.2
V
N
(a) Three - phase fault diagram for a fault at node A
0.68/0.62 = 1.1 ohms

and
Busbar
Circuit breaker
0.68/0.38 = 1.79 ohms

The circuit of Figure 4.4 (b) has been included because
the Protection Engineer is interested in these equivalent
parameters when applying certain types of protection
relay.
A
X
(b) Typical physical arrangement of node A with a fault shown at X
1.55
1.21
N
(a) Impedance viewed from node A
1.1
1.79
N
(b) Equivalent impedances viewed from node X
Figure 4.4: Impedances viewed from fault
The Protection Engineer is interested in a wider variety of

faults than just a three-phase fault. The most common
fault is a single-phase to earth fault, which, in LV
systems, can produce a higher fault current than a threephase fault. Similarly, because protection is expected to
operate correctly for all types of fault, it may be
necessary to consider the fault currents due to many
different types of fault. Since the three-phase fault is
unique in being a balanced fault, a method of analysis
that is applicable to unbalanced faults is required. It can
be shown [4.2] that, by applying the 'Principle of
Superposition', any general three-phase system of
vectors may be replaced by three sets of balanced
(symmetrical) vectors; two sets are three-phase but
having opposite phase rotation and one set is co-phasal.
These vector sets are described as the positive, negative
and zero sequence sets respectively.
The equations between phase and sequence voltages are
given below:
E b = a 2 E1 + aE 2 + E 0
E c = aE1 + a 2 E 2 + E 0
E a = E1 + E 2 + E 0
The currents from Figure 4.4(a) are as follows:

From the right: 1.55 = 0.563 p.u.
2.76
From the left: 1.21 = 0.437 p.u.
2.76
There is a parallel branch to the right of A
33
Equation 4.1
4 . 3 S Y M M E T R I C A L C O M P O N E N T A N A LY S I S
OF A THREE-PHASE NETWORK
Figure 4.3: Network with fault at node A
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 34
(
(
fault branch changes from 0 to I and the positive

sequence voltage across the branch changes from V to V1 ;
replacing the fault branch by a source equal to the change
in voltage and short-circuiting all normal driving voltages
in the system results in a current I flowing into the

system, and:
)
)
E1 =
E a + aE b + a 2 E c
3
1
2
E2 =
E a + a E b + aE c
3
1
E0 =
Ea + Eb + Ec
Equation 4.2
I =
where all quantities are referred to the reference phase

A. A similar set of equations can be written for phase
and sequence currents. Figure 4.5 illustrates the
resolution of a system of unbalanced vectors.
Figure 4.5
Eo
E2
Ea
Ec
aE1
E1
a2E1
Eb
aE2
Eo
Figure 4.5: Resolution of a system

of unbalanced vectors
Z1
Equation 4.3
where Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the

system viewed from the fault. As before the fault no
current was flowing from the fault into the system, it
follows that I1 , the fault current flowing from the
system into the fault must equal - I . Therefore:

Equation 4.4
V1 = V - I1 Z1
Eo
a2E2
(V V )
is the relationship between positive sequence currents

and voltages in the fault branch during a fault.
In Figure 4.6, which represents a simple system, the

voltage drops I1 Z1 and I1 Z1 are equal to ( V - V1 )
where the currents I1 and I1 enter the fault from the
left and right respectively and impedances Z1 and Z1

are the total system impedances viewed from either side
of the fault branch. The voltage V is equal to the opencircuit voltage in the system, and it has been shown that

V E E (see Section 3.7). So the positive sequence
voltages in the system due to the fault are greatest at the
source, as shown in the gradient diagram, Figure 4.6(b).
When a fault occurs in a power system, the phase

impedances are no longer identical (except in the case of
three-phase faults) and the resulting currents and
voltages are unbalanced, the point of greatest unbalance
being at the fault point. It has been shown in Chapter 3
that the fault may be studied by short-circuiting all
normal driving voltages in the system and replacing the
fault connection by a source whose driving voltage is
equal to the pre-fault voltage at the fault point. Hence,
the system impedances remain symmetrical, viewed from
the fault, and the fault point may now be regarded as the
point of injection of unbalanced voltages and currents
into the system.
Figure 4.6
Z '1
ZS1
Z ''1
F
I '1
I ''1
I1
Z '1
V1
E'
E'
N
(a) System diagram
I '1
N
X
I '1 Z '1
This is a most important approach in defining the fault

conditions since it allows the system to be represented
by sequence networks [4.3] using the method of
symmetrical components.
V '1+I '1Z '1
F
V1
N'
(b) Gradient diagram
Figure 4.6: Fault at F:
Positive sequence diagrams
4.3.1 Positive Sequence Network

During normal balanced system conditions, only positive
sequence currents and voltages can exist in the system,
and therefore the normal system impedance network is a
positive sequence network.
4.3.2 Negative Sequence Network
When a fault occurs in a power system, the current in the
If no negative sequence quantities are present in the
If only positive sequence quantities appear in a power

system under normal conditions, then negative sequence
quantities can only exist during an unbalanced fault.
34
21/06/02
9:57
Page 35
fault branch prior to the fault, then, when a fault occurs,
the change in voltage is V2 , and the resulting current I2

flowing from the network into the fault is:
I2 =
V2
Z2
4.4 EQUATIONS AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS

FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF FAULTS
The most important types of faults are as follows:
a. single-phase to earth
Equation 4.5
b. phase to phase
The impedances in the negative sequence network are

generally the same as those in the positive sequence
network. In machines Z1 Z2 , but the difference is

generally ignored, particularly in large networks.
c. phase-phase-earth
d. three-phase (with or without earth)
The above faults are described as single shunt faults
because they occur at one location and involve a
connection between one phase and another or to earth.
The negative sequence diagrams, shown in Figure 4.7, are

similar to the positive sequence diagrams, with two
important differences; no driving voltages exist before
the fault and the negative sequence voltage V2 is

greatest at the fault point.
Figure 4.7
In addition, the Protection Engineer often studies two

other types of fault:
e. single-phase open circuit
f. cross-country fault
By determining the currents and voltages at the fault

point, it is possible to define the fault and connect the
sequence networks to represent the fault condition.
From the initial equations and the network diagram, the
nature of the fault currents and voltages in different
branches of the system can be determined.
Z '1 I'2 F I''2 Z ''1
ZS1
I2
Z '1
V2
For shunt faults of zero impedance, and neglecting load

current, the equations defining each fault (using phaseneutral values) can be written down as follows:
N
(a) Negative sequence network
F
X
a. Single-phase-earth (A-E)
V2
Ib = 0
Ic = 0
V a = 0
V2 + I '2Z '1
N
(b) Gradient diagram
Figure 4.7: Fault at F:
Negative sequence diagram
b. Phase-phase (B-C)
Ib = Ic
V b = V c
c. Phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
Ia = 0
4.3.3 Zero Sequence Network

The zero sequence current and voltage relationships
during a fault condition are the same as those in the
negative sequence network. Hence:
V0 = - I0 Z0
Equation 4.6
Ia = 0
Vb = 0
V c = 0
d. Three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)
Also, the zero sequence diagram is that of Figure 4.7,
substituting I0 for I2 , and so on.

The currents and voltages in the zero sequence network
are co-phasal, that is, all the same phase. For zero
sequence currents to flow in a system there must be a
return connection through either a neutral conductor or
the general mass of earth. Note must be taken of this
fact when determining zero sequence equivalent circuits.
Further, in general Z1 Z0 and the value of Z0 varies

according to the type of plant, the winding arrangement
and the method of earthing.
Equation 4.7
Equation 4.8
Equation 4.9
Ia + Ib + Ic = 0
Va = Vb
Vb = Vc
Equation 4.10
It should be noted from the above that for any type of
fault there are three equations that define the fault
conditions.
35
Chap4-30-45
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 36

V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2
and substituting for I2 from Equation 4.15:

V = I1 ( Z1 + Z2 )
Equation 4.17
When there is a fault impedance, this must be taken into

account when writing down the equations. For example,
with a single-phase-earth fault through fault impedance
Zf , Equations 4.7 are re-written:
Ic = 0
V a = I a Z f
The constraints imposed by Equations 4.15 and 4.17

indicate that there is no zero sequence network
connection in the equivalent circuit and that the positive
and negative sequence networks are connected in
parallel. Figure 4.9 shows the defining and equivalent
circuits satisfying the above equations.
Ib = 0
Equation 4.11
Figure 4.8
A
B
C
Va
F
Ia
Ib
F2
F1
F0
Vb
Vc
Z2
N2
Z1
Ic
N1
Ia
F1
F2
F0
Vb
Z1
Vc
C
Ib
N1
Ic
Ib =0
Ic =0
Va=0
(a) Definition of fault
Va
F
Figure
4.9
A
Z0
N0
Z2
N2
Z0
N0
Ia =0
Ib =-Ic
Vb=-Vc
Figure 4.8: Single-phase-earth fault at F
Figure 4.9: Phase-Phase fault at F
4.4.1 Single-phase-earth Fault (A-E)
4.4.3 Phase-phase-earth Fault (B-C-E)
Consider a fault defined by Equations 4.7 and by Figure

4.8(a).
Converting Equations 4.7 into sequence
quantities by using Equations 4.1 and 4.2, then:
Again, from Equation 4.9 and Equations 4.1 and 4.2:

Equation 4.18
I1 = -( I2 + Io )
1
I1 = I 2 = I o = I a
Equation 4.12
3
Equation 4.13
V1 = - ( V2 + V0 )

Substituting for V1 , V2 and V0 in Equation 4.13 from

Equations 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6:

V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2 + I0 Z0

but, from Equation 4.12, I1 = I2 = I0 , therefore:

V = I1 ( Z1 + Z2 + Z3 )
Equation 4.14

Equation 4.19
V1 = V2 = V0
Substituting for V2 and V0 using network Equations 4.5

and 4.6:

I2 Z2 = I0 Z0
The constraints imposed by Equations 4.12 and 4.14

indicate that the equivalent circuit for the fault is
obtained by connecting the sequence networks in series,
as shown in Figure 4.8(b).
Z 0 I1
Equation 4.21
Z0 + Z 2
Now equating V1 and V2 and using Equation 4.4 gives:

V - I1 Z1 = - I2 Z2
4.4.2 Phase-phase Fault (B-C)
or
and
thus, using Equation 4.18:

I0 =
Z 2 I1
Z0 + Z 2
Equation 4.20
I2 =

V = I1 Z1 - I2 Z2
Substituting for I2 from Equation 4.21:
From Equation 4.8 and using Equations 4.1 and 4.2:
Equation 4.15
I1 = - I2
I0 = 0
V1 = V 2
Equation 4.16
Z0 Z 2
V = Z1 +
I1
Z 0 + Z 2
or
From network Equations 4.4 and 4.5, Equation 4.16 can

be re-written:

V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2 + I0 Z0
I1 = V
36
(Z
+ Z2
Z1 Z 0 + Z1 Z 2 + Z 0 Z 2
Equation 4.22
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
9:57
Page 37
From the above equations it follows that connecting the

three sequence networks in parallel as shown in Figure
4.10(b) may represent a phase-phase-earth fault.
Hence, from Equations 4.2,

V0 = 1/3 Va
V1 = 1/3 Va
Vb
Z1
Vc
F2
V2 = 1/3 Va
F0
Z2
Z0
N2
Ib
N0
N1 V
Ic
Ia=0
Vb=0
Vc=0
and therefore:
V1 = V 2 = V0 = 1 3 V a
I a = I1 + I 2 + I 0 = 0 Equation 4.28
From Equations 4.28, it can be concluded that the
sequence networks are connected in parallel, as shown in
Figure 4.12(b).
Figure 4.10: Phase-phase-earth fault at F

Va
4.4.4 Three-phase Fault (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)

Vc
Assuming that the fault includes earth, then, from

Equations 4.10 and 4.1, 4.2, it follows that:
V0 = V a
V1 = V 2
and
= 0
Q
Va'
Ib Vb'
b I Vc'
c
c
(a) Circuit diagram
I1
N1
Equation 4.23
Equation 4.24
I0 = 0
Substituting V2 = 0 in Equation 4.5 gives:
Equation 4.25
I2 = 0
and substituting V1 = 0 in Equation 4.4:

0 = V1 - I1 Z1
or

Equation 4.26
V = I1 Z1
Further, since from Equation 4.24 Io = 0 , it follows from
Equation 4.6 that Vo is zero when Zo is finite. The

equivalent sequence connections for a three-phase fault
are shown in Figure 4.11.
+ve
Sequence
Network
P1
1
Q1
I2
N2
-ve
Sequence
Network
P2
2
Q2
I0
N0
Zero
Sequence
Network
P0
0
Q0

Figure 4.12: Open circuit on phase A
4.4.6 Cross-country Faults

A cross-country fault is one where there are two faults
affecting the same circuit, but in different locations and
possibly involving different phases. Figure 4.13(a)
illustrates this.
The constraints expressed in terms of sequence
quantities are as follows:
a) At point F
Va
F2
F1
I b + I c = 0
Va = 0
F0
Vb
Z1
Vc
Figure 4.11 I
Z2
N2
Ib
Ia
N1
Z0
N0
Therefore:
I a1 = I a 2 = I a 0
Ia+Ib+Ic=0
Va+Vb+Vc=0
V a1 + V a 2 + V a 0 = 0
I ' a = I ' c = 0
V 'b = 0
4.4.5 Single-phase Open Circuit Fault

The single-phase open circuit fault is shown
diagrammatically in Figure 4.12(a). At the fault point,
the boundary conditions are:
Equation 4.31
and therefore:
I b1 = I b2 = I b0
Equation 4.32
To solve, it is necessary to convert the currents and

voltages at point F to the sequence currents in the
same phase as those at point F. From Equation 4.32,
Ia = 0
Equation 4.27
Equation 4.30
b) At point F
Figure 4.11: Three-phase-earth fault at F
V b = V c = 0
Equation 4.29
37
Va
A
F1
Figure
4.10Ia Phase-phase-earth fault
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
10:00
Page 38
F'
a-e
b-e
(a) `A' phase to ground at F and `B' phase to ground at F'
I'a1
Ia1
F1
F '1
V 'a1
Va1
N1
N '1
2
a I 'a2
F2
Ia2
I'a2
F '2
1 2
a
Va2
N2
a V'a2
V 'a2
N '2
aI 'a0
F0
Ia0
I'a0
F '0
V 'a0
Va0
N0
1
a
aV 'a0
N '0
Figure 4.13: Cross - country fault - phase A to phase B
= aI a2
= I a0
a2 I a1
or
= aI a0
= a2I a2
I a1
4.5 CURRENT AND VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

IN A SYSTEM DUE TO A FAULT
Practical fault calculations involve the examination of
the effect of a fault in branches of network other than
the faulted branch, so that protection can be applied
correctly to isolate the section of the system directly
involved in the fault. It is therefore not enough to
calculate the fault current in the fault itself; the fault
current distribution must also be established. Further,
abnormal voltage stresses may appear in a system
because of a fault, and these may affect the operation of
the protection. Knowledge of current and voltage
distribution in a network due to a fault is essential for
the application of protection.
Equation 4.33
and, for the voltages

V b1 + V b2 +V b0 = 0
Converting:
+ aV a2
+V a0 = 0
a2V a1
or
+ a2V a2
+ aV a0 = 0
V a1
Equation 4.34
The fault constraints involve phase shifted sequence

quantities. To construct the appropriate sequence
networks, it is necessary to introduce phase-shifting
transformers to couple the sequence networks. This
is shown in Figure 4.13(b).
The approach to network fault studies for assessing the

application of protection equipment may be summarised as
follows:
38
21/06/02
10:00
Page 39
a. from the network diagram and accompanying data,

assess the limits of stable generation and possible
operating conditions for the system
a. single-phase-earth (A-E)
I ' a = ( 2 C1 + C 0 ) I 0
I ' b = (C1 C 0 ) I 0
I ' c = (C1 C 0 ) I 0
NOTE: When full information is not available

assumptions may have to be made
b. with faults assumed to occur at each relaying point
in turn, maximum and minimum fault currents are
calculated for each type of fault
Equation 4.35
b. phase-phase (B-C)
2
I ' b = a a C1 I1
I ' c = a a 2 C1 I1
c. phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
I'a = 0
NOTE: The fault is assumed to be through zero

impedance
(
(
c. by calculating the current distribution in the

network for faults applied at different points in the
network (from (b) above) the maximum through
fault currents at each relaying point are
established for each type of fault
)
)
I ' a = (C1 C 0 ) I 0
d. at this stage more or less definite ideas on the type

of protection to be applied are formed. Further
calculations for establishing voltage variation at
the relaying point, or the stability limit of the
system with a fault on it, are now carried out in
order to determine the class of protection
necessary, such as high or low speed, unit or nonunit, etc.
Z
I ' b = a a 2 C1 0
Z1
Z
I ' c = a 2 a C1 0
Z1
Equation 4.36

a 2 C1 C 0 I 0

aC1 + C 0 I 0
Equation 4.37
d. three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)
I ' b = a 2 C1 I1
I ' c = aC1 I1
Equation 4.38
As an example of current distribution technique, consider

the system in Figure 4.14(a). The equivalent sequence
networks are given in Figures 4.14(b) and (c), together
with typical values of impedances. A fault is assumed at
A and it is desired to find the currents in branch OB due
to the fault. In each network, the distribution factors are
given for each branch, with the current in the fault
branch taken as 1.0p.u. From the diagram, the zero
sequence distribution factor Co in branch OB is 0.112
and the positive sequence factor C1 is 0.373. For an
earth fault at A the phase currents in branch OB from
Equation 4.35 are:
Ia = (0.746 + 0.112) I0
= 0.858 I0
and
I b = I c = -(0.373 + 0.112) I0
= -0.261 I0
I ' a = C1 I1
4.5.1 Current Distribution

The phase current in any branch of a network is
determined from the sequence current distribution in the
equivalent circuit of the fault. The sequence currents are
expressed in per unit terms of the sequence current in
the fault branch.
In power system calculations, the positive and negative
sequence impedances are normally equal. Thus, the
division of sequence currents in the two networks will
also be identical.
The impedance values and configuration of the zero
sequence network are usually different from those of the
positive and negative sequence networks, so the zero
sequence current distribution is calculated separately.
If Co and C1 are described as the zero and positive
sequence distribution factors then the actual current in
a sequence branch is given by multiplying the actual
current in the sequence fault branch by the appropriate

distribution factor. For this reason, if I1 , I2 and I0 are

sequence currents in an arbitrary branch of a network
due to a fault at some point in the network, then the
phase currents in that branch may be expressed in terms
of the distribution constants and the sequence currents
in the fault. These are given below for the various
common shunt faults, using Equation 4.1 and the
appropriate fault equations:
By using network reduction methods and assuming that

all impedances are reactive, it can be shown that
Z1 = Z0 = j0.68 ohms.
Therefore, from Equation 4.14, the current in fault
branch I a =
39
V
0.68
Chap4-30-45
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
10:00
Page 40
4.5.2 Voltage Distribution

The voltage distribution in any branch of a network is
determined from the sequence voltage distribution. As
shown by Equations 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6 and the gradient
diagrams, Figures 4.6(b) and 4.7(b), the positive
sequence voltage is a minimum at the fault, whereas the
zero and negative sequence voltages are a maximum.
Thus, the sequence voltages in any part of the system
may be given generally as:
Power system
A
O
Fault
Load
(a) Single line diagram
j7.5
j0.9
1.0
0.755
V1' = V I1 Z1
0.08
j0.4

V 2 ' = I 2 Z1 C1 n Z1 n

V0 ' = I 0 Z 0 C 0 n Z 0 n
Equation 4.39
1
B
j2.6 0 j1.6
0.165
0.112
0.192
j4.8
0.053
(b) Zero sequence network
j2.5
j1.6
1.0
0.422
0.183
j0.4
B
j0.75 0 j0.45
0.395
0.373
0.556
j18.85
Using the above equation, the fault voltages at bus B in

the previous example can be found.
From the positive sequence distribution diagram Figure
4.8(c):
(c) Positive and negative sequence networks
V '1 = V I1 Z1 j (0.395 0.75 ) + (0.373 0.45 )
Figure 4.14: Typical power system
0.022
C1 n Z1 n
Assuming that |V | = 63.5 volts, then:
V ' 2 = V I1 Z1 j 0.464
63.5
I 0 = 13 I a =
= 31.2 A
3 x 0.68
If V is taken as the reference vector, then:
I a = 26.8 -90 A
I b = I c =8.15 -90 A
From the zero sequence distribution diagram Figure

4.8(b):
V ' 0 = I 0 Z 0 j (0.165 2.6 ) + (0.112 1.6 )
}]
= I 0 Z 0 j 0.608

For earth faults, at the fault I1 = I2 = I0 = j31.2A, when
|V | = 63.5 volts and is taken as the reference vector.
Further, Z1 = Z0 = j0.68 ohms.
The vector diagram for the above fault condition is

Figure 4.15
V 'c =61.5-116.4
Hence:
V1 = 63.5 - (0.216 x 31.2)

= 56.76 0 volts
V2 = 6.74 180 volts
V0 = 2.25 180 volts
I 'b =I 'c =8.15-90
V=63.5-0
and, using Equations 4.1:
V a = V1 + V2 + V0
V 'a =47.8-0
= 56.76 -(6.74 + 2.25)
Va = 47.8 0
Vb = a2 V1 + aV2 + V0
I 'a =26.8-90
V 'b =61.5-116.4
= 56.76a2 -(6.74a + 2.25)
Vb = 61.5 -116.4 volts
Figure 4.15: Vector diagram: Fault currents

and voltages in branch OB due to P-E fault at bus A
40
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
10:00
Page 41
Vc = aV1 + a2V2 + V0

and since Vbn = a2 Van , Vcn =aVan then:
VR = 3Vne
Equation 4.43
where Vcn - neutral displacement voltage.
= 56.75a -(6.74a2 + 2.25)
Vc = 61.5 116.4 volts

These voltages are shown on the vector diagram, Figure
4.15.
4.6 EFFECT OF SYSTEM EARTHING
ON ZERO SEQUENCE QUANTITIES
Measurements of residual quantities are made using

current and voltage transformer connections as shown in
Figure 4.16. If relays are connected into the circuits in
place of the ammeter and voltmeter, it follows that earth
faults in the system can be detected.
It has been shown previously that zero sequence currents

flow in the earth path during earth faults, and it follows
that the nature of these currents will be influenced by
the method of earthing. Because these quantities are
unique in their association with earth faults they can be
utilised in protection, provided their measurement and
character are understood for all practical system
conditions.
Ia
Ib
Ic
C
Vae
Vbe
Vce
4.6.1 Residual Current and Voltage

Residual currents and voltages depend for their existence
on two factors:
V
(a) Residual current
a. a system connection to earth at two or more points

b. a potential difference between the earthed points
resulting in a current flow in the earth paths
Hence:
+ V ce
I R = Ia + Ib + Ic
and
V R = V ae + V be
Also, from Equations 4.2:
I R = 3 I 0
V R = 3 V0
It should be further noted that:
V ae = V an + V ne
V be = V bn + V ne
V ce = V cn + V ne
Equation 4.40
Equation 4.41
Figure 4.16: Measurement of residual quantities

4.6.2 System Z0 / Z1 Ratio

The system Z0 / Z1 ratio is defined as the ratio of zero
sequence and positive sequence impedances viewed from
the fault; it is a variable ratio, dependent upon the
method of earthing, fault position and system operating
arrangement.
When assessing the distribution of residual quantities
through a system, it is convenient to use the fault point
as the reference as it is the point of injection of
unbalanced quantities into the system. The residual
voltage is measured in relation to the normal phaseneutral system voltage and the residual current is
compared with the three-phase fault current at the fault
point. It can be shown [4.4/4.5] that the character of
these quantities can be expressed in terms of the system

Z0 / Z1 ratio.
The positive sequence impedance of a system is mainly
reactive, whereas the zero sequence impedance being
affected by the method of earthing may contain both
resistive and reactive components of comparable
magnitude. Thus the express of the Z0 / Z1 ratio

approximates to:
Z0
X
R
= 0 j 0
Z1
X1
X1
Equation 4.42
Equation 4.44
Expressing the residual current in terms of the three

phase current and Z0 / Z1 ratio:
41
Under normal system operation there is a capacitance

between the phases and between phase and earth; these
capacitances may be regarded as being symmetrical and
distributed uniformly through the system. So even when
(a) above is satisfied, if the driving voltages are
symmetrical the vector sum of the currents will equate
to zero and no current will flow between any two earth
points in the system. When a fault to earth occurs in a
system an unbalance results in condition (b) being
satisfied. From the definitions given above it follows
that residual currents and voltages are the vector sum of
phase currents and phase voltages respectively.
(b) Residual voltage
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
10:00
Page 42
a. Single-phase-earth (A-E)
IR
3V
=
=
2 Z1 + Z 0
3.0
(2 + K )
Residual current for

Double-Phase-Earth fault
V
Z1
2.5
Residual voltage for
Single-Phase-Earth fault
VR and IR as multiples of V and I3

where K = Z0 / Z1
V
Z1
I3 =
Thus:
IR
=
I3
(2 + K )
Equation 4.45
2.0
1.5
Residual voltage for

1.0
0.5
Residual current for
b. Phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
I R = 3I0
I1 =
Z0
Z1
4.6.3 Variation of Residual Quantities
IR =
Figure 4.17: Variation of residual quantities

at fault point
Z12
Hence:
2
K =
V Z1 + Z 0
2 Z1 Z 0 +
3 Z1
=
I1
Z1 + Z 0
3 V Z1
2 Z1 Z 0 + Z12
The variation of residual quantities in a system due to

different earth arrangements can be most readily
understood by using vector diagrams. Three examples
have been chosen, namely solid fault-isolated neutral,
solid fault-resistance neutral, and resistance fault-solid
neutral. These are illustrated in Figures 4.18, 4.19 and
4.20 respectively.
V
=
2 K + 1 Z1
Therefore:
IR
3
=
I3
2K +1
Equation 4.46
Similarly, the residual voltages are found by multiplying
Equations 4.45 and 4.46 by - K V .
a. Single-phase-each (A-E)
Iab+Iac
Iab
Iac
VR =
3K
(2 + K )
V
Equation 4.47
Iab
Iab+Iac
Iac
b. Phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
VR =
3K
(2 K + 1 )
(a) Circuit diagram
Iac
Equation 4.48
-VcF=Eac
n
The curves in Figure 4.17 illustrate the variation of the

above residual quantities with the Z0 / Z1 ratio. The
residual current in any part of the system can be
obtained by multiplying the current from the curve by
the appropriate zero sequence distribution factor.
Similarly, the residual voltage is calculated by
subtracting from the voltage curve three times the zero
sequence voltage drop between the measuring point in
the system and the fault.
Iab
b
a(F)
VbF
VR
-VbF=Eab
(b) Vector diagram
VcF
(c) Residual voltage diagram
Figure 4.18: Solid fault-isolated neutral
42
21/06/02
10:00
Page 43
4.6.3.1 Solid fault-isolated neutral
4.6.3.2 Solid fault-resistance neutral
From Figure 4.18 it can be seen that the capacitance to

earth of the faulted phase is short circuited by the fault
and the resulting unbalance causes capacitance currents
to flow into the fault, returning via sound phases
through sound phase capacitances to earth.
Figure 4.19 shows that the capacitance of the faulted

phase is short-circuited by the fault and the neutral
current combines with the sound phase capacitive
currents to give Ia in the faulted phase.
At the fault point:

VaF = 0
and
At the fault point:

VR = VbF + VcF since VFe = 0
= VbF + VcF
= -3 Ean
VR
At source:

VR = VaX + VbX + VcX
At source:
VR = 3Vne = -3Ean
since
Ean + Ebn + Ecn = 0

Thus, with an isolated neutral system, the residual
voltage is three times the normal phase-neutral voltage
of the faulted phase and there is no variation between
VR at source and VR at fault.

In practice, there is some leakage impedance between
neutral and earth and a small residual current would be
detected at X if a very sensitive relay were employed.
ZL
Ia X
With a relay at X, residually connected as shown in
Figure 4.16, the residual current will be Ian , that is, the
neutral earth loop current.Figure 4.19
F
A
Iab
Iac
From the residual voltage diagram it is clear that there is

little variation in the residual voltages at source and fault,
as most residual voltage is dropped across the neutral
resistor. The degree of variation in residual quantities is
therefore dependent on the neutral resistor value.
4.6.3.3 Resistance fault-solid neutral
Capacitance can be neglected because, since the
capacitance of the faulted phase is not short-circuited,
the circulating capacitance currents will be negligible.
At the fault point:

VR = VFn + Vbn + Vcn
At relaying point X:

VR = VXn + Vbn + Vcn
Ian
Iab
Ia
Iab
ZS
IF
ZL
A
B
C
(a) Circuit diagram

IF
Chap4-30-45
IF
Iac
c
(a) Circuit diagram

-Vcf
-VcX
VcF
Ia
a(F)
Vcn
Iac
-IaZL
-VXn
X
-Vbf
VXn
Vbn
Ian
VFn
VFn
VR
VXn
VcF
VR
(at source)
VR (at fault)
IF
(b) Vector diagram

VR
Vbf
VbF
(b) Vector diagram
VcX
a
-IFZS
X
F -IFZL
-VbX
Iab
Van
Iab
Vcn
VaX
VbX
(c) Residual voltage

at fault
(c) Residual voltage diagram
43
Vbn
(d) Residual voltage at

relaying point
Figure 4.20: Resistance fault-solid neutral
Figure 4.19: Solid fault-resistance neutral
Vcn
Vbn
Chap4-30-45
21/06/02
10:00
Page 44
From the residual voltage diagrams shown in Figure 4.20,

it is apparent that the residual voltage is greatest at the
fault and reduces towards the source. If the fault
resistance approaches zero, that is, the fault becomes
solid, then VFn approaches zero and the voltage drops in
ZS and ZL become greater. The ultimate value of VFn

will depend on the effectiveness of the earthing, and this

is a function of the system Z0 / Z1 ratio.
4.7 REFERENCES
4.1 Circuit Analysis of A.C. Power Systems, Volume I.

Edith Clarke. John Wiley & Sons.
4.2 Method of Symmetrical Co-ordinates Applied to
the Solution of Polyphase Networks. C.L.
Fortescue. Trans. A.I.E.E.,Vol. 37, Part II, 1918, pp
1027-40.
4.3 Power System Analysis. J.R. Mortlock and M.W.
Humphrey Davies. Chapman and Hall.
4.4 Neutral Groundings. R Willheim and M. Waters,
Elsevier.
4.5 Fault Calculations. F.H.W. Lackey, Oliver & Boyd.
44
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 46
Equivalent Circuits and Parameters

of Power System Plant
Introduction
5.1
Synchronous machines
5.2
Armature reaction
5.3
Steady state theory
5.4
Salient pole rotor
5.5
Transient analysis
5.6
Asymmetry
5.7
Machine reactances
5.8
Negative sequence reactance
5.9
Zero sequence reactance 5.10

Direct and quadrature axis values
5.11
Effect of saturation on machine reactances 5.12

Transformers 5.13
Transformer positive sequence equivalent circuits 5.14
Transformer zero sequence equivalent circuits 5.15
Auto-transformers 5.16
Transformer impedances 5.17
Overhead lines and cables 5.18
Calculation of series impedance 5.19
Calculation of shunt impedance 5.20
Overhead line circuits with or without earth wires 5.21
OHL equivalent circuits 5.22
Cable circuits 5.23
Overhead line and cable data 5.24
References 5.25
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 47
5 Equivalent Circuits and Parameters

of Power System Plant
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Knowledge of the behaviour of the principal electrical
system plant items under normal and fault conditions is
a prerequisite for the proper application of protection.
This chapter summarises basic synchronous machine,
transformer and transmission line theory and gives
equivalent circuits and parameters so that a fault study
can be successfully completed before the selection and
application of the protection systems described in later
chapters. Only what might be referred to as 'traditional'
synchronous machine theory is covered, as that is all that
calculations for fault level studies generally require.
Readers interested in more advanced models of
synchronous machines are referred to the numerous
papers on the subject, of which reference [5.1] is a good
starting point.
Power system plant may be divided into two broad
groups - static and rotating.
The modelling of static plant for fault level calculations
provides few difficulties, as plant parameters generally
do not change during the period of interest following
fault inception. The problem in modelling rotating plant
is that the parameters change depending on the
response to a change in power system conditions.
5.2 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES

There are two main types of synchronous machine:
cylindrical rotor and salient pole. In general, the former
is confined to 2 and 4 pole turbine generators, while
salient pole types are built with 4 poles upwards and
include most classes of duty. Both classes of machine
are similar in so far that each has a stator carrying a
three-phase winding distributed over its inner periphery.
Within the stator bore is carried the rotor which is
magnetised by a winding carrying d.c. current.
The essential difference between the two classes of
machine lies in the rotor construction. The cylindrical
rotor type has a uniformly cylindrical rotor that carries
its excitation winding distributed over a number of slots
47
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 48
around its periphery. This construction is unsuited to

multi-polar machines but it is very sound mechanically.
Hence it is particularly well adapted for the highest
speed electrical machines and is universally employed for
2 pole units, plus some 4 pole units.
most common. Two-stroke diesel engines are often

derivatives of marine designs with relatively large outputs
(circa 30MW is possible) and may have running speeds of
the order of 125rpm. This requires a generator with a
large number of poles (48 for a 125rpm, 50Hz generator)
and consequently is of large diameter and short axial
length. This is a contrast to turbine-driven machines that
are of small diameter and long axial length.
Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of Power System Plant
The salient pole type has poles that are physically

separate, each carrying a concentrated excitation
winding. This type of construction is in many ways
complementary to that of the cylindrical rotor and is
employed in machines having 4 poles or more. Except in
special cases its use is exclusive in machines having more
than 6 poles. Figure 5.1 illustrates a typical large
cylindrical rotor generator installed in a power plant.
Two and four pole generators are most often used in

applications where steam or gas turbines are used as the
driver. This is because the steam turbine tends to be
suited to high rotational speeds. Four pole steam turbine
generators are most often found in nuclear power
stations as the relative wetness of the steam makes the
high rotational speed of a two-pole design unsuitable.
Most generators with gas turbine drivers are four pole
machines to obtain enhanced mechanical strength in the
rotor- since a gearbox is often used to couple the power
turbine to the generator, the choice of synchronous
speed of the generator is not subject to the same
constraints as with steam turbines.
Weak
Generators with diesel engine drivers are invariably of

four or more pole design, to match the running speed of
the driver without using a gearbox. Four-stroke diesel
engines usually have a higher running speed than twostroke engines, so generators having four or six poles are
Strong
Weak
Strong
S
Direction of rotation
(a)
(b)
Figure 5.2: Distortion of flux
due to armature reaction
Figure 5.1: Modern large synchronous generator
48
21/06/02
9:31
Page 49
5 . 3 A R M AT U R E R E A C T I O N
Armature reaction has the greatest effect on the
operation of a synchronous machine with respect both to
the load angle at which it operates and to the amount of
excitation that it needs. The phenomenon is most easily
explained by considering a simplified ideal generator
with full pitch winding operating at unity p.f., zero lag
p.f. and zero lead p.f. When operating at unity p.f., the
voltage and current in the stator are in phase, the stator
current producing a cross magnetising magneto-motive
force (m.m.f.) which interacts with that of the rotor,
resulting in a distortion of flux across the pole face. As
can be seen from Figure 5.2(a) the tendency is to weaken
the flux at the leading edge or effectively to distort the
field in a manner equivalent to a shift against the
direction of rotation.
'armature reaction reactance' and is denoted by Xad.

Similarly, the remaining side of the triangle becomes
ATf /ATe , which is the per unit voltage produced on
open circuit by ampere-turns ATf . It can be considered
as the internal generated voltage of the machine and is
designated Eo .
Et(=V)
I
ATe
ATar
ATf
(a)
ATar
ATe
ATf
ATe
If the power factor were reduced to zero lagging, the

current in the stator would reach its maximum 90 after
the voltage and the rotor would therefore be in the
position shown in Figure 5.2(b). The stator m.m.f. is now
acting in direct opposition to the field.
Et=1=V
I
ATe
ATar
ATf
(b)
Eo
Similarly, for operation at zero leading power factor, the

stator m.m.f. would directly assist the rotor m.m.f. This
m.m.f. arising from current flowing in the stator is known
as 'armature reaction'.
IXad IX
d
EL
IXL
V
I
(c)
5 . 4 . S T E A DY S TAT E T H E O R Y
The vector diagram of a single cylindrical rotor
synchronous machine is shown in Figure 5.3, assuming
that the magnetic circuit is unsaturated, the air-gap is
uniform and all variable quantities are sinusoidal.
Further, since the reactance of machines is normally very
much larger than the resistance, the latter has been
neglected.
The excitation ampere-turns, ATe, produces a flux
across the air-gap thereby inducing a voltage, Et, in the
stator. This voltage drives a current I at a power factor
cos-1 and gives rise to an armature reaction m.m.f. ATar
in phase with it. The m.m.f. ATf resulting from the
combination of these two m.m.f. vectors (see Figure
5.3(a)) is the excitation which must be provided on the
rotor to maintain flux across the air-gap. Rotating the
rotor m.m.f. diagram, Figure 5.3(a), clockwise until
coincides with Et and changing the scale of the diagram
so that ATe becomes the basic unit, where ATe = Et =1,
results in Figure 5.3(b). The m.m.f. vectors have thus
become, in effect, voltage vectors. For example
ATar /ATe is a unit of voltage that is directly proportional
to the stator load current. This vector can be fully
represented by a reactance and in practice this is called
Figure 5.3: Vector diagram

of synchronous machine
The true leakage reactance of the stator winding which

gives rise to a voltage drop or regulation has been
neglected. This reactance is designated XL (or Xa in
some texts) and the voltage drop occurring in it, IXL, is
the difference between the terminal voltage V and the
voltage behind the stator leakage reactance, EL.
Chapt 5-46-77
IZL is exactly in phase with the voltage drop due to Xad,

as shown on the vector diagram Figure 5.3(c). It should
be noted that Xad and XL can be combined to give a
simple equivalent reactance; this is known as the
'synchronous reactance', denoted by Xd.
The power generated by the machine is given by the
equation:
P = VI cos =
VE
sin
Xd
Equation 5.1
where is the angle between the internal voltage and

the terminal voltage and is known as the load angle of
the machine.
49
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 50
It follows from the above analysis that, for steady state

performance, the machine may be represented by the
equivalent circuit shown in Figure 5.4, where XL is a true
reactance associated with flux leakage around the stator
winding and Xad is a fictitious reactance, being the ratio
of armature reaction and open-circuit excitation
magneto-motive forces.
Xad
The vector diagram for the salient pole machine is similar

to that for the cylindrical rotor except that the reactance
and currents associated with them are split into two
components. The synchronous reactance for the direct
axis is Xd = Xad + XL, while that in the quadrature axis
is Xq = Xaq + XL. The vector diagram is constructed as
before but the appropriate quantities in this case are
resolved along two axes. The resultant internal voltage
is Eo, as shown in Figure 5.6.
Figure 5.4: Equivalent circuit

of elementary machine
In passing it should be noted that E 0 is the internal

voltage which would be given, in cylindrical rotor theory,
by vectorially adding the simple vectors IXd and V. There
is very little difference in magnitude between E0 and E0
but a substantial difference in internal angle; the simple
theory is perfectly adequate for calculation of excitation
currents but not for stability considerations where load
angle is significant.
In practice, due to necessary constructional features of a

cylindrical rotor to accommodate the windings, the
reactance Xa is not constant irrespective of rotor
position, and modelling proceeds as for a generator with
a salient pole rotor. However, the numerical difference
between the values of Xad and Xaq is small, much less
than for the salient pole machine.
5 . 5 S A L I E N T P O L E R OTO R
IqXq
IdXd
The preceding theory is limited to the cylindrical rotor

generator. The basic assumption that the air-gap is
uniform is very obviously not valid when a salient pole
rotor is being considered. The effect of this is that the flux
produced by armature reaction m.m.f. depends on the
position of the rotor at any instant, as shown in Figure 5.5.
EO
IXd
E 'O
Flux
Lead
Armature
reaction M.M.F.
Flux
Quadrature axis
Quadr
Lag
Direct
ect axis po
pole
XL
Et
Eo
When a pole is aligned with the assumed sine wave

m.m.f. set up by the stator, a corresponding sine wave
flux will be set up, but when an inter-polar gap is aligned
very severe distortion is caused. The difference is treated
by considering these two axes, that is those
corresponding to the pole and the inter-polar gap,
separately. They are designated the 'direct' and
'quadrature' axes respectively, and the general theory is
known as the 'two axis' theory.
Iq
Id
Pole axis
Figure 5.5: Variation of armature reaction m.m.f.
with pole position
Figure 5.6: Vector diagram

for salient pole machine
50
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 51
5 . 6 T R A N S I E N T A N A LY S I S
XL
For normal changes in load conditions, steady state

theory is perfectly adequate. However, there are
occasions when almost instantaneous changes are
involved, such as faults or switching operations. When
this happens new factors are introduced within the
machine and to represent these adequately a
corresponding new set of machine characteristics is
required.
Xad
(a) Synchronous reactance

XL
Xf
Xad
This voltage will be generated by a flux crossing the airgap. It is not possible to confine the flux to one path
exclusively in any machine, and as a result there will be
a leakage flux L that will leak from pole to pole and
across the inter-polar gaps without crossing the main
air-gap as shown in Figure 5.7. The flux in the pole will
be + L.
The generally accepted and most simple way to

appreciate the meaning and derivation of these
characteristics is to consider a sudden three-phase short
circuit applied to a machine initially running on open
circuit and excited to normal voltage E0.
(b) Transient reactance

XL
Xad
Xf
Xkd
(c) Subtransient reactance

Figure 5.8: Synchronous machine reactances
It might be expected that the fault current would be

given by E0 /(XL+Xad) equal to E0/Xd , but this is very
much reduced, and the machine is operating with no
saturation. For this reason, the value of voltage used is
the value read from the air-gap line corresponding to
normal excitation and is rather higher than the normal
voltage. The steady state current is given by:
Id =
Figure 5.7: Flux paths of salient pole machine
If the stator winding is then short-circuited, the power

factor in it will be zero. A heavy current will tend to
flow, as the resulting armature reaction m.m.f. is
demagnetising. This will reduce the flux and conditions
will settle until the armature reaction nearly balances
the excitation m.m.f., the remainder maintaining a very
much reduced flux across the air-gap which is just
sufficient to generate the voltage necessary to overcome
the stator leakage reactance (resistance neglected). This
is the simple steady state case of a machine operating on
short circuit and is fully represented by the equivalent of
Figure 5.8(a); see also Figure 5.4.
Eg
Xd
Equation 5.2
where Eg = voltage on air gap line

An important point to note now is that between the
initial and final conditions there has been a severe
reduction of flux. The rotor carries a highly inductive
winding which links the flux so that the rotor flux
linkages before the short circuit are produced by
( + L). In practice the leakage flux is distributed over
the whole pole and all of it does not link all the winding.
L is an equivalent concentrated flux imagined to link all
the winding and of such a magnitude that the total
linkages are equal to those actually occurring. It is a
fundamental principle that any attempt to change the
flux linked with such a circuit will cause current to flow
in a direction that will oppose the change. In the present
case the flux is being reduced and so the induced
currents will tend to sustain it.
51
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 52
The damper winding(s) is subjected to the full effect of

flux transfer to leakage paths and will carry an induced
current tending to oppose it. As long as this current can
flow, the air-gap flux will be held at a value slightly
higher than would be the case if only the excitation
winding were present, but still less than the original
open circuit flux .
As before, it is convenient to use rated voltage and to
create another fictitious reactance that is considered to
be effective over this period. This is known as the 'subtransient reactance' X d and is defined by the equation:
Sub-transient current I d = Eo
X ''d
It is more convenient for machine analysis to use the

rated voltage E0 and to invent a fictitious reactance that
will give rise to the same current. This reactance is
called the 'transient reactance' Xd and is defined by the
equation:
Transient current I 'd =
Eo
X 'd
where X ''d = X L +
X ad X f X kd
X ad X f + X kd X f + X ad X kd
Xd = XL + Xkd
or
and Xkd = leakage reactance of damper winding(s)
Equation 5.3
Xkd = effective leakage reactance of damper winding(s)
It is greater than XL, and the equivalent circuit is

represented by Figure 5.8(b) where:
X 'd =
Equation 5.4
It is greater than XL but less than Xd and the

corresponding equivalent circuit is shown in Figure
5.8(c).
X ad X f
+XL
X ad + X f
Again, the duration of this phase depends upon the time

constant of the damper winding. In practice this is
approximately 0.05 seconds - very much less than the
transient - hence the term 'sub-transient'.
and X f is the leakage reactance of the field winding

The above equation may also be written as:
Xd = XL + Xf
Figure 5.9 shows the envelope of the symmetrical

component of an armature short circuit current
indicating the values described in the preceding analysis.
The analysis of the stator current waveform resulting
from a sudden short circuit test is traditionally the
where Xf = effective leakage reactance of field winding

The flux will only be sustained at its relatively high value
while the induced current flows in the field winding. As
this current decays, so conditions will approach the
steady state. Consequently, the duration of this phase
will be determined by the time constant of the excitation
winding. This is usually of the order of a second or less
- hence the term 'transient' applied to characteristics
associated with it.
Current
For the position immediately following the application of

the short circuit, it is valid to assume that the flux linked
with the rotor remains constant, this being brought
about by an induced current in the rotor which balances
the heavy demagnetising effect set up by the shortcircuited armature. So ( + L) remains constant, but
owing to the increased m.m.f. involved, the flux leakage
will increase considerably. With a constant total rotor
flux, this can only increase at the expense of that flux
crossing the air-gap. Consequently, this generates a
reduced voltage, which, acting on the leakage reactance,
gives the short circuit current.
A further point now arises. All synchronous machines

have what is usually called a damper winding or
windings. In some cases, this may be a physical winding
(like a field winding, but of fewer turns and located
separately), or an effective one (for instance, the solid
iron rotor of a cylindrical rotor machine). Sometimes,
both physical and effective damper windings may exist
(as in some designs of cylindrical rotor generators,
having both a solid iron rotor and a physical damper
winding located in slots in the pole faces).
I''d =
Eo
X ''d
I'd =
Eo
X'd
Id =
Eair gap
Xd
Under short circuit conditions, there is a transfer of flux

from the main air-gap to leakage paths. This diversion is,
to a small extent, opposed by the excitation winding and
the main transfer will be experienced towards the pole tips.
Time
Figure 5.9: Transient decay envelope
of short-circuit current
52
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:31
Page 53
method by which these reactances are measured.

However, the major limitation is that only direct axis
parameters are measured. Detailed test methods for
synchronous machines are given in references [5.2] and
[5.3], and include other tests that are capable of
providing more detailed parameter information.
in opposite directions at supply frequency relative to the

rotor. So, as viewed from the stator, one is stationary
and the other rotating at twice supply frequency. The
latter sets up second harmonic currents in the stator.
Further development along these lines is possible but the
resulting harmonics are usually negligible and normally
neglected.
5.7 ASYMMETRY
This asymmetry can be considered to be due to a d.c.

component of current which dies away because
resistance is present.
The d.c. component of stator current sets up a d.c. field
in the stator which causes a supply frequency ripple on
the field current, and this alternating rotor flux has a
further effect on the stator. This is best shown by
considering the supply frequency flux as being
represented by two half magnitude waves each rotating
Type of machine
Short circuit ratio
Direct axis synchronous reactance Xd (p.u.)
Quadrature axis synchronous reactance Xq (p.u.)
Direct axis transient reactance Xd (p.u.)
Direct axis sub-transient reactance Xd (p.u.)
Quadrature axis sub-transient reactance Xq (p.u.)
Negative sequence reactance X2 (p.u.)
Zero sequence reactance X0 (p.u.)
Direct axis short circuit transient time constant Td (s)
Direct axis open circuit transient time constant Tdo (s)
Direct axis short circuit sub-transient- time constant Td (s)
Direct axis open circuit sub-transient time constant Tdo(s)
Quadrature axis short circuit sub-transient time constant Tq (s)
Quadrature axis open circuit sub-transient time constant Tqo (s)
5 . 8 M A C H I N E R E A C TA N C E S
Table 5.1 gives values of machine reactances for salient
pole and cylindrical rotor machines typical of latest
design practice. Also included are parameters for
synchronous compensators such machines are now
rarely built, but significant numbers can still be found in
operation.
5.8.1 Synchronous Reactance Xd = XL + Xad
The order of magnitude of XL is normally 0.1-0.25p.u.,
while that of Xad is 1.0-2.5p.u. The leakage reactance XL
can be reduced by increasing the machine size (derating),
or increased by artificially increasing the slot leakage,
but it will be noted that XL is only about 10% of the
total value of Xd and cannot exercise much influence.
The armature reaction reactance can be reduced by
decreasing the armature reaction of the machine, which
in design terms means reducing the ampere conductor or
electrical (as distinct from magnetic) loading - this will
often mean a physically larger machine. Alternatively
the excitation needed to generate open-circuit voltage
may be increased; this is simply achieved by increasing
the machine air-gap, but is only possible if the excitation
system is modified to meet the increased requirements.
In general, control of Xd is obtained almost entirely by
varying Xad, and in most cases a reduction in Xd will
mean a larger and more costly machine. It is also worth
Salient
pole synchronous
condensers
0.5-0.7
1.6-2.0
1.0-1.23
0.3-0.5
0.2-0.4
0.25-0.6
0.25-0.5
0.12-0.16
1.5-2.5
5-10
0.04-0.9
0.07-0.11
0.04-0.6
0.1-0.2
1.0-1.2
0.8-1.0
0.5-0.65
0.2-0.35
0.12-0.25
0.15-0.25
0.14-0.35
0.06-0.10
1.0-2.0
3-7
0.05-0.10
0.08-0.25
0.05-0.6
0.2-0.9
Cylindrical rotor turbine generators

Air Cooled
Hydrogen
Cooled
0.4-0.6
2.0-2.8
1.8-2.7
0.2-0.3
0.15-0.23
0.16-0.25
0.16-0.23
0.06-0.1
0.6-1.3
6-12
0.013-0.022
0.018-0.03
0.013-0.022
0.026-0.045
0.4-0.6
2.1-2.4
1.9-2.4
0.27-0.33
0.19-0.23
0.19-0.23
0.19-0.24
0.1-0.15
0.7-1.0
6-10
0.017-0.025
0.023-0.032
0.018-0.027
0.03-0.05
Salient pole generators
Hydrogen/
Water Cooled
0.4-0.6
2.1-2.6
2.0-2.5
0.3-0.36
0.21-0.27
0.21-0.28
0.21-0.27
0.1-0.15
0.75-1.0
6-9.5
0.022-0.03
0.025-0.035
0.02-0.03
0.04-0.065
4 Pole
0.4-0.6
1.75-3.0
0.9-1.5
0.26-0.35
0.19-0.25
0.19-0.35
0.16-0.27
0.01-0.1
0.4-1.1
3.0-9.0
0.02-0.04
0.035-0.06
0.025-0.04
0.13-0.2
Multi-pole
0.6-0.8
1.4-1.9
0.8-1.0
0.24-0.4
0.16-0.25
0.18-0.24
0.16-0.23
0.045-0.23
0.25-1
1.7-4.0
0.02-0.06
0.03-0.1
0.025-0.08
0.1-0.35
NB all reactance values are unsaturated.
Table 5.1: Typical synchronous generator parameters
53
The exact instant at which the short circuit is applied to

the stator winding is of significance. If resistance is
negligible compared with reactance, the current in a coil
will lag the voltage by 90, that is, at the instant when
the voltage wave attains a maximum, any current
flowing through would be passing through zero. If a
short circuit were applied at this instant, the resulting
current would rise smoothly and would be a simple a.c.
component. However, at the moment when the induced
voltage is zero, any current flowing must pass through a
maximum (owing to the 90 lag). If a fault occurs at this
moment, the resulting current will assume the
corresponding relationship; it will be at its peak and in
the ensuing 180 will go through zero to maximum in
the reverse direction and so on. In fact the current must
actually start from zero and so will follow a sine wave
that is completely asymmetrical. Intermediate positions
will give varying degrees of asymmetry.
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:40
Page 54
noting that XL normally changes in sympathy with Xad,

but that it is completely overshadowed by it.
rise to parasitic currents and heating; most machines are

quite limited in the amount of such current which they
are able to carry, both in the steady state and
transiently.
The value 1/Xd has a special significance as it

approximates to the short circuit ratio (S.C.R.), the only
difference being that the S.C.R. takes saturation into
account whereas Xd is derived from the air-gap line.
An accurate calculation of the negative sequence current

capability of a generator involves consideration of the
current paths in the rotor body. In a turbine generator
rotor, for instance, they include the solid rotor body, slot
wedges, excitation winding and end-winding retaining
rings. There is a tendency for local over-heating to occur
and, although possible for the stator, continuous local
temperature measurement is not practical in the rotor.
Calculation requires complex mathematical techniques
to be applied, and involves specialist software.
5.8.2 Transient Reactance Xd = XL + Xf
The transient reactance covers the behaviour of a

machine in the period 0.1-3.0 seconds after a
disturbance. This generally corresponds to the speed of
changes in a system and therefore Xd has a major
influence in transient stability studies.
Generally, the leakage reactance XL is equal to the

effective field leakage reactance Xf, about 0.1-0.25p.u.
The principal factor determining the value of Xf is the
field leakage. This is largely beyond the control of the
designer, in that other considerations are at present more
significant than field leakage and hence take precedence
in determining the field design.
In practice an empirical method is used, based on the

fact that a given type of machine is capable of carrying,
for short periods, an amount of heat determined by its
thermal capacity, and for a long period, a rate of heat
input which it can dissipate continuously. Synchronous
machines are designed to be capable of operating
continuously on an unbalanced system such that, with
none of the phase currents exceeding the rated current,
the ratio of the negative sequence current I2 to the rated
current IN does not exceed the values given in Table 5.2.
Under fault conditions, the machine shall also be capable
2
of operation with the product of I 2 and time in
IN
seconds (t) not exceeding the values given.
XL can be varied as already outlined, and, in practice,

control of transient reactance is usually achieved by
varying XL
5.8.3 Sub-transient Reactance Xd = XL + Xkd
The sub-transient reactance determines the initial
current peaks following a disturbance and in the case of
a sudden fault is of importance for selecting the breaking
capacity of associated circuit breakers. The mechanical
stresses on the machine reach maximum values that
depend on this constant. The effective damper winding
leakage reactance Xkd is largely determined by the
leakage of the damper windings and control of this is
only possible to a limited extent. Xkd normally has a
value between 0.05 and 0.15 p.u. The major factor is XL
which, as indicated previously, is of the order of 0.1-0.25
p.u., and control of the sub-transient reactance is
normally achieved by varying XL.
Rotor
construction
Salient
It should be noted that good transient stability is

obtained by keeping the value of Xd low, which
therefore also implies a low value of Xd. The fault rating
of switchgear, etc. will therefore be relatively high. It is
not normally possible to improve transient stability
performance in a generator without adverse effects on
fault levels, and vice versa.
Cylindrical
Rotor Cooling
motors
generators
indirect
synchronous
condensers
motors
generators
direct
synchronous
condensers
indirectly cooled (air)
all
indirectly cooled (hydrogen)
all
<=350
351-900
directly cooled
901-1250
1251-1600
5 . 9 N E G AT I V E S E Q U E N C E R E A C TA N C E
Negative sequence currents can arise whenever there is
any unbalance present in the system. Their effect is to
set up a field rotating in the opposite direction to the
main field generated by the rotor winding, so subjecting
the rotor to double frequency flux pulsations. This gives
Machine
Type (SN)
/Rating
(MVA)
Note 1: Calculate as
I2
S -350
= 0.08- N
IN
3 x 104
Note 2: Calculate as
()
Maximum
Maximum
I2/IN for
(I2/IN)2t for
continuous operation during
operation
faults
0.1
0.08
20
20
0.1
20
0.08
0.05
15
15
0.08
15
0.1
0.1
0.08
Note 1
Note 1
0.05
15
10
8
Note 2
5
5
I2 2
t = 8-0.00545(SN-350)
IN
Table 5.2: Unbalanced operating conditions for synchronous machines

(from IEC 60034-1)
54
21/06/02
9:40
Page 55
5 . 10 Z E R O S E Q U E N C E R E A C TA N C E
If a machine is operating with an earthed neutral, a
system earth fault will give rise to zero sequence
currents in the machine. This reactance represents the
machine's contribution to the total impedance offered to
these currents. In practice it is generally low and often
outweighed by other impedances present in the circuit.
5.11 DIRECT AND QUADRATURE AXIS VALUES
The transient reactance is associated with the field
winding and since on salient pole machines this is
concentrated on the direct axis, there is no
corresponding quadrature axis value. The value of
reactance applicable in the quadrature axis is the
synchronous reactance, that is, Xq = Xq.
The damper winding (or its equivalent) is more widely
spread and hence the sub-transient reactance associated
with this has a definite quadrature axis value Xq, which
differs significantly in many generators from Xd.
5.12 EFFECT OF SATURATION
ON MACHINE REACTANCES
In general, any electrical machine is designed to avoid
severe saturation of its magnetic circuit. However, it is
not economically possible to operate at such low flux
densities as to reduce saturation to negligible
proportions, and in practice a moderate degree of
saturation is accepted.
Since the armature reaction reactance Xad is a ratio
ATar /ATe it is evident that ATe will not vary in a linear
manner for different voltages, while ATar will remain
unchanged. The value of Xad will vary with the degree of
saturation present in the machine, and for extreme
accuracy should be determined for the particular
conditions involved in any calculation.
It is necessary to distinguish which value of reactance is

being measured when on test. The normal instantaneous
short circuit test carried out from rated open circuit
voltage gives a current that is usually several times full
load value, so that saturation is present and the
reactance measured will be the saturated value. This
value is also known as the 'rated voltage' value since it is
measured by a short circuit applied with the machine
excited to rated voltage.
In some cases, if it is wished to avoid the severe
mechanical strain to which a machine is subjected by
such a direct short circuit, the test may be made from a
suitably reduced voltage so that the initial current is
approximately full load value. Saturation is very much
reduced and the reactance values measured are virtually
unsaturated values. They are also known as 'rated
current' values, for obvious reasons.
5.13 TRANSFORMERS
A transformer may be replaced in a power system by an
equivalent circuit representing the self-impedance of,
and the mutual coupling between, the windings. A twowinding transformer can be simply represented as a 'T'
network in which the cross member is the short-circuit
impedance, and the column the excitation impedance. It
is rarely necessary in fault studies to consider excitation
impedance as this is usually many times the magnitude
of the short-circuit impedance. With these simplifying
assumptions a three-winding transformer becomes a star
of three impedances and a four-winding transformer a
mesh of six impedances.
All the other reactances, namely XL , Xd and Xd are

true reactances and actually arise from flux leakage.
Much of this leakage occurs in the iron parts of the
machines and hence must be affected by saturation. For
a given set of conditions, the leakage flux exists as a
result of the net m.m.f. which causes it. If the iron
circuit is unsaturated its reactance is low and leakage
flux is easily established. If the circuits are highly
saturated the reverse is true and the leakage flux is
relatively lower, so the reactance under saturated
conditions is lower than when unsaturated.
The impedances of a transformer, in common with other

plant, can be given in ohms and qualified by a base
voltage, or in per unit or percentage terms and qualified
by a base MVA. Care should be taken with multiwinding transformers to refer all impedances to a
common base MVA or to state the base on which each is
given. The impedances of static apparatus are
independent of the phase sequence of the applied
voltage; in consequence, transformer negative sequence
and positive sequence impedances are identical. In
determining the impedance to zero phase sequence
currents, account must be taken of the winding
connections, earthing, and, in some cases, the
construction type. The existence of a path for zero
sequence currents implies a fault to earth and a flow of
balancing currents in the windings of the transformer.
Most calculation methods assume infinite iron

permeability and for this reason lead to somewhat
idealised unsaturated reactance values. The recognition
of a finite and varying permeability makes a solution
extremely laborious and in practice a simple factor of
approximately 0.9 is taken as representing the reduction
in reactance arising from saturation.
Practical three-phase transformers may have a phase

shift between primary and secondary windings
depending on the connections of the windings delta or
star. The phase shift that occurs is generally of no
significance in fault level calculations as all phases are
shifted equally. It is therefore ignored. It is normal to
find delta-star transformers at the transmitting end of a
55
Chapt 5-46-77
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:40
Page 56
transformer may be represented by Figure 5.10(b). The

circuit in Figure 5.10(b) is similar to that shown in Figure
3.14(a), and can therefore be replaced by an equivalent
'T ' as shown in Figure 5.10(c) where:
transmission system and in distribution systems for the

following reasons:
a. at the transmitting end, a higher step-up voltage
ratio is possible than with other winding
arrangements, while the insulation to ground of the
star secondary winding does not increase by the
same ratio
Z1 = Z11 Z12
Z2 = Z22 Z12
Z3 = Z12
b. in distribution systems, the star winding allows a

neutral connection to be made, which may be
important in considering system earthing
arrangements
Z1 is described as the leakage impedance of winding AA'

and Z2 the leakage impedance of winding BB'.
Impedance Z3 is the mutual impedance between the
windings, usually represented by XM, the magnetizing
reactance paralleled with the hysteresis and eddy current
loops as shown in Figure 5.10(d).
c. the delta winding allows circulation of zero

sequence currents within the delta, thus
preventing transmission of these from the
secondary (star) winding into the primary circuit.
This simplifies protection considerations
If the secondary of the transformers is short-circuited,

and Z3 is assumed to be large with respect to Z1 and Z2,
then the short-circuit impedance viewed from the
terminals AA is ZT = Z1 + Z2 and the transformer can
be replaced by a two-terminal equivalent circuit as
shown in Figure 5.10(e).
5.14 TRANSFORMER POSITIVE SEQUENCE

EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS
The transformer is a relatively simple device. However,
the equivalent circuits for fault calculations need not
necessarily be quite so simple, especially where earth
faults are concerned. The following two sections discuss
the equivalent circuits of various types of transformers.
The relative magnitudes of ZT and XM are of the order of

10% and 2000% respectively. ZT and XM rarely have to
be considered together, so that the transformer may be
represented either as a series impedance or as an
excitation impedance, according to the problem being
studied.
5.14.1 Two-winding Transformers
A typical power transformer is illustrated in Figure 5.11.
The two-winding transformer has four terminals, but in

most system problems, two-terminal or three-terminal
equivalent circuits as shown in Figure 5.10 can represent
it. In Figure 5.10(a), terminals A' and B' are assumed to
be at the same potential. Hence if the per unit selfimpedances of the windings are Z11 and Z22 respectively
and the mutual impedance between them Z12, the
B C
~
A'
B' C '
(a) Model of transformer

Z1 =Z11-Z12 Z2=Z22-Z12
A
B
Z11
Zero bus
(c) 'T' equivalent circuit
A
Z22
Z12
B'
Zero bus
(b) Equivalent circuit of model
r2+jx2
r1+jx1
A
B
R
B'
If excitation impedance is neglected the equivalent

circuit of a three-winding transformer may be
represented by a star of impedances, as shown in Figure
5.12, where P, T and S are the primary, tertiary and
secondary windings respectively. The impedance of any
of these branches can be determined by considering the
short-circuit impedance between pairs of windings with
the third open.
A'
Z3=Z12
A'
5.14.2 Three-winding Transformers
Load
Equation 5.5
A'
Zs
Secondary
jXM
Zero bus
(d) '' equivalent circuit
ZT =Z1+Z2
Zp
Primary
B'
Tertiary
Zt
B
T
B'
Zero bus
(e) Equivalent circuit: secondary winding s/c
A'
Zero bus
Figure 5.10: Equivalent circuits

for a two-winding transformer

for a three-winding transformer
56
21/06/02
9:40
Page 57
Figure 5.11: Modern large transformer
5.15 TRANSFORMER ZERO SEQUENCE

EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS
The flow of zero sequence currents in a transformer is
only possible when the transformer forms part of a
closed loop for uni-directional currents and ampere-turn
balance is maintained between windings.
The positive sequence equivalent circuit is still
maintained to represent the transformer, but now there
are certain conditions attached to its connection into the
external circuit. The order of excitation impedance is
very much lower than for the positive sequence circuit;
it will be roughly between 1 and 4 per unit, but still high
enough to be neglected in most fault studies.
The mode of connection of a transformer to the external
circuit is determined by taking account of each winding
arrangement and its connection or otherwise to ground.
If zero sequence currents can flow into and out of a
winding, the winding terminal is connected to the
external circuit (that is, link a is closed in Figure 5.13). If
zero sequence currents can circulate in the winding
without flowing in the external circuit, the winding
terminal is connected directly to the zero bus (that is,
link b is closed in Figure 5.13). Table 5.3 gives the zero
sequence connections of some common two- and threewinding transformer arrangements applying the above rules.
The exceptions to the general rule of neglecting

magnetising impedance occur when the transformer is
star/star and either or both neutrals are earthed. In
these circumstances the transformer is connected to the
zero bus through the magnetising impedance. Where a
three-phase transformer bank is arranged without
interlinking magnetic flux (that is a three-phase shell
type, or three single-phase units) and provided there is a
path for zero sequence currents, the zero sequence
impedance is equal to the positive sequence impedance.
In the case of three-phase core type units, the zero
sequence fluxes produced by zero sequence currents can
find a high reluctance path, the effect being to reduce
the zero sequence impedance to about 90% of the
positive sequence impedance.
However, in hand calculations, it is usual to ignore this
variation and consider the positive and zero sequence
impedances to be equal. It is common when using
software to perform fault calculations to enter a value of
zero-sequence impedance in accordance with the above
guidelines, if the manufacturer is unable to provide a
value.
57
Chapt 5-46-77
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:40
Page 58
Zero phase sequence network
Connections and zero phase sequence currents

a
ZT
b
b
Zero bus
ZT
b
b
Zero bus
ZT
b
Zero bus
ZT
b
b
Zero bus
ZT
b
b
Zero bus
ZT
b
b
Zero bus
ZT
Zero bus
Zs
a
Zp
b
a
Zt
a
b
Zero bus
Zs
Zp
b
a
Zt
a
b
Zero bus
Zs
a
Zp
b
a
Zt
a
b
Zero bus
Zs
a
Zp
b
a
Zt
a
b
Zero bus
Zs
a
Zp
b
a
Zt
a
b
Zero bus
Table 5.3: Zero sequence equivalent circuit connections
58
21/06/02
9:40
Page 59
5 . 1 6 A U TO - T R A N S F O R M E R S
The auto-transformer is characterised by a single
continuous winding, part of which is shared by both the
high and low voltage circuits, as shown in Figure 5.14(a).
The 'common' winding is the winding between the low
voltage terminals whereas the remainder of the winding,
belonging exclusively to the high voltage circuit, is
designated the 'series' winding, and, combined with the
'common' winding, forms the 'series-common' winding
between the high voltage terminals. The advantage of
using an auto-transformer as opposed to a two-winding
transformer is that the auto-transformer is smaller and
lighter for a given rating. The disadvantage is that
galvanic isolation between the two windings does not
exist, giving rise to the possibility of large overvoltages
on the lower voltage system in the event of major
insulation breakdown.
ZT
2
ZT
2
Ze
Zero potential bus

(a) Two windings
Zs
Zp
Three-phase auto-transformer banks generally have star

connected main windings, the neutral of which is
normally connected solidly to earth. In addition, it is
common practice to include a third winding connected in
delta called the tertiary winding, as shown in Figure
5.14(b).
Zt
Ze
5.16.1 Positive Sequence Equivalent Circuit
Zero potential bus
The positive sequence equivalent circuit of a three-phase

auto-transformer bank is the same as that of a two- or
three-winding transformer. The star equivalent for a
three-winding transformer, for example, is obtained in
the same manner, with the difference that the
impedances between windings are designated as follows:
(b) Three windings

Figure 5.13: Zero sequence equivalent circuits
IH
1
(Z scc + Zct Z sct )
2
1
Z H = (Z scc + Z sct Zct )
2
1
ZT = (Z sct + Zct Z scc )
2
IH
ZL =
L
IL
IL
IT
IL-IH
N
VH
IL-IH VL
IN
where:
Zsc-t = impedance between 'series common' and tertiary
windings
ZH
L
ZN
IH N IL
(a) Circuit diagram
Equation 5.8
(b) Circuit diagram with tertiary winding
ZL
ZX
H
IL1
IH1
IL0
T
(c) Positive sequence impedance
When no load is connected to the delta tertiary, the point

T will be open-circuited and the short-circuit impedance
of the transformer becomes ZL + ZH = Zsc-c , that is,
similar to the equivalent circuit of a two-winding
transformer, with magnetising impedance neglected; see
Figure 5.14(c).
H
IH0
T
IT0
IT1
Zsc-t = impedance between 'common' and tertiary

windings
ZY
ZZ
ZT
Zsc-c = impedance between 'series common' and

'common' windings
Zero potential bus

(d) Zero sequence equivalent circuit
ZLH
IL0
IH0
ZHT
ZLT
T
IT0
Zero potential bus

(e) Equivalent circuit with isolated neutral

of auto-transformer
59
Chapt 5-46-77
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:40
Page 60
5.16.2 Zero Sequence Equivalent Circuit
With the equivalent delta replacing the star impedances

in the auto-transformer zero sequence equivalent circuit
the transformer can be combined with the system
impedances in the usual manner to obtain the system
zero sequence diagram.
The zero sequence equivalent circuit is derived in a

similar manner to the positive sequence circuit, except
that, as there is no identity for the neutral point, the
current in the neutral and the neutral voltage cannot be
given directly. Furthermore, in deriving the branch
impedances, account must be taken of an impedance in
the neutral Zn, as shown in the following equations,
where Zx, Zy and Zz are the impedances of the low, high
and tertiary windings respectively and N is the ratio
between the series and common windings.
( N +1)
N
Z y = Z H 3 Zn
( N +1)2
Z z = ZT +3 Zn
( N +1)
5.17 TRANSFORMER IMPEDANCES

In the vast majority of fault calculations, the Protection
Engineer is only concerned with the transformer leakage
impedance; the magnetising impedance is neglected, as
it is very much higher. Impedances for transformers
rated 200MVA or less are given in IEC 60076 and
repeated in Table 5.4, together with an indication of X/R
values (not part of IEC 60076). These impedances are
commonly used for transformers installed in industrial
plants. Some variation is possible to assist in controlling
fault levels or motor starting, and typically up to 10%
variation on the impedance values given in the table is
possible without incurring a significant cost penalty. For
these transformers, the tapping range is small, and the
variation of impedance with tap position is normally
neglected in fault level calculations.
Z x = Z L +3 Zn
Equation 5.9
Figure 5.14(d) shows the equivalent circuit of the

transformer bank. Currents ILO and IHO are those
circulating in the low and high voltage circuits respectively.
The difference between these currents, expressed in
amperes, is the current in the common winding.
For transformers used in electricity distribution

networks, the situation is more complex, due to an
increasing trend to assign importance to the standing (or
no-load) losses represented by the magnetising
impedance. This can be adjusted at the design stage but
there is often an impact on the leakage reactance in
consequence. In addition, it may be more important to
control fault levels on the LV side than to improve motor
starting voltage drops. Therefore, departures from the
IEC 60076 values are commonplace.
The current in the neutral impedance is three times the

current in the common winding.
5.16.3 Special Conditions of Neutral Earthing

With a solidly grounded neutral, Zn = O, the branch
impedances Zx, Zy , Zz, become ZL, ZH, ZT, that is,
identical to the corresponding positive sequence
equivalent circuit, except that the equivalent impedance
ZT of the delta tertiary is connected to the zero potential
bus in the zero sequence network.
IEC 60076 does not make recommendations of nominal

impedance in respect of transformers rated over
200MVA, while generator transformers and a.c. traction
supply transformers have impedances that are usually
specified as a result of Power Systems Studies to ensure
satisfactory performance. Typical values of transformer
impedances covering a variety of transformer designs are
given in Tables 5.5 5.9. Where appropriate, they
include an indication of the impedance variation at the
extremes of the taps given. Transformers designed to
work at 60Hz will have substantially the same
impedance as their 50Hz counterparts.
When the neutral is ungrounded Zn = and the

impedances of the equivalent star also become infinite
because there are apparently no paths for zero sequence
currents between the windings, although a physical
circuit exists and ampere-turn balance can be obtained.
A solution is to use an equivalent delta circuit (see Figure
5.14(e)), and evaluate the elements of the delta directly
from the actual circuit. The method requires three
equations corresponding to three assumed operating
conditions. Solving these equations will relate the delta
impedances to the impedance between the series and
tertiary windings, as follows:
N2
(1 + N )
Z LT = Z st N
N
Z HT = Z st
(1 + N )
Z LH = Z st
MVA
Z% HV/LV
X/R
<0.630
0.631-1.25
1.251 - 3.15
3.151 - 6.3
6.301-12.5
12.501- 25.0
25.001 - 200
>200
4.00
5.00
6.25
7.15
8.35
10.00
12.50
1.5
3.5
6.0
8.5
13.0
20.0
45.0
by agreement
Tolerance on Z%
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
Table 5.4: Transformer impedances - IEC 60076

Equation 5.10
60
21/06/02
9:40
Page 61
MVA
Primary
Primary Taps
Secondary kV
Z% HV/LV
X/R ratio
MVA
Primary kV
Primary Taps
Secondary kV
Z% HV/LV
X/R ratio
7.5
7.5
8
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
12
12
12
15
15
16
16
16
19
30
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
66
66
33
33
33
33
33
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+4.5% -18%
+5% -15%
10%
10%
+9% -15%
+9% -15%
10%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
+5.72% -17.16%
11
11
11
6.6
6.6
11
11
6.6
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11
6.6
11
11
7.5
7.5
8
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
12
12
12
15
15
16
16
16
19
30
15
17
9
24
24
24
26
24
27
27
25
14
16
16
30
31
37
40
24
30
30
30
30
40
45
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
65
90
90
33
33
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
132
140
132
132
10%
+5.72% -17.16%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
+9.3% -24%
+9.3% -24%
+7.5% -15%
+10% -20%
+10% -20%
6.9
11
11
11
11
11
33
33
33
33
66
11/11
11/11
11/11
11
33
66
24
30
21.3
25
23.5
27.9
11.8
16.7
17.7
14.5
11
35.5
36
35.9
12.3
24.4
15.1
25
40
43
30
46
37
18
28
26
25
25
52
75
78
28
60
41
Table 5.5: Impedances of two winding distribution transformers

Primary voltage <200kV
MVA
Primary
kV
Primary
Taps
Secondary
kV
Tertiary
kV
20
220
+12.5% -7.5%
6.9
20
57
74
79.2
120
125
125
180
255
230
275
345
220
275
230
230
275
230
+12.5% -7.5%
10%
+14.4% -10%
+10% -15%
+10% -15%
16.8%
not known
15%
+10%
6.9
11.8
96
11.6
34.5
66
150
66
16.5
7.2
12
11
13
-
Z%
HV/LV
X/R
ratio
MVA
Primary
kV
9.9
18
10-14
18.2
8.9
18.9
22.5
13.1
10-14
22.2
14.8
13
34
25
35
63
52
22
38
43
95
140
141
151
167
180
180
247
250
290
307
346
420
437.8
450
600
716
721
736
900
132
157.5
400
236
145
289
132
432
300
420
432
435
432
144.1
132
420
525
362
245
525
Table 5.6: Impedances of two winding distribution transformers

Primary voltage >200kV
MVA
100
180
240
240
240
250
500
750
1000
1000
333.3
Primary Primary Secondary Secondary Tertiary Z%

kV
Taps
kV
Taps
kV
HV/LV
66
33
10.7
275
132
15%
13
15.5
400
132
+15% -5%
13
20.2
400
132
+15% -5%
13
20.0
400
132
+15% -5%
13
20.0
400
132
+15% -5%
13
10-13
400
132
+0% -15%
22
14.3
400
275
13
12.1
400
275
13
15.8
400
275
33
17.0
5003
10%
2303
22
18.2
X/R
ratio
28
55
83
51
61
50
51
90
89
91
101
MVA/
phase
266.7
266.7
277
375
375
Table 5.8: Autotransformer data
Primary
Taps
Secondary
kV
10%
11
10%
11.5
5%
15
5%
15
+7.5% -16.5%
15
5%
16
10%
15
+3.75% -16.25%
15.5
+11.2% -17.6%
15
10%
15
+3.75% -16.25%
15.5
+5% -15%
17.5
+5.55% -14.45%
22
+10.8% -21.6%
21
10%
19
11.25%
21
10%
19
+6.25% -13.75%
22
+7% -13%
22
+7% -13%
23
(a) Three-phase units
Primary
Primary
Secondary
kV
Taps
kV
432/3 +6.67% -13.33%
23.5
432/3 +6.6% -13.4%
23.5
515/3
5%
22
525/3 +6.66% -13.32%
26
420/3 +6.66% -13.32%
26
(b) Single-phase units
Table 5.7: Impedances of generator transformers
61
Z%
HV/LV
X/R
ratio
13.5
12.7
14.7
13.6
25.7
13.4
13.8
15.2
28.6
15.7
15.3
16.4
16
14.6
14
16.2
15.7
15.2
15.5
15.7
46
41
57
47
71
34
40
61
70
43
67
81
87
50
49
74
61
83
73
67
Z%
HV/LV
15.8
15.7
16.9
15
15.1
X/R
ratio
92
79
105
118
112
Chapt 5-46-77
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:50
Page 62
between conductors becomes Zm. However, for rigorous

calculations a detailed treatment is necessary, with
account being taken of the spacing of a conductor in
relation to its neighbour and earth.
5.18 OVERHEAD LINES AND CABLES
In this section a description of common overhead lines

and cable systems is given, together with tables of their
important characteristics. The formulae for calculating
the characteristics are developed to give a basic idea of
the factors involved, and to enable calculations to be
made for systems other than those tabulated.
5 . 1 9 C A L C U L AT I O N O F S E R I E S I M P E D A N C E
The self impedance of a conductor with an earth return
and the mutual impedance between two parallel
conductors with a common earth return are given by the
Carson equations:
A transmission circuit may be represented by an

equivalent or T network using lumped constants as
shown in Figure 5.15. Z is the total series impedance
(R + jX)L and Y is the total shunt admittance (G + jB)L,
where L is the circuit length. The terms inside the
brackets in Figure 5.15 are correction factors that allow
for the fact that in the actual circuit the parameters are
distributed over the whole length of the circuit and not
lumped, as in the equivalent circuits.
De
dc
Equation 5.11
De
Zm = 0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log10
D
Z p = R +0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log10
where:
R = conductor a.c. resistance (ohms/km)
dc = geometric mean radius of a single conductor
D = spacing between the parallel conductors
f = system frequency
De = equivalent spacing of the earth return path
With short lines it is usually possible to ignore the shunt

admittance, which greatly simplifies calculations, but on
longer lines it must be included. Another simplification
that can be made is that of assuming the conductor
configuration to be symmetrical. The self-impedance of
each conductor becomes Zp , and the mutual impedance
X
R
G
R
G
= 216p/f where p is earth resistivity (ohms/cm3)
The above formulae give the impedances in ohms/km. It

should be noted that the last terms in Equation 5.11 are
very similar to the classical inductance formulae for long
straight conductors.
Series impedance Z = R + jX per unit length

Shunt admittance Y = G + jB per unit length
(a) Actual transmission circuit
sinh ZY
Z
ZY
Y
2
tanh ZY 2
ZY 2
The geometric means radius (GMR) of a conductor is an

equivalent radius that allows the inductance formula to
be reduced to a single term. It arises because the
inductance of a solid conductor is a function of the
internal flux linkages in addition to those external to it.
If the original conductor can be replaced by an
equivalent that is a hollow cylinder with infinitesimally
thin walls, the current is confined to the surface of the
conductor, and there can be no internal flux. The
geometric mean radius is the radius of the equivalent
conductor. If the original conductor is a solid cylinder
having a radius r its equivalent has a radius of 0.779r.
Y
2
tanh ZY 2
ZY 2
(b) Equivalent
5
Z
2
tanh ZY 2
ZY 2
Z
2
tanh ZY 2
ZY 2
sinh ZY
Y
ZY
It can be shown that the sequence impedances for a

symmetrical three-phase circuit are:
Z1 = Z2 = Z p Zm
Zo = Z p + 2 Zm
(c) T Equivalent
where Zp and Zm are given by Equation 5.11.

Substituting Equation 5.11 in Equation 5.12 gives:
Note: Z and Y in (b) and (c) are the total series

impedance and shunt admittance respectively.
Z=(R+jX)L and Y=(G+jB)L where L is the circuit length.
sinh ZY
=1+
ZY
tanh
ZY
ZY
= 1-
ZY
Z2Y2
120
ZY
Z2Y2
12
120
Z3Y3
Z1 = Z2 = R + j0.0029 f log10
+ ...
5040
+
17Z3Y3
Equation 5.12
D
dc
Zo = R +0.00296 f + j0.00869 f log10
+ ...
20160
De
dcD 2
Equation 5.13
Figure 5.15: Transmission circuit equivalents
62
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:50
Page 63
In the formula for Z0 the expression dcD2 is the

geometric mean radius of the conductor group.
Where the circuit is not symmetrical, the usual case,
symmetry can be maintained by transposing the
conductors so that each conductor is in each phase
position for one third of the circuit length. If A, B and C
are the spacings between conductors bc, ca and ab then
D in the above equations becomes the geometric mean
3
distance between conductors, equal to ABC.
3
D
a
Conductor
Radius r
h
D'
Writing Dc =
the sequence impedances in
ohms/km at 50Hz become:
dcD2,
Earth
ABC
dc
De
Zo = ( R +0.148 ) + j0.434 log10
Dc Equation 5.14
Z1 = Z2 = R + j0.145 log10
5 . 2 0 C A L C U L AT I O N O F S H U N T I M P E D A N C E
It can be shown that the potential of a conductor a
above ground due to its own charge qa and a charge -qa
on its image is:
Va =2 qaloge
2h
r
a'
Figure 5.16 Geometry of two parallel conductors
a and b and the image of a (a')
Equation 5.15
where h is the height above ground of the conductor and

r is the radius of the conductor, as shown in Figure 5.16.
to the conductor spacing, which is the case with overhead

lines, 2h=D. From Equation 5.12, the sequence
impedances of a symmetrical three-phase circuit are:
Similarly, it can be shown that the potential of a

conductor a due to a charge qb on a neighbouring
conductor b and the charge -qb on its image is:
Va' =2 qbloge
D'
D
Zo = j0.396 log10
Equation 5.16
where D is the spacing between conductors a and b and

D is the spacing between conductor b and the image of
conductor a as shown in Figure 5.14.
Since the capacitance C=q/V and the capacitive
reactance Xc =1/C, it follows that the self and mutual
capacitive reactance of the conductor system in Figure
5.16 can be obtained directly from Equations 5.15 and
5.16. Further, as leakage can usually be neglected, the
self and mutual shunt impedances Zp and Zm in
megohm-km at a system frequency of 50Hz are:
2h
r
D'
Z'm = j0.132 log10
D
D
r
D'
rD 2
Z1 = Z2 = j0.132 log10
It should be noted that the logarithmic terms above are

similar to those in Equation 5.13 except that r is the
actual radius of the conductors and D is the spacing
between the conductors and their images.
Again, where the conductors are not symmetrically
spaced but transposed, Equation 5.18 can be re-written
making use of the geometric mean distance between
3
conductors, ABC, and giving the distance of each
conductor above ground, that is, ha , h2 , hc , as follows:
ABC
8 ha hbhb
Z0 = j0.132 log10
r 3 A 2 B 2 C 2 Equation 5.19
Z1 = Z2 = j0.132 log10
Z'p = j0.132 log10
Equation 5.17
Where the distances above ground are great in relation
Equation 5.18
63
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:50
Page 64
3.80
0.50
6.0
U n (kV)
A=3.5m
a (m)
3.3
6.6
0.67
11
0.8
22
33
1.25
R2
0.55
R1
W
X
Y
Single circuit
Un= 63kV/66kV/90kV
Single circuit
1.75 - K
2.00 - N
6.6
2
2
2.50
a
2.50
3.30
3.30
b
d
4.00
3.50
2.70
Un(kV) a (m)
R1
W
63
1.4
90
1.85
Single circuit
Un= 90kV
63 kV(K) 3.0
3.7
3.0
90 kV (N) 3.1
3.8
3.8 1.85
1.4
3.50
2.8
2.8
3.5
3.5
R1
3.0
3.0
a (m)
63
1.40
66
1.40
90
1.85
Single circuit
Un= 63kV/90kV
Double circuit
Un= 63kV/66kV/90kV
Double circuit
Un= 63kV/90kV
3.4
6.60
U n (kV)
2
2
6.20
a
2.75
4.1
3.9
3.9
5.80
3.7
2.75
3.10
a
4.2
a=3.7m
b=4.6m
R1
8.0
8.0
R1
Single circuit
Un= 110kV
4.2
Double circuit
Un= 138kV
Double circuit
Un= 170kV
Figure 5.17: Typical OHL configurations (not to scale)

64
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:50
Page 65
8.45
12.2
2.5
d
5.0
1.75
5.20
7.5
5.0
a
6.0
b
7.50
6.0
c
n1
a
R1
R2
R1
n2
n
A 3.5 3.8 4.1 2.8

B 4.2 4.5 4.8 2.8
n1
n2
9.5
5.0 4.5
6.3
9.8
5.0 4.8
6.3
C 4.2 4.5 4.8 2.8
Single circuit
Un= 245kV
Double circuit
Un= 245kV
9.74
16.4
Double circuit
Un= 245kV
25.1
8.5
7.0
2.40
9.2
11.3
8.5
7.7
R1
R1
6.7
6.7
7.4
7.4
8.5
32.4
8.5
7.8
Double circuit
Un= 420kV
Single circuit
Un= 245kV
7.8
Double circuit
Un= 420kV
7.5
20.0
0
10.0
12.0
8.0
5.0
9.5
9.5
8.0
12.0
9.5
16.0
37.0
23.0
Single circuit
Un= 550kV
Double circuit
Un= 550kV
Figure 5.17(cont): Typical OHL configurations (not to scale)

65
Single circuit
Un= 800kV
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:51
Page 66
5 . 21 O V E R H E A D L I N E C I R C U I T S
WITH OR WITHOUT EARTH WIRES
In some cases, the phase conductors are not

symmetrically disposed to each other and therefore, as
previously indicated, electrostatic and electromagnetic
unbalance will result, which can be largely eliminated by
transposition. Modern practice is to build overhead lines
without transposition towers to reduce costs; this must
be taken into account in rigorous calculations of the
unbalances. In other cases, lines are formed of bundled
conductors, that is conductors formed of two, three or
four separate conductors. This arrangement minimises
losses when voltages of 220kV and above are involved.
Typical configurations of overhead line circuits are given

in Figure 5.17. Tower heights are not given as they vary
considerably according to the design span and nature of
the ground. As indicated in some of the tower outlines,
some tower designs are designed with a number of base
extensions for this purpose. Figure 5.18 shows a typical
tower.
It should be noted that the line configuration and

conductor spacings are influenced, not only by voltage,
but also by many other factors including type of
insulators, type of support, span length, conductor sag
and the nature of terrain and external climatic loadings.
Therefore, there can be large variations in spacings
between different line designs for the same voltage level,
so those depicted in Figure 5.17 are only typical
examples.
When calculating the phase self and mutual impedances,

Equations 5.11 and 5.17 may be used, but it should be
remembered that in this case Zp is calculated for each
conductor and Zm for each pair of conductors. This
section is not, therefore, intended to give a detailed
analysis, but rather to show the general method of
formulating the equations, taking the calculation of
series impedance as an example and assuming a single
circuit line with a single earth wire.
The phase voltage drops Va,Vb,Vb of a single circuit line
with a single earth wire due to currents Ia, Ib, Ib flowing
in the phases and Ie in the earth wire are:
Va = Zaa I a + Zab I b + Zac I c + Zae I e
Vb = Zba I a + Zbb I b + Zbc I c + Zbe I e
Vc = Zca I a + Zcb I b + Zcc I c + Zce I e
0 = Zea I a + Zeb I b + Z ec I c + Zee I e
Equation 5.20
where:
Zaa = R +0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log10
Zab = 0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log10
De
dc
De
D
and so on.
The equation required for the calculation of shunt
voltage drops is identical to Equation 5.20 in form,
except that primes must be included, the impedances
being derived from Equation 5.17.
Figure 5.18: Typical overhead line tower
66
21/06/02
9:51
Sequence impedance
Z00 = (Z00)
Z11 = Z22 = (Z11)
(Z00 =Z00)
Z01 = Z20 = (Z01 = Z20)
Z02 = Z10 = (Z02 = Z10)
Z12 = (Z12)
Z21 = (Z21)
(Z11=Z11 = Z22 = Z22)
(Z02 = Z02 = Z10 = Z10)
(Z02 = Z02 = Z10 = Z10
(Z12 = Z12)
(Z21 = Z21)
Page 67
132kV
Single circuit line
(400 mm2)
1.0782 7354
0.3947 7854
0.0116 -16652
58
0.0255 -409
0.0256 -1391
-
380kV
Single circuit line
(400 mm2)
0.8227 7036
0.3712 7557
0.0094 -3928
0.0153 2853
0.0275 14726
0.0275 2729
-
132kV
Double circuit line
(200 mm2)
1.1838 716
6619
0.6334 712
0.0257 -6325
0.0197 -9458
0.0276 16117
0.0277 3713
0.0114 886
0.0140 -9344
0.0150 -4411
0.0103 14510
0.0106 3056
275kV
Double circuit line
(400 mm2)
0.9520 7646
0.3354 7435
0.5219 7543
0.0241 -7214
0.0217 -10020
0.0281 14946
0.0282 296
0.0129 8844
0.0185 -9116
0.0173 -772
0.0101 14920
0.0102 2731
Table 5.10: Sequence self and mutual impedances

for various lines
From Equation 5.20 it can be seen that:

Ie =
1
1
Z11 = ( J aa + J bb + J cc ) ( J ab + J bc + J ac )
3
3
1
2
2
2
Z12 = ( J aa + a J bb + aJ cc ) + (aJ ab + a J ac + J bc )
3
3
1
2 2
2
Z21 = ( J aa + aJ bb + a J cc ) + (a J ab + aJ ac + J bc )
3
3
1
1
2
2
Z20 = ( J aa + a J bb + aJ cc ) (aJ ab + a J ac + J bc )
3
3
1
1
Z10 = ( J aa + aJ bb + a 2 J cc ) (a 2 J ab + aJ ac + Jbc )
3
3
Z22 = Z11
Z01 = Z20
Z02 = Z10
Z00 =
Zea
Z
Z
I a + eb I b + ec I c
Zee
Zee
Zee
Making use of this relation, the self and mutual

impedances of the phase conductors can be modified
using the following formula:
J nm = Znm
Zne Zme
Zee
Equation 5.21
For example:
J aa = Zaa
2
Zae
Zee
J ab = Zab
Zae Zbe
Zee
and so on.
So Equation 5.20 can be simplified while still taking account
of the effect of the earth wire by deleting the fourth row and
fourth column and substituting Jaa for Zaa, Jab for Zab , and
so on, calculated using Equation 5.21. The single circuit line
with a single earth wire can therefore be replaced by an
equivalent single circuit line having phase self and mutual
impedances Jaa , Jab and so on.
It can be shown from the symmetrical component theory
given in Chapter 4 that the sequence voltage drops of a
general three-phase circuit are:
V0 = Z00 I 0 + Z01 I1 + Z02 I 2
V1 = Z10 I 0 + Z11 I1 + Z12 I 2
V2 = Z20 I 0 + Z21 I1 + Z22 I 2
1
2
J aa + J bb + J cc ) + ( J ab + J bc + J ac )
(
3
3
Equation 5.23
The development of these equations for double circuit

lines with two earth wires is similar except that more
terms are involved.
The sequence mutual impedances are very small and can
usually be neglected; this also applies for double circuit
lines except for the mutual impedance between the zero
sequence circuits, namely (ZOO = ZOO). Table 5.10 gives
typical values of all sequence self and mutual impedances
some single and double circuit lines with earth wires. All
conductors are 400mm2 ACSR, except for the 132kV
double circuit example where they are 200mm2.
Equation 5.22
And, from Equation 5.20 modified as indicated above and

Equation 5.22, the sequence impedances are:
Chapt 5-46-77
5.22 OHL EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS

Consider an earthed, infinite busbar source behind a
length of transmission line as shown in Figure 5.19(a).
An earth fault involving phase A is assumed to occur at
F. If the driving voltage is E and the fault current is Ia
67
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:51
Page 68
distance relay applications because the phase and earth

fault relays are set to measure Z2 and are compensated
for the earth return impedance (Z0-Z1)/3.
F
Line
Source
It is customary to quote the impedances of a

transmission circuit in terms of Z1 and the ratio Z0/Z1 ,
since in this form they are most directly useful. By
definition, the positive sequence impedance Z1 is a
function of the conductor spacing and radius, whereas
the Z0/Z1 ratio is dependent primarily on the level of
earth resistivity . Further details may be found in
Chapter 12.
E
(a) Actual circuit
3E
5.23 CABLE CIRCUITS

Ic
Z1
Ib
Z1
Ia
Z1
The basic formulae for calculating the series and shunt

impedances of a transmission circuit, Equations 5.11 and
5.17 may be applied for evaluating cable parameters;
since the conductor configuration is normally
symmetrical GMD and GMR values can be used without
risk of appreciable errors. However, the formulae must
be modified by the inclusion of empirical factors to take
account of sheath and screen effects. A useful general
reference on cable formulae is given in reference [5.4];
more detailed information on particular types of cables
should be obtained direct from the manufacturers. The
equivalent circuit for determining the positive and
negative sequence series impedances of a cable is shown
in Figure 5.20. From this circuit it can be shown that:
(Z0-Z )/3
E

Figure 5.19: Three-phase equivalent
of a transmission circuit
then the earth

fault impedance is Ze . From symmetrical component
theory (see Chapter 4):
3E
Ia =
Z1 + Z2 + Z0
thus
X2
Z1 = Z2 = Rc + Rs 2 cs 2
Rs + X s
X2
+ j X c X s 2 cs 2
Rs + X s
2 Z +Z
Ze = 1 0
3
Equation 5.24
where Rc, Rs are the core and sheath (screen) resistances

per unit length, Xc and Xs core and sheath (screen)
reactances per unit length and Xcs the mutual reactance
between core and sheath (screen) per unit length. Xcs is
in general equal to Xs.
since, as shown, Z1 = Z2 for a transmission circuit. From

Equations 5.12, Z1=Zp-Zm and ZO=Zp+2Zm. Thus,
substituting these values in the above equation gives
Ze=Zp. This relation is physically valid because Zp is the
self-impedance of a single conductor with an earth return.
Similarly, for a phase fault between phases B and C at F:
The zero sequence series impedances are obtained

directly using Equation 5.11 and account can be taken of
the sheath in the same way as an earth wire in the case
of an overhead line.
3E
Ib = Ic =
2 Z1
_
where 3E is the voltage between phases and 2Z is the
impedance of the fault loop.
The shunt capacitances of a sheathed cable can be

calculated from the simple formula:
Making use of the above relations a transmission circuit

may be represented, without any loss in generality, by
the equivalent of Figure 5.19(b), where Z1 is the phase
impedance to the fault and (Z0-Z1)/3 is the impedance
of the earth path, there being no mutual impedance
between the phases or between phase and earth. The
equivalent is valid for single and double circuit lines
except that for double circuit lines there is zero sequence
mutual impedance, hence Z0=(Z00-Z00).
1
C = 0.0241
log d + 2 T
d
F / km
Equation 5.25
where d is the overall diameter for a round conductor, T

core insulation thickness and permittivity of dielectric.
When the conductors are oval or shaped, an equivalent
The equivalent circuit of Figure 5.19(b) is valuable in

68
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:51
Page 69
diameter d may be used where d=(1/) x periphery of

conductor. No simple formula exists for belted or
unscreened cables, but an empirical formula that gives
reasonable results is:
C=
0.0555
F / km
G
Number of Strands
7
19
37
61
91
127
169
Solid
Equation 5.26
where G is a geometric factor which is a function of core and

belt insulation thickness and overall conductor diameter.
GMR
0.726r
0.758r
0.768r
0.772r
0.774r
0.776r
0.776r
0.779r
Table 5.11: GMR for stranded copper, aluminium and

aluminium alloy conductors (r = conductor radius)
The following tables contain typical data on overhead

lines and cables that can be used in conjunction with the
various equations quoted in this text. It is not intended
that this data should replace that supplied by
manufacturers. Where the results of calculations are
important, reliance should not be placed on the data in
these Tables and data should be sourced directly from a
manufacturer/supplier.
Number of Layers
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
At the conceptual design stage, initial selection of overhead

line conductor size will be determined by four factors:
a. maximum load to be carried in MVA
b. length of line
c. conductor material and hence maximum
temperature
d. cost of losses
Table 5.21 gives indicative details of the capability of
various sizes of overhead lines using the above factors,
for AAAC and ACSR conductor materials. It is based on
commonly used standards for voltage drop and ambient
temperature. Since these factors may not be appropriate
for any particular project, the Table should only be used
as a guide for initial sizing, with appropriately detailed
calculations carried out to arrive at a final proposal.
Sheath circuit (s)
GMR
0.5r*
0.75r*
0.776r
0.803r
0.812r
0.826r
0.833r
0.778r
0.794r
0.799r
0.81r
0.827r
0.789r
0.793r
0.801r
* - Indicative values only, since GMR for single layer conductors is affected by cyclic
magnetic flux, which depends on various factors.
Table 5.12: GMR for aluminium conductor steel

reinforced (ACSR) (r = conductor radius)
Core circuit (c)
Ic
Xcs Per unit length
Is
Rs'Xs Per unit length
V
Rc'Xc Per unit length

V is voltage per unit length
Figure 5.20: Equivalent circuit for determining
positive or negative impedance of cables
Number of Al Strands
6
12
18
24
26
30
32
36
45
48
54
66
72
76
84
5 . 2 4 O V E R H E A D L I N E A N D C A B L E D ATA
69
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:53
Stranding
area (mm2)
Wire
10.6
21.2
26.7
33.6
42.4
53.5
67.4
85.0
107.2
126.6
152.0
177.3
202.7
228.0
253.3
278.7
304.3
329.3
354.7
380.0
405.3
456.0
506.7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
61
61
61
61
61
61
Stranding
area (mm2)
Wire
11.0
13.0
14.0
14.5
16.1
18.9
23.4
32.2
38.4
47.7
65.6
70.1
97.7
129.5
132.1
164.0
165.2
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
1
7
19
7
7
19
Page 70
Overall
Diameter
(mm)
RDC
Diameter
(mm)
(20C)
(Ohm/km)
1.38
1.96
2.20
7.00
2.77
3.12
3.50
3.93
4.42
2.91
3.19
3.45
3.69
2.80
2.95
3.10
3.23
2.62
2.72
2.82
2.91
3.09
3.25
(a) ASTM Standards
4.17
5.89
6.60
7.42
8.33
9.35
10.52
11.79
13.26
14.58
15.98
17.25
18.44
19.61
20.65
21.67
22.63
23.60
24.49
25.35
26.19
27.79
29.26
1.734
0.865
0.686
0.544
0.431
0.342
0.271
0.215
0.171
0.144
0.120
0.103
0.090
0.080
0.072
0.066
0.060
0.056
0.052
0.048
0.045
0.040
0.036
Overall
Diameter
(mm)
3.73
4.06
4.22
1.63
4.52
4.90
5.46
6.40
2.64
2.95
3.45
9.45
4.22
2.95
4.90
5.46
3.33
(b) BS Standards
RDC
Diameter
(mm)
3.25
4.06
4.22
4.88
4.52
4.90
5.46
6.40
7.92
8.84
10.36
9.45
12.65
14.73
14.71
16.38
16.64
(20C)
(Ohm/km)
1.617
1.365
1.269
1.231
1.103
0.938
0.756
0.549
0.466
0.375
0.273
0.252
0.183
0.139
0.135
0.109
0.109
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Designation
Aluminium
Sparrow
Robin
Raven
Quail
Pigeon
Penguin
Partridge
Ostrich
Merlin
Lark
Hawk
Dove
Teal
Swift
Tern
Canary
Curlew
Finch
Bittern
Falcon
Kiwi
6
6
6
6
6
6
26
26
18
30
26
26
30
36
45
54
54
54
45
54
72
2.67
3
3.37
3.78
4.25
4.77
2.57
2.73
3.47
2.92
3.44
3.72
3.61
3.38
3.38
3.28
3.52
3.65
4.27
4.36
4.41
Sectional area
(mm2)
Total Approx.
RDC
area overall at 20 C
2
(mm ) diameter (Ohm/km)
Aluminium Steel
(mm)
Steel
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
1
7
7
7
19
1
7
7
7
19
7
19
7
2.67
3
3.37
3.78
4.25
4.77
2
2.21
3.47
2.92
2.67
2.89
2.16
3.38
2.25
3.28
3.52
2.29
2.85
2.62
2.94
33.6
42.4
53.5
67.4
85.0
107.2
135.2
152.0
170.5
201.4
241.7
282.0
306.6
322.3
402.8
456.1
523.7
565.0
644.5
805.7
1100.0
5.6
7.1
8.9
11.2
14.2
17.9
22.0
26.9
9.5
46.9
39.2
45.9
69.6
9.0
27.8
59.1
68.1
78.3
44.7
102.4
47.5
39.2
49.5
62.4
78.6
99.2
125.1
157.2
178.9
179.9
248.3
280.9
327.9
376.2
331.2
430.7
515.2
591.8
643.3
689.2
908.1
1147.5
8.01
9
10.11
11.34
12.75
14.31
16.28
17.28
17.35
20.44
21.79
23.55
25.24
23.62
27.03
29.52
31.68
33.35
34.17
39.26
44.07
0.854
0.677
0.536
0.426
0.337
0.268
0.214
0.191
0.169
0.144
0.120
0.103
0.095
0.089
0.072
0.064
0.055
0.051
0.045
0.036
0.027
(a) to ASTM B232
Designation
Gopher
Weasel
Ferret
Rabbit
Horse
Dog
Tiger
Wolf
Dingo
Lynx
Caracal
Jaguar
Panther
Zebra
Table 5.13: Overhead line conductor - hard drawn copper
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Aluminium
6 2.36
6 2.59
6
3
6 3.35
12 2.79
6 4.72
30 2.36
30 2.59
18 3.35
30 2.79
18 3.61
18 3.86
30
3
54 3.18
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
1
7
1
1
7
7
Sectional area
(mm2)
Total Approx.
RDC
2
Steel
Aluminium Steel
(mm)
2.36
26.2
4.4 30.6
7.08
1.093
2.59
31.6
5.3 36.9
7.77
0.908
3
42.4
7.1 49.5
9
0.676
3.35
52.9
8.8 61.7 10.05
0.542
2.79
73.4
42.8 116.2 13.95
0.393
1.57
105.0
13.6 118.5 14.15
0.273
2.36
131.2
30.6 161.9 16.52
0.220
2.59
158.1
36.9 194.9 18.13
0.182
3.35
158.7
8.8 167.5 16.75
0.181
2.79
183.4
42.8 226.2 19.53
0.157
3.61
184.2
10.2 194.5 18.05
0.156
3.86
210.6
11.7 222.3 19.3
0.137
3
212.1
49.5 261.5
21
0.136
3.18
428.9
55.6 484.5 28.62
0.067
(b) to BS 215.2
Table 5.14: Overhead line conductor data - aluminium

conductors steel reinforced (ACSR).
70
Designation
35/6
44/32
50/8
70/12
95/15
95/55
120/70
150/25
170/40
185/30
210/50
265/35
305/40
380/50
550/70
560/50
650/45
1045/45
21/06/02
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Aluminium
6 2.7
14
2
6 3.2
26 1.85
26 2.15
12 3.2
12 3.6
26 2.7
30 2.7
26
3
30
3
24 3.74
54 2.68
54
3
54 3.6
48 3.86
45 4.3
72 4.3
1
7
1
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
9:53
Page 71
Sectional area
(mm2)
Steel
Aluminium Steel
2.7
34.4
5.7
2.4
44.0
31.7
3.2
48.3
8.0
1.44
69.9
11.4
1.67
94.4
15.3
3.2
96.5
56.3
3.6
122.1
71.3
2.1
148.9
24.2
2.7
171.8
40.1
2.33
183.8
29.8
3
212.1
49.5
2.49
263.7
34.1
2.68
304.6
39.5
3
381.7
49.5
3.6
549.7
71.3
3
561.7
49.5
2.87
653.5
45.3
2.87 1045.6 45.3
Total Approx.
RDC
(mm2) diameter (Ohm/km)
(mm)
40.1
8.1
0.834
75.6
11.2
0.652
56.3
9.6
0.594
81.3
11.7
0.413
109.7 13.6
0.305
152.8
16
0.299
193.4
18
0.236
173.1 17.1
0.194
211.8 18.9
0.168
213.6
19
0.157
261.5
21
0.136
297.7 22.4
0.109
344.1 24.1
0.095
431.2
27
0.076
620.9 32.4
0.052
611.2 32.2
0.051
698.8 34.4
0.044
1090.9 43
0.028
(c) to DIN 48204
Total Approxi.
RDC
2
Aluminium Steel
Aluminium Steel
(mm)
CANNA 59.7
12 2
7
2
37.7
22.0 59.7
10
0.765
CANNA 75.5
12 2.25 7 2.25 47.7
27.8 75.5 11.25
0.604
CANNA 93.3 12 2.5
7
2.5
58.9
34.4 93.3
12.5
0.489
CANNA 116.2 30 2
7
2
94.2
22.0 116.2
14
0.306
CROCUS 116.2 30 2
7
2
94.2
22.0 116.2
14
0.306
CANNA 147.1 30 2.25 7 2.25 119.3
27.8 147.1 15.75
0.243
CROCUS 181.6 30 2.5
7
2.5 147.3
34.4 181.6 17.5
0.197
CROCUS 228 30 2.8
7
2.8 184.7
43.1 227.8 19.6
0.157
CROCUS 297 36 2.8 19 2.25 221.7
75.5 297.2 22.45
0.131
CANNA 288 30 3.15 7 3.15 233.8
54.6 288.3 22.05
0.124
CROCUS 288 30 3.15 7 3.15 233.8
54.6 288.3 22.05
0.124
CROCUS 412 32 3.6 19 2.4 325.7
86.0 411.7 26.4
0.089
CROCUS 612 66 3.13 19 2.65 507.8 104.8 612.6 32.03
0.057
CROCUS 865 66 3.72 19 3.15 717.3 148.1 865.4 38.01
0.040
Designation
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Sectional area
(mm2)
Standard
Designation
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-397
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
ASTM B-399
Kench
Kibe
Kayak
Kopeck
Kittle
Radian
Rede
Ragout
Rex
Remex
Ruble
Rune
Spar
Solar
-
No.
Wire Sectional Overall
RDC
of Al diameter area
diameter at 20C
Strands
(mm) (mm2)
(mm) (Ohm/km)
7
7
7
7
7
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
37
37
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
2.67
3.37
3.78
4.25
4.77
3.66
3.78
3.98
4.14
4.36
4.46
4.7
3.6
4.02
3.686
3.909
4.12
3.096
3.233
3.366
3.493
3.617
3.734
3.962
4.176
39.2
62.4
78.6
99.3
125.1
199.9
212.6
236.4
255.8
283.7
296.8
330.6
376.6
469.6
202.7
228.0
253.3
278.5
303.7
329.2
354.6
380.2
405.2
456.2
506.8
8.0
10.1
11.4
12.8
14.3
18.3
18.9
19.9
19.9
21.8
22.4
23.6
25.2
28.2
18.4
19.6
20.6
21.7
22.6
23.6
24.5
25.3
26.1
27.7
29.2
(a) ASTM
Standard
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
BS 3242
(d) to NF C34-120
Table 5.14: Overhead line conductor data - aluminium
conductors steel reinforced (ACSR).
Designation
Box
Acacia
Almond
Cedar
Fir
Hazel
Pine
Willow
Oak
Mullberry
Ash
Elm
Poplar
Sycamore
Upas
Yew
Totara
Rubus
Araucaria
No.
RDC
of Al diameter area
diameter at 20C
Strands
(mm) (mm2)
(mm) (Ohm/km)
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
37
61
61
1.85
2.08
2.34
2.54
2.95
3.3
3.61
4.04
4.19
4.45
4.65
3.18
3.48
3.76
2.87
3.23
3.53
4.06
4.14
3.5
4.14
18.8
23.8
30.1
35.5
47.8
59.9
71.6
89.7
96.5
108.9
118.9
150.9
180.7
211.0
239.4
303.2
362.1
479.0
498.1
586.9
821.1
5.6
6.2
7.0
7.6
8.9
9.9
10.8
12.1
12.6
13.4
14.0
15.9
17.4
18.8
20.1
22.6
24.7
28.4
29.0
31.5
28.4
(b) BS
Table 5.15: Overhead line conductor data - aluminium alloy.
0.838
0.526
0.418
0.331
0.262
0.164
0.155
0.140
0.129
0.116
0.111
0.100
0.087
0.070
0.165
0.147
0.132
0.120
0.110
0.102
0.094
0.088
0.083
0.073
0.066
71
1.750
1.384
1.094
0.928
0.688
0.550
0.460
0.367
0.341
0.302
0.277
0.219
0.183
0.157
0.139
0.109
0.092
0.069
0.067
0.057
0.040
Chapt 5-46-77
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
Standard
9:53
Design.
Page 72
No.
RDC
of Al diameter area
diameter at 20C
Strands
(mm) (mm2)
(mm) (Ohm/km)
CSA C49.1-M87
10
1.45
11.5
4.3
2.863
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
16
25
40
63
100
125
160
200
250
315
400
450
7
7
7
7
19
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
1.83
2.29
2.89
3.63
2.78
3.1
3.51
3.93
4.39
3.53
3.98
4.22
18.4
28.8
46.0
72.5
115.1
143.9
184.2
230.2
287.7
362.1
460.4
517.9
5.5
6.9
8.7
10.9
13.9
15.5
17.6
19.6
22.0
24.7
27.9
29.6
1.788
1.142
0.716
0.454
0.287
0.230
0.180
0.144
0.115
0.092
0.072
0.064
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
CSA C49.1-M87
500
560
630
710
800
900
1000
1120
1250
1400
1500
37
37
61
61
61
61
91
91
91
91
91
4.45
4.71
3.89
4.13
4.38
4.65
4.01
4.25
4.49
4.75
4.91
575.5
644.5
725.0
817.2
920.8
1035.8
1150.9
1289.1
1438.7
1611.3
1726.4
31.2
33.0
35.0
37.2
39.5
41.9
44.1
46.7
49.4
52.2
54.1
0.058
0.051
0.046
0.041
0.036
0.032
0.029
0.026
0.023
0.021
0.019
Standard
Designation
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
ASTER 22
ASTER 34-4
ASTER 54-6
ASTER 75-5
ASTER 93,3
ASTER 117
ASTER 148
ASTER 181-6
ASTER 228
ASTER 288
ASTER 366
ASTER 570
ASTER 851
ASTER 1144
ASTER 1600
No. of
RDC
Al
diameter area
diameter at 20C
Strands
(mm) (mm2)
(mm) (Ohm/km)
7
7
7
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
61
91
91
127
2
2.5
3.15
2.25
2.5
2.8
3.15
2.5
2.8
3.15
3.55
3.45
3.45
4
4
22.0
34.4
54.6
75.5
93.3
117.0
148.1
181.6
227.8
288.3
366.2
570.2
850.7
1143.5
1595.9
6.0
7.5
9.5
11.3
12.5
14.0
15.8
17.5
19.6
22.1
24.9
31.1
38.0
44.0
52.0
1.497
0.958
0.604
0.438
0.355
0.283
0.223
0.183
0.146
0.115
0.091
0.058
0.039
0.029
0.021
(e) NF
Table 5.15 (cont): Overhead line conductor data - aluminium alloy.
(c) CSA
Standard
Designation
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
DIN 48201
16
25
35
50
50
70
95
120
150
185
240
300
400
500
No. of
RDC
Al
diameter area
diameter at 20C
2
Strands
(mm) (mm )
(mm) (Ohm/km)
7
7
7
19
7
19
19
19
37
37
61
61
61
61
1.7
2.1
2.5
1.8
3
2.1
2.5
2.8
2.25
2.5
2.25
2.5
2.89
3.23
15.9
24.3
34.4
48.4
49.5
65.8
93.3
117.0
147.1
181.6
242.5
299.4
400.1
499.8
5.1
6.3
7.5
9.0
9.0
10.5
12.5
14.0
15.7
17.5
20.2
22.5
26.0
29.1
2.091
1.370
0.967
0.690
0.672
0.507
0.358
0.285
0.228
0.184
0.138
0.112
0.084
0.067
(d) DIN
72
Standard
21/06/02
9:53
Page 73
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Designation
Alloy
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
ASTM B711
Sectional area
(mm2)
Steel
26
26
30
26
30
26
26
30
30
30
54
54
54
54
84
84
2.62
2.97
2.76
3.13
3.08
3.5
3.7
3.66
3.88
4.12
3.26
3.63
3.85
4.34
4.12
4.35
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
2.04
2.31
2.76
2.43
3.08
2.72
2.88
2.2
2.33
2.47
1.98
2.18
2.31
2.6
2.47
2.61
Alloy
Steel
140.2
180.1
179.5
200.1
223.5
250.1
279.6
315.6
354.7
399.9
450.7
558.9
628.6
798.8
1119.9
1248.4
22.9
29.3
41.9
32.5
52.2
40.7
45.6
72.2
81.0
91.0
58.5
70.9
79.6
100.9
91.0
101.7
Total
area
(mm2)
Approximate
overall diameter
(mm)
163.1
209.5
221.4
232.5
275.7
290.8
325.2
387.9
435.7
491.0
509.2
629.8
708.3
899.7
1210.9
1350.0
7.08
11.08
12.08
13.08
16.08
17.08
19.08
22.08
24.08
26.08
27.08
29.08
30.08
32.08
35.08
36.08
Total
area
(mm2)
Approximate
overall diameter
(mm)
81.3
109.7
157.8
173.1
211.8
213.6
261.5
260.8
297.7
344.1
431.2
488.2
611.2
764.5
11.7
13.6
16.3
17.1
18.9
19
21
21
22.4
24.1
27
28.7
32.2
36
Approximate
overall diameter
(mm)
RDC at 20 C
(ohm/km)
14
15.75
15.75
17.5
17.5
19.6
19.6
22.05
22.05
22.45
26.4
0.591
0.467
0.279
0.378
0.226
0.300
0.180
0.238
0.142
0.162
0.226
RDC at 20 C
(ohm/km)
0.240
0.187
0.188
0.168
0.151
0.135
0.120
0.107
0.095
0.084
0.075
0.060
0.054
0.042
0.030
0.027
(a) ASTM
Standard
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Designation
Alloy
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
DIN 48206
70/12
95/15
125/30
150/25
170/40
185/30
210/50
230/30
265/35
305/40
380/50
450/40
560/50
680/85
Sectional area
(mm2)
Steel
26
26
30
26
30
26
30
24
24
54
54
48
48
54
1.85
2.15
2.33
2.7
2.7
3
3
3.5
3.74
2.68
3
3.45
3.86
4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
19
1.44
1.67
2.33
2.1
2.7
2.33
3
2.33
2.49
2.68
3
2.68
3
2.4
Alloy
Steel
69.9
94.4
127.9
148.9
171.8
183.8
212.1
230.9
263.7
304.6
381.7
448.7
561.7
678.6
11.4
15.3
29.8
24.2
40.1
29.8
49.5
29.8
34.1
39.5
49.5
39.5
49.5
86.0
RDC at 20 C
(ohm/km)
0.479
0.355
0.262
0.225
0.195
0.182
0.158
0.145
0.127
0.110
0.088
0.075
0.060
0.049
Chapt 5-46-77
(b) DIN
Standard
Stranding and wire

diameter (mm)
Designation
Alloy
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
NF C34-125
PHLOX 116.2
PHLOX 147.1
PASTEL 147.1
PHLOX 181.6
PASTEL 181.6
PHLOX 228
PASTEL 228
PHLOX 288
PASTEL 288
PASTEL 299
PHLOX 376
18
18
30
18
30
18
30
18
30
42
24
Sectional area
(mm2)
Steel
2
2.25
2.25
2.5
2.5
2.8
2.8
3.15
3.15
2.5
2.8
19
19
7
19
7
19
7
19
7
19
37
2
2.25
2.25
2.5
2.5
2.8
2.8
3.15
3.15
2.5
2.8
(c) NF
Table 5.16: Overhead line conductor data aluminium

alloy conductors, steel re-inforced (AACSR)
73
Alloy
Steel
Total
area
(mm2)
56.5
71.6
119.3
88.4
147.3
110.8
184.7
140.3
233.8
206.2
147.8
59.7
75.5
27.8
93.3
34.4
117.0
43.1
148.1
54.6
93.3
227.8
116.2
147.1
147.1
181.6
181.6
227.8
227.8
288.3
288.3
299.4
375.6
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:53
Page 74
XAC at 50 Hz
XAC at 50 Hz and shunt capacitance
66kV
33kV
Flat
circuit
Double
vertical
Triangle
132kV
Double
triangle
Sectional
area of
aluminium
RDC
(20C)
RAC at
50Hz
@ 20C
3.3kV
6.6kV
11kV
22kV
Double
vertical
Flat
circuit
mm2
/km
/km
/km
/km
/km
/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
13.3
15.3
21.2
23.9
26.2
28.3
33.6
37.7
42.4
44.0
47.7
51.2
58.9
63.1
67.4
73.4
79.2
85.0
94.4
2.1586
1.8771
1.3557
1.2013
1.0930
1.0246
0.8535
0.7647
0.6768
0.6516
0.6042
0.5634
0.4894
0.4545
0.4255
0.3930
0.3622
0.3374
0.3054
2.159
1.877
1.356
1.201
1.093
1.025
0.854
0.765
0.677
0.652
0.604
0.564
0.490
0.455
0.426
0.393
0.362
0.338
0.306
0.395
0.391
0.381
0.376
0.374
0.352
0.366
0.327
0.359
0.320
0.319
0.317
0.313
0.346
0.344
0.306
0.339
0.337
0.302
0.409
0.405
0.395
0.390
0.388
0.366
0.380
0.341
0.373
0.334
0.333
0.331
0.327
0.360
0.358
0.320
0.353
0.351
0.316
0.420
0.415
0.405
0.401
0.398
0.377
0.390
0.351
0.383
0.344
0.344
0.341
0.337
0.371
0.369
0.330
0.363
0.361
0.327
0.434
0.429
0.419
0.415
0.412
0.391
0.404
0.365
0.397
0.358
0.358
0.355
0.351
0.385
0.383
0.344
0.377
0.375
0.341
0.445
0.441
0.430
0.426
0.424
0.402
0.416
0.376
0.409
0.369
0.369
0.367
0.362
0.396
0.394
0.356
0.389
0.387
0.352
8.7
8.8
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.4
9.4
9.7
9.6
9.9
9.9
10.0
10.1
9.9
10.0
10.3
10.1
10.2
10.3
0.503
0.499
0.488
0.484
0.482
0.460
0.474
0.435
0.467
0.427
0.427
0.425
0.421
0.454
0.452
0.414
0.447
0.445
0.410
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.2
8.1
8.4
8.3
8.5
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.5
8.5
8.8
8.7
8.7
8.8
0.513
0.508
0.498
0.494
0.491
0.470
0.484
0.444
0.476
0.437
0.437
0.434
0.430
0.464
0.462
0.423
0.457
0.454
0.420
7.4
7.5
7.7
7.8
7.8
8.0
7.9
8.2
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.3
8.3
8.6
8.4
8.5
8.6
0.520
0.515
0.505
0.501
0.498
0.477
0.491
0.451
0.483
0.444
0.444
0.441
0.437
0.471
0.469
0.430
0.464
0.461
0.427
7.3
7.4
7.6
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.8
8.1
7.9
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.3
8.2
8.2
8.5
8.3
8.4
8.4
0.541
0.537
0.527
0.522
0.520
0.498
0.512
0.473
0.505
0.465
0.465
0.463
0.459
0.492
0.490
0.452
0.485
0.483
0.448
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.3
7.5
7.5
7.7
7.6
7.8
7.8
7.9
7.9
7.8
7.8
8.1
7.9
7.9
8.0
0.528
0.523
0.513
0.509
0.506
0.485
0.499
0.459
0.491
0.452
0.452
0.449
0.445
0.479
0.477
0.438
0.472
0.469
0.435
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5
7.7
7.7
7.9
7.8
8.0
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.0
8.1
8.3
8.2
8.2
8.3
0.556
0.552
0.542
0.537
0.535
0.513
0.527
0.488
0.520
0.481
0.480
0.478
0.474
0.507
0.505
0.467
0.500
0.498
0.463
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.2
7.4
7.3
7.5
7.6
7.6
7.7
7.5
7.6
7.8
7.6
7.7
7.8
105.0
121.6
127.9
131.2
135.2
148.9
158.7
170.5
184.2
201.4
210.6
221.7
230.9
241.7
263.7
282.0
306.6
322.3
339.3
362.6
386.0
402.8
428.9
448.7
456.1
483.4
494.4
510.5
523.7
0.2733
0.2371
0.2254
0.2197
0.2133
0.1937
0.1814
0.1691
0.1565
0.1438
0.1366
0.1307
0.1249
0.1193
0.1093
0.1022
0.0945
0.0895
0.085
0.0799
0.0747
0.0719
0.0671
0.0642
0.0635
0.0599
0.0583
0.0565
0.0553
0.274
0.237
0.226
0.220
0.214
0.194
0.182
0.170
0.157
0.144
0.137
0.131
0.126
0.120
0.110
0.103
0.095
0.090
0.086
0.081
0.076
0.073
0.068
0.066
0.065
0.061
0.060
0.058
0.057
0.330
0.294
0.290
0.289
0.297
0.288
0.292
0.290
0.287
0.280
0.283
0.274
0.276
0.279
0.272
0.274
0.267
0.270
0.265
0.262
0.261
0.261
0.267
0.257
0.257
0.255
0.254
0.252
0.252
0.344
0.308
0.304
0.303
0.311
0.302
0.306
0.304
0.302
0.294
0.297
0.288
0.290
0.293
0.286
0.288
0.281
0.284
0.279
0.276
0.275
0.275
0.281
0.271
0.271
0.269
0.268
0.266
0.266
0.355
0.318
0.314
0.313
0.322
0.312
0.316
0.314
0.312
0.304
0.308
0.298
0.300
0.303
0.296
0.298
0.291
0.294
0.289
0.286
0.285
0.285
0.291
0.281
0.281
0.279
0.279
0.277
0.277
0.369
0.332
0.328
0.327
0.336
0.326
0.330
0.328
0.326
0.318
0.322
0.312
0.314
0.317
0.310
0.312
0.305
0.308
0.303
0.300
0.299
0.299
0.305
0.295
0.295
0.293
0.293
0.291
0.291
0.380
0.344
0.340
0.339
0.347
0.338
0.342
0.340
0.337
0.330
0.333
0.323
0.326
0.329
0.321
0.324
0.317
0.320
0.315
0.311
0.311
0.310
0.316
0.306
0.307
0.305
0.304
0.302
0.302
10.4
10.6
10.7
10.7
10.5
10.8
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.0
11.3
11.2
11.2
11.3
11.3
11.5
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.8
11.5
11.9
12.0
12.0
12.1
12.1
12.1
0.438
0.402
0.398
0.397
0.405
0.396
0.400
0.398
0.395
0.388
0.391
0.381
0.384
0.387
0.380
0.382
0.375
0.378
0.373
0.369
0.369
0.368
0.374
0.364
0.365
0.363
0.362
0.360
0.360
8.8
9.0
9.0
9.1
9.0
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.3
9.5
9.4
9.4
9.5
9.5
9.7
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.8
9.9
9.7
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.1
10.1
0.448
0.412
0.407
0.407
0.415
0.406
0.410
0.407
0.405
0.398
0.401
0.391
0.393
0.396
0.389
0.392
0.384
0.387
0.383
0.379
0.379
0.378
0.384
0.374
0.374
0.372
0.372
0.370
0.370
8.6
8.8
8.8
8.8
8.8
8.9
8.9
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.1
9.3
9.2
9.2
9.3
9.3
9.4
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.6
9.6
9.4
9.7
9.7
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
0.455
0.419
0.414
0.414
0.422
0.413
0.417
0.414
0.412
0.405
0.408
0.398
0.400
0.403
0.396
0.399
0.391
0.394
0.390
0.386
0.386
0.385
0.391
0.381
0.381
0.379
0.379
0.377
0.377
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.8
8.8
8.9
8.9
9.1
9.0
9.0
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.2
9.5
9.5
9.6
9.6
9.6
9.6
0.476
0.440
0.436
0.435
0.443
0.434
0.438
0.436
0.433
0.426
0.429
0.419
0.422
0.425
0.418
0.420
0.413
0.416
0.411
0.408
0.407
0.407
0.413
0.402
0.403
0.401
0.400
0.398
0.398
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.3
8.2
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.4
8.6
8.6
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.9
8.9
8.7
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.1
9.1
0.463
0.427
0.422
0.421
0.430
0.420
0.425
0.422
0.420
0.412
0.416
0.406
0.408
0.411
0.404
0.406
0.399
0.402
0.398
0.394
0.393
0.393
0.399
0.389
0.389
0.387
0.387
0.385
0.385
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.5
8.4
8.6
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.8
8.7
8.9
8.9
8.8
8.9
8.9
9.1
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.0
9.3
9.3
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
0.491
0.455
0.451
0.450
0.458
0.449
0.453
0.451
0.449
0.441
0.444
0.435
0.437
0.440
0.433
0.435
0.428
0.431
0.426
0.423
0.422
0.422
0.428
0.418
0.418
0.416
0.415
0.413
0.413
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.0
7.9
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.2
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.4
8.5
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.4
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
Table 5.17: Feeder circuits data - overhead lines
74
21/06/02
9:53
Page 75
XAC at 50 Hz
XAC at 50 Hz and shunt capacitance

66kV
Sectional RDC
RAC at
area of (20C) 50Hz
aluminium
@ 20C
3.3kV
6.6kV
11kV
22kV
33kV
Flat
circuit
Double
vertical
X
C
X
/km nF/km /km
Triangle
mm2
/km
/km
/km
/km
/km
/km
X
/km
C
nF/km
13.3
15.3
21.2
23.9
26.2
28.3
33.6
37.7
42.4
44.0
47.7
51.2
58.9
63.1
67.4
73.4
79.2
85.0
94.4
2.1586
1.8771
1.3557
1.2013
1.0930
1.0246
0.8535
0.7647
0.6768
0.6516
0.6042
0.5634
0.4894
0.4545
0.4255
0.3930
0.3622
0.3374
0.3054
2.159
1.877
1.356
1.201
1.093
1.025
0.854
0.765
0.677
0.652
0.604
0.564
0.490
0.455
0.426
0.393
0.362
0.338
0.306
0.474
0.469
0.457
0.452
0.449
0.423
0.439
0.392
0.431
0.384
0.383
0.380
0.375
0.416
0.413
0.367
0.407
0.404
0.363
0.491
0.486
0.474
0.469
0.466
0.440
0.456
0.409
0.447
0.400
0.400
0.397
0.392
0.432
0.430
0.384
0.424
0.421
0.380
0.503
0.498
0.486
0.481
0.478
0.452
0.468
0.421
0.460
0.413
0.412
0.409
0.404
0.445
0.442
0.396
0.436
0.433
0.392
0.520
0.515
0.503
0.498
0.495
0.469
0.485
0.438
0.477
0.429
0.429
0.426
0.421
0.462
0.459
0.413
0.453
0.450
0.409
0.534
0.529
0.516
0.511
0.508
0.483
0.499
0.452
0.490
0.443
0.443
0.440
0.435
0.475
0.473
0.427
0.467
0.464
0.423
8.7
8.8
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.4
9.4
9.7
9.6
9.9
9.9
10.0
10.1
9.9
10.0
10.3
10.1
10.2
10.3
0.604
0.598
0.586
0.581
0.578
0.552
0.569
0.521
0.560
0.513
0.513
0.510
0.505
0.545
0.543
0.496
0.536
0.534
0.492
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.2
8.1
8.4
8.3
8.5
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.5
8.5
8.8
8.7
8.7
8.8
0.615
0.610
0.598
0.593
0.590
0.564
0.580
0.533
0.572
0.525
0.524
0.521
0.516
0.557
0.554
0.508
0.548
0.545
0.504
7.4
7.5
7.7
7.8
7.8
8.0
7.9
8.2
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.3
8.3
8.6
8.4
8.5
8.6
0.624
0.619
0.606
0.601
0.598
0.572
0.589
0.541
0.580
0.533
0.533
0.530
0.525
0.565
0.563
0.516
0.556
0.554
0.512
105.0
121.6
127.9
131.2
135.2
148.9
158.7
170.5
184.2
201.4
210.6
221.7
230.9
241.7
263.7
282.0
306.6
322.3
339.3
362.6
386.0
402.8
428.9
448.7
456.1
483.4
494.4
510.5
523.7
0.2733
0.2371
0.2254
0.2197
0.2133
0.1937
0.1814
0.1691
0.1565
0.1438
0.1366
0.1307
0.1249
0.1193
0.1093
0.1022
0.0945
0.0895
0.0850
0.0799
0.0747
0.0719
0.0671
0.0642
0.0635
0.0599
0.0583
0.0565
0.0553
0.274
0.238
0.226
0.220
0.214
0.194
0.182
0.170
0.157
0.145
0.137
0.132
0.126
0.120
0.110
0.103
0.096
0.091
0.086
0.081
0.076
0.074
0.069
0.066
0.065
0.062
0.060
0.059
0.057
0.396
0.353
0.348
0.347
0.357
0.346
0.351
0.348
0.345
0.336
0.340
0.328
0.331
0.335
0.326
0.329
0.320
0.324
0.318
0.314
0.313
0.313
0.320
0.308
0.305
0.306
0.305
0.303
0.303
0.413
0.370
0.365
0.364
0.374
0.362
0.367
0.365
0.362
0.353
0.357
0.345
0.348
0.351
0.343
0.346
0.337
0.341
0.335
0.331
0.330
0.330
0.337
0.325
0.322
0.323
0.322
0.320
0.320
0.426
0.382
0.377
0.376
0.386
0.375
0.380
0.377
0.374
0.365
0.369
0.357
0.360
0.364
0.355
0.358
0.349
0.353
0.347
0.343
0.342
0.342
0.349
0.337
0.334
0.335
0.334
0.332
0.332
0.442
0.399
0.394
0.393
0.403
0.392
0.397
0.394
0.391
0.382
0.386
0.374
0.377
0.381
0.372
0.375
0.366
0.370
0.364
0.360
0.359
0.359
0.366
0.354
0.351
0.352
0.351
0.349
0.349
0.456
0.413
0.408
0.407
0.416
0.405
0.410
0.408
0.405
0.396
0.400
0.388
0.391
0.394
0.386
0.389
0.380
0.384
0.378
0.374
0.373
0.372
0.380
0.367
0.364
0.366
0.365
0.362
0.363
10.4
10.6
10.7
10.7
10.5
10.8
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.0
11.3
11.2
11.2
11.3
11.3
11.5
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.8
11.5
11.9
12.0
12.0
12.1
12.1
12.1
0.526
0.482
0.477
0.476
0.486
0.475
0.480
0.477
0.474
0.466
0.469
0.458
0.460
0.464
0.455
0.458
0.450
0.453
0.448
0.443
0.443
0.442
0.449
0.437
0.434
0.435
0.435
0.432
0.432
8.8
9.0
9.0
9.1
9.0
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.3
9.5
9.4
9.4
9.5
9.5
9.7
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.8
9.9
9.7
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.1
10.1
0.537
0.494
0.489
0.488
0.498
0.487
0.492
0.489
0.486
0.477
0.481
0.469
0.472
0.476
0.467
0.470
0.461
0.465
0.459
0.455
0.454
0.454
0.461
0.449
0.446
0.447
0.446
0.444
0.444
8.6
8.8
8.8
8.8
8.8
8.9
8.9
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.1
9.3
9.2
9.2
9.3
9.3
9.4
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.6
9.6
9.4
9.7
9.7
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
0.546
0.502
0.497
0.496
0.506
0.495
0.500
0.497
0.494
0.486
0.489
0.478
0.480
0.484
0.476
0.478
0.470
0.473
0.468
0.463
0.463
0.462
0.469
0.457
0.454
0.455
0.455
0.452
0.452
Table 5.17 (cont): Feeder circuits data - overhead lines
75
C
X
nF/km /km
Double
vertical
C
nF/km
132kV
Double
triangle
Flat
circuit
X
C
/km nF/km
X
C
X
C
/km nF/km /km nF/km
7.3
7.4
7.6
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.8
8.1
7.9
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.3
8.2
8.2
8.5
8.3
8.4
8.4
0.649
0.644
0.632
0.627
0.624
0.598
0.614
0.567
0.606
0.559
0.558
0.555
0.550
0.591
0.588
0.542
0.582
0.579
0.538
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.3
7.5
7.5
7.7
7.6
7.8
7.8
7.9
7.9
7.8
7.8
8.1
7.9
7.9
8.0
0.633
0.628
0.616
0.611
0.608
0.582
0.598
0.551
0.589
0.542
0.542
0.539
0.534
0.574
0.572
0.526
0.566
0.563
0.522
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5
7.7
7.7
7.9
7.8
8.0
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.0
8.1
8.3
8.2
8.2
8.3
0.668
0.662
0.650
0.645
0.642
0.616
0.633
0.585
0.624
0.577
0.576
0.573
0.568
0.609
0.606
0.560
0.600
0.598
0.556
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.2
7.4
7.3
7.5
7.6
7.6
7.7
7.5
7.6
7.8
7.6
7.7
7.8
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.8
8.8
8.9
8.9
9.1
9.0
9.0
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.2
9.5
9.6
9.6
9.6
9.6
9.6
0.572
0.528
0.523
0.522
0.532
0.521
0.526
0.523
0.520
0.511
0.515
0.503
0.506
0.510
0.501
0.504
0.495
0.499
0.493
0.489
0.488
0.488
0.495
0.483
0.480
0.481
0.480
0.478
0.478
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.3
8.2
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.4
8.6
8.6
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.9
8.9
8.7
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.1
9.1
0.555
0.512
0.507
0.506
0.516
0.504
0.509
0.507
0.504
0.495
0.499
0.487
0.490
0.493
0.485
0.488
0.479
0.483
0.477
0.473
0.472
0.472
0.479
0.467
0.463
0.465
0.464
0.462
0.462
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.5
8.4
8.6
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.8
8.7
8.9
8.9
8.8
8.9
8.9
9.1
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.0
9.3
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
0.590
0.546
0.541
0.540
0.550
0.539
0.544
0.541
0.538
0.529
0.533
0.522
0.524
0.528
0.519
0.522
0.514
0.517
0.511
0.507
0.506
0.506
0.513
0.501
0.498
0.499
0.498
0.496
0.496
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.0
7.9
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.2
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.4
8.5
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.4
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
Chapt 5-46-77
Chapt 5-46-77
21/06/02
9:53
Page 76
Conductor size mm2
Series Resistance
3.3kV Series Reactance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
11kV Series Reactance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
66kV* Series Reactance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
25
0.927
0.097
0.059
0.927
0.121
0.085
0.927
0.128
0.068
-
35
0.669
0.092
0.067
0.669
0.113
0.095
0.669
0.119
0.074
0.669
0.136
0.053
0.669
0.15
0.042
-
50
0.494
0.089
0.079
0.494
0.108
0.104
0.494
0.114
0.082
0.494
0.129
0.057
0.494
0.143
0.045
-
70
0.342
0.083
0.09
0.342
0.102
0.12
0.342
0.107
0.094
0.348
0.121
0.065
0.348
0.134
0.05
-
95
0.247
0.08
0.104
0.247
0.096
0.136
0.247
0.101
0.105
0.247
0.114
0.072
0.247
0.127
0.055
-
120
0.196
0.078
0.111
0.196
0.093
0.149
0.196
0.098
0.115
0.196
0.11
0.078
0.196
0.122
0.059
-
150
0.158
0.076
0.122
0.158
0.091
0.16
0.158
0.095
0.123
0.158
0.107
0.084
0.158
0.118
0.063
-
185
0.127
0.075
0.133
0.127
0.088
0.177
0.127
0.092
0.135
0.127
0.103
0.091
0.127
0.114
0.068
-
240
0.098
0.073
0.146
0.098
0.086
0.189
0.098
0.089
0.15
0.098
0.1
0.1
0.098
0.109
0.075
-
300
0.08
0.072
0.16
0.08
0.085
0.195
0.08
0.087
0.165
0.08
0.094
0.109
0.08
0.105
0.081
-
400
0.064
0.071
0.179
0.064
0.083
0.204
0.064
0.084
0.182
0.064
0.091
0.12
0.064
0.102
0.089
-
*500
0.051
0.088
0.19
0.057
0.088
0.205
0.051
0.089
0.194
0.051
0.096
0.128
0.051
0.103
0.094
0.0387
0.117
0.079
0.0387
0.13
0.053
0.0487 0.0387
0.145 0.137
0.044 0.047
*630
0.042
0.086
0.202
0.042
0.086
0.228
0.042
0.086
0.216
0.042
0.093
0.141
0.042
0.1
0.103
0.031
0.113
0.082
0.031
0.125
0.06
0.0310
0.134
0.05
0.0310
0.172
0.04
*800
0.0254
0.109
0.088
0.0254
0.12
0.063
0.0254
0.128
0.057
0.0254
0.162
0.047
*1000 *1200 *1600
0.0215
0.102
0.11
0.0215
0.115
0.072
0.0215
0.123
0.057
0.0215
0.156
0.05
0.0161
0.119
0.063
0.0161
0.151
0.057
0.0126
0.113
0.072
0.0126
0.144
0.063
For aluminium conductors of the same cross-section, the resistance increases by 60-65 percent, the series reactance and shunt capacitance is virtually unaltered.* - single core cables in trefoil.
Different values apply if laid in spaced flat formation.
Series Resistance - a.c. resistance @ 90C. Series reactance - equivalent star reactance.
Data for 245kV and 420kV cables may vary significantly from that given, dependent on manufacturer and construction.
Table 5.18: Characteristics of polyethylene
insulated cables (XLPE)
Conductor Size (mm2)

Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
Series Resistance
Susceptance
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
R (/km)
X (/km)
C (mS/km)
10
206
87.7
16
25
35
50
70
95
120 150 185 240
1303 825.5 595 439.9 304.9 220.4 174.5 142.3 113.9 87.6
83.6 76.7 74.8 72.5 70.2 67.5 66.6 65.7 64.7 63.8
514.2 326
26.2 24.3
-
111
9.26
206.4 148.8 110

22 21.2 20.4
76.2
19.6
55.1
18.7
43.6
18.3
35.6
17.9
28.5
17.6
21.9
17.1
300
70.8
62.9
400
56.7
62.4
*500
45.5
73.5
*630
37.1
72.1
*800 *1000
31.2 27.2
71.2 69.8
17.6
16.9
14.1
16.5
11.3
18.8
9.3
18.4
7.8
18
6.7
17.8
0.87 0.63 0.46 0.32 0.23 0.184 0.15 0.12 0.092 0.074 0.059 0.048 0.039 0.033 0.028
0.107 0.1 0.096 0.091 0.087 0.085 0.083 0.081 0.079 0.077 0.076 0.085 0.083 0.081 0.08
17.69 12.75 9.42
2.89 2.71 2.6
-
4.19
1.16
6.53
2.46
4.71
2.36
3.74
2.25
3.04
2.19
2.44
2.11
1.87
2.04
1.51
1.97
1.21
1.92
0.96
1.9
0.79
1.84
0.66
1.8
0.57
1.76
2.9
1.09
2.09
1.03
0.181 0.147 0.118 0.09 0.073 0.058 0.046 0.038 0.031 0.027
0.107 0.103 0.101 0.097 0.094 0.09 0.098 0.097 0.092 0.089
0.104 0.116 0.124 0.194 0.151 0.281 0.179 0.198 0.22 0.245
Cables are of the solid type, 3 core except for those marked *. Impedances at 50Hz frequency
Table 5.19: Characteristics of paper insulated cables
76
21/06/02
9:53
3.3kV
Conductor size (mm2)

16
25
35
50
70
95
120
150
185
240
300
400
*500
*630
*800
*1000
3 core Copper conductors, 50Hz values.
* - single core cables in trefoil
Table 5.20: 3.3 kV PVC insulated cables
Voltage Level
Un kV
Page 77
Um kV
11
12
24
30
33
36
66
72.5
132
145
220
245
380
420
R /km
X /km
1.380
0.870
0.627
0.463
0.321
0.232
0.184
0.150
0.121
0.093
0.075
0.060
0.049
0.041
0.035
0.030
0.106
0.100
0.094
0.091
0.086
0.084
0.081
0.079
0.077
0.076
0.075
0.075
0.089
0.086
0.086
0.084
5.25 REFERENCES
5.1 Physical significance of sub-subtransient
quantities in dynamic behaviour of synchronous
machines. I.M. Canay. Proc. IEE, Vol. 135, Pt. B,
November 1988.
5.2 IEC 60034-4.
Methods for determining
synchronous machine quantities from tests.
5.3 IEEE Standards 115/115A. IEEE Test Procedures
for Synchronous Machines.
5.4 Power System Analysis. J.R.Mortlock and
M.W.Humphrey Davies (Chapman & Hall,
London).
Cross Sectional
Area mm2
Conductors
per phase
Surge Impedance
Loading
MVA
Voltage Drop
Loading
MWkm
30
50
90
120
150
1
50
90
120
150
50
90
120
150
90
150
250
250
150
250
250
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
550
550
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
4
2
4
2
3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.5
44
1.2
1.2
1.4
1.5
2.7
2.7
3.1
3.5
11
11
11
15
44
44
58
56
73
130
184
260
410
582
482
540
11
17
23
27
30
5.8
66
92
106
119
149
207
239
267
827
1068
1240
1790
4070
4960
7160
6274
9057
15600
22062
31200
58100
82200
68200
81200
Table 5.21: OHL capabilities
77
Indicative Thermal
Loading
MV
A
2.9
3.9
5.1
6.2
7.3
151
7.8
10.2
12.5
14.6
11.7
15.3
18.7
21.9
41
59
77
153
85
115
230
160
320
247
494
988
850
1700
1085
1630
151
204
268
328
383
204
268
328
383
204
268
328
383
268
383
502
1004
370
502
1004
698
1395
648
1296
2592
1296
2590
1650
2475
Chapt 5-46-77
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:20
Page 78
C u r r e n t a n d Vo l t a g e
Transformers
Introduction
6.1
Electromagnetic voltage
transformers
6.2
Capacitor voltage
transformers
6.3
Current transformers
6.4
Novel instrument
transformers
6.5
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:20
Page 79
6 Current and Voltage

Transformers
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Whenever the values of voltage or current in a power
circuit are too high to permit convenient direct
connection of measuring instruments or relays, coupling
is made through transformers. Such 'measuring'
transformers are required to produce a scaled down
replica of the input quantity to the accuracy expected
for the particular measurement; this is made possible by
the high efficiency of the transformer. The performance
of measuring transformers during and following large
instantaneous changes in the input quantity is
important, in that this quantity may depart from the
sinusoidal waveform. The deviation may consist of a
step change in magnitude, or a transient component
that persists for an appreciable period, or both. The
resulting effect on instrument performance is usually
negligible, although for precision metering a persistent
change in the accuracy of the transformer may be
significant.
However, many protection systems are required to
operate during the period of transient disturbance in the
output of the measuring transformers that follows a
system fault. The errors in transformer output may
abnormally delay the operation of the protection, or
cause unnecessary operations. The functioning of such
transformers must, therefore, be examined analytically.
It can be shown that the transformer can be represented
by the equivalent circuit of Figure 6.1, where all
quantities are referred to the secondary side.
1/1
Rp
Lp
Rs
Ze
Figure 6.1: Equivalent circuit of transformer
79
Ls
Burden
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:20
Page 80
When the transformer is not 1/1 ratio, this condition can

be represented by energising the equivalent circuit with an
ideal transformer of the given ratio but having no losses.
voltage drops are made small, and the normal flux

density in the core is designed to be well below the
saturation density, in order that the exciting current may
be low and the exciting impedance substantially
constant with a variation of applied voltage over the
desired operating range including some degree of
overvoltage. These limitations in design result in a VT for
a given burden being much larger than a typical power
transformer of similar rating. The exciting current, in
consequence, will not be as small, relative to the rated
burden, as it would be for a typical power transformer.
6.1.1 Measuring Transformers
C u r r e n t a n d Vo l t a g e T r a n s f o r m e r s
Voltage and current transformers for low primary voltage

or current ratings are not readily distinguishable; for
higher ratings, dissimilarities of construction are usual.
Nevertheless the differences between these devices lie
principally in the way they are connected into the power
circuit. Voltage transformers are much like small power
transformers, differing only in details of design that
control ratio accuracy over the specified range of output.
Current transformers have their primary windings
connected in series with the power circuit, and so also in
series with the system impedance. The response of the
transformer is radically different in these two modes of
operation.
The ratio and phase errors of the transformer can be

calculated using the vector diagram of Figure 6.2.
The ratio error is defined as:
( K nV s )
100%
Vp
6.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
where:
Kn is the nominal ratio
In the shunt mode, the system voltage is applied across

the input terminals of the equivalent circuit of Figure 6.1.
The vector diagram for this circuit is shown in Figure 6.2.
Vp is the primary voltage

Vs is the secondary voltage
Vp
IpXp
If the error is positive, the secondary voltage exceeds the

nominal value. The turns ratio of the transformer need
not be equal to the nominal ratio; a small turns
compensation will usually be employed, so that the error
will be positive for low burdens and negative for high
burdens.
IpRp
Ep
-V
Vs
Ic
Im
The phase error is the phase difference between the

reversed secondary and the primary voltage vectors. It is
positive when the reversed secondary voltage leads the
primary vector. Requirements in this respect are set out
in IEC 60044-2. All voltage transformers are required to
comply with one of the classes in Table 6.1.
Ie
IpL
Ie
6.2.1 Errors
For protection purposes, accuracy of voltage

measurement may be important during fault conditions,
as the system voltage might be reduced by the fault to a
low value. Voltage transformers for such types of service
must comply with the extended range of requirements
set out in Table 6.2.
E
s
Is
Ie
Im
I
Vs
IsXs
= exciting current
= phase angle error
I
Ip
Es
IsRs
s s
I
I
Accuracy
class
= secondary current
= primary current
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
3.0
Figure 6.2: Vector diagram for voltage transformer
The secondary output voltage Vs is required to be an

accurate scaled replica of the input voltage Vp over a
specified range of output. To this end, the winding
0.8 - 1.2 x rated voltage

0.25 - 1.0 x rated burden at 0.8pf
voltage ratio error
phase displacement
(%)
(minutes)
+/- 0.1
+/- 5
+/- 0.2
+/- 10
+/- 0.5
+/- 20
+/- 1.0
+/- 40
+/- 3.0
not specified
Table 6.1: Measuring voltage transformer error limits
80
21/06/02
Accuracy
class
3P
6P
9:21
Page 81
0.25 - 1.0 x rated burden at 0.8pf

0.05 - Vf x rated primary voltage
voltage ratio error
phase displacement
(%)
(%)
+/- 3.0
+/- 120
+/- 6.0
+/- 240
Table 6.2: Additional limits for protection voltage transformers.
as possible. A short circuit on the secondary circuit

wiring will produce a current of many times the rated
output and cause excessive heating. Even where primary
fuses can be fitted, these will usually not clear a
secondary side short circuit because of the low value of
primary current and the minimum practicable fuse rating.
6.2.5 Construction
6.2.2 Voltage Factors

The quantity Vf in Table 6.2 is an upper limit of operating
voltage, expressed in per unit of rated voltage. This is
important for correct relay operation and operation
under unbalanced fault conditions on unearthed or
impedance earthed systems, resulting in a rise in the
voltage on the healthy phases.
The construction of a voltage transformer takes into

account the following factors:
a. output seldom more than 200-300VA. Cooling is
rarely a problem
b. insulation designed for the system impulse
voltage level. Insulation volume is often larger
than the winding volume
Voltage factors, with the permissible duration of the

maximum voltage, are given in Table 6.3.
Voltage factor
Vf
Time
rating
1.2
continuous
1.2
1.5
1.2
continuous
30 s
continuous
1.9
30 s
1.2
continuous
1.9
8 hours
Primary winding connection/system

earthing conditions
Between lines in any network.
Between transformer star point and
earth in any network
Between line and earth in an
effectively earthed network
Between line and earth in
a non-effectively earthed neutral system
with automatic earth fault tripping
Between line and earth in an isolated
neutral system without automatic earth fault
tripping, or in a resonant earthed system
without automatic earth fault tripping
c. mechanical design not usually necessary to

withstand short-circuit currents. Must be small to
fit the space available within switchgear
Three-phase units are common up to 36kV but for higher
voltages single-phase units are usual.
Voltage
transformers for medium voltage circuits will have dry
type insulation, but for high and extra high voltage
systems, oil immersed units are general. Resin
encapsulated designs are in use on systems up to 33kV.
Figure 6.3 shows a typical voltage transformer.
Table 6.3: Voltage transformers: Permissible duration

of maximum voltage
6.2.3 Secondary Leads

Voltage transformers are designed to maintain the
specified accuracy in voltage output at their secondary
terminals. To maintain this if long secondary leads are
required, a distribution box can be fitted close to the VT
to supply relay and metering burdens over separate
leads. If necessary, allowance can be made for the
resistance of the leads to individual burdens when the
particular equipment is calibrated.
Figure 6.3: Typical voltage transformer
6.2.4 Protection of Voltage Transformers
6.2.6 Residually Connected Voltage Transformers
Voltage Transformers can be protected by H.R.C. fuses on

the primary side for voltages up to 66kV. Fuses do not
usually have a sufficient interrupting capacity for use
with higher voltages. Practice varies, and in some cases
protection on the primary is omitted.
The three voltages of a balanced system summate to

zero, but this is not so when the system is subject to a
single-phase earth fault. The residual voltage of a
system is measured by connecting the secondary
windings of a VT in 'broken delta' as shown in Figure 6.4.
The secondary of a Voltage Transformer should always be

protected by fuses or a miniature circuit breaker (MCB).
The device should be located as near to the transformer
The output of the secondary windings connected in

broken delta is zero when balanced sinusoidal voltages
are applied, but under conditions of unbalance a residual
Chap6-78-97
81
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:21
Page 82
voltage equal to three times the zero sequence voltage of

the system will be developed.
A
If a voltage is suddenly applied, an inrush transient will

occur, as with power transformers. The effect will,
however, be less severe than for power transformers
because of the lower flux density for which the VT is
designed. If the VT is rated to have a fairly high voltage
factor, little inrush effect will occur. An error will appear
in the first few cycles of the output current in proportion
to the inrush transient that occurs.
When the supply to a voltage transformer is interrupted,

the core flux will not readily collapse; the secondary
winding will tend to maintain the magnetising force to
sustain this flux, and will circulate a current through the
burden which will decay more or less exponentially,
possible with a superimposed audio-frequency
oscillation due to the capacitance of the winding.
Bearing in mind that the exciting quantity, expressed in
ampere-turns, may exceed the burden, the transient
current may be significant.
Residual
voltage
Figure 6.4: Residual voltage connection
In order to measure this component, it is necessary for a

zero sequence flux to be set up in the VT, and for this to
be possible there must be a return path for the resultant
summated flux. The VT core must have one or more
unwound limbs linking the yokes in addition to the limbs
carrying windings.
Usually the core is made
symmetrically, with five limbs, the two outermost ones
being unwound. Alternatively, three single-phase units
can be used. It is equally necessary for the primary
winding neutral to be earthed, for without an earth, zero
sequence exciting current cannot flow.
6.2.8 Cascade Voltage Transformers

The capacitor VT (section 6.3) was developed because of
the high cost of conventional electromagnetic voltage
transformers but, as shown in Section 6.3.2, the
frequency and transient responses are less satisfactory
than those of the orthodox voltage transformers. Another
solution to the problem is the cascade VT (Figure 6.5).
A
A VT should be rated to have an appropriate voltage

factor as described in Section 6.2.2 and Table 6.3, to
cater for the voltage rise on healthy phases during earth
faults.
C
P
Voltage transformers are often provided with a normal

star-connected secondary winding and a broken-delta
connected tertiary winding. Alternatively the residual
voltage can be extracted by using a star/broken-delta
connected group of auxiliary voltage transformers
energised from the secondary winding of the main unit,
providing the main voltage transformer fulfils all the
requirements for handling a zero sequence voltage as
previously described. The auxiliary VT must also be
suitable for the appropriate voltage factor. It should be
noted that third harmonics in the primary voltage wave,
which are of zero sequence, summate in the brokendelta winding.
P - primary winding
C - coupling windings
S - secondary winding
6.2.7 Transient Performance
S
a
Transient errors cause few difficulties in the use of

conventional voltage transformers although some do
occur. Errors are generally limited to short time periods
following the sudden application or removal of voltage
from the VT primary.
Figure 6.5: Schematic diagram of typical cascade

voltage transformer
82
21/06/02
9:21
Page 83
The conventional type of VT has a single primary winding,

the insulation of which presents a great problem for
voltages above about 132kV. The cascade VT avoids
these difficulties by breaking down the primary voltage
in several distinct and separate stages.
the normal value using a relatively inexpensive

electromagnetic transformer. The successive stages of
this reasoning are indicated in Figure 6.6.
The complete VT is made up of several individual

transformers, the primary windings of which are
connected in series, as shown in Figure 6.5. Each
magnetic core has primary windings (P) on two opposite
sides. The secondary winding (S) consists of a single
winding on the last stage only. Coupling windings (C)
connected in pairs between stages, provide low
impedance circuits for the transfer of load ampere-turns
between stages and ensure that the power frequency
voltage is equally distributed over the several primary
windings.
The potentials of the cores and coupling windings are
fixed at definite values by connecting them to selected
points on the primary windings. The insulation of each
winding is sufficient for the voltage developed in that
winding, which is a fraction of the total according to the
number of stages. The individual transformers are
mounted on a structure built of insulating material,
which provides the interstage insulation, accumulating
to a value able to withstand the full system voltage
across the complete height of the stack. The entire
assembly is contained in a hollow cylindrical porcelain
housing with external weather-sheds; the housing is
filled with oil and sealed, an expansion bellows being
included to maintain hermetic sealing and to permit
expansion with temperature change.
6.3 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

The size of electromagnetic voltage transformers for the
higher voltages is largely proportional to the rated
voltage; the cost tends to increase at a disproportionate
rate. The capacitor voltage transformer (CVT) is often
more economic.
C1
L
C2
C2
Zb
(a) Basic capacitive

voltage divider
C1
Zb
(b) Capacitive divider with

inductive compensation
T
L
C2
Zb
(c) Divider with E/M VT output stage

Figure 6.6: Development of capacitor
voltage transformer
There are numerous variations of this basic circuit. The

inductance L may be a separate unit or it may be
incorporated in the form of leakage reactance in the
transformer T. Capacitors C1 and C2 cannot conveniently
be made to close tolerances, so tappings are provided for
ratio adjustment, either on the transformer T, or on a
separate auto-transformer in the secondary circuit.
Adjustment of the tuning inductance L is also needed;
this can be done with tappings, a separate tapped
inductor in the secondary circuit, by adjustment of gaps
in the iron cores, or by shunting with variable
capacitance. A simplified equivalent circuit is shown in
Figure 6.7.
C
Rp
Rs
This device is basically a capacitance potential divider.

As with resistance-type potential dividers, the output
voltage is seriously affected by load at the tapping point.
The capacitance divider differs in that its equivalent
source impedance is capacitive and can therefore be
compensated by a reactor connected in series with the
tapping point. With an ideal reactor, such an
arrangement would have no regulation and could supply
any value of output.
A reactor possesses some resistance, which limits the
output that can be obtained. For a secondary output
voltage of 110V, the capacitors would have to be very
large to provide a useful output while keeping errors
within the usual limits. The solution is to use a high
secondary voltage and further transform the output to
C1
Chap6-78-97
Vi
Ze
Zb
L - tuning inductance
Rp - primary winding resistance (plus losses)
Ze - exciting impedance of transformer T
Rs - secondary circuit resistance
Zb - burden impedance
C - C1 + C2 (in Figure 6.6)
Figure 6.7: Simplified equivalent circuit
of capacitor voltage transformer
It will be seen that the basic difference between Figure

6.7 and Figure 6.1 is the presence of C and L. At normal
frequency when C and L are in resonance and therefore
83
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:21
Page 84
cancel, the circuit behaves in a similar manner to a

conventional VT. At other frequencies, however, a
reactive component exists which modifies the errors.
and the capacitance of the potential divider together

form a resonant circuit that will usually oscillate at a
sub-normal frequency. If this circuit is subjected to a
voltage impulse, the resulting oscillation may pass
through a range of frequencies. If the basic frequency of
this circuit is slightly less than one-third of the system
frequency, it is possible for energy to be absorbed from
the system and cause the oscillation to build up. The
increasing flux density in the transformer core reduces
the inductance, bringing the resonant frequency nearer
to the one-third value of the system frequency.
Standards generally require a CVT used for protection to

conform to accuracy requirements of Table 6.2 within a
frequency range of 97-103% of nominal.
The
corresponding frequency range of measurement CVTs is
much less, 99%-101%, as reductions in accuracy for
frequency deviations outside this range are less
important than for protection applications.
The result is a progressive build-up until the oscillation

stabilizes as a third sub-harmonic of the system, which
can be maintained indefinitely. Depending on the values
of components, oscillations at fundamental frequency or
at other sub-harmonics or multiples of the supply
frequency are possible but the third sub-harmonic is the
one most likely to be encountered.
If the burden impedance of a CVT were to be shortcircuited, the rise in the reactor voltage would be limited
only by the reactor losses and possible saturation, that is,
to Q x E2 where E2 is the no-load tapping point voltage
and Q is the amplification factor of the resonant circuit.
This value would be excessive and is therefore limited by
a spark gap connected across the auxiliary capacitor. The
voltage on the auxiliary capacitor is higher at full rated
output than at no load, and the capacitor is rated for
continuous service at this raised value. The spark gap will
be set to flash over at about twice the full load voltage.
The principal manifestation of such an oscillation is a rise

in output voltage, the r.m.s. value being perhaps 25%50% above the normal value; the output waveform
would generally be of the form shown in Figure 6.8.
The effect of the spark gap is to limit the short-circuit

current which the VT will deliver and fuse protection of
the secondary circuit has to be carefully designed with this
point in mind. Facilities are usually provided to earth the
tapping point, either manually or automatically, before
making any adjustments to tappings or connections.
Amplitude
6.3.1 Voltage Protection of Auxiliary Capacitor
6.3.2 Transient Behaviour of Capacitor Voltage

Transformers
Time
Figure 6.8: Typical secondary voltage

waveform with third sub-harmonic oscillation.
A CVT is a series resonant circuit. The introduction of the

electromagnetic transformer between the intermediate
voltage and the output makes possible further resonance
involving the exciting impedance of this unit and the
capacitance of the divider stack. When a sudden voltage
step is applied, oscillations in line with these different
modes take place, and will persist for a period governed
by the total resistive damping that is present. Any
increase in resistive burden reduces the time constant of
a transient oscillation, although the chance of a large
initial amplitude is increased.
Such oscillations are less likely to occur when the circuit

losses are high, as is the case with a resistive burden, and
can be prevented by increasing the resistive burden.
Special anti-ferro-resonance devices that use a paralleltuned circuit are sometimes built into the VT. Although
such arrangements help to suppress ferro-resonance,
they tend to impair the transient response, so that the
design is a matter of compromise.
For very high-speed protection, transient oscillations

should be minimised. Modern capacitor voltage
transformers are much better in this respect than their
earlier counterparts, but high performance protection
schemes may still be adversely affected.
Correct design will prevent a CVT that supplies a resistive

burden from exhibiting this effect, but it is possible for
non-linear inductive burdens, such as auxiliary voltage
transformers, to induce ferro-resonance. Auxiliary
voltage transformers for use with capacitor voltage
transformers should be designed with a low value of flux
density that prevents transient voltages from causing
core saturation, which in turn would bring high exciting
currents.
6.3.3 Ferro-Resonance
The exciting impedance Ze of the auxiliary transformer T
84
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:21
Page 85
6.4 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
6.4.1 Errors
The primary winding of a current transformer is

connected in series with the power circuit and the
impedance is negligible compared with that of the power
circuit. The power system impedance governs the
current passing through the primary winding of the
current transformer. This condition can be represented
by inserting the load impedance, referred through the
turns ratio, in the input connection of Figure 6.1.
The general vector diagram (Figure 6.2) can be simplified

by the omission of details that are not of interest in
current measurement; see Figure 6.10. Errors arise
because of the shunting of the burden by the exciting
impedance. This uses a small portion of the input current
for exciting the core, reducing the amount passed to the
burden. So Is = Ip - Ie, where Ie is dependent on Ze, the
exciting impedance and the secondary e.m.f. Es, given by
the equation Es = Is (Zs + Zb), where:
This approach is developed in Figure 6.9, taking the

numerical example of a 300/5A CT applied to an 11kV power
system. The system is considered to be carrying rated
current (300A) and the CT is feeding a burden of 10VA.
Zs = the self-impedance of the secondary winding,

which can generally be taken as the resistive
component Rs only
Zb = the impedance of the burden
Z=21.2
IsRs
Burden
10VA
300/5A
Es
IsXs
(a) Physical arrangement
Iq
Ir
0.2
Z=21.2
'Ideal'
CT
E=6350V r=300/5
j50
150
Ip
Vs
0.4
Is
(b) Equivalent circuit of (a)

E2r =21.2 x 602
=76.2k
Ie
0.2
E = Secondary induced e.m.f.
Vs Secondary output voltage
Er =6350V x 60
=381kV
j50
150
0.4
Phase angle error
(c) Equivalent circuit, all quantities referred

to secondary side
E=6350V
Ie
Figure 6.9: Derivation of equivalent circuit
of a current transformer
Is
Iq
Is
Figure 6.10: Vector diagram for current

transformer (referred to secondary)
A study of the final equivalent circuit of Figure 6.9(c),

taking note of the typical component values, will reveal all
the properties of a current transformer. It will be seen that:
6.4.1.1 Current or Ratio Error
a. the secondary current will not be affected by

change of the burden impedance over a
considerable range
This is the difference in magnitude between Ip and Is and is

equal to Ir, the component of Ie which is in phase with Is.
b. the secondary circuit must not be interrupted while

the primary winding is energised. The induced
secondary e.m.f. under these circumstances will be
high enough to present a danger to life and insulation
This is represented by Iq, the component of Ie in

quadrature with Is and results in the phase error .
c. the ratio and phase angle errors can be calculated

easily if the magnetising characteristics and the
burden impedance are known
6.4.1.2 Phase Error
The values of the current error and phase error depend on

the phase displacement between Is and Ie, but neither
current nor phase error can exceed the vectorial error Ie.
It will be seen that with a moderately inductive burden,
resulting in Is and Ie approximately in phase, there will
85
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
9:21
Page 86
be little phase error and the exciting component will

result almost entirely in ratio error.
Class
A reduction of the secondary winding by one or two

turns is often used to compensate for this. For example,
in the CT corresponding to Figure 6.9, the worst error due
to the use of an inductive burden of rated value would
be about 1.2%. If the nominal turns ratio is 2:120,
removal of one secondary turn would raise the output by
0.83% leaving the overall current error as -0.37%.
5P
10P
Table 6.5: Protection CT error limits for classes 5P and 10P
Even though the burden of a protection CT is only a few

VA at rated current, the output required from the CT may
be considerable if the accuracy limit factor is high. For
example, with an accuracy limit factor of 30 and a
burden of 10VA, the CT may have to supply 9000VA to
the secondary circuit.
For lower value burden or a different burden power

factor, the error would change in the positive direction to
a maximum of +0.7% at zero burden; the leakage
reactance of the secondary winding is assumed to be
negligible. No corresponding correction can be made for
phase error, but it should be noted that the phase error
is small for moderately reactive burdens.
Alternatively, the same CT may be subjected to a high

burden. For overcurrent and earth fault protection, with
elements of similar VA consumption at setting, the earth
fault element of an electromechanical relay set at 10%
would have 100 times the impedance of the overcurrent
elements set at 100%. Although saturation of the relay
elements somewhat modifies this aspect of the matter, it
will be seen that the earth fault element is a severe
burden, and the CT is likely to have a considerable ratio
error in this case. So it is not much use applying turns
compensation to such current transformers; it is
generally simpler to wind the CT with turns
corresponding to the nominal ratio.
6.4.2 Composite Error

This is defined in IEC 60044-1 as the r.m.s. value of the
difference between the ideal secondary current and the
actual secondary current. It includes current and phase
errors and the effects of harmonics in the exciting
current. The accuracy class of measuring current
transformers is shown in Table 6.4.
Accuracy
class
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
+/- Percentage current

(ratio) error
% current 5
20
100
120
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.75 0.35
0.2
0.2
1.5
0.75
0.5
0.5
3
1.5
1.0
1.0
Current transformers are often used for the dual duty of

measurement and protection. They will then need to be
rated according to a class selected from both Tables 6.4
and 6.5. The applied burden is the total of instrument
and relay burdens. Turns compensation may well be
needed to achieve the measurement performance.
Measurement ratings are expressed in terms of rated
burden and class, for example 15VA Class 0.5. Protection
ratings are expressed in terms of rated burden, class, and
accuracy limit factor, for example 10VA Class 10P10.
+/- current (ratio) error, %

% current
3
5
+/- Phase displacement

(minutes)
5
20
100 120
15
8
5
5
30
15
10 10
90
45
30 30
180 90
60 60
(a) Limits of error accuracy for error classes 0.1 - 1.0

Accuracy
class
50
3
5
Current error at
Phase displacement
Composite error at
rated primary
at rated current
rated accuracy limit
current (%)
(minutes)
primary current (%)
+/-1
+/-60
5
+/-3
10
Standard accuracy limit factors are 5, 10, 15, 20, and 30
120
3
5
(b) Limits of error for error classes 3 and 5

Table 6.4: CT error classes
6.4.4 Class PX Current Transformers

The classification of Table 6.5 is only used for overcurrent
protection. Class PX is the definition in IEC 60044-1 for
the quasi-transient current transformers formerly
covered by Class X of BS 3938, commonly used with unit
protection schemes.
6.4.3 Accuracy Limit Current of Protection

Current Transformers
Protection equipment is intended to respond to fault
conditions, and is for this reason required to function at
current values above the normal rating. Protection class
current transformers must retain a reasonable accuracy
up to the largest relevant current. This value is known as
the accuracy limit current and may be expressed in
primary or equivalent secondary terms. The ratio of the
accuracy limit current to the rated current is known as
the 'accuracy limit factor'.
Guidance was given in the specifications to the

application of current transformers to earth fault
protection, but for this and for the majority of other
protection applications it is better to refer directly to the
maximum useful e.m.f. that can be obtained from the CT.
In this context, the 'knee-point' of the excitation curve is
defined as 'that point at which a further increase of 10%
of secondary e.m.f. would require an increment of
exciting current of 50%; see Figure 6.11.
The accuracy class of protection current transformers is

shown in Table 6.5.
86
21/06/02
VK
9:21
Page 87
+ 10%V
V
Exciting voltage (V
Vs)
+ 50%IIeK
necessary primary insulation. In other cases, the bushing

of a circuit breaker or power transformer is used for this
purpose. At low primary current ratings it may be
difficult to obtain sufficient output at the desired
accuracy. This is because a large core section is needed
to provide enough flux to induce the secondary e.m.f. in
the small number of turns, and because the exciting
ampere-turns form a large proportion of the primary
ampere-turns available. The effect is particularly
pronounced when the core diameter has been made
large so as to fit over large EHV bushings.
6.4.5.3 Core-balance current transformers
The core-balance CT (or CBCT) is normally of the ring
type, through the centre of which is passed cable that
forms the primary winding. An earth fault relay,
connected to the secondary winding, is energised only
when there is residual current in the primary system.
IeK
Exciting voltage (IIe)
Figure 6.11: Definition of knee-point
of excitation curve
Design requirements for current transformers for general

protection purposes are frequently laid out in terms of
knee-point e.m.f., exciting current at the knee-point (or
some other specified point) and secondary winding
resistance. Such current transformers are designated
Class PX.
6.4.5 CT Winding Arrangements

A number of CT winding arrangements are used. These
are described in the following sections.
6.4.5.1 Wound primary type
The advantage in using this method of earth fault

protection lies in the fact that only one CT core is used
in place of three phase CT's whose secondary windings
are residually connected. In this way the CT magnetising
current at relay operation is reduced by approximately
three-to-one, an important consideration in sensitive
earth fault relays where a low effective setting is
required. The number of secondary turns does not need
to be related to the cable rated current because no
secondary current would flow under normal balanced
conditions. This allows the number of secondary turns to
be chosen such as to optimise the effective primary pickup current.
Core-balance transformers are normally mounted over a
cable at a point close up to the cable gland of switchgear
or other apparatus. Physically split cores ('slip-over'
types) are normally available for applications in which
the cables are already made up, as on existing
switchgear.
This type of CT has conventional windings formed of

copper wire wound round a core. It is used for auxiliary
current transformers and for many low or moderate ratio
current transformers used in switchgear of up to 11kV
rating.
6.4.5.4 Summation current transformers
6.4.5.2 Bushing or bar primary type
6.4.5.5 Air-gapped current transformers
Many current transformers have a ring-shaped core,

sometimes built up from annular stampings, but often
consisting of a single length of strip tightly wound to
form a close-turned spiral. The distributed secondary
winding forms a toroid which should occupy the whole
perimeter of the core, a small gap being left between
start and finish leads for insulation.
These are auxiliary current transformers in which a small

air gap is included in the core to produce a secondary
voltage output proportional in magnitude to current in
the primary winding. Sometimes termed 'transactors'
and 'quadrature current transformers', this form of
current transformer has been used as an auxiliary
component of unit protection schemes in which the
outputs into multiple secondary circuits must remain
linear for and proportioned to the widest practical range
of input currents.
Such current transformers normally have a single

concentrically placed primary conductor, sometimes
permanently built into the CT and provided with the
The summation arrangement is a winding arrangement

used in a measuring relay or on an auxiliary current
transformer to give a single-phase output signal having
a specific relationship to the three-phase current input.
87
Chap6-78-97
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
15:21
Page 88
6.4.6 Line Current CTs
10mm. As its name implies the magnetic behaviour

tends to linearisation by the inclusion of this gap in the
magnetic circuit. However, the purpose of introducing
more reluctance into the magnetic circuit is to reduce
the value of magnetising reactance. This in turn reduces
the secondary time-constant of the CT, thereby reducing
the overdimensioning factor necessary for faithful
transformation. Figure 6.12 shows a typical modern CT
for use on MV systems.
CTs for measuring line currents fall into one of three types.
6.4.6.1 Overdimensioned CTs
Overdimensioned CTs are capable of transforming fully

offset fault currents without distortion. In consequence,
they are very large, as can be deduced from Section
6.4.10. They are prone to errors due to remanent flux
arising, for instance, from the interruption of heavy fault
currents.
6.4.6.2 Anti-remanence CTs
6.4.7 Secondary Winding Impedance
This is a variation of the overdimensioned current

transformer and has small gap(s) in the core magnetic
circuit, thus reducing the possible remanent flux from
approximately 90% of saturation value to approximately
10%. These gap(s) are quite small, for example 0.12mm
total, and so the excitation characteristic is not
significantly changed by their presence. However, the
resulting decrease in possible remanent core flux
confines any subsequent d.c. flux excursion, resulting
from primary current asymmetry, to within the core
saturation limits. Errors in current transformation are
therefore significantly reduced when compared with
those with the gapless type of core.
As a protection CT may be required to deliver high values

of secondary current, the secondary winding resistance
must be made as low as practicable. Secondary leakage
reactance also occurs, particularly in wound primary
current transformers, although its precise measurement
is difficult. The non-linear nature of the CT magnetic
circuit makes it difficult to assess the definite ohmic
value representing secondary leakage reactance.
It is, however, normally accepted that a current
transformer is of the low reactance type provided that
the following conditions prevail:
a. the core is of the jointless ring type (including
spirally wound cores)
Transient protection current transformers are included in IEC

60044-6 as types TPX, TPY and TPZ and this specification
gives good guidance to their application and use.
b. the secondary turns are substantially evenly

distributed along the whole length of the magnetic
circuit
6.4.6.3 Linear current transformers
c. the primary conductor(s) passes through the

approximate centre of the core aperture or, if
wound, is approximately evenly distributed along
the whole length of the magnetic circuit
The 'linear' current transformer constitutes an even more

radical departure from the normal solid core CT in that it
incorporates an appreciable air gap, for example 7.5-
d. flux equalising windings, where fitted to the

requirements of the design, consist of at least four
parallel-connected coils, evenly distributed along
the whole length of the magnetic circuit, each coil
occupying one quadrant
Alternatively, when a current transformer does not

obviously comply with all of the above requirements, it
may be proved to be of low-reactance where:
e. the composite error, as measured in the accepted
way, does not exceed by a factor of 1.3 that error
obtained directly from the V-I excitation
characteristic of the secondary winding
6.4.8 Secondary Current Rating

The choice of secondary current rating is determined
largely by the secondary winding burden and the
standard practice of the user. Standard CT secondary
current ratings are 5A and 1A. The burden at rated
current imposed by digital or numerical relays or
Figure 6.12: Typical modern CT for use on MV systems
88
21/06/02
15:21
Page 89
instruments is largely independent of the rated value of

current. This is because the winding of the device has to
develop a given number of ampere-turns at rated
current, so that the actual number of turns is inversely
proportional to the current, and the impedance of the
winding varies inversely with the square of the current
rating. However, electromechanical or static earth-fault
relays may have a burden that varies with the current
tapping used.
Interconnection leads do not share this property,
however, being commonly of standard cross-section
regardless of rating. Where the leads are long, their
resistance may be appreciable, and the resultant burden
will vary with the square of the current rating. For
example a CT lead run of the order of 200 metres, a
typical distance for outdoor EHV switchgear, could have
a loop resistance of approximately 3 ohms.
when the primary current is suddenly changed. The

effects are most important, and were first observed in
connection with balanced forms of protection, which
were liable to operate unnecessarily when short-circuit
currents were suddenly established.
6.4.10.1 Primary current transient
The power system, neglecting load circuits, is mostly
inductive, so that when a short circuit occurs, the fault
current that flows is given by:
ip =
A CT with a particular short-time current/ time rating

will carry a lower current for a longer time in inverse
proportion to the square of the ratio of current values.
The converse, however, cannot be assumed, and larger
current values than the S.T.C. rating are not permissible
for any duration unless justified by a new rating test to
prove the dynamic capability.
Equation 6.1
Ep
= peak system e.m.f.
= system resistance
= system inductance
= initial phase angle governed by instant

of fault occurrence
= system power factor angle

= tan-1 L/R
The first term of Equation 6.1 represents the steady state

alternating current, while the second is a transient
quantity responsible for displacing the waveform
asymmetrically.
Ep
R + 2 L 2 is the steady state peak current I .
p
The maximum transient occurs when sin = ( - ) = 1;
no other condition need be examined.
So:
2
i p = I p sin t + e ( R
2

L) t
...Equation 6.2
When the current is passed through the primary winding

of a current transformer, the response can be examined
by replacing the CT with an equivalent circuit as shown
in Figure 6.9(b).
As the 'ideal' CT has no losses, it will transfer the entire
function, and all further analysis can be carried out in
terms of equivalent secondary quantities (is and Is). A
simplified solution is obtainable by neglecting the
exciting current of the CT.
The flux developed in an inductance is obtained by
integrating the applied e.m.f. through a time interval:
6.4.10 Transient Response of a Current Transformer

When accuracy of response during very short intervals is
being studied, it is necessary to examine what happens
( R L) t
where:
6.4.9 Rated Short-Time Current

A current transformer is overloaded while system shortcircuit currents are flowing and will be short-time rated.
Standard times for which the CT must be able to carry
rated short-time current (STC) are 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 or
3.0 seconds.
R 2 + 2 L2
[ sin ( t + ) + sin ( ) e
The CT lead VA burden if a 5A CT is used would be 75VA,

to which must be added the relay burden (up to of
perhaps 10VA for an electromechanical relay, but less
than 1VA for a numerical relay), making a total of 85VA.
Such a burden would require the CT to be very large and
expensive, particularly if a high accuracy limit factor
were also applicable.
With a 1A CT secondary rating, the lead burden is
reduced to 3VA, so that with the same relay burden the
total becomes a maximum of 13VA. This can be provided
by a CT of normal dimensions, resulting in a saving in
size, weight and cost. Hence modern CTs tend to have
secondary windings of 1A rating. However, where the
primary rating is high, say above 2000A, a CT of higher
secondary rating may be used, to limit the number of
secondary turns. In such a situation secondary ratings of
2A, 5A or, in extreme cases, 20A, might be used.
Ep
t2
= K t vdt
1
Equation 6.3
For the CT equivalent circuit, the voltage is the drop on

89
Chap6-78-97
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
15:25
Page 90
the burden resistance Rb.

20
3 2
A
= KR b I s
Flux (multiples of steady value)
Integrating for each component in turn, the steady state

peak flux is given by:
sin t dt
KR b I s
The transient flux is given by:

=
= KR b I s e (
R L) t
dt =
...Equation 6.4
KR b I s L
R
0.1
0.15
0.2
Figure 6.13: Response of a CT of

infinite shunt impedance to transient asymmetric
primary current
Since a CT requires a finite exciting current to maintain

a flux, it will not remain magnetised (neglecting
hysteresis), and for this reason a complete representation
of the effects can only be obtained by including the
finite inductance of the CT in the calculation. The
response of a current transformer to a transient
asymmetric current is shown in Figure 6.14.
1 +
...Equation 6.6
The term (1+X/R) has been called the 'transient factor'

(TF), the core flux being increased by this factor during
the transient asymmetric current period. From this it can
be seen that the ratio of reactance to resistance of the
power system is an important feature in the study of the
behaviour of protection relays.
1.0
0.9
-
0.8
Alternatively, L/R is the primary system time constant T,

so that the transient factor can be written:
=1 +
0.05
Time (seconds)
wL
X
=
R
R
T = 0.06s
4
T - time constant of primary circuit
The CT core has to carry both fluxes, so that:

=
where X and R are the primary system reactance and

resistance values.
12
...Equation 6.5
Hence, the ratio of the transient flux to the steady state

value is:
B
16
-1
e T
0.7
L
= 1 + T
R
1
T1
0.6
Ie
0.5
Again, fT is the time constant expressed in cycles of the

a.c. quantity T, so that:
0.4
0.3
TF = 1 + 2fT = 1 + 2T
0.2
This latter expression is particularly useful when

assessing a recording of a fault current, because the time
constant in cycles can be easily estimated and leads
directly to the transient factor. For example, a system
time constant of three cycles results in a transient factor
of (1+6), or 19.85; that is, the CT would be required to
handle almost twenty times the maximum flux produced
under steady state conditions.
0.1
i's
0
Time
-0.1
Ie = Transient exciting current
Figure 6.14: Response of a current

transformer to a transient asymmetric current
The above theory is sufficient to give a general view of

the problem. In this simplified treatment, no reverse
voltage is applied to demagnetise the CT, so that the flux
would build up as shown in Figure 6.13.
90
21/06/02
15:25
Page 91
Let:
is = the nominal secondary current
core to retain a 'remanent' flux means that the

value of B developed in Equation 6.5 has to be
regarded as an increment of flux from any possible
remanent value positive or negative. The formula
would then be reasonable provided the applied
current transient did not produce saturation
is = the actual secondary output current

ie = the exciting current
then:
is = ie + is
...Equation 6.7
also,
Le
di e
= R b i s
dt
...Equation 6.8
whence:
di e
R i
R i
+ b e = b s
dt
Le
Le
which gives for the transient term
ie = I1
T
e t T e t T
T1 T
1
...Equation 6.9
where:
T = primary system time constant L/R
T1 = CT secondary circuit time constant Le/Rb
I1 = prospective peak secondary current
6.4.10.2 Practical conditions
Practical conditions differ from theory for the following
reasons:
a. no account has been taken of secondary leakage or
burden inductance. This is usually small compared
with Le so that it has little effect on the maximum
transient flux
It will be seen that a precise calculation of the flux and

excitation current is not feasible; the value of the study is
to explain the observed phenomena. The asymmetric (or
d.c.) component can be regarded as building up the mean
flux over a period corresponding to several cycles of the
sinusoidal component, during which period the latter
component produces a flux swing about the varying
'mean level' established by the former. The asymmetric
flux ceases to increase when the exciting current is equal
to the total asymmetric input current, since beyond this
point the output current, and hence the voltage drop
across the burden resistance, is negative. Saturation
makes the point of equality between the excitation
current and the input occur at a flux level lower than
would be expected from linear theory.
When the exponential component drives the CT into
saturation, the magnetising inductance decreases,
causing a large increase in the alternating component ie.
The total exciting current during the transient period is
of the form shown in Figure 6.15 and the corresponding
resultant distortion in the secondary current output, due
to saturation, is shown in Figure 6.16.
Exciting current
b. iron loss has not been considered. This has the

effect of reducing the secondary time constant, but
the value of the equivalent resistance is variable,
depending upon both the sine and exponential
terms. Consequently, it cannot be included in any
linear theory and is too complicated for a
satisfactory treatment to be evolved
c. the theory is based upon a linear excitation

characteristic. This is only approximately true up to
the knee-point of the excitation curve. A precise
solution allowing for non-linearity is not practicable.
Solutions have been sought by replacing the excitation
curve with a number of chords; a linear analysis can
then be made for the extent of each chord
Time
Current
Figure 6.15: Typical exciting current of CT

during transient asymmetric input current
The above theory is sufficient, however, to give a good

insight into the problem and to allow most practical
issues to be decided.
Primary current
referred to
secondary
Time
0
Secondary current
Residual flux = 0
Resistive burden
Power system T.C. = 0.05s
d. the effect of hysteresis, apart from loss as

discussed under (b) above, is not included.
Hysteresis makes the inductance different for flux
build up and decay, so that the secondary time
constant is variable. Moreover, the ability of the
Chap6-78-97
Figure 6.16: Distortion in secondary current

due to saturation
91
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
15:25
Page 92
CT will cost more. This fact should be weighed against

the convenience achieved; very often it will be found
that the tests in question can be replaced by alternative
procedures.
The presence of residual flux varies the starting point of

the transient flux excursion on the excitation
characteristic. Remanence of like polarity to the
transient will reduce the value of symmetric current of
given time constant which the CT can transform without
severe saturation; conversely, reverse remanence will
greatly increase the ability of a CT to transform transient
current.
6.5 NOVEL INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

The preceding types of instrument transformers have all
been based on electromagnetic principles using a
magnetic core. There are now available several new
methods of transforming the measured quantity using
optical and mass state methods.
If the CT were the linear non-saturable device considered

in the analysis, the sine current would be transformed
without loss of accuracy. In practice the variation in
excitation inductance caused by transferring the centre
of the flux swing to other points on the excitation curve
causes an error that may be very large. The effect on
measurement is of little consequence, but for protection
equipment that is required to function during fault
conditions, the effect is more serious. The output current
is reduced during transient saturation, which may
prevent the relays from operating if the conditions are
near to the relay setting. This must not be confused with
the increased r.m.s. value of the primary current due to
the asymmetric transient, a feature which sometimes
offsets the increase ratio error. In the case of balanced
protection, during through faults the errors of the several
current transformers may differ and produce an out-ofbalance quantity, causing unwanted operation.
6.5.1 Optical Instrument Transducers

The key features of a freestanding optical instrument
transducer can be illustrated with the functional
diagram of Figure 6.17.
HV
Bus
Insulating
function
Sensor
E/O converter
+
Communication
Sensing
function
Instrument
Transformer
6.4.11 Harmonics during the Transient Period

Optical link
(fibre optics)
When a CT is required to develop a high secondary e.m.f.

under steady state conditions, the non-linearity of the
excitation impedance causes some distortion of the
output waveform; such a waveform will contain, in
addition to the fundamental current, odd harmonics only.
Electronic
interface
Communication
+
O/E converter
Secondary
output
When, however, the CT is saturated uni-directionally

while being simultaneously subjected to a small a.c.
quantity, as in the transient condition discussed above,
the output will contain both odd and even harmonics.
Usually the lower numbered harmonics are of greatest
amplitude and the second and third harmonic
components may be of considerable value. This may
affect relays that are sensitive to harmonics.
Figure 6.17: Functional diagram of

optical instrument transducer
Optical converters and optical glass fibre channels

implement the link between the sensor and the lowvoltage output. The fundamental difference between an
instrument transducer and a conventional instrument
transformer is the electronic interface needed for its
operation. This interface is required both for the sensing
function and for adapting the new sensor technology to
that of the secondary output currents and voltages.
6.4.12 Test Windings

On-site conjunctive testing of current transformers and
the apparatus that they energise is often required. It
may be difficult, however, to pass a suitable value of
current through the primary windings, because of the
scale of such current and in many cases because access
to the primary conductors is difficult. Additional
windings may be provided to make such tests easier,
these windings usually being rated at 10A. The test
winding will inevitably occupy appreciable space and the
Non-conventional optical transducers lend themselves to

smaller, lighter devices where the overall size and power
rating of the unit does not have any significant bearing
on the size and the complexity of the sensor. Small,
lightweight insulator structures may be tailor-made to
92
21/06/02
15:14
Page 93
fit optical sensing devices as an integral part of the

insulator. Additionally, the non-linear effects and
electromagnetic interference problems in the secondary
wiring of conventional VTs and CTs are minimised.
field, it plays the role of the odd polariser. Changes in

the magnetic or electric field in which the optical sensor
is immersed are monitored as a varying intensity of the
probing light beam at the light detector. The light output
intensity fluctuates around the zero-field level equal to
50% of the reference light input. This modulation of the
light intensity due to the presence of varying fields is
converted back to time-varying currents or voltages.
Optical transducers can be separated in two families:

firstly the hybrid transducers, making use of
conventional electrical circuit techniques to which are
coupled various optical converter systems, and secondly
the all-optical transducers that are based on
fundamental, optical sensing principles.
A transducer uses a magneto-optic effect sensor for

optical current measuring applications. This reflects the
fact that the sensor is not basically sensitive to a current
but to the magnetic field generated by this current.
Although all-fibre approaches are feasible, most
commercially available optical current transducers rely
on a bulk-glass sensor. Most optical voltage transducers,
on the other hand, rely on an electro-optic effect sensor.
This reflects the fact that the sensor used is sensitive to
the imposed electric field.
6.5.1.1 Optical sensor concepts

Certain optical sensing media (glass, crystals, plastics)
show a sensitivity to electric and magnetic fields and
that some properties of a probing light beam can be
altered when passing through them. One simple optical
transducer description is given here in Figure. 6.18.
Consider the case of a beam of light passing through a
pair of polarising filters. If the input and output
polarising filters have their axes rotated 45 from each
other, only half the light will come through. The
reference light input intensity is maintained constant
over time. Now if these two polarising filters remain
fixed and a third polarising filter is placed in between
them, a random rotation of this middle polariser either
clockwise or counter-clockwise will be monitored as a
varying or modulated light output intensity at the light
detector.
6.5.1.2 Hybrid transducers

The hybrid family of non-conventional instrument
transducers can be divided in two types: those with
active sensors and those with passive sensors. The idea
behind a transducer with an active sensor is to change
the existing output of the conventional instrument
transformer into an optically isolated output by adding
an optical conversion system (Figure 6.18). This
conversion system may require a power supply of its
own: this is the active sensor type. The use of an optical
isolating system serves to de-couple the instrument
transformer output secondary voltages and currents
When a block of optical sensing material (glass or

crystal) is immersed in a varying magnetic or electric
'Odd' polariser
input
polariser
output
polariser
optical
fibre
optical
fibre
in
sensing
light
detector
out
light source
45
90
optical
sensing
medium
1.0
0.5
0.5
zero field level
1.0
+
t
reference
light input
intensity
t
modulated
light input
intensity
Figure. 6.18: Schematic representation of the concepts behind the optical sensing of varying electric and magnetic fields
93
Chap6-78-97
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
15:14
Page 94
analysing circuitry.
In sharp contrast with a
conventional free-standing instrument transformer, the
optical instrument transformer needs an electronic
interface module in order to function. Therefore its
sensing principle (the optical material) is passive but its
operational integrity relies on the interface that is
powered in the control room (Figure 6.21).
from earthed or galvanic links. Thus the only link that

remains between the control-room and the switchyard is
a fibre optic cable.
Another type of hybrid non-conventional instrument
transformer is achieved by retrofitting a passive optical
sensing medium into a conventional hard-wire
secondary instrument transformer. This can be termed
as a passive hybrid type since no power supply of any
kind is needed at the secondary level.
'Floating'
electrode
6.5.1.3 All-optical transducers
These instrument transformers are based entirely on

optical materials and are fully passive. The sensing
function is achieved directly by the sensing material and
a simple fibre optic cable running between the base of
the unit and the sensor location provides the
communication link.
Electro-optic
sensor
AC line
voltage
Optical fibres
The sensing element is made of an optical material that is

positioned in the electric or magnetic field to be sensed.
In the case of a current measuring device the sensitive
element is either located free in the magnetic field (Figure
6.19(a)) or it can be immersed in a field-shaping magnetic
gap (Figure 6.19(b)). In the case of a voltage-sensing
device (Figure 6.20) the same alternatives exist, this time
for elements that are sensitive to electric fields. The
possibility exists of combining both sensors within a
single housing, thus providing both a CT and VT within a
single compact housing that gives rise to space savings
within a substation.
(a) 'Free-field' type
Reference
electrode
Reference
electrode
Light
path
AC line
voltage
Electro-optic
sensor
(b) 'Field shaping' type
I AC line current
Reference
electrode
Optical fibres
Figure 6.20: Optical voltage sensor based

on the electrical properties of optical materials
Optical fibre
Magneto-optic sensor
Magnetic
field
Optical fibre
(a) 'Free-field' type

High voltage
sensor assembly
AC line current
I
Fibre optic cable

Magnetic field
Optical fibres
Junction
box
Gapped
Magneto-optic sensor
magnetic core
(b) 'Field-shaping' type
Optical
interface
unit
Figure 6.19: Optical current sensor based

on the magnetic properties of optical materials
In all cases there is an optical fibre that channels the

probing reference light from a source into the medium
and another fibre that channels the light back to
AC/DC source
Figure 6.21: Novel instrument transducer concept
requiring an electronic interface in the control room
94
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
15:15
Dome
Page 95
AC line current
Electro-optic sensor
(bulk-glass transducer)
Electro-optic sensor
('all-fibre' transducer)
AC
line I
current
H1
H2
Bulk-glass
sensing element
Light in
Optical fibres
Light out
Fibre optic
cable conduit
Liquid /solid/ gaseous

internal insulation
(a) Glass sensor approach
Insulator
column
AC line current
I
Fibre junction box
Sensor #2
Light in
Fibre
optic
cables
Optical fibres
Light out
Fibre
sensing element
(b) 'All-fibre' sensor concept
Figure 6.22: Conceptual design of a double-sensor optical CT
Similar to conventional instrument transformers there are

live tank and dead tank optical transducers. Typically,
current transducers take the shape of a closed loop of lighttransparent material, fitted around a straight conductor
carrying the line current (Figure 6.22). In this case a bulkglass sensor unit is depicted (Figure 6.22(a)), along with an
all-optical sensor example, as shown in Figure 6.22(b).
Light detectors are basically very sensitive devices and the
sensing material can thus be selected in such a way as to
scale-up readily for larger currents. All-optical voltage
transducers however do not lend themselves easily for
extremely high line voltages. Two concepts using a 'fullvoltage' sensor are shown in Figure 6.23.
Although all-optical instrument transformers were first

introduced 10-15 years ago, there are still only a few in
service nowadays. Figure 6.24 shows a field installation
of a combined optical CT/VT.
Sensor #1
Conductor
(a) 'Live tank'
(b) 'Dead tank'

Figure 6.24: Field installation of a combined
optical CT/VT
Figure 6.23: Optical voltage transducer concepts,

using a full-voltage sensor
95
Chap6-78-97
21/06/02
15:15
Page 96
of insulation material. In most cases the Rogowski coil

will be connected to an amplifier, in order to deliver
sufficient power to the connected measuring or
protection equipment and to match the input impedance
of this equipment.
The Rogowski coil requires
integration of the magnetic field and therefore has a
time and phase delay whilst the integration is completed.
This can be corrected for within a digital protection relay.
The schematic representation of the Rogowski coil sensor
is shown in Figure 6.27.
6.5.2 Other Sensing Systems

There are a number of other sensing systems that can be
used, as described below.
6.5.2.1 Zero-flux (Hall Effect) current transformer
In this case the sensing element is a semi-conducting

wafer that is placed in the gap of a magnetic
concentrating ring. This type of transformer is also
sensitive to d.c. currents. The transformer requires a
power supply that is fed from the line or from a separate
power supply. The sensing current is typically 0.1% of the
current to be measured. In its simplest shape, the Hall
effect voltage is directly proportional to the magnetising
current to be measured. For more accurate and more
sensitive applications, the sensing current is fed through
a secondary, multiple-turn winding, placed around the
magnetic ring in order to balance out the gap magnetic
field. This zero-flux or null-flux version allows very
accurate current measurements in both d.c. and highfrequency applications. A schematic representation of
the sensing part is shown in Figure 6.25.
Electrical to optical
converter/transmitter
I
Burden
Optical
fibres
Current transformer
Figure 6.26: Design principle of a hybrid magnetic
current transformer fitted with an optical transmitter
Magnetic
g
concentrator
(gapped magnetic core)
Air core
toroidal coil
i
Electrical to optical
converter
V
Optical
fibres
Sensing current
Sensing element
Figure 6.25: Conceptual design of a Hall-effect
current sensing element fitted in a field-shaping gap
Current carrying
conductor
Figure 6.27: Schematic representation
of a Rogowski coil, used for current sensing
6.5.2.2 Hybrid magnetic-optical sensor

This type of transformer is mostly used in applications
such as series capacitive compensation of long
transmission lines, where a non-grounded measurement
of current is required. In this case, several current
sensors are required on each phase in order to achieve
capacitor surge protection and balance. The preferred
solution is to use small toroidally wound magnetic core
transformers connected to fibre optic isolating systems.
These sensors are usually active sensors in the sense that
the isolated systems require a power supply. This is
illustrated in Figure 6.26.
6.5.2.3 Rogowski coils
The Rogowski coil is based on the principle of an aircored current transformer with a very high load
impedance. The secondary winding is wound on a toroid
96
Chap7-98-111
21/06/02
9:07
Page 98
Relay Technolog y
Introduction
7.1
Electromechanical relays
7.2
Static relays
7.3
Digital relays
7.4
Numerical relays
7.5
Additional features of numerical relays
7.6
Numerical relay issues
7.7
References
7.8
Chap7-98-111
21/06/02
9:07
Page 99
7 Relay Technolog y
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The last thirty years have seen enormous changes in relay
technology. The electromechanical relay in all of its
different forms has been replaced successively by static,
digital and numerical relays, each change bringing with
it reductions and size and improvements in functionality.
At the same time, reliability levels have been maintained
or even improved and availability significantly increased
due to techniques not available with older relay types.
This represents a tremendous achievement for all those
involved in relay design and manufacture.
This chapter charts the course of relay technology
through the years. As the purpose of the book is to
describe modern protection relay practice, it is natural
therefore to concentrate on digital and numerical relay
technology. The vast number of electromechanical and
static relays are still giving dependable service, but
descriptions on the technology used must necessarily be
somewhat brief. For those interested in the technology
of electromechanical and static technology, more
detailed descriptions can be found in reference [7.1].
7 . 2 E L E C T R O M E C H A N I C A L R E L AY S
These relays were the earliest forms of relay used for the
protection of power systems, and they date back nearly
100 years. They work on the principle of a mechanical
force causing operation of a relay contact in response to
a stimulus. The mechanical force is generated through
current flow in one or more windings on a magnetic core
or cores, hence the term electromechanical relay. The
principle advantage of such relays is that they provide
galvanic isolation between the inputs and outputs in a
simple, cheap and reliable form therefore for simple
on/off switching functions where the output contacts
have to carry substantial currents, they are still used.
Electromechanical relays can be classified into several
different types as follows:
a. attracted armature
b. moving coil
c. induction
d. thermal
e. motor operated
f. mechanical
However, only attracted armature types have significant
99
Chap7-98-111
21/06/02
9:07
Page 100
application at this time, all other types having been

superseded by more modern equivalents.
Armature
7.2.1 Attracted Armature Relays
R e l a y Te c h n o l o g y
These generally consist of an iron-cored electromagnet

that attracts a hinged armature when energised. A
restoring force is provided by means of a spring or
gravity so that the armature will return to its original
position when the electromagnet is de-energised.
Typical forms of an attracted armature relay are shown
in Figure 7.1. Movement of the armature causes contact
closure or opening, the armature either carrying a
moving contact that engages with a fixed one, or causes
a rod to move that brings two contacts together. It is
very easy to mount multiple contacts in rows or stacks,
and hence cause a single input to actuate a number of
outputs. The contacts can be made quite robust and
hence able to make, carry and break relatively large
currents under quite onerous conditions (highly inductive
circuits). This is still a significant advantage of this type
of relay that ensures its continued use.
(a) D.C. relay
(b) Shading loop modification to pole of

relay (a) for a.c. operation
Core
Permanent
magnet
S
Coil
Figure 7.2: Typical polarised relay
(c) Solenoid relay
(d) Reed relay
Figure 7.1: Typical attracted armature relays

Figure 7.3: Typical attracted armature relay mounted in case
The energising quantity can be either an a.c. or a d.c.

current. If an a.c. current is used, means must be
provided to prevent the chatter that would occur from
the flux passing through zero every half cycle. A
common solution to the problem is to split the magnetic
pole and provide a copper loop round one half. The flux
change is now phase-shifted in this pole, so that at no
time is the total flux equal to zero. Conversely, for relays
energised using a d.c. current, remanent flux may
prevent the relay from releasing when the actuating
current is removed. This can be avoided by preventing
the armature from contacting the electromagnet by a
non-magnetic stop, or constructing the electromagnet
using a material with very low remanent flux properties.
Operating speed, power consumption and the number

and type of contacts required are a function of the
design. The typical attracted armature relay has an
operating speed of between 100ms and 400ms, but reed
relays (whose use spanned a relatively short period in the
history of protection relays) with light current contacts
can be designed to have an operating time of as little as
1msec. Operating power is typically 0.05-0.2 watts, but
could be as large as 80 watts for a relay with several
heavy-duty contacts and a high degree of resistance to
mechanical shock.
Some applications require the use of a polarised relay. This
100
21/06/02
9:08
Page 101
can be simply achieved by adding a permanent magnet to

the basic electromagnet. Both self-reset and bi-stable
forms can be achieved. Figure 7.2 shows the basic
construction. One possible example of use is to provide
very fast operating times for a single contact, speeds of less
than 1ms being possible. Figure 7.3 illustrates a typical
example of an attracted armature relay.
7 . 3 S TAT I C R E L AY S
Figure 7.4: Circuit board of static relay
The term static implies that the relay has no moving

parts. This is not strictly the case for a static relay, as the
output contacts are still generally attracted armature
relays. In a protection relay, the term static refers to the
absence of moving parts to create the relay
characteristic.
Introduction of static relays began in the early 1960s.
Their design is based on the use of analogue electronic
devices instead of coils and magnets to create the relay
characteristic. Early versions used discrete devices such
as transistors and diodes in conjunction with resistors,
capacitors, inductors, etc., but advances in electronics
enabled the use of linear and digital integrated circuits
in later versions for signal processing and
implementation of logic functions. While basic circuits
may be common to a number of relays, the packaging
was still essentially restricted to a single protection
function per case, while complex functions required
several cases of hardware suitably interconnected. User
programming was restricted to the basic functions of
adjustment of relay characteristic curves. They therefore
can be viewed in simple terms as an analogue electronic
replacement for electromechanical relays, with some
additional flexibility in settings and some saving in space
requirements. In some cases, relay burden is reduced,
making for reduced CT/VT output requirements.
A number of design problems had to be solved with static

relays. In particular, the relays generally require a
reliable source of d.c. power and measures to prevent
damage to vulnerable electronic circuits had to be
devised. Substation environments are particularly hostile
to electronic circuits due to electrical interference of
various forms that are commonly found (e.g. switching
operations and the effect of faults). While it is possible
to arrange for the d.c. supply to be generated from the
measured quantities of the relay, this has the
disadvantage of increasing the burden on the CTs or VTs,
and there will be a minimum primary current or voltage
below which the relay will not operate. This directly
affects the possible sensitivity of the relay. So provision
of an independent, highly reliable and secure source of
relay power supply was an important consideration. To
prevent maloperation or destruction of electronic devices
during faults or switching operations, sensitive circuitry
is housed in a shielded case to exclude common mode
and radiated interference. The devices may also be
sensitive to static charge, requiring special precautions
during handling, as damage from this cause may not be
immediately apparent, but become apparent later in the
form of premature failure of the relay. Therefore, radically
different relay manufacturing facilities are required
compared to electromechanical relays. Calibration and
repair is no longer a task performed in the field without
specialised equipment. Figure 7.4 shows the circuit board
for a simple static relay and Figure 7.5 shows examples of
simple and complex static relays.
Chap7-98-111
Figure 7.5: Selection of static relays
101
Chap7-98-111
21/06/02
9:08
Page 102
7 . 4 D I G I TA L R E L AY S
Digital protection relays introduced a step change in
technology.
Microprocessors and microcontrollers
replaced analogue circuits used in static relays to
implement relay functions. Early examples began to be
introduced into service around 1980, and, with
improvements in processing capacity, can still be regarded
as current technology for many relay applications.
However, such technology will be completely superseded
within the next five years by numerical relays.
Compared to static relays, digital relays introduce A/D

conversion of all measured analogue quantities and use
a microprocessor to implement the protection algorithm.
The microprocessor may use some kind of counting
technique, or use the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) to
implement the algorithm.
However, the typical
microprocessors used have limited processing capacity
and memory compared to that provided in numerical
relays. The functionality tends therefore to be limited
and restricted largely to the protection function itself.
Additional functionality compared to that provided by an
electromechanical or static relay is usually available,
typically taking the form of a wider range of settings,
and greater accuracy. A communications link to a
remote computer may also be provided.
The limited power of the microprocessors used in digital

relays restricts the number of samples of the waveform
that can be measured per cycle. This, in turn, limits the
speed of operation of the relay in certain applications.
Therefore, a digital relay for a particular protection
function may have a longer operation time than the
static relay equivalent. However, the extra time is not
significant in terms of overall tripping time and possible
effects of power system stability. Examples of digital
relays are shown in Figure 7.6.
7 . 5 N U M E R I C A L R E L AY S
The distinction between digital and numerical relay rests
on points of fine technical detail, and is rarely found in
areas other than Protection. They can be viewed as
natural developments of digital relays as a result of
advances in technology. Typically, they use a specialised
digital signal processor (DSP) as the computational
hardware, together with the associated software tools.
The input analogue signals are converted into a digital
representation and processed according to the appropriate
mathematical algorithm. Processing is carried out using a
specialised microprocessor that is optimised for signal
processing applications, known as a digital signal
processor or DSP for short. Digital processing of signals in
real time requires a very high power microprocessor.
In addition, the continuing reduction in the cost of
microprocessors and related digital devices (memory, I/O,
etc.) naturally leads to an approach where a single item
of hardware is used to provide a range of functions
(one-box solution approach). By using multiple
microprocessors to provide the necessary computational
performance, a large number of functions previously
implemented in separate items of hardware can now be
included within a single item. Table 7.1 provides a list of
typical functions available, while Table 7.2 summarises
the advantages of a modern numerical relay over the
static equivalent of only 10-15 years ago. Figure 7.7
shows typical numerical relays, and a circuit board is
shown in Figure 7.8. Figure 7.9 provides an illustration of
the savings in space possible on a HV feeder showing the
space requirement for relays with electromechanical and
numerical relay technology to provide the same
functionality.
Distance Protection- several schemes including user definable)

Overcurrent Protection (directional/non-directional)
Several Setting Groups for protection values
Switch-on-to-Fault Protection
Power Swing Blocking
Voltage Transformer Supervision
Negative Sequence Current Protection
Undervoltage Protection
Overvoltage Protection
CB Fail Protection
Fault Location
CT Supervision
VT Supervision
Check Synchronisation
Autoreclose
CB Condition Monitoring
CB State Monitoring
User-Definable Logic
Broken Conductor Detection
Measurement of Power System Quantities (Current, Voltage, etc.)
Fault/Event/Disturbance recorder
Figure 7.6: Selection of digital relays
Table 7.1: Numerical distance relay features

102
21/06/02
9:08
Page 103
Chap7-98-111
Figure 7.7: Typical numerical relays
Several setting groups

Wider range of parameter adjustment
Remote communications built in
Internal Fault diagnosis
Power system measurements available
Distance to fault locator
Disturbance recorder
Auxiliary protection functions ( broken conductor, negative sequence, etc.)
CB monitoring (state, condition)
User-definable logic
Backup protection functions in-built
Consistency of operation times - reduced grading margin
Table 7.2: Advantages of
numerical protection relays over static
Because a numerical relay may implement the

functionality that used to require several discrete relays,
the relay functions (overcurrent, earth fault, etc.) are
now referred to as being relay elements, so that a
single relay (i.e. an item of hardware housed in a single
case) may implement several functions using several
relay elements. Each relay element will typically be a
software routine or routines.
The argument against putting many features into one
piece of hardware centres on the issues of reliability and
availability. A failure of a numerical relay may cause
many more functions to be lost, compared to applications
where different functions are implemented by separate
hardware items. Comparison of reliability and availability
between the two methods is complex as interdependency of elements of an application provided by
separate relay elements needs to be taken into account.
With the experience gained with static and digital relays,
most hardware failure mechanisms are now well
103
Chap7-98-111
21/06/02
9:08
Page 104
understood and suitable precautions taken at the design

stage. Software problems are minimised by rigorous use
of software design techniques, extensive prototype
testing (see Chapter 21) and the ability to download
amended software into memory (possibly using a remote
telephone link for download). Practical experience
indicates that numerical relays are at least as reliable
and have at least as good a record of availability as
relays of earlier technologies.
As the technology of numerical relays has only become
available in recent years, a presentation of the concepts
behind a numerical relay is presented in the following
sections.
7.5.1 Hardware Architecture
The typical architecture of a numerical relay is shown

in Figure 7.10. It consists of one or more DSP
microprocessors, some memory, digital and analogue
input/output (I/O), and a power supply. Where
multiple processors are provided, it is usual for one of
them to be dedicated to executing the protection relay
algorithms, while the remainder implements any
associated logic and handles the Human Machine
Interface (HMI) interfaces. By organising the I/O on a
set of plug-in printed circuit boards (PCBs), additional
I/O up to the limits of the hardware/software can be
easily added. The internal communications bus links
the hardware and therefore is critical component in
Figure 7.8: Circuit board for numerical relay
the design. It must work at high speed, use low

voltage levels and yet be immune to conducted and
radiated interference from the electrically noisy
substation environment. Excellent shielding of the
relevant areas is therefore required. Digital inputs are
optically isolated to prevent transients being
transmitted to the internal circuitry. Analogue inputs
are isolated using precision transformers to maintain
measurement accuracy while removing harmful
Figure 7.9: Space requirements of different

relay technologies for same functionality
104
21/06/02
9:08
Page 105
CPU code & data

setting database
data
Present values
of all settings
Alarm, event, fault &

maintenance records
Battery
backed-up
SRAM
E2 PROM
Front LCD panel
Default settings &

parameters language text
software code
Flash
EPROM
SRAM
RS232 Front comms port

Parallel test port
CPU
Main processor board
LEDs
Comms betwen
main & compressor
boards
IRIG - B signal
IRIG - B board
(optional)
Timing
data
FPGA
Serial data bus
(sample data)
CPU
Legend:
Coprocessor board
Digital input values
Parallel data bus
Relay board
ADC
Input board
Power supply (3 voltages),

rear comms data
SRAM - Static Read Only Memory

CPU - Central Procesing Unit
IRIG-B - Time Synchronisation Signal
FPGA - Field Programmable Logic Array
ADC - Analog to Digital Converter
E 2 PROM - Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EPROM - Electrically Programmable Read Only Memory
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
Analogue input signals
Power supply
board
Transformer
board
Output relays
Output relay contacts

(x14 or x21)
Power supply, rear comms,

data, output relay status
SRAM
Digital inputs (x8 or x16)
Fibre optic
rear comms
port optional
CPU code
& data
Opto-isolated
inputs
Chap7-98-111
Power Watchdog Field

Rear RS485
Current & voltage inputs (6 to 8)
supply contacts voltage communication port
Figure 7.10: Relay modules and information flow
transients. Additionally, the input signals must be

amplitude limited to avoid them exceeding the power
supply voltages, as otherwise the waveform will appear
distorted, as shown in Figure 7.11.
where:
Analogue signals are converted to digital form using an

A/D converter. The cheapest method is to use a single
A/D converter, preceded by a multiplexer to connect
each of the input signals in turn to the converter. The
signals may be initially input to a number of
simultaneous sample-andhold circuits prior to
multiplexing, or the time relationship between
successive samples must be known if the phase
relationship between signals is important.
The
alternative is to provide each input with a dedicated A/D
converter, and logic to ensure that all converters
perform the measurement simultaneously.
If too low a sampling frequency is chosen, aliasing of the

input signal can occur (Figure 7.12), resulting in high
frequencies appearing as part of signal in the frequency
range of interest. Incorrect results will then be obtained.
The solution is to apply an anti-aliasing filter, coupled
with an appropriate choice of sampling frequency, to the
analogue signal, so those frequency components that
could cause aliasing are filtered out. Digital sine and
cosine filters are used (Figure 7.13), with a frequency
response shown in Figure 7.14, to extract the real and
imaginary components of the signal. Frequency tracking
of the input signals is applied to adjust the sampling
frequency so that the desired number of samples/cycle is
always obtained. A modern numerical relay may sample
each analogue input quantity at between 16 and 24
samples per cycle.
The frequency of sampling must be carefully considered,

as the Nyquist criterion applies:
fs 2 x fh
fs = sampling frequency
fh = highest frequency of interest
105
Chap7-98-111
22/06/02
9:53
Page 106
+Vref
Vref
Vout
Vin
Vref
-Vref
Figure 7.11: Signal distortion

due to excessive amplitude
All subsequent signal processing is carried out digitally in

software, final digital outputs use relays to provide
isolation or are sent via an external communications bus
to other devices.
b. HMI interface software the high level software

for communicating with a user, via the front panel
controls or through a data link to another
computer running suitable software, storage of
setting data, etc.
7.5.2 Relay Software
c. application software this is the software that

defines the protection function of the relay
The software provided is commonly organised into a

series of tasks, operating in real time. An essential
component is the Real Time Operating System (RTOS),
whose function is to ensure that the other tasks are
executed as and when required, on a priority basis.
Other task software provided will naturally vary
according to the function of the specific relay, but can be
generalised as follows:
a. system services software this is akin to the BIOS
of an ordinary PC, and controls the low-level I/O
for the relay (i.e. drivers for the relay hardware,
boot-up sequence, etc.)
d. auxiliary functions software to implement other

features offered in the relay often structured as
a series of modules to reflect the options offered to
a user by the manufacturer
7.5.3 Application Software
The relevant software algorithm is then applied. Firstly,
the values of the quantities of interest have to be
determined from the available information contained in
the data samples. This is conveniently done by the
application of the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), and
7
Actual signal
Apparent signal
Sample points
Figure 7.12: Signal aliasing problem
106
Chap7-98-111
22/06/02
9:53
Page 107
b. timer expired action alarm/trip

c. value returned below setting reset timers, etc.
d. value below setting do nothing
e. value still above setting increment timer, etc.
Since the overall cycle time for the software is known,
timers are generally implemented as counters.
X
X
X
X
Xs = 2 0 + 1 + X2 + 3 + 0 - 5 - X6 - 7
8
2
2
2
2
(a) Sine filter
7 . 6 A D D I T I O N A L F E AT U R E S
O F N U M E R I C A L R E L AY S
X
X
X
X
Xc = 2 X0 + 1 + 0 - 3 - X4 - 5 + 0 + 7
8
2
2
2
2
(b) Cosine filter
Figure 7.13: Digital filters
the result is magnitude and phase information for the

selected quantity. This calculation is repeated for all of
the quantities of interest. The quantities can then be
compared with the relay characteristic, and a decision
made in terms of the following:
a. value above setting start timers, etc.
Typical functions that may be found in a numerical relay

besides protection functions are described in this section.
Note that not all functions may be found in a particular
relay. In common with earlier generations of relays,
manufacturers, in accordance with their perceived
market segmentation, will offer different versions
offering a different set of functions.
Function
parameters will generally be available for display on the
front panel of the relay and also via an external
Alias of fundamental
Gain
1
The DSP chip in a numerical relay is normally of

sufficient processing capacity that calculation of the
relay protection function only occupies part of the
processing capacity. The excess capacity is therefore
available to perform other functions. Of course, care
must be taken never to load the processor beyond
capacity, for if this happens, the protection algorithm
will not complete its calculation in the required time and
the protection function will be compromised.
0
f0
2f0
3f0
4f0
5f0
Frequency
Figure 7.14: Filter frequency response
107
6f0
7f0
8f0
9f0
Chap7-98-111
22/06/02
9:53
Page 108
communications port, but some by their nature may only

be available at one output interface.
7.6.1 Measured Values Display
This is perhaps the most obvious and simple function to
implement, as it involves the least additional processor
time. The values that the relay must measure to perform
its protection function have already been acquired and
processed. It is therefore a simple task to display them
on the front panel, and/or transmit as required to a
remote computer/HMI station. Less obvious is that a
number of extra quantities may be able to be derived
from the measured quantities, depending on the input
signals available. These might include:
a. sequence quantities (positive, negative, zero)
b. power, reactive power and power factor
c. energy (kWh, kvarh)
d. max. demand in a period (kW, kvar; average and
peak values)
position-switch outputs can be connected to the relay

digital inputs and hence provide the indication of state
via the communications bus to a remote control centre.
Circuit breakers also require periodic maintenance of
their operating mechanisms and contacts to ensure they
will operate when required and that the fault capacity is
not affected adversely. The requirement for maintenance
is a function of the number of trip operations, the
cumulative current broken and the type of breaker. A
numerical relay can record all of these parameters and
hence be configured to send an alarm when maintenance
is due. If maintenance is not carried out within defined
criteria (such as a pre-defined time or number of trips)
after maintenance is required, the CB can be arranged to
trip and lockout, or inhibit certain functions such as
auto-reclose.
Finally, as well as tripping the CB as required under fault
conditions, it can also be arranged for a digital output to
be used for CB closure, so that separate CB close control
circuits can be eliminated.
e. harmonic quantities
f. frequency
7.6.4 Disturbance Recorder
g. temperatures/RTD status
The relay memory requires a certain minimum number of

cycles of measured data to be stored for correct signal
processing and detection of events. The memory can
easily be expanded to allow storage of a greater time
period of input data, both analogue and digital, plus the
state of the relay outputs. It then has the capability to act
as a disturbance recorder for the circuit being monitored,
so that by freezing the memory at the instant of fault
detection or trip, a record of the disturbance is available
for later download and analysis. It may be inconvenient to
download the record immediately, so facilities may be
provided to capture and store a number of disturbances.
In industrial and small distribution networks, this may be
all that is required. In transmission networks, it may be
necessary to provide a single recorder to monitor a number
of circuits simultaneously, and in this case, a separate
disturbance recorder will still be required.
h. motor start information (start time, total no. of

starts/reaccelerations, total running time
i. distance to fault
The accuracy of the measured values can only be as good
as the accuracy of the transducers used (VTs CTs, A/D
converter, etc.). As CTs and VTs for protection functions
may have a different accuracy specification to those for
metering functions, such data may not be sufficiently
accurate for tariff purposes. However, it will be
sufficiently accurate for an operator to assess system
conditions and make appropriate decisions.
7.6.2 VT/CT Supervision
If suitable VTs are used, supervision of the VT/CT supplies
can be made available. VT supervision is made more
complicated by the different conditions under which
there may be no VT signal some of which indicate VT
failure and some occur because of a power system fault
having occurred.
CT supervision is carried out more easily, the general
principle being the calculation of a level of negative
sequence current that is inconsistent with the calculated
value of negative sequence voltage.
7.6.3 CB Control/State Indication /Condition Monitoring

System operators will normally require knowledge of the
state of all circuit breakers under their control. The CB
7.6.5 Time Synchronisation

Disturbance records and data relating to energy
consumption requires time tagging to serve any useful
purpose. Although an internal clock will normally be
present, this is of limited accuracy and use of this clock
to provide time information may cause problems if the
disturbance record has to be correlated with similar
records from other sources to obtain a complete picture
of an event. Many numerical relays have the facility for
time synchronisation from an external clock. The
standard normally used is an IRIG-B signal, which may be
derived from a number of sources, the latest being from
a GPS satellite system.
108
22/06/02
9:55
Page 109
7.6.6 Programmable Logic

Logic functions are well suited to implementation using
microprocessors. The implementation of logic in a relay
is not new, as functions such as intertripping and autoreclose require a certain amount of logic. However, by
providing a substantial number of digital I/O and making
the logic capable of being programmed using suitable
off-line software, the functionality of such schemes can
be enhanced and/or additional features provided. For
instance, an overcurrent relay at the receiving end of a
transformer feeder could use the temperature inputs
provided to monitor transformer winding temperature
and
provide
alarm/trip
facilities
to
the
operator/upstream relay, eliminating the need for a
separate winding temperature relay. This is an
elementary example, but other advantages are evident to
the relay manufacturer different logic schemes
required by different Utilities, etc., no longer need
separate relay versions or some hard-wired logic to
implement, reducing the cost of manufacture. It is also
easier to customise a relay for a specific application, and
eliminate other devices that would otherwise be
required.
7.6.7 Provision of Setting Groups
Historically, electromechanical and static relays have
been provided with only one group of settings to be
applied to the relay. Unfortunately, power systems
change their topology due to operational reasons on a
regular basis. (e.g. supply from normal/emergency
generation). The different configurations may require
different relay settings to maintain the desired level of
network protection (since, for the above example, the
fault levels will be significantly different on parts of the
network that remain energised under both conditions).
This problem can be overcome by the provision within the
relay of a number of setting groups, only one of which is
in use at any one time. Changeover between groups can
be achieved from a remote command from the operator,
or possibly through the programmable logic system. This
may obviate the need for duplicate relays to be fitted
with some form of switching arrangement of the inputs
and outputs depending on network configuration. The
operator will also have the ability to remotely program
the relay with a group of settings if required.
7.6.8 Conclusions
The provision of extra facilities in numerical relays may
avoid the need for other measurement/control devices to
be fitted in a substation. A trend can therefore be
discerned in which protection relays are provided with
functionality that in the past has been provided using
separate equipment. The protection relay no longer
performs a basic protection function; but is becoming an

integral and major part of a substation automation
scheme. The choice of a protection relay rather than
some other device is logical, as the protection relay is
probably the only device that is virtually mandatory on
circuits of any significant rating. Thus, the functions
previously carried out by separate devices such as bay
controllers, discrete metering transducers and similar
devices are now found in a protection relay. It is now
possible to implement a substation automation scheme
using numerical relays as the principal or indeed only
hardware provided at bay level. As the power of
microprocessors continues to grow and pressure on
operators to reduce costs continues, this trend will
probably continue, one obvious development being the
provision of RTU facilities in designated relays that act as
local concentrators of information within the overall
network automation scheme.
7 . 7 N U M E R I C A L R E L AY I S S U E S
The introduction of numerical relays replaces some of the
issues of previous generations of relays with new ones.
Some of the new issues that must be addressed are as
follows:
a. software version control
b. relay data management
c. testing and commissioning
7.7.1 Software Version Control

Numerical relays perform their functions by means of
software. The process used for software generation is no
different in principle to that for any other device using
real-time software, and includes the difficulties of
developing code that is error-free. Manufacturers must
therefore pay particular attention to the methodology
used for software generation and testing to ensure that
as far as possible, the code contains no errors. However,
it is virtually impossible to perform internal tests that
cover all possible combinations of external effects, etc.,
and therefore it must be accepted that errors may exist.
In this respect, software used in relays is no different to
any other software, where users accept that field use
may uncover errors that may require changes to the
software. Obviously, type testing can be expected to
prove that the protection functions implemented by the
relay are carried out properly, but it has been known for
failures of rarely used auxiliary functions to occur under
some conditions.
Where problems are discovered in software subsequent
to the release of a numerical relay for sale, a new version
of the software may be considered necessary. This
process then requires some form of software version
control to be implemented to keep track of:
109
Chap7-98-111
Chap7-98-111
22/06/02
9:55
Page 110
a. the different software versions in existence

b. the differences between each version
c. the reasons for the change
d. relays fitted with each of the versions
usually on a repair-by-replacement basis.
7.8 REFERENCES
With an effective version control system, manufacturers

are able to advise users in the event of reported problems
if the problem is a known software related problem and
what remedial action is required. With the aid of
suitable software held by a user, it may be possible to
download the new software version instead of requiring
a visit from a service engineer.
7.1 Protective Relays Application Guide, 3rd edition.

ALSTOM T&D Protection and Control, 1987.
7.7.2 Relay Data Management
A numerical relay usually provides many more features

than a relay using static or electromechanical
technology. To use these features, the appropriate data
must be entered into the memory of the relay. Users
must also keep a record of all of the data, in case of data
loss within the relay, or for use in system studies, etc.
The amount of data per numerical relay may be 10-50
times that of an equivalent electromechanical relay, to
which must be added the possibility of user-defined logic
functions. The task of entering the data correctly into a
numerical relay becomes a much more complex task than
previously, which adds to the possibility of a mistake
being made. Similarly, the amount of data that must be
recorded is much larger, giving rise potentially to
problems of storage.
The problems have been addressed by the provision of
software to automate the preparation and download of
relay setting data from a portable computer connected
to a communications port of the relay. As part of the
process, the setting data can be read back from the relay
and compared with the desired settings to ensure that
the download has been error-free. A copy of the setting
data (including user defined logic schemes where used)
can also be stored on the computer, for later printout
and/or upload to the users database facilities.
More advanced software is available to perform the
above functions from an Engineering Computer in a
substation automation scheme see Chapter 24 for
details of such schemes).
7.7.3 Relay Testing and Commissioning

The testing of relays based on software is of necessity
radically different from earlier generations of relays. The
topic is dealt with in detail in Chapter 21, but it can be
mentioned here that site commissioning is usually
restricted to the in-built software self-check and
verification that currents and voltages measured by the
relay are correct. Problems revealed by such tests require
specialist equipment to resolve, and hence field policy is
110
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:02
Page 112
Protection: Signalling
and Intertripping
Introduction
8.1
Unit protection schemes
8.2
Teleprotection commands
8.3
Intertripping
8.4
Performance requirements
8.5
Transmission media, interference and noise
8.6
Methods of signalling
8.7
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:03
Page 113
8 P rotection: Signalling
and Intertripping
8.1 INTRODUCTION
Unit protection schemes, formed by a number of relays
located remotely from each other, and some distance
protection schemes, require some form of communication
between each location in order to achieve a unit protection
function. This form of communication is known as
protection signalling. Additionally communications
facilities are also required when remote operation of a
circuit breaker is required as a result of a local event. This
form of communications is known as intertripping.
The communication messages involved may be quite
simple, involving instructions for the receiving device to
take some defined action (trip, block, etc.), or it may be
the passing of measured data in some form from one
device to another (as in a unit protection scheme).
Various types of communication links are available for
protection signalling, for example:
i. private pilot wires installed by the power
authority
ii. pilot wires or channels
communications company
rented
from
iii. carrier channels at high frequencies over the

power lines
iv. radio channels at very high or ultra high
frequencies
v. optical fibres
Whether or not a particular link is used depends on
factors such as the availability of an appropriate
communication network, the distance between
protection relaying points, the terrain over which the
power network is constructed, as well as cost.
Protection signalling is used to implement Unit
Protection schemes, provide teleprotection commands,
or implement intertripping between circuit breakers.
8 . 2 U N I T P R OT E C T I O N S C H E M E S
Phase comparison and current differential schemes use
signalling to convey information concerning the relaying
quantity - phase angle of current and phase and
113
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:03
Page 114
Power transmission line

Trip
Trip
I
Intertrip
Intertrip
Permissive
trip
Permissive
trip
Blocking
P rotection: Signalling and Intertripping
Protection
relay
scheme
Teleprotection
command
(send)
Blocking
Communication
link
Teleprotection
command
(receive)
Telemetry
Telemetry
Telecontrol
Telecontrol
Telephone
Telephone
Data
Data
Communication
systems
Communication
systems
Protection
relay
scheme
Figure 8.1: Application of protection signalling and its relationship to other systems using communication
(shown as a unidirectional system for simplicity)
magnitude of current respectively - between local and

remote relaying points. Comparison of local and remote
signals provides the basis for both fault detection and
discrimination of the schemes.
Details of Unit Protection schemes are given in Chapter 10.
Communications methods are covered later in this Chapter.
piece of apparatus in sympathy with the tripping of other

circuit breakers. The main use of such schemes is to
ensure that protection at both ends of a faulted circuit
will operate to isolate the equipment concerned. Possible
circumstances when it may be used are:
a. a feeder with a weak infeed at one end, insufficient
to operate the protection for all faults
8 . 3 T E L E P R OT E C T I O N C O M M A N D S
b. feeder protection applied to transformer feeder

circuits. Faults on the transformer windings may
operate the transformer protection but not the
feeder protection. Similarly, some earth faults may
not be detected due to transformer connections
Some Distance Protection schemes described in Chapter

12 use signalling to convey a command between local
and remote relaying points. Receipt of the information
is used to aid or speed up clearance of faults within a
protected zone or to prevent tripping from faults outside
a protected zone.
c. faults between the CB and feeder protection CTs,

when these are located on the feeder side of the CB.
Bus-zone protection does not result in fault
clearance the fault is still fed from the remote end
of the feeder, while feeder unit protection may not
operate as the fault is outside the protected zone
Teleprotection systems are often referred to by their

mode of operation, or the role of the teleprotection
command in the system.
d. some distance protection schemes use

intertripping to improve fault clearance times for
some kinds of fault see Chapters 12/13
8.4 INTERTRIPPING
Intertripping is the controlled tripping of a circuit
breaker so as to complete the isolation of a circuit or
Intertripping schemes use signalling to convey a trip
114
21/06/02
9:03
Page 115
command to remote circuit breakers to isolate circuits.

For high reliability EHV protection schemes, intertripping
may be used to give back-up to main protections, or
back-tripping in the case of breaker failure. Three types
of intertripping are commonly encountered, and are
described below.
8.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Overall fault clearance time is the sum of:
a. signalling time
b. protection relay operating time
c. trip relay operating time
8.4.1 Direct Tripping

In direct tripping applications, intertrip signals are sent
directly to the master trip relay. Receipt of the command
causes circuit breaker operation. The method of
communication must be reliable and secure because any
signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of
the circuit at that end. The communications system
design must be such that interference on the
communication circuit does not cause spurious trips.
Should a spurious trip occur, considerable unnecessary
isolation of the primary system might result, which is at
best undesirable and at worst quite unacceptable.
8.4.2 Permissive Tripping
Permissive trip commands are always monitored by a
protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when
receipt of the command coincides with operation of the
protection relay at the receiving end responding to a
system fault. Requirements for the communications
channel are less onerous than for direct tripping
schemes, since receipt of an incorrect signal must
coincide with operation of the receiving end protection
for a trip operation to take place. The intention of these
schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring
within the protected zone.
8.4.3 Blocking Scheme

Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element
that detects faults external to the protected zone.
Detection of an external fault at the local end of a
protected circuit results in a blocking signal being
transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end,
receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end
protection operating if it had detected the external fault.
Loss of the communications channel is less serious for
this scheme than in others as loss of the channel does
not result in a failure to trip when required. However,
the risk of a spurious trip is higher.
Figure 8.1 shows the typical applications of protection
signalling and their relationship to other signalling
systems commonly required for control and management
of a power system. Of course, not all of the protection
signals shown will be required in any particular scheme.
d. circuit breaker operating time

The overall time must be less than the maximum time for
which a fault can remain on the system for minimum
plant damage, loss of stability, etc. Fast operation is
therefore a pre-requisite of most signalling systems.
Typically the time allowed for the transfer of a command
is of the same order as the operating time of the
associated protection relays. Nominal operating times
range from 5 to 40ms dependent on the mode of
operation of the teleprotection system.
Protection signals are subjected to the noise and
interference associated with each communication
medium. If noise reproduces the signal used to convey
the command, unwanted commands may be produced,
whilst if noise occurs when a command signal is being
transmitted, the command may be retarded or missed
completely. Performance is expressed in terms of
security and dependability. Security is assessed by the
probability of an unwanted command occurring, and
dependability is assessed by the probability of missing a
command. The required degree of security and
dependability is related to the mode of operation, the
characteristics of the communication medium and the
operating standards of the particular power authority.
Typical design objectives for teleprotection systems are
not more than one incorrect trip per 500 equipment
years and less than one failure to trip in every 1000
attempts, or a delay of more than 50msec should not
occur more than once per 10 equipment years. To
achieve these objectives, special emphasis may be
attached to the security and dependability of the
teleprotection command for each mode of operation in
the system, as follows.
8.5.1 Performance Requirements Intertripping

Since any unwanted command causes incorrect tripping,
very high security is required at all noise levels up to the
maximum that might ever be encountered.
8.5.2 Performance Requirements Permissive Tripping
Security somewhat lower than that required for
intertripping is usually satisfactory, since incorrect
tripping can occur only if an unwanted command
happens to coincide with operation of the protection
relay for an out-of-zone fault.
115
Chap8-112-121
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:03
Page 116
For permissive over-reach schemes, resetting after a

command should be highly dependable to avoid any
chance of maloperations during current reversals.
physical fibre connection and thus enables more

comprehensive monitoring of the power system to be
achieved by the provision of a large number of
communication channels.
8.5.3 Performance Requirements Blocking Schemes
8.6.1 Private Pilot Wires and Channels
Low security is usually adequate since an unwanted

command can never cause an incorrect trip. High
dependability is required since absence of the command
could cause incorrect tripping if the protection relay
operates for an out-of-zone fault.
Pilot wires are continuous copper connections between

signalling stations, while pilot channels are
discontinuous pilot wires with isolation transformers or
repeaters along the route between signalling stations.
They may be laid in a trench with high voltage cables,
laid by a separate route or strung as an open wire on a
separate wood pole route.
Typical performance requirements are shown in Figure 8.2.
Distances over which signalling is required vary

considerably. At one end of the scale, the distance may be
only a few tens of metres, where the devices concerned are
located in the same substation. For applications on EHV
lines, the distance between devices may be between 10100km or more. For short distances, no special measures
are required against interference, but over longer distances,
special send and receive relays may be required to boost
signal levels and provide immunity against induced
voltages from power circuits, lightning strikes to ground
adjacent to the route, etc. Isolation transformers may also
have to be provided to guard against rises in substation
ground potential due to earth faults.
10-2
Sec
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
10-3
10-4
10-5
10
10
TOP
Analogue
Digital
TOP
Intertrip
Blocking
Analogue
Intertrip
T - 0.04sec
PUC -1.00E-03
P -1.00E-01
Digital
Intertrip
T - 0.04sec
P
P
TOOP - 0.015sec
P -1.00E-01
PMC -1.00E-01
T
P
P
-1.00E-01
- 0.015sec
- 0.015sec
-2.00E-02
-1.00E-01
PMC
The capacity of a link can be increased if frequency

division multiplexing techniques are used to run parallel
signalling systems, but some Utilities prefer the link to be
used only for protection signalling.
- Maximum operating time
UC
)%
Dependability 100(1-P
PMC )%
Private pilot wires or channels can be attractive to an

Utility running a very dense power system with short
distances between stations.
Figure 8.2: Typical performance requirements

for protection signalling when the
communication link is subjected to noise
8.6 TRANSMISSION MEDIA

INTERFERENCE AND NOISE
The transmission media that provide the communication
links involved in protection signalling are:
a. private pilots
b. rented pilots or channels
c. power line carrier
d. radio
e. optical fibres
Historically, pilot wires and channels (discontinuous pilot
wires with isolation transformers or repeaters along the
route between signalling points) have been the most
widely used due to their availability, followed by Power
Line Carrier Communications (PLCC) techniques and
radio. In recent years, fibre-optic systems have become
the usual choice for new installations, primarily due to
their complete immunity from electrical interference.
The use of fibre-optic cables also greatly increases the
number of communication channels available for each
8.6.2 Rented Pilot Wires and Channels

These are rented from national communication
authorities and, apart from the connection from the
relaying point to the nearest telephone exchange, the
routing will be through cables forming part of the
national communication network.
An economic decision has to be made between the use
of private or rented pilots. If private pilots are used, the
owner has complete control, but bears the cost of
installation and maintenance. If rented pilots are used,
most of these costs are eliminated, but fees must be paid
to the owner of the pilots and the signal path may be
changed without warning. This may be a problem in
protection applications where signal transmission times
are critical.
The chance of voltages being induced in rented pilots is
smaller than for private pilots, as the pilot route is
normally not related to the route of the power line with
which it is associated. However, some degree of security
116
21/06/02
9:03
Page 117
and protection against induced voltages must be built

into signalling systems. Electrical interference from
other signalling systems, particularly 17, 25 and 50Hz
ringing tones up to 150V peak, and from noise generated
within the equipment used in the communication
network, is a common hazard. Similarly, the signalling
system must also be proof against intermittent short and
open circuits on the pilot link, incorrect connection of 50
volts d.c. across the pilot link and other similar faults.
Station earth potential rise is a significant factor to be
taken into account and isolation must be provided to
protect both the personnel and equipment of the
communication authority.
The most significant hazard to be withstood by a
protection signalling system using this medium arises
when a linesman inadvertently connects a low
impedance test oscillator across the pilot link that can
generate signalling tones. Transmissions by such an
oscillator may simulate the operating code or tone
sequence that, in the case of direct intertripping
schemes, would result in incorrect operation of the
circuit breaker.
Communication between relaying points may be over a
two-wire or four-wire link. Consequently the effect of a
particular human action, for example an incorrect
disconnection, may disrupt communication in one
direction or both.
The signals transmitted must be limited in both level and
bandwidth to avoid interference with other signalling
systems. The owner of the pilots will impose standards
in this respect that may limit transmission capacity

and/or transmission distance.
With a power system operating at, say, 132kV, where
relatively long protection signalling times are acceptable,
signalling has been achieved above speech together with
metering and control signalling on an established control
network. Consequently the protection signalling was
achieved at very low cost. High voltage systems (220kV
and above) have demanded shorter operating times and
improved security, which has led to the renting of pilot
links exclusively for protection signalling purposes.
8.6.3 Power Line Carrier Communications Techniques
Where long line sections are involved, or if the route
involves installation difficulties, the expense of providing
physical pilot connections or operational restrictions
associated with the route length require that other
means of providing signalling facilities are required.
Power Line Carrier Communications (PLCC) is a technique
that involves high frequency signal transmission along
the overhead power line. It is robust and therefore
reliable, constituting a low loss transmission path that is
fully controlled by the Utility.
High voltage capacitors are used, along with drainage
coils, for the purpose of injecting the signal to and
extracting it from the line. Injection can be carried out
by impressing the carrier signal voltage between one
conductor and earth or between any two phase
conductors. The basic units can be built up into a high
pass or band pass filter as shown in Figure 8.3.
Line trap
To station
To line
Chap8-112-121
Series
tuning
unit
Capacitor VT
To E/M VT
To E/M VT
Shunt filter unit
75 ohms Coaxial cable

To HF equipment
Figure 8.3: Typical phase-to-phase coupling equipment
117
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:03
Page 118
The attenuation of a channel is of prime importance in

the application of carrier signalling, because it
determines the amount of transmitted energy available
at the receiving end to overcome noise and interfering
voltages. The loss of each line terminal will be 1 to 2dB
through the coupling filter, a maximum of 3dB through
its broad-band trap and not more than 0.5dB per 100
metres through the high frequency cable.
An installation of PLCC equipment including capacitor

voltage transformers and line traps, in a line-to-line
injection arrangement, is shown in Figure 8.4.
Figure 8.4: Carrier coupling equipment
The high voltage capacitor is tuned by a tuning coil to

present a low impedance at the signal frequency; the
parallel circuit presents a high impedance at the signal
frequency while providing a path for the power
frequency currents passed by the capacitor.
The complete arrangement is designed as a balanced or
unbalanced half-section band pass filter, according to
whether the transmission is phase-phase or phase-earth;
the power line characteristic impedance, between 400 and
600 ohms, determines the design impedance of the filter.
It is necessary to minimize the loss of signal into other parts
of the power system, to allow the same frequency to be
used on another line. This is done with a 'line trap' or 'wave
trap', which in its simplest form is a parallel circuit tuned to
present a very high impedance to the signal frequency. It is
connected in the phase conductor on the station side of the
injection equipment. The complete carrier coupling
equipment is shown in Figure 8.4.
The single frequency line trap may be treated as an

integral part of the complete injection equipment to
accommodate two or more carrier systems. However,
difficulties may arise in an overall design, as, at certain
frequencies, the actual station reactance, which is
normally capacitive, will tune with the trap, which is
inductive below its resonant frequency; the result will be
a low impedance across the transmission path,
preventing operation at these frequencies. This situation
can be avoided by the use of an independent 'double
frequency' or 'broad-band' trap.
The coupling filter and the carrier equipment are
connected by high frequency cable of preferred
characteristic impedance 75 ohms. A matching
transformer is incorporated in the line coupling filter to
match it to the hf cable. Surge diverters are fitted to
protect the components against transient over voltages.
The high frequency transmission characteristics of power

circuits are good the loss amounting to 0.02 to 0.2dB per
kilometre depending upon line voltage and frequency.
Line attenuation is not affected appreciably by rain, but
serious increase in loss may occur when the phase
conductors are thickly coated with hoar-frost or ice.
Attenuations of up to three times the fair weather value
have been experienced. Receiving equipment commonly
incorporates automatic gain control (AGC) to
compensate for variations in attenuation of signals.
High noise levels arise from lightning strikes and system
fault inception or clearance. Although these are of short
duration, lasting only a few milliseconds at the most, they
may cause overloading of power line carrier receiving
equipment. Signalling systems used for intertripping in
particular must incorporate appropriate security features to
avoid maloperation. The most severe noise levels are
encountered with operation of the line isolators, and these
may last for some seconds. Although maloperation of the
associated teleprotection scheme may have little
operational significance, since the circuit breaker at one end
at least is normally already open, high security is generally
required to cater for noise coupled between parallel lines or
passed through line traps from adjacent lines.
Signalling for permissive intertrip applications needs
special consideration, as this involves signalling through
a power system fault. The increase in channel
attenuation due to the fault varies according to the type
of fault, but most power authorities select a nominal
value, usually between 20 and 30dB, as an application
guide. A protection signal boost facility can be employed
to cater for an increase in attenuation of this order of
magnitude, to maintain an acceptable signal-to-noise
ratio at the receiving end, so that the performance of the
service is not impaired.
Most direct intertrip applications require signalling over
a healthy power system, so boosting is not normally
needed. In fact, if a voice frequency intertrip system is
operating over a carrier bearer channel, the dynamic
operating range of the receiver must be increased to
accommodate a boosted signal. This makes it less
inherently secure in the presence of noise during a
quiescent signalling condition.
118
21/06/02
9:03
Page 119
8.6.4 Radio Channels

At first consideration, the wide bandwidth associated
with radio frequency transmissions could allow the use
of modems operating at very high data rates. Protection
signalling commands could be sent by serial coded
messages of sufficient length and complexity to give
high security, but still achieve fast operating times. In
practice, it is seldom economic to provide radio
equipment exclusively for protection signalling, so
standard general-purpose telecommunications channel
equipment is normally adopted.
Typical radio bearer equipment operates at the
microwave frequencies of 0.2 to 10GHz. Because of the
relatively short range and directional nature of the
transmitter and receiver aerial systems at these
frequencies, large bandwidths can be allocated without
much chance of mutual interference with other systems.
Multiplexing techniques allow a number of channels to
share the common bearer medium and exploit the large
bandwidth. In addition to voice frequency channels, wider
bandwidth channels or data channels may be available,
dependent on the particular system. For instance, in
analogue systems using frequency division multiplexing,
normally up to 12 voice frequency channels are grouped
together in basebands at 12-60kHz or 60-108kHz, but
alternatively the baseband may be used as a 48kHz signal
channel. Modern digital systems employing pulse code
modulation and time division multiplexing usually provide
the voice frequency channels by sampling at 8kHz and
quantising to 8 bits; alternatively, access may be available
for data at 64kbits/s (equivalent to one voice frequency
channel) or higher data rates.
Radio systems are well suited to the bulk transmission of
information between control centres and are widely used
for this. When the route of the trunk data network
coincides with that of transmission lines, channels can
often be allocated for protection signalling. More
generally, radio communication is between major
stations rather than the ends of individual lines, because
of the need for line-of-sight operation between aerials
and other requirements of the network. Roundabout
routes involving repeater stations and the addition of
pilot channels to interconnect the radio installation and
the relay station may be possible, but overall
dependability will normally be much lower than for PLCC
systems in which the communication is direct from one
end of the line to the other.
Radio channels are not affected by increased attenuation
due to power system faults, but fading has to be taken
into account when the signal-to-noise ratio of a
particular installation is being considered.
Most of the noise in such a protection signalling system
will be generated within the radio equipment itself.
A polluted atmosphere can cause radio beam refraction that

will interfere with efficient signalling. The height of aerial
tower should be limited, so that winds and temperature
changes have the minimum effect on their position.
8.6.5 Optical Fibre Channels

Optical fibres are fine strands of glass, which behave as
wave guides for light. This ability to transmit light over
considerable distances can be used to provide optical
communication links with enormous information
carrying capacity and an inherent immunity to
electromagnetic interference.
A practical optical cable consists of a central optical
fibre which comprises core, cladding and protective
buffer coating surrounded by a protective plastic
oversheath containing strength members which, in some
cases, are enclosed by a layer of armouring.
To communicate information a beam of light is
modulated in accordance with the signal to be
transmitted. This modulated beam travels along the
optical fibre and is subsequently decoded at the remote
terminal into the received signal. On/off modulation of
the light source is normally preferred to linear
modulation since the distortion caused by non-linearities
in the light source and detectors, as well as variations in
received light power, are largely avoided.
The light transmitter and receiver are usually laser or LED
devices capable of emitting and detecting narrow beams
of light at selected frequencies in the low attenuation
850, 1300 and 1550 nanometre spectral windows. The
distance over which effective communications can be
established depends on the attenuation and dispersion of
the communication link and this depends on the type
and quality of the fibre and the wavelength of the
optical source. Within the fibre there are many modes of
propagation with different optical paths that cause
dispersion of the light signal and result in pulse
broadening. The degrading of the signal in this way can
be reduced by the use of 'graded index' fibres that cause
the various modes to follow nearly equal paths. The
distance over which signals can be transmitted is
significantly increased by the use of 'monomode' fibres
that support only one mode of propagation.
With optical fibre channels, communication at data rates
of hundreds of megahertz is achievable over a few tens of
kilometres, whilst greater distances require the use of
repeaters. An optical fibre can be used as a dedicated link
between two terminal equipments, or as a multiplexed
link that carries all communication traffic such as voice,
telecontrol and protection signalling. In the latter case
the available bandwidth of a link is divided by means of
time division multiplexing (T.D.M.) techniques into a
number of channels, each of 64kbits/s (equivalent to one
119
Chap8-112-121
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:03
Page 120
voice frequency channel which typically uses an 8-bit

analogue-to-digital conversion at a sampling rate of
8kHz). A number of Utilities sell surplus capacity on their
links to telecommunications operators. The trend of
using rented pilot circuits is therefore being reversed,
with the Utilities moving back towards ownership of the
communication circuits that carry protection signalling.
The equipments that carry out this multiplexing at each

end of a line are known as 'Pulse Code Modulation'
(P.C.M.) terminal equipments. This approach is the one
adopted by telecommunications authorities and some
Utilities favour its adoption on their private systems, for
economic considerations.
Optical fibre communications are well established in the

electrical supply industry. They are the preferred means
for the communications link between a substation and a
telephone exchange when rented circuits are used, as
trials have shown that this link is particularly susceptible
to interference from power system faults if copper
conductors are used. Whilst such fibres can be laid in
cable trenches, there is a strong trend to associate them
with the conductors themselves by producing composite
cables comprising optical fibres embedded within the
conductors, either earth or phase. For overhead lines use
of OPGW (Optical Ground Wire) earth conductors is very
common, while an alternative is to wrap the optical
cable helically around a phase or earth conductor. This
latter technique can be used without restringing of the
line.
8.7 SIGNALLING METHODS

Various methods are used in protection signalling; not all
need be suited to every transmission medium. The
methods to be considered briefly are:
a. D.C. voltage step or d.c. voltage reversals
b. plain tone keyed signals at high and voice
frequencies
c. frequency shift keyed signals involving two or more
tones at high and voice frequencies
General purpose telecommunications equipment
operating over power line carrier, radio or optical fibre
media incorporate frequency translating or multiplexing
techniques to provide the user with standardised
communication channels.
They have a nominal
bandwidth/channel of 4kHz and are often referred to as
voice frequency (vf) channels. Protection signalling
equipments operating at voice frequencies exploit the
standardisation of the communication interface. Where
voice frequency channels are not available or suitable,
protection signalling may make use of a medium or
specialised equipment dedicated entirely to the
signalling requirements.
Figure 8.5 illustrates the communication arrangements

commonly encountered in protection signalling.
8.7.1 D.C. Voltage Signalling

A d.c. voltage step or d.c. voltage reversals may be used
to convey a signalling instruction between protection
relaying points in a power system, but these are suited
only to private pilot wires, where low speed signalling is
acceptable, with its inherent security.
8.7.2 Plain Tone Signals

Plain high frequency signals can be used successfully for
the signalling of blocking information over a power line.
A normally quiescent power line carrier equipment can
be dedicated entirely to the transfer to teleprotection
blocking commands. Phase comparison power line
carrier unit protection schemes often use such
equipment and take advantage of the very high speed
and dependability of the signalling system. The special
characteristics of dedicated 'on/off' keyed carrier systems
are discussed later. A relatively insensitive receiver is
used to discriminate against noise on an amplitude basis,
and for some applications the security may be
satisfactory for permissive tripping, particularly if the
normal high-speed operation of about 6ms is sacrificed
by the addition of delays. The need for regular reflex
testing of a normally quiescent channel usually precludes
any use for intertripping.
Plain tone power line carrier signalling systems are
particularly suited to providing the blocking commands
often associated with the protection of multi-ended
feeders, as described in Chapter 13. A blocking
command sent from one end can be received
simultaneously at all the other ends using a single power
line carrier channel. Other signalling systems usually
require discrete communication channels between each
of the ends or involve repeaters, leading to decreased
dependability of the blocking command.
Plain voice frequency signals can be used for blocking,
permissive intertrip and direct intertrip applications for
all transmission media but operation is at such a low
signal level that security from maloperation is not very
good. Operation in the 'tone on' to 'tone off' mode gives
the best channel monitoring, but offers little security; to
obtain a satisfactory performance the output must be
delayed. This results in relatively slow operation: 70
milliseconds for permissive intertripping, and 180
milliseconds for direct intertripping.
120
Chap8-112-121
21/06/02
9:03
Page 121
Pilot wires
Pilot channel
Voice
frequency
Power line
carrier
communication
channel
Protection
relay
scheme
Power line carrier
Carrier
frequency
shift
On/off
keyed
carrier
Radio
Radio
transmitter
Digital
PCM
primary
multiplex
Optical fibre
general purpose
Optical
transmitter
Optical fibre
dedicated
Optical
Protection
signalling
equipment
Communication
equipment
Transmission media
Figure 8.5: Communication arrangements commonly encountered in protection signalling
8.7.3 Frequency Shift Keyed Signals

Frequency shift keyed high frequency signals can be
used over a power line carrier link to give short
operating times (15 milliseconds for blocking and
permissive intertripping, 20 milliseconds for direct
intertripping) for all applications of protection
signalling. The required amount of security can be
achieved by using a broadband noise detector to
monitor the actual operational signalling equipment.
Frequency shift keyed voice frequency signals can be
used for all protection signalling applications over all
transmission media. Frequency modulation techniques
make possible an improvement in performance, because
amplitude limiting rejects the amplitude modulation
component of noise, leaving only the phase modulation
components to be detected.
The operational protection signal may consist of tone
sequence codes with, say, three tones, or a multi-bit
code using two discrete tones for successive bits, or of a
single frequency shift.
Modern high-speed systems use multi-bit code or single
frequency shift techniques. Complex codes are used to
give the required degree of security in direct intertrip

schemes: the short operating times needed may result in
uneconomical use of the available voice frequency
spectrum, particularly if the channel is not exclusively
employed for protection signalling. As noise power is
directly proportional to bandwidth, a large bandwidth
causes an increase in the noise level admitted to the
detector, making operation in the presence of noise more
difficult. So, again, it is difficult to obtain both high
dependability and high security.
The signal frequency shift technique has advantages
where fast signalling is needed for blocked distance and
permissive intertrip applications. It has little inherent
security, but additional circuits responsive to every type
of interference can give acceptable security. This system
does not require a channel capable of high transmission
rates, as the frequency changes once only; the
bandwidth can therefore be narrower than in coded
systems, giving better noise rejection as well as being
advantageous if the channel is shared with telemetry
and control signalling, which will inevitably be the case
if a power line carrier bearer is employed.
121
Frequency
division
multiplex
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:50
Page 122
Overcurrent Protection
for Phase and Earth Faults
Introduction
9.1
Co-ordination procedure
9.2
Principles of time/current grading
9.3
Standard I.D.M.T. overcurrent relays
9.4
Combined I.D.M.T. and high set

instantaneous overcurrent relays
9.5
Very Inverse overcurrent relays
9.6
Extremely Inverse overcurrent relays
9.7
Other relay characteristics
9.8
Independent (definite) time overcurrent relays
9.9
Relay current setting
9.10
Relay time grading margin
9.11
Recommended grading margins
9.12
Calculation of phase fault overcurrent relay settings
9.13
Directional phase fault overcurrent relays
9.14
Ring mains
9.15
Earth fault protection
9.16
Directional earth fault overcurrent protection
9.17
Earth fault protection on insulated networks
9.18
Earth fault protection on Petersen Coil

earthed networks
9.19
Examples of time and current grading
9.20
References
9.21
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:50
Page 123
Overcurrent P rotection
for Phase and Earth Faults
9.1 INTRODUCTION
Protection against excess current was naturally the
earliest protection system to evolve. From this basic
principle, the graded overcurrent system, a discriminative
fault protection, has been developed. This should not be
confused with overload protection, which normally
makes use of relays that operate in a time related in
some degree to the thermal capability of the plant to be
protected. Overcurrent protection, on the other hand, is
directed entirely to the clearance of faults, although with
the settings usually adopted some measure of overload
protection may be obtained.
9.2 CO-ORDINATION PROCEDURE

Correct overcurrent relay application requires knowledge
of the fault current that can flow in each part of the
network.
Since large-scale tests are normally
impracticable, system analysis must be used see
Chapter 4 for details. The data required for a relay
setting study are:
i. a one-line diagram of the power system involved,
showing the type and rating of the protection
devices and their associated current transformers
ii. the impedances in ohms, per cent or per unit, of
all power transformers, rotating machine and
feeder circuits
iii. the maximum and minimum values of short circuit
currents that are expected to flow through each
protection device
iv. the maximum load current through protection
devices
v. the starting current requirements of motors and
the starting and locked rotor/stalling times of
induction motors
vi. the transformer inrush, thermal withstand and
damage characteristics
vii. decrement curves showing the rate of decay of
the fault current supplied by the generators
viii. performance curves of the current transformers
The relay settings are first determined to give the
shortest operating times at maximum fault levels and
123
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:51
Page 124
then checked to see if operation will also be satisfactory

at the minimum fault current expected. It is always
advisable to plot the curves of relays and other
protection devices, such as fuses, that are to operate in
series, on a common scale. It is usually more convenient
to use a scale corresponding to the current expected at
the lowest voltage base, or to use the predominant
voltage base. The alternatives are a common MVA base
or a separate current scale for each system voltage.
Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults
The basic rules for correct relay co-ordination can generally

be stated as follows:
a. whenever possible, use relays with the same
operating characteristic in series with each other
b. make sure that the relay farthest from the source

has current settings equal to or less than the relays
behind it, that is, that the primary current required
to operate the relay in front is always equal to or
less than the primary current required to operate
the relay behind it.
9.3 PRINCIPLES OF TIME/CURRENT GRADING

Among the various possible methods used to achieve
correct relay co-ordination are those using either time or
overcurrent, or a combination of both. The common aim
of all three methods is to give correct discrimination.
That is to say, each one must isolate only the faulty
section of the power system network, leaving the rest of
the system undisturbed.
9.3.1 Discrimination by Time

In this method, an appropriate time setting is given to
each of the relays controlling the circuit breakers in a
power system to ensure that the breaker nearest to the
fault opens first. A simple radial distribution system is
shown in Figure 9.1, to illustrate the principle.
is sometimes described as an independent definite-time

delay relay, since its operating time is for practical
purposes independent of the level of overcurrent.
It is the time delay element, therefore, which provides
the means of discrimination. The relay at B is set at the
shortest time delay possible to allow the fuse to blow for
a fault at A on the secondary side of the transformer.
After the time delay has expired, the relay output
contact closes to trip the circuit breaker. The relay at C
has a time delay setting equal to t1 seconds, and similarly
for the relays at D and E.
If a fault occurs at F, the relay at B will operate in t
seconds and the subsequent operation of the circuit
breaker at B will clear the fault before the relays at C, D
and E have time to operate. The time interval t1 between
each relay time setting must be long enough to ensure
that the upstream relays do not operate before the
circuit breaker at the fault location has tripped and
cleared the fault.
The main disadvantage of this method of discrimination
is that the longest fault clearance time occurs for faults
in the section closest to the power source, where the
fault level (MVA) is highest.
9.3.2 Discrimination by Current

Discrimination by current relies on the fact that the fault
current varies with the position of the fault because of
the difference in impedance values between the source
and the fault. Hence, typically, the relays controlling the
various circuit breakers are set to operate at suitably
tapered values of current such that only the relay nearest
to the fault trips its breaker. Figure 9.2 illustrates the
method.
For a fault at F1, the system short-circuit current is given
by:
I =
E
t1
t1
6350
A
Z S + Z L1
where Zs = source impedance

=
t1
F
112
250
= 0.485
ZL1 = cable impedance between C and B
Figure 9.1: Radial system with time discrimination
= 0.24
Overcurrent protection is provided at B, C, D and E, that
is, at the infeed end of each section of the power system.
Each protection unit comprises a definite-time delay
overcurrent relay in which the operation of the current
sensitive element simply initiates the time delay element.
Provided the setting of the current element is below the
fault current value, this element plays no part in the
achievement of discrimination. For this reason, the relay
Hence
I=
11
3 0.725
= 8800 A
So, a relay controlling the circuit breaker at C and set to

operate at a fault current of 8800A would in theory
protect the whole of the cable section between C and B.
However, there are two important practical points that
affect this method of co-ordination:
124
21/06/02
8:51
Page 125
a. it is not practical to distinguish between a fault at

F1 and a fault at F2, since the distance between
these points may be only a few metres,
corresponding to a change in fault current of
approximately 0.1%
b. in practice, there would be variations in the source
fault level, typically from 250MVA to 130MVA. At
this lower fault level the fault current would not
exceed 6800A, even for a cable fault close to C. A
relay set at 8800A would not protect any part of
the cable section concerned
Discrimination by current is therefore not a practical
proposition for correct grading between the circuit
breakers at C and B. However, the problem changes
appreciably when there is significant impedance
between the two circuit breakers concerned. Consider
the grading required between the circuit breakers at C
and A in Figure 9.2. Assuming a fault at F4, the shortcircuit current is given by:
I =
6350
A
Z S + Z L1
margin of 20% to allow for relay errors and a further

10% for variations in the system impedance values, it is
reasonable to choose a relay setting of 1.3 x 2200A, that
is 2860A, for the relay at B. Now, assuming a fault at F3,
at the end of the 11kV cable feeding the 4MVA
transformer, the short-circuit current is given by:
11
3 (ZS + Z L1 + Z L 2 )
I=
Thus, assuming a 250MVA source fault level:

I=
11
3 (0.485 + 0.24 + 0.04 )
= 8300 A
Alternatively, assuming a source fault level of 130MVA:
I=
11
3 (0.93 + 0.214 + 0.04 )
= 5250 A
In other words, for either value of source level, the relay
at B would operate correctly for faults anywhere on the
11kV cable feeding the transformer.
where ZS = source impedance

= 0.485
9.3.3 Discrimination by both Time and Current
ZL1 = cable impedance between C and B

= 0.24
ZL2 = cable impedance between B and 4 MVA
transformer
= 0.04
ZT = transformer impedance
112
= 0.07
It is because of the limitations imposed by the

independent use of either time or current co-ordination
that the inverse time overcurrent relay characteristic has
evolved. With this characteristic, the time of operation
is inversely proportional to the fault current level and the
actual characteristic is a function of both time
and 'current' settings. Figure 9.3 illustrates the
characteristics of two relays given different current/time
settings. For a large variation in fault current between
the two ends of the feeder, faster operating times can be
achieved by the relays nearest to the source, where the
fault level is the highest. The disadvantages of grading
by time or current alone are overcome.
= 2.12
I=
Hence
11
3 2.885
= 2200 A
200 metres
240mm2 P.I.L.C.
Cable
11kV
250MVA
Source
F1
200 metres
240mm2 P.I.L.C.
Cable
F2
4MVA
11/3.3kV
7%
F3
F4
Figure 9.2: Radial system with current discrimination
For this reason, a relay controlling the circuit breaker at

B and set to operate at a current of 2200A plus a safety
margin would not operate for a fault at F4 and would
thus discriminate with the relay at A. Assuming a safety
Each of the two methods described so far has a

fundamental disadvantage. In the case of discrimination
by time alone, the disadvantage is due to the fact that
the more severe faults are cleared in the longest
operating time. On the other hand, discrimination by
current can be applied only where there is appreciable
impedance between the two circuit breakers concerned.
The selection of overcurrent relay characteristics

generally starts with selection of the correct
characteristic to be used for each relay, followed by
choice of the relay current settings. Finally the grading
margins and hence time settings of the relays are
determined. An iterative procedure is often required to
resolve conflicts, and may involve use of non-optimal
characteristics, current or time grading settings.
125
Chap9 exe
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:51
Page 126
Relay Characteristic
1000.
IEEE Moderately Inverse
t=
TD 0.0515
+0.114
7 I r0.02 1
IEEE Very Inverse
t=
TD 19.61
+0.491
7 I r2 1
Extremely Inverse (EI)
t=
TD 28.2
+0.1217
7 I r2 1
US CO8 Inverse
t=
TD 5.95
+0.18
7 I r2 1
100.
TD
7
0.02394
0.02
+ 0.01694
I r
1
(b): North American IDMT relay characteristics

time
Table 9.1: Definitions of standard relay characteristics
Relay A operating
time
1.00
1000.00
0.10
100
1000
10,000
100.00
Current (A)
Relay A: Current Setting = 100A, TMS = 1.0
Relay B: Current Setting = 125A, TMS = 1.3
Figure 9.3: Relay characteristics for different settings
9.4 STANDARD I.D.M.T. OVERCURRENT RELAYS

The current/time tripping characteristics of IDMT relays
may need to be varied according to the tripping time
required and the characteristics of other protection devices
used in the network. For these purposes, IEC 60255 defines
a number of standard characteristics as follows:
Standard Inverse (SI)
Very Inverse (VI)
Definite Time (DT)
Relay Characteristic
Very Inverse (VI)
Operating Time (seconds)
t =
Ir = (I/Is), where Is = relay setting current

TMS = Time multiplier Setting
TD = Time Dial setting
10.00
Time (s)
US CO2 Short Time Inverse
Equation (IEC 60255)
10.00
1.00
Equation (IEC 60255)

0.14
I r0.02 1
13.5
t = TMS
I r 1
t = TMS
t = TMS
80
I r2 1
Long time standard earth fault
t = TMS
120
I r 1
0.10
1
10
100
Current (multiples of IS)

(a) IEC 60255 characteristics ; TMS=1.0
Figure 9.4 (a): IDMT relay characteristics
(a): Relay characteristics to IEC 60255
126
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:51
Page 127
10
1000.00
8
6
4
3
TMS
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.8
0.3
0.6
10.00
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.2
1.00
0.1
Moderately Inverse
Extremely
Inverse
10
100
Current (multiples of IS)

(b) North American characteristics; TD=7
Figure 9.4 (b): IDMT relay characteristics
30
9.5 COMBINED I.D.M.T. AND HIGH SET

INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT RELAYS
The mathematical descriptions of the curves are given in

Table 9.1(a), and the curves based on a common setting
current and time multiplier setting of 1 second are
shown in Figure 9.4(a). The tripping characteristics for
different TMS settings using the SI curve are illustrated
in Figure 9.5.
Although the curves are only shown for discrete values of
TMS, continuous adjustment may be possible in an
electromechanical relay. For other relay types, the setting
steps may be so small as to effectively provide continuous
adjustment. In addition, almost all overcurrent relays are
also fitted with a high-set instantaneous element.
In most cases, use of the standard SI curve proves
satisfactory, but if satisfactory grading cannot be
achieved, use of the VI or EI curves may help to resolve
the problem. When digital or numeric relays are used,
other characteristics may be provided, including the
possibility of user-definable curves. More details are
provided in the following sections.
20
Relays for power systems designed to North American

practice utilise ANSI/IEEE curves. Table 9.1(b) gives the
mathematical description of these characteristics and
Figure 9.4(b) shows the curves standardised to a time
dial setting of 1.0.
CO 8 Inverse
3
4
6
8 10
Current (multiples of plug settings)
Figure 9.5: Typical time/current characteristics

of standard IDMT relay
Time Inverse
0.10
A high-set instantaneous element can be used where the

source impedance is small in comparison with the
protected circuit impedance. This makes a reduction in
the tripping time at high fault levels possible. It also
improves the overall system grading by allowing the
'discriminating curves' behind the high set instantaneous
elements to be lowered.
As shown in Figure 9.6, one of the advantages of the high
set instantaneous elements is to reduce the operating
time of the circuit protection by the shaded area below
the 'discriminating curves'. If the source impedance
remains constant, it is then possible to achieve highspeed protection over a large section of the protected
circuit. The rapid fault clearance time achieved helps to
minimise damage at the fault location. Figure 9.6 also
illustrates a further important advantage gained by the
use of high set instantaneous elements. Grading with
the relay immediately behind the relay that has the
instantaneous elements enabled is carried out at the
current setting of the instantaneous elements and not at
127
Time (seconds)
Operating Time (seconds)
100.00
21/06/02
8:51
Page 128
the maximum fault level. For example, in Figure 9.6,

relay R2 is graded with relay R3 at 500A and not 1100A,
allowing relay R2 to be set with a TMS of 0.15 instead of
0.2 while maintaining a grading margin between relays
of 0.4s. Similarly, relay R1 is graded with R2 at 1400A
and not at 2300A.
3
R2
R1
2
R3
Time (seconds)
Very inverse overcurrent relays are particularly suitable if

there is a substantial reduction of fault current as the
distance from the power source increases, i.e. there is a
substantial increase in fault impedance. The VI operating
characteristic is such that the operating time is
approximately doubled for reduction in current from 7 to
4 times the relay current setting. This permits the use of
the same time multiplier setting for several relays in series.
Figure 9.7 provides a comparison of the SI and VI curves
for a relay. The VI curve is much steeper and therefore
the operation increases much faster for the same
reduction in current compared to the SI curve. This
enables the requisite grading margin to be obtained with
a lower TMS for the same setting current, and hence the
tripping time at source can be minimised.
0.1
100
1000
0
Source
250 MVA
11kV
9.6 VERY INVERSE (VI) OVERCURRENT RELAYS
R1
R2
10,000
0
Ratio
400/1A
100/1A
Fault level 13.000A Fault level 2300A
500A 0.125 TMS
300A
62.5A 0.10 TMS
500A
100.00
R3
50/1A
Fault level 1100A
10.00
Figure 9.6: Characteristics of combined IDMT

and high-set instantaneous overcurrent relays
Operating time (seconds)
Chap9 exe
9.5.1 Transient Overreach

The reach of a relay is that part of the system protected
by the relay if a fault occurs. A relay that operates for a
fault that lies beyond the intended zone of protection is
said to overreach.
When using instantaneous overcurrent elements, care
must be exercised in choosing the settings to prevent
them operating for faults beyond the protected section.
The initial current due to a d.c. offset in the current wave
may be greater than the relay pick-up value and cause it
to operate. This may occur even though the steady state
r.m.s. value of the fault current for a fault at a point
beyond the required reach point may be less than the
relay setting. This phenomenon is called transient
overreach, and is defined as:
I I
% transient overreach = 1 2 100%
I2
Equation 9.1
where:
I1 = r.m.s steady-state relay pick-up current
I2 = steady state r.m.s. current which when fully
offset just causes relay pick-up
When applied to power transformers, the high set
instantaneous overcurrent elements must be set above
the maximum through fault current than the power
transformer can supply for a fault across its LV terminals,
in order to maintain discrimination with the relays on
the LV side of the transformer.
1.00
Very Inverse (VI)
0.10
1
10
Current ( multiples of Is )
100
Figure 9.7: Comparison of SI and VI relay characteristics
9.7 EXTREMELY INVERSE (EI) OVERCURRENT RELAYS

With this characteristic, the operation time is
approximately inversely proportional to the square of the
applied current. This makes it suitable for the protection
of distribution feeder circuits in which the feeder is
subjected to peak currents on switching in, as would be
the case on a power circuit supplying refrigerators,
pumps, water heaters and so on, which remain
connected even after a prolonged interruption of supply.
The long time operating characteristic of the extremely
128
21/06/02
8:51
Page 129
inverse relay at normal peak load values of current also

makes this relay particularly suitable for grading with
fuses. Figure 9.8 shows typical curves to illustrate this.
It can be seen that use of the EI characteristic gives a
satisfactory grading margin, but use of the VI or SI
characteristics at the same settings does not. Another
application of this relay is in conjunction with autoreclosers in low voltage distribution circuits. The
majority of faults are transient in nature and
unnecessary blowing and replacing of the fuses present
in final circuits of such a system can be avoided if the
auto-reclosers are set to operate before the fuse blows.
If the fault persists, the auto-recloser locks itself in the
closed position after one opening and the fuse blows to
isolate the fault.
Digital and numerical relays may also include predefined logic schemes utilising digital (relay) I/O
provided in the relay to implement standard schemes
such as CB failure and trip circuit supervision. This saves
the provision of separate relay or PLC (Programmable
Logic Controller) hardware to perform these functions.
9.9 INDEPENDENT (DEFINITE) TIME

OVERCURRENT RELAYS
Overcurrent relays are normally also provided with
elements having independent or definite time
characteristics. These characteristics provide a ready
means of co-ordinating several relays in series in
situations in which the system fault current varies very
widely due to changes in source impedance, as there is
no change in time with the variation of fault current.
The time/current characteristics of this curve are shown
in Figure 9.9, together with those of the standard I.D.M.T.
characteristic, to indicate that lower operating times are
achieved by the inverse relay at the higher values of fault
current, whereas the definite time relay has lower
operating times at the lower current values.
200.0
100.0
10.0
Time (secs)
is properly documented, along with the reasons for use.

Since the standard curves provided cover most cases with
adequate tripping times, and most equipment is designed
with standard protection curves in mind, the need to utilise
this form of protection is relatively rare.
Standard
inverse (SI)
Vertical lines T1, T2, T3, and T4 indicate the reduction in

operating times achieved by the inverse relay at high
fault levels.
1.0
9.10 RELAY CURRENT SETTING
inverse
v s (EI)
E
200A
A Fuse
us
0.1
100
1000
Current (amps)
10,000
Figure 9.8: Comparison of relay

and fuse characteristics
9.8 OTHER RELAY CHARACTERISTICS

User definable curves may be provided on some types of
digital or numerical relays. The general principle is that the
user enters a series of current/time co-ordinates that are
stored in the memory of the relay. Interpolation between
points is used to provide a smooth trip characteristic. Such
a feature, if available, may be used in special cases if none
of the standard tripping characteristics is suitable.
However, grading of upstream protection may become
more difficult, and it is necessary to ensure that the curve
An overcurrent relay has a minimum operating current,

known as the current setting of the relay. The current
setting must be chosen so that the relay does not
operate for the maximum load current in the circuit
being protected, but does operate for a current equal or
greater to the minimum expected fault current.
Although by using a current setting that is only just
above the maximum load current in the circuit a certain
degree of protection against overloads as well as faults
may be provided, the main function of overcurrent
protection is to isolate primary system faults and not to
provide overload protection. In general, the current
setting will be selected to be above the maximum short
time rated current of the circuit involved. Since all relays
have hysteresis in their current settings, the setting must
be sufficiently high to allow the relay to reset when the
rated current of the circuit is being carried. The amount
of hysteresis in the current setting is denoted by the
pick-up/drop-off ratio of a relay the value for a modern
relay is typically 0.95. Thus, a relay minimum current
129
Chap9 exe
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:54
Page 130
Grading margin between relays: 0.4s
10
R4
R2
R3
R1
R1A
R2A
R3A
Time (seconds)
R4A
T4
1
T3
T2
T1
0.1
1
1000
100
10
R1
R1A
Fault level
6000A
R2
R2A
Fault current (amps)

R3
R3A
3500A
Settings of independent (definite) time relay

R1A
300A 1.8s
R
175A 1.4s
R
100A 1.0s
R4A set at 57.5A 0.6s
10.000
R4
R4A
1200A
2000A
Settings of I.D.M.T. relay with standard inverse characteristic

R1A
R
R
R4A set at
300A
175A
100A
57.5A
0.2TMS
0.3TMS
0.37TMS
0.42TMS
Figure 9.9: Comparison of definite time and standard I.D.M.T. relay
ii. relay timing errors
setting of at least 1.05 times the short-time rated

current of the circuit is likely to be required.
iii. the overshoot time of the relay

iv. CT errors
9.11 RELAY TIME GRADING MARGIN
v. final margin on completion of operation
The time interval that must be allowed between the

operation of two adjacent relays in order to achieve
correct discrimination between them is called the grading
margin. If a grading margin is not provided, or is
insufficient, more than one relay will operate for a fault,
leading to difficulties in determining the location of the
fault and unnecessary loss of supply to some consumers.
The grading margin depends on a number of factors:
i. the fault current interrupting time of the circuit
breaker
Factors (ii) and (iii) above depend to a certain extent on

the relay technology used an electromechanical relay,
for instance, will have a larger overshoot time than a
numerical relay.
Grading is initially carried out for the maximum fault
level at the relaying point under consideration, but a
check is also made that the required grading margin
exists for all current levels between relay pick-up current
and maximum fault level.
130
21/06/02
8:54
Page 131
9.11.1 Circuit Breaker Interrupting Time
50
The circuit breaker interrupting the fault must have

completely interrupted the current before the
discriminating relay ceases to be energised. The time
taken is dependent on the type of circuit breaker used
and the fault current to be interrupted. Manufacturers
normally provide the fault interrupting time at rated
interrupting capacity and this value is invariably used in
the calculation of grading margin.
40
3
Time (seconds)
20
9.11.2 Relay Timing Error
10
8
6
4
All relays have errors in their timing compared to the

ideal characteristic as defined in IEC 60255. For a relay
specified to IEC 60255, a relay error index is quoted that
determines the maximum timing error of the relay. The
timing error must be taken into account when
determining the grading margin.
3
2
1
1
5 6
8 10
20
30
9.11.3 Overshoot
Time/Current characteristic allowable limit
At 2 times setting
2.5 x Declared error
At 5 times setting
At 10 times setting
At 20 times setting
When the relay is de-energised, operation may continue

for a little longer until any stored energy has been
dissipated. For example, an induction disc relay will have
stored kinetic energy in the motion of the disc; static
relay circuits may have energy stored in capacitors.
Relay design is directed to minimising and absorbing
these energies, but some allowance is usually necessary.
The overshoot time is defined as the difference between
the operating time of a relay at a specified value of input
current and the maximum duration of input current,
which when suddenly reduced below the relay operating
level, is insufficient to cause relay operation.
9.11.4 CT Errors
Current transformers have phase and ratio errors due to
the exciting current required to magnetise their cores.
The result is that the CT secondary current is not an
identical scaled replica of the primary current. This leads
to errors in the operation of relays, especially in the time
of operation. CT errors are not relevant when
independent definite-time delay overcurrent relays are
being considered.
9.11.5 Final Margin
After the above allowances have been made, the
discriminating relay must just fail to complete its
operation. Some extra allowance, or safety margin, is
required to ensure that relay operation does not occur.
9.11.6 Overall Accuracy
The overall limits of accuracy according to IEC 60255-4
for an IDMT relay with standard inverse characteristic
Figure 9.10: Typical limits of accuracy from IEC 60255-4

for an inverse definite minimum time overcurrent relay
9.12 RECOMMENDED GRADING INTERVALS

The following sections give the recommended overall
grading margins for between different protection devices.
9.12.1 Grading: Relay to Relay
The total interval required to cover the above items
depends on the operating speed of the circuit breakers
and the relay performance. At one time 0.5s was a
normal grading margin. With faster modern circuit
breakers and a lower relay overshoot time, 0.4s is
reasonable, while under the best conditions even lower
intervals may be practical.
The use of a fixed grading margin is popular, but it may
be better to calculate the required value for each relay
location. This more precise margin comprises a fixed
time, covering circuit breaker fault interrupting time,
relay overshoot time and a safety margin, plus a variable
time that allows for relay and CT errors. Table 9.2 gives
typical relay errors according to the technology used.
It should be noted that use of a fixed grading margin is
only appropriate at high fault levels that lead to short
relay operating times. At lower fault current levels, with
longer operating times, the permitted error specified in
IEC 60255 (7.5% of operating time) may exceed the fixed
grading margin, resulting in the possibility that the relay
fails to grade correctly while remaining within
131
Chap9 exe
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:54
Page 132
specification.
This requires consideration when
considering the grading margin at low fault current levels.
A practical solution for determining the optimum
grading margin is to assume that the relay nearer to the
fault has a maximum possible timing error of +2E, where
E is the basic timing error. To this total effective error for
the relay, a further 10% should be added for the overall
current transformer error.
9.12.3 Grading: Fuse to Relay
Relay Technology
Typical basic timing error (%)

Overshoot time (s)
Safety margin (s)
Typical overall grading margin
- relay to relay(s)
follows an I2t law. So, to achieve proper co-ordination

between two fuses in series, it is necessary to ensure that
the total I2t taken by the smaller fuse is not greater than
the pre-arcing I2t value of the larger fuse. It has been
established by tests that satisfactory grading between
the two fuses will generally be achieved if the current
rating ratio between them is greater than two.
Electromechanical
7.5
0.05
0.1
Static
Digital
Numerical
5
0.03
0.05
5
0.02
0.03
5
0.02
0.03
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.3
For grading inverse time relays with fuses, the basic

approach is to ensure whenever possible that the relay
backs up the fuse and not vice versa. If the fuse is
upstream of the relay, it is very difficult to maintain
correct discrimination at high values of fault current
because of the fast operation of the fuse.
Table 9.2: Typical relay timing errors - standard IDMT relays
A suitable minimum grading time interval, t, may be

calculated as follows:
2E +E
t = R CT t +t CB +t o +t s seconds
100
Equation 9.2
where:
Er = relay timing error (IEC 60255-4)
Ect = allowance for CT ratio error (%)
t = operating time of relay nearer fault (s)
tCB = CB interrupting time (s)
to = relay overshoot time (s)
ts = safety margin (s)
The relay characteristic best suited for this co-ordination

with fuses is normally the extremely inverse (EI)
characteristic as it follows a similar I2t characteristic. To
ensure satisfactory co-ordination between relay and
fuse, the primary current setting of the relay should be
approximately three times the current rating of the fuse.
The grading margin for proper co-ordination, when
expressed as a fixed quantity, should not be less than
0.4s or, when expressed as a variable quantity, should
have a minimum value of:
t = 0.4t+0.15 seconds
Equation 9.4
where t is the nominal operating time of fuse.

Section 9.20.1 gives an example of fuse to relay grading.
If, for example t=0.5s, the time interval for an

electromechanical relay tripping a conventional circuit
breaker would be 0.375s, whereas, at the lower extreme,
for a static relay tripping a vacuum circuit breaker, the
interval could be as low as 0.24s.
When the overcurrent relays have independent definite
time delay characteristics, it is not necessary to include
the allowance for CT error. Hence:
2E
t = R t +t CB +t o +t s seconds
100
Equation 9.3
Calculation of specific grading times for each relay can
often be tedious when performing a protection grading
calculation on a power system. Table 9.2 also gives
practical grading times at high fault current levels
between overcurrent relays for different technologies.
Where relays of different technologies are used, the time
appropriate to the technology of the downstream relay
should be used.
9.13 CALCULATION OF PHASE FAULT

OVERCURRENT RELAY SETTINGS
The correct co-ordination of overcurrent relays in a power
system requires the calculation of the estimated relay
settings in terms of both current and time.
The resultant settings are then traditionally plotted in
suitable log/log format to show pictorially that a suitable
grading margin exists between the relays at adjacent
substations. Plotting may be done by hand, but nowadays
is more commonly achieved using suitable software.
The information required at each relaying point to allow
a relay setting calculation to proceed is given in Section
9.2. The principal relay data may be tabulated in a table
similar to that shown in Table 9.3, if only to assist in
record keeping.
Location
9.12.2 Grading: Fuse to Fuse

The operating time of a fuse is a function of both the
pre-arcing and arcing time of the fusing element, which
132
Fault Current
(A)
Maximun
Load Current
(A)
Maximun Minimun
CT
Ratio
Relay Current Setting

Per Cent
Relay Time
Primary Multiplier Setting
Current
(A)
Table 9.3: Typical relay data table
21/06/02
8:55
Page 133
It is usual to plot all time/current characteristics to a

common voltage/MVA base on log/log scales. The plot
includes all relays in a single path, starting with the relay
nearest the load and finishing with the relay nearest the
source of supply.
A separate plot is required for each independent path,
and the settings of any relays that lie on multiple paths
must be carefully considered to ensure that the final
setting is appropriate for all conditions. Earth faults are
considered separately from phase faults and require
separate plots.
After relay settings have been finalised, they are entered
in a table. One such table is shown in Table 9.3. This also
assists in record keeping and during commissioning of
the relays at site.
9.13.1 Independent (definite) Time Relays

The selection of settings for independent (definite) time
relays presents little difficulty. The overcurrent elements
must be given settings that are lower, by a reasonable
margin, than the fault current that is likely to flow to a
fault at the remote end of the system up to which backup protection is required, with the minimum plant in
service.
The settings must be high enough to avoid relay
operation with the maximum probable load, a suitable
margin being allowed for large motor starting currents or
transformer inrush transients.
Time settings will be chosen to allow suitable grading
margins, as discussed in Section 9.12.
9.14 DIRECTIONAL PHASE FAULT

OVERCURRENT RELAYS
When fault current can flow in both directions through
the relay location, it may be necessary to make the
response of the relay directional by the introduction of a
directional control facility. The facility is provided by use
of additional voltage inputs to the relay.
9.14.1 Relay Connections
There are many possibilities for a suitable connection of
voltage and current inputs. The various connections are
dependent on the phase angle, at unity system power
factor, by which the current and voltage applied to the
relay are displaced. Reference [9.1] details all of the
connections that have been used. However, only very few
are used in current practice and these are described below.
In a digital or numerical relay, the phase displacements are
realised by the use of software, while electromechanical
and static relays generally obtain the required phase
displacements by suitable connection of the input
quantities to the relay. The history of the topic results in
the relay connections being defined as if they were
obtained by suitable connection of the input quantities,
irrespective of the actual method used.
9.14.2 90 Relay Quadrature Connection
This is the standard connection for static, digital or numerical
relays. Depending on the angle by which the applied voltage
is shifted to produce maximum relay sensitivity (the Relay
Characteristic Angle, or RCA) two types are available.
Ia
9.13.2 Inverse Time Relays

Zero torque line
When the power system consists of a series of short

sections of cable, so that the total line impedance is low,
the value of fault current will be controlled principally by
the impedance of transformers or other fixed plant and
will not vary greatly with the location of the fault. In such
cases, it may be possible to grade the inverse time relays
in very much the same way as definite time relays.
However, when the prospective fault current varies
substantially with the location of the fault, it is possible to
make use of this fact by employing both current and time
grading to improve the overall performance of the relay.
The procedure begins by selection of the appropriate
relay characteristics. Current settings are then chosen,
with finally the time multiplier settings to give
appropriate grading margins between relays. Otherwise,
the procedure is similar to that for definite time delay
relays. An example of a relay setting study is given in
Section 9.20.1.
133
Va
Chap9 exe
A
MT
V'bc
30
150
30
Vbc
Vb
Vc
A phase element connected Ia Vbc

B phase element connected Ib Vca
C phase element connected Ic Vab
Figure 9.11: Vector diagram for the 90-30 connection
(phase A element)
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:55
Page 134
9.14.2.1 90-30 characteristic (30 RCA)

The A phase relay element is supplied with Ia current and
Vbc voltage displaced by 30 in an anti-clockwise
direction. In this case, the relay maximum sensitivity is
produced when the current lags the system phase to
neutral voltage by 60. This connection gives a correct
directional tripping zone over the current range of 30
leading to 150 lagging; see Figure 9.11. The relay
sensitivity at unity power factor is 50% of the relay
maximum sensitivity and 86.6% at zero power factor
lagging. This characteristic is recommended when the
relay is used for the protection of plain feeders with the
zero sequence source behind the relaying point.
The A phase relay element is supplied with current Ia and

voltage Vbc displaced by 45 in an anti-clockwise
direction. The relay maximum sensitivity is produced
when the current lags the system phase to neutral
voltage by 45. This connection gives a correct
directional tripping zone over the current range of 45
leading to 135 lagging. The relay sensitivity at unity
power factor is 70.7% of the maximum torque and the
same at zero power factor lagging; see Figure 9.12.
This connection is recommended for the protection of
transformer feeders or feeders that have a zero sequence
source in front of the relay. It is essential in the case of
parallel transformers or transformer feeders, in order to
ensure correct relay operation for faults beyond the
star/delta transformer. This connection should also be
used whenever single-phase directional relays are
applied to a circuit where a current distribution of the
form 2-1-1 may arise.
Ia
M
TA
9.14.2.2 90-45 characteristic (45 RCA)
Va
V'bc
Zero torque line
45
45
For a digital or numerical relay, it is common to allow

user-selection of the RCA angle within a wide range.
Theoretically, three fault conditions can cause
maloperation of the directional element:
i. a phase-phase-ground fault on a plain feeder
ii. a phase-ground fault on a transformer feeder with
the zero sequence source in front of the relay
iii. a phase-phase fault on a power transformer with
the relay looking into the delta winding of the
transformer
It should be remembered, however, that the conditions
assumed above to establish the maximum angular
displacement between the current and voltage quantities
at the relay are such that, in practice, the magnitude of
the current input to the relay would be insufficient to
cause the overcurrent element to operate. It can be
shown analytically that the possibility of maloperation
with the 90-45 connection is, for all practical purposes,
non-existent.
9.14.3 Application of Directional Relays

If non-unit, non-directional relays are applied to parallel
feeders having a single generating source, any faults that
might occur on any one line will, regardless of the relay
settings used, isolate both lines and completely
disconnect the power supply. With this type of system
configuration, it is necessary to apply directional relays
at the receiving end and to grade them with the nondirectional relays at the sending end, to ensure correct
discriminative operation of the relays during line faults.
This is done by setting the directional relays R1 and R2
in Figure 9.13 with their directional elements looking
into the protected line, and giving them lower time and
current settings than relays R1 and R2. The usual practice
is to set relays R1 and R2 to 50% of the normal full load
of the protected circuit and 0.1TMS, but care must be
taken to ensure that the continuous thermal rating of
the relays of twice rated current is not exceeded. An
example calculation is given in Section 9.20.3
135
R'1
R1
Vbc
Vc
Source
Vb
I>
I>
Load
Fault
R'2
R2
A phase element connected Ia Vbc

B phase element connected Ib Vca
C phase element connected Ic Vab
I>
Figure 9.12: Vector diagram for the 90-45 connection

(phase A element)
I>
Figure 9.13: Directional relays applied to parallel feeders
134
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:55
Page 135
9.15 RING MAINS

A particularly common arrangement within distribution
networks is the Ring Main. The primary reason for its use
is to maintain supplies to consumers in case of fault
conditions occurring on the interconnecting feeders. A
typical ring main with associated overcurrent protection
is shown in Figure 9.14. Current may flow in either
direction through the various relay locations, and
therefore directional overcurrent relays are applied.
9.15.1 Grading of Ring Mains

The usual grading procedure for relays in a ring main
circuit is to open the ring at the supply point and to
grade the relays first clockwise and then anti-clockwise.
That is, the relays looking in a clockwise direction around
the ring are arranged to operate in the sequence 1-2-34-5-6 and the relays looking in the anti-clockwise
direction are arranged to operate in the sequence 1-23-4-5-6, as shown in Figure 9.14.
The arrows associated with the relaying points indicate
the direction of current flow that will cause the relay to
operate. A double-headed arrow is used to indicate a
non-directional relay, such as those at the supply point
where the power can flow only in one direction. A
single-headed arrow is used to indicate a directional
2.1 2.1
1'
0.1
5'
1.7
0.5
0.1
Ix
1.7
Fault
0.5
Iy
2'
1.3
1.3
4'
0.9 0.9
3
3'
2.1
1.7
1.3
0.9
0.5
0.1
6'
5'
4''
3'
2'
1'
0.1
0.5
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.1
Figure 9.14: Grading of ring mains
relay, such as those at intermediate substations around

the ring where the power can flow in either direction.
The directional relays are set in accordance with the
invariable rule, applicable to all forms of directional
protection, that the current in the system must flow
from the substation busbars into the protected line in
order that the relays may operate.
Disconnection of the faulted line is carried out according
to time and fault current direction. As in any parallel
system, the fault current has two parallel paths and
divides itself in the inverse ratio of their impedances.
Thus, at each substation in the ring, one set of relays will
be made inoperative because of the direction of current
flow, and the other set operative. It will also be found
that the operating times of the relays that are
inoperative are faster than those of the operative relays,
with the exception of the mid-point substation, where
the operating times of relays 3 and 3 happen to be the
same.
The relays that are operative are graded downwards
towards the fault and the last to be affected by the fault
operates first. This applies to both paths to the fault.
Consequently, the faulted line is the only one to be
disconnected from the ring and the power supply is
maintained to all the substations.
When two or more power sources feed into a ring main,
time graded overcurrent protection is difficult to apply
135
In the case of a ring main fed at one point only, the

settings of the relays at the supply end and at the midpoint substation are identical. They can therefore be
made non-directional, if, in the latter case, the relays are
located on the same feeder, that is, one at each end of
the feeder.
It is interesting to note that when the number of feeders
round the ring is an even number, the two relays with the
same operating time are at the same substation. They
will therefore have to be directional. When the number
of feeders is an odd number, the two relays with the
same operating time are at different substations and
therefore do not need to be directional. It may also be
noted that, at intermediate substations, whenever the
operating time of the relays at each substation are
different, the difference between their operating times is
never less than the grading margin, so the relay with the
longer operating time can be non-directional. With
modern numerical relays, a directional facility is often
available for little or no extra cost, so that it may be
simpler in practice to apply directional relays at all
locations. Also, in the event of an additional feeder
being added subsequently, the relays that can be nondirectional need to be re-determined and will not
necessarily be the same giving rise to problems of
changing a non-directional relay for a directional one. If
a VT was not provided originally, this may be very
difficult to install at a later date.
6'
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:55
Page 136
and full discrimination may not be possible. With two

sources of supply, two solutions are possible. The first is
to open the ring at one of the supply points, whichever is
more convenient, by means of a suitable high set
instantaneous overcurrent relay. The ring is then graded
as in the case of a single infeed. The second method is to
treat the section of the ring between the two supply
points as a continuous bus separate from the ring and to
protect it with a unit protection system, and then proceed
to grade the ring as in the case of a single infeed. Section
9.20.4 provides a worked example of ring main grading.
A
B
C
>
I
(a)
A
9.16 EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
In the foregoing description, attention has been

principally directed towards phase fault overcurrent
protection. More sensitive protection against earth
faults can be obtained by using a relay that responds
only to the residual current of the system, since a
residual component exists only when fault current flows
to earth. The earth-fault relay is therefore completely
unaffected by load currents, whether balanced or not,
and can be given a setting which is limited only by the
design of the equipment and the presence of unbalanced
leakage or capacitance currents to earth. This is an
important consideration if settings of only a few percent
of system rating are considered, since leakage currents
may produce a residual quantity of this order.
B
C
I>
I>
>
I>
>
I>
(b)
A
B
C
On the whole, the low settings permissible for earthfault relays are very useful, as earth faults are not only
by far the most frequent of all faults, but may be limited
in magnitude by the neutral earthing impedance, or by
earth contact resistance.
The residual component is extracted by connecting the
line current transformers in parallel as shown in Figure
9.15. The simple connection shown in Figure 9.15(a) can
be extended by connecting overcurrent elements in the
individual phase leads, as illustrated in Figure 9.15(b),
and inserting the earth-fault relay between the star
points of the relay group and the current transformers.
Phase fault overcurrent relays are often provided on only
two phases since these will detect any interphase fault;
the connections to the earth-fault relay are unaffected
by this consideration. The arrangement is illustrated in
Figure 9.15(c).
The typical settings for earth-fault relays are 30%-40%
of the full-load current or minimum earth-fault current
on the part of the system being protected. However,
account may have to be taken of the variation of setting
with relay burden as described in Section 9.16.1 below.
If greater sensitivity than this is required, one of the
methods described in Section 9.16.3 for obtaining
sensitive earth-fault protection must be used.
I>
(c)
Figure 9.15: Residual connection of current
transformers to earth-fault relays
9.16.1 Effective Setting of Earth-Fault Relays

The primary setting of an overcurrent relay can usually
be taken as the relay setting multiplied by the CT ratio.
The CT can be assumed to maintain a sufficiently
accurate ratio so that, expressed as a percentage of rated
current, the primary setting will be directly proportional
to the relay setting. However, this may not be true for
an earth-fault relay. The performance varies according
to the relay technology used.
9.16.1.1 Static, digital and numerical relays
When static, digital or numerical relays are used the
relatively low value and limited variation of the relay
burden over the relay setting range results in the above
statement holding true. The variation of input burden
with current should be checked to ensure that the
136
8:55
Page 137
variation is sufficiently small. If not, substantial errors

may occur, and the setting procedure will have to follow
that for electromechanical relays.
9.16.1.2 Electromechanical relays
When using an electromechanical relay, the earth-fault
element generally will be similar to the phase elements.
It will have a similar VA consumption at setting, but will
impose a far higher burden at nominal or rated current,
because of its lower setting. For example, a relay with a
setting of 20% will have an impedance of 25 times that
of a similar element with a setting of 100%. Very
frequently, this burden will exceed the rated burden of
the current transformers. It might be thought that
correspondingly larger current transformers should be
used, but this is considered to be unnecessary. The
current transformers that handle the phase burdens can
operate the earth fault relay and the increased errors can
easily be allowed for.
to be shorter than might be expected.

At still higher input currents, the CT performance falls off
until finally the output current ceases to increase
substantially. Beyond this value of input current,
operation is further complicated by distortion of the
output current waveform.
30
10
Current transformer
excitation characteristic
0.5
1.0
Exciting current (amperes)
1.5
100
Effective setting (per cent)
Not only is the exciting current of the energising current

transformer proportionately high due to the large burden
of the earth-fault relay, but the voltage drop on this relay
is impressed on the other current transformers of the
paralleled group, whether they are carrying primary
current or not. The total exciting current is therefore the
product of the magnetising loss in one CT and the
number of current transformers in parallel. The
summated magnetising loss can be appreciable in
comparison with the operating current of the relay, and
in extreme cases where the setting current is low or the
current transformers are of low performance, may even
exceed the output to the relay. The effective setting
current in secondary terms is the sum of the relay
setting current and the total excitation loss. Strictly
speaking, the effective setting is the vector sum of the
relay setting current and the total exciting current, but
the arithmetic sum is near enough, because of the
similarity of power factors. It is instructive to calculate
the effective setting for a range of setting values of a
relay, a process that is set out in Table 9.4, with the
results illustrated in Figure 9.16.
The effect of the relatively high relay impedance and the
summation of CT excitation losses in the residual circuit
is augmented still further by the fact that, at setting, the
flux density in the current transformers corresponds to
the bottom bend of the excitation characteristic. The
exciting impedance under this condition is relatively low,
causing the ratio error to be high. The current
transformer actually improves in performance with
increased primary current, while the relay impedance
decreases until, with an input current several times
greater than the primary setting, the multiple of setting
current in the relay is appreciably higher than the
multiple of primary setting current which is applied to
the primary circuit. This causes the relay operating time
20
80
60
40
20
20
40
60
Relay setting (per cent)
80
100
Figure 9.16: Effective setting of earth-fault relay
Relay Plug
Coil voltage
Setting
at Setting
(V)
%
Current (A)
5
0.25
12
10
0.5
6
15
0.75
4
20
1
3
40
2
1.5
60
3
1
80
4
0.75
100
5
0.6
Exciting
Current
Ie
0.583
0.405
0.3
0.27
0.17
0.12
0.1
0.08
Effective Setting
Current
%
(A)
2
40
1.715
34.3
1.65
33
1.81
36
2.51
50
3.36
67
4.3
86
5.24
105
Table 9.4: Calculation of effective settings
9.16.2 Time Grading of Earth-Fault Relays

The time grading of earth-fault relays can be arranged in
the same manner as for phase fault relays. The
time/primary current characteristic for electromechanical relays cannot be kept proportionate to the
relay characteristic with anything like the accuracy that
is possible for phase fault relays. As shown above, the
ratio error of the current transformers at relay setting
current may be very high. It is clear that time grading of
electromechanical earth-fault relays is not such a simple
137
21/06/02
Secondary voltage
Chap9 exe
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:57
Page 138
matter as the procedure adopted for phase relays in

Table 9.3. Either the above factors must be taken into
account with the errors calculated for each current level,
making the process much more tedious, or longer
grading margins must be allowed. However, for other
types of relay, the procedure adopted for phase fault
relays can be used.
Cable gland
Cable
box
Cable gland /sheath

ground connection

9
>
(a) Physical connections
9.16.3 Sensitive Earth-Fault Protection
LV systems are not normally earthed through an

impedance, due to the resulting overvoltages that may
occur and consequential safety implications. HV systems
may be designed to accommodate such overvoltages, but
not the majority of LV systems.
However, it is quite common to earth HV systems through
an impedance that limits the earth-fault current. Further,
in some countries, the resistivity of the earth path may be
very high due to the nature of the ground itself (e.g.
desert or rock). A fault to earth not involving earth
conductors may result in the flow of only a small current,
insufficient to operate a normal protection system. A
similar difficulty also arises in the case of broken line
conductors, which, after falling on to hedges or dry
metalled roads, remain energised because of the low
leakage current, and therefore present a danger to life.
No operation
I
(b) Incorrect positioning
To overcome the problem, it is necessary to provide an

earth-fault protection system with a setting that is
considerably lower than the normal line protection. This
presents no difficulty to a modern digital or numerical
relay. However, older electromechanical or static relays
may present difficulties due to the high effective burden
they may present to the CT.
The required sensitivity cannot normally be provided by
means of conventional CTs. A core balance current
transformer (CBCT) will normally be used. The CBCT is a
current transformer mounted around all three phase (and
neutral if present) conductors so that the CT secondary
current is proportional to the residual (i.e. earth) current.
Such a CT can be made to have any convenient ratio
suitable for operating a sensitive earth-fault relay
element. By use of such techniques, earth fault settings
down to 10% of the current rating of the circuit to be
protected can be obtained.
Care must be taken to position a CBCT correctly in a
cable circuit. If the cable sheath is earthed, the earth
connection from the cable gland/sheath junction must
be taken through the CBCT primary to ensure that phasesheath faults are detected. Figure 9.17 shows the correct
and incorrect methods. With the incorrect method, the
fault current in the sheath is not seen as an unbalance
current and hence relay operation does not occur.
>
Operation
I
>
Figure 9.17: Positioning of core balance

current transformers
conditions limits the application of non-directional sensitive

earth-fault protection. Such residual effects can occur due
to unbalanced leakage or capacitance in the system.
9.17 DIRECTIONAL EARTH-FAULT OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION
Directional earth-fault overcurrent may need to be
applied in the following situations:
The normal residual current that may flow during healthy

138
i. for earth-fault protection where the overcurrent

protection is by directional relays
ii. in insulated-earth networks
iii. in Petersen coil earthed networks
iv. where the sensitivity of sensitive earth-fault
protection is insufficient use of a directional
earth-fault relay may provide greater sensitivity
21/06/02
8:57
Page 139
The relay elements previously described as phase fault

elements respond to the flow of earth fault current, and
it is important that their directional response be correct
for this condition. If a special earth fault element is
provided as described in Section 9.16 (which will normally
be the case), a related directional element is needed.
9.17.1 Relay Connections

The residual current is extracted as shown in Figure 9.15.
Since this current may be derived from any phase, in
order to obtain a directional response it is necessary to
obtain an appropriate quantity to polarise the relay. In
digital or numerical relays there are usually two choices
provided.
9.17.1.1 Residual voltage
A suitable quantity is the residual voltage of the system.
This is the vector sum of the individual phase voltages. If
the secondary windings of a three-phase, five limb
voltage transformer or three single-phase units are
connected in broken delta, the voltage developed across
its terminals will be the vector sum of the phase to
ground voltages and hence the residual voltage of the
system, as illustrated in Figure 9.18.
The primary star point of the VT must be earthed.
However, a three-phase, three limb VT is not suitable, as
there is no path for the residual magnetic flux.
When the main voltage transformer associated with the

high voltage system is not provided with a broken delta
secondary winding to polarise the directional earth fault
relay, it is permissible to use three single-phase
interposing voltage transformers. Their primary windings
are connected in star and their secondary windings are
connected in broken delta. For satisfactory operation,
however, it is necessary to ensure that the main voltage
transformers are of a suitable construction to reproduce
the residual voltage and that the star point of the
primary winding is solidly earthed. In addition, the star
point of the primary windings of the interposing voltage
transformers must be connected to the star point of the
secondary windings of the main voltage transformers.
The residual voltage will be zero for balanced phase
voltages. For simple earth-fault conditions, it will be
equal to the depression of the faulted phase voltage. In
all cases the residual voltage is equal to three times the
zero sequence voltage drop on the source impedance and
is therefore displaced from the residual current by the
characteristic angle of the source impedance. The
residual quantities are applied to the directional element
of the earth-fault relay.
The residual current is phase offset from the residual
voltage and hence angle adjustment is required.
Typically, the current will lag the polarising voltage. The
method of system earthing also affects the Relay
Characteristic Angle (RCA), and the following settings
are usual:
i. resistance-earthed system: 0 RCA
A
B
ii. distribution system, solidly-earthed: -45 RCA
iii. transmission system, solidly-earthed: -60 RCA

The different settings for distribution and transmission
systems arise from the different X/R ratios found in these
systems.
Chap9 exe
9.17.1.2 Negative sequence current

I
>
(a) Relay connections
Va
Va
3IIO
Va2
The residual voltage at any point in the system may be

insufficient to polarise a directional relay, or the voltage
transformers available may not satisfy the conditions for
providing residual voltage. In these circumstances,
negative sequence current can be used as the polarising
quantity. The fault direction is determined by comparison
of the negative sequence voltage with the negative
sequence current. The RCA must be set based on the
angle of the negative phase sequence source voltage.
3V
3
VO
Vb
Vc
(b) Balanced system

(zero residual volts)
Vb
Vc
9.18 EARTH-FAULT PROTECTION ON INSULATED

NETWORKS
(c) Unbalanced system
fault (3Vo residual volts)
Figure 9.18: Voltage polarised directional earth fault relay
Occasionally, a power system is run completely insulated

from earth. The advantage of this is that a single phaseearth fault on the system does not cause any earth fault
139
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:57
Page 140
current to flow, and so the whole system remains

operational. The system must be designed to withstand high
transient and steady-state overvoltages however, so its use
is generally restricted to low and medium voltage systems.
It is vital that detection of a single phase-earth fault is
achieved, so that the fault can be traced and rectified.
While system operation is unaffected for this condition,
the occurrence of a second earth fault allows substantial
currents to flow.
The absence of earth-fault current for a single phase-earth
fault clearly presents some difficulties in fault detection.
Two methods are available using modern relays.
9.18.2 Sensitive Earth Fault

This method is principally applied to MV systems, as it
relies on detection of the imbalance in the per-phase
charging currents that occurs.
Figure 9.19 illustrates the situation that occurs when a
single phase-earth fault is present. The relays on the
healthy feeders see the unbalance in charging currents
for their own feeders. The relay in the faulted feeder sees
the charging currents in the rest of the system, with the
current of its own feeders cancelled out. Figure 9.20
shows the phasor diagram.
Vaf
Vapf
9.18.1 Residual Voltage
IR1
Ib1
When a single phase-earth fault occurs, the healthy

phase voltages rise by a factor of 3 and the three phase
voltages no longer have a phasor sum of zero. Hence, a
residual voltage element can be used to detect the fault.
However, the method does not provide any
discrimination, as the unbalanced voltage occurs on the
whole of the affected section of the system. One
advantage of this method is that no CTs are required, as
voltage is being measured. However, the requirements
for the VTs as given in Section 9.17.1.1 apply.
Grading is a problem with this method, since all relays in
the affected section will see the fault. It may be possible
to use definite-time grading, but in general, it is not
possible to provide fully discriminative protection using
this technique.
Ia1
Ib1
IR1
jX
Xc1
IH1
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
jX
Xc2
IH2
Ia3
IH1+
H3
IR3
IR3 =I +IIH2+IIH3-IIH3
=IIH1 IH2
jX
Xc3
I +IIH2
Figure 9.19: Current distribution in an insulated system

with a C phase earth fault
Restrain
Ia1
Operate
Vbf
Vbpf
Vcpf
Vres (= -3Vo)
An RCA setting of +90 shifts
the "center of the characteristic" to here
IR3= -(IIH1 IH2)
Figure 9.20: Phasor diagram for insulated system

with C phase-earth fault
Use of Core Balance CTs is essential. With reference to

Figure 9.20, the unbalance current on the healthy
feeders lags the residual voltage by 90. The charging
currents on these feeders will be 3 times the normal
value, as the phase-earth voltages have risen by this
amount. The magnitude of the residual current is
therefore three times the steady-state charging current
per phase. As the residual currents on the healthy and
faulted feeders are in antiphase, use of a directional
earth fault relay can provide the discrimination required.
The polarising quantity used is the residual voltage. By
shifting this by 90, the residual current seen by the relay
on the faulted feeder lies within the operate region of
the directional characteristic, while the residual currents
on the healthy feeders lie within the restrain region.
Thus, the RCA required is 90. The relay setting has to lie
between one and three times the per-phase charging
current.
This may be calculated at the design stage, but
confirmation by means of tests on-site is usual. A single
phase-earth fault is deliberately applied and the
resulting currents noted, a process made easier in a
modern digital or numeric relay by the measurement
facilities provided. As noted earlier, application of such
a fault for a short period does not involve any disruption
140
21/06/02
8:57
Page 141
to the network, or fault currents, but the duration should

be as short as possible to guard against a second such
fault occurring.
Ia1
Ib1
It is also possible to dispense with the directional element

if the relay can be set at a current value that lies between
the charging current on the feeder to be protected and
the charging current of the rest of the system.
IR1
- XC1
-jX
IH1
IL
9.19 EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ON PETERSEN COIL

EARTHED NETWORKS
Petersen Coil earthing is a special case of high
impedance earthing. The network is earthed via a
reactor, whose reactance is made nominally equal to the
total system capacitance to earth. Under this condition,
a single phase-earth fault does not result in any earth
fault current in steady-state conditions. The effect is
therefore similar to having an insulated system. The
effectiveness of the method is dependent on the
accuracy of tuning of the reactance value changes in
system capacitance (due to system configuration
changes for instance) require changes to the coil
reactance. In practice, perfect matching of the coil
reactance to the system capacitance is difficult to
achieve, so that a small earth fault current will flow.
Petersen Coil earthed systems are commonly found in
areas where the system consists mainly of rural overhead
lines, and are particularly beneficial in locations subject
to a high incidence of transient faults.
To understand how to correctly apply earth fault
protection to such systems, system behaviour under earth
fault conditions must first be understood.
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
jX
XL
- XC2
-jX
IH2
Ia3
Ib3
I =IIF
IR3
- XC3
-jX
IF
IL=IIF IH1 IH2-IIH3
H1+IIH2
IL
Figure 9.22: Distribution of currents during
a C phase-earth fault radial distribution system
Figure 9.21 illustrates a simple network earthed through

a Petersen Coil. The equations clearly show that, if the
reactor is correctly tuned, no earth fault current will flow.
Figure 9.22 shows a radial distribution system earthed
using a Petersen Coil. One feeder has a phase-earth fault
on phase C. Figure 9.23 shows the resulting phasor
diagrams, assuming that no resistance is present.
IL
IH3
A
3V
VO
IH2
Source
-IIB
Chap9 exe
IH1
-IIC
b1
Van
If IB- C+
(=IIL)
jX
XL
Petersen
coil
If
=O if
Van
Vab
jX
XL
an
jX
XL
jX
XC
(=-IIb
=IIB+IIC
-X
-jX
- XC
-jX
Ia1
Vac
Ic)
B
a) Capacitive et inductive currents
- XC
-jX
IL
-IIC
A
Ib1
IL
IR1=IH1
-IH1
-I
IR3
-IIB
Ia1
Vac
IR3 =-I +I
=-IH2
Vab
N
Vres=-3V
VO
Current vectors for A phase fault
b) Unfaulted line
Figure 9.21: Earth fault in Petersen Coil earthed system
Vres=-3V
VO
c) Faulted line
Figure 9.23: C phase-earth fault in Petersen Coil earthed

network: theoretical case no resistance present in XL or XC
141
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:57
Page 142
In Figure 9.23(a), it can be seen that the fault causes the

healthy phase voltages to rise by a factor of 3 and the
charging currents lead the voltages by 90.
Using a CBCT, the unbalance currents seen on the
healthy feeders can be seen to be a simple vector
addition of Ia1 and Ib1, and this lies at exactly 90 lagging
to the residual voltage (Figure 9.23(b)). The magnitude
of the residual current IR1 is equal to three times the
steady-state charging current per phase. On the faulted
feeder, the residual current is equal to IL-IH1-IH2, as
shown in Figure 9.23(c) and more clearly by the zero
sequence network of Figure 9.24.
IOF
IROF
Faulted
feeder
IROH
Healthy
feeders
IROH
IL
IH3
-VO
3XL
a. current measurement setting capable of being set

to very low values
b. an RCA of 0, and capable of fine adjustment
around this value
Resistive component in feeder

1+IH2+IH3)'
3VO
B
a) Capacitive and inductive currents
with resistive components
Restrain
Operate
IL
IR1=IH1
The sensitive current element is required because of the

very low current that may flow so settings of less than
0.5% of rated current may be required. However, as
compensation by the Petersen Coil may not be perfect,
low levels of steady-state earth-fault current will flow
and increase the residual current seen by the relay. An
often used setting value is the per phase charging
current of the circuit being protected.
Fine tuning of the RCA is also required about the 0
setting, to compensate for coil and feeder resistances
and the performance of the CT used. In practice, these
adjustments are best carried out on site through
deliberate application of faults and recording of the
resulting currents.
Having established that a directional relay can be used,

two possibilities exist for the type of protection element
that can be applied sensitive earth fault and zero
sequence wattmetric.
To apply this form of protection, the relay must meet two

requirements:
Figure 9.24: Zero sequence network showing

residual currents
Often, a resistance is deliberately inserted in parallel

with the Petersen Coil to ensure a measurable earth fault
current and increase the angular difference between the
residual signals to aid relay application.
9.19.1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
Key:
IROF=residual current on faulted feeder
IROH=residual current on healthy feeder
It can therefore be seen that:
-IOF=IL-IH1-IH2-IH3
IROF=IH3+IOF
So:
-IROF=IL=IH1-IH2
(I
Hence a directional relay can be used, and with an RCA

of 0, the healthy feeder residual current will fall in the
restrain area of the relay characteristic while the
faulted feeder residual current falls in the operate area.
IH1
IH2
Xco
Resistive component
in grounding coil
I'L
However, in practical cases, resistance is present and

Figure 9.25 shows the resulting phasor diagrams. If the
residual voltage Vres is used as the polarising voltage, the
residual current is phase shifted by an angle less than
90 on the faulted feeder and greater than 90 on the
healthy feeders.
Zero torque line

for O RCA
9.19.2 Sensitive Wattmetric Protection

-IH1-IH2
IR3
=I +I
IR3 F H3
=IL-IH1-IH2
Vres=-3VO
Restrain
Zero torque line for 0 RCA

b) Unfaulted line
Vres=-3VO
Operate
c) Faulted line
Figure 9.25: C phase-earth fault in Petersen Coil earthed

network: practical case with resistance present in XL or XC
It can be seen in Figure 9.25 that a small angular

difference exists between the spill current on the healthy
and faulted feeders. Figure 9.26 illustrates how this
angular difference gives rise to active components of
current which are in antiphase to each other.
Consequently, the active components of zero sequence
power will also lie in similar planes and a relay capable
of detecting active power can make a discriminatory
142
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:57
Page 143
Vres=-3V
VO
Active component
of residual current:
faulted feeder
IR3
IH1-IIH2
Operate
IL
IR1
of residual current:
healthy feeder
Zero torque line

for O RCA
Restrain
Figure 9.26: Resistive components of spill current
decision. If the wattmetric component of zero sequence

power is detected in the forward direction, it indicates a
fault on that feeder, while a power in the reverse
direction indicates a fault elsewhere on the system. This
method of protection is more popular than the sensitive
earth fault method, and can provide greater security
against false operation due to spurious CBCT output
under non-earth fault conditions.
9.20.1 Relay Phase Fault Setting Example

IDMT Relays/Fuses
Consider the system shown in Figure 9.28.
500 MVA 11kV
Utility source
11kV
5
I>>
I>
I >
Wattmetric power is calculated in practice using residual

quantities instead of zero sequence ones. The resulting
values are therefore nine times the zero sequence
quantities as the residual values of current and voltage
are each three times the corresponding zero sequence
values. The equation used is:
Cable C1 : 5 x3 x1c x 630mm2 XLPE

Z = 0.042 + j 0.086/km/cable
L = 2km
3000/1
I>
I >
Bus A
11kV
V res I res cos ( c )

= 9 V O I O cos ( c )
Utility
client
3000/5
Max load 2800A
I>>
I>
1000/1
Equation 9.5
Reactor R1 :
Z=4% on 20MVA
where:
Max load 1000A
Vres = residual voltage
Bus B
11kV
Ires = residual current
Vo = zero sequence voltage
500/1
>
Io
= zero sequence current
= angle between Vres and Ires
Cables C2,C3:
1 x 3c x 185mm2XLPE
Z = 0.128 + j 0.093/km
= relay characteristic angle setting
L = Ikm
I>
I
>
500/1
Max load 400A/feeder
Bus C
11kV
The current and RCA settings are as for a sensitive earth

fault relay.
150/5
This section provides details of the time/current grading

of some example networks, to illustrate the process of
relay setting calculations and relay grading. They are
based on the use of a modern numerical overcurrent
relay illustrated in Figure 9.27, with setting data taken
from this relay.
C2
FS2
160A
F2
I>
C3
FS1
125A
200/5
F1
I>
IS = 120%
IS = 110%
TMS = 0.25
TMS = 0.1
Max load 190A
Max load 130A
9.20 EXAMPLES OF TIME AND CURRENT GRADING
1
I>
Max load 90A
Figure 9.28: IDMT relay grading example
The problem is to calculate appropriate relay settings for

relays 1-5 inclusive. Because the example is concerned
with grading, considerations such as bus-zone
143
Figure 9.27: MiCOM P140
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:57
Page 144
protection, and CT knee-point voltage requirements, etc.,

are not dealt with. All curves are plotted to an 11kV
base. The contactors in series with fuses FS1/FS2 have
a maximum breaking capacity of 3kA, and relay F2 has
been set to ensure that the fuse operates prior to the
contactor for currents in excess of this value. CTs for
relays F1, F2 and 5 are existing CTs with 5A
secondaries, while the remaining CTs are new with 1A
secondaries. Relay 5 is the property of the supply utility,
and is required to be set using an SI characteristic in
order to ensure grading with upstream relays.
(ii) At bus B
Fault Level =
= 232MVA
=12.2 kA
(iii) At bus A
Fault Level =
= 22.7kA
(iv) Source
All impedances must first be referred to a common base,

taken as 500MVA, as follows:
500 100
MVA
ZS + ZC1
= 432MVA
9.20.1.1 Impedance Calculations
500 100
MVA
ZS + ZC1 + Z R1
Reactor R1
4 500
Z R1 =
= 100%
20
Fault Level = 500MVA
Cable C1
0.096
ZC1 =
2 = 0.038
5
9.20.1.3 CT ratio selection
On 500MVA base,
0.038 100 500
ZC1 =
(11)2
= 26.3kA
This requires consideration not only of the maximum

load current, but also of the maximum secondary current
under fault conditions.
ZC2, ZC3 = 0.158
CT secondaries are generally rated to carry a short-term

current equal to 100 x rated secondary current.
Therefore, a check is required that none of the new CT
secondaries has a current of more than 100A when
maximum fault current is flowing in the primary. Using
the calculated fault currents, this condition is satisfied,
so modifications to the CT ratios are not required.
On 500MVA base,
9.20.1.4 Relay overcurrent settings Relays 1/2
= 15.7%
Cables C2,C3
ZC2, ZC 3 =
0.158 100 500
(11)
= 65.3%
Source Impedance (500MVA base)
500
ZS =
100%
500
= 100%
9.20.1.2 Fault Levels

The fault levels are calculated as follows:
(i) At bus C
For 2 feeders,
Fault Level=
500 100
MVA
Z R1 + ZS + ZC1 + ZC 2 2
= 10.6 kA on 11kV base

For a single feeder, fault level = 178MVA
= 9.33kA
These relays perform overcurrent protection of the cable

feeders, Busbar C and backup-protection to relays F1, F2
and their associated fuses FS1 and FS2. The settings for
Relays 1 and 2 will be identical, so calculations will only
be performed for Relay 1. Consider first the current
setting of the relay.
Relay 1 must be able to reset at a current of 400A the
rating of the feeder. The relay has a drop-off/pick-up
ratio of 0.95, so the relay current setting must not be less
than 400/0.95, or 421A. A suitable setting that is greater
than this value is 450A. However, Section 9.12.3 also
recommends that the current setting should be three
times the largest fuse rating (i.e. 3 x 160A, the rating of
the largest fuse on the outgoing circuits from Busbar C),
leading to a current setting of 480A, or 96% of relay
rated primary current. Note that in this application of
relays to a distribution system, the question of maximum
and minimum fault levels are probably not relevant as
the difference between maximum and minimum fault
levels will be very small. However in other applications
where significant differences between maximum and
minimum fault levels exist, it is essential to ensure that
144
21/06/02
8:57
Page 145
the selection of a current setting that is greater than full

load current does not result in the relay failing to operate
under minimum fault current conditions. Such a
situation may arise for example in a self-contained
power system with its own generation. Minimum
generation may be represented by the presence of a
single generator and the difference between minimum
fault level and maximum load level may make the choice
of relay current settings difficult.
The grading margin now has to be considered. For
simplicity, a fixed grading margin of 0.3s between relays
is used in the calculations, in accordance with Table 9.2.
Between fuse and relay, Equation 9.4 is applied, and with
fuse FS2 pre-arcing time of 0.01s (from Figure 9.29), the
grading margin is 0.154s.
Consider first the IDMT overcurrent protection. Select
the EI characteristic, as fuses exist downstream, to
ensure grading. The relay must discriminate with the
longest operating time between relays F1, F2 and fuse
FS2 (being the largest fuse) at the maximum fault level
seen by relays 1 and 2. The maximum fault current seen
by relay 1 for a fault at Busbar C occurs when only one
of cables C2, C3 is in service. This is because the whole
of the fault current then flows through the feeder that is
in service. With two feeders in service, although the
fault level at Busbar C is higher, each relay only sees half
of the total fault current, which is less than the fault
current with a single feeder in service. With EI
characteristics used for relays F1 and F2, the operating
time for relay F1 is 0.02s at TMS=0.1 because the fault
current is greater than 20 times relay setting, at which
point the EI characteristic becomes definite time (Figure
9.4) and 0.05s for relay F2 (TMS=0.25).
Hence select relay 1 operating time =0.3+0.05=0.35s, to
ensure grading with relay F2 at a fault current of
9.33kA.
With a primary setting of 480A, a fault current of 9.33kA
represents
9330/480 = 19.44 times setting
Thus relay 1 operating time at TMS=1.0 is 0.21s. The
required TMS setting is given by the formula:
TMS =
characteristic:
I sr1 f =
where
t is the required operation time (s)
Isr1f = setting of relay at fault current
Hence, with t = 0.35,
Isr1f = 15.16
or, I sr1 =
I sr1 =
9330
=615.4 A
15.16
616
=1.232
500
Use 1.24 = 620A nearest available value

At a TMS of 1.0, operation time at 9330A
=
80
2
9330
1
620
= 0.355
Hence, required TMS

=
0.35
= 0.99
0.355
for convenience, use a TMS of 1.0, slightly greater than

the required value.
From the grading curves of Figure 9.29, it can be seen
that there are no grading problems with fuse FS1 or
relays F1 and F2.
9.20.1.5 Relay overcurrent settings - Relay 3
This relay provides overcurrent protection for reactor R1,
and backup overcurrent protection for cables C2 and C3.
The overcurrent protection also provides busbar
protection for Busbar B.
Again, the EI characteristic is used to ensure grading
with relays 1 and 2. The maximum load current is
1000A. Relay 3 current setting is therefore
feeder flc
I sr 3 >
CT primary current 0.95
Substituting values,
operation time required

Actual op. time required at TMS =1.0
Isr3 >1052A
0.35
=1.66
0.21
This value of TMS is outside the settable range of the
relay (maximum setting 1.2). Therefore, changes must be
made to the relay current setting in order to bring the
value of TMS required into the range available, provided
this does not result in the inability of the relay to operate
at the minimum fault level.
TMS =
Use a setting of 106% or 1060A, nearest available

setting above 1052A.
Relay 3 has to grade with relays 1/2 under two
conditions:
By re-arrangement of the formula for the EI
80
+1
t
145
1. for a fault just beyond relays 1 and 2 where the

fault current will be the busbar fault current of
12.2kA
2. for a fault at Bus C where the fault current seen by
Chap9 exe
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:59
Page 146
either relay 1 or 2 will be half the total Bus C fault

current of 10.6kA, i.e. 5.3kA
Examining first condition 1. With a current setting of
620A, a TMS of 1.0 and a fault current of 12.2kA, relay 1
will operate in 0.21s. Using a grading interval of 0.3s,
relay 3 must therefore operate in
0.3 + 0.21 = 0.51s
at a fault current of 12.2kA.
12.2kA represents 12200/1060 = 11.51 times setting for

relay 3 and thus the time multiplier setting of relay 3
should be 0.84 to give an operating time of 0.51s at
11.51 times setting.
Consider now condition 2. With settings of 620A and
TMS of 1.0 and a fault current of 5.3kA, relay 1 will
operate in 1.11s. Using a grading interval of 0.3s, relay 3
must therefore operate in
0.3 + 1.11 = 1.41s
at a fault current of 5.3kA.
5.3kA represents 5300/1060 = 5 times setting for relay 3,
and thus the time multiplier setting of relay 3 should be 0.33
to give an operating time of 1.11s at 5 times setting. Thus
condition 1 represents the worst case and the time multiplier
setting of relay 3 should be set at 0.84. In practice, a value
of 0.85 is used as the nearest available setting on the relay.
Relay 3 also has an instantaneous element. This is set
such that it will not operate for the maximum throughfault current seen by the relay, a setting of 130% of this
value being satisfactory. The setting is therefore:
current
setting must be at least

2800
= 98%
3000 0.95
.
For convenience, use a value of 100% (=3000A). Thus
relay 4 must operate in 0.605s at 15860/3000 = 5.29
times setting. Thus select a time multiplier setting of
0.15, giving a relay operating time of 0.62s for a normal
inverse type characteristic.
At this stage, it is instructive to review the grading curves,
which are shown in Figure 9.29(a). While it can be seen
that there are no grading problems between the fuses and
relays 1/2, and between relays F1/2 and relays 1/2, it is
clear that relay 3 and relay 4 do not grade over the whole
range of fault current. This is a consequence of the change
in characteristic for relay 4 to SI from the EI characteristic
of relay 3 to ensure grading of relay 4 with relay 5. The
solution is to increase the TMS setting of relay 4 until
correct grading is achieved. The alternative is to increase
the current setting, but this is undesirable unless the limit
of the TMS setting is reached, because the current setting
should always be as low as possible to help ensure positive
operation of the relay and provide overload protection.
Trial and error is often used, but suitable software can
speed the task for instance it is not difficult to construct
a spreadsheet with the fuse/relay operation times and
grading margins calculated. Satisfactory grading can be
found for relay 4 setting values of:
Ist4 = 1.0 or 3000A
TMS = 0.275
1.3x12.2kA
At 22.7kA, the operation time of relay 4 is 0.93s. The

revised grading curves are shown in Figure 9.29(b).
=15.86kA
9.20.1.7 Relay 5
This is equal to a current setting of 14.96 times the

setting of relay 3.
9.20.1.6 Relay 4
Relay
This must grade with relay 3 and relay 5. The supply

authority requires that relay 5 use an SI characteristic to
ensure grading with relays further upstream, so the SI
characteristic will be used for relay 4 also. Relay 4 must
grade with relay 3 at Bus A maximum fault level of
22.7kA. However with the use of an instantaneous high
set element for relay 3, the actual grading point becomes
the point at which the high set setting of relay 3
operates, i.e. 15.86kA. At this current, the operation time
of relay 3 is
80
0.85s = 0.305s
2
(14.96 ) 1
Thus, relay 4 required operating time is
0.305 + 0.3 = 0.605s at a fault level of 15.86kA.
Relay 5 must grade with relay 4 at a fault current of

22.7kA. At this fault current, relay 4 operates in 0.93s
and thus relay 5 must operate in
0.3 + 0.93 = 1.23s at 22.7kA.
A current setting of 110% of relay 4 current setting (i.e.
110% or 3300A) is chosen to ensure relay 4 picks up prior
to relay 5. Thus 22.7kA represents 6.88 times the setting
of relay 5. Relay 5 must grade with relay 4 at a fault
current of 22.7kA, where the required operation time is
1.23s. At a TMS of 1.0, relay 5 operation time is
0.14
(6.88 )
0.02
= 3.56 s
Therefore, the required TMS is 1.23/3.56 = 0.345, use

0.35 nearest available value.
The protection grading curves that result are shown in
Figure 9.30 and the setting values in Table 9.5. Grading
is now satisfactory.
146
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:59
Page 147
100.00
10.00
Relay F1
Fuse FS1
1.00
Fuse FS2
Relays 1/2
Relay 3
Relay 4
0.10
0.01
100
10000
1000
100000
Current (A)
(a) Initial grading curves
100.00
10.00
Time (sec)
Relay F1
Relay F2
Fuse FS1
Time (sec)
Relay F2
Fuse FS2
1.00
Relays 1/2
Relay 3
Relay 4
0.10
0.01
100
10000
1000
100000
Current (A)
(b) Revised initial grading curves
Figure 9.29: Initial relay grading curves overcurrent relay example
147
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:59
Page 148
In situations where one of the relays to be graded is

provided by a third party, it is common for the settings of
the relay to be specified and this may lead to a lack of
co-ordination between this relay and others (usually
those downstream). Negotiation is then required to try
and achieve acceptable settings, but it is often the case
that no change to the settings of the relay provided by
the third party is allowed. A lack of co-ordination
between relays then has to be accepted over at least part
of the range of fault currents.
order to calculate fault levels. However, such impedances

are frequently not available, or known only
approximately and the phase fault current levels have to
be used. Note that earth fault levels can be higher than
phase fault levels if the system contains multiple earth
points, or if earth fault levels are considered on the star
side of a delta/star transformer when the star winding is
solidly earthed.
Relay Settings
Load
Max
Relay/ current Fault
CT
Fuse Charac- Current Setting
TMS
Fuse
Current Ratio Rating teristic Primary Per
Amps
Cent
(A)
kA
F1
190
10.6
200/5
EI
100
100
0.1
F2
130
10.6
150/5
EI
150
120
0.25
FS1
90
10.6
125A
FS2
130
10.6
160A
1
400
12.2
500/1
EI
620
124
1
2
400
12.2
500/1
EI
620
124
1
EI
1060
106
0.85
3
1000
22.7 1000/1
Instant. 15860 14.96
4
3000
22.7 3000/1
SI
3000
100 0.275
5
3000 26.25 3000/5
SI
3300
110
0.35
Attempting to grade the earth fault element of the

upstream relay with fuse F2 will not be possible.
Similarly, relays F1 and F2 have phase fault settings that
do not provide effective protection against earth faults.
The remedy would be to modify the downstream
protection, but such considerations lie outside the scope
of this example. In general therefore, the earth fault
elements of relays upstream of circuits with only phase
fault protection (i.e. relays with only phase fault
elements or fuses) will have to be set with a compromise
that they will detect downstream earth faults but will
not provide a discriminative trip. This illustrates the
practical point that it is rare in anything other than a
very simple network to achieve satisfactory grading for
all faults throughout the network.
Table 9.5: Relay settings for overcurrent relay example
9.20.2 Relay Earth-Fault Settings

The procedure for setting the earth-fault elements is
identical to that for the overcurrent elements, except
that zero sequence impedances must be used if available
and different from positive sequence impedances in
On the circuit with fuse F2, low-level earth faults may

not be of sufficient magnitude to blow the fuse.
In the example of Figure 9.27, it is likely that the

difference in fault levels between phase to phase and
phase to earth faults will be very small and thus the only
function of earth fault elements is to detect and isolate
low level earth faults not seen by the phase fault
100.00
Relay F1
Relay F2
10.00
Fuse FS2
Relays 1/2
Time (sec)
Fuse FS1
Relay 3
1.00
Relay 4
Relay 5
0.10
0.01
100
10000
1000
100000
Current (A)
Figure 9.30: Final relay grading curves for overcurrent relay example
148
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:59
Page 149
elements. Following the guidelines of Section 9.16,

relays 1/2 can use a current setting of 30% (150A) and
a TMS of 0.2, using the EI characteristic. Grading of
relays 3/4/5 follows the same procedure as described for
the phase-fault elements of these relays.
If relays 2 and 3 are non-directional, then, using SI relay

characteristics for all relays, grading of the relays is
dictated by the following:
a) fault at location F1, with 2 feeders in service
b) fault at location F4, with one feeder in service
9.20.3 Protection of Parallel Feeders

Figure 9.31(a) shows two parallel transformer feeders
forming part of a supply circuit. Impedances are as given
in the diagram.
Relay
CT Primary
1
2
3
4
5
6
300
300
300
300
300
300
T1
TMS
Characteristic
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.425
0.425
0.7
100.00
6
>
Bus Q
110kV
50MVA
Z=12.5%
1
I
I>
5
I
I>
3
I
I>
2
>
I Z=0.25puI
100000
The settings shown in Figure 9.32(a) can be arrived at,

with the relay operation times shown in Figure 9.32(b).
It is clear that for a fault at F3 with both transformer
feeders in service, relay 3 operates at the same time as
relay 2 and results in total disconnection of Bus Q and
all consumers supplied solely from it. This is undesirable
the advantages of duplicated 100% rated transformers
have been lost.
I>
Ib
Figure 9.31: System diagram: Parallel feeder example
The example shows that unless relays 2 and 3 are made

directional, they will maloperate for a fault at F3. Also
shown is how to calculate appropriate relay settings for
all six relays to ensure satisfactory protection for faults
at locations F1-F4.
By making relays 2 and 3 directional as shown in Figure

9.33(a), lower settings for these relays can be adopted
they can be set as low as reasonably practical but
normally a current setting of about 50% of feeder full
load current is used, with a TMS of 0.1. Grading rules
can be established as follows:
a. relay 4 is graded with relay 1 for faults at location
F1 with one transformer feeder in service
Figure 9.31(b) shows the impedance diagram, to

100MVA, 110kV base. The fault currents for faults with
various system configurations are shown in Table 9.6.
2 fdrs
1 fdr
2 fdrs
2 fdrs
1 fdr
10000
Figure 9.32: Relay grading for parallel feeder example

non-directional relays
3
I
I>
I
I>
All impedances
p
to
100MVA, 110kV base
(b) Impedance diagram
F1
F1/F2
F2
F3
F4
1000
Current (A)
(b) Relay grading curves - non-directional relays
Bus Q
Fault System
Position Config.
Relays 4/5
1.00
0.10
100
Bus P
Ie
Relays 2/3
Relay 6
I
6
>
10.00
F3
Bus P
220k
Ie
Source
0.01pu I
f
Relay 1
IF4
Time (sec)
Source
10000MVA
If
Fault
Ia
Ib
Currents (A)
Ic
Id
Ie
If
3888
2019
3888
3888
26243
1944
2019
1944
1944
0
1944
0
1944
1944
0
0
0
0
1944
0
972
1009
972
972
26243
972
0
972
972
0
1944
1009
1944
1944
26243
Table 9.6: Fault currents for parallel feeder example
b. relay 4 is graded with relay 3 for faults at location

F3 with two transformer feeders in service
c. relay 6 grades with relay 4 for faults at F4
d. relay 6 also has to grade with relay 4 for faults at
F1 with both transformer feeders in service relay 6
sees the total fault current but relay 4 only 50% of
this current.
Normal rules about calculating current setting values
of relays in series apply. The settings and resulting
149
(a) Relay settings - non-directional relays
50MVA
Z=12.5%
Current
setting
1
1.1
1.1
0.61
0.61
0.7
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:59
Page 150
operation times are given in Figure 9.33(b) and(c)

respectively.
11kV fault level =200MVA

11kV
T1
4
I>
Id
If
50MVA
Z=12,5% I
IF4
6
I>
Bus P
220kV
I
I>
Source
10000MVA
IF3
F4
T2
220/110kV
50MVA
Z
Ib
5
I>
Current setting
TMS
1
0.2
0.42
0.1
0.42
0.1
0.6
0.275
0.275
0.6
0.7
0.475
(b) Relay settings
1
I>
F1
10.00
1.00
0.10
100
1000
10000
(ii) (i)
(iii)
Current (A) - referred to 110kV
1000/1
A
3.3kV
F1
CB8
IF2
I>
R8
Characteristic
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
I>
1000/1
C4
=1.5km
C1
=1km
1000/1
CB7
CB1
1000/1
F2
3.3kV
R6
I>
R5
I>
faults F1, F2 - 1 feeder

(iii) Fault current 26243A fault F4 - 1 feeder
CB2
I> R2
1000/1
CB6
R1
1000/1
R7 I>
Relay 1
Relays 2/3
Relays 4/5
Relay 6
(i) Fault current 3888A -
100.00
Time (sec)

9
CT Primary
300
300
300
300
300
300
1000/1
Bus Q
110kV
3
5MVA
Z=7.15%
1000/1
C3
=2km
C2
=1.3km
1000/1
1000/1
CB3
I>
R3
I>
R4
3.3kV
CB4
CB5
C
3.3kV
(c) Relay characteristics
All cables are 3 x 1c x 1200mm2, AI conductor, Z = 0.09 /km

VT's omitted for clarity
Figure 9.33: Relay grading for parallel feeder example

directional relays
Figure 9.34: Ring main grading example circuit diagram
In practice, a complete protection study would include

instantaneous elements on the primary side of the
transformers and analysis of the situation with only one
transformer in service. These have been omitted from
this example, as the purpose is to illustrate the principles
of parallel feeder protection in a simple fashion.
Figure 9.35 shows the impedance diagram for these two

cases.
V
ZS+ZT
6.08%
ZS+ZT
6.08%
9.20.4 Grading of a Ring Main
A
ZAD
4.13%
Figure 9.34 shows a simple ring main, with a single

infeed at Bus A and three load busbars. Settings for the
directional relays R2-R7 and non-directional relays
R1/R8 are required. Maximum load current in the ring
is 785A (maximum continuous current with one
transformer out of service), so 1000/1A CTs are chosen.
The relay considered is a MiCOM P140 series.
The first step is to establish the maximum fault current
at each relay location. Assuming a fault at Bus B (the
actual location is not important), two possible
configurations of the ring have to be considered, firstly a
closed ring and secondly an open ring. For convenience,
the ring will be considered to be open at CB1 (CB8 is the
other possibility to be considered, but the conclusion will
be the same).
D
ZCD
5.37%
ZAB
6.2%
B
ZBC
8.26%
I1
A
ZAD
4.13%
D
ZCD
5.37%
I1=
ZAB
6.2%
I1
B
ZBC
8.26%
C
V
ZBC+ZCD+ZAD
+ZBC+ZCD+ZAD
ZS 1+
ZAB
Relay
1
2
3
4
5
6
F3
I>
diagram
5MVA
Z=7.15%
Ic
(a) Ring closed
V
I'1=
+ZS+ZBC+ZCD+ZAD
(b) Ring open at CB1
Figure 9.35: Impedance diagrams with ring open
Three-phase fault currents I1 and I1 can be calculated as

2.13kA and 3.67kA respectively, so that the worst case is
with the ring open (this can also be seen from
consideration of the impedance relationships, without
the necessity of performing the calculation).
150
Chap9 exe
21/06/02
8:59
Page 151
Clockwise
Open Point CB8
Fault
Bus
Current
kA
D
7.124
C
4.259
B
3.376
Bus
B
C
D
Table 9.8 summarises the relay settings, while Figure

9.36 illustrates the relay grading curves.
Anticlockwise
Open Point CB1
Fault
Current
kA
3.665
5.615
8.568
100.00
Table 9.7: Fault current tabulation with ring open
Table 9.7 shows the fault currents at each bus for open
points at CB1 and CB8.
10.00
9.20.4.1 Relay R7
1.00
Load current cannot flow from Bus D to Bus A since Bus

A is the only source. Hence low relay current and TMS
settings can be chosen to ensure a rapid fault clearance
time. These can be chosen arbitrarily, so long as they are
above the cable charging current and within the relay
setting characteristics. Select a relay current setting of
0.8 (i.e. 800A CT primary current) and TMS of 0.05. This
ensures that the other relays will not pick up under
conditions of normal load current. At a fault current of
3376A, relay operating time on the SI characteristic is
Relayy R5
Relayy R7
0.10
1000
10000
100,000
Current (A)
(a) Clockwise grading of relays (ring open at CB8)
100.00
0.14
s
0.05
0.02
( 4.22 )
= 0.24s
9.20.4.2 Relay R5
Time (sec)
10.00
This relay must grade with relay R7 at 3376A and have a

minimum operation time of 0.54s. Relay R5 current
setting must be at least 110% of relay R7 to prevent
unwanted pickup, so select relay R5 current setting of
0.88 (i.e. 880A CT primary current).
1.00
Relay R5 operating time at TMS = 1.0
0.14
s = 5.14s
=
0.02
( 3.84 )
100,000
10000
Current (A)
(b) Anticlockwise grading of relays (ring open at CB1)
1000
0.54
= 5.14s
5.14
Use nearest settable value of TMS of 0.125.
Hence, relay R5 TMS =
Bus
Relay
Relay
Characteristic
CT
Ratio
D
C
B
A
A
D
C
B
R7
R5
R3
R1
R8
R6
R4
R2
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
1000/1
1000/1
1000/1
1000/1
1000/1
1000/1
1000/1
1000/1
Max
Max
Load
Fault
Current Current (A)
(A) (3.3kV base)
874
3376
874
4259
874
7124
874
14387
874
14387
874
8568
874
5615
874
3665
Figure 9.36: Ring main example relay grading curves

Current
Setting
p.u.
TMS
0.8
0.88
0.97
1.07
1.07
0.97
0.88
0.8
0.05
0.125
0.2
0.275
0.3
0.2
0.125
0.05
9.21 REFERENCES
9.1. Directional Element Connections for Phase
Relays. W.K Sonnemann, Transactions A.I.E.E.
1950.
Table 9.8: Ring main example relay settings
Relayy R2
0.10
151
Time (sec)
For grading of the relays, consider relays looking in a

clockwise direction round the ring, i.e. relays R1/R3/R5/R7.
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:42
Page 152
10
Unit Protection of Feeders
Introduction
10.1
Convention of direction
10.2
Conditions for direction comparison
10.3
Circulating current system
10.4
Balanced voltage system
10.5
Summation arrangements
10.6
Examples of electromechanical
and static unit protection systems
10.7
Digital/Numerical current differential

protection systems
10.8
Carrier unit protection schemes
10.9
Current differential scheme

analogue techniques
10.10
Phase comparison protection

scheme considerations
10.11
Examples
10.12
References
10.13
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:43
Page 153
10
Unit P rotection of Feeders

10 . 1 I N T R O D U C T I O N
The graded overcurrent systems described in Chapter 9,
though attractively simple in principle, do not meet all
the protection requirements of a power system.
Application difficulties are encountered for two reasons:
firstly, satisfactory grading cannot always be arranged
for a complex network, and secondly, the settings may
lead to maximum tripping times at points in the system
that are too long to prevent excessive disturbances
occurring.
These problems led to the concept of 'Unit Protection',
whereby sections of the power system are protected
individually as a complete unit without reference to
other sections. One form of Unit Protection is also
known as Differential Protection, as the principle is to
sense the difference in currents between the incoming
and outgoing terminals of the unit being protected.
Other forms can be based on directional comparison, or
distance teleprotection schemes, which are covered in
Chapter 12, or phase comparison protection, which is
discussed later in this chapter. The configuration of the
power system may lend itself to unit protection; for
instance, a simple earth fault relay applied at the source
end of a transformer-feeder can be regarded as unit
protection provided that the transformer winding
associated with the feeder is not earthed. In this case
the protection coverage is restricted to the feeder and
transformer winding because the transformer cannot
transmit zero sequence current to an out-of-zone fault.
In most cases, however, a unit protection system
involves the measurement of fault currents (and possibly
voltages) at each end of the zone, and the transmission
of information between the equipment at zone
boundaries. It should be noted that a stand-alone
distance relay, although nominally responding only to
faults within their setting zone, does not satisfy the
conditions for a unit system because the zone is not
clearly defined; it is defined only within the accuracy
limits of the measurement. Also, to cater for some
conditions, the setting of a stand-alone distance relay
may also extend outside of the protected zone to cater
for some conditions.
Merz and Price [10.1] first established the principle of
current differential unit systems; their fundamental
differential systems have formed the basis of many
153
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:43
Page 154
highly developed protection arrangements for feeders

and numerous other items of plant. In one arrangement,
an auxiliary pilot circuit interconnects similar current
transformers at each end of the protected zone, as
shown in Figure 10.1. Current transmitted through the
zone causes secondary current to circulate round the
pilot circuit without producing any current in the relay.
For a fault within the protected zone the CT secondary
currents will not balance, compared with the throughfault condition, and the difference between the currents
will flow in the relay.
10 . 2 C O N V E N T I O N O F D I R E C T I O N
It is useful to establish a convention of direction of
current flow; for this purpose, the direction measured
from a busbar outwards along a feeder is taken as
positive. Hence the notation of current flow shown in
Figure 10.3; the section GH carries a through current
which is counted positive at G but negative at H, while
the infeeds to the faulted section HJ are both positive.
Source
An alternative arrangement is shown in Figure 10.2, in

which the CT secondary windings are opposed for
through-fault conditions so that no current flows in the
series connected relays. The former system is known as
a Circulating Current system, while the latter is known
as a Balanced Voltage system.
Source
+
Fault
Figure 10.3: Convention of current direction

End G
End H
U n i t P ro te c t i o n Fe e d e r s
Id>
Neglect of this rule has often led to anomalous

arrangements of equipment or difficulty in describing
the action of a complex system. When applied, the rule
will normally lead to the use of identical equipments at
the zone boundaries, and is equally suitable for extension
to multi-ended systems. It also conforms to the standard
methods of network analysis.
Relay
Figure 10.1: Circulating current system

End G
End H
10 . 3 C O N D I T I O N S
F O R D I R E C T I O N C O M PA R I S O N
Id>
Relay G
The circulating current and balanced voltage systems of

Figures 10.1 and 10.2 perform full vectorial comparison
of the zone boundary currents. Such systems can be
treated as analogues of the protected zone of the power
system, in which CT secondary quantities represent
primary currents and the relay operating current
corresponds to an in-zone fault current.
Id>
Relay H
Figure 10.2: Balanced voltage system
10
Most systems of unit protection function through the
determination of the relative direction of the fault
current. This direction can only be expressed on a
comparative basis, and such a comparative measurement
is the common factor of many systems, including
directional comparison protection and distance
teleprotection schemes with directional impedance
measurement.
A major factor in consideration of unit protection is the
method of communication between the relays. This is
covered in detail in Chapter 8 in respect of the latest
fibre-optic based digital techniques. For older pilot wire
systems, only brief mention is made. For more detailed
descriptions of pilot wire techniques, see reference
[10.2] in Section 10.13.
These systems are simple in concept; they are

nevertheless applicable to zones having any number of
boundary connections and for any pattern of terminal
currents.
To define a current requires that both magnitude and
phase be stated. Comparison in terms of both of these
quantities is performed in the Merz-Price systems, but it
is not always easy to transmit all this information
over some pilot channels. Chapter 8 provides a detailed
description of modern methods that may be used.
10 . 4 C I R C U L AT I N G C U R R E N T S Y S T E M
The principle of this system is shown in outline in
Figure 10.1. If the current transformers are ideal, the
functioning of the system is straightforward. The
154
21/06/02
8:43
Page 155
transformers will, however, have errors arising from both

Wattmetric and magnetising current losses that cause
deviation from the ideal, and the interconnections
between them may have unequal impedances. This can
give rise to a spill current through the relay even
without a fault being present, thus limiting the
sensitivity that can be obtained. Figure 10.4 illustrates
the equivalent circuit of the circulating current scheme.
If a high impedance relay is used, then unless the relay is
located at point J in the circuit, a current will flow
through the relay even with currents IPg and IPh being
identical. If a low impedance relay is used, voltage FF
will be very small, but the CT exciting currents will be
unequal due to the unequal burdens and relay current IR
will still be non-zero.
IPg
End G
End H
RLg
RSh
RLh
iSg
ieg
Zeg
IPh
ieh
Relay
Zeh
RR
(a)
G'
Subscripts:
p
S - CT Secondary
F'
G''
L
J
G
h - end H
F
H'
GG'
GG''
When a stabilising resistor is used, the relay current

setting can be reduced to any practical value, the relay
now being a voltage-measuring device. There is
obviously a lower limit, below which the relay element
does not have the sensitivity to pick up. Relay
calibration can in fact be in terms of voltage. For more
details, see reference [10.2].
10.4.2 Bias
The 'spill' current in the relay arising from these various
sources of error is dependent on the magnitude of the
through current, being negligible at low values of
through-fault current but sometimes reaching a
disproportionately large value for more severe faults.
Setting the operating threshold of the protection above
the maximum level of spill current produces poor
sensitivity.
By making the differential setting
approximately proportional to the fault current, the lowlevel fault sensitivity is greatly improved. Figure 10.5
illustrates a typical bias characteristic for a modern relay
that overcomes the problem. At low currents, the bias is
small, thus enabling the relay to be made sensitive. At
higher currents, such as would be obtained from inrush or
through fault conditions, the bias used is higher, and thus
the spill current required to cause operation is higher. The
relay is therefore more tolerant of spill current at higher
fault currents and therefore less likely to maloperate,
while still being sensitive at lower current levels.
RSh
Sh
Id
unacceptable. One solution is to include a stabilising

resistance in series with the relay. Details of how to
calculate the value of the stabilising resistor are usually
included in the instruction manuals of all relays that
require one.
H
H''
'
'' Electro-motive forces with low impedance relay
Chap10-152-169
(b)
I1

of circulating current scheme
I2
I3
10.4.1 Transient Instability
Idiff
It is shown in Section 6.4.10 that an asymmetrical

current applied to a current transformer will induce a
flux that is greater than the peak flux corresponding to
the steady state alternating component of the current. It
may take the CT into saturation, with the result that the
dynamic exciting impedance is reduced and the exciting
current greatly increased.
When the balancing current transformers of a unit
protection system differ in excitation characteristics, or
have unequal burdens, the transient flux build-ups will
differ and an increased 'spill' current will result. There is
a consequent risk of relay operation on a healthy circuit
under transient conditions, which is clearly
155
= I1+I2+I3
Operate
Percentage
bias k2
Percentage
bias k1
Restrain
Is1
Is2
Figure 10.5: Typical bias characteristic of relay
Ibias=
I1 + I2 + I3
2
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:43
Page 156
10 . 5 B A L A N C E D V O LTA G E S Y S T E M
This section is included for historical reasons, mainly
because of the number of such schemes still to be found
in service for new installations it has been almost
completely superseded by circulating current schemes. It
is the dual of the circulating current protection, and is
summarised in Figure 10.2 as used in the Translay H04
scheme.
With primary through current, the secondary e.m.f.s of

the current transformers are opposed, and provide no
current in the interconnecting pilot leads or the series
connected relays. An in-zone fault leads to a circulating
current condition in the CT secondaries and hence to
relay operation.
An immediate consequence of the arrangement is that

the current transformers are in effect open-circuited, as
no secondary current flows for any primary throughcurrent conditions. To avoid excessive saturation of the
core and secondary waveform distortion, the core is
provided with non-magnetic gaps sufficient to absorb
the whole primary m.m.f. at the maximum current level,
the flux density remaining within the linear range. The
secondary winding therefore develops an e.m.f. and can
be regarded as a voltage source. The shunt reactance of
the transformer is relatively low, so the device acts as a
transformer loaded with a reactive shunt; hence the
American name of transactor. The equivalent circuit of
the system is as shown in Figure 10.6.
The series connected relays are of relatively high
impedance; because of this the CT secondary winding
resistances are not of great significance and the pilot
resistance can be moderately large without significantly
affecting the operation of the system. This is why the
scheme was developed for feeder protection.
End G
10
10 . 6 S U M M AT I O N A R R A N G E M E N T S
Schemes have so far been discussed as though they were
applied to single-phase systems. A polyphase system
could be provided with independent protection for each
phase.
Modern digital or numerical relays
communicating via fibre-optic links operate on this
basis, since the amount of data to be communicated is
not a major constraint. For older relays, use of this
technique over pilot wires may be possible for relatively
short distances, such as would be found with industrial
and urban power distribution systems. Clearly, each
phase would require a separate set of pilot wires if the
protection was applied on a per phase basis. The cost of
providing separate pilot-pairs and also separate relay
elements per phase is generally prohibitive. Summation
techniques can be used to combine the separate phase
currents into a single relaying quantity for comparison
over a single pair of pilot wires. For details of such
techniques, see reference [10.2].
End H
RSg
Zeg
exciting current, because the whole of the primary

current is expended as exciting current. In consequence,
the secondary e.m.f. is an accurate measure of the
primary current within the linear range of the
transformer. Provided the transformers are designed to
be linear up to the maximum value of fault current,
balance is limited only by the inherent limit of accuracy
of the transformers, and as a result of capacitance
between the pilot cores. A broken line in the equivalent
circuit shown in Figure 10.6 indicates such capacitance.
Under through-fault conditions the pilots are energised
to a proportionate voltage, the charging current flowing
through the relays. The stability ratio that can be
achieved with this system is only moderate and a bias
technique is used to overcome the problem.
RLg
Pilot
Parameters
Id>
Relay G
RLh
10 . 7 E X A M P L E S O F E L E C T R O M E C H A N I C A L
A N D S TAT I C U N I T P R OT E C T I O N S Y S T E M S
RSh
As mentioned above, the basic balanced voltage principle

of protection evolved to biased protection systems.
Several of these have been designed, some of which
appear to be quite different from others. These
dissimilarities are, however, superficial. A number of
these systems that are still in common use are described
below.
Zeh
Id>
Relay H
for balanced voltage system
10.7.1 Translay Balanced Voltage

Electromechanical System
10.5.1 Stability Limit of the Voltage Balance System
Unlike normal current transformers, transactors are not
subject to errors caused by the progressive build-up of
A typical biased, electromechanical balanced voltage

system, trade name Translay, still giving useful service
on distribution systems is shown in Figure 10.7.
156
Chap10-152-169
A
B
C
21/06/02
8:43
Page 157
End G
Bias is produced by a copper shading loop fitted to the

pole of the upper magnet, thereby establishing a Ferraris
motor action that gives a reverse or restraining torque
proportional to the square of the upper magnet flux value.
End H
Summation
winding
Secondaryy
winding
Typical settings achievable with such a relay are:

Least sensitive earth fault - 40% of rating
Least sensitive phase-phase fault - 90% of rating
Three-phase fault - 52% of rating
Pilot
Bias loop
Figure 10.7: Typical biased

electromechanical differential protection system.
The electromechanical design derives its balancing voltages

from the transactor incorporated in the measuring relay at
each line end. The latter are based on the induction-type
meter electromagnet as shown in Figure 10.7.
The upper magnet carries a summation winding to
receive the output of the current transformers, and a
secondary winding which delivers the reference e.m.f.
The secondary windings of the conjugate relays are
interconnected as a balanced voltage system over the
pilot channel, the lower electromagnets of both relays
being included in this circuit.
Through current in the power circuit produces a state of
balance in the pilot circuit and zero current in the lower
electromagnet coils. In this condition, no operating
torque is produced.
An in-zone fault causing an inflow of current from each
end of the line produces circulating current in the pilot
circuit and the energisation of the lower electromagnets.
These co-operate with the flux of the upper
electromagnets to produce an operating torque in the
discs of both relays. An infeed from one end only will
result in relay operation at the feeding end, but no
operation at the other, because of the absence of upper
magnet flux.
10.7.2 Static Circulating Current

Unit Protection System Translay S
A typical static modular pilot wire unit protection system
operating on the circulating current principle is shown in
Figure 10.8. This uses summation transformers with a
neutral section that is tapped, to provide alternative
earth fault sensitivities. Phase comparators tuned to the
power frequency are used for measurement and a
restraint circuit gives a high level of stability for through
faults and transient charging currents. High-speed
operation is obtained with moderately sized current
transformers and where space for current transformers is
limited and where the lowest possible operating time is
not essential, smaller current transformers may be used.
This is made possible by a special adjustment (Kt) by
which the operating time of the differential protection
can be selectively increased if necessary, thereby
enabling the use of current transformers having a
correspondingly decreased knee-point voltage, whilst
ensuring that through-fault stability is maintained to
greater than 50 times the rated current.
Internal faults give simultaneous tripping of relays at
both ends of the line, providing rapid fault clearance
irrespective of whether the fault current is fed from both
line ends or from only one line end.
A
B
T1 - Summation transformer
T2 - Auxiliary transformer
RVO - Non linear resistor
Trip
T2
Rs
T1
Pr
Pr
Tr
T1
Tr
c
O
RVO
TO
Pilot wires
Ro
Ro
To - Operating winding
Trip
T2
Tr - Restraining winding
Rs
Ro - Linear resistor
Pr - Pilots padding resistor
RVO
- Phase comparator
Figure 10.8: Typical static circulating current feeder unit protection circuit diagram
157
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:43
Page 158
10 . 8 D I G I TA L / N U M E R I C A L C U R R E N T
D I F F E R E N T I A L P R OT E C T I O N S Y S T E M S
A digital or numerical unit protection relay may typically
provide phase-segregated current differential protection.
This means that the comparison of the currents at each
relay is done on a per phase basis. For digital data
communication between relays, it is usual that a direct
optical connection is used (for short distances) or a
multiplexed link. Link speeds of up to 64kbit/s (56kbit/s
in N. America) are normal. Through current bias is
typically applied to provide through fault stability in the
event of CT saturation. A dual slope bias technique
(Figure 10.5) is used to enhance stability for through
faults. A typical trip criterion is as follows:
For |Ibias| < Is2
For |Ibias| < Is2
|Idiff | < k2 |Ibias| - (k2 - k1) Is2 + Is1
10
The problem remains of compensating for the time

difference between the current measurements made at
the ends of the feeder, since small differences can upset
the stability of the scheme, even when using fast direct
fibre-optic links. The problem is overcome by either time
synchronisation of the measurements taken by the
relays, or calculation of the propagation delay of the link
continuously.
10.8.1 Time Synchronisation of Relays
|Idiff | < k1 |Ibias| + Is1
operate as a result. In older protection schemes, the

problem was eliminated by delta connection of the CT
secondary windings. For a digital or numerical relay, a
selectable software zero sequence filter is typically
employed.
Once the relay at one end of the protected section has

determined that a trip condition exists, an intertrip
signal is transmitted to the relay at the other end. Relays
that are supplied with information on line currents at all
ends of the line may not need to implement intertripping
facilities. However, it is usual to provide intertripping in
any case to ensure the protection operates in the event
of any of the relays detecting a fault.
A facility for vector/ratio compensation of the measured
currents, so that transformer feeders can be included in
the unit protection scheme without the use of
interposing CTs or defining the transformer as a separate
zone increases versatility. Any interposing CTs required
are implemented in software.
Maloperation on
transformer inrush is prevented by second harmonic
detection. Care must be taken if the transformer has a
wide-ratio on-load tap changer, as this results in the
current ratio departing from nominal and may cause
maloperation, depending on the sensitivity of the relays.
The initial bias slope should be set taking this into
consideration.
Tuned measurement of power frequency currents
provides a high level of stability with capacitance inrush
currents during line energisation. The normal steadystate capacitive charging current can be allowed for if a
voltage signal can be made available and the
susceptance of the protected zone is known.
Where an earthed transformer winding or earthing
transformer is included within the zone of protection,
some form of zero sequence current filtering is required.
This is because there will be an in-zone source of zero
sequence current for an external earth fault. The
differential protection will see zero sequence differential
current for an external fault and it could incorrectly
Fibre-optic media allow direct transmission of the

signals between relays for distances of up to several km
without the need for repeaters. For longer distances
repeaters will be required. Where a dedicated fibre pair
is not available, multiplexing techniques can be used. As
phase comparison techniques are used on a per phase
basis, time synchronisation of the measurements is
vitally important. This requires knowledge of the
transmission delay between the relays. Four techniques
are possible for this:
a. assume a value
b. measurement during commissioning only
c. continuous online measurement
d. GPS time signal
Method (a) is not used, as the error between the assumed
and actual value will be too great.
Method (b) provides reliable data if direct
communication between relays is used. As signal
propagation delays may change over a period of years,
repeat measurements may be required at intervals and
relays re-programmed accordingly. There is some risk of
maloperation due to changes in signal propagation time
causing incorrect time synchronisation between
measurement intervals. The technique is less suitable if
rented fibre-optic pilots are used, since the owner may
perform circuit re-routing for operational reasons
without warning, resulting in the propagation delay
being outside of limits and leading to scheme
maloperation. Where re-routing is limited to a few
routes, it may be possible to measure the delay on all
routes and pre-program the relays accordingly, with the
relay digital inputs and ladder logic being used to detect
changes in route and select the appropriate delay
accordingly.
Method (c), continuous sensing of the signal propagation
delay, is a robust technique. One method of achieving
this is shown in Figure 10.9.
158
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:43
Page 159
Digital communications link

A
B
End A
End B
Measured sampling time

TB3*=(TA*-Tp2)
Current
TA1
TA2
Propagation delay time

Tp1=Tp2=1/2(TA*-TA1-Td)
vectors
TB1
TA1
Tp1
TB2
TA3
Td
TB3*
TB3
TA4
TA*
TA5
Tp2
TB4
ectors
v
Current
TB3 TA1
Td
TB5
TB*
TA1'TA2' - sampling instants of relay A

TB1'TB2' - sampling instants of relay B
Tp1 - propagation delay time
from relay A to B
Tp2 - propagation delay time
from relay B to A
Td - time between the arrival
of message TA1 at relay B
and despatch of message TB3
TA1* - arrival time of message TB3
and relay A
TB* - arrival time of message TA1
and relay B
TB3* - the measured sampling
time of TB3 by relay A
Figure 10.9: Signal propagation delay measurement
(TA* - TA1) = (Td + Tp1 + Tp2)

If it is assumed that Tp1 = Tp2, then the value of Tp1 and
Tp2 can be calculated, and hence also TB3. The relay B
measured data as received at relay A can then be
adjusted to enable data comparison to be performed.
Relay B performs similar computations in respect of the
data received from relay A (which also contains similar
time information). Therefore, continuous measurement
of the propagation delay is made, thus reducing the
possibility of maloperation due to this cause to a
minimum. Comparison is carried out on a per-phase basis,
so signal transmission and the calculations are required
for each phase. A variation of this technique is available
that can cope with unequal propagation delays in the two
communication channels under well-defined conditions.
Relays A and B sample signals at time TA1,TA2 and

TB1,TB2 respectively. The times will not be coincident,
even if they start coincidentally, due to slight differences
in sampling frequencies. At time TA1 relay A transmits
its data to relay B, containing a time tag and other data.
Relay B receives it at time TA1 + Tp1 where Tp1 is the
propagation time from relay A to relay B. Relay B
records this time as time TB*. Relay B also sends
messages of identical format to relay A. It transmits such
a message at time TB3, received by relay A at time
TB3 +Tp2 (say time TA*), where Tp2 is the propagation
time from relay B to relay A. The message from relay B
to relay A includes the time TB3, the last received time
tag from relay A (TA1) and the delay time between the
arrival time of the message from A (TB*) and TB3 call
this the delay time Td. The total elapsed time is
therefore:
The technique can also be used with all types of pilots,

subject to provision of appropriate interfacing devices.
Method (d) is also a robust technique. It involves both
relays being capable of receiving a time signal from
a GPS satellite. The propagation delay on each
communication channel is no longer required to be
known or calculated as both relays are synchronised to a
common time signal. For the protection scheme to meet
the required performance in respect of availability and
maloperation, the GPS signal must be capable of reliable
receipt under all atmospheric conditions. There is extra
satellite signal receiving equipment required at both
ends of the line, which implies extra cost.
The minimum setting that can be achieved with such
techniques while ensuring good stability is 20% of CT
primary current.
10.8.2 Application to Mesh Corner

and 1 1/2 Breaker Switched Substations
These substation arrangements are quite common, and
the arrangement for the latter is shown in Figure 10.10.
Problems exist in protecting the feeders due to the
location of the line CTs, as either Bus 1 or Bus 2 or both
can supply the feeder. Two alternatives are used to
overcome the problem, and they are illustrated in the
Figure. The first is to common the line CT inputs (as
shown for Feeder A) and the alternative is to use a second
set of CT inputs to the relay (as shown for Feeder B).
159
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Bus 1
Page 160
B2 IF
B1
power system currents since the systems are designed to

operate at much higher frequencies, but each medium
may be subjected to noise at the carrier frequencies that
may interfere with its correct operation. Variations of
signal level, restrictions of the bandwidth available for
relaying and other characteristics unique to each
medium influence the choice of the most appropriate
type of scheme. Methods and media for communication
are discussed in Chapter 8.
Bus 2
F
Id>
Id>
Stub
bus
inputs
A
B
Figure 10.10: Breaker and
a half switched substation
10 . 10 C U R R E N T D I F F E R E N T I A L S C H E M E
ANALOGUE TECHNIQUES
In the case of a through fault as shown, the relay

connected to Feeder A theoretically sees no unbalance
current, and hence will be stable. However, with the line
disconnect switch open, no bias is produced in the relay,
so CTs need to be well matched and equally loaded if
maloperation is to be avoided.
10
For Feeder B, the relay also theoretically sees no

differential current, but it will see a large bias current even
with the line disconnect switch open. This provides a high
degree of stability, in the event of transient asymmetric CT
saturation. Therefore, this technique is preferred.
Sensing of the state of the line isolator through auxiliary
contacts enables the current values transmitted to and
received from remote relays to be set to zero when the
isolator is open. Hence, stub-bus protection for the
energised part of the bus is then possible, with any fault
resulting in tripping of the relevant CB.
10 . 9 C A R R I E R U N I T P R OT E C T I O N S C H E M E S
In earlier sections, the pilot links between relays have
been treated as an auxiliary wire circuit that
interconnects relays at the boundaries of the protected
zone. In many circumstances, such as the protection of
longer line sections or where the route involves
installation difficulties, it is too expensive to provide an
auxiliary cable circuit for this purpose, and other means
are sought.
In all cases (apart from private pilots and some short
rented pilots) power system frequencies cannot be
transmitted directly on the communication medium.
Instead a relaying quantity may be used to vary the
higher frequency associated with each medium (or the
light intensity for fibre-optic systems), and this process
is normally referred to as modulation of a carrier wave.
Demodulation or detection of the variation at a remote
receiver permits the relaying quantity to be reconstituted
for use in conjunction with the relaying quantities
derived locally, and forms the basis for all carrier systems
of unit protection.
Carrier systems are generally insensitive to induced
The carrier channel is used in this type of scheme to

convey both the phase and magnitude of the current at
one relaying point to another for comparison with the
phase and magnitude of the current at that point.
Transmission techniques may use either voice frequency
channels using FM modulation or A/D converters and
digital transmission. Signal propagation delays still need
to be taken into consideration by introducing a
deliberate delay in the locally derived signal before a
comparison with the remote signal is made.
A further problem that may occur concerns the dynamic
range of the scheme. As the fault current may be up to
30 times the rated current, a scheme with linear
characteristics requires a wide dynamic range, which
implies a wide signal transmission bandwidth. In
practice, bandwidth is limited, so either a non-linear
modulation characteristic must be used or detection of
fault currents close to the setpoint will be difficult.
10.10.1 Phase Comparison Scheme

The carrier channel is used to convey the phase angle of the
current at one relaying point to another for comparison
with the phase angle of the current at that point.
The principles of phase comparison are illustrated in
Figure 10.11. The carrier channel transfers a logic or
'on/off' signal that switches at the zero crossing points
of the power frequency waveform. Comparison of a local
logic signal with the corresponding signal from the
remote end provides the basis for the measurement of
phase shift between power system currents at the two
ends and hence discrimination between internal and
through faults.
Current flowing above the set threshold results in turnoff of the carrier signal. The protection operates if gaps
in the carrier signal are greater than a set duration the
phase angle setting of the protection.
Load or through fault currents at the two ends of a
protected feeder are in antiphase (using the normal relay
convention for direction), whilst during an internal fault
the (conventional) currents tend towards the in-phase
160
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 161
condition. Hence, if the phase relationship of through

fault currents is taken as a reference condition, internal
faults cause a phase shift of approximately 180 with
respect to the reference condition.
Phase comparison schemes respond to any phase shift
from the reference conditions, but tripping is usually
permitted only when the phase shift exceeds an angle of
typically 30 to 90 degrees, determined by the time delay
setting of the measurement circuit, and this angle is
usually referred to as the Stability Angle. Figure 10.12 is
a polar diagram that illustrates the discrimination
characteristics that result from the measurement
techniques used in phase comparison schemes.
binary information, the techniques associated with

sending teleprotection commands.
Blocking or
permissive trip modes of operation are possible, however
Figure 10.11 illustrates the more usual blocking mode,
since the comparator provides an output when neither
squarer is at logic '1'. A permissive trip scheme can be
realised if the comparator is arranged to give an output
when both squarers are at logic '1'. Performance of the
scheme during failure or disturbance of the carrier
channel and its ability to clear single-end-fed faults
depends on the mode of operation, the type and function
of fault detectors or starting units, and the use of any
additional signals or codes for channel monitoring and
transfer tripping.
Since the carrier channel is required to transfer only

End G
Squarer
D'
Signalling equipment and

communication channel
Transmitter
Receiver
Summation
network
End H
Phase
comparator
Pulse length
discrimination
Load or through fault
G IG
IH H
G IG
Internal fault
IH H
A. Summation voltage at end G
B. Squarer output at end G
1
0
1
0
C. Summation voltage at end H
D. Squarer output at end H

(Received at end G via
ideal carrier system as D'
E. Comparator output at end G

E=B+D'
F. Discriminator output at end G
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Stability setting
Figure 10.11: Principles of phase comparison protection.
161
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 162
both ends are nominally equal, so the receiver responds

equally to blocks of carrier from either end. Throughfault current results in transmission of blocks of carrier
from both ends, each lasting for half a cycle, but with a
phase displacement of half a cycle, so that the composite
signal is continuously above the threshold level and the
detector output logic is continuously '1'. Any phase shift
relative to the through fault condition produces a gap in
the composite carrier signal and hence a corresponding
'0' logic level from the detector. The duration of the logic
'0' provides the basis for discrimination between internal
and external faults, tripping being permitted only when a
time delay setting is exceeded. This delay is usually
expressed in terms of the corresponding phase shift in
degrees at system frequency s in Figure 10.12.
=90
=180-Tripping
Stability
=0
=270
System differential phase shift referred to through fault reference
condition
IG
IH
OR Through fault
IG=-IH
reference condition
G
H
(IG' IH conventional relay currents at ends of protected feeder)
Discriminator stability angle setting.
Figure 10.12: Polar diagram for phase

comparison scheme
10
Signal transmission is usually performed by voice

frequency channels using frequency shift keying (FSK) or
PLC techniques.
Voice frequency channels involving FSK use two discrete
frequencies either side of the middle of the voice band.
This arrangement is less sensitive to variations in delay or
frequency response than if the full bandwidth was used.
Blocking or permissive trip modes of operation may be
implemented. In addition to the two frequencies used
for conveying the squarer information, a third tone is
often used, either for channel monitoring or transfer
tripping dependent on the scheme.
For a sensitive phase comparison scheme, accurate
compensation for channel delay is required. However,
since both the local and remote signals are logic pulses,
simple time delay circuits can be used, in contrast to the
analogue delay circuitry usually required for current
differential schemes.
The principles of the Power Line Carrier channel
technique are illustrated in Figure 10.13. The scheme
operates in the blocking mode. The 'squarer' logic is used
directly to turn a transmitter 'on' or 'off' at one end, and
the resultant burst (or block) of carrier is coupled to and
propagates along the power line which is being protected
to a receiver at the other end. Carrier signals above a
threshold are detected by the receiver, and hence produce
a logic signal corresponding to the block of carrier. In
contrast to Figure 10.11, the signalling system is a 2-wire
rather than 4-wire arrangement, in which the local
transmission is fed directly to the local receiver along
with any received signal. The transmitter frequencies at
The advantages generally associated with the use of the

power line as the communication medium apply namely,
that a power line provides a robust, reliable, and low-loss
interconnection between the relaying points. In addition
dedicated 'on/off' signalling is particularly suited for use
in phase comparison blocking mode schemes, as signal
attenuation is not a problem. This is in contrast to
permissive or direct tripping schemes, where high power
output or boosting is required to overcome the extra
attenuation due to the fault.
The noise immunity is also very good, making the scheme
very reliable. Signal propagation delay is easily allowed
for in the stability angle setting, making the scheme very
sensitive as well.
10 . 11 P H A S E C O M PA R I S I O N P R OT E C T I O N
S C H E M E C O N S I D E R AT I O N S
One type of unit protection that uses carrier techniques
for communication between relays is phase comparison
protection. Communication between relays commonly
uses PLCC or frequency modulated carrier modem
techniques. There are a number of considerations that
apply only to phase comparison protection systems,
which are discussed in this section.
10.11.1 Lines with Shunt Capacitance

A problem can occur with the shunt capacitance current
that flows from an energising source. Since this current is
in addition to the load current that flows out of the line,
and typically leads it by more than 90, significant
differential phase shifts between the currents at the ends
of the line can occur, particularly when load current is low.
The system differential phase shift may encroach into the
tripping region of the simple discriminator characteristic,
regardless of how large the stability angle setting may
be. Figure 10.14 illustrates the effect and indicates
techniques that are commonly used to ensure stability.
162
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 163
End G
End H
Line trap
Line trapp
Coupling
filter
Summation
network
A
Squarer
Transmitter
Identical
relay
to end G
Receiver
Pulse length
discriminator
D
Trip
A. Squarer output at end G
Load or through fault
1
0
Internal fault
Trip
Blocks of carrier transmitted from end G
Squarer output at end H
Blocks of carrier transmitted from end H
B. Composite carrier signal at end G
C. Carrier detector output
D. Discriminator output
Stability setting
Figure 10.13: Principles of power line carrier phase comparison
A
c
O
IC
s
IL
Through Fault
Reference
Squarer Threshold
Starter Threshold
Limits of differential phase shift due to capacitive current IC
Encroachment into tripping region for discriminator
with stability angle setting s
`Keyhole' characteristic
capacitive current
Minimum starter threshold =
sin s
IC
-1
where s = tan
IL
Characteristic of system with amplitude dependent
compensation s = angular compensation for current of magnitude OA
IC
for squarer threshold IC
2sin-1
OA
IL = load current
Figure 10.14: Capacitive current in phase comparison

schemes and techniques used to avoid instability
Operation of the discriminator can be permitted only

when current is above some threshold, so that
measurement of the large differential phase shifts which
occur near the origin of the polar diagram is avoided. By
choice of a suitable threshold and stability angle, a
'keyhole' characteristic can be provided such that the
capacitive current characteristic falls within the
resultant stability region. Fast resetting of the fault
detector is required to ensure stability following the
clearance of a through fault when the currents tend to
fall towards the origin of the polar diagram.
The mark-space ratio of the squarer (or modulating)
waveform can be made dependent on the current
amplitude. Any decrease in the mark-space ratio will
permit a corresponding differential phase shift to occur
between the currents before any output is given from the
comparator for measurement in the discriminator. A
squarer circuit with an offset or bias can provide a
163
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 164
decreasing mark-space ratio at low currents, and with a

suitable threshold level the extra phase shift c which is
permitted can be arranged to equal or exceed the phase
shift due to capacitive current. At high current levels the
capacitive current compensation falls towards zero and
the resultant stability region on the polar diagram is
usually smaller than on the keyhole characteristic, giving
improvements in sensitivity and/or dependability of the
scheme. Since the stability region encompasses all
through-fault currents, the resetting speed of any fault
detectors or starter (which may still be required for other
purposes, such as the control of a normally quiescent
scheme) is much less critical than with the keyhole
characteristic.
In the absence of pre-fault load current, the voltages at

the two ends of a line are in phase. Internal faults are
fed from both ends with fault contributions whose
magnitudes and angles are determined by the position of
the fault and the system source impedances. Although
the magnitudes may be markedly different, the angles
(line plus source) are similar and seldom differ by more
than about 20.
Hence |G - H| 20 and the requirements of Equation
10.3 are very easily satisfied. The addition of arc or fault
resistance makes no difference to the reasoning above, so
the scheme is inherently capable of clearing such faults.
10.11.3 Effect of Load Current

10.11.2 System Tripping Angles
For the protection scheme to trip correctly on internal
faults the change in differential phase shift, 0, from the
through-fault condition taken as reference, must exceed
the effective stability angle of the scheme. Hence:
0 = s + c
So |G - H| 70 and the requirements of Equation 10.3

are still easily satisfied.
Equation 10.1
where
s = stability angle setting
c = capacitive current compensation
(when applicable)
The currents at the ends of a transmission line IG and IH
may be expressed in terms of magnitude and phase
shift with respect a common system voltage.
IG = |IG| G
IH = |IH| H
Using the relay convention described in Section 10.2, the
reference through-fault condition is
IG = -IH
10
When a line is heavily loaded prior to a fault the e.m.f.'s

of the sources which cause the fault current to flow may
be displaced by up to about 50, that is, the power system
stability limit. To this the differential line and source
angles of up to 20 mentioned above need to be added.
For three phase faults, or solid earth faults on phase-byphase comparison schemes, through load current falls to
zero during the fault and so need not be considered. For
all other faults, load current continues to flow in the
healthy phases and may therefore tend to increase
|G - H| towards the through fault reference value. For
low resistance faults the fault current usually far exceeds
the load current and so has little effect. High resistance
faults or the presence of a weak source at one end can
prove more difficult, but high performance is still
possible if the modulating quantity is chosen with care
and/or fault detectors are added.
10.11.4 Modulating Quantity
IG G = -IH H = IH H 180
|G - H| =180
During internal faults, the system tripping angle 0 is the
differential phase shift relative to the reference
condition.
Phase-by-phase comparison schemes usually use phase

current for modulation of the carrier. Load and fault
currents are almost in antiphase at an end with a weak
source. Correct performance is possible only when fault
current exceeds load current, or
for IF < IL |G - H| 180
for IF > IL |G - H| 180
0 =180 - |G - H|
Substituting 0 in Equation 10.1, the conditions for
tripping are:
180 - |G - H| S + c
|G - H| 180 - (S + c)
Equation 10.2
The term (s + c) is the effective stability angle setting

of the scheme. Substituting a typical value of 60 in
Equation 10.2. gives the tripping condition as
|G - H| 120
Equation 10.4
where IF = fault current contribution from weak source

IL = load current flowing towards weak source
To avoid any risk of failure to operate, fault detectors
with a setting greater than the maximum load current
may be applied, but they may limit the sensitivity of
scheme. When the fault detector is not operated at one
end, fault clearance invariably involves sequential
tripping of the circuit breakers.
Equation 10.3
164
21/06/02
8:46
Page 165
Most phase comparison schemes use summation

techniques to produce a single modulating quantity,
responsive to faults on any of the three phases. Phase
sequence components are often used and a typical
modulating quantity is:
IM = MI2 + NI1
The fault current in Equation 10.6 is the effective earth

fault sensitivity IE of the scheme. For the typical values of
M = 6 and N = -1
M
= 6
N
Equation 10.5
where
3
IE = IL
5
I1 = Positive phase sequence component

I2 = Negative phase sequence component
M,N = constants
With the exception of three phase faults all internal
faults give rise to negative phase sequence (NPS)
currents, I2, which are approximately in phase at the
ends of the line and therefore could form an ideal
modulating quantity. In order to provide a modulating
signal during three phase faults, which give rise to
positive phase sequence (PPS) currents, I1, only, a
practical modulating quantity must include some
response to I1 in addition to I2.
Typical values of the ratio M: N exceed 5:1, so that the
modulating quantity is weighted heavily in favour of
NPS, and any PPS associated with load current tends to
be swamped out on all but the highest resistance faults.
For a high resistance phase-earth fault, the system
remains well balanced so that load current IL is entirely
positive sequence. The fault contribution IF provides
equal parts of positive, negative and zero sequence
components IF /3. Assuming the fault is on 'A' phase and
the load is resistive, all sequence components are in
phase at the infeed end G:
I mG = NI L +
MI FG NI FG
+
3
3
and
G 0
At the outfeed end load current is negative,
I mH = NI L +
MI FH NI FH
+
3
3
and for
ImH < 0,H = 180, and |G - H| = 180
Hence for correct operation ImH 0
Let ImH = 0
Then
3I L
= IE
M
+1
Even though the use of a negative value of M gives a

lower value of IE than if it were positive, it is usually
preferred since the limiting condition of Im = 0 then
applies at the load infeed end. Load and fault
components are additive at the outfeed end so that a
correct modulating quantity occurs there, even with the
lowest fault levels. For operation of the scheme it is
sufficient therefore that the fault current contribution
from the load infeed end exceeds the effective setting.
For faults on B or C phases, the NPS components are
displaced by 120 or 240 with respect to the PPS
components. No simple cancellation can occur, but
instead a phase displacement is introduced. For tripping
to occur, Equation 10.2 must be satisfied, and to achieve
high dependability under these marginal conditions, a
small effective stability angle is essential. Figure 10.15
illustrates operation near to the limits of earth fault
sensitivity.
Very sensitive schemes may be implemented by using
_ but the scheme then becomes more
high values of M
N
sensitive to differential errors in NPS currents such as
the unbalanced components of capacitive current or spill
from partially saturated CT's.
Techniques such as capacitive current compensation and
_ at high fault levels may be required to
reduction of M
N
ensure stability of the scheme.
10.11.5 Fault Detection and Starting
Now, for
ImH > 0,H = 0, and |G - H| = 0
I FH =
Comparing this with Equation 10.4, a scheme using

summation is potentially 1.667 times more sensitive
than one using phase current for modulation.
Equation 10.6
Chap10-152-169
For a scheme using a carrier system that continuously

transmits the modulating quantity, protecting an ideal
line (capacitive current=0) in an interconnected
transmission system, measurement of current magnitude
might be unnecessary. In practice, fault detector or
starting elements are invariably provided and the scheme
then becomes a permissive tripping scheme in which
both the fault detector and the discriminator must
operate to provide a trip output, and the fault detector
may limit the sensitivity of the scheme. Requirements
for the fault detectors vary according to the type of
carrier channel used, mode of operation used in the
165
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 166
ensure that during through faults, a High Set is never

operated when a Low Set has reset and potential race
conditions are often avoided by the transmitting of an
unmodulated (and therefore blocking) carrier for a short
time following the reset of low set; this feature is often
referred to as 'Marginal Guard.'
System voltage reference
1.1
MIE
0.9 3
1.1
ImG
G=180
NILG
NIE
3
(a) A phase to earth fault IF = 0.9 IE
|G- H |=180
0.9
NIE
3
MIE
3
ImH
10
1.1
NIE
3
MIE
3
ImG
G=0
10.11.7 Scheme without Capacitive

Current Compensation
NILG
NIE
1.1 3
(b) A phase to earth fault IF = 1.1 IE
|G- H |=0
NIE
3
NILH
NILH
H
The 'keyhole' discrimination characteristic of depends on

the inclusion of a fault detector to ensure that no
measurements of phase angle can occur at low current
levels, when the capacitive current might cause large
phase shifts. Resetting must be very fast to ensure
stability following the shedding of through load.
MIE
3
ImH
G
H
NILG
120 NI
E
3
ImG
MIE
3
(c) B phase to earth fault IF = IE
|G- H |=70
ImH
H=0
NILH
NILH
NI
0.9 E
3
MIE
0.9
3
MIE
3
10.11.8 Scheme with Capacitive

Current Compensation (Blocking Mode)
NILG
NIE
3
120
ImG
When the magnitude of the modulating quantity is less

than the threshold of the squarer, transmission if it
occurred, would be a continuous blocking signal. This
might occur at an end with a weak source, remote from
a fault close to a strong source. A fault detector is
required to permit transmission only when the current
exceeds the modulator threshold by some multiple
(typically about 2 times) so that the effective stability
angle is not excessive. For PLCC schemes, the low set
element referred to in Section 10.11.6 is usually used for
this purpose. If the fault current is insufficient to
operate the fault detector, circuit breaker tripping will
normally occur sequentially.
MIE
3
(d) C phase to earth fault IF = IE
Assumptions for examples:

Infeed of load IL at end G
Outfeed of load IL at end G
M =-6 therefore I = 6I - I and from Equation 10.6
m
2
2
N
3
effective earth fault sensitivity IE =- IL
5
IF
also IF1 =
3
Figure 10.15: Effect of load current on differential
phase shift |g - H| for resistive earth faults
at the effective earth fault sensitivity IE
phase angle measurement, that is, blocking or

permissive, and the features used to provide tolerance to
capacitive current.
10.11.6 Normally Quiescent Power Line Carrier

(Blocking Mode)
To ensure stability of through faults, it is essential that
carrier transmission starts before any measurement of
the width of the gap is permitted. To allow for
equipment tolerances and the difference in magnitude of
the two currents due to capacitive current, two starting
elements are used, usually referred to as 'Low Set' and
'High Set' respectively. Low Set controls the start-up of
transmission whilst High Set, having a setting typically
1.5 to 2 times that of the Low Set element, permits the
phase angle measurement to proceed.
The use of impulse starters that respond to the change in
current level enables sensitivities of less than rated
current to be achieved. Resetting of the starters occurs
naturally after a swell time or at the clearance of the
fault. Dwell times and resetting characteristics must
10.11.9 Fault Detector Operating Quantities

Most faults cause an increase in the corresponding phase
current(s) so measurement of current increase could form
the basis for fault detection. However, when a line is
heavily loaded and has a low fault level at the outfeed
end, some faults can be accompanied by a fall in current,
which would lead to failure of such fault detection,
resulting in sequential tripping (for blocking mode
schemes) or no tripping (for permissive schemes).
Although fault detectors can be designed to respond to
any disturbance (increase or decrease of current), it is
more usual to use phase sequence components. All
unbalanced faults produce a rise in the NPS components
from the zero level associated with balanced load current,
whilst balanced faults produce an increase in the PPS
components from the load level (except at ends with very
low fault level) so that the use of NPS and PPS fault
detectors make the scheme sensitive to all faults. For
schemes using summation of NPS and PPS components
for the modulating quantity, the use of NPS and PPS fault
166
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 167
detectors is particularly appropriate since, in addition to

any reductions in hardware, the scheme may be
characterized entirely in terms of sequence components.
Fault sensitivities IF for PPS and NPS impulse starter
settings I1S and I2S respectively are as follows:
Three phase fault
Phase-phase fault
Phase-earth fault
Parameter
Differential Current Setting, Is1
Bias Current Threshold Setting, Is2
Lower Percentage Bias Setting, k1
Higher Precentage Bias Setting, k2
In - CT rated secondary current
IF = I1S
IF = 3I2S
IF = 3I2S
Setting Range
0.2 -2.0 In
1-30 In
0.3-1.5
0.3-1.5
Table 10.1: Relay Setting Ranges
Is2 = 2.0pu
k1 = 30%
k2 = 150%
10 . 1 2 E X A M P L E S
This section gives examples of setting calculations for
simple unit protection schemes. It cannot and is not
intended to replace a proper setting calculation for a
particular application. It is intended to illustrate the
principles of the calculations required. The examples use
the ALSTOM MiCOM P541 Current Differential relay,
which has the setting ranges given in Table 10.1 for
differential protection. The relay also has backup
distance, high-set instantaneous, and earth-fault
protection included in the basic model to provide a
complete one-box solution of main and backup
protection.
To provide immunity from the effects of line charging

current, the setting of IS1 must be at least 2.5 times the
steady-state charging current, i.e. 4.1A or 0.01p.u., after
taking into consideration the CT ratio of 400/1. The nearest
available setting above this is 0.20p.u. This gives the points
on the relay characteristic as shown in Figure 10.17.
The minimum operating current Idmin is related to the
value of Is1 by the formula
Idmin = (k1IL + Is1)/(1-0.5k1)
for Ibias <Is2
10.12.1 Unit Protection of a Plain Feeder

The circuit to be protected is shown in Figure 10.16. It
consists of a plain feeder circuit formed of an overhead
line 25km long. The relevant properties of the line are:
Line voltage: 33kV
Z = 0.157 + j0.337/km
Shunt charging current = 0.065A/km
To arrive at the correct settings, the characteristics of the
relays to be applied must be considered.
The recommended settings for three of the adjustable
values (taken from the relay manual) are:
and
Idmin = (k2IL -(k2-k1)Is2 + Is1)/(1-0.5k2)
for Ibias >Is2
where IL = load current
and hence the minimum operating current at no load is
0.235p.u. or 94A.
In cases where the capacitive charging current is very
large and hence the minimum tripping current needs to
be set to an unacceptably high value, some relays offer
the facility of subtracting the charging current from the
measured value. Use of this facility depends on having a
suitable VT input and knowledge of the shunt
capacitance of the circuit.
25km
33kV
33kV
400/1
400/1
Digital communications link

Id>
Id>
Steady state charging current = 0.065A/km
Figure 10.16: Typical plain feeder circuit
167
10
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 168
The delta/star transformer connection requires phase

shift correction of CT secondary currents across the
transformer, and in this case software equivalents of
interposing CTs are used.
Since the LV side quantities lag the HV side quantities by

30, it is necessary to correct this phase shift by using
software CT settings that produce a 30 phase shift.
There are two obvious possibilities:
5
Idiff
a. HV side: Yd1
LV side: Yy0
4
b. HV side: Yy0
LV side: Yd11
Only the second combination is satisfactory, since only

this one provides the necessary zero-sequence current
trap to avoid maloperation of the protection scheme for
earth faults on the LV side of the transformer outside of
the protected zone.
3
Ibias
Figure 10.17: Relay characteristic;

plain feeder example
Transformer turns ratio at nominal tap
10.12.2 Unit Protection of a Transformer Feeder

Figure 10.18 shows unit protection applied to a
transformer feeder. The feeder is assumed to be a 100m
length of cable, such as might be found in some
industrial plants or where a short distance separates the
33kV and 11kV substations.
While 11kV cable
capacitance will exist, it can be regarded as negligible for
the purposes of this example.
33kV
Ratio correction must also be applied, in order to ensure

that the relays see currents from the primary and
secondary sides of the transformer feeder that are well
balanced under full load conditions. This is not always
inherently the case, due to selection of the main CT
ratios. For the example of Figure 10.18,
11
= 0.3333
33
Required turns ratio according to the CT ratios used

400
20 MVA
33/11kV
Dyn1
400/1
10
350A
1050A
-30
0.875A
1 = 0.32
1250
1
Cable
100m
1250/1
11kV
0.84A
Digital communication
channel
Id>
Id>
Ratio correction: 1.19

software CT: Yd11
Ratio correction: 1.14

software CT: Yy0
Figure 10.18: Unit protection of a transformer feeder
168
Chap10-152-169
21/06/02
8:46
Page 169
Spill current that will arise due to the incompatibility of

the CT ratios used with the power transformer turns ratio
may cause relay maloperation. This has to be eliminated
by using the facility in the relay for CT ratio correction
factors. For this particular relay, the correction factors
are chosen such that the full load current seen by the
relay software is equal to 1A.
The appropriate correction factors are:
HV: 400/350 = 1.14
LV: 1250/1050 = 1.19
where:
transformer rated primary current = 350A
transformer rated secondary current = 1050A
With the line charging current being negligible, the
following relay settings are then suitable, and allow for
transformer efficiency and mismatch due to tapchanging:
IS1 = 20% (minimum possible)
IS1 = 20%
k1 = 30%
k2 = 150%
10 . 1 3 R E F E R E N C E S
10.1 Merz-Price Protective Gear. K. Faye-Hansen and
G. Harlow. IEE Proceedings, 1911.
10.2 Protective Relays Application Guide 3rd
Edition. ALSTOM Transmission and Distribution
Protection and Control, 1987.
169
10
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:37
Page 170
11
Distance Protection
Introduction
11.1
Principles of distance relays
11.2
Relay performance
11.3
Relationship between relay voltage

and ZS/ZL ratio
11.4
Voltage limit for accurate

reach point measurement
11.5
Zones of protection
11.6
Distance relay characteristics
11.7
Distance relay implementation
11.8
Effect of source impedance

and earthing methods
11.9
Distance relay application problems
11.10
Other distance relay features
11.11
Distance relay application example
11.12
References
11.13
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:37
Page 171
11
Distance P rotection
11.1 INTRODUCTION
The problem of combining fast fault clearance with
selective tripping of plant is a key aim for the protection
of power systems. To meet these requirements, highspeed protection systems for transmission and primary
distribution circuits that are suitable for use with the
automatic reclosure of circuit breakers are under
continuous development and are very widely applied.
Distance protection, in its basic form, is a non-unit
system of protection offering considerable economic and
technical advantages. Unlike phase and neutral
overcurrent protection, the key advantage of distance
protection is that its fault coverage of the protected
circuit is virtually independent of source impedance
variations.
Zs=10
Z1=4
Zs=10
>>
I >>
115kV
IF1=
F1
R1
3
3
+
Relay R1
(a)
=7380A
Zs=10
Z1=4
115kV
>
I >>
F2
115x103
=6640A
3x10
(b)
Therefore, for relay operation for line faults,
Relay current setting <6640A and >7380A
This is impractical, overcurrent relay not suitable
Must use Distance or Unit Protection
IF2=
Figure 11.1: Advantages of distance

over overcurrent protection
This is illustrated in Figure 11.1, where it can be seen that

overcurrent protection cannot be applied satisfactorily.
171
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:37
Page 172
Distance protection is comparatively simple to apply and

it can be fast in operation for faults located along most
of a protected circuit. It can also provide both primary
and remote back-up functions in a single scheme. It can
easily be adapted to create a unit protection scheme
when applied with a signalling channel. In this form it is
eminently suitable for application with high-speed autoreclosing, for the protection of critical transmission lines.
Transformers or saturating CTs, can also adversely delay

relay operation for faults close to the reach point. It is
usual for electromechanical and static distance relays to
claim both maximum and minimum operating times.
However, for modern digital or numerical distance relays,
the variation between these is small over a wide range of
system operating conditions and fault positions.
11.3.1 Electromechanical/Static Distance Relays
ZL
and
ZS
system source impedance behind the relay

location
ZL = line impedance equivalent to relay reach setting
The reach point of a relay is the point along the line

impedance locus that is intersected by the boundary
characteristic of the relay. Since this is dependent on the
ratio of voltage and current and the phase angle
between them, it may be plotted on an R/X diagram. The
loci of power system impedances as seen by the relay
during faults, power swings and load variations may be
plotted on the same diagram and in this manner the
performance of the relay in the presence of system faults
and disturbances may be studied.
11
11.3 RELAY PERFORMANCE
Distance relay performance is defined in terms of reach
accuracy and operating time. Reach accuracy is a
comparison of the actual ohmic reach of the relay under
practical conditions with the relay setting value in ohms.
Reach accuracy particularly depends on the level of
voltage presented to the relay under fault conditions.
The impedance measuring techniques employed in
particular relay designs also have an impact.
Operating times can vary with fault current, with fault
position relative to the relay setting, and with the point
on the voltage wave at which the fault occurs.
Depending on the measuring techniques employed in a
particular relay design, measuring signal transient errors,
such as those produced by Capacitor Voltage
172
Impedance reach
(% Zone 1 setting)
The basic principle of distance protection involves the

division of the voltage at the relaying point by the
measured current.
The apparent impedance so
calculated is compared with the reach point impedance.
If the measured impedance is less than the reach point
impedance, it is assumed that a fault exists on the line
between the relay and the reach point.
S.I .R. = ZS
105
100
95
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
65
% relay rated voltage

(a) Phase-earth faults
Impedance reach
(% Zone 1 setting)
Since the impedance of a transmission line is

proportional to its length, for distance measurement it is
appropriate to use a relay capable of measuring the
impedance of a line up to a predetermined point (the
reach point). Such a relay is described as a distance relay
and is designed to operate only for faults occurring
between the relay location and the selected reach point,
thus giving discrimination for faults that may occur in
different line sections.
With electromechanical and earlier static relay designs,

the magnitude of input quantities particularly influenced
both reach accuracy and operating time. It was
customary to present information on relay performance
by voltage/reach curves, as shown in Figure 11.2, and
operating time/fault position curves for various values of
system impedance ratios (S.I.R.s) as shown in Figure 11.3,
where:
105
Impedance reach
(% Zone 1 setting)
11.2 PRINCIPLES OF DISTANCE RELAYS
105
100
95
0
20
40
80 100
60
(b) Phase-phase faults
20
100
95
40
60
80
100

(c) Three-phase and three-phase-earth faults
Figure 11.2: Typical impedance reach

accuracy characteristics for Zone 1
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:37
Page 173
Digital/Numerical distance relays tend to have more

consistent operating times. They are usually slightly
slower than some of the older relay designs when
operating under the best conditions, but their maximum
operating times are also less under adverse waveform
conditions or for boundary fault conditions.
50
40
30
20
Max
10
Min
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Fault position (% relay setting)
11.4 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN RELAY VOLTAGE

AND ZS/ZL RATIO
Operation time (ms)
(a) With system impedance ratio of 1/1
A single, generic, equivalent circuit, as shown in Figure

11.5(a), may represent any fault condition in a threephase power system. The voltage V applied to the
impedance loop is the open circuit voltage of the power
system. Point R represents the relay location; IR and VR
are the current and voltage measured by the relay,
respectively.
50
40
30
20
Max
10
Min
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Fault position (% relay setting)
(b) With system impedance ratio of 30/1
Figure 11.3: Typical operation time

characteristics for Zone 1 phase-phase faults
Fault position (p.u. relay setting ZL)
Alternatively, the above information was combined in a

family of contour curves, where the fault position
expressed as a percentage of the relay setting is plotted
against the source to line impedance ratio, as illustrated
in Figure 11.4.
VR=IRZL
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.01
where:
Boundary
13ms
9ms
IR =
VR =
0.1
10
1
100
1000
VR =
15ms
0.01
0.1
ZL
V
ZS + Z L
or
Boundaryy
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
V
ZS + Z L
Therefore :
ZL
S/Z
Fault position (p.u. relay setting ZL)
The impedances ZS and ZL are described as source and

line impedances because of their position with respect to
the relay location. Source impedance ZS is a measure of
the fault level at the relaying point. For faults involving
earth it is dependent on the method of system earthing
behind the relaying point. Line impedance ZL is a
measure of the impedance of the protected section. The
voltage VR applied to the relay is, therefore, IRZL. For a
fault at the reach point, this may be alternatively
expressed in terms of source to line impedance ratio
ZS/ZL by means of the following expressions:
Operation time (ms)
11.3.2 Digital/Numerical Distance Relays
(ZS
1
V
ZL ) +1
...Equation 11.1
The above generic relationship between VR and ZS/ZL,

illustrated in Figure 11.5(b), is valid for all types of short
circuits provided a few simple rules are observed. These
are:
1
10
100
1000
i. for phase faults, V is the phase-phase source

voltage and ZS/ZL is the positive sequence source
to line impedance ratio. VR is the phase-phase
relay voltage and IR is the phase-phase relay
current, for the faulted phases
ZL
S/Z
(b) Zone 1 phase-phase fault: maximum operation times
Figure 11.4: Typical operation-time contours
173
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
VR =
15:37
Page 174
11.5 VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR ACCURATE

REACH POINT MEASUREMENT
1
V pp
ZL ) +1
(ZS
Equation 11.2
ii. for earth faults, V is the phase-neutral source

voltage and ZS/ZL is a composite ratio involving
the positive and zero sequence impedances. VR is
the phase-neutral relay voltage and IR is the relay
current for the faulted phase
VR =
(ZS
ZL )
1
V l n
2 + p
+1
2 +q
...Equation 11.3
where
ZS = 2ZS1 + ZS0 = ZS1(2+p)
ZL = 2ZL1 + ZL0 = ZL1(2+q)
and
p=
ZS0
Z S1
q=
Z L0
Z L1
Careful selection of the reach settings and tripping times

for the various zones of measurement enables correct coordination between distance relays on a power system.
Basic distance protection will comprise instantaneous
directional Zone 1 protection and one or more timedelayed zones. Typical reach and time settings for a 3zone distance protection are shown in Figure 11.6. Digital
and numerical distance relays may have up to five zones,
some set to measure in the reverse direction. Typical
settings for three forward-looking zones of basic distance
protection are given in the following sub-sections. To
determine the settings for a particular relay design or for
a particular distance teleprotection scheme, involving
end-to-end signalling, the relay manufacturers
instructions should be referred to.
Line
VS
IR
ZS
VL=VR
ZL
VR
(a) Power system configuration

10
VR (%)
7.5
Voltage VR (% rated voltage)
100
11
90
80
VR (%)
5.0
2.5
0
10
70
11.6.1 Zone 1 Setting
20 30 40 50
ZS
ZL
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.1
Distance relays are designed so that, provided the reach

point voltage criterion is met, any increased measuring
errors for faults closer to the relay will not prevent relay
operation. Most modern relays are provided with healthy
phase voltage polarisation and/or memory voltage
polarisation. The prime purpose of the relay polarising
voltage is to ensure correct relay directional response for
close-up faults, in the forward or reverse direction,
where the fault-loop voltage measured by the relay may
be very small.
11.6 ZONES OF PROTECTION
Source
The ability of a distance relay to measure accurately for

a reach point fault depends on the minimum voltage at
the relay location under this condition being above a
declared value. This voltage, which depends on the relay
design, can also be quoted in terms of an equivalent
maximum ZS/ZL or S.I.R.
0.2 0.3
0.5
2
3 4 5
ZS
System impedance ratio
ZL
(b) Variation of relay voltage with system source

to line impedance ratio
10
Electromechanical/static relays usually have a reach

setting of up to 80% of the protected line impedance for
instantaneous Zone 1 protection. For digital/numerical
distance relays, settings of up to 85% may be safe. The
resulting 15-20% safety margin ensures that there is no
risk of the Zone 1 protection over-reaching the protected
line due to errors in the current and voltage
transformers, inaccuracies in line impedance data
provided for setting purposes and errors of relay setting
and measurement. Otherwise, there would be a loss of
discrimination with fast operating protection on the
following line section. Zone 2 of the distance protection
must cover the remaining 15-20% of the line.
Figure 11.5: Relationship between source

to line ratio and relay voltage
174
20/06/02
15:37
Page 175

To ensure full cover of the line with allowance for the
sources of error already listed in the previous section, the
reach setting of the Zone 2 protection should be at least
120% of the protected line impedance. In many
applications it is common practice to set the Zone 2
reach to be equal to the protected line section +50% of
the shortest adjacent line. Where possible, this ensures
that the resulting maximum effective Zone 2 reach does
not extend beyond the minimum effective Zone 1 reach
of the adjacent line protection. This avoids the need to
grade the Zone 2 time settings between upstream and
downstream relays. In electromechanical and static
relays, Zone 2 protection is provided either by separate
elements or by extending the reach of the Zone 1
elements after a time delay that is initiated by a fault
detector. In most digital and numerical relays, the Zone
2 elements are implemented in software.
Zone 2 tripping must be time-delayed to ensure grading
with the primary relaying applied to adjacent circuits that
fall within the Zone 2 reach. Thus complete coverage of
a line section is obtained, with fast clearance of faults in
the first 80-85% of the line and somewhat slower
clearance of faults in the remaining section of the line.
Z3JR
Time
Source
H J
0
Z1H
H
Time
X
Y
Z3JF
Z2J
Z1J
Z1L
Source
Z1K
Z2K
Z3KF
Z3KR
Zone 1 = 80-85% of protected line impedance

Zone 2 (minimum) = 120% of protected line
Zone 2 (maximum) < Protected line + 50% of shortest second line
Zone 3F = 1.2 (protected line + longest second line)
Zone 3R = 20% of protected line
X = Circuit breaker tripping time
Y = Discriminating time
11.6.4 Settings for Reverse Reach and Other Zones

Modern digital or numerical relays may have additional
impedance zones that can be utilised to provide
additional protection functions. For example, where the
first three zones are set as above, Zone 4 might be used
to provide back-up protection for the local busbar, by
applying a reverse reach setting of the order of 25% of
the Zone 1 reach. Alternatively, one of the forwardlooking zones (typically Zone 3) could be set with a small
reverse offset reach from the origin of the R/X diagram,
in addition to its forward reach setting. An offset
impedance measurement characteristic is nondirectional. One advantage of a non-directional zone of
impedance measurement is that it is able to operate for
a close-up, zero-impedance fault, in situations where
there may be no healthy phase voltage signal or memory
voltage signal available to allow operation of a
directional impedance zone. With the offset-zone time
delay bypassed, there can be provision of Switch-on-toFault (SOTF) protection. This is required where there are
line voltage transformers, to provide fast tripping in the
event of accidental line energisation with maintenance
earthing clamps left in position. Additional impedance
zones may be deployed as part of a distance protection
scheme used in conjunction with a teleprotection
signalling channel.
11.7 DISTANCE RELAY CHARACTERISTICS
Figure 11.6: Typical time/distance characteristics

for three zone distance protection

Remote back-up protection for all faults on adjacent
lines can be provided by a third zone of protection that
is time delayed to discriminate with Zone 2 protection
plus circuit breaker trip time for the adjacent line. Zone
3 reach should be set to at least 1.2 times the impedance
presented to the relay for a fault at the remote end of
the second line section.
On interconnected power systems, the effect of fault
current infeed at the remote busbars will cause the
impedance presented to the relay to be much greater
than the actual impedance to the fault and this needs to
be taken into account when setting Zone 3. In some

systems, variations in the remote busbar infeed can
prevent the application of remote back-up Zone 3
protection but on radial distribution systems with single
end infeed, no difficulties should arise.
Chapt11-170-191
Some numerical relays measure the absolute fault

impedance and then determine whether operation is
required according to impedance boundaries defined on
the R/X diagram. Traditional distance relays and
numerical relays that emulate the impedance elements
of traditional relays do not measure absolute impedance.
They compare the measured fault voltage with a replica
voltage derived from the fault current and the zone
impedance setting to determine whether the fault is
within zone or out-of-zone. Distance relay impedance
comparators or algorithms which emulate traditional
comparators are classified according to their polar
characteristics, the number of signal inputs they have,
and the method by which signal comparisons are made.
The common types compare either the relative amplitude
or phase of two input quantities to obtain operating
characteristics that are either straight lines or circles
when plotted on an R/X diagram. At each stage of
distance relay design evolution, the development of
175
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:37
Page 176
impedance operating characteristic shapes and

sophistication has been governed by the technology
available and the acceptable cost. Since many
traditional relays are still in service and since some
numerical relays emulate the techniques of the
traditional relays, a brief review of impedance
comparators is justified.
Line AC
Line AB
B
Z
Z<
X
B
L
11.7.1 Amplitude and Phase Comparison
11
Line AB
Operates
Relay measuring elements whose functionality is based

on the comparison of two independent quantities are
essentially either amplitude or phase comparators. For
the impedance elements of a distance relay, the
quantities being compared are the voltage and current
measured by the relay. There are numerous techniques
available for performing the comparison, depending on
the technology used. They vary from balanced-beam
(amplitude comparison) and induction cup (phase
comparison) electromagnetic relays, through diode and
operational amplifier comparators in static-type distance
relays, to digital sequence comparators in digital relays
and to algorithms used in numerical relays.
Restrains
AC
M
C
Impedance
p
relay
Figure 11.7: Plain impedance relay
characteristic
X
Impedance
element RZ<
Any type of impedance characteristic obtainable with

one comparator is also obtainable with the other. The
addition and subtraction of the signals for one type of
comparator produces the required signals to obtain a
similar characteristic using the other type. For example,
comparing V and I in an amplitude comparator results in
a circular impedance characteristic centred at the origin
of the R/X diagram. If the sum and difference of V and
I are applied to the phase comparator the result is a
similar characteristic.
Restrains
Directional
element RD
(a) Characteristic of combined directional/impedance relay
A
IF1
IF2
Source
Source
Z<
11.7.2 Plain Impedance Characteristic
This characteristic takes no account of the phase angle

between the current and the voltage applied to it; for this
reason its impedance characteristic when plotted on an
R/X diagram is a circle with its centre at the origin of the
co-ordinates and of radius equal to its setting in ohms.
Operation occurs for all impedance values less than the
setting, that is, for all points within the circle. The relay
characteristic, shown in Figure 11.7, is therefore nondirectional, and in this form would operate for all faults
along the vector AL and also for all faults behind the
busbars up to an impedance AM. It is to be noted that A
is the relaying point and RAB is the angle by which the
fault current lags the relay voltage for a fault on the line
AB and RAC is the equivalent leading angle for a fault on
line AC. Vector AB represents the impedance in front of
the relay between the relaying point A and the end of line
AB. Vector AC represents the impedance of line AC
behind the relaying point. AL represents the reach of
instantaneous Zone 1 protection, set to cover 80% to
85% of the protected line.
F
(b) Illustration of use of directional/impedance relay: circuit diagram
RAZ<
RAD
RAD
&
&
Trip relay
AZ<
RAD: directional element at A

(c) Logic for directional and impedance elements at A
Figure 11.8: Combined directional
and impedance relays
A relay using this characteristic has three important

disadvantages:
176
i. it is non-directional; it will see faults both in front

of and behind the relaying point, and therefore
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:37
Page 177
requires a directional element to give it correct

discrimination
IX
ii. it has non-uniform fault resistance coverage

iii. it is susceptible to power swings and heavy
loading of a long line, because of the large area
covered by the impedance circle
V-IZn
IZn
Restrain
Directional control is an essential discrimination quality

for a distance relay, to make the relay non-responsive to
faults outside the protected line. This can be obtained by
the addition of a separate directional control element.
The impedance characteristic of a directional control
element is a straight line on the R/X diagram, so the
combined characteristic of the directional and
impedance relays is the semi-circle APLQ shown in
Figure 11.8.
Opperate
IR
(a) Phase comparator inputs

IX
If a fault occurs at F close to C on the parallel line CD,

the directional unit RD at A will restrain due to current
IF1. At the same time, the impedance unit is prevented
from operating by the inhibiting output of unit RD. If
this control is not provided, the under impedance
element could operate prior to circuit breaker C opening.
Reversal of current through the relay from IF1 to IF2
when C opens could then result in incorrect tripping of
the healthy line if the directional unit RD operates before
the impedance unit resets. This is an example of the
need to consider the proper co-ordination of multiple
relay elements to attain reliable relay performance
during evolving fault conditions. In older relay designs,
the type of problem to be addressed was commonly
referred to as one of contact race.
Restrain
Zn
ZF
Operate
IR
Restrain
K
(b) Mho impedance characteristic

IX
B
P
11.7.3 Self-Polarised Mho Relay

The mho impedance element is generally known as such
because its characteristic is a straight line on an
admittance diagram.
It cleverly combines the
discriminating qualities of both reach control and
directional control, thereby eliminating the contact race
problems that may be encountered with separate reach
and directional control elements. This is achieved by the
addition of a polarising signal. Mho impedance elements
were particularly attractive for economic reasons where
electromechanical relay elements were employed. As a
result, they have been widely deployed worldwide for
many years and their advantages and limitations are now
well understood. For this reason they are still emulated
in the algorithms of some modern numerical relays.
The characteristic of a mho impedance element, when
plotted on an R/X diagram, is a circle whose circumference
passes through the origin, as illustrated in Figure 11.9(b).
This demonstrates that the impedance element is
inherently directional and such that it will operate only for
faults in the forward direction along line AB.
q
j
A
IR
AP Relay impedance setting

j
AB Protected line
Arc resistance
q Line angle
(c) Increased arc resistance coverage
Figure 11.9: Mho relay characteristic
The impedance characteristic is adjusted by setting Zn,

the impedance reach, along the diameter and , the
angle of displacement of the diameter from the R axis.
Angle is known as the Relay Characteristic Angle
(RCA). The relay operates for values of fault impedance
ZF within its characteristic.
177
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:40
Page 178
It will be noted that the impedance reach varies with

fault angle. As the line to be protected is made up of
resistance and inductance, its fault angle will be
dependent upon the relative values of R and X at the
system operating frequency. Under an arcing fault
condition, or an earth fault involving additional
resistance, such as tower footing resistance or fault
through vegetation, the value of the resistive component
of fault impedance will increase to change the
impedance angle. Thus a relay having a characteristic
angle equivalent to the line angle will under-reach under
resistive fault conditions.
It is usual, therefore, to set the RCA less than the line
angle, so that it is possible to accept a small amount of
fault resistance without causing under-reach. However,
when setting the relay, the difference between the line
angle and the relay characteristic angle must be
known. The resulting characteristic is shown in Figure
11.9(c) where AB corresponds to the length of the line to
be protected. With set less than , the actual amount
of line protected, AB, would be equal to the relay setting
value AQ multiplied by cosine (-). Therefore the
required relay setting AQ is given by:
AQ =
AB
cos ( )
with regard to the relay settings other than the effect

that reduced fault current may have on the value of arc
resistance seen. The earthing resistance is in the source
behind the relay and only modifies the source angle and
source to line impedance ratio for earth faults. It would
therefore be taken into account only when assessing
relay performance in terms of system impedance ratio.
11.7.4 Offset Mho/Lenticular Characteristics

Under close up fault conditions, when the relay voltage
falls to zero or near-zero, a relay using a self-polarised
mho characteristic or any other form of self-polarised
directional impedance characteristic may fail to operate
when it is required to do so. Methods of covering this
condition include the use of non-directional impedance
characteristics, such as offset mho, offset lenticular, or
cross-polarised and memory polarised directional
impedance characteristics.
If current bias is employed, the mho characteristic is
shifted to embrace the origin, so that the measuring
element can operate for close-up faults in both the
forward and the reverse directions. The offset mho relay
has two main applications:
Due to the physical nature of an arc, there is a non-linear

relationship between arc voltage and arc current, which
results in a non-linear resistance. Using the empirical
formula derived by A.R. van C. Warrington, [11.1] the
approximate value of arc resistance can be assessed as:
Ra =
28710
I 1.4
Zone
3
L
Zone
2
...Equation 11.4
where:
Zone
1
Ra = arc resistance (ohms)
11
Busbar zone
L = length of arc (metres)

I = arc current (A)
(a) Busbar zone back-up using an offset mho relay
On long overhead lines carried on steel towers with

overhead earth wires the effect of arc resistance can
usually be neglected. The effect is most significant on
short overhead lines and with fault currents below
2000A (i.e. minimum plant condition), or if the protected
line is of wood-pole construction without earth wires. In
the latter case, the earth fault resistance reduces the
effective earth-fault reach of a mho Zone 1 element to
such an extent that the majority of faults are detected in
Zone 2 time. This problem can usually be overcome by
using a relay with a cross-polarised mho or a polygonal
characteristic.
Where a power system is resistance-earthed, it should be
appreciated that this does not need to be considered
178
X
J
H
Zone
3
Zone
2
Carrier stop
Zone
1
G
Carrier start
K
(b) Carrier starting in distance blocking schemes
Figure 11.10: Typical applications

for the offset mho relay
20/06/02
15:40
Page 179
11.7.4.1 Third zone and busbar back-up zone
To avoid this, a shaped type of characteristic may be

used, where the resistive coverage is restricted. With a
lenticular characteristic,
the aspect ratio of the lens a is adjustable, enabling
b
it to be set to provide the maximum fault resistance
coverage consistent with non-operation under maximum
load transfer conditions.
In this application it is used in conjunction with mho

measuring units as a fault detector and/or Zone 3
measuring unit. So, with the reverse reach arranged to
extend into the busbar zone, as shown in Figure 11.10(a),
it will provide back-up protection for busbar faults. This
facility can also be provided with quadrilateral
characteristics. A further benefit of the Zone 3
application is for Switch-on-to-Fault (SOTF) protection,
where the Zone 3 time delay would be bypassed for a
short period immediately following line energisation to
allow rapid clearance of a fault anywhere along the
protected line.
Reduction of load impedance from ZD3 to ZD1 will

correspond to an equivalent increase in load current.
11.7.4.2 Carrier starting unit in distance schemes

with carrier blocking
11.7.5 Fully Cross-Polarised Mho Characteristic
If the offset mho unit is used for starting carrier

signalling, it is arranged as shown in Figure 11.10(b).
Carrier is transmitted if the fault is external to the
protected line but inside the reach of the offset mho
relay, in order to prevent accelerated tripping of the
second or third zone relay at the remote station.
Transmission is prevented for internal faults by operation
of the local mho measuring units, which allows highspeed fault clearance by the local and remote end circuit
breakers.
11.7.4.3 Application of lenticular characteristic
There is a danger that the offset mho relay shown in
Figure 11.10(a) may operate under maximum load
transfer conditions if Zone 3 of the relay has a large
reach setting. A large Zone 3 reach may be required to
provide remote back-up protection for faults on the
adjacent feeder.
X
Offset Lenticular
characteristic
b
Offset Mho
characteristic
a
Z D1
Z D2
Z D3
Load
area
Impedance
characteristic
Figure 11.11: Minimum load impedance

permitted with lenticular, offset mho
and impedance relays
Figure 11.11 shows how the lenticular characteristic can

tolerate much higher degrees of line loading than offset
mho and plain impedance characteristics.
The previous section showed how the non-directional

offset mho characteristic is inherently able to operate for
close-up zero voltage faults, where there would be no
polarising voltage to allow operation of a plain mho
directional element. One way of ensuring correct mho
element response for zero-voltage faults is to add a
percentage of voltage from the healthy phase(s) to the
main polarising voltage as a substitute phase reference.
This technique is called cross-polarising, and it has the
advantage of preserving and indeed enhancing the
directional properties of the mho characteristic. By the
use of a phase voltage memory system, that provides
several cycles of pre-fault voltage reference during a
fault, the cross-polarisation technique is also effective
for close-up three-phase faults. For this type of fault, no
healthy phase voltage reference is available.
Early memory systems were based on tuned, resonant,
analogue circuits, but problems occurred when applied
to networks where the power system operating
frequency could vary. More modern digital or numerical
systems can offer a synchronous phase reference for
variations in power system frequency before or even
during a fault.
As described in Section 11.7.3, a disadvantage of the
self-polarised, plain mho impedance characteristic, when
applied to overhead line circuits with high impedance
angles, is that it has limited coverage of arc or fault
resistance. The problem is aggravated in the case of
short lines, since the required Zone 1 ohmic setting is
low. The amount of the resistive coverage offered by the
mho circle is directly related to the forward reach
setting. Hence, the resulting resistive coverage may be
too small in relation to the expected values of fault
resistance.
One additional benefit of applying cross-polarisation to
a mho impedance element is that its resistive coverage
will be enhanced. This effect is illustrated in Figure
11.12, for the case where a mho element has 100%
179
Chapt11-170-191
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:40
Page 180
cross-polarisation. With cross-polarisation from the

healthy phase(s) or from a memory system, the mho
resistive expansion will occur during a balanced threephase fault as well as for unbalanced faults. The
expansion will not occur under load conditions, when
there is no phase shift between the measured voltage
and the polarising voltage. The degree of resistive reach
enhancement depends on the ratio of source impedance
to relay reach (impedance) setting as can be deduced by
reference to Figure 11.13.
X
ZS
=25
ZL
ZS
0
ZL
R
Figure 11.12: Fully cross-polarised mho relay

characteristic with variations of ZS/ZL ratio
Source
11
ZS
Relay location
N1
E1
Va1
ZS1
Fully cross-polarised characteristics have now largely

been superseded, due to the tendency of comparators
connected to healthy phases to operate under heavy
fault conditions on another phase. This is of no
consequence in a switched distance relay, where a single
comparator is connected to the correct fault loop
impedance by starting units before measurement begins.
However, modern relays offer independent impedance
measurement for each of the three earth-fault and three
phase-fault loops. For these types of relay, maloperation
of healthy phases is undesirable, especially when singlepole tripping is required for single-phase faults.
11.7.6 Partially Cross-Polarised Mho Characteristic

Where a reliable, independent method of faulted phase
selection is not provided, a modern non-switched
distance relay may only employ a relatively small
percentage of cross polarisation.
IF
ZL1
Shield-shaped
characteristic with
16% square-wave
cr
cross-polarisation
F1
Ia1
N2
Positive current direction

for relay
ZL
It must be emphasised that the apparent extension of a

fully cross-polarised impedance characteristic into the
negative reactance quadrants of Figure 11.13 does not
imply that there would be operation for reverse faults.
With cross-polarisation, the relay characteristic expands
to encompass the origin of the impedance diagram for
forward faults only. For reverse faults, the effect is to
exclude the origin of the impedance diagram, thereby
ensuring proper directional responses for close-up
forward or reverse faults.
ZS2
Ia2
ZL2
Self-polarised Mho circle

X
F2
Fully cross-polarised
Mho ccircle
Zn
-R
Va2
Mho unit
characteristic
(not cross-polarized)
R
Extra resistive
coverage of shield
Conventional 16%
partially cross-polarised
Mho circle
-X
X
S'2=Z
ZL1+Zn1
Zn1
ZL1
(a) Comparison of polarised characteristics drawn for S.I.R. = 6

R
Zn2
30
Mho unit characteristic

(fully cross-polarized)
ZS1
1 6
12
24
60
R
S'1=Z
ZL1+Zn2
-X
(b) Resistive expansion of shaped partially cross-polarised

Mho with increasing values of S.I.R.
Figure 11.13: Illustration of improvement

in relay resistive coverage for fully crosspolarised characteristic
Figure 11.14: Partially cross-polarised

characteristic with 'shield' shape
180
20/06/02
15:40
Page 181
The level selected must be sufficient to provide reliable

directional control in the presence of CVT transients for
close-up faults, and also attain reliable faulted phase
selection. By employing only partial cross-polarisation,
the disadvantages of the fully cross-polarised
characteristic are avoided, while still retaining the
advantages. Figure 11.14 shows a typical characteristic
that can be obtained using this technique.
11.7.7 Quadrilateral Characteristic

This form of polygonal impedance characteristic is shown
in Figure 11.15. The characteristic is provided with
forward reach and resistive reach settings that are
independently adjustable. It therefore provides better
resistive coverage than any mho-type characteristic for
short lines. This is especially true for earth fault
impedance measurement, where the arc resistances and
fault resistance to earth contribute to the highest values
of fault resistance. To avoid excessive errors in the zone
reach accuracy, it is common to impose a maximum
resistive reach in terms of the zone impedance reach.
Recommendations in this respect can usually be found in
the appropriate relay manuals.
Zone 3
C
Zone 2
Zones
Zone 1
1&2
R
11.7.8 Protection against Power Swings

Use of the Ohm Characteristic
During severe power swing conditions from which a
system is unlikely to recover, stability might only be
regained if the swinging sources are separated. Where
such scenarios are identified, power swing, or out-ofstep, tripping protection can be deployed, to strategically
split a power system at a preferred location. Ideally, the
split should be made so that the plant capacity and
connected loads on either side of the split are matched.
This type of disturbance cannot normally be correctly
identified by an ordinary distance protection. As
previously mentioned, it is often necessary to prevent
distance protection schemes from operating during
stable or unstable power swings, in order to avoid
cascade tripping. To initiate system separation for a
prospective unstable power swing, an out-of-step
tripping scheme employing ohm impedance measuring
elements can be deployed.
Ohm impedance characteristics are applied along the
forward and reverse resistance axes of the R/X diagram
and their operating boundaries are set to be parallel to the
protected line impedance vector, as shown in Figure 11.16.
The ohm impedance elements divide the R/X impedance
diagram into three zones, A, B and C. As the impedance
changes during a power swing, the point representing the
impedance moves along the swing locus, entering the three
zones in turn and causing the ohm units to operate in
sequence. When the impedance enters the third zone the
trip sequence is completed and the circuit breaker trip coil
can be energised at a favourable angle between system
sources for arc interruption with little risk of restriking.
implementing this characteristic using discrete

component electromechanical or early static relay
technology do not arise.
Zone 3
RZ1
RZ2
RZ3
Figure 11.15: Quadrilateral characteristic
Locus of
X
Quadrilateral elements with plain reactance reach lines

can introduce reach error problems for resistive earth
faults where the angle of total fault current differs from
the angle of the current measured by the relay. This will
be the case where the local and remote source voltage
vectors are phase shifted with respect to each other due
to pre-fault power flow. This can be overcome by
selecting an alternative to use of a phase current for
polarisation of the reactance reach line. Polygonal
impedance characteristics are highly flexible in terms of
fault impedance coverage for both phase and earth
faults. For this reason, most digital and numerical
distance relays now offer this form of characteristic. A
further factor is that the additional cost implications of
181
Chapt11-170-191
H
Line impedance
Zone C
Zone B
Zone A
Out-of-step tripping relay

characteristic
Figure 11.16: Application of out-of-step

tripping relay characteristic
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:40
Page 182
Only an unstable power swing condition can cause the

impedance vector to move successively through the
three zones.
Therefore, other types of system
disturbance, such as power system fault conditions, will
not result in relay element operation.
11.7.9 Other Characteristics
The execution time for the algorithm for traditional

distance protection using quadrilateral or similar
characteristics may result in a relatively long operation
time, possibly up to 40ms in some relay designs. To
overcome this, some numerical distance relays also use
alternative algorithms that can be executed significantly
faster. These algorithms are based generally on detecting
changes in current and voltage that are in excess of what
is expected, often known as the Delta algorithm.
11
The distance measurement elements may produce

impedance characteristics selected from those described
in Section 11.7. Various distance relay formats exist,
depending on the operating speed required and cost
considerations related to the relaying hardware, software
or numerical relay processing capacity required. The
most common formats are:
a. a single measuring element for each phase is
provided, that covers all phase faults
b. a more economical arrangement is for starter
elements to detect which phase or phases have
suffered a fault. The starter elements switch a
single measuring element or algorithm to measure
the most appropriate fault impedance loop. This is
commonly referred to as a switched distance relay
This algorithm detects a fault by comparing the

measured values of current and voltage with the values
sampled previously. If the change between these
samples exceeds a predefined amount (the delta), it is
assumed a fault has occurred. In parallel, the distance to
fault is also computed. Provided the computed distance
to fault lies within the Zone reach of the relay, a trip
command is issued. This algorithm can be executed
significantly faster than the conventional distance
algorithm, resulting in faster overall tripping times.
Faulted phase selection can be carried out by comparing
the signs of the changes in voltage and current.
c. a single set of impedance measuring elements for

each impedance loop may have their reach settings
progressively increased from one zone reach
setting to another. The increase occurs after zone
time delays that are initiated by operation of
starter elements. This type of relay is commonly
referred to as a reach-stepped distance relay
d. each zone may be provided with independent sets
of impedance measuring elements for each
impedance loop. This is known as a full distance
scheme, capable of offering the highest
performance in terms of speed and application
flexibility
Relays that use the Delta algorithm generally run both

this and conventional distance protection algorithms in
parallel, as some types of fault (e.g. high-resistance
faults) may not fall within the fault detection criteria of
the Delta algorithm.
11.8 DISTANCE RELAY IMPLEMENTATION
It is impossible to eliminate all of the above factors for

all possible operating conditions. However, considerable
success can be achieved with a suitable distance relay.
This may comprise relay elements or algorithms for
starting, distance measuring and for scheme logic.
Discriminating zones of protection can be achieved using

distance relays, provided that fault distance is a simple
function of impedance. While this is true in principle for
transmission circuits, the impedances actually measured
by a distance relay also depend on the following factors:
1. the magnitudes of current and voltage (the relay
may not see all the current that produces the fault
voltage)
2. the fault impedance loop being measured
3. the type of fault
4. the fault resistance
5. the symmetry of line impedance
6. the circuit configuration (single, double or multiterminal circuit)
Furthermore, protection against earth faults may require

different characteristics and/or settings to those required
for phase faults, resulting in additional units being
required. A total of 18 impedance-measuring elements
or algorithms would be required in a full distance relay
for three-zone protection for all types of fault.
With electromechanical technology, each of the
measuring elements would have been a separate relay
housed in its own case, so that the distance relay
comprised a panel-mounted assembly of the required
relays with suitable inter-unit wiring. Figure 11.17(a)
shows an example of such a relay scheme.
Digital/numerical distance relays (Figure 11.17(b)) are likely
to have all of the above functions implemented in
software. Starter units may not be necessary. The
complete distance relay is housed in a single unit, making
for significant economies in space, wiring and increased
dependability, through the increased availability that stems
from the provision of continuous self-supervision. When
182
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:41
Page 183
the additional features detailed in Section 11.11 are taken

into consideration, such equipment offers substantial user
benefits.
economy for other applications, only one measuring

element was provided, together with starter units that
detected which phases were faulted, in order to switch the
appropriate signals to the single measuring function. A
distance relay using this technique is known as a switched
distance relay. A number of different types of starters have
been used, the most common being based on overcurrent,
undervoltage or under-impedance measurement.
Numerical distance relays permit direct detection of the
phases involved in a fault. This is called faulted phase
selection, often abbreviated to phase selection. Several
techniques are available for faulted phase selection,
which then permits the appropriate distance-measuring
zone to trip. Without phase selection, the relay risks
having over or underreach problems, or tripping threephase when single-pole fault clearance is required.
Several techniques are available for faulted phase
selection, such as:
a. superimposed current comparisons, comparing the
step change of level between pre-fault load, and
fault current (the Delta algorithm). This enables
very fast detection of the faulted phases, within
only a few samples of the analogue current inputs
b. change in voltage magnitude
Numerical phase selection is much faster than

traditional starter techniques used in electromechanical
or static distance relays. It does not impose a time
penalty as the phase selection and measuring zone
algorithms run in parallel. It is possible to build a fullscheme relay with these numerical techniques. The
phase selection algorithm provides faulted phase
selection, together with a segregated measuring
algorithm for each phase-ground and phase to phase
fault loop (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, CA), thus ensuring fullscheme operation.
Figure 11.17 (a): Electromechanical distance relay
However, there may be occasions where a numerical

relay that mimics earlier switched distance protection
techniques is desired. The reasons may be economic (less
software required thus cheaper than a relay that
contains a full-scheme implementation) and/or
technical.
Figure 11.17 (b): MiCOM P440 series numerical distance relay
11.8.1 Starters for switched distance protection

Electromechanical and static distance relays do not
normally use an individual impedance-measuring element
per phase. The cost and the resulting physical scheme size
made this arrangement impractical, except for the most
demanding EHV transmission applications. To achieve
c. change in current magnitude
Some applications may require the numerical relay

characteristics to match those of earlier generations
already installed on a network, to aid selectivity. Such
relays are available, often with refinements such as
multi-sided polygonal impedance characteristics that
assist in avoiding tripping due to heavy load conditions.
With electromechanical or static switched distance
relays, a selection of available starters often had to be
made. The choice of starter was dependent on power
system parameters such as maximum load transfer in
183
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:41
Page 184
relation to maximum reach required and power system

earthing arrangements.
Where overcurrent starters are used, care must be taken
to ensure that, with minimum generating plant in
service, the setting of the overcurrent starters is sensitive
enough to detect faults beyond the third zone.
Furthermore, these starters require a high drop-off to
pick-up ratio, to ensure that they will drop off under
maximum load conditions after a second or third zone
fault has been cleared by the first zone relay in the faulty
section. Without this feature, indiscriminate tripping
may result for subsequent faults in the second or third
zone. For satisfactory operation of the overcurrent
starters in a switched distance scheme, the following
conditions must be fulfilled:
double phase faults are dependent on the source

impedance as well as the line impedance. The
relationships are given in Figure 11.19.
Applying the difference of the phase voltages to the relay
eliminates the dependence on ZS1. For example:
a. the current setting of the overcurrent starters must

be not less than 1.2 times the maximum full load
current of the protected line
b. the power system minimum fault current for a

fault at the Zone 3 reach of the distance relay must
not be less than 1.5 times the setting of the
overcurrent starters
11
On multiple-earthed systems where the neutrals of all

the power transformers are solidly earthed, or in power
systems where the fault current is less than the full load
current of the protected line, it is not possible to use
overcurrent starters. In these circumstances underimpedance starters are typically used.
The type of under-impedance starter used is mainly
dependent on the maximum expected load current and
equivalent minimum load impedance in relation to the
required relay setting to cover faults in Zone 3. This is
illustrated in Figure 11.11 where ZD1, ZD2, and ZD3 are
respectively the minimum load impedances permitted
when lenticular, offset mho and impedance relays are used.
11.9 EFFECT OF SOURCE IMPEDANCE

AND EARTHING METHODS
For correct operation, distance relays must be capable of
measuring the distance to the fault accurately. To ensure
this, it is necessary to provide the correct measured
quantities to the measurement elements. It is not always
the case that use of the voltage and current for a
particular phase will give the correct result, or that
additional compensation is required.
11.9.1 Phase Fault Impedance Measurement

Figure 11.18 shows the current and voltage relations for
the different types of fault. If ZS1 and ZL1 are the source
and line positive sequence impedances, viewed from the
relaying point, the currents and voltages at this point for
184
( for 3 - phase faults )
V ' bc = a 2 a Z L1 I '1
V ' bc = 2 a 2 a Z L1 I '1
( for double - phase faults )
A
Va
B
Vb
C
Ic
Ib
Ia
Vc
Va=0
Ic=0
Ib=0
(a) Single-phase to earth (A-E)
F
A
Va
B
Ic
Ib
Vb
C
Ia
Vc
Va=Vb=Vc=0
Ia+Ib+Ic=0
(b) Three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)
F
A
Va
Ic
Ib
C
Ia
Vb
Vc
Vc=0
Vb=0
Ia=0
(c) Double phase to earth (B-C-E)
F
A
Va
B
Vb
C
Ic
Ib
Ia
Vc
Ia=0
Vb=Vc
Ib=-Ic
(d) Double-phase (B-C)
Figure 11.18: Current and voltage
relationships for some shunt faults
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:41
Page 185
Fault
quantity
Three-phase
(A-B-C)
Double-phase
(B-C)
I'a
I'1
I'b
a2I'1
(a2-a)I'1
I'c
aI'1
(a-a2)I'1
V'a
ZL1I'1
2(ZS1+ZL1)I'1
V'b
a2ZL1I'1
(2a2ZL1-ZS1)I'1
V'c
aZL1I'1
(2aZL1-ZS1)I'1
where Ia, Ib, Ic are the phase currents at the relaying

point. From the above expressions, the voltage at the
relaying point can be expressed in terms of:
1. the phase currents at the relaying point,
2. the ratio of the transmission line zero sequence to
positive sequence impedance, K, (=ZL0/ZL1),
3. the transmission line positive sequence impedance
ZL1:
K 1
V ' a = Z L1 I ' a + ( I ' a + I ' b + I ' c )

3 Equation 11.5
Note: I'1 = 1 (I'a+aI'b+a2I'c)

3
I' and V' are at relay location
Figure 11.19: Phase currents and voltages

at relaying point for 3-phase and
double-phase faults
Distance measuring elements are usually calibrated in

terms of the positive sequence impedance. Correct
measurement for both phase-phase and three-phase
faults is achieved by supplying each phase-phase
measuring element with its corresponding phase-phase
voltage and difference of phase currents. Thus, for the
B-C element, the current measured will be:
I ' b I ' c = a a I '1
Supply
A
(K-1)
Z
where K= L0
Z= 1+
Z
3 L1
ZL1
(a) System earthed at one point only behind the relaying point
Relaying
point
( 3 - phase faults )
Supply
F 2
Relaying
point
F 1
I ' b I ' c = 2 a a I '1
( double - phase faults )
Z= ZL1
(b) System earthed at one point only in front of the relaying point
and the relay will measure ZL1 in each case.

11.9.2 Earth Fault Impedance Measurement
When a phase-earth fault occurs, the phase-earth
voltage at the fault location is zero. It would appear that
the voltage drop to the fault is simply the product of the
phase current and line impedance. However, the current
in the fault loop depends on the number of earthing
points, the method of earthing and sequence impedances
of the fault loop. Unless these factors are taken into
account, the impedance measurement will be incorrect.
I ' a = I '1 + I ' 2 + I ' 0

and the residual current IN at the relaying point is given
by:
I' n = I' a + I' b + I' c = 3 I'0
F 2
Supply
A
Z=KZL1
(c) As for (b) but with relaying point at receiving end
The voltage drop to the fault is the sum of the sequence

voltage drops between the relaying point and the fault.
The voltage drop to the fault and current in the fault
loop are:
V ' a = I '1 Z L1 + I ' 2 Z L1 + I ' 0 Z L 0
Relaying
point
1
Figure 11.20: Effect of infeed and earthing

arrangements on earth fault distance
measurement
The voltage appearing at the relaying point, as previously

mentioned, varies with the number of infeeds, the
method of system earthing and the position of the relay
relative to the infeed and earthing points in the system.
Figure 11.20 illustrates the three possible arrangements
that can occur in practice with a single infeed. In Figure
11.20(a), the healthy phase currents are zero, so that the
185
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:43
Page 186
3 I1 ( Z1 + Z N
phase currents Ia, Ib and Ic have a 1-0-0 pattern. The

impedance seen by a relay comparing Ia and Va is:
( K 1 ) Z
Z = 1 +
L1
3
) = I1 ( 2 Z1
ZN =
=
Equation 11.6
In Figure 11.20(b), the currents entering the fault from

the relay branch have a 2-1-1 distribution, so:
Z=ZL1
In Figure 11.20(c), the phase currents have a 1-1-1
distribution, and hence:
+ ZN
Z 0 Z1
3
( Z0
Z1 )
3 Z1
Z1
Equation 11.7
Z 0 Z1
, earth
3
fault measuring elements will measure the fault
impedance correctly, irrespective of the number of
infeeds and earthing points on the system.
With the replica impedance set to
Z=KZL1
If there were infeeds at both ends of the line, the

impedance measured would be a superposition of any
two of the above examples, with the relative magnitudes
of the infeeds taken into account.
11
This analysis shows that the relay can only measure an

impedance which is independent of infeed and earthing
( K 1)
arrangements if a proportion K N =
of the
3
residual current In=Ia+Ib+Ic is added to the phase
current Ia. This technique is known as residual
compensation.
Most distance relays compensate for the earth fault
conditions by using an additional replica impedance ZN
within the measuring circuits. Whereas the phase replica
impedance Z1 is fed with the phase current at the
relaying point, ZN is fed with the full residual current.
The value of ZN is adjusted so that for a fault at the
reach point, the sum of the voltages developed across Z1
and ZN equals the measured phase to neutral voltage in
the faulted phase.
The required setting for ZN can be determined by
considering an earth fault at the reach point of the relay.
This is illustrated with reference to the A-N fault with
single earthing point behind the relay as in Figure
11.20(a).
Voltage supplied from the VTs:
= I1(Z1+Z2+Z0) = I1(2Z1+Z0)
Voltage across the replica impedances:
= IaZ1+INZN
= Ia(Z1+ZN)
= 3I1(Z1+ZN)
Hence, the required setting of ZN for balance at the
reach point is given by equating the above two
expressions:
11.10 DISTANCE RELAY APPLICATION PROBLEMS

Distance relays may suffer from a number of difficulties
in their application. Many of them have been overcome
in the latest numerical relays. Nevertheless, an
awareness of the problems is useful where a protection
engineer has to deal with older relays that are already
installed and not due for replacement.
11.10.1 Minimum Voltage at Relay Terminals

To attain their claimed accuracy, distance relays that do
not employ voltage memory techniques require a
minimum voltage at the relay terminals under fault
conditions. This voltage should be declared in the data
sheet for the relay. With knowledge of the sequence
impedances involved in the fault, or alternatively the
fault MVA, the system voltage and the earthing
arrangements, it is possible to calculate the minimum
voltage at the relay terminals for a fault at the reach
point of the relay. It is then only necessary to check that
the minimum voltage for accurate reach measurement
can be attained for a given application. Care should be
taken that both phase and earth faults are considered.
11.10.2 Minimum Length of Line

To determine the minimum length of line that can be
protected by a distance relay, it is necessary to check first
that any minimum voltage requirement of the relay for a
fault at the Zone 1 reach is within the declared
sensitivity for the relay. Secondly, the ohmic impedance
of the line (referred if necessary to VT/CT secondary side
quantities) must fall within the ohmic setting range for
Zone 1 reach of the relay. For very short lines and
especially for cable circuits, it may be found that the
circuit impedance is less than the minimum setting
range of the relay. In such cases, an alternative method
of protection will be required.
A suitable alternative might be current differential
186
20/06/02
15:43
Page 187
protection, as the line length will probably be short

enough for the cost-effective provision of a high
bandwidth communication link between the relays fitted
at the ends of the protected circuit. However, the latest
numerical distance relays have a very wide range of
impedance setting ranges and good sensitivity with low
levels of relaying voltage, so such problems are now
rarely encountered. Application checks are still essential,
though. When considering earth faults, particular care
must be taken to ensure that the appropriate earth fault
loop impedance is used in the calculation.
11.10.3 Under-Reach - Effect of Remote Infeed

A distance relay is said to under-reach when the
impedance presented to it is apparently greater than the
impedance to the fault.
Percentage under-reach is defined as:
ZR ZF
100%
ZR
where:
ZR = intended relay reach (relay reach
setting)
ZF = effective reach
The main cause of underreaching is the effect of fault
current infeed at remote busbars. This is best illustrated
by an example.
ZA +
So, for relay balance:
Z A + ZC = Z A +
ZC
IA
IA
ZA +
ZC
IA + IB
x ZC
...Equation 11.8
It is clear from Equation 11.8 that the relay will

underreach. It is relatively easy to compensate for this
by increasing the reach setting of the relay, but care has
to be taken. Should there be a possibility of the remote
infeed being reduced or zero, the relay will then reach
further than intended. For example, setting Zone 2 to
reach a specific distance into an adjacent line section
under parallel circuit conditions may mean that Zone 2
reaches beyond the Zone 1 reach of the adjacent line
protection under single circuit operation. If IB=9IA and
the relay reach is set to see faults at F, then in the
absence of the remote infeed, the relay effective setting
becomes ZA+10ZC.
Care should also be taken that large forward reach
settings will not result in operation of healthy phase
relays for reverse earth faults, see Section 11.10.5.
11.10.4 Over-Reach
Percentage over-reach is defined by the equation:

ZF ZR
100%
ZR
xZC
IA
+ IB )
Therefore the effective reach is
IA+IB
A
(I A
A distance relay is said to over-reach when the apparent

impedance presented to it is less than the impedance to
the fault.
IB
Source
IA + IB
x ZC
IA
Chapt11-170-191
ZA
...Equation 11.9
where:
ZR = relay reach setting
Z<
Relaying point
Relay setting: ZA+ZC
ZF = effective reach
An example of the over-reaching effect is when distance
relays are applied on parallel lines and one line is taken
out of service and earthed at each end. This is covered
in Section 13.2.3.
Relay actual reach due to parallel line infeed: ZA+xZC
Figure 11.21: Effect on distance relays

of infeed at the remote busbar
In Figure 11.21, the relay at A will not measure the

correct impedance for a fault on line section ZC due to
current infeed IB. Consider a relay setting of ZA+ZC.
For a fault at point F, the relay is presented with an
impedance:
11.10.5 Forward Reach Limitations

There are limitations on the maximum forward reach
setting that can be applied to a distance relay. For
example, with reference to Figure 11.6, Zone 2 of one line
section should not reach beyond the Zone 1 coverage of
187
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:43
Page 188
the next line section relay. Where there is a link between

the forward reach setting and the relay resistive
coverage (e.g. a Mho Zone 3 element), a relay must not
operate under maximum load conditions. Also, if the
relay reach is excessive, the healthy phase-earth fault
units of some relay designs may be prone to operation
for heavy reverse faults. This problem only affected older
relays applied to three-terminal lines that have
significant line section length asymmetry. A number of
the features offered with modern relays can eliminate
this problem.
Power swings are variations in power flow that occur

when the internal voltages of generators at different
points of the power system slip relative to each other. The
changes in load flows that occur as a result of faults and
their subsequent clearance are one cause of power swings.
11
Fuses or sensitive miniature circuit breakers normally

protect the secondary wiring between the voltage
transformer secondary windings and the relay terminals.
Distance relays having:
a. self-polarised offset characteristics encompassing
the zero impedance point of the R/X diagram
b. sound phase polarisation
c. voltage memory polarisation
may maloperate if one or more voltage inputs are
removed due to operation of these devices.
11.10.6 Power Swing Blocking
11.10.7 Voltage Transformer Supervision
A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a

distance relay to move away from the normal load area
and into the relay characteristic. In the case of a stable
power swing it is especially important that the distance
relay should not trip in order to allow the power system
to return to a stable conditions. For this reason, most
distance protection schemes applied to transmission
systems have a power swing blocking facility available.
Different relays may use different principles for detection
of a power swing, but all involve recognising that the
movement of the measured impedance in relation to the
relay measurement characteristics is at a rate that is
significantly less than the rate of change that occurs
during fault conditions. When the relay detects such a
condition, operation of the relay elements can be
blocked. Power swing blocking may be applied
individually to each of the relay zones, or on an all zones
applied/inhibited basis, depending on the particular relay
used.
Various techniques are used in different relay designs to
inhibit power swing blocking in the event of a fault
occurring while a power swing is in progress. This is
particularly important, for example, to allow the relay to
respond to a fault that develops on a line during the dead
time of a single pole autoreclose cycle.
Some Utilities may designate certain points on the
network as split points, where the network should be
split in the event of an unstable power swing or poleslipping occurring. A dedicated power swing tripping
relay may be employed for this purpose (see Section
11.7.8). Alternatively, it may be possible to achieve
splitting by strategically limiting the duration for which
the operation a specific distance relay is blocked during
power swing conditions.
For these types of distance relay, supervision of the voltage

inputs is recommended. The supervision may be provided by
external means, e.g. separate voltage supervision circuits, or
it may be incorporated into the distance relay itself. On
detection of VT failure, tripping of the distance relay can be
inhibited and/or an alarm is given. Modern distance
protection relays employ voltage supervision that operates
from sequence voltages and currents. Zero or negative
sequence voltages and corresponding zero or negative
sequence currents are derived. Discrimination between
primary power system faults and wiring faults or loss of
supply due to individual fuses blowing or MCBs being
opened is obtained by blocking the distance protection only
when zero or negative sequence voltage is detected without
the presence of zero or negative sequence current. This
arrangement will not detect the simultaneous loss of all
three voltages and additional detection is required that
operates for loss of voltage with no change in current, or a
current less than that corresponding to the three phase
fault current under minimum fault infeed conditions. If
fast-acting miniature circuit breakers are used to protect
the VT secondary circuits, contacts from these may be used
to inhibit operation of the distance protection elements and
prevent tripping.
11.11 OTHER DISTANCE RELAY FEATURES

A modern digital or numerical distance relay will often
incorporate additional features that assist the protection
engineer in providing a comprehensive solution to the
protection requirements of a particular part of a network.
Table 11.1 provides an indication of the additional features
that may be provided in such a relay. The combination of
features that are actually provided is manufacturer and
relay model dependent, but it can be seen from the Table
that steady progression is being made towards a one-box
solution that incorporates all the protection and control
requirements for a line or cable. However, at the highest
transmission voltages, the level of dependability required
for rapid clearance of any protected circuit fault will still
demand the use of two independent protection systems.
188
20/06/02
15:43
Page 189
Fault Location (Distance to fault)

Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
Teed feeder protection
Alternative setting groups
CT supervision
Check synchroniser
Auto-reclose
CB state monitoring
CB condition monitoring
CB control
Measurement of voltages, currents, etc.
Event Recorder
Disturbance Recorder
CB failure detection/logic
Directional/Non-directional phase fault overcurrent protection
(backup to distance protection)
Directional/Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection
(backup to distance protection)
Negative sequence protection
Under/Overvoltage protection
Stub-bus protection
Broken conductor detection
User-programmable scheme logic
11.12 DISTANCE RELAY APPLICATION EXAMPLE

The system diagram shown in Figure 11.22 shows a
simple 230kV network. The following example shows the
calculations necessary to apply three-zone distance
protection to the line interconnecting substations ABC
and XYZ. All relevant data for this exercise are given in
the diagram. The MiCOM P441 relay with quadrilateral
characteristics is considered in this example. Relay
parameters used in the example are listed in Table 11.2.
Calculations are carried out in terms of primary system
impedances in ohms, rather than the traditional practice
of using secondary impedances. With numerical relays,
where the CT and VT ratios may be entered as
parameters, the scaling between primary and secondary
ohms can be performed by the relay. This simplifies the
example by allowing calculations to be carried out in
XYZ
1000/1A
230kV
Parameter
description
ZL1 (mag)
ZL1 (ang)
ZLO (mag)
ZLO (ang)
KZO (mag)
KZO (ang)
Z1 (mag)
Z1 (ang)
Z2 (mag)
Z2 (ang)
Z3 (mag)
Z3 (ang)
R1ph
R2ph
R3ph
TZ1
TZ2
TZ3
R1G
R2G
R3G
Line positive sequence impedance (magnitude)

Line positive sequence impedance (phase angle)
Line zero sequence impedance (magnitude)
Line zero sequence impedance (phase angle)
Default residual compensation factor (magnitude)
Default residual compensation factor (phase angle)
Zone 1 reach impedance setting (magnitude)
Zone 1 reach impedance setting (phase angle)
Phase fault resistive reach value - Zone 1
Time delay - Zone 1
Time delay - Zone 2
Time delay - Zone 3
Ground fault resistive reach value - Zone 1
Parameter
value
Units
48.42
79.41
163.26
74.87
0.79
-6.5
38.74
80
62.95
80
83.27
80
78
78
78
0
0.35
0.8
104
104
104
deg
deg
deg
deg
deg
deg
s
s
s
Table 11.2: Distance relay parameters for example
Table 11.1: Additional features in a distance relay
ABC
Relay
parameter
primary quantities and eliminates considerations of

VT/CT ratios.
For simplicity, it is assumed that only a conventional 3zone distance protection is to be set and that there is no
teleprotection scheme to be considered. In practice, a
teleprotection scheme would normally be applied to a
line at this voltage level.
11.12.1 Line Impedance

The line impedance is:
ZL = (0.089 + j0.476) x 100
= 8.9 + j47.6
= 48.42 79.41
0
Use values of 48.42 (magnitude) and 800 (angle) as

nearest settable values.
PQR
60km
230kV
230kV/110V
230kV
Z<
Source Impedance: 5000MVA max
=
+
/km
/km
11.12.2 Residual Compensation

The relays used are calibrated in terms of the positive
sequence impedance of the protected line. Since the
zero sequence impedance of the line between
substations ABC and XYZ is different from the positive
sequence impedance, the impedance seen by the relay in
the case of an earth fault, involving the passage of zero
sequence current, will be different to that seen for a
phase fault.
Figure 11.22: Example network for distance

relay setting calculation
Chapt11-170-191
189
11
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:43
Page 190
Hence, the earth fault reach of the relay requires zero

sequence compensation (see Section 11.9.2).
For the relay used, this adjustment is provided by the
residual (or neutral) compensation factor KZ0, set equal
to:
K Z0 =
( Z0
Z1 )
48.42 79.41 o +
1.2 60 0.484 79.41 o
( Z0
Z1 )
3 Z1
= 83.27 79.41 o
For each of the transmission lines:
Use a setting of 83.2780 0, nearest available setting.
(
)
= 0.426 + j1.576 (1.632 74.87 )
Z L1 = 0.089 + j 0.476 0.484 79.41o
11.12.6 Zone Time Delay Settings

Proper co-ordination of the distance relay settings with
those of other relays is required. Independent timers are
available for the three zones to ensure this.
Hence,
For Zone 1, instantaneous tripping is normal. A time

delay is used only in cases where large d.c. offsets occur
and old circuit breakers, incapable of breaking the
instantaneous d.c. component, are involved.
K Z 0 = 0.792
K Z 0 = 6.5 o
11.12.3 Zone 1 Phase Reach

The required Zone 1 reach is 80% of the line impedance.
Therefore,
0.8 48.42 79.41 o = 38.74 79.41 o

Use 38.7480 nearest settable value.
Ideally, the requirements for setting Zone 2 reach are:
1. at least 120% of the protected line
2. less than the protected line + 50% of the next line
11
Zone 3 is set to cover 120% of the sum of the lines

between substations ABC and PQR, provided this does
not result in any transformers at substation XYZ being
included. It is assumed that this constraint is met.
Hence, Zone 3 reach:
3 Z1
K Z0 =
Z L0
Sometimes, the two requirements are in conflict. In this

case, both requirements can be met. A setting of the
whole of the line between substations ABC and XYZ,
plus 50% of the adjacent line section to substation PQR
is used. Hence, Zone 2 reach:
48.42 79.41 o +
=
0.5 60 0.089 + j 0.476

o
= 62.95 79.41
Use 62.9580 0 nearest available setting.
The Zone 2 element has to grade with the relays

protecting the line between substations XYZ and PQR
since the Zone 2 element covers part of these lines.
Assuming that this line has distance, unit or
instantaneous high-set overcurrent protection applied,
the time delay required is that to cover the total
clearance time of the downstream relays. To this must
be added the reset time for the Zone 2 element following
clearance of a fault on the adjacent line, and a suitable
safety margin. A typical time delay is 350ms, and the
normal range is 200-500ms.
The considerations for the Zone 3 element are the same
as for the Zone 2 element, except that the downstream
fault clearance time is that for the Zone 2 element of a
distance relay or IDMT overcurrent protection. Assuming
distance relays are used, a typical time is 800ms. In
summary:
TZ1 = 0ms (instantaneous)
TZ2 = 250ms
TZ3 = 800ms
11.12.7 Phase Fault Resistive Reach Settings
With the use of a quadrilateral characteristic, the
resistive reach settings for each zone can be set
independently of the impedance reach settings. The
resistive reach setting represents the maximum amount
of additional fault resistance (in excess of the line
impedance) for which a zone will trip, regardless of the
fault within the zone.
190
Chapt11-170-191
20/06/02
15:43
Page 191
Two constraints are imposed upon the settings, as

follows:
11.13 REFERENCES
i. it must be greater than the maximum expected

phase-phase fault resistance (principally that of the
fault arc)
11.1 Protective Relays their Theory and Practice.

A.R. van C. Warrington. Chapman and Hall,
1962.
ii. it must be less than the apparent resistance

measured due to the heaviest load on the line
The minimum fault current at Substation ABC is of the
order of 1.8kA, leading to a typical arc resistance Rarc
using the van Warrington formula (Equation 11.4) of 8.
Using the current transformer ratio as a guide to the
maximum expected load current, the minimum load
impedance Zlmin will be 130. Typically, the resistive
reaches will be set to avoid the minimum load
impedance by a 40% margin for the phase elements,
leading to a maximum resistive reach setting of 78.
Therefore, the resistive reach setting lies between 8
and 78. Allowance should be made for the effects of
any remote fault infeed, by using the maximum resistive
reach possible. While each zone can have its own
resistive reach setting, for this simple example they can
all be set equal. This need not always be the case, it
depends on the particular distance protection scheme
used and the need to include Power Swing Blocking.
Suitable settings are chosen to be 80% of the load

resistance:
R3ph = 78
R2ph = 78
R1ph = 78
11.12.8 Earth Fault Impedance Reach Settings
By default, the residual compensation factor as
calculated in Section 11.12.2 is used to adjust the phase
fault reach setting in the case of earth faults, and is
applied to all zones.
11.12.9 Earth Fault Resistive Reach Settings

The margin for avoiding the minimum load impedance
need only be 20%. Hence the settings are:
R3G = 104
R2G = 104
R1G = 104
This completes the setting of the relay. Table 11.2 also
shows the settings calculated.
191
11
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 192
12
Distance Protection
Schemes
Introduction
12.1
Zone 1 extension scheme
12.2
Transfer trip schemes
12.3
Blocking scheme
12.4
Directional comparison unblocking scheme
12.5
Comparison of transfer trip

and blocking relaying schemes
12.6
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 193
12
Schemes
12.1 INTRODUCTION
Conventional time-stepped distance protection is
illustrated in Figure 12.1. One of the main disadvantages
of this scheme is that the instantaneous Zone 1
protection at each end of the protected line cannot be
set to cover the whole of the feeder length and is usually
set to about 80%. This leaves two 'end zones', each
being about 20% of the protected feeder length. Faults
in these zones are cleared in Zone 1 time by the
protection at one end of the feeder and in Zone 2 time
(typically 0.25 to 0.4 seconds) by the protection at the
other end of the feeder.
Relayy A
end zone
Z3G
Time
Z2A
A
Z1A
F
Z1B
B
Z3B
Relayy B
end zone
(a) Stepped time/distance characteristics
Z1
Z2
Z2T 0
Z3
Z3 0
Trip
(b) Trip circuit (solid state logic)

Figure 12.1: Conventional distance scheme
This situation cannot be tolerated in some applications,

for two main reasons:
a. faults remaining on the feeder for Zone 2 time may
cause the system to become unstable
b. where high-speed auto-reclosing is used, the nonsimultaneous opening of the circuit breakers at
both ends of the faulted section results in no 'dead
time' during the auto-reclose cycle for the fault to
be extinguished and for ionised gases to clear. This
results in the possibility that a transient fault will
cause permanent lockout of the circuit breakers at
each end of the line section
193
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 194
Even where instability does not occur, the increased

duration of the disturbance may give rise to power
quality problems, and may result in increased plant
damage.
Z3A
Z2A
Z1extA
Z1A
A
Unit schemes of protection that compare the conditions at

the two ends of the feeder simultaneously positively
identify whether the fault is internal or external to the
protected section and provide high-speed protection for
the whole feeder length. This advantage is balanced by the
fact that the unit scheme does not provide the back up
protection for adjacent feeders given by a distance scheme.
Z1extB
Z2B
Z1B
Z3B
(a) Distance/time characteristics
Auto-reclose
Reset Zone 1ext
The most desirable scheme is obviously a combination of

the best features of both arrangements, that is,
instantaneous tripping over the whole feeder length plus
back-up protection to adjacent feeders. This can be
achieved by interconnecting the distance protection
relays at each end of the protected feeder by a
communications channel. Communication techniques
are described in detail in Chapter 8.
&
Zone 1ext
1
Zone 1
Zone 2
Z2T O
Zone 3
Z3T O
Trip
Distance P rotection Schemes
(b) Simplified logic
12
The purpose of the communications channel is to

transmit information about the system conditions from
one end of the protected line to the other, including
requests to initiate or prevent tripping of the remote
circuit breaker. The former arrangement is generally
known as a 'transfer tripping scheme' while the latter is
generally known as a 'blocking scheme'. However, the
terminology of the various schemes varies widely,
according to local custom and practice.
12.2 ZONE 1 EXTENSION SCHEME (Z1X SCHEME)

This scheme is intended for use with an auto-reclose
facility, or where no communications channel is
available, or the channel has failed. Thus it may be used
on radial distribution feeders, or on interconnected lines
as a fallback when no communications channel is
available, e.g. due to maintenance or temporary fault.
The scheme is shown in Figure 12.2.
The Zone 1 elements of the distance relay have two
settings. One is set to cover 80% of the protected line
length as in the basic distance scheme. The other, known
as 'Extended Zone 1'or Z1X, is set to overreach the
protected line, a setting of 120% of the protected line
being common. The Zone 1 reach is normally controlled
by the Z1X setting and is reset to the basic Zone 1 setting
when a command from the auto-reclose relay is received.
Figure 12.2: Zone 1 extension scheme
On occurrence of a fault at any point within the Z1X

reach, the relay operates in Zone 1 time, trips the circuit
breaker and initiates auto-reclosure. The Zone 1 reach of
the distance relay is also reset to the basic value of 80%,
prior to the auto-reclose closing pulse being applied to
the breaker. This should also occur when the autoreclose facility is out of service. Reversion to the Z1X
reach setting occurs only at the end of the reclaim time.
For interconnected lines, the Z1X scheme is established
(automatically or manually) upon loss of the
communications channel by selection of the appropriate
relay setting (setting group in a numerical relay). If the
fault is transient, the tripped circuit breakers will reclose
successfully, but otherwise further tripping during the
reclaim time is subject to the discrimination obtained
with normal Zone 1 and Zone 2 settings.
The disadvantage of the Zone 1 extension scheme is that
external faults within the Z1X reach of the relay result in
tripping of circuit breakers external to the faulted
section, increasing the amount of breaker maintenance
needed and needless transient loss of supply to some
consumers. This is illustrated in Figure 12.3(a) for a
single circuit line where three circuit breakers operate
and in Figure 12.3(b) for a double circuit line, where five
circuit breakers operate.
194
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Z1A
Page 195
A contact operated by the Zone 1 relay element is

arranged to send a signal to the remote relay requesting a
trip. The scheme may be called a 'direct under-reach
transfer tripping scheme, transfer trip under-reaching
scheme', or intertripping under-reach distance protection
scheme, as the Zone 1 relay elements do not cover the
whole of the line.
Z1extA
Z1B1
Z1extB1
Z1B2
Z1extB2
Z1C
Z1extC
Breakers
marked thus
auto-reclose
A fault F in the end zone at end B in Figure 12.1(a)

results in operation of the Zone 1 relay and tripping of
the circuit breaker at end B. A request to trip is also sent
to the relay at end A. The receipt of a signal at A
initiates tripping immediately because the receive relay
contact is connected directly to the trip relay. The
disadvantage of this scheme is the possibility of
undesired tripping by accidental operation or
maloperation of signalling equipment, or interference on
the communications channel. As a result, it is not
commonly used.
(a) Fault within Zone 1 extension reach of distance relays

(single circuit lines)
Z1A
Z1extA
C
Z1extD
Z1extB
Z1D
Z1B
Z1extC
Z1C
12.3.2 Permissive Under-reach Transfer Tripping

(PUP) Scheme
Z1extP
Z1P
L
N
Z1extN
The direct under-reach transfer tripping scheme described

above is made more secure by supervising the received
signal with the operation of the Zone 2 relay element before
allowing an instantaneous trip, as shown in Figure 12.5. The
scheme is then known as a 'permissive under-reach transfer
tripping scheme' (sometimes abbreviated as PUP Z2
scheme) or permissive under-reach distance protection, as
both relays must detect a fault before the remote end relay
is permitted to trip in Zone 1 time.
Z1N
Z1extL
Z1M
Z1extM
Z1L
(b) Fault within Zone 1 extension reach of distance relays

(double circuit lines)
Figure 12.3: Performance of Zone 1 extension
scheme in conjunction with auto-reclose relays
12.3 TRANSFER TRIPPING SCHEMES

A number of these schemes are available, as described
below. Selection of an appropriate scheme depends on
the requirements of the system being protected.
Signal send
Z1
12.3.1 Direct Under-reach Transfer Tripping Scheme
Z1
Z2
Z2T O
1
Z3
Trip
Z3
Z3T 0
&
(a) Signal logic
Signal
send
Send
circuit
(f1)
Receive
circuit
(f1)
Signalling equipment
-End A
Signal
receive
Send
circuit
(f1)
Figure 12.5: Permissive under-reach

transfer tripping scheme
Signal receive
Figure 12.4: Logic for direct under-reach
transfer tripping scheme
195
Signal
send
Receive
Signal
circuit
receive
(f1)
-End B
(b) Signalling arrangement
Z3T O
Trip
Distance relay
Signal send
Z2T 0
Signal receive 0
Distance relay
The simplest way of reducing the fault clearance time at

the terminal that clears an end zone fault in Zone 2 time
is to adopt a direct transfer trip or intertrip technique, the
logic of which is shown in Figure 12.4.
Z2
12
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 196
A variant of this scheme, found on some relays, allows

tripping by Zone 3 element operation as well as Zone 2,
provided the fault is in the forward direction. This is
sometimes called the PUP-Fwd scheme.
Time delayed resetting of the 'signal received' element is
required to ensure that the relays at both ends of a
single-end fed faulted line of a parallel feeder circuit
have time to trip when the fault is close to one end.
Consider a fault F in a double circuit line, as shown in
Figure 12.6. The fault is close to end A, so there is
negligible infeed from end B when the fault at F occurs.
The protection at B detects a Zone 2 fault only after the
breaker at end A has tripped. It is possible for the Zone 1
element at A to reset, thus removing the permissive
signal to B and causing the 'signal received' element at
B to reset before the Zone 2 unit at end B operates. It is
therefore necessary to delay the resetting of the 'signal
received' element to ensure high speed tripping at end B.
relays that share the same measuring elements for both

Zone 1 and Zone 2. In these relays, the reach of the
measuring elements is extended from Zone 1 to Zone 2
by means of a range change signal immediately, instead
of after Zone 2 time. It is also called an accelerated
underreach distance protection scheme.
The under-reaching Zone 1 unit is arranged to send a
signal to the remote end of the feeder in addition to
tripping the local circuit breaker. The receive relay
contact is arranged to extend the reach of the measuring
element from Zone 1 to Zone 2. This accelerates the
fault clearance at the remote end for faults that lie in the
region between the Zone 1 and Zone 2 reaches. The
scheme is shown in Figure 12.7. Modern distance relays
do not employ switched measuring elements, so the
scheme is likely to fall into disuse.
Z3A
Z2A
Z1A
12
Z1B
Z2B
Z3B
Z1 & Z2
(a) Fault occurs-bus bar voltage low so
negligible fault current via end B
A
Z3
Z3T O
Trip
Z2T O
Range change signal
Open
Signal receive
&
Signal send
(b) Signal logic

(b) End A relay clears fault and current
starts feeding from end B
Figure 12.7: Permissive under-reaching

acceleration scheme
Figure 12.6: PUP scheme: Single-end fed

close-up fault on double circuit line
12.3.4 Permissive Over-Reach Transfer Tripping

(POP) Scheme
The PUP schemes require only a single communications

channel for two-way signalling between the line ends, as the
channel is keyed by the under-reaching Zone 1 elements.
When the circuit breaker at one end is open, or there is
a weak infeed such that the relevant relay element does
not operate, instantaneous clearance cannot be achieved
for end-zone faults near the 'breaker open' terminal
unless special features are included, as detailed in
section 12.3.5.
12.3.3 Permissive Under-reaching Acceleration Scheme

This scheme is applicable only to zone switched distance
In this scheme, a distance relay element set to reach

beyond the remote end of the protected line is used to
send an intertripping signal to the remote end. However,
it is essential that the receive relay contact is monitored
by a directional relay contact to ensure that tripping
does not take place unless the fault is within the
protected section; see Figure 12.8. The instantaneous
contacts of the Zone 2 unit are arranged to send the
signal, and the received signal, supervised by Zone 2
operation, is used to energise the trip circuit. The
scheme is then known as a 'permissive over-reach
transfer tripping scheme' (sometimes abbreviated to
POP), 'directional comparison scheme', or permissive
overreach distance protection scheme.
196
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 197
Z1
Signal send
Z1
Z2
Z2T O
Z3
Z3T O
Z3T O
Z3
Trip
&
Signal receive
tp td
&
&
Signal receive
(a) Signal logic
&
Signal
send
Send f1
circuit
(f1)
f2 Send
circuit
(f2)
Signal
send
Signal
receive
Receive
circuit
(f2) f2
f1
Receive
circuit
(f1)
Signal
receive
-End A
Distance relay
Distance relay
Trip
Z2T O
Z2
Signal send
Figure 12.9: Current reversal guard logic

permissive over-reach scheme
The above scheme using Zone 2 relay elements is often

referred to as a POP Z2 scheme. An alternative exists
that uses Zone 1 elements instead of Zone 2, and this is
referred to as the POP Z1 scheme.
-End B
(b) Signalling arrangement

Figure 12.8: Permissive over-reach transfer tripping scheme
If distance relays with mho characteristics are used, the

scheme may be more advantageous than the permissive
under-reaching scheme for protecting short lines,
because the resistive coverage of the Zone 2 unit may be
greater than that of Zone 1.
To prevent operation under current reversal conditions in
a parallel feeder circuit, it is necessary to use a current
reversal guard timer to inhibit the tripping of the forward
Zone 2 elements. Otherwise maloperation of the scheme
may occur under current reversal conditions, see Section
11.9.9 for more details. It is necessary only when the
Zone 2 reach is set greater than 150% of the protected
line impedance.
The timer is used to block the permissive trip and signal
send circuits as shown in Figure 12.9. The timer is
energised if a signal is received and there is no operation
of Zone 2 elements. An adjustable time delay on pick-up
(tp) is usually set to allow instantaneous tripping to take
place for any internal faults, taking into account a
possible slower operation of Zone 2. The timer will have
operated and blocked the permissive trip and signal
send circuits by the time the current reversal takes place.
12.3.5 Weak Infeed Conditions

In the standard permissive over-reach scheme, as with
the permissive under-reach scheme, instantaneous
clearance cannot be achieved for end-zone faults under
weak infeed or breaker open conditions. To overcome
this disadvantage, two possibilities exist.
The Weak Infeed Echo feature available in some
protection relays allows the remote relay to echo the trip
signal back to the sending relay even if the appropriate
remote relay element has not operated. This caters for
conditions of the remote end having a weak infeed or
circuit breaker open condition, so that the relevant
remote relay element does not operate. Fast clearance
for these faults is now obtained at both ends of the line.
The logic is shown in Figure 12.10. A time delay (T1) is
required in the echo circuit to prevent tripping of the
remote end breaker when the local breaker is tripped by
the busbar protection or breaker fail protection
associated with other feeders connected to the busbar.
The time delay ensures that the remote end Zone 2
element will reset by the time the echoed signal is
received at that end.
The timer is de-energised if the Zone 2 elements operate

or the 'signal received' element resets. The reset time
delay (td) of the timer is set to cover any overlap in time
caused by Zone 2 elements operating and the signal
resetting at the remote end, when the current in the
healthy feeder reverses. Using a timer in this manner
means that no extra time delay is added in the
permissive trip circuit for an internal fault.
Since the signalling channel is keyed by over-reaching Zone

2 elements, the scheme requires duplex communication
channels - one frequency for each direction of signalling.
197
From 'POP' signal

send logic
(Figure 12.8)
To 'POP' trip logic
(Figure 12.8)
Breaker
'open'
T1 0
&
T2
&
Signal
send
Signal
receive
Figure 12.10: Weak Infeed Echo logic circuit
12
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 198
Signal transmission can take place even after the remote

end breaker has tripped. This gives rise to the possibility
of continuous signal transmission due to lock-up of both
signals. Timer T2 is used to prevent this. After this time
delay, 'signal send' is blocked.
A variation on the Weak Infeed Echo feature is to allow
tripping of the remote relay under the circumstances
described above, providing that an undervoltage
condition exists, due to the fault. This is known as the
Weak Infeed Trip feature and ensures that both ends are
tripped if the conditions are satisfied.
12.4 BLOCKING OVER-REACHING SCHEMES
The arrangements described so far have used the signalling

channel(s) to transmit a tripping instruction. If the
signalling channel fails or there is no Weak Infeed feature
provided, end-zone faults may take longer to be cleared.
Blocking over-reaching schemes use an over-reaching
distance scheme and inverse logic. Signalling is initiated
only for external faults and signalling transmission takes
place over healthy line sections. Fast fault clearance
occurs when no signal is received and the over-reaching
Zone 2 distance measuring elements looking into the line
operate. The signalling channel is keyed by reverselooking distance elements (Z3 in the diagram, though
which zone is used depends on the particular relay used).
An ideal blocking scheme is shown in Figure 12.11.
Z3A
The single frequency signalling channel operates both

local and remote receive relays when a block signal is
initiated at any end of the protected section.
12.4.1 Practical Blocking Schemes

A blocking instruction has to be sent by the reverselooking relay elements to prevent instantaneous tripping
of the remote relay for Zone 2 faults external to the
protected section. To achieve this, the reverse-looking
elements and the signalling channel must operate faster
than the forward-looking elements. In practice, this is
seldom the case and to ensure discrimination, a short
time delay is generally introduced into the blocking
mode trip circuit. Either the Zone 2 or Zone 1 element
can be used as the forward-looking element, giving rise
to two variants of the scheme.
12.4.1.1 Blocking over-reaching protection scheme using
Zone 2 element
This scheme (sometimes abbreviated to BOP Z2) is based
on the ideal blocking scheme of Figure 12.11, but has the
signal logic illustrated in Figure 12.12. It is also known
as a directional comparison blocking scheme or a
blocking over-reach distance protection scheme.
Signal send
Z1
Z2A
Z2
Z2T
Z3
Z3T
STL
td
Trip
Z1A
A
F2
F1
F3
&
Z1B
Z2B
Signal receive
Z3B
12
Channel in service
Signal send
Z1
Figure 12.12: Signal logic for BOP Z2 scheme

Z2
Z2T O
Z3
Z3T O
Operation of the scheme can be understood by

considering the faults shown at F1, F2 and F3 in Figure
12.11 along with the signal logic of Figure 12.12.
Trip
&
Signal receive
Signal
send
Send
circuit
(f1)
Send
circuit
(f1)
Signal
send
Signal
receive
Receive
circuit
(f1)
Receive
circuit
(f1)
Signal
receive
-End A
-End B
(c) Signalling arrangement
Distance relay
(b) Simplified logic
Distance relay
A fault at F1 is seen by the Zone 1 relay elements at

both ends A and B; as a result, the fault is cleared
instantaneously at both ends of the protected line.
Signalling is controlled by the Z3 elements looking away
from the protected section, so no transmission takes
place, thus giving fast tripping via the forward-looking
Zone 1 elements.
A fault at F2 is seen by the forward-looking Zone 2
elements at ends A and B and by the Zone 1 elements at
Figure 12.11: Ideal distance protection

blocking scheme
198
14/06/02
13:15
Page 199
end B. No signal transmission takes place, since the

fault is internal and the fault is cleared in Zone 1 time at
end B and after the short time lag (STL) at end A.
A fault at F3 is seen by the reverse-looking Z3 elements
at end B and the forward looking Zone 2 elements at end
A. The Zone 1 relay elements at end B associated with
line section B-C would normally clear the fault at F3. To
prevent the Z2 elements at end A from tripping, the
reverse-looking Zone 3 elements at end B send a
blocking signal to end A. If the fault is not cleared
instantaneously by the protection on line section B-C,
the trip signal will be given at end B for section A-B
after the Z3 time delay.
The setting of the reverse-looking Zone 3 elements must
be greater than that of the Zone 2 elements at the
remote end of the feeder, otherwise there is the
possibility of Zone 2 elements initiating tripping and the
reverse looking Zone 3 elements failing to see an
external fault. This would result in instantaneous
tripping for an external fault. When the signalling
channel is used for a stabilising signal, as in the above
case, transmission takes place over a healthy line section
if power line carrier is used. The signalling channel
should then be more reliable when used in the blocking
mode than in tripping mode.
In a practical application, the reverse-looking relay

elements may be set with a forward offset characteristic
to provide back-up protection for busbar faults after the
zone time delay. It is then necessary to stop the blocking
signal being sent for internal faults. This is achieved by
making the signal send circuit conditional upon nonoperation of the forward-looking Zone 2 elements, as
Blocking schemes, like the permissive over-reach
scheme, are also affected by the current reversal in the
healthy feeder due to a fault in a double circuit line. If
current reversal conditions occur, as described in section
11.9.9, it may be possible for the maloperation of a
breaker on the healthy line to occur. To avoid this, the
resetting of the signal received element provided in the
blocking scheme is time delayed.
The timer with delayed resetting (td) is set to cover the
time difference between the maximum resetting time of
reverse-looking Zone 3 elements and the signalling
channel. So, if there is a momentary loss of the blocking
signal during the current reversal, the timer does not
have time to reset in the blocking mode trip circuit and
no false tripping takes place.
12.4.1.2 Blocking over-reaching protection scheme using
Zone 1 element
It is essential that the operating times of the various

relays be skilfully co-ordinated for all system conditions,
so that sufficient time is always allowed for the receipt
of a blocking signal from the remote end of the feeder.
If this is not done accurately, the scheme may trip for an
external fault or alternatively, the end zone tripping
times may be delayed longer than is necessary.
This is similar to the BOP Z2 scheme described above,

except that an over-reaching Zone 1 element is used in
the logic, instead of the Zone 2 element. It may also be
known as the BOP Z1 scheme.
If the signalling channel fails, the scheme must be

arranged to revert to conventional basic distance
protection. Normally, the blocking mode trip circuit is
supervised by a 'channel-in-service' contact so that the
blocking mode trip circuit is isolated when the channel is
out of service, as shown in Figure 12.12.
The protection at the strong infeed terminal will operate

for all internal faults, since a blocking signal is not
received from the weak infeed terminal end. In the case
of external faults behind the weak infeed terminal, the
reverse-looking elements at that end will see the fault
current fed from the strong infeed terminal and operate,
initiating a block signal to the remote end. The relay at
the strong infeed end operates correctly without the
need for any additional circuits. The relay at the weak
infeed end cannot operate for internal faults, and so
tripping of that breaker is possible only by means of
direct intertripping from the strong source end.
Z3G
Z2G
Z1G
G
12.4.2 Weak Infeed Conditions
Z1H
Z2H
Z3H
12.5 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON

UNBLOCKING SCHEME

Z3
&
Z2
Signal send
(b) Solid state logic of send circuit

Figure 12.13: Blocking scheme using reverselooking relays with offset
Chap12 exe
The permissive over-reach scheme described in Section

12.3.4 can be arranged to operate on a directional
comparison unblocking principle by providing additional
circuitry in the signalling equipment. In this scheme
(also called a deblocking overreach distance protection
199
12
Chap12 exe
14/06/02
13:15
Page 200
scheme), a continuous block (or guard) signal is

transmitted. When the over-reaching distance elements
operate, the frequency of the signal transmitted is
shifted to an 'unblock' (trip) frequency. The receipt of the
unblock frequency signal and the operation of overreaching distance elements allow fast tripping to occur
for faults within the protected zone. In principle, the
scheme is similar to the permissive over-reach scheme.
The scheme is made more dependable than the standard

permissive over-reach scheme by providing additional
circuits in the receiver equipment. These allow tripping
to take place for internal faults even if the transmitted
unblock signal is short-circuited by the fault. This is
achieved by allowing aided tripping for a short time
interval, typically 100 to 150 milliseconds, after the loss
of both the block and the unblock frequency signals.
After this time interval, aided tripping is permitted only
if the unblock frequency signal is received.
12
This arrangement gives the scheme improved security over a

blocking scheme, since tripping for external faults is possible
only if the fault occurs within the above time interval of
channel failure. Weak Infeed terminal conditions can be
catered for by the techniques detailed in Section 12.3.5.
In this way, the scheme has the dependability of a
blocking scheme and the security of a permissive overreach scheme. This scheme is generally preferred when
power line carrier is used, except when continuous
transmission of signal is not acceptable.
12.6 COMPARISON OF TRANSFER TRIP

AND BLOCKING RELAYING SCHEMES
On normal two-terminal lines the main deciding factors in
the choice of the type of scheme, apart from the reliability
of the signalling channel previously discussed, are
operating speed and the method of operation of the
system. Table 12.1 compares the important characteristics
of the various types of scheme.
Criterion
Transfer tripping scheme
Speed of operation
Fast
Speed with in-service testing
Slower
Suitable for auto-reclose
Yes
Security against
maloperation due to:
Current reversal
Special features required
Loss of communications
Poor
Weak Infeed/Open CB
Blocking scheme
Not as fast
As fast
Yes

Good
Table 12.1: Comparison of different

distance protection schemes
Modern digital or numerical distance relays are provided

with a choice of several schemes in the same relay. Thus
scheme selection is now largely independent of relay
selection, and the user is assured that a relay is available
with all the required features to cope with changing
system conditions.
200
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:27
13
Page 202
Protection of Complex
Transmission Circuits
Introduction
13.1
Parallel feeders
13.2
Multi-ended feeders unit protection
13.3
Multi-ended feeders distance protection
13.4
Multi-ended feeders application of distance protection schemes
13.5
Protection of series compensated lines
13.6
Examples
13.7
References
13.8
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:27
Page 203
13 P rotection of Complex
Transmission Circuits
13.1 INTRODUCTION
Chapters 10-12 have covered the basic principles of
protection for two terminal, single circuit lines whose
circuit impedance is due solely to the conductors used.
However parallel transmission circuits are often
installed, either as duplicate circuits on a common
structure, or as separate lines connecting the same two
terminal points via different routes. Also, circuits may
be multi-ended, a three-ended circuit being the most
common.
For economic reasons, transmission and distribution
lines can be much more complicated, maybe having
three or more terminals (multi-ended feeder), or with
more than one circuit carried on a common structure
(parallel feeders), as shown in Figure 13.1. Other
possibilities are the use of series capacitors or directconnected shunt reactors. The protection of such lines
is more complicated and requires the basic schemes
described in the above chapters to be modified.
The purpose of this chapter is to explain the special
requirements of some of these situations in respect of
protection and identify which protection schemes are
particularly appropriate for use in these situations.
Bus C
Source
Source
Bus A
Bus B
Figure 13.1: Parallel and Multi-ended feeders
13.2 PARALLEL FEEDERS

If two overhead lines are supported on the same
structures or are otherwise in close proximity over part
203
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:27
Page 204
or whole of their length, there is a mutual coupling

between the two circuits. The positive and negative
sequence coupling between the two circuits is small and
is usually neglected. The zero sequence coupling can be
strong and its effect cannot be ignored.
C
Z<
Z<
Fault
The other situation that requires mutual effects to be

taken into account is when there is an earth fault on a
feeder when the parallel feeder is out of service and
earthed at both ends. An earth fault in the feeder that
is in service can induce current in the earth loop of the
earthed feeder, causing a misleading mutual
compensation signal.
Z<
Z<
P rotection of Complex Transmission Circuits

13
(a) Fault current distribution

at instant of fault
C
F
Z<
Open D
Z<
Fault
13.2.1 Unit Protection Systems

Types of protection that use current only, for example
unit protection systems, are not affected by the coupling
between the feeders. Therefore, compensation for the
effects of mutual coupling is not required for the relay
tripping elements.
Z<
Z<
(b) Fault current distribution

with circuit breaker K open
If the relay has a distance-to-fault feature, mutual

compensation is required for an accurate measurement.
Refer to Section 13.2.2.3 for how this is achieved.
Figure 13.2: Fault current distribution

in double-circuit line
13.2.2.2 Under-reach on parallel lines

13.2.2 Distance Protection
There are a number of problems applicable to distance
relays, as described in the following sections.
13.2.2.1 Current reversal on double circuit lines
When a fault is cleared sequentially on one circuit of a
double circuit line with generation sources at both ends
of the circuit, the current in the healthy line can reverse
for a short time. Unwanted tripping of CBs on the
healthy line can then occur if a Permissive Over-reach or
Blocking distance scheme (see Chapter 12) is used.
Figure 13.2 shows how the situation can arise. The CB
at D clears the fault at F faster than the CB at C. Before
CB D opens, the Zone 2 elements at A may see the fault
and operate, sending a trip signal to the relay for CB B.
The reverse looking element of the relay at CB B also
sees the fault and inhibits tripping of CBs A and B.
However, once CB D opens, the relay element at A starts
to reset, while the forward looking elements at B pick up
(due to current reversal) and initiate tripping. If the
reset times of the forward-looking elements of the relay
at A are longer than the operating time of the forwardlooking elements at B, the relays will trip the healthy
line. The solution is to incorporate a blocking time delay
that prevents the tripping of the forward-looking
elements of the relays and is initiated by the reverselooking element. The time delay must be longer than the
reset times of the relay elements at A.
If a fault occurs on a line that lies beyond the remote

terminal end of a parallel line circuit, the distance relay
will under-reach for those zones set to reach into the
affected line.
Analysis shows that under these conditions, because the
relay sees only 50% (for two parallel circuits) of the
total fault current for a fault in the adjacent line section,
the relay sees the impedance of the affected section as
twice the correct value. This may have to be allowed for
in the settings of Zones 2 and 3 of conventionally set
distance relays.
Since the requirement for the minimum reach of Zone 2
is to the end of the protected line section and the underreach effect only occurs for faults in the following line
section(s), it is not usually necessary to adjust Zone 2
impedance settings to compensate.
However, Zone 3 elements are intended to provide
backup protection to adjacent line sections and hence
the under-reaching effect must be allowed for in the
impedance calculations.
13.2.2.3 Behaviour of distance relays
with earth faults on the protected feeder
When an earth fault occurs in the system, the voltage
applied to the earth fault element of the relay in one
circuit includes an induced voltage proportional to the
zero sequence current in the other circuit.
204
14/06/02
13:27
Page 205
ZL1 ZL0
Z'S1,Z'SO
These currents are expressed below in terms of the line

and source parameters:
Z''S1 , Z''SO
Line B
ZM0
IA
Line A
n
I B 0 I A0 =
nZSO
(1 n )ZSO
(2 n ) ZSO + (1 n ) (ZSO + Z L 0 + Z M 0 )
(2 n )ZS1 + (1 n )(ZS1 + Z L1 ) I
I A1 =
1
2 (ZS1 + ZS1 ) + Z L1
Fault
Relay R
location (a) Single line diagram
ZL1
IB1
Z''S1
Z'S1
IA1
nZL1
R
I A0 =
F1
(2 n )ZSO + (1 n )(ZSO + Z L 0 + Z M 0 ) I
0
2 (ZSO
+ ZSO
) + Z L 0 + Z M 0
(1-n)ZL1
I1
(b) Positive sequence network
(ZLO-ZMO)
ZM0 = zero sequence mutual impedance

between the two circuits
NOTE: For earth faults I1 = I0
IA0
F0
R
n(ZLO-ZMO)
(1-n)(ZLO-ZMO)
I0
(c) Zero Sequence network

Figure 13.3: General parallel circuit fed
from both ends
As the current distribution in the two circuits is

unaffected by the presence of mutual coupling, no
similar variation in the current applied to the relay
element takes place and, consequently, the relay
measures the impedance to the fault incorrectly.
Whether the apparent impedance to the fault is greater
or less than the actual impedance depends on the
direction of the current flow in the healthy circuit. For
the common case of two circuits, A and B, connected at
the local and remote busbars, as shown in Figure 13.3,
the impedance of Line A measured by a distance relay,
with the normal zero sequence current compensation
from its own feeder, is given by:
100
Limit of n'
50
n'
n'
0.7
n' =
10
'
n'
5
Z''
y = SO
ZLO
1
0.5
...Equation 13.1
Limit of
where:
M =ZM 0
n'
n'
( I B 0 I A 0 ) M
Z A = nZ L1 1 +
2 ( I A1 I A 0 ) + K
All symbols in the above expressions are either selfexplanatory from Figure 13.3 or have been introduced in
Chapter 11. Using the above formulae, families of reach
curves may be constructed, of which Figure 13.4 is
typical. In this figure, n is the effective per unit reach
of a relay set to protect 80% of the line. It has been
assumed that an infinite busbar is located at each line
end, that is, ZS1 and ZS1 are both zero. A family of
curves of constant n has been plotted for variations in
the source zero sequence impedances ZS0 and ZS0.
0.9
(1-n)ZMO Z''S0
Z'S0 nZM0
n'=
IB0
and
Chap13 exeNEW
when y
x
0.1
Z L1
10
50
Z
x=
ZLO
The true impedance to the fault is nZL1 where n is the

per unit fault position measured from R and ZL1 is the
positive sequence impedance of a single circuit. The
'error' in measurement is determined from the fraction
inside the bracket; this varies with the positive and zero
sequence currents in circuit A and the zero sequence
current in circuit B.
0.5
Figure 13.4: Typical reach curves illustrating

the effect of mutual coupling
It can be seen from Figure 13.4 that relay R can underreach or over-reach, according to the relative values of
the zero sequence source to line impedance ratios; the
205
13
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:27
Page 206
extreme effective per unit reaches for the relay are 0.67
and 1. Relay over-reach is not a problem, as the
condition being examined is a fault in the protected
feeder, for which relay operation is desirable. It can also
be seen from Figure 13.4 that relay R is more likely to
under-reach. However the relay located at the opposite
line end will tend to over-reach. As a result, the Zone 1
characteristic of the relays at both ends of the feeder will
overlap for an earth fault anywhere in the feeder see
Section 13.2.3.5 for more details.
13
Satisfactory protection can be obtained with a transfer

trip, under-reach type distance scheme. Further,
compensation for the effect of zero sequence mutual
impedance is not necessary unless a distance-to-fault
facility is provided. Some manufacturers compensate for
the effect of the mutual impedance in the distance relay
elements, while others may restrict the application of
compensation to the distance-to-fault function only.
The latter is easy to implement in software for a
digital/numerical relay but is impractical in relays using
older technologies. Compensation is achieved by
injecting a proportion of the zero sequence current
flowing in the parallel feeder into the relay. However,
some Utilities will not permit this due to the potential
hazards associated with feeding a relay protecting one
circuit from a CT located in a different circuit.
For the relay to measure the line impedance accurately,
the following condition must be met:
VR
= Z L1
IR
For a solid phase to earth fault at the theoretical reach
of the relay, the voltage and current in the faulty phase
at the relaying point are given by:
V A = I A1Z L1 + I A 2 Z L 2 + I A 0 Z L 0 + I B 0 Z M 0
I A = I A1 + I A 2 + I A 0
Thus:
KR =
Z L 0 Z L1
Z L1
KM =
ZM 0
Z L1
13.2.3.4 Distance relay behaviour

with earth faults on the parallel feeder
Although distance relays with mutual compensation
measure the correct distance to the fault, they may not
operate correctly if the fault occurs in the adjacent
feeder. Davison and Wright [13.1] have shown that,
while distance relays without mutual compensation will
not over-reach for faults outside the protected feeder,
the relays may see faults in the adjacent feeder if mutual
compensation is provided. With reference to Figure 13.3,
the amount of over-reach is highest when
ZS1=ZS2=ZS0=. Under these conditions, faults
occurring in the first 43% of feeder A will appear to the
distance relay in feeder B to be within its Zone 1 reach.
The solution is to limit the mutual compensation applied
to 150% of the zero sequence compensation.
13.2.3.5 Distance relay behaviour
with single-circuit operation
If only one of the parallel feeders is in service, the
protection in the remaining feeder measures the fault
impedance correctly, except when the feeder that is not
in service is earthed at both ends. In this case, the zero
sequence impedance network is as shown in Figure 13.5.
Humpage and Kandil [13.2] have shown that the
apparent impedance presented to the relay under these
conditions is given by:
Z R = Z L1
2
I A0 Z M
0
I RZ L0
...Equation 13.4
where:
IR is the current fed into the relay
Equation 13.2
= IA + KRIA0
The voltage and current fed into the relay are given by:
FO
IO
Z'SO
V R =V A
I R = I A + K R I A 0 + K M I B 0
nZLO
IGO
Relay
location
...Equation 13.3
mZLO
IHO
where:
(1-n)ZLO
Z''SO
(1-n)ZMO
ZLO
KR is the residual compensation factor

NO
KM is the mutual compensation factor
Figure 13.5: Zero sequence impedance network

during single circuit operation
206
14/06/02
13:27
Page 207
The ratio IA0/IR varies with the system conditions,

reaching a maximum when the system is earthed behind
the relay with no generation at that end. In this case,
the ratio IA0/IR is equal to ZL1/ZL0 , and the apparent
impedance presented to the relay is:
Z R = Z L1 1
2
ZM
0
2
Z L0
It is apparent from the above formulae that the relay has

a tendency to over-reach. Care should be taken when
Zone 1 settings are selected for the distance protection of
lines in which this condition may be encountered. In order
to overcome this possible over-reaching effect, some
Utilities reduce the reach of earth fault relays to around
0.65ZL1 when lines are taken out of service. However, the
probability of having a fault on the first section of the
following line while one line is out of service is very small,
and many Utilities do not reduce the setting under this
condition. It should be noted that the use of mutual
compensation would not overcome the over-reaching
effect since earthing clamps are normally placed on the
line side of the current transformers.
Typical values of zero sequence line impedances for HV
lines in the United Kingdom are given in Table 13.1,
where the maximum per unit over-reach error
(ZM0/ZL0)2 is also given. It should be noted that the
over-reach values quoted in this table are maxima, and
will be found only in rare cases. In most cases, there will
be generation at both ends of the feeder and the amount
of over-reach will therefore be reduced. In the
calculations carried out by Humpage and Kandil, with
more realistic conditions, the maximum error found in a
400kV double circuit line was 18.6%.
Conductor
size
Line
voltage
32kV
275kV
400kV
Metric
(sq.mm)
equivalent
0.4
258
2 x 0.4
516
4 x 0.4 1032
(sq.in)
Zero sequence
mutual impedance
ZMO
Zero sequence line

impedance
ZLO
ohms/mile
ohms/km
ohms/mile
0.3 + j0.81
0.18+j0.69
0.135+j0.6
0.19+j0.5
0.11+j0.43
0.80+j0.37
0.41+j1.61 0.25+j1.0
0.24+j1.3 0.15+j0.81
0.16+j1.18 0.1+j0.73
The protection schemes that can be used with multi-ended

feeders are unit protection and distance schemes. Each uses
some form of signalling channel, such as fibre-optic cable,
power line carrier or pilot wires. The specific problems that
may be met when applying these protections to multi-ended
feeders are discussed in the following sections.
13.3.1 A.C. Pilot Wire Protection

A.C. pilot wire relays provide a low-cost fast protection;
they are insensitive to power swings and, owing to their
relative simplicity, their reliability is excellent.
The limitations of pilot wire relays for plain feeder
protection also apply. The length of feeder that can be
protected is limited by the characteristics of the pilot
wires. The protection sees increasing pilot wire resistance
as tending to an open circuit and shunt capacitance as an
a.c. short circuit across the pilots. The protection will have
limiting values for each of these quantities, and when
these are exceeded, loss of sensitivity for internal faults
and maloperation for external faults may occur. For teed
feeders, the currents for an external earth fault will not
usually be the same. The protection must be linear for any
current up to the maximum through-fault value. As a
result, the voltage in the pilots during fault conditions
cannot be kept to low values, and pilot wires with 250V
insulation grade are required.
13.3.2 Balanced Voltage Schemes for Teed Circuits
Per unit
over-reach
error
(ZMO/ZLO)2
In this section two types of older balanced voltage

schemes still found in many locations are described.
ohms/km
13.3.2.1 Translay balanced voltage protection

0.264
0.292
0.2666
Table 13.1: Maximum over-reach errors found

during single circuit working
13.3 MULTI-ENDED FEEDERS

UNIT PROTECTION SCHEMES
A multi-ended feeder is defined as one having three or
more terminals, with either load or generation, or both,
at any terminal. Those terminals with load only are
usually known as taps.
The simplest multi-terminal feeders are three-ended, and
are generally known as teed feeders. This is the type
most commonly found in practice.
The protection schemes described previously for the
protection of two-ended feeders can also be used for

multi-ended feeders. However, the problems involved in
the application of these schemes to multi-ended feeders
are much more complex and require special attention.
Chap13 exeNEW
This is a modification of the balanced voltage scheme

described in Section 10.7.1. Since it is necessary to
maintain linearity in the balancing circuit, though not in
the sending element, the voltage reference is derived
from separate quadrature transformers, as shown in
Figure 13.6. These are auxiliary units with summation
windings energized by the main current transformers in
series with the upper electromagnets of the sensing
elements. The secondary windings of the quadrature
current transformers at all ends are interconnected by
the pilots in a series circuit that also includes the lower
electromagnets of the relays. Secondary windings on the
relay elements are not used, but these elements are
fitted with bias loops in the usual way.
The plain feeder settings are increased in the tee'd
scheme by 50% for one tee and 75% for two.
207
13
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:27
Page 208
End A
13.3.3 Power Line Carrier Phase Comparison Schemes
End B
A
B
C
Quadrature CT
A1
A1
A
C1
N
A1
S1
S2
S1
C1
S2
Relay
S1
13
S2
Pilots
Figure 13.6: Balanced voltage Teed feeder scheme
13.3.2.2 High - speed protection type DSB7

This type is of higher speed and is shown in Figure 13.7.
Summation quadrature transformers are used to provide
the analogue quantity, which is balanced in a series loop
through a pilot circuit. Separate secondary windings on
the quadrature current transformers are connected to
full-wave rectifiers, the outputs of which are connected
in series in a second pilot loop, so that the electromotive
forces summate arithmetically.
The measuring relay is a double-wound moving coil type,
one coil being energized from the vectorial summation
loop; the other receives bias from the scalar summation
in the second loop proportional to the sum of the
currents in the several line terminals, the value being
adjusted by the inclusion of an appropriate value of
resistance. Since the operating and biasing quantities
are both derived by summation, the relays at the
different terminals all behave alike, either to operate or
to restrain as appropriate.
Special features are included to ensure stability, both in
the presence of transformer inrush current flowing
through the feeder zone and also with a 2-1-1
distribution of fault current caused by a short circuit on
the secondary side of a star-delta transformer.
The operating principle of these protection schemes has

already been covered in detail in Section 10.9. It
involves comparing the phase angles of signals derived
from a combination of the sequence currents at each
end of the feeder. When the phase angle difference
exceeds a pre-set value, the trip angle, a trip signal is
sent to the corresponding circuit breakers. In order to
prevent incorrect operation for external faults, two
different detectors, set at different levels, are used. The
low-set detector starts the transmission of carrier signal,
while the high-set detector is used to control the trip
output. Without this safeguard, the scheme could
operate incorrectly for external faults because of
operating tolerances of the equipment and the
capacitive current of the protected feeder. This
condition is worse with multi-terminal feeders, since the
currents at the feeder terminals can be very dissimilar
for an external fault. In the case of the three-terminal
feeder in Figure 13.8, if incorrect operation is to be
avoided, it is necessary to make certain that the low-set
detector at end A or end B is energized when the
current at end C is high enough to operate the high-set
detector at that end. As only one low-set starter, at end
A or end B, needs to be energized for correct operation,
the most unfavourable condition will be when currents
IA and IB are equal. To maintain stability under this
condition, the high-set to low-set setting ratio of the
fault detectors needs to be twice as large as that
required when the scheme is applied to a plain feeder.
This results in a loss of sensitivity, which may make the
equipment unsuitable if the minimum fault level of the
power system is low.
A
C
IA
IC
IB
Fault
B
End A
End B
End C
A
B
C
Figure 13.8: External fault conditions
P4
Quadrature
CT
D Operating coil
E Restraints coil
Bias pilots
A further unfavourable condition is that illustrated in

Figure 13.9. If an internal fault occurs near one of the
ends of the feeder (end B in Figure 13.9) and there is
little or no generation at end C, the current at this end
may be flowing outwards. The protection is then
prevented from operating, since the fault current
distribution is similar to that for an external fault; see
Figure 13.8. The fault can be cleared only by the backup protection and, if high speed of operation is required,
an alternative type of primary protection must be used.
Figure 13.7: Type DSB7 fast teed feeder protection

208
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:27
Page 209
A
IA
IC
Trip
Differential
current
Idiff
Idiff = K Ibias
IB
Restrain
IS
Fault
B
Bias current Ibias
Figure 13.9: Internal fault

with current flowing out at one line end
13.3.4 Differential Relay using Optical Fibre Signalling

Current differential relays can provide unit protection for
multi-ended circuits without the restrictions associated
with other forms of protection. In Section 8.6.5, the
characteristics of optical fibre cables and their use in
protection signalling are outlined.
Their use in a three-ended system is shown in Figure
13.10, where the relays at each line end are
digital/numerical relays interconnected by optical fibre
links so that each can send information to the others. In
practice the optical fibre links can be dedicated to the
protection system or multiplexed, in which case
multiplexing equipment, not shown in Figure 13.10, will
be used to terminate the fibres.
If IA, IB, IC are the current vector signals at line ends A,

B, C, then for a healthy circuit:
IA + IB + IC = 0
The basic principles of operation of the system are that
each relay measures its local three phase currents and
sends its values to the other relays. Each relay then
calculates, for each phase, a resultant differential
current and also a bias current, which is used to restrain
the relay in the manner conventional for biased
differential unit protection.
The bias feature is necessary in this scheme because it is
designed to operate from conventional current
transformers that are subject to transient transformation
errors.
The two quantities are:
I diff > I A + I B + I C
I bias =
1
I A + I B + IC
2
Figure 13.11 shows the percentage biased differential

characteristic used, the tripping criteria being:
I diff > K I bias
and
Optical fibre signalling channels

RA
Figure 13.11: Percentage biased

differential protection characteristic
I diff > I S
RB
where:
A
IA
IB
K = percentage bias setting

IS = minimum differential current setting
RC
IC
C
If the magnitudes of the differential currents indicate

that a fault has occurred, the relays trip their local circuit
breaker.
Figure 13.10: Current differential protection

for teed feeders using optical fibre signalling
A point that should also be considered when applying

this scheme is the attenuation of carrier signal at the
'tee' junctions. This attenuation is a function of the
relative impedances of the branches of the feeder at the
carrier frequency, including the impedance of the
receiving equipment. When the impedances of the
second and third terminals are equal, a power loss of
50% takes place. In other words, the carrier signal sent
from terminal A to terminal B is attenuated by 3dB by
the existence of the third terminal C. If the impedances
of the two branches corresponding to terminal B to C are
not equal, the attenuation may be either greater or less
than 3dB.
209
13
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:30
Page 210
The relays also continuously monitor the communication

channel performance and carry out self-testing and
diagnostic operations. The system measures individual
phase currents and so single phase tripping can be used
when required. Relays are provided with software to reconfigure the protection between two and three terminal
lines, so that modification of the system from two
terminals to three terminals does not require relay
replacement. Further, loss of a single communications
link only degrades scheme performance slightly. The
relays can recognise this and use alternate
communications paths. Only if all communication paths
from a relay fail does the scheme have to revert to
backup protection.
13.4 MULTI-ENDED FEEDERS - DISTANCE RELAYS

Distance protection is widely used at present for tee'd
feeder protection. However, its application is not
straightforward, requiring careful consideration and
systematic checking of all the conditions described later
in this section.
the relay in this case can be expressed in terms of the

source impedances as follows:
Z A = Z LA + Z LB +
(ZSB + Z LB ) Z
(ZSC + Z LC ) LB
The magnitude of the third term in this expression is a

function of the total impedances of the branches A and
B and can reach a relatively high value when the fault
current contribution of branch C is much larger than
that of branch A. Figure 13.13 illustrates how a
distance relay with a mho characteristic located at A
with a Zone 2 element set to 120% of the protected
feeder AB, fails to see a fault at the remote busbar B.
The tee point T in this example is halfway between
substations A and B (ZLA = ZLB) and the fault currents
IA and IC have been assumed to be identical in
magnitude and phase angle. With these conditions, the
fault appears to the relay to be located at B' instead of
at B - i.e. the relay appears to under-reach.
ZSA
Most of the problems found when applying distance

protection to teed feeders are common to all schemes.
A preliminary discussion of these problems will assist in
the assessment of the performance of the different types
of distance schemes.
B
IA
IB
ZSB
ZLB
ZLA
ZLC
Fault
IC
C
13.4.1 Apparent Impedance seen by Distance Relays
ZSC
The impedance seen by the distance relays is affected by

the current infeeds in the branches of the feeders.
Referring to Figure 13.12, for a fault at the busbars of
the substation B, the voltage VA at busbar A is given by:
Figure 13.12: Fault at substation B busbars

X
B'
VA = IAZLA + IBZLB
so the impedance ZA seen by the distance relay at
terminal A is given by:
13
V
I
Z A = A = Z LA + B Z LB
IA
IA
or
I
Z A = Z LA + B Z LB
IA
...Equation 13.5
or
A
Z A = Z LA + Z LB +
IC
Z LB
IA
Figure 13.13: Apparent impedance

presented to the relay at substation A for
a fault at substation B busbars
The apparent impedance presented to the relay has been

modified by the term (IC /IA)ZLB. If the pre-fault load is
zero, the currents IA and IC are in phase and their ratio
is a real number. The apparent impedance presented to
The under-reaching effect in teed feeders can be found

for any kind of fault. For the sake of simplicity, the
equations and examples mentioned so far have been for
210
14/06/02
13:30
Page 211
balanced faults only. For unbalanced faults, especially

those involving earth, the equations become somewhat
more complicated, as the ratios of the sequence fault
current contributions at terminals A and C may not be
the same. An extreme example of this condition is
found when the third terminal is a tap with no
generation but with the star point of the primary
winding of the transformer connected directly to earth,
as shown in Figure 13.14. The corresponding sequence
networks are illustrated in Figure 13.15.
B
ZSA A
IA
ZLC
Phase A
to ground fault
ZT
C
M Load
Figure 13.14: Transformer tap with primary
winding solidly earthed
ZSA1
ZLA1
A1
T1
ZLB1
IA1 Z
LJ1
EA
13.4.2 Effect of Pre-fault Load

In all the previous discussions it has been assumed that
the power transfer between terminals of the feeder
immediately before the fault occurred was zero. If this is
not the case, the fault currents IA and IC in Figure 13.12
may not be in phase, and the factor IC /IA in the equation
for the impedance seen by the relay at A, will be a
complex quantity with a positive or a negative phase
angle according to whether the current IC leads or lags
the current IA. For the fault condition previously
considered in Figures 13.12 and 13.13, the pre-fault load
current may displace the impedance seen by the distance
relay to points such as B1 or B2, shown in Figure 13.16,
according to the phase angle and the magnitude of the
pre-fault load current. Humpage and Lewis [13.3] have
analysed the effect of pre-fault load on the impedances
seen by distance relays for typical cases. Their results
and conclusions point out some of the limitations of
certain relay characteristics and schemes.
ZSB
ZLB
ZLA
compensate for the reduction in zero sequence current.

However, the solution has two possible limitations:
i. over-reach will occur when the transformer is not
connected, and hence operation for faults outside
the protected zone may occur
ii. the inherent possibility of maloperation of the
earth fault elements for earth faults behind the
relay location is increased
ZSH1
B1
EB
ZT1
B'2
ZM1
ZSA2
ZLA2
G1
T2
B'1
ZLB2
IA2 ZLC2
Chap13 exeNEW
ZSB2
B2
B
ZT2
ZM2
ZSA0
ZLA0
A0
T0
ZLB0
IA0 ZLC0
ZSB0
B0
IC0
ZT0
A
Figure 13.16: effects of the pre-fault load on
the apparent impedance presented to the relay
Figure 13.15: Sequence networks

for a phase A to ground fault at busbar B
in the system shown in Figure 13.14
It can be seen from Figure 13.15 that the presence of the

tap has little effect in the positive and negative
sequence networks. However, the zero sequence
impedance of the branch actually shunts the zero
sequence current in branch A. As a result, the distance
relay located at terminal A tends to under-reach. One
solution to the problem is to increase the residual
current compensating factor in the distance relay, to
13.4.3 Effect of the Fault Current Flowing

Outwards at One Terminal
Up to this point it has been assumed that the fault
currents at terminals A and C flow into the feeder for a
fault at the busbar B. Under some conditions, however,
the current at one of these terminals may flow outwards
instead of inwards. A typical case is illustrated in Figure
13.17; that of a parallel tapped feeder with one of the
ends of the parallel circuit open at terminal A.
211
13
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:30
Page 212
IA
IB
T
ZA
under reverse unbalanced fault conditions if the current

flowing through the relay is high and the relay setting
relatively large. These conditions arise principally from
earth faults. The relay setting and the reverse fault
current are now related, the first being a function of the
maximum line length and the second depending mainly
on the impedance of the shortest feeder and the fault
level at that terminal. For instance, referring to Figure
13.19, the setting of the relay at terminal A will depend
on the impedance (ZA + ZB) and the fault current infeed
IC, for a fault at B, while the fault current IA for a reverse
fault may be quite large if the T point is near the
terminals A and C.
ZB
I'B
IC
I'C
Fault
13
B
IA
Figure 13.17: Internal Fault at busbar B

with current flowing out at terminal C
ZB
ZA
ZC
Fault
A
IA
IC
IB
Fault
I'B
IC
IB
Figure 13.19: External fault behind

he relay at terminal A
I'C
A summary of the main problems met in the application of

distance protection to tee'd feeders is given in Table 13.2.
Case Description
1
Figure 13.18: Internal fault near busbar B
with current flowing out at terminal C
As the currents IA and IC now have different signs,

the factor IC /IA becomes negative. Consequently, the
distance relay at terminal A sees an impedance smaller
than that of the protected feeder, (ZA + ZB), and
therefore has a tendency to over-reach. In some cases
the apparent impedance presented to the relay may be
as low as 50% of the impedance of the protected feeder,
and even lower if other lines exist between terminals B
and C.
If the fault is internal to the feeder and close to the
busbars B, as shown in Figure 13.18, the current at
terminal C may still flow outwards. As a result, the fault
appears as an external fault to the distance relay at
terminal C, which fails to operate.
13.4.4 Maloperation with Reverse Faults

Earth fault distance relays with a directional
characteristic tend to lose their directional properties
3
4
5
Relevant figure
number
Under-reaching effect for internal faults

due to current infeed at the T point
13.12 to 13.15
Effect of pre-fault load on the impedance

seen' by the relay
13.16
Over-reaching effect for external faults, due

to current flowing outwards at one terminal
13.17
Failure to operate for an internal fault,

due to current flowing out at one terminal
13.18
Incorrect operation for an external fault,

due to high current fed from nearest terminal
13.19
Table 13.2: Main problems met in the application

of distance protection to tee'd feeders.
13.5 MULTI-ENDED FEEDERS

APPLICATION OF DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEMES
The schemes that have been described in Chapter 12 for
the protection of plain feeders may also be used for tee'd
feeder protection. However, the applications of some of
these schemes are much more limited in this case.
Distance schemes can be subdivided into two main
groups; transfer trip schemes and blocking schemes. The
usual considerations when comparing these schemes are
security, that is, no operation for external faults, and
212
14/06/02
13:30
Page 213
dependability, that is, assured operation for internal

faults.
In addition, it should be borne in mind that transfer trip
schemes require fault current infeed at all the terminals
to achieve high-speed protection for any fault in the
feeder. This is not the case with blocking schemes.
While it is rare to find a plain feeder in high voltage
systems where there is current infeed at one end only, it
is not difficult to envisage a teed feeder with no current
infeed at one end, for example when the teed feeder is
operating as a plain feeder with the circuit breaker at
one of the terminals open. Nevertheless, transfer trip
schemes are also used for teed feeder protection, as
they offer some advantages under certain conditions.
13.5.1 Transfer Trip Under-Reach Schemes

The main requirement for transfer trip under-reach
schemes is that the Zone 1 of the protection, at one end
at least, shall see a fault in the feeder. In order to meet
this requirement, the Zone 1 characteristics of the relays
at different ends must overlap, either the three of them
or in pairs. Cases 1, 2 and 3 in Table 13.2 should be
checked when the settings for the Zone 1 characteristics
are selected. If the conditions mentioned in case 4 are
found, direct transfer trip may be used to clear the fault;
the alternative is sequentially at end C when the fault
current IC reverses after the circuit breaker at terminal B
has opened; see Figure 13.18.
Transfer trip schemes may be applied to feeders that
have branches of similar length. If one or two of the
branches are very short, and this is often the case in
tee'd feeders, it may be difficult or impossible to make
the Zone 1 characteristics overlap. Alternative schemes
are then required.
Another case for which under-reach schemes may be
advantageous is the protection of tapped feeders, mainly
when the tap is short and is not near one of the main
terminals. Overlap of the Zone 1 characteristics is then
easily achieved, and the tap does not require protection
applied to the terminal.
These considerations, in addition to the signalling

channel requirements mentioned later on, make transfer
trip over-reach schemes unattractive for multi-ended
feeder protection.
13.5.3 Blocking Schemes

Blocking schemes are particularly suited to the protection
of multi-ended feeders, since high-speed operation can
be obtained with no fault current infeed at one or more
terminals. The only disadvantage is when there is fault
current outfeed from a terminal, as shown in Figure 13.18.
This is case 4 in Table 13.2. The protection units at that
terminal may see the fault as an external fault and send
a blocking signal to the remote terminals. Depending on
the scheme logic either relay operation will be blocked, or
clearance will be in Zone 2 time.
The setting of the directional unit should be such that no
maloperation can occur for faults in the reverse
direction; case 5 in Table 13.2.
13.5.4 Signalling Channel Considerations

The minimum number of signalling channels required
depends on the type of scheme used. With under-reach
and blocking schemes, only one channel is required,
whereas a permissive over-reach scheme req-uires as
many channels as there are feeder ends. The signalling
channel equipment at each terminal should include one
transmitter and (N-1) receivers, where N is the total
number of feeder ends. This may not be a problem if
fibre-optic cables are used, but could lead to problems
otherwise.
If frequency shift channels are used to improve the
reliability of the protection schemes, mainly with
transfer trip schemes, N additional frequencies are
required for the purpose. Problems of signal attenuation
and impedance matching should also be carefully
considered when power line carrier frequency channels
are used.
13.5.5 Directional Comparison Blocking Schemes

13.5.2 Transfer Trip Over-Reach Schemes
For correct operation when internal faults occur, the
relays at the three ends should see a fault at any point
in the feeder. This condition is often difficult to meet,
since the impedance seen by the relays for faults at one
of the remote ends of the feeder may be too large, as in
case 1 in Table 13.2, increasing the possibility of
maloperation for reverse faults, case 5 in Table 13.2. In
addition, the relay characteristic might encroach on the
load impedance.
Chap13 exeNEW
The principle of operation of these schemes is the same

as that of the distance blocking schemes described in
the previous section. The main advantage of directional
comparison schemes over distance schemes is their
greater capability to detect high-resistance earth faults.
The reliability of these schemes, in terms of stability for
through faults, is lower than that of distance blocking
schemes. However, with the increasing reliability of
modern signalling channels, directional comparison
blocking schemes seem to offer good solutions to the
many and difficult problems encountered in the
213
13
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:30
Page 214
protection of multi-ended feeders. Modern relays

implement the required features in different ways
for further information see Chapter 12 and specific
relay manuals.
VF
E
jXS
-jXC
Z<
IF
13.6 PROTECTION OF SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
13
Figure 13.20 depicts the basic power transfer equation.

It can be seen from this equation that transmitted power
is proportional to the system voltage level and load angle
whilst being inversely proportional to system impedance.
Series compensated lines are used in transmission
networks where the required level of transmitted power
can not be met, either from a load requirement or system
stability requirement. Series compensated transmission
lines introduce a series connected capacitor, which has
the net result of reducing the overall inductive
impedance of the line, hence increasing the prospective,
power flow. Typical levels of compensation are 35%,
50% and 70%, where the percentage level dictates the
capacitor impedance compared to the transmission line
it is associated with.
EA
Bus A
Bus B
EB
ZT
PT a
EA EB sin d
ZT
Figure 13.20: Power transfer

in a transmission line
XS>XC
IF
VF
Figure 13.21: Voltage inversion
on a transmission line
A second problem is that of current inversion which is

demonstrated in Figure 13.22. In this case, the overall
fault impedance is taken to be capacitive. The fault
current therefore leads the system e.m.f. by 90 whilst
the measured fault voltage remains in phase with system
e.m.f.. Again this condition can give rise to directional
stability problems for a variety of protection devices.
Practically, the case of current inversion is difficult to
obtain. In order to protect capacitors from high over
voltages during fault conditions some form of voltage
limiting device (usually in the form of MOVs) is installed
to bypass the capacitor at a set current level. In the case
of current inversion, the overall fault impedance has to
be capacitive and will generally be small. This leads to
high levels of fault current, which will trigger the MOVs
and bypass the capacitors, hence leaving an inductive
fault impedance and preventing the current inversion.
The introduction of a capacitive impedance to a network

can give rise to several relaying problems. The most
common of these is the situation of voltage inversion,
which is shown in Figure 13.21. In this case a fault
occurs on the protected line. The overall fault impedance
is inductive and hence the fault current is inductive
(shown lagging the system e.m.f. by 90 degrees in this
case). However, the voltage measured by the relay is that
across the capacitor and will therefore lag the fault
current by 90 degrees.
The net result is that the voltage measured by the relay
is in anti-phase to the system e.m.f.. Whilst this view is
highly simplistic, it adequately demonstrates potential
relay problems, in that any protection reliant upon
making a directional decision bases its decision on an
inductive system i.e. one where a forward fault is
indicated by fault current lagging the measured voltage.
A good example of this is a distance relay, which assumes
the transmission line is an evenly distributed inductive
impedance. Presenting the relay with a capacitive
voltage (impedance) can lead the relay to make an
incorrect directional decision.
VF
E
jXS
-jXC
VF
jIFXS
XS< XC
Z<
IF
IF
Figure 13.22: Current inversion
in a transmission line
In general, the application of protective relays to a series

compensated power system needs careful evaluation.
The problems associated with the introduction of a series
capacitor can be overcome by a variety of relaying
techniques so it is important to ensure the suitability of
the chosen protection. Each particular application
requires careful investigation to determine the most
appropriate solution in respect of protection there are
no general guidelines that can be given.
214
14/06/02
13:30
Page 215
13.7 EXAMPLES
Relay
Parameter
ZL1 (mag)
ZL1 (ang)
ZL0 (mag)
ZL0 (ang)
KZ0 (mag)
KZ0 (ang)
Z1 (mag)
Z1 (ang)
Z2 (mag)
Z2 (ang)
Z3 (mag)
Z3 (ang)
R1ph
R2ph
R3ph
KZ1 (mag)
KZ1 (ang)
KZ2 (mag)
KZ2 (ang)
TZ1
TZ2
TZ3
R1G
R2G
R3G
In this section, an example calculation illustrating the

solution to a problem mentioned in this Chapter is given.
13.7.1 Distance Relay applied to Parallel Circuits

The system diagram shown in Figure 13.23 indicates a
simple 110kV network supplied from a 220kV grid through
two auto-transformers. The following example shows the
calculations necessary to check the suitability of three
zone distance protection to the two parallel feeders
interconnecting substations A and B, Line 1 being
selected for this purpose. All relevant data for this
exercise are given in the diagram. The MiCOM P441 relay
with quadrilateral characteristics is used to provide the
relay data for the example. Relay quantities used in the
example are listed in Table 13.3, and calculations are
carried out in terms of actual system impedances in
ohms, rather than CT secondary quantities. This simplifies
the calculations, and enables the example to be simplified
by excluding considerations of CT ratios. Most modern
distance relays permit settings to be specified in system
quantities rather than CT secondary quantities, but older
relays may require the system quantities to be converted
to impedances as seen by the relay.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Value
Line positive sequence impedance (magnitude)
21.95
Line positive sequence impedance (phase angle)
66.236
Line zero sequence impedance (magnitude)
54.1
Line zero sequence impedance (phase angle)
70.895
Default residual compensation factor (magnitude)
0.49
Default residual compensation factor (phase angle)
7.8
17.56
66.3
30.73
66.3
131.8
66.3
84.8
84.8
84.8
Zone 1 residual compensation factor (magnitude)
0.426
Zone 1 residual compensation factor (phase angle)
9.2
Zone 2 residual compensation factor (magnitude)
not used
Zone 2 residual compensation factor (phase angle) not used
Time delay - Zone 1
0
Time delay - Zone 2
0.25
Time delay - Zone 3
0.45
84.8
84.8
84.8
Units
deg
deg
deg
deg
deg
deg
deg
deg
s
s
s
Chap13 exeNEW
Table 13.3: Distance relay settings
13.7.1.1 Residual compensation

Grid supply at 220kV
Maximum fault level
7500MVA
Minimum fault level
2500MVA
T3
120MVA 220/110/11kV
transformers
XHL=0.15; XHT=0.35;
XLT=0.25
XH=0.125; XL=0.025
XT=0.225 on 120MVA
T4
110kV Substation P
Current transformer
ratio 600/1A
The relays used are calibrated in terms of the positive

sequence impedance of the protected line. Since the earth
fault impedance of Line 1 is different from the positive
sequence impedance, the impedance seen by the relay in
the case of a fault involving earth will be different to that
seen for a phase fault. Hence, the reach of the earth fault
elements of the relay needs to be different.
For the relay used, this adjustment is provided by the
residual (or neutral) compensation factor Kzo, set equal to:
T5
45MVA
132/33kV
transformers
XT=0.125
Line 1
T6
K ZO =
Voltage transformer
ratio 110kV/110V
(Zo Z1 )
3 Z1
Line 2
K ZO =
110kV
Substation Q
T7
Line 3
45MVA 132/33kV
transformers
XT=0.125
(Zo Z1 )
3 Z1
For Lines 1 and 2,

Z L1 = 0.177 + j0.402
Line 4
(0.439 66.236 )
33kV
busbars
Z LO = 0.354 + j1.022
110kV transmission lines: Z1=0.177+j0.40/km

ZO=0.354+j1.022/km
Length of line: 1, 2 =50km
3 =100km
4 =40km
(1.082 70.895 )
o
Hence,
K ZO = 0.490
Figure 13.23: Example network for distance

relay setting calculation
K ZO =7.8 o
215
13
Chap13 exeNEW
14/06/02
13:30
Page 216
13.7.1.2 Zone impedance reach settings phase faults
13.7.1.6 Zone Time Delay Settings
Firstly, the impedance reaches for the three relay zones

are calculated.
Proper co-ordination of the distance relay settings with

those of other relays is required. Independent timers are
available for the three zones to ensure this.
13.7.1.3 Zone 1 reach

Zone 1 impedance is set to 80% of the impedance of the
protected line. Hence,
Z1 = 0.8 50 0.439 66.236 o

= 0.8 21.95 66.236 o
=17.56 66.236 o
13
Use a value of 17.5666.3 o

Zone 2 impedance reach is set to cover the maximum of:
(i) 120% of Line 1 length
(ii) Line 1 + 50% of shortest line from Substation B
i.e. 50% of Line 4
From the line impedances given,
For Zone 1, instantaneous tripping is normal. A time

delay is used only in cases where large d.c. offsets occur
and old circuit breakers, incapable of breaking the
instantaneous d.c. component, are involved.
The Zone 2 element has to grade with the relays
protecting Lines 3 and 4 since the Zone 2 element covers
part of these lines. Assuming that Lines 3/4 have
distance, unit or instantaneous high-set overcurrent
protection applied, the time delay required is that to
cover the total clearance time of the downstream relays.
To this must be added the reset time for the Zone 2
elements following clearance of a fault on an adjacent
line, and a suitable safety margin. A typical time delay is
250ms, and the normal range is 200-300ms.
The considerations for the Zone 3 element are the same as
for the Zone 2 element, except that the downstream fault
clearance time is that for the Zone 2 element of a distance
relay or IDMT overcurrent protection. Assuming distance
relays are used, a typical time is 450ms. In summary:
(i) 1.2 21.95 66.236 o = 26.34 66.236 o
TZ1 = 0ms (instantaneous)
o
(ii) 21.95 66.236 +
TZ2 = 250ms
TZ3 = 450ms
0.5 40 0.439 66.236 o

It is clear that condition (ii) governs the setting, and
therefore the initial Zone 2 reach setting is:
Z2 = 30.73 66.3 o
The effect of parallel Line 2 is to make relay 1 underreach
for faults on adjacent line sections, as discussed in
Section 11.9.3. This is not a problem for the phase fault
elements because Line 1 will always be protected.
The function of Zone 3 is to provide backup protection
for uncleared faults in adjacent line sections. The
criterion used is that the relay should be set to cover
120% of the impedance between the relay location and
the end of the longest adjacent line, taking account of
any possible fault infeed from other circuits or parallel
paths. In this case, faults in Line 3 will result in the relay
under-reaching due to the parallel Lines 1 and 2, so the
impedance of Line 3 should be doubled to take this effect
into account. Therefore,
21.95 66.3 o
Z3 =1.2
+100 2 0.439 66.3 o

=131.8 66.3 o
13.7.1.7 Phase Fault Resistive Reach Settings

With the use of a quadrilateral characteristic, the
resistive reach settings for each zone can be set
independently of the impedance reach settings. The
resistive reach setting represents the maximum amount
of additional fault resistance (in excess of the line
impedance) for which a zone will trip, regardless of the
fault within the zone.
Two constraints are imposed upon the settings, as
follows:
(i) it must be greater than the maximum expected
phase-phase fault resistance (principally that of
the fault arc)
(ii) it must be less than the apparent resistance
measured due to the heaviest load on the line
The minimum fault current at Substation B is of the
order of 1.5kA, leading to a typical arc resistance Rarc
using the van Warrington formula (equation 11.6) of 9.
Using the current transformer ratio on Line 1 as a guide
to the maximum expected load current, the minimum
load impedance Zlmin will be 106. Typically, the
resistive reaches will be set to avoid the minimum load
impedance by a 20% margin for the phase elements,
leading to a maximum resistive reach setting of 84.8..
216
14/06/02
13:30
Page 217
Therefore, the resistive reach setting lies between 9 and

84.8. While each zone can have its own resistive reach
setting, for this simple example, all of the resistive reach
settings can be set equal (depending on the particular
distance protection scheme used and the need to include
Power Swing Blocking, this need not always be the case).
where:
Zadj = impedance of adjacent line
covered by Zone 2
I fltp = fault current in parallel
line
Suitable settings are chosen to be 80% of the load

resistance:
I flt = total fault current

since the two parallel lines are identical, and hence, for
Lines 1 and 2,
R3 ph = 84.8
R2 ph = 84.8
Under - reach = 8.78 66.3 o 0.5
R1 ph = 84.8
= 4.39 66.3 o
13.7.1.8 Earth Fault Reach Settings

By default, the residual compensation factor as
calculated in section 13.7.1.1 is used to adjust the phase
fault reach setting in the case of earth faults, and is
applied to all zones. However, it is also possible to apply
this compensation to zones individually. Two cases in
particular require consideration, and are covered in this
example.
13.7.1.9 Zone 1 earth fault reach
Where distance protection is applied to parallel lines (as
in this example), the Zone 1 earth fault elements may
sometimes over-reach and therefore operate when one
line is out of service and earthed at both ends
The solution is to reduce the earth fault reach of the
Zone 1 element to typically 80% of the default setting.
Hence:
% Under-reach =
and hence
% Under-reach = 14.3%
This amount of under-reach is not significant and no
adjustment need be made. If adjustment is required, this
can be achieved by using the KZ2 relay setting,
increasing it over the KZ0 setting by the percentage
under-reach. When this is done, care must also be taken
that the percentage over-reach during single circuit
operation is not excessive if it is then use can be made
of the alternative setting groups provided in most
modern distance relays to change the relay settings
according to the number of circuits in operation.
13.7.1 11 Ground fault resistive reach settings
The same settings can be used as for the phase fault
resistive reaches. Hence,
K Z1 = 0.8 K ZO
= 0.8 0.532
R3G = 84.8
R2G = 84.8
R1G = 84.8
= 0.426
In practice, the setting is selected by using an alternative
setting group, selected when the parallel line is out of
service and earthed.
13.7.1.10 Zone 2 earth fault reach
This completes the setting of the relay. Table 13.3 also

shows the settings calculated.
13.8 REFERENCES
With parallel circuits, the Zone 2 element will tend to

under-reach due to the zero sequence mutual coupling
between the lines.
Maloperation may occur, particularly for earth faults
occurring on the remote busbar. The effect can be
countered by increasing the Zone 2 earth fault reach
setting, but first it is necessary to calculate the amount
of under-reach that occurs.
Underreach = Zadj
Under-reach
Reach of protected zone
Chap13 exeNEW
I fltp
I flt
13.1 Some factors affecting the accuracy of distance

type protective equipment under earth fault
conditions. Davison, E.B. and Wright, A. Proc.
IEE Vol. 110, No. 9, Sept. 1963, pp. 1678-1688.
13.2 Distance protection performance under
conditions of single-circuit working in doublecircuit transmission lines. Humpage, W.D. and
Kandil, M.S. Proc. IEE. Vol. 117. No. 4, April
1970, pp. 766-770.
13.3 Distance protection of tee'd circuits. Humpage,
W.A. and Lewis, D.W. Proc. IEE, Vol. 114, No. 10,
Oct. 1967, pp. 1483-1498.
217
13
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:37
Page 218
14
Auto-Reclosing
Introduction
14.1
Application of auto-reclosing
14.2
Auto-reclosing on HV distribution networks
14.3
Factors influencing HV auto-reclose schemes
14.4
Auto-reclosing on EHV transmission lines
14.5
High speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems
14.6
Single-phase auto-reclosing
14.7
High speed auto-reclosing on lines

employing distance schemes
14.8
Delayed auto-reclosing on EHV systems
14.9
Operating features of auto-reclose schemes
14.10
Auto-close circuits
14.11
Examples of auto-reclose applications
14.12
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:37
Page 219
14
Auto-Reclosing
14.1 INTRODUCTION
Faults on overhead lines fall into one of three categories:
a. transient
b. semi-permanent
c. permanent
80-90% of faults on any overhead line network are
transient in nature. The remaining 10%-20% of faults
are either semi-permanent or permanent.
Transient faults are commonly caused by lightning and
temporary contact with foreign objects. The immediate
tripping of one or more circuit breakers clears the fault.
Subsequent re-energisation of the line is usually successful.
A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a
semi-permanent fault. The cause of the fault would not
be removed by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but
could be burnt away during a time-delayed trip. HV
overhead lines in forest areas are prone to this type of
fault. Permanent faults, such as broken conductors, and
faults on underground cable sections, must be located
and repaired before the supply can be restored.
Use of an auto-reclose scheme to re-energise the line
after a fault trip permits successful re-energisation of
the line. Sufficient time must be allowed after tripping
for the fault arc to de-energise prior to reclosing
otherwise the arc will re-strike. Such schemes have been
the cause of a substantial improvement in continuity of
supply. A further benefit, particularly to EHV systems, is
the maintenance of system stability and synchronism.
A typical single-shot auto-reclose scheme is shown in
Figures 14.1 and 14.2. Figure 14.1 shows a successful
reclosure in the event of a transient fault, and Figure
14.2 an unsuccessful reclosure followed by lockout of the
circuit breaker if the fault is permanent.
14.2 APPLICATION OF AUTO-RECLOSING

The most important parameters of an auto-reclose
scheme are:
1. dead time
2. reclaim time
3. single or multi-shot
These parameters are influenced by:
a. type of protection
b. type of switchgear
c. possible stability problems
d. effects on the various types of consumer loads
219
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:37
Page 220
Instant of fault
Operates
Resets
Protection
Operating
time
Trip coil Contacts
Arc
Contacts
energised separate extinguished fully open
Transient
fault
Closing circuit
energised
Contacts Contacts
make fully closed
Circuit
breaker
Closing
time
Opening Arcing
time
time
Operating time
Dead time
System disturbance time

Reclose initiated by protection
Relay ready to respond to further fault incidents

(after successful reclosure)
Auto-reclose relay
Dead time
Closing
pulse time
Reclaim time
Time
Figure 14.1: Single-shot auto-reclose scheme operation for a transient fault
Operates
Reclose
on to fault
Resets
Operates
Resets
Protection
Operating
time
Trip coil Contacts
Arc
Contacts
energised separate extinguished fully open
Permanent
fault
Closing circuit Contacts

energised
make
Arc
Contacts
Contacts
fully closed separate Extinguished
Contacts fully
open
Auto-Reclosing
Circuit
breaker
Opening Arcing
time
time
Operating time
Reclose initiated
by protection
Closing
time
Trip coil
energised
Dead time
Relay locks out for protection

re-operation before reclaim
time has elapsed
Auto-reclose
relay
Dead time
Closing
pulse time
Reclaim time
starts
Reclaim time
resets
Time
14
Figure 14.2: Operation of single-shot auto-reclose scheme on a permanent fault
The weighting given to the above factors is different for

HV distribution networks and EHV transmission systems
and therefore it is convenient to discuss them under
separate headings. Sections 14.3 and 14.4 cover the
application of auto-reclosing to HV distribution networks
while Sections 14.5-14.9 cover EHV schemes.
The rapid expansion in the use of auto-reclosing has led
to the existence of a variety of different control schemes.
The various features in common use are discussed in
Section 14.10. The related subject of auto-closing, that
is, the automatic closing of normally open circuit
breakers, is dealt with in Section 14.11.
mainly to radial feeders where problems of system

stability do not arise, and the main advantages to be
derived from its use can be summarised as follows:
a. reduction to a minimum of the interruptions of
supply to the consumer
b. instantaneous fault clearance can be introduced, with
the accompanying benefits of shorter fault duration,
less fault damage, and fewer permanent faults
As 80% of overhead line faults are transient, elimination
of loss of supply from this cause by the introduction of
auto-reclosing gives obvious benefits through:
a. improved supply continuity
b. reduction of substation visits
14.3 AUTO-RECLOSING ON HV DISTRIBUTION

NETWORKS
On HV distribution networks, auto-reclosing is applied
Instantaneous tripping reduces the duration of the
220
17/06/02
9:37
Page 221
power arc resulting from an overhead line fault to a

minimum. The chance of permanent damage occurring
to the line is reduced. The application of instantaneous
protection may result in non-selective tripping of a
number of circuit breakers and an ensuing loss of supply
to a number of healthy sections. Auto-reclosing allows
these circuit breakers to be reclosed within a few
seconds. With transient faults, the overall effect would
be loss of supply for a very short time but affecting a
larger number of consumers. If only time-graded
protection without auto-reclose was used, a smaller
number of consumers might be affected, but for a longer
time period.
When instantaneous protection is used with autoreclosing, the scheme is normally arranged to inhibit the
instantaneous protection after the first trip. For a
permanent fault, the time-graded protection will give
discriminative tripping after reclosure, resulting in the
isolation of the faulted section. Some schemes allow a
number of reclosures and time-graded trips after the
first instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning
out and clearance of semi-permanent faults. A further
benefit of instantaneous tripping is a reduction in circuit
breaker maintenance by reducing pre-arc heating when
clearing transient faults.
When considering feeders that are partly overhead line
and partly underground cable, any decision to install
auto-reclosing would be influenced by any data known
on the frequency of transient faults. Where a significant
proportion of faults are permanent, the advantages of
auto-reclosing are small, particularly since reclosing on
to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage.
14.4 FACTORS INFLUENCING HV AUTO-RECLOSE

SCHEMES
of the fault arc. Other time delays that contribute to the

total system disturbance time must also be kept as short as
possible. The problem arises only on distribution networks
with more than one power source, where power can be fed
into both ends of an inter-connecting line. A typical
example is embedded generation (see Chapter 17), or
where a small centre of population with a local diesel
generating plant may be connected to the rest of the
supply system by a single tie-line.
The use of high-speed protection, such as unit protection
or distance schemes, with operating times of less than
0.05s is essential. The circuit breakers must have very
short operation times and then be able to reclose the
circuit after a dead time of the order of 0.3s-0.6s to
allow for fault-arc de-ionisation.
It may be desirable in some cases to use synchronism check
logic, so that auto-reclosing is prevented if the phase angle
has moved outside specified limits. The matter is dealt
with more fully in Section 14.9 on EHV systems.
14.4.1.2 Type of load
On HV systems, the main problem to be considered in
relation to dead time is the effect on various types of
consumer load.
a. industrial consumers
Most industrial consumers operate mixed loads
comprising induction motors, lighting, process
control and static loads. Synchronous motors may
also be used. Dead time has to be long enough to
allow motor circuits to trip out on loos of supply.
Once the supply is restored, restarting of drives can
then occur under direction of the process control
system in a safe and programmed manner, and can
often be fast enough to ensure no significant loss
of production or product quality
b. domestic consumers
It is improbable that expensive processes or dangerous
conditions will be involved with domestic consumers
and the main consideration is that of inconvenience
and compensation for supply interruption. A dead
time of seconds or a few minutes is of little
importance compared with the loss of cooking
facilities, central heating, light and audio/visual
entertainment resulting from a longer supply failure
that could occur without auto-reclosing
The factors that influence the choice of dead time,

reclaim time, and the number of shots are now discussed.
14.4.1 Dead Time

Several factors affect the selection of system dead time
as follows:
a. system stability and synchronism
b. type of load
c. CB characteristics
d. fault path de-ionisation time
e. protection reset time
These factors are discussed in the following sections.
14.4.1.1 System stability and synchronism
In order to reclose without loss of synchronism after a fault
on the interconnecting feeder, the dead time must be kept
to the minimum permissible consistent with de-ionisation
14.4.1.3 Circuit breaker characteristics

The time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a
tripping and reclosing operation must be taken into
consideration, especially when assessing the possibility
of applying high speed auto-reclosing.
a. mechanism resetting time
Most circuit breakers are trip free, which means that
the breaker can be tripped during the closing stroke.
221
Auto-Reclosing
Chap14 -218-231
14
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:37
Page 222
After tripping, a time of the order of 0.2s must be

allowed for the trip-free mechanism to reset before
applying a closing impulse. Where high speed reclosing
is required, a latch check interlock is desirable in the
reclosing circuit
b. closing time
This is the time interval between the energisation of the
closing mechanism and the making of the contacts.
Owing to the time constant of the solenoid and the
inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may
take 0.3s to close. A spring-operated breaker, on the
other hand, can close in less than 0.2s. Modern vacuum
circuit breakers may have a closing time of less than 0.1s
The circuit breaker mechanism imposes a minimum dead
time made up from the sum of (a) and (b) above. Figure
14.3 illustrates the performance of modern HV circuit
breakers in this respect. Older circuit breakers may
require longer times than those shown.
Arc
extinguished
Contacts
separate
Tripp
initiation
Breaker fully open:

closing circuit energised
Auto-Reclosing
t1
t2
14
Time (s)
t3
Contacts
make
Breaker
fullyy
closed
t4
t1
t2
3
t4
t5
t6
Oil
11kV
0.06
0.1
0.08
0.16
0.24
0.02
Vacuum
15kV
0.038
0.053
0.023
0.048
0.28
0.07
Oil
132kV
0.03
0.06
0.2
0.35
0.55
0.01
Air
380kV
0.035
0.045
0.235
0.065
0.3
0.02
SF6
132kV
0.04
0.07
0.03
0.08
0.11
0.12
When short dead times are required, the protection

relays must reset almost instantaneously, a requirement
that is easily met by the use of static, digital and
numerical I.D.M.T. relays.
14.4.2 Reclaim Time

Factors affecting the setting of the reclaim time are
discussed in the following sections.
14.4.2.1 Type of protection
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow the
protection relays to operate when the circuit breaker is
reclosed on to a permanent fault. The most common
forms of protection applied to HV lines are I.D.M.T. or
definite time over-current and earth-fault relays. The
maximum operating time for the former with very low
fault levels could be up to 30 seconds, while for fault
levels of several times rating the operating time may be
10 seconds or less.
In the case of definite time protection, settings of 3
seconds or less are common, with 10 seconds as an
absolute maximum. It has been common practice to use
reclaim times of 30 seconds on HV auto-reclose schemes.
However, there is a danger with a setting of this length
that during a thunderstorm, when the incidence of
transient faults is high, the breaker may reclose
successfully after one fault, and then trip and lock out
for a second fault within this time. Use of a shorter
reclaim time of, say, 15 seconds may enable the second
fault to be treated as a separate incident, with a further
successful reclosure.
t6
t5
when on maximum time setting, and dead times of at

least this value may be required.
SF6
380kV
0.02
0.05
0.01
0.06
0.07
0.04
Where fault levels are low, it may be difficult to select

I.D.M.T. time settings to give satisfactory grading with an
operating time limit of 15 seconds, and the matter
becomes a question of selecting a reclaim time
compatible with I.D.M.T. requirements.
Figure 14.3: Typical circuit breaker trip-close

operation times
14.4.1.4 De-ionisation of fault path

As mentioned above, successful high speed reclosure
requires the interruption of the fault by the circuit
breaker to be followed by a time delay long enough to
allow the ionised air to disperse. This time is dependent
on the system voltage, cause of fault, weather conditions
and so on, but at voltages up to 66kV, 0.1s-0.2s should
be adequate. On HV systems, therefore, fault deionisation time is of less importance than circuit breaker
time delays.
14.4.1.5 Protection reset time
If time delayed protection is used, it is essential that the
timing device shall fully reset during the dead time, so
that correct time discrimination will be maintained after
reclosure on to a fault. The reset time of the
electromechanical I.D.M.T. relay is 10 seconds or more
It is common to fit sensitive earth-fault protection to

supplement the normal protection in order to detect high
resistance earth faults. This protection cannot possibly
be stable on through faults, and is therefore set to have
an operating time longer than that of the main
protection. This longer time may have to be taken into
consideration when deciding on a reclaim time. A broken
overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or a
wood fence may cause this type of fault. It is rarely if
ever transient and may be a danger to the public. It is
therefore common practice to use a contact on the
sensitive earth fault relay to block auto-reclosing and
lock out the circuit breaker.
Where high-speed protection is used, reclaim times of 1
second or less would be adequate. However, such short
222
9:37
Page 223
times are rarely used in practice, to relieve the duty on

the circuit breaker.
14.4.2.2 Spring winding time
The reclaim time of motor-wound spring-closed breakers
must be at least as long as the spring winding time, to
ensure that the breaker is not subjected to a further
reclosing operating with a partly wound spring.
14.4.3 Number of Shots

There are no definite rules for defining the number of
shots for any particular auto-reclose application, but a
number of factors must be taken into account.
14.4.3.1 Circuit breaker limitations
Important considerations are the ability of the circuit
breaker to perform several trip and close operations in
quick succession and the effect of these operations on
the maintenance period. Maintenance periods vary
according to the type of circuit breaker used and the
fault current broken when clearing each fault. Use of
modern numerical relays can assist, as they often have a
CB condition-monitoring feature included that can be
arranged to indicate to a Control Centre when
maintenance is required. Auto-reclose may then be
locked out until maintenance has been carried out.
conditions, the amount of synchronising power

transmitted, P, crosses the power/angle curve OAB at
point X, showing that the phase displacement between
the two systems is o. Under fault conditions, the curve
OCB is applicable, and the operating point changes to Y.
Assuming constant power input to both ends of the line,
there is now an accelerating power XY. As a result, the
operating point moves to Z, with an increased phase
displacement, 1, between the two systems. At this point
the circuit breakers trip and break the connection. The
phase displacement continues to increase at a rate
dependent on the inertia of the two power sources. To
maintain synchronism, the circuit breaker must be
reclosed in a time short enough to prevent the phase
angle exceeding 2. This angle is such that the area (2)
stays greater than the area (1), which is the condition for
maintenance of synchronism.
Fault
Loads
14.4.3.2 System conditions
14.5 AUTO-RECLOSING ON EHV TRANSMISSION LINES

The most important consideration in the application of
auto-reclosing to EHV transmission lines is the
maintenance of system stability and synchronism. The
problems involved are dependent on whether the
transmission system is weak or strong. With a weak
system, loss of a transmission link may lead quickly to an
excessive phase angle across the CB used for re-closure,
thus preventing a successful re-closure. In a relatively
strong system, the rate of change of phase angle will be
slow, so that delayed auto-reclose can be successfully
applied.
An illustration is the interconnector between two power
systems as shown in Figure 14.4. Under healthy
Normal system condition

2
If statistical information on a particular system shows a

moderate percentage of semi-permanent faults that
could be burned out during 2 or 3 time-delayed trips, a
multi-shot scheme may be justified. This is often the
case in forest areas. Another situation is where fused
tees are used and the fault level is low, since the fusing
time may not discriminate with the main I.D.M.T. relay.
The use of several shots will heat the fuse to such an
extent that it would eventually blow before the main
protection operated.
Loads
Input line
Z
Auto-Reclosing
17/06/02
Power
Chap14 -218-231
Y
1
Fault condition
0 1
B
Phase displacement
Figure 14.4: Effect of high-speed three-phase

auto-reclosing on system stability for a weak system
This example, for a weak system, shows that the

successful application of auto-reclosing in such a case
needs high-speed protection and circuit breakers, and a
short dead time. On strong systems, synchronism is
unlikely to be lost by the tripping out of a single line. For
such systems, an alternative policy of delayed autoreclosing may be adopted. This enables the power
swings on the system resulting from the fault to decay
before reclosure is attempted.
The various factors to be considered when using EHV
auto-reclose schemes are now dealt with. High-speed
and delayed auto-reclose schemes are discussed
separately.
14.6 HIGH SPEED AUTO-RECLOSING ON EHV SYSTEMS

The first requirement for the application of high-speed
auto-reclosing is knowledge of the system disturbance
223
14
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:37
Page 224
time that can be tolerated without loss of system

stability. This will normally require transient stability
studies to be conducted for a defined set of power
system configurations and fault conditions. With
knowledge of protection and circuit breaker operating
characteristics and fault arc de-ionisation times, the
feasibility of high-speed auto-reclosing can then be
assessed. These factors are now discussed.
14.6.1 Protection Characteristics

The use of high-speed protection equipment, such as
distance or unit protection schemes, giving operating
times of less than 50ms, is essential. In conjunction with
fast operating circuit breakers, high-speed protection
reduces the duration of the fault arc and thus the total
system disturbance time.
Auto-Reclosing
It is important that the circuit breakers at both ends of a

fault line should be tripped as rapidly as possible. The
time that the line is still being fed from one end
represents an effective reduction in the dead time, and
may well jeopardise the chances of a successful
reclosure. When distance protection is used, and the
fault occurs near one end of the line, special measures
have to be adopted to ensure simultaneous tripping at
each end. These are described in Section 14.8.
14
14.6.2 De-Ionisation of Fault Arc

It is important to know the time that must be allowed for
complete de-ionisation of the arc, to prevent the arc
restriking when the voltage is re-applied.
The de-ionisation time of an uncontrolled arc, in free air
depends on the circuit voltage, conductor spacing, fault
currents, fault duration, wind speed and capacitive
coupling from adjacent conductors. Of these, the circuit
voltage is the most important, and as a general rule, the
higher the voltage the longer the time required for deionisation. Typical values are given in Table 14.1.
Line voltage (kV)
66
Minimum de-energisation time

(seconds)
0.2
110
132
220
275
400
525
0.28
0.3
0.35
0.38
0.45
0.55
the dead time required. This is a particular problem on

long distance EHV transmission lines.
14.6.3 Circuit Breaker Characteristics

The high fault levels involved in EHV systems imposes a
very severe duty on the circuit breakers used in highspeed auto-reclose schemes. The accepted breaker cycle
of break-make-break requires the circuit breaker to
interrupt the fault current, reclose the circuit after a
time delay of upwards of 0.2s and then break the fault
current again if the fault persists. The types of circuit
breaker commonly used on EHV systems are oil, air blast
and SF6 types.
14.6.3.1 Oil circuit breakers
Oil circuit breakers are used for transmission voltages up
to 300kV, and can be subdivided into the two types: bulk
oil and small oil volume. The latter is a design aimed at
reducing the fire hazard associated with the large
volume of oil contained in the bulk oil breaker.
The operating mechanisms of oil circuit breakers are of
two types, fixed trip and trip free, of which the latter
is the most common. With trip-free types, the reclosing
cycle must allow time for the mechanism to reset after
tripping before applying the closing impulse.
Special means have to be adopted to obtain the short
dead times required for high-speed auto-reclosing.
Various types of tripping mechanism have been
developed to meet this requirement.
The three types of closing mechanism fitted to oil circuit
breakers are:
i. solenoid
ii. spring
iii. pneumatic
CBs with solenoid closing are not suitable for highspeed auto-reclose due to the long time constant
involved. Spring, hydraulic or pneumatic closing
mechanisms are universal at the upper end of the EHV
range and give the fastest closing time. Figure 14.3
shows the operation times for various types of EHV
circuit breakers, including the dead time that can be
attained.
14.6.3.2 Air blast circuit breakers
Air blast breakers have been developed for voltages up to
the highest at present in use on transmission lines. They
fall into two categories:
a. pressurised head circuit breakers
b. non-pressurised head circuit breakers
Table 14.1: Fault-arc de-ionisation times
If single-phase tripping and auto-reclosing is used,

capacitive coupling between the healthy phases and the
faulty phase tends to maintain the arc and hence extend
In pressurised head circuit breakers, compressed air is

maintained in the chamber surrounding the main
contacts. When a tripping signal is received, an auxiliary
224
17/06/02
9:37
Page 225
air system separates the main contacts and allows

compressed air to blast through the gap to the
atmosphere, extinguishing the arc. With the contacts
fully open, compressed air is maintained in the chamber.
Loss of air pressure could result in the contacts reclosing,
or, if a mechanical latch is employed, restriking of the arc
in the de-pressurised chamber. For this reason,
sequential series isolators, which isolate the main
contacts after tripping, are commonly used with air blast
breakers. Since these are comparatively slow in opening,
their operation must be inhibited when auto-reclosing is
required. A contact on the auto-reclose relay is made
available for this purpose.
Non-pressurised head circuit breakers are slower in
operation than the pressurised head type and are not
usually applied in high-speed reclosing schemes.
14.6.3.3 SF6 circuit breakers
Most EHV circuit breaker designs now manufactured use
SF6 gas as an insulating and arc-quenching medium. The
basic design of such circuit breakers is in many ways
similar to that of pressurised head air blast circuit
breakers, and normally retain all, or almost all, of their
voltage withstand capability, even if the SF6 pressure level
falls to atmospheric pressure. Sequential series isolators
are therefore not normally used, but they are sometimes
specified to prevent damage to the circuit breaker in the
event of a lightning strike on an open ended conductor.
Provision should therefore be made to inhibit sequential
series isolation during an auto-reclose cycle.
14.6.4 Choice of Dead Time

At voltages of 220kV and above, the de-ionisation time
will probably dictate the minimum dead time, rather
than any circuit breaker limitations. This can be deduced
from Table 14.1. The dead time setting on a high-speed
auto-reclose relay should be long enough to ensure
complete de-ionisation of the arc. On EHV systems, an
unsuccessful reclosure is more detrimental to the system
than no reclosure at all.
the circuit breakers are locked out after one unsuccessful

attempt. Also, the incidence of semi-permanent faults
which can be cleared by repeated reclosures is less likely
than on HV systems.
14.7 SINGLE-PHASE AUTO-RECLOSING

Single phase to earth faults account for the majority of
overhead line faults. When three-phase auto-reclosing
is applied to single circuit interconnectors between two
power systems, the tripping of all three phases may
cause the two systems to drift apart in phase, as
described in Section 14.5.
No interchange of
synchronising power can take place during the dead
time. If only the faulty phase is tripped, synchronising
power can still be interchanged through the healthy
phases. Any difference in phase between the two
systems will be correspondingly less, leading to a
reduction in the disturbance on the system when the
circuit breaker recloses.
For single-phase auto-reclosing each circuit breaker pole
must be provided with its own closing and tripping
mechanism; this is normal with EHV air blast and SF6
breakers. The associated tripping and reclosing circuitry
is therefore more complicated, and, except in distance
schemes, the protection may need the addition of phase
selection logic.
On the occurrence of a phase-earth fault, single-phase
auto-reclose schemes trip and reclose only the
corresponding pole of the circuit breaker. The autoreclose function in a relay therefore has three separate
elements, one for each phase. Operation of any element
energises the corresponding dead timer, which in turn
initiates a closing pulse for the appropriate pole of the
circuit breaker. A successful reclosure results in the autoreclose logic resetting at the end of the reclaim time,
ready to respond to a further fault incident. If the fault
is persistent and reclosure is unsuccessful, it is usual to
trip and lock out all three poles of the circuit breaker.
The above describes only one of many variants. Other
possibilities are:
a. three-phase trip and lockout for phase-phase or 3phase faults, or if either of the remaining phases
should develop a fault during the dead time
14.6.5 Choice of Reclaim Time

Where EHV oil circuit breakers are concerned, the
reclaim time should take account of the time needed for
the closing mechanism to reset ready for the next
reclosing operation.
b. use of a selector switch to give a choice of single

or three-phase reclosing
c. combined single and three-phase auto-reclosing;
single phase to earth faults initiate single-phase
tripping and reclosure, and phase-phase faults
initiate three-phase tripping and reclosure
14.6.6 Number of Shots

High-speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems is invariably
single shot. Repeated reclosure attempts with high fault
levels would have serious effects on system stability, so
Modern numerical relays often incorporate the logic for

all of the above schemes, for the user to select as
required. Use can be made of any user-definable logic
225
Auto-Reclosing
Chap14 -218-231
14
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:42
Page 226
feature in a numerical relay to implement other schemes

that may be required.
The advantages of single-phase auto-reclosing are:
a. the maintenance of system integrity
b. on multiple earth systems, negligible interference
with the transmission of load. This is because the
current in the faulted phase can flow through
earth via the various earthing points until the fault
is cleared and the faulty phase restored
The main disadvantage is the longer de-ionisation time
resulting from capacitive coupling between the faulty
and healthy lines. This leads to a longer dead time being
required. Maloperation of earth fault relays on double
circuit lines owing to the flow of zero sequence currents
may also occur. These are induced by mutual induction
between faulty and healthy lines (see Chapter 13 for
details).
14.8 HIGH-SPEED AUTO-RECLOSING ON LINES

EMPLOYING DISTANCE SCHEMES
Auto-Reclosing
The importance of rapid tripping of the circuit breakers

at each end of a faulted line where high-speed autoreclosing is employed has already been covered in
Section 14.6. Simple distance protection presents some
difficulties in this respect.
14
Owing to the errors involved in determining the ohmic

setting of the distance relays, it is not possible to set Zone
1 of a distance relay to cover 100% of the protected line
see Chapter 11 for more details. Zone 1 is set to cover
80-85% of the line length, with the remainder of the line
covered by time-delayed Zone 2 protection.
Zone 3(J)
Zone 3(G)
Middle
Zone
End
Zone
Zone 1(G)
End
Zone
H
Zone 2(H)
Zone 2 (G)
Zone 2(J)
Zone 1(J)
J
Zone 1(H)
reclosing applied to the circuit breakers at each end of

the feeder could result either in no dead time or in a
dead time insufficient to allow de-ionisation of the fault
arc. A transient fault could therefore be seen as a
permanent one, resulting in the locking out of both
circuit breakers.
Two methods are available for overcoming this difficulty.
Firstly, one of the transfer-trip or blocking schemes that
involves the use of an intertrip signal between the two
ends of the line can be used. Alternatively, a Zone 1
extension scheme may be used to give instantaneous
tripping over the whole line length. Further details of
these schemes are given in Chapter 12, but a brief
description of how they are used in conjunction with an
auto-reclose scheme is given below.
14.8.1 Transfer-Trip or Blocking Schemes

This involves use of a signalling channel between the two
ends of the line. Tripping occurs rapidly at both ends of
the faulty line, enabling the use of high-speed autoreclose. Some complication occurs if single-phase autoreclose is used, as the signalling channel must identify
which phase should be tripped, but this problem does not
exist if a modern numerical relay is used.
Irrespective of the scheme used, it is customary to
provide an auto-reclose blocking relay to prevent the
circuit breakers auto-reclosing for faults seen by the
distance relay in Zones 2 and 3.
14.8.2 Zone 1 Extension

In this scheme, the reach of Zone 1 is normally extended
to 120% of the line length and is reset to 80% when a
command from the auto-reclose logic is received. This
auto-reclose logic signal should occur before a closing
pulse is applied to the circuit breaker and remain operated
until the end of the reclaim time. The logic signal should
also be present when auto-reclose is out of service.
14.9 DELAYED AUTO-RECLOSING ON EHV SYSTEMS
Zone 1(K)
Zone 2(K)
Zone 3(K)
Zone 3(H)
Figure 14.5: Typical three zone distance scheme
Figure 14.5 illustrates this for a typical three-zone

distance scheme covering two transmission lines.
For this reason, a fault occurring in an end zone would
be cleared instantaneously, by the protection at one end
of the feeder. However, the CB at the other end opens in
0.3-0.4 seconds (Zone 2 time). High-speed auto-
On highly interconnected transmission systems, where

the loss of a single line is unlikely to cause two sections
of the system to drift apart significantly and lose
synchronism, delayed auto-reclosing can be employed.
Dead times of the order of 5s-60s are commonly used. No
problems are presented by fault arc de-ionisation times
and circuit breaker operating characteristics, and power
swings on the system decay before reclosing. In addition,
all tripping and reclose schemes can be three-phase only,
simplifying control circuits in comparison with singlephase schemes. In systems on which delayed autoreclosing is permissible, the chances of a reclosure being
226
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:42
Page 227
successful are somewhat greater with delayed reclosing

than would be the case with high-speed reclosing.
If for any reason the line fails to dead line charge from
end A, reclosure from end B would take place after 15
seconds. The circuit breaker at A would then be given
the opportunity to reclose with a synchronism check.
14.9.1 Scheme Operation

The sequence of operations of a delayed auto-reclose
scheme can be best understood by reference to Figure
14.6. This shows a transmission line connecting two
substations A and B, with the circuit beakers at A and B
tripping out in the event of a line fault. Synchronism is
unlikely to be lost in a system that employs delayed autoreclose. However, the transfer of power through the
remaining tie-lines on the system could result in the
development of an excessive phase difference between the
voltages at points A and B. The result, if reclosure takes
place, is an unacceptable shock to the system. It is
therefore usual practice to incorporate a synchronism
check relay into the reclosing system to determine
whether auto-reclosing should take place.
(a) Network diagram

&
AR lockout
S Q
R Q
The logic also incorporates a frequency difference check,

either by direct measurement or by using a timer in
conjunction with the phase angle check. In the latter
case, if a 2 second timer is employed, the logic gives an
output only if the phase difference does not exceed the
phase angle setting over a period of 2 seconds. This
limits the frequency difference (in the case of a phase
angle setting of 20o) to a maximum of 0.11% of 50Hz,
corresponding to a phase swing from +20o to -20o over
the measured 2 seconds. While a significant frequency
difference is unlikely to arise during a delayed autoreclose sequence, the time available allows this check to
be carried out as an additional safeguard.
AR
in progress
CB closed
0
ti
&
AR inhibit
time
Reclaim timer
tR
Dead time
CB open
Protn. reset
CB healthy
System healthy
&
td
&
CB close
command
S Q
R Q
tR: reclaim time

ti: inhibit time (b) Autoreclose logic for each CB
td: dead time
Figure 14.6: Delayed auto-reclose scheme logic
After tripping on a fault, it is normal procedure to reclose

the breaker at one end first, a process known as live
bus/dead line charging. Reclosing at the other and is
then under the control of a synchronism check relay
element for what is known as live bus/live line reclosing.
For example, if it were decided to charge the line initially
from station A, the dead time in the auto-reclose relay
at A would be set at, say, 5 seconds, while the
corresponding timer in the auto-reclose relay at B would
be set at, say, 15 seconds. The circuit beaker at A would
then reclose after 5 seconds provided that voltage
monitoring relays at A indicated that the busbars were
alive and the line dead. With the line recharged, the
circuit breaker at B would then reclose with a
synchronism check, after a 2 second delay imposed by
the synchronism check relay element.
The phase angle setting is usually set to between

20o45o, and reclosure is inhibited if the phase difference
exceeds this value. The scheme waits for a reclosing
opportunity with the phase angle within the set value,
but locks out if reclosure does not occur within a defined
period, typically 5s.
As well as live bus/dead line and live bus/live line

reclosing, sometimes live line/dead bus reclosing may
need to be implemented. A numerical relay will typically
allow any combination of these modes to be
implemented. The voltage settings for distinguishing
between live and dead conditions must be carefully
chosen. In addition, the locations of the VTs must be
known and checked so that the correct voltage signals
are connected to the line and bus inputs.
14.10 OPERATING FEATURES OF AUTO-RECLOSE

SCHEMES
The extensive use of auto-reclosing has resulted in the
existence of a wide variety of different control schemes.
Some of the more important variations in the features
provided are described below.
227
Auto-Reclosing
Protn. operated
(local or
intertrip)
The synchronism check relay element commonly provides

a three-fold check:
i. phase angle difference
ii. voltage
iii. frequency difference
A voltage check is incorporated to prevent reclosure

under various circumstances. A number of different
modes may be available.
These are typically
undervoltage on either of the two measured voltages,
differential voltage, or both of these conditions.
14.9.2 Synchronism Check Relays
14
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:42
Page 228
14.10.1 Initiation
Modern auto-reclosing schemes are invariably initiated
by the tripping command of a protection relay function.
Some older schemes may employ a contact on the circuit
breaker. Modern digital or numerical relays often
incorporate a comprehensive auto-reclose facility within
the relay, thus eliminating the need for a separate autoreclose relay and any starter relays.
14.10.2 Type of Protection
Auto-Reclosing
On HV distribution systems, advantage is often taken of

auto-reclosing to use instantaneous protection for the
first trip, followed by I.D.M.T. for subsequent trips in a
single fault incident. In such cases, the auto-reclose
relay must provide a means of isolating the
instantaneous relay after the first trip. In older schemes,
this may be done with a normally closed contact on the
auto-reclose starting element wired into the connection
between the instantaneous relay contact and the circuit
breaker trip coil. With digital or numerical relays with
in-built auto-reclose facilities, internal logic facilities
will normally be used.
14
With certain supply authorities, it is the rule to fit

tripping relays to every circuit breaker. If auto-reclosing
is required, electrically reset tripping relays must be used,
and a contact must be provided either in the autoreclose logic or by separate trip relay resetting scheme to
energise the reset coil before reclosing can take place.
14.10.3 Dead Timer

This will have a range of settings to cover the specified
high-speed or delayed reclosing duty. Any interlocks that
are needed to hold up reclosing until conditions are
suitable can be connected into the dead timer circuit.
Section 14.12.1 provides an example of this applied to
transformer feeders.
14.10.4 Reclosing Impulse

The duration of the reclosing impulse must be related to
the requirements of the circuit breaker closing
mechanism. On auto-reclose schemes using spring-closed
breakers, it is sufficient to operate a contact at the end of
the dead time to energise the latch release coil on the
spring-closing mechanism. A circuit breaker auxiliary
switch can be used to cancel the closing pulse and reset
the auto-reclose relay. With solenoid operated breakers,
it is usual to provide a closing pulse of the order of 1-2
seconds, so as to hold the solenoid energised for a short
time after the main contacts have closed. This ensures
that the mechanism settles in the fully latched-in
position. The pneumatic or hydraulic closing mechanisms
fitted to oil, air blast and SF6 circuit breakers use a circuit
breaker auxiliary switch for terminating the closing pulse
applied by the auto-reclose relay.
14.10.5 Anti-Pumping Devices

The function of an anti-pumping device is to prevent the
circuit breaker closing and opening several times in quick
succession. This might be caused by the application of a
closing pulse while the circuit breaker is being tripped
via the protection relays. Alternatively, it may occur if
the circuit breaker is closed on to a fault and the closing
pulse is longer than the sum of protection relay and
circuit breaker operating times. Circuit breakers with
trip free mechanisms do not require this feature.
14.10.6 Reclaim Timer

Electromechanical, static or software-based timers are
used to provide the reclaim time, depending on the relay
technology used. If electromechanical timers are used, it
is convenient to employ two independently adjustable
timed contacts to obtain both the dead time and the
reclaim time on one timer. With static and softwarebased timers, separate timer elements are generally
provided.
14.10.7 CB Lockout
If reclosure is unsuccessful the auto-reclose relay locks
out the circuit breaker. Some schemes provide a lockout
relay with a flag, with provision of a contact for remote
alarm. The circuit breaker can then only be closed by
hand; this action can be arranged to reset the autoreclose relay element automatically. Alternatively, most
modern relays can be configured such that a lockout
condition can be reset only by operator action.
Circuit breaker manufacturers state the maximum
number of operations allowed before maintenance is
required. A number of schemes provide a fault trip
counting function and give a warning when the total
approaches the manufacturer's recommendation. These
schemes will lock out when the total number of fault
trips has reached the maximum value allowed.
14.10.8 Manual Closing

It is undesirable to permit auto-reclosing if circuit
breaker closing is manually initiated. Auto-reclose
schemes include the facility to inhibit auto-reclose
initiation for a set time following manual CB closure.
The time is typically in the range of 2-5 seconds.
228
17/06/02
9:42
Page 229
14.10.9 Multi-Shot Schemes

Schemes providing up to three or four shots use timing
circuits are often included in an auto-reclose relay to
provide different, independently adjustable, dead times
for each shot. Instantaneous protection can be used for
the first trip, since each scheme provides a signal to
inhibit instantaneous tripping after a set number of trips
and selects I.D.M.T. protection for subsequent ones. The
scheme resets if reclosure is successful within the chosen
number of shots, ready to respond to further fault
incidents.
14.11 AUTO-CLOSE SCHEMES

Auto-close schemes are employed to close automatically
circuit breakers that are normally open when the supply
network is healthy. This may occur for a variety of
reasons, for instance the fault level may be excessive if
the CBs were normally closed. The circuits involved are
very similar to those used for auto-reclosing. Two typical
applications are described in the following sections.
14.11.1 Standby Transformers

Figure 14.7 shows a busbar station fed by three
transformers, T1, T2 and T3. The loss of one transformer
might cause serious overloading of the remaining two.
However, connection of a further transformer to
overcome this may increase the fault level to an
unacceptable value.
T1
T2
T3
the standby transformer. Some schemes employ an

auto-tripping relay, so that when the faulty transformer
is returned to service, the standby is automatically
disconnected.
14.11.2 Bus Coupler or Bus Section Breaker

If all four power transformers are normally in service for
the system of Figure 14.7, and the bus sections are
interconnected by a normally-open bus section breaker
instead of the isolator, the bus section breaker should be
auto-closed in the event of the loss of one transformer,
to spread the load over the remaining transformers. This,
of course, is subject to the fault level being acceptable
with the bus-section breaker closed.
Starting and auto-trip circuits are employed as in the
stand-by scheme. The auto-close relay used in practice
is a variant of one of the standard auto-reclose relays.
14.12 EXAMPLES OF AUTO-RECLOSE APPLICATIONS
Auto-reclose facilities in common use for a number of
standard substation configurations are described in the
following sections.
14.12.1 Double Busbar Substation

A typical double busbar station is illustrated in Figure
14.8. Each of the six EHV transmission lines brought into
the station is under the control of a circuit breaker, CB1
to CB6 inclusive, and each transmission line can be
connected either to the main or to the reserve busbars by
manually operated isolators.
T4
(Standby)
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

CB1A
CB1
CB2
CB3
L1
T1
Line 4 Line 5 Line 6
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
CB2
CB3
CB4
CB5
CB6
IT1
CB4
with
auto-closing
T2
IT2
CB2A
CB1
Bus C
Main
EHV
Busbars
BC
Reserve
Figure 14.7: Standby transformer with auto-closing
The solution is to have a standby transformer T4

permanently energised from the primary side and
arranged to be switched into service if one of the others
trips on fault.
The starting circuits for breaker CB4 monitor the
operation of transformer protection on any of the
transformers T1, T2 and T3 together with the tripping of
an associated circuit breaker CB1-CB3. In the event of
a fault, the auto-close circuit is initiated and circuit
breaker CB4 closes, after a short time delay, to switch in
Auto-Reclosing
Chap14 -218-231
Figure 14.8: Double busbar substation
Bus section isolators enable sections of busbar to be

isolated in the event of fault, and bus coupler breaker BC
permits sections of main and reserve bars to be
interconnected.
14.12.1.1 Basic scheme banked transformers omitted
Each line circuit breaker is provided with an auto-reclose
relay that recloses the appropriate circuit breakers in the
229
14
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:42
Page 230
event of a line fault. For a fault on Line 1, this would

require opening of CB1 and the corresponding CB at the
remote end of the line. The operation of either the
busbar protection or a VT Buchholz relay is arranged to
lock out the auto-reclosing sequence. In the event of a
persistent fault on Line 1, the line circuit breakers trip
and lock out after one attempt at reclosure.
Bus A
EHV Line 1
103
120
203
EHV Line 2
213
113
T1
T2
B1
B2
14.12.1.2 Scheme with banked transformers
Auto-Reclosing
Some utilities use a variation of the basic scheme in

which Transformers T1 and T2 are banked off Lines 1
and 2, as shown in Figure 14.8. This provides some
economy in the number of circuit breakers required. The
corresponding transformer circuits 1 and 2 are tee'd off
Lines 1 and 2 respectively. The transformer secondaries
are connected to a separate HV busbar system via circuit
breakers CB1A and CB2A.
14
Auto-reclose facilities can be extended to cover the

circuits for banked transformers where these are used.
For example, a fault on line 1 would cause the tripping
of circuit breakers CB1, CB1A and the remote line
circuit breaker. When Line 1 is re-energised, either by
auto-reclosure of CB1 or by the remote circuit breaker,
whichever is set to reclose first, transformer T1 is also
energised. CB1A will not reclose until the appearance
of transformer secondary voltage, as monitored by the
secondary VT; it then recloses on to the HV busbars after
a short time delay, with a synchronism check if required.
In the event of a fault on transformer T1, the local and
remote line circuit breakers and breaker CB1A trip to
isolate the fault. Automatic opening of the motorised
transformer isolator IT1 follows this. The line circuit
breakers then reclose in the normal manner and circuit
breaker CB1A locks out.
A shortcoming of this scheme is that this results in
healthy transformer T1 being isolated from the system;
also, isolator L1 must be opened manually before circuit
breakers CB1 and CB1A, can be closed to re-establish
supply to the HV busbars via the transformer. A variant
of this scheme is designed to instruct isolator L1 to open
automatically following a persistent fault on Line 1 and
provide a second auto-reclosure of CB1 and CB1A. The
supply to Bus C is thereby restored without manual
intervention.
Bus B
Figure 14.9: Single switch substation
For example, a transient fault on Line 1 causes tripping

of circuit breakers 120 and B1 followed by reclosure of
CB 120. If the reclosure is successful, Transformer T1 is
re-energised and circuit breaker B1 recloses after a short
time delay.
If the line fault is persistent, 120 trips again and the
motorised line isolator 103 is automatically opened. Circuit
breaker 120 recloses again, followed by B1, so that both
transformers T1 and T2 are then supplied from Line 2.
A transformer fault causes the automatic opening of the
appropriate transformer isolator, lock-out of the
transformer secondary circuit breaker and reclosure of
circuit breaker 120. Facilities for dead line charging or
reclosure with synchronism check are provided for each
circuit breaker.
14.12.3 Four-Switch Mesh Substation

The mesh substation illustrated in Figure 14.10 is
extensively used by some utilities, either in full or part.
The basic mesh has a feeder at each corner, as shown at
mesh corners MC2, MC3 and MC4. One or two
transformers may also be banked at a mesh corner, as
shown at MC1. Mesh corner protection is required if more
than one circuit is fed from a mesh corner, irrespective of
the CT locations see Chapter 15 for more details.
G1A
G1B
T1A
T1B
113A
403
14.12.2 Single Switch Substation
Line 1
The arrangement shown in Figure 14.9 consists basically

of two transformer feeders interconnected by a single
circuit breaker 120. Each transformer therefore has an
alternative source of supply in the event of loss of one or
other of the feeders.
230
MC1
120
420
mesh corner
320
MC3
Line 2
Line 4
MC4
220
303
Line 3
Figure 14.10: Four-switch mesh substation
Chap14 -218-231
17/06/02
9:42
Page 231
Considerable problems can are encountered in the

application of auto-reclosing to the mesh substation. For
example, circuit breakers 120 and 420 in Figure 14.10
are tripped out for a variety of different types of fault
associated with mesh corner 1 (MC1), and each requires
different treatment as far as auto-reclosing is concerned.
Further variations occur if the faults are persistent.
Following normal practice, circuit breakers must be
reclosed in sequence, so sequencing circuits are
necessary for the four mesh breakers. Closing priority
may be in any order, but is normally 120, 220, 320, and
420.
in advance of reclosure if the fault is persistent or not.

In these circumstances, scheme logic inhibits reclosure
and locks out the circuit breakers.
14.12.3.6 Persistent mesh corner fault
The sequence describe in Section 14.12.3.5 is followed
initially. When CB 120 is reclosed, it will trip again due
to the fault and lock out. At this point, the logic inhibits
the reclosure of CBs 420, G1A and G1B and locks out
these CBs. Line isolator 103 is automatically opened to
isolate the fault from the remote station.
A summary of facilities is now given, based on mesh

corner MC1 to show the inclusion of banked
transformers; facilities at other corners are similar but
omit the operation of equipment solely associated with
the banked transformers.
14.12.3.1 Transient fault on Line 1
Tripping of circuit breakers 120, 420, G1A and G1B is
followed by reclosure of 120 to give dead line charging
of Line 1. Breaker 420 recloses in sequence, with a
synchronism check. Breakers G1A, G1B reclose with a
synchronism check if necessary.
14.12.3.2 Persistent fault on Line 1
Auto-Reclosing
Circuit breaker 120 trips again after the first reclosure

and isolator 103 is automatically opened to isolate the
faulted line. Breakers 120, 420, G1A and G1B then
reclose in sequence as above.
14.12.3.3 Transformer fault (local transformer 1A)
Automatic opening of isolator 113A to isolate the
faulted transformer follows tripping of circuit breakers
120, 420, G1A and G1B. Breakers 120, 420 and G1B
then reclose in sequence, and breaker G1A is locked out.
14.12.3.4 Transformer fault (remote transformer)
For a remote transformer fault, an intertrip signal is
received at the local station to trip breakers 120, 420,
G1A and G1B and inhibit auto-reclosing until the
faulted transformer has been isolated at the remote
station. If the intertrip persists for 60 seconds it is
assumed that the fault cannot be isolated at the remote
station. Isolator 103 is then automatically opened and
circuit breakers 120, 420, G1A and G1B are reclosed in
sequence.
14.12.3.5 Transient mesh corner fault
Any fault covered by the mesh corner protection zone,
shown in Figure 14.10, results in tripping of circuit
breakers 120, 420, G1A and G1B. These are then
reclosed in sequence.
There may be circumstances in which reclosure onto a
persistent fault is not permitted clearly it is not known
231
14
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:46
15
Page 232
Busbar Protection
Introduction
15.1
Busbar faults
15.2
Protection requirements
15.3
Types of protection system
15.4
System protection schemes
15.5
Frame-earth protection
(Howard protection)
15.6
Differential protection
principles
15.7
High impedance
differential protection
15.8
Low impedance biased

15.9
Numerical busbar protection
15.10
References
15.11
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:46
Page 233
15
Busbar P rotection
15.1 INTRODUCTION
The protection scheme for a power system should cover
the whole system against all probable types of fault.
Unrestricted forms of line protection, such as overcurrent
and distance systems, meet this requirement, although
faults in the busbar zone are cleared only after some
time delay. But if unit protection is applied to feeders
and plant, the busbars are not inherently protected.
Busbars have often been left without specific protection,
for one or more of the following reasons:
a. the busbars and switchgear have a high degree of
reliability, to the point of being regarded as
intrinsically safe
b. it was feared that accidental operation of busbar
protection might cause widespread dislocation of
the power system, which, if not quickly cleared,
would cause more loss than would the very
infrequent actual bus faults
c. it was hoped that system protection or back-up
protection would provide sufficient bus protection
if needed
It is true that the risk of a fault occurring on modern
metal-clad gear is very small, but it cannot be entirely
ignored. However, the damage resulting from one
uncleared fault, because of the concentration of fault
MVA, may be very extensive indeed, up to the complete
loss of the station by fire. Serious damage to or
destruction of the installation would probably result in
widespread and prolonged supply interruption.
Finally, system protection will frequently not provide the
cover required. Such protection may be good enough for
small distribution substations, but not for important
stations. Even if distance protection is applied to all
feeders, the busbar will lie in the second zone of all the
distance protections, so a bus fault will be cleared
relatively slowly, and the resultant duration of the
voltage dip imposed on the rest of the system may not be
tolerable.
With outdoor switchgear the case is less clear since,
although the likelihood of a fault is higher, the risk of
widespread damage resulting is much less. In general
then, busbar protection is required when the system
protection does not cover the busbars, or when, in order
233
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:46
Page 234
to maintain power system stability, high-speed fault

clearance is necessary. Unit busbar protection provides
this, with the further advantage that if the busbars are
sectionalised, one section only need be isolated to clear
a fault. The case for unit busbar protection is in fact
strongest when there is sectionalisation.
1 5 . 2 B U S B A R F A U LT S
The majority of bus faults involve one phase and earth,
but faults arise from many causes and a significant
number are interphase clear of earth. In fact, a large
proportion of busbar faults result from human error
rather than the failure of switchgear components.
With fully phase-segregated metalclad gear, only earth
faults are possible, and a protection scheme need have
earth fault sensitivity only. In other cases, an ability to
respond to phase faults clear of earth is an advantage,
although the phase fault sensitivity need not be very high.
incidence, amounting to no more than an average of one

fault per busbar in twenty years, it is clear that unless
the stability of the protection is absolute, the degree of
disturbance to which the power system is likely to be
subjected may be increased by the installation of bus
protection. The possibility of incorrect operation has, in
the past, led to hesitation in applying bus protection and
has also resulted in application of some very complex
systems. Increased understanding of the response of
differential systems to transient currents enables such
systems to be applied with confidence in their
fundamental stability. The theory of differential
protection is given later in Section 15.7.
Notwithstanding the complete stability of a correctly
applied protection system, dangers exist in practice for a
number of reasons. These are:
a. interruption of the secondary circuit of a current
transformer will produce an unbalance, which
might cause tripping on load depending on the
relative values of circuit load and effective setting.
It would certainly do so during a through fault,
producing substantial fault current in the circuit in
question
1 5 . 3 P R OT E C T I O N R E Q U I R E M E N T S
Busbar P rotection
Although not basically different from other circuit

protection, the key position of the busbar intensifies the
emphasis put on the essential requirements of speed and
stability. The special features of busbar protection are
discussed below.
15
b. a mechanical shock of sufficient severity may

cause operation, although the likelihood of this
occurring with modern numerical schemes is
reduced
c. accidental interference with the relay, arising from
a mistake during maintenance testing, may lead to
operation
15.3.1 Speed
Busbar protection is primarily concerned with:
a. limitation of consequential damage
b. removal of busbar faults in less time than could be
achieved by back-up line protection, with the
object of maintaining system stability
Some early busbar protection schemes used a low
impedance differential system having a relatively long
operation time, of up to 0.5 seconds. The basis of most
modern schemes is a differential system using either low
impedance biased or high impedance unbiased relays
capable of operating in a time of the order of one cycle
at a very moderate multiple of fault setting. To this must
be added the operating time of the tripping relays, but an
overall tripping time of less than two cycles can be
achieved. With high-speed circuit breakers, complete
fault clearance may be obtained in approximately 0.1
seconds. When a frame-earth system is used, the
operating speed is comparable.
15.3.2 Stability
The stability of bus protection is of paramount
importance. Bearing in mind the low rate of fault
In order to maintain the high order of integrity needed

for busbar protection, it is an almost invariable practice
to make tripping depend on two independent
measurements of fault quantities. Moreover, if the
tripping of all the breakers within a zone is derived from
common measuring relays, two separate elements must
be operated at each stage to complete a tripping
operation. Although not current practice, in many cases
the relays are separated by about 2 metres so that no
reasonable accidental mechanical interference to both
relays simultaneously is possible.
The two measurements may be made by two similar
differential systems, or one differential system may be
checked by a frame-earth system, by earth fault relays
energised by current transformers in the transformer
neutral-earth conductors or by overcurrent relays.
Alternatively, a frame-earth system may be checked by
earth fault relays.
If two systems of the unit or other similar type are used,
they should be energised by separate current
transformers in the case of high impedance unbiased
differential schemes. The duplicate ring CT cores may be
mounted on a common primary conductor but
234
17/06/02
9:46
Page 235
independence must be maintained throughout the

secondary circuit.
In the case of low impedance, biased differential
schemes that cater for unequal ratio CT's, the scheme
can be energised from either one or two separate sets of
main current transformers. The criteria of double feature
operation before tripping can be maintained by the
provision of two sets of ratio matching interposing CT's
per circuit. When multi-contact tripping relays are used,
these are also duplicated, one being energised from each
discriminating relay; the contacts of the tripping relay
are then series-connected in pairs to provide tripping
outputs.
Separate tripping relays, each controlling one breaker
only, are usually preferred. The importance of such relays
is then no more than that of normal circuit protection, so
no duplication is required at this stage. Not least among
the advantages of using individual tripping relays is the
simplification of trip circuit wiring, compared with
taking all trip circuits associated with a given bus section
through a common multi-contact tripping relay.
In double busbar installations, a separate protection
system is applied to each section of each busbar; an
overall check system is provided, covering all sections of
both busbars. The separate zones are arranged to
overlap the busbar section switches, so that a fault on
the section switch trips both the adjacent zones. This
has sometimes been avoided in the past by giving the
section switch a time advantage; the section switch is
tripped first and the remaining breakers delayed by 0.5
seconds.
Only the zone on the faulty side of the section switch
will remain operated and trip, the other zone resetting
and retaining that section in service. This gain,
applicable only to very infrequent section switch faults,
is obtained at the expense of seriously delaying the bus
protection for all other faults. This practice is therefore
not generally favoured. Some variations are dealt with
later under the more detailed scheme descriptions. There
are many combinations possible, but the essential
principle is that no single accidental incident of a
secondary nature shall be capable of causing an
unnecessary trip of a bus section.
Security against maloperation is only achieved by
increasing the amount of equipment that is required to
function to complete an operation; and this inevitably
increases the statistical risk that a tripping operation due
to a fault may fail. Such a failure, leaving aside the
question of consequential damage, may result in
disruption of the power system to an extent as great, or
greater, than would be caused by an unwanted trip. The
relative risk of failure of this kind may be slight, but it
has been thought worthwhile in some instances to
provide a guard in this respect as well.
Security of both stability and operation is obtained by

providing three independent channels (say X, Y and Z)
whose outputs are arranged in a two-out-of three
voting arrangement, as shown in Figure 15.1.
+
X
Trip
circuits
Figure 15.1: Two-out-of-three principle
1 5 . 4 T Y P E S O F P R OT E C T I O N S Y S T E M
A number of busbar protection systems have been
devised:
a. system protection used to cover busbars
b. frame-earth protection
c. differential protection
d. phase comparison protection
e. directional blocking protection
Of these, (a) is suitable for small substations only, while
(d) and (e) are obsolete. Detailed discussion of types (b)
and (c) occupies most of this chapter.
Busbar P rotection
Chap15-232-253
Early forms of biased differential protection for busbars,

such as versions of 'Translay' protection and also a
scheme using harmonic restraint, were superseded by
unbiased high impedance differential protection.
The relative simplicity of the latter, and more importantly
the relative ease with which its performance can be
calculated, have ensured its success up to the present
day.
But more recently the advances in semiconductor
technology, coupled with a more pressing need to be able
to accommodate CT's of unequal ratio, have led to the
re-introduction of biased schemes, generally using static
relay designs, particularly for the most extensive and
onerous applications.
Frame-earth protection systems have been in use for
many years, mainly associated with smaller busbar
protection schemes at distribution voltages and for
metalclad busbars (e.g. SF6 insulated busbars). However,
it has often been quite common for a unit protection
scheme to be used in addition, to provide two separate
means of fault detection.
The different types of protection are described in the
following sections.
235
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:46
Page 236
1 5 . 5 S Y S T E M P R OT E C T I O N S C H E M E S
System protection that includes overcurrent or distance
systems will inherently give protection cover to the
busbars. Overcurrent protection will only be applied to
relatively simple distribution systems, or as a back-up
protection, set to give a considerable time delay.
Distance protection will provide cover for busbar faults
with its second and possibly subsequent zones. In both
cases the busbar protection obtained is slow and suitable
only for limiting the consequential damage.
Busbar P rotection
15
15.6.1 Single-Busbar Frame-Earth Protection

This is purely an earth fault system and, in principle,
involves simply measuring the fault current flowing from
the switchgear frame to earth. A current transformer is
mounted on the earthing conductor and is used to energize
a simple instantaneous relay as shown in Figure 15.2.
No other earth connections of any type, including
incidental connections to structural steelwork are
allowed. This requirement is so that:
a. the principal earth connection and current
transformer are not shunted, thereby raising the
effective setting. An increased effective setting
gives rise to the possibility of relay maloperation.
This risk is small in practice
>
Neutral
check relay
>
+
Trip all
circuit
breaker
Figure 15.2: Single zone
frame-earth protection
b. earth current flowing to a fault elsewhere on the

system cannot flow into or out of the switchgear
frame via two earth connections, as this might lead
to a spurious operation
1 5 . 6 F R A M E - E A R T H P R OT E C T I O N
( H O WA R D P R OT E C T I O N )
Frame-earth
fault relay
The only exception is the case of a mesh-connected

substation, in which the current transformers are located
at the circuit breakers. Here, the busbars are included, in
sections, in the individual zones of the main circuit
protection, whether this is of unit type or not. In the
special case when the current transformers are located
on the line side of the mesh, the circuit protection will
not cover the busbars in the instantaneous zone and
separate busbar protection, known as mesh-corner
protection, is generally used see Section 15.7.2.1 for
details.
Frame leakage protection has been extensively used in

the past in many different situations. There are several
variations of frame leakage schemes available, providing
busbar protection schemes with different capabilities.
The following sections schemes have thus been retained
for historical and general reference purposes. A
considerable number of schemes are still in service and
frame leakage may provide an acceptable solution in
particular circumstances. However, the need to insulate
the switchboard frame and provide cable gland
insulation and the availability of alternative schemes
using numerical relays, has contributed to a decline in
use of frame leakage systems.
The switchgear must be insulated as a whole, usually by

standing it on concrete. Care must be taken that the
foundation bolts do not touch the steel reinforcement;
sufficient concrete must be cut away at each hole to
permit grouting-in with no risk of touching metalwork.
The insulation to earth finally achieved will not be high,
a value of 10 ohms being satisfactory.
When planning the earthing arrangements of a frameleakage scheme, the use of one common electrode for
both the switchgear frame and the power system neutral
point is preferred, because the fault path would
otherwise include the two earthing electrodes in series.
If either or both of these are of high resistance or have
inadequate current carrying capacity, the fault current
may be limited to such an extent that the protection
equipment becomes inoperative. In addition, if the
electrode earthing the switchgear frame is the offender,
the potential of the frame may be raised to a dangerous
value. The use of a common earthing electrode of
adequate rating and low resistance ensures sufficient
current for scheme operation and limits the rise in frame
potential. When the system is resistance earthed, the
earthing connection from the switchgear frame is made
between the bottom of the earthing resistor and the
earthing electrode.
Figure 15.3 illustrates why a lower limit of 10 ohms
insulation resistance between frame and earth is
necessary.
236
17/06/02
9:46
Page 237
Switchgear frame
bonding bar
Frame-leakage
current
transformer
IF = I1 + I2
Insulation
barriers
Switchgear
frame
Outgoing
feeder
Zone G
frame leakage
relay
I1 + I2
I1
>
System
earning
resistor
Earth
bar
>
Zone H
frame leakage
relay
I2
Frame
insulation
resistance to earth
Zone J
Generator
I1
Zone H
Zone G
Earthing
electrode
resistance
Trip
relays
Figure 15.3: Current distribution

for external fault
Trip L
Trip K
Under external fault conditions, the current I1 flows

through the frame-leakage current transformer. If the
insulation resistance is too low, sufficient current may
flow to operate the frame-leakage relay, and, as the check
feature is unrestricted, this will also operate to complete
the trip circuit. The earth resistance between the earthing
electrode and true earth is seldom greater than 1, so
with 10 insulation resistance the current I1 is limited to
10% of the total earth fault current I1 and I2. For this
reason, the recommended minimum setting for the
scheme is about 30% of the minimum earth fault current.
L2
L1
Trip M
Figure 15.4: Three zone frame

earth scheme
If it is inconvenient to insulate the section switch frame

on one side, this switch may be included in that zone. It
is then necessary to intertrip the other zone after
approximately 0.5 seconds if a fault persists after the
zone including the section switch has been tripped. This
is illustrated in Figure 15.5.
Insulation
barrier
All cable glands must be insulated, to prevent the

circulation of spurious current through the frame and
earthing system by any voltages induced in the cable
sheath. Preferably, the gland insulation should be
provided in two layers or stages, with an interposing
layer of metal, to facilitate the testing of the gland
insulation. A test level of 5kV from each side is suitable.
Zone G
Zone H
K
Zone G
Zone H
15.6.2 Frame-Earth Protection - Sectioned Busbars

I
Section 15.6.1 covered the basic requirements for a

system to protect switchgear as a whole. When the
busbar is divided into sections, these can be protected
separately, provided the frame is also sub-divided, the
sections mutually insulated, and each provided with a
separate earth conductor, current transformer and relay.
Ideally, the section switch should be treated as a
separate zone, as shown in Figure 15.4, and provided
with either a separate relay or two secondaries on the
frame-leakage current transformer, with an arrangement
to trip both adjacent zones. The individual zone relays
trip their respective zone and the section switch.
237
Busbar P rotection
Chap15-232-253
Trip
relays
Trip J
>
K1
K2
Trip K
Figure 15.5: Frame-earth scheme: bus

section breaker insulated on one side only
>
Trip L
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:46
Page 238
For the above schemes to function it is necessary to have

a least one infeed or earthed source of supply, and in the
latter case it is essential that this source of supply be
connected to the side of the switchboard not containing
the section switch. Further, if possible, it is preferable
that an earthed source of supply be provided on both
sides of the switchboard, in order to ensure that any
faults that may develop between the insulating barrier
and the section switch will continue to be fed with fault
current after the isolation of the first half of the
switchboard, and thus allow the fault to be removed. Of
the two arrangements, the first is the one normally
recommended, since it provides instantaneous clearance
of busbar faults on all sections of the switchboard.
15.6.3 Frame-Earth Scheme - Double Bus Substation

It is not generally feasible to separately insulate the
metal enclosures of the main and auxiliary busbars.
Protection is therefore generally provided as for single
bus installations, but with the additional feature that
circuits connected to the auxiliary bus are tripped for all
faults, as shown in Figure 15.6.
as operation due to mechanical shock or mistakes made

by personnel. Faults in the low voltage auxiliary wiring
must also be prevented from causing operation by
passing current to earth through the switchgear frame.
A useful check is provided by a relay energised by the
system neutral current, or residual current. If the neutral
check cannot be provided, the frame-earth relays should
have a short time delay.
When a check system is used, instantaneous relays can
be used, with a setting of 30% of the minimum earth
fault current and an operating time at five times setting
of 15 milliseconds or less.
Figure 15.7 shows a frame-leakage scheme for a
metalclad switchgear installation similar to that shown
in Figure 15.4 and incorporating a neutral current check
obtained from a suitable zero sequence current source,
such as that shown in Figure 15.2.
+
In Out 64A-1 GH
CSS-G 64B-1
Trip relays
64CH-1
K
L1
CSS-H
L2
Insulation
barriers
Zone J
L5
Busbar P rotection
M
Zone G
j1
64CH-2
H
L
h1
j2
15
>
64B-2
74-1
74-2
I
>
Zone G
relay
+
In
Zone H
relay
I
Out
L3
L4
>
CSS-G
CSS-H
j1
L1
L6
74 Alarm cancellation relay

CSS Control selector switch protection in/protection out
L3 Busbar protection in service lamp
L4 Busbar protection out of service lamp
L5 Tripping supply healthy lamp
L6 Alarm and indication supply healthy lamp
M1
M2
L3
L4
g1
K
64A-2
Tripping
relays
L2
Figure 15.7: Typical tripping and alarm

circuits for a frame-leakage scheme
h1
N
j2
GH
D.C. Zone bus wires
Busbar
isolator
auxiliary switches
Figure 15.6: Frame-earth scheme

for double busbar substation
15.6.4 Frame-Earth Protection - Check System

On all but the smallest equipments, a check system
should be provided to guard against such contingencies
The protection relays used for the discriminating and

check functions are of the attracted armature type, with
two normally open self reset contacts. The tripping
circuits cannot be complete unless both the
discriminating and check relays operate; this is because
the discriminating and check relay contacts are
connected in series. The tripping relays are of the
attracted armature type.
238
17/06/02
9:46
Page 239
It is usual to supervise the satisfactory operation of the

protection scheme with audible and visual alarms and
indications for the following:
a. busbar faults
b. busbar protection in service
c. busbar protection out of service
The scheme may consist of a single relay connected to

the bus wires connecting all the current transformers in
parallel, one set per circuit, associated with a particular
zone, as shown in Figure 15.8(a). This will give earth
fault protection for the busbar. This arrangement has
often been thought to be adequate.
If the current transformers are connected as a balanced
group for each phase together with a three-element
relay, as shown in Figure 15.8(b), additional protection
for phase faults can be obtained.
d. tripping supply healthy

e. alarm supply healthy
To enable the protection equipment of each zone to be
taken out of service independently during maintenance
periods, isolating switches - one switch per zone - are
provided in the trip supply circuits and an alarm
cancellation relay is used.
1 5 . 7 D I F F E R E N T I A L P R OT E C T I O N P R I N C I P L E S
The Merz-Price principle is applicable to a multi-terminal
zone such as a busbar. The principle is a direct
application of Kirchhoff's first law. Usually, the
circulating current arrangement is used, in which the
current transformers and interconnections form an
analogue of the busbar and circuit connections. A relay
connected across the CT bus wires represents a fault
path in the primary system in the analogue and hence is
not energised until a fault occurs on the busbar; it then
receives an input that, in principle at least, represents
the fault current.
The phase and earth fault settings are identical, and this
scheme is recommended for its ease of application and
good performance.
15.7.1 Differential Protection

for Sectionalised and Duplicate Busbars
Each section of a divided bus is provided with a separate
circulating current system. The zones so formed are
over-lapped across the section switches, so that a fault
on the latter will trip the two adjacent zones. This is
Tripping two zones for a section switch fault can be
avoided by using the time-delayed technique of Section
15.6.2. However instantaneous operation is the
preferred choice.
Zone B
Zone A
G
Busbar P rotection
Chap15-232-253
BS
K
Id>
B
BC
Differen
f
tial
relay
Zone C
H
Typical feeder circuits
Figure 15.9: Zones of protection
for double bus station
A
B
C
N
Differential relay
Id
I>
Id>
b) Phase and earth fault circulating current scheme using

three-element relay
Figure 15.8: Circulating current scheme
For double bus installation, the two busbars will be

treated as separate zones. The auxiliary busbar zone will
overlap the appropriate main busbar zone at the bus
coupler.
Since any circuit may be transferred from one busbar to
the other by isolator switches, these and the associated
tripping circuit must also be switched to the appropriate
239
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:48
Page 240
zone by 'early make' and 'late break' auxiliary contacts.

This is to ensure that when the isolators are closing, the
auxiliary switches make before the main contacts of the
isolator, and that when the isolators are opened, their
main contacts part before the auxiliary switches open.
The result is that the secondary circuits of the two zones
concerned are briefly paralleled while the circuit is being
transferred; these two zones have in any case been
united through the circuit isolators during the transfer
operation.
Busbar P rotection
15.7.2 Location of Current Transformers

Ideally, the separate discriminating zones should overlap
each other and also the individual circuit protections.
The overlap should occur across a circuit breaker, so that
the latter lies in both zones. For this arrangement it is
necessary to install current transformers on both sides of
the circuit breakers, which is economically possible with
many but not all types of switchgear. With both the
circuit and the bus protection current transformers on
the same side of the circuit breakers, the zones may be
overlapped at the current transformers, but a fault
between the CT location and the circuit breaker will not
be completely isolated. This matter is important in all
switchgear to which these conditions apply, and is
particularly important in the case of outdoor switchgear
where separately mounted, multi-secondary current
transformers are generally used. The conditions are
Figure 15.10(a) shows the ideal arrangement in which

both the circuit and busbar zones are overlapped leaving
no region of the primary circuit unprotected.
Figure 15.10(b) shows how mounting all current
transformers on the circuit side of the breaker results in
a small region of the primary circuit unprotected. This
unprotected region is typically referred to as the short
zone. The fault shown will cause operation of the busbar
protection, tripping the circuit breaker, but the fault will
continue to be fed from the circuit, if a source of power
is present. It is necessary for the bus protection to
intertrip the far end of the circuit protection, if the latter
is of the unit type.
With reference to Figure 15.10(b), special short zone
protection can be provided to detect that the circuit
breaker has opened but that the fault current is still
flowing. Under these conditions, the protection can
initiate an intertrip to the remote end of the circuit. This
technique may be used, particularly when the circuit
includes a generator. In this case the intertrip proves that
the fault is in the switchgear connections and not in the
generator; the latter is therefore tripped electrically but not
shut down on the mechanical side so as to be immediately
ready for further service if the fault can be cleared.
15.7.2.1 CT locations for mesh-connected substations
The protection of busbars in mesh connected substations
gives rise to additional considerations in respect of CT
location. A single mesh corner is shown in Figure
Mesh corner
(Note 1)
(a)
(b)
Bus protection
Line
protection
relay
Note 1: Only 1 connection to the mesh corner permitted
(a) CT arrangements for protection including mesh corner
15
Fault
Transformer
protection
Mesh corner
(Note 2)
Circuit
protection
Line
protection
Mesh corner
protection
a. Current transformers mounted on both sides of breaker

-no unprotected region
b. Current transformers mounted on circuit side only of breaker
-fault shown not cleared by circuit protection
Note 2: Multiple circuits may be connected

to the mesh corner
(b) CT arrangements for protection additional mesh corner protection required
Figure 15.10: Unprotected zone with

current transformers mounted
on one side of the circuit breaker only
Figure 15.11: Mesh-corner protection
240
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:48
Page 241
15.11(a). Where only one connection to the mesh is

made at a corner, CTs located as shown will provide
protection not only to the line but the corner of the mesh
included between them. However, this arrangement
cannot be used where more than one connection is made
to a mesh corner. This is because a fault on any of the
connected circuits would result in disconnection of them
all, without any means of determining the faulted
connection. Protection CTs must therefore be located on
each connection, as shown in Figure 15.11(b). This leaves
the corner of the mesh unprotected, so additional CTs
and a relay to provide mesh-corner protection are added,
as also shown in Figure 15.11(b).
An equivalent circuit, as in Figure 15.12, can represent a

circulating current system.
RLG
RCTG
RLH
RCTH
R
R
15.8 HIGH IMPEDANCE

D I F F E R E N T I A L P R OT E C T I O N
ZEG
ZEH
Id>
This form of protection is still in common use. The

considerations that have to be taken into account are
detailed in the following sections.
of circulating current system
15.8.1 Stability
It is not feasible to calculate the spill current that may

occur, but, fortunately, this is not necessary; an alternative
approach provides both the necessary information and the
technique required to obtain a high performance.
The current transformers are replaced in the diagram by

ideal current transformers feeding an equivalent circuit
that represents the magnetising losses and secondary
winding resistance, and also the resistance of
the connecting leads. These circuits can then be
interconnected as shown, with a relay connected to the
junction points to form the complete equivalent circuit.
Saturation has the effect of lowering the exciting
impedance, and is assumed to take place severely in
current transformer H until, at the limit, the shunt
impedance becomes zero and the CT can produce no
output. This condition is represented by a short circuit,
shown in broken line, across the exciting impedance. It
should be noted that this is not the equivalent of a
physical short circuit, since it is behind the winding
resistance .
Applying the Thvenin method of solution, the voltage
developed across the relay will be given by:
IR=
Vf
R R + R LH + R CTH
...Equation 15.1
The current through the relay is given by:

=
I f ( R LH + R CTH )
R R + R LH + R CTH
...Equation 15.2
If RR is small, IR will approximate to IF, which is

unacceptable. On the other hand, if RR is large IR is
reduced. Equation 15.2 can be written, with little error,
as follows:
241
Busbar P rotection
The incidence of fault current with an initial unilateral

transient component causes an abnormal built-up of flux
in a current transformer, as described in Section 6.4.10.
When through-fault current traverses a zone protected
by a differential system, the transient flux produced in
the current transformers is not detrimental as long as it
remains within the substantially linear range of the
magnetising characteristic. With fault current of
appreciable magnitude and long transient time constant,
the flux density will pass into the saturated region of the
characteristic; this will not in itself produce a spill
output from a pair of balancing current transformers
provided that these are identical and equally burdened.
A group of current transformers, though they may be of
the same design, will not be completely identical, but a
more important factor is inequality of burden. In the
case of a differential system for a busbar, an external
fault may be fed through a single circuit, the current
being supplied to the busbar through all other circuits.
The faulted circuit is many times more heavily loaded
than the others and the corresponding current
transformers are likely to be heavily saturated, while
those of the other circuits are not. Severe unbalance is
therefore probable, which, with a relay of normal burden,
could exceed any acceptable current setting. For this
reason such systems were at one time always provided
with a time delay. This practice is, however, no longer
acceptable.
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
IR
9:48
I
Vf
=
=
RR
Page 242
(R
LH
RL + RCT = lead + CT winding resistance
+ R CTH )
RR
Equation 15.3
or alternatively:
I RRR = V f = I
( R LH + R CTH )
It remains to be shown that the setting chosen is

suitable.
Equation 15.4
It is clear that, by increasing RR, the spill current IR can be

reduced below any specified relay setting. RR is frequently
increased by the addition of a series-connected resistor
which is known as the stabilising resistor.
Busbar P rotection
It can also be seen from Equation 15.4 that it is only the

voltage drop in the relay circuit at setting current that is
important. The relay can be designed as a voltage
measuring device consuming negligible current; and
provided its setting voltage exceeds the value Vf of
Equation 15.4, the system will be stable. In fact, the
setting voltage need not exceed Vf, since the derivation
of Equation 15.4 involves an extreme condition of
unbalance between the G and H current transformers
that is not completely realised. So a safety margin is
built-in if the voltage setting is made equal to Vf.
15
= factor depending on relay design

(range 0.7 - 2.0)
The current transformers will have an excitation curve

which has not so far been related to the relay setting
voltage, the latter being equal to the maximum nominal
voltage drop across the lead loop and the CT secondary
winding resistance, with the maximum secondary fault
current flowing through them. Under in-zone fault
conditions it is necessary for the current transformers to
produce sufficient output to operate the relay. This will
be achieved provided the CT knee-point voltage exceeds
the relay setting. In order to cater for errors, it is usual
to specify that the current transformers should have a
knee-point e.m.f. of at least twice the necessary setting
voltage; a higher multiple is of advantage in ensuring a
high speed of operation.
It is necessary to realise that the value of If to be inserted

in Equation 15.4 is the complete function of the fault
current and the spill current IR through the relay, in the
limiting condition, will be of the same form. If the relay
requires more time to operate than the effective duration
of the d.c. transient component, or has been designed
with special features to block the d.c. component, then
this factor can be ignored and only the symmetrical
value of the fault current need be entered in Equation
15.4. If the relay setting voltage, Vs, is made equal to Vf,
that is, If (RL + RCT), an inherent safety factor of the
order of two will exist.
15.8.2 Effective Setting or Primary Operating Current
In the case of a faster relay, capable of operating in one

cycle and with no special features to block the d.c.
component, it is the r.m.s. value of the first offset wave
that is significant. This value, for
_ a fully offset waveform
with no d.c. decrement, is 3If. If settings are then
chosen in terms of_ the symmetrical component of the
fault current, the 3 factor which has been ignored will
take up most of the basic safety factor, leaving only a
very small margin.
where:
Finally, if a truly instantaneous relay were used, the

relevant value of If would be the maximum offset peak.
In this case, the factor has become less than unity,
possibly as low as 0.7. It is therefore possible to rewrite
Equation 15.4 as:
I SL =
K VS
R L + R CT
Equation 15.5
where:
ISL
= stability of scheme
VS
= relay circuit voltage setting
The minimum primary operating current is a further

criterion of the design of a differential system. The
secondary effective setting is the sum of the relay
minimum operating current and the excitation losses in
all parallel connected current transformers, whether
carrying primary current or not. This summation should
strictly speaking be vectorial, but is usually done
arithmetically. It can be expressed as:
IR = IS +nIeS
...Equation 15.6
IR = effective setting
IS = relay circuit setting current
IeS = CT excitation current at relay setting voltage
n = number of parallel - connected CTs
Having established the relay setting voltage from
stability considerations, as shown in Section 15.8.1, and
knowing the excitation characteristic of the current
transformers, the effective setting can be computed. The
secondary setting is converted to the primary operating
current by multiplying by the turns ratio of the current
transformers. The operating current so determined
should be considered in terms of the conditions of the
application.
For a phase and earth fault scheme the setting can be
based on the fault current to be expected for minimum
plant and maximum system outage conditions. However,
it should be remembered that:
242
17/06/02
9:48
Page 243
This will not happen to any large degree if the fault

current is a larger multiple of setting; for example, if the
fault current is five times the scheme primary operating
current and the CT knee-point e.m.f. is three times the
relay setting voltage, the additional delay is unlikely to
exceed one cycle.
a. phase-phase faults give only 86% of the threephase fault current

b. fault arc resistance and earth path resistance
reduce fault currents somewhat
c. a reasonable margin should be allowed to ensure
that relays operate quickly and decisively
The primary operating current is sometimes designed to

exceed the maximum expected circuit load in order to
reduce the possibility of false operation under load
current as a result of a broken CT lead. Desirable as this
safeguard may be, it will be seen that it is better not to
increase the effective current setting too much, as this
will sacrifice some speed; the check feature in any case,
maintains stability.
It is desirable that the primary effective setting should not

exceed 30% of the prospective minimum fault current.
In the case of a scheme exclusively for earth fault
protection, the minimum earth fault current should be
considered, taking into account any earthing impedance
that might be present as well. Furthermore, in the event
of a double phase to earth fault, regardless of the interphase currents, only 50% of the system e.m.f. is available
in the earth path, causing a further reduction in the earth
fault current. The primary operating current must
therefore be not greater than 30% of the minimum
single-phase earth fault current. In order to achieve
high-speed operation, it is desirable that settings should
be still lower, particularly in the case of the solidly
earthed power system. The transient component of the
fault current in conjunction with unfavourable residual
flux in the CT can cause a high degree of saturation and
loss of output, possibly leading to a delay of several cycles
additional to the natural operating time of the element.
An overall earth fault scheme for a large distribution

board may be difficult to design because of the large
number of current transformers paralleled together,
which may lead to an excessive setting. It may be
advantageous in such a case to provide a three-element
phase and earth fault scheme, mainly to reduce the
number of current transformers paralleled into one group.
Extra-high-voltage substations usually present no such
problem. Using the voltage-calibrated relay, the current
consumption can be very small.
A simplification can be achieved by providing one relay
per circuit, all connected to the CT paralleling buswires.
Busbar P rotection
Chap15-232-253
Zone R
c1
c2
D
Zone M1
Zone M2
b1
a1
F
c1
Zone
M2
Zone R
Bus wires
Check zone
Bus wires
B
C
A
B
C
N
95 CHX-2
Zone relay
same as check
Zone M2 relay
same as check
Zone M1 relay
same as check
M1 First main busbar

M2 Second main busbar
R Reserve busbar
Stabilising Resistor
+
_
Id> Id
Supervision
Relay
Metrosil
o
(non-linear resistor)
Figure 15.13: A.C. circuits for high
impedance circulating current scheme for duplicate busbars
243
High
g Impedance
p
Circulating Current
Relay
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:48
Page 244
+
In Out
87M1-1
CSS-M1
87M2-1
CSS-M2
M1 M2 R
96
D2
a1
87R-1
96
E
c1
CSS-R
96
F1
96
F2
b1
87CH-1
96
D1
96
G
c2
96
H1
96
H2
D.C. Buswires
80
T
87CH-2
87M1-2
87M2-2
30
M2
87R-2
95M1-1
95
M1X
95M2-1
95R-1
95
RX
95CH-1
30M1-1
30M2-1
74-1
30R-1
30
M1
30
R
95
M2X
95
CHX
74
74-2
95M1X-1
95M2X-1
Busbar P rotection
95RX-1
95CHX-1
In
Out
L1
L2
CSS-M1
L1
L2
CSS-M2
L1
L2
15
CSS-R
30
74
80
87
95
80
I
Zone indicating relay
Alarm cancellation relay
D.C. volts supervision relay
High impedance circulating current relay
Bus wires supervision relay
95X
CSS
L1
L2
Zone bus wires shorting relay

Control selector switch
Indicating lamp protection in service
Indicating lamp protection out of service
Figure 15.14: D.C. circuits for high impedance circulating current scheme
This enables the trip circuits to be confined to the least

area and reduces the risk of accidental operation.
15.8.3 Check Feature
Schemes for earth faults only can be checked by a frameearth system, applied to the switchboard as a whole, no
subdivision being necessary. For phase fault schemes,

the check will usually be a similar type of scheme applied
to the switchboard as a single overall zone.
A set of current transformers separate from those used in
the discriminating zones should be provided. No CT
switching is required and no current transformers are
244
17/06/02
9:48
Page 245
needed for the check zone in bus-coupler and bussection breakers.

15.8.4 Supervision of CT Secondary Circuits
Any interruption of a CT secondary circuit up to the
paralleling interconnections will cause an unbalance in
the system, equivalent to the load being carried by the
relevant primary circuit. Even though this degree of
spurious output is below the effective setting the
condition cannot be ignored, since it is likely to lead to
instability under any through fault condition.
Supervision can be carried out to detect such conditions
by connecting a sensitive alarm relay across the bus
wires of each zone. For a phase and earth fault scheme,
an internal three-phase rectifier can be used to effect a
summation of the bus wire voltages on to a single alarm
element; see Figures 15.13 and 15.14.
The alarm relay is set so that operation does not occur
with the protection system healthy under normal load.
Subject to this proviso, the alarm relay is made as
sensitive as possible; the desired effective setting is 125
primary amperes or 10% of the lowest circuit rating,
whichever is the greater.
Since a relay of this order of sensitivity is likely to
operate during through faults, a time delay, typically of
three seconds, is applied to avoid unnecessary alarm
signals.
15.8.5 Arrangement of CT Connections

It is shown in Equation 15.4 how the setting voltage for
a given stability level is directly related to the resistance
of the CT secondary leads. This should therefore be
kept to a practical minimum. Taking into account the
practical physical laying of auxiliary cables, the CT bus
wires are best arranged in the form of a ring around the
switchgear site.
In a double bus installation, the CT leads should be taken
directly to the isolator selection switches. The usual
routing of cables on a double bus site is as follows:
a. current transformers to marshalling kiosk
b. marshalling kiosk to bus selection isolator auxiliary
switches
c. interconnections between marshalling kiosks to
form a closed ring
The relay for each zone is connected to one point of the
ring bus wire. For convenience of cabling, the main zone
relays will be connected through a multicore cable
between the relay panel and the bus section-switch
marshalling cubicle. The reserve bar zone and the check
zone relays will be connected together by a cable
running to the bus coupler circuit breaker marshalling
cubicle. It is possible that special circumstances

involving onerous conditions may over-ride this
convenience and make connection to some other part of
the ring desirable.
Connecting leads will usually be not less than 7/0.67mm
(2.5mm2), but for large sites or in other difficult
circumstances it may be necessary to use cables of, for
example 7/1.04mm (6mm2) for the bus wire ring and the
CT connections to it. The cable from the ring to the relay
need not be of the larger section.
When the reserve bar is split by bus section isolators and
the two portions are protected as separate zones, it is
necessary to common the bus wires by means of auxiliary
contacts, thereby making these two zones into one when
the section isolators are closed.
15.8.6 Summary of Practical Details

This section provides a summary of practical
considerations when implementing a high-impedance
busbar protection scheme.
15.8.6.1 Designed stability level
For normal circumstances, the stability level should be
designed to correspond to the switchgear rating; even if
the available short-circuit power in the system is much
less than this figure, it can be expected that the system
will be developed up to the limit of rating.
Busbar P rotection
Chap15-232-253
15.8.6.2 Current transformers

Current transformers must have identical turns ratios,
but a turns error of one in 400 is recognised as a
reasonable manufacturing tolerance. Also, they should
preferably be of similar design; where this is not possible
the magnetising characteristics should be reasonably
matched.
Current transformers for use with high impedance
protection schemes should meet the requirements of
Class PX of IEC 60044-1.
15.8.6.3 Setting voltage
The setting voltage is given by the equation
Vs > If (RL + RCT)
where:
245
Vs = relay circuit voltage setting

If
= steady-state through fault current
RL = CT lead loop resistence

RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:48
Page 246
15.8.6.4 Knee-point voltage of current transformers
secondary condition is:
This is given by the formula

VP =
VK 2Vs
15.8.6.5 Effective setting (secondary)
...Equation 15.8
VK = knee - point voltage
IS = relay circuit current setting
Any burden connected across the secondary will reduce

the voltage, but the value cannot be deduced from a
simple combination of burden and exciting impedances.
IeS = CT excitation current at voltage setting

n = number of CTs in parallel
For the primary fault setting multiply IR by the CT turns
ratio.
15.8.6.6 Current transformer secondary rating
It is clear from Equations 15.4 and 15.6 that it is
advantageous to keep the secondary fault current low;
this is done by making the CT turns ratio high. It is
common practice to use current transformers with a
secondary rating of 1A.
Busbar P rotection
VK
Iek = exciting current at knee - point voltage
where:
It can be shown that there is an optimum turns ratio for

the current transformers; this value depends on all the
application parameters but is generally about 2000/1.
Although a lower ratio, for instance 400/1, is often
employed, the use of the optimum ratio can result in a
considerable reduction in the physical size of the current
transformers.
15.8.6.7 Peak voltage developed by current transformers
Under in-zone fault conditions, a high impedance relay
constitutes an excessive burden to the current
transformers, leading to the development of a high
voltage; the voltage waveform will be highly distorted
but the peak value may be many times the nominal
saturation voltage.
When the burden resistance is finite although high, an
approximate formula for the peak voltage is:
V P = 2 2 V K (V F V K
I ek
If = fault current
IR = IS + nIeSIR
15
If
where:
The effective setting of the relay is given by
...Equation 15.7
where:
VP = peak voltage developed
VK = knee-point voltage
VF = prospective voltage in absence of saturation
This formula does not hold for the open circuit condition
and is inaccurate for very high burden resistances that
approximate to an open circuit, because simplifying
assumptions used in the derivation of the formula are
not valid for the extreme condition.
Another approach applicable to the open circuit
These formulae are therefore to be regarded only as a

guide to the possible peak voltage. With large current
transformers, particularly those with a low secondary
current rating, the voltage may be very high, above a
suitable insulation voltage. The voltage can be limited
without detriment to the scheme by connecting a
ceramic non-linear resistor in parallel with the relay
having a characteristic given by:
V = CI
where C is a constant depending on dimensions and is
a constant in the range 0.2-0.25.
The current passed by the non-linear resistor at the relay
voltage setting depends on the value of C; in order to
keep the shunting effect to a minimum it is
recommended to use a non-linear resistor with a value of
C of 450 for relay voltages up to 175V and one with a
value of C of 900 for setting voltages up to 325V.
15.8.6.8 High impedance relay
Instantaneous attracted armature relays are used. Simple
fast-operating relays would have a low safety factor
constant in the stability equation, Equation 15.5, as
discussed in Section 15.8.1. The performance is improved
by series-tuning the relay coil, thereby making the circuit
resistive in effect. Inductive reactance would tend to
reduce stability, whereas the action of capacitance is to
block the unidirectional transient component of fault
current and so raise the stability constant.
An alternative technique used in some relays is to apply
the limited spill voltage principle shown in Equation
15.4. A tuned element is connected via a plug bridge to
a chain of resistors; and the relay is calibrated in terms
of voltage.
15.9 LOW IMPEDANCE BIASED

D I F F E R E N T I A L P R OT E C T I O N
The principles of low impedance differential protection
have been described in Section 10.4, including the
principle advantages to be gained by the use of a bias
246
17/06/02
9:48
Page 247
technique. Most modern busbar protection schemes use

this technique.
The principles of a check zone, zone selection, and
tripping arrangements can still be applied. Current
transformer secondary circuits are not switched directly
by isolator contacts but instead by isolator repeat relays
after a secondary stage of current transformation. These
switching relays form a replica of the busbar within the
protection and provide the complete selection logic.
15.9.1 Stability
With some biased relays, the stability is not assured by
the through current bias feature alone, but is enhanced
by the addition of a stabilising resistor, having a value
which may be calculated as follows.
The through current will increase the effective relay
minimum operating current for a biased relay as follows:
IR = IS + BIF
where:
IR = effective minimum oprating current
IS = relay setting current
IF = through fault current
B = percentage restraint
As IF is generally much greater than IS, the relay
effective current, IR = BIF approximately.
From Equation 15.4, the value of stabilising resistor is
given by:
RR =
(R
LH
It must be recognised though that the use of any technique

for inhibiting operation, to improve stability performance
for through faults, must not be allowed to diminish the
ability of the relay to respond to internal faults.
15.9.2 Effective Setting or Primary Operating Current

For an internal fault, and with no through fault current
flowing, the effective setting (IR) is raised above the
basic relay setting (IS) by whatever biasing effect is
produced by the sum of the CT magnetising currents
flowing through the bias circuit. With low impedance
biased differential schemes particularly where the busbar
installation has relatively few circuits, these magnetising
currents may be negligible, depending on the value of IS.
The basic relay setting current was formerly defined as
the minimum current required solely in the differential
circuit to cause operation Figure 15.15(a). This
approach simplified analysis of performance, but was
considered to be unrealistic, as in practice any current
flowing in the differential circuit must flow in at least
one half of the relay bias circuit causing the practical
minimum operating current always to be higher than the
nominal basic setting current. As a result, a later
definition, as shown in Figure 15.15(b) was developed.
Conversely, it needs to be appreciated that applying the
later definition of relay setting current, which flows
through at least half the bias circuit, the notional minimum operation current in the differential circuit alone
is somewhat less, as shown in Figure 15.15(b).
Using the definition presently applicable, the effective
minimum primary operating current
= N I S + B I eS
+ R CTH )
where:
IR
R LH + R CTH
B
It is interesting to note that the value of the stabilising
resistance is independent of current level, and that there
would appear to be no limit to the through faults
stability level. This has been identified [15.1] as The
Principle of Infinite Stability.
=
The stabilising resistor still constitutes a significant

burden on the current transformers during internal
faults.
An alternative technique, used by the MBCZ system
described in Section 15.9.6, is to block the differential
measurement during the portion of the cycle that a
current transformer is saturated. If this is achieved by
momentarily short-circuiting the differential path, a very
low burden is placed on the current transformers. In this
way the differential circuit of the relay is prevented from
responding to the spill current.
247
Busbar P rotection
Chap15-232-253
N = CT ratio
Iop
Iop
IS
IS
Bia
e
Lin
(B%
B%
e(
in
as L
I'S
Bi
IB
IB
IB
IS
IS
IR =
+ BIIB
IR = I + I'
= I'
(a) Superseded definition

Figure 15.15: Definitions of relay
setting current for biased relays
I'S
B
(b) Current definition
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:54
Page 248
Unless the minimum effective operating current of a

scheme has been raised deliberately to some preferred
value, it will usually be determined by the check zone,
when present, as the latter may be expected to involve
the greatest number of current transformers in parallel.
A slightly more onerous condition may arise when two
discriminating zones are coupled, transiently or
otherwise, by the closing of primary isolators.
It is generally desirable to attain an effective primary
operating current that is just greater than the maximum
load current, to prevent the busbar protection from
operating spuriously from load current should a
secondary circuit wiring fault develop. This consideration
is particularly important where the check feature is either
not used or is fed from common main CT's.
15.9.3 Check Feature
Busbar P rotection
For some low impedance schemes, only one set of main

CT's is required. This seems to contradict the general
principle of all busbar protection systems with a check
feature that complete duplication of all equipment is
required, but it is claimed that the spirit of the checking
principle is met by making operation of the protection
dependent on two different criteria such as directional
and differential measurements.
15
The usual solution is to route all the CT secondary

circuits back to the protection panel or cubicle to
auxiliary CT's. It is then the secondary circuits of the
auxiliary CTs that are switched as necessary. So
auxiliary CT's may be included for this function even
when the ratio matching is not in question.
In static protection equipment it is undesirable to use
isolator auxiliary contacts directly for the switching
without some form of insulation barrier. Position
transducers that follow the opening and closing of the
isolators may provide the latter.
Alternatively, a simpler arrangement may be provided on
multiple busbar systems where the isolators switch the
auxiliary current transformer secondary circuits via
auxiliary relays within the protection. These relays form
a replica of the busbar and perform the necessary logic.
It is therefore necessary to route all the current
transformer secondary circuits to the relay to enable
them to be connected into this busbar replica.
Some installations have only one set of current
transformers available per circuit. Where the facility of
a check zone is still required, this can still be achieved
with the low impedance biased protection by connecting
the auxiliary current transformers at the input of the
main and check zones in series, as shown in Figure 15.16.
In the MBCZ scheme, described in Section 15.9.6, the

provision of auxiliary CT's as standard for ratio matching
also provides a ready means for introducing the check
feature duplication at the auxiliary CT's and onwards to
the relays. This may be an attractive compromise when
only one set of main CT's is available.
15.9.4 Supervision of CT Secondary Circuits

In low impedance schemes the integrity of the CT
secondary circuits can also be monitored. A current
operated auxiliary relay, or element of the main
protection equipment, may be applied to detect any
unbalanced secondary currents and give an alarm after a
time delay. For optimum discrimination, the current
setting of this supervision relay must be less than that of
the main differential protection.
In modern busbar protection schemes, the supervision of
the secondary circuits typically forms only a part of a
comprehensive supervision facility.
15.9.5 Arrangement of CT connections

It is a common modern requirement of low impedance
schemes that none of the main CT secondary circuits
should be switched, in the previously conventional manner,
to match the switching of primary circuit isolators.
Main
zone
Main
zone
Check
zone
Check
zone
Figure 15.16: Alternative CT connections
15.9.6 Static Low Impedance Biased

Differential Protection - Type MBCZ
The Type MBCZ scheme conforms in general to the
principles outlined earlier and comprises a system of
standard modules that can be assembled to suit a
particular busbar installation. Additional modules can be
added at any time as the busbar is extended.
A separate module is used for each circuit breaker and
also one for each zone of protection. In addition to these
there is a common alarm module and a number of power
supply units. Ratio correction facilities are provided
within each differential module to accommodate a wide
range of CT mismatch.
248
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:54
Page 249
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3a
Bus coupler 1 Feeder 1
Z1
Z3a
Zone 3b
Feeder 2 Bus section Feeder 3
Z2
Z3b
Check
Feeder 4 zone Bus coupler 2
Intermodule plug-in buswire connections

Figure 15.17: Type MBCZ busbar protection showing correlation
between circuit breakers and protection modules
The modules are interconnected via a multicore cable

that is plugged into the back of the modules. There are
five main groups of buswires, allocated for:
i. protection for main busbar
ii. protection for reserve busbar
iii. protection for the transfer busbar. When the
reserve busbar is also used as a transfer bar then
this group of buswires is used
iv. auxiliary connections used by the protection to
combine modules for some of the more complex
busbar configurations
v. protection for the check zone
One extra module, not shown in this diagram, is plugged
into the multicore bus. This is the alarm module, which
contains the common alarm circuits and the bias resistors.
The power supplies are also fed in through this module.
15.9.6.1 Bias
All zones of measurement are biased by the total current
flowing to or from the busbar system via the feeders.
This ensures that all zones of measurement will have
similar fault sensitivity under all load conditions. The
bias is derived from the check zone and fixed at 20%
with a characteristic generally as shown in Figure
15.15(b). Thus some ratio mismatch is tolerable.
15.9.6.2 Stability with saturated current transformers

The traditional method for stabilising a differential relay
is to add a resistor to the differential path. Whilst this
improves stability it increases the burden on the current
transformer for internal faults. The technique used in
the MBCZ scheme overcomes this problem.
Busbar P rotection
Figure 15.17 shows the correlation between the circuit

breakers and the protection modules for a typical double
busbar installation. In practice the modules are mounted
in a multi-tier rack or cubicle.
The MBCZ design detects when a CT is saturated and

short-circuits the differential path for the portion of the
cycle for which saturation occurs. The resultant spill
current does not then flow through the measuring circuit
and stability is assured.
This principle allows a very low impedance differential
circuit to be developed that will operate successfully
with relatively small CT's.
15.9.6.3 Operation for internal faults
If the CT's carrying fault current are not saturated there
will be ample current in the differential circuit to operate
the differential relay quickly for fault currents exceeding
the minimum operating level, which is adjustable
between 20%-200% rated current.
When the only CT(s) carrying internal fault current
become saturated, it might be supposed that the CT
saturation detectors may completely inhibit operation by
short-circuiting the differential circuit. However, the
resulting inhibit pulses remove only an insignificant
portion of the differential current, so operation of the
relay is therefore virtually unaffected.
249
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:54
Page 250
Supervision
Differential
Current
Buswire
Selection
Links
c
=1
c = Check
m = Main
r = Reserve
t = Transfer
1
CT Fault
Enable
1
Protection
fault
r
t
Alarm
OR
Supervision
Biased
Differential
Enable
Trip
=1
Bias
Trip
Buswire
Selection
Links
c
1
r
Biased
Differential
Trip
Out of service
Figure 15.18: Block diagram of measuring unit
Busbar P rotection
15.9.6.4 Discrepancy alarm feature
15
As shown in Figure 15.18, each measuring module

contains duplicated biased differential elements and also
a pair of supervision elements, which are a part of a
comprehensive supervision facility.
This arrangement provides supervision of CT secondary
circuits for both open circuit conditions and any
impairment of the element to operate for an internal
fault, without waiting for an actual system fault
condition to show this up. For a zone to operate it is
necessary for both the differential supervision element
and the biased differential element to operate. For a
circuit breaker to be tripped it requires the associated
main zone to be operated and also the overall check
zone, as shown in Figure 15.19.
to operate the two busbar sections as a single bar. The

fault current will then divide between the two measuring
elements in the ratio of their impedances. If both of the
two measuring elements are of low and equal impedance
the effective minimum operating current of the scheme
will be doubled.
This is avoided by using a 'master/follower' arrangement.
By making the impedance of one of the measuring
elements very much higher than the other it is possible to
ensure that one of the relays retains its original minimum
operation current. Then to ensure that both the parallelconnected zones are tripped the trip circuits of the two
zones are connected in parallel. Any measuring unit can
have the role of 'master' or 'follower' as it is selectable by
means of a switch on the front of the module.
15.9.6.6 Transfer tripping for breaker failure
Main zone
+ ve
Check zone
S1
D1
S1
D1
S2
D2
S2
D2
Serious damage may result, and even danger to life, if a

circuit breaker fails to open when called upon to do so.
To reduce this risk breaker fail protection schemes were
developed some years ago.
Trip
Figure 15.19: Busbar protection trip logic
15.9.6.5 Master/follower measuring units

When two sections of a busbar are connected together
by isolators it will result in two measuring elements
being connected in parallel when the isolators are closed
These schemes are generally based on the assumption

that if current is still flowing through the circuit breaker
a set time after the trip command has been issued, then
it has failed to function. The circuit breakers in the next
stage back in the system are then automatically tripped.
For a bus coupler or section breaker this would involve
tripping all the infeeds to the adjacent zone, a facility
that is included in the busbar protection scheme.
250
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:54
Page 251
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
CT
CT
PU
CB
PU
CB
CT
PU
CB
CT
CB
Fibre optic link

Personal
Computer
PU
Central Unit
CU
System Communication Network

PU: Peripheral Unit
CU: Central Unit
Figure 15.20: Architecture for numerical protection scheme
The application of numerical relay technology to busbar

protection has lagged behind that of other protection
functions. Static technology is still usual for such
schemes, but numerical technology is now readily
available. The very latest developments in the
technology are included, such as extensive use of a data
bus to link the various units involved, and fault tolerance
against loss of a particular link by providing multiple
communications paths. The development process has
been very rigorous, because the requirements for busbar
protection in respect of immunity to maloperation are
very high.
The philosophy adopted is one of distributed processing of
the measured values, as shown in Figure 15.20. Feeders
each have their own processing unit, which collects
together information on the state of the feeder (currents,
voltages, CB and isolator status, etc.) and communicates
it over high-speed fibre-optic data links to a central unit.
For large substations, more than one central unit may be
used, while in the case of small installations, all of the
units can be co-located, leading to the appearance of a
traditional centralised architecture.
For simple feeders, interface units at a bay may be used
with the data transmitted to a single centrally
located peripheral unit. The central unit performs the
calculations required for the protection functions.
Available protection functions are:
a. protection
b. backup overcurrent protection
c. breaker failure
d. dead zone protection

In addition, monitoring functions such as CB and isolator
monitoring, disturbance recording and transformer
supervision are provided.
Because of the distributed topology used,
synchronisation of the measurements taken by the
peripheral units is of vital importance. A high stability
numerically-controlled oscillator is fitted in each of the
central and peripheral units, with time synchronisation
between them.
In the event of loss of the
synchronisation signal, the high stability of the oscillator
in the affected feeder unit(s) enables processing of the
incoming data to continue without significant errors
until synchronisation can be restored.
The peripheral units have responsibility for collecting the
required data, such as voltages and currents, and
processing it into digital form for onwards transmission
to the central unit. Modelling of the CT response is
included, to eliminate errors caused by effects such as CT
saturation. Disturbance recording for the monitored
feeder is implemented, for later download as required.
Because each peripheral unit is concerned only with an
individual feeder, the protection algorithms must reside
in the central unit.
The differential protection algorithm can be much more
sophisticated than with earlier technology, due to
improvements in processing power. In addition to
calculating the sum of the measured currents, the
algorithm can also evaluate differences between
successive current samples, since a large change above a
threshold may indicate a fault the threshold being
chosen such that normal load changes, apart from inrush
conditions do not exceed the threshold. The same
251
Busbar P rotection
1 5 . 10 N U M E R I C A L B U S B A R P R OT E C T I O N
SCHEMES
15
Chap15-232-253
17/06/02
9:54
Page 252
considerations can also be applied to the phase angles of

currents, and incremental changes in them.
One advantage gained from the use of numerical
technology is the ability to easily re-configure the
protection to cater for changes in configuration of the
substation. For example, addition of an extra feeder
involves the addition of an extra peripheral unit, the
fibre-optic connection to the central unit and entry via
the MMI of the new configuration into the central unit.
Figure 15.21 illustrates the latest numerical technology
employed.
In contrast, modern numerical schemes are more

complex with a much greater range of facilities and a
much high component count. Based on low impedance
bias techniques, and with a greater range of facilities to
set, setting calculations can also be more complex.
However, studies of the comparative reliability of
conventional high impedance schemes and modern
numerical schemes have shown that assessing relative
reliability is not quite so simple as it might appear. The
numerical scheme has two advantages over its older
counterpart:
a. there is a reduction in the number of external
components such as switching and other auxiliary
relays, many of the functions of which are
performed internally within the software
algorithms
15.10.1 Reliability Considerations

In considering the introduction of numerical busbar
protection schemes, users have been concerned with
reliability issues such as security and availability.
Conventional high impedance schemes have been one of
the main protection schemes used for busbar protection.
The basic measuring element is simple in concept and
has few components. Calculation of stability limits and
other setting parameters is straightforward and scheme
performance can be predicted without the need for
costly testing. Practically, high impedance schemes have
proved to be a very reliable form of protection.
Reliability analyses using fault tree analysis methods

have examined issues of dependability (e.g. the ability to
operate when required) and security (e.g. the ability not
to provide spurious/indiscriminate operation). These
analyses have shown that:
Busbar P rotection
b. numerical schemes include sophisticated

monitoring features which provide alarm facilities
if the scheme is faulty. In certain cases, simulation
of the scheme functions can be performed on line
from the CT inputs through to the tripping outputs
and thus scheme functions can be checked on a
regular basis to ensure a full operational mode is
available at all times
a. dependability of numerical schemes is better than

conventional high impedance schemes
b. security of numerical and conventional high
impedance schemes are comparable
In addition, an important feature of numerical schemes
is the in-built monitoring system. This considerably
improves the potential availability of numerical schemes
compared to conventional schemes as faults within the
equipment and its operational state can be detected and
alarmed. With the conventional scheme, failure to reinstate the scheme correctly after maintenance may not
be detected until the scheme is required to operate. In
this situation, its effective availability is zero until it is
detected and repaired.
15
1 5 . 11 R E F E R E N C E S
15.1 The Behaviour of Current Transformers subjected
to Transient Asymmetric Currents and the
Effects on Associated Protective Relays. J.W.
Hodgkiss. CIGRE Paper Number 329, Session
15-25 June 1960.
Figure 15.21: Busbar protection relay using the

latest numerical technology (MiCOM P740 range)
252
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
16
Page 254
Transformer and
Transformer-feeder Protection
Introduction
16.1
Winding faults
16.2
Magnetising inrush
16.3
Transformer overheating
16.4
Transformer protection overview
16.5
Transformer overcurrent protection
16.6
Restricted earth fault protection
16.7
16.8
Stabilisation of differential protection

during magnetising inrush conditions
16.9
Combined differential and

restricted earth fault schemes
16.10
Earthing transformer protection
16.11
Auto-transformer protection
16.12
Overfluxing protection
16.13
Tank-earth protection
16.14
Oil and gas devices
16.15
Transformer-feeder protection
16.16
Intertripping
16.17
Condition monitoring of transformers
16.18
Examples of transformer protection
16.19
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
Page 255
16
Transformer and
Transformer-Feeder P rotection
16.1 INTRODUCTION
The development of modern power systems has been
reflected in the advances in transformer design. This has
resulted in a wide range of transformers with sizes
ranging from a few kVA to several hundred MVA being
available for use in a wide variety of applications.
The considerations for a transformer protection package
vary with the application and importance of the
transformer. To reduce the effects of thermal stress and
electrodynamic forces, it is advisable to ensure that the
protection package used minimises the time for
disconnection in the event of a fault occurring within the
transformer. Small distribution transformers can be
protected satisfactorily, from both technical and
economic considerations, by the use of fuses or
overcurrent relays. This results in time-delayed
protection due to downstream co-ordination
requirements. However, time-delayed fault clearance is
unacceptable on larger power transformers used in
distribution, transmission and generator applications,
due to system operation/stability and cost of
repair/length of outage considerations.
Transformer faults are generally classified into five
categories:
a. winding and terminal faults
b. core faults
c. tank and transformer accessory faults
d. onload tap changer faults
e. abnormal operating conditions
f. sustained or uncleared external faults
For faults originating in the transformer itself, the
approximate proportion of faults due to each of the
causes listed above is shown in Figure 16.1.
Winding and terminal

Core
Tank and accessories
OLTC
Figure 16.1: Transformer fault statistics
255
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
Page 256
1 6 . 2 W I N D I N G F A U LT S
A fault on a transformer winding is controlled in
magnitude by the following factors:
i. source impedance
ii. neutral earthing impedance
iii. transformer leakage reactance
iv. fault voltage
v. winding connection
16.2.2 Star-connected winding with

Neutral Point Solidly Earthed
The fault current is controlled mainly by the leakage
reactance of the winding, which varies in a complex
manner with the position of the fault. The variable fault
point voltage is also an important factor, as in the case
of impedance earthing. For faults close to the neutral
end of the winding, the reactance is very low, and results
in the highest fault currents. The variation of current
with fault position is shown in Figure 16.3.
Several distinct cases arise and are examined below.
16
16.2.1 Star-Connected Winding with

Neutral Point Earthed through an Impedance
15
For a fault on a transformer secondary winding, the

corresponding primary current will depend on the
transformation ratio between the primary winding and
the short-circuited secondary turns. This also varies with
the position of the fault, so that the fault current in the
transformer primary winding is proportional to the
square of the fraction of the winding that is shortcircuited. The effect is shown in Figure 16.2. Faults in
the lower third of the winding produce very little current
in the primary winding, making fault detection by
primary current measurement difficult.
100
90
80
Fault current
(IIF)
Current (per unit)
The winding earth fault current depends on the earthing

impedance value and is also proportional to the distance
of the fault from the neutral point, since the fault
voltage will be directly proportional to this distance.
Percentage of respective maximum

single-phase earth fault current
Transformer and Transformer-Feeder P rotection
20
Fault current
10
5
Primary current
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Distance of fault from neutral (percentage of winding)

Figure 16.3 Earth fault current
in solidly earthed star winding
For secondary winding faults, the primary winding fault

current is determined by the variable transformation
ratio; as the secondary fault current magnitude stays
high throughout the winding, the primary fault current is
large for most points along the winding.
70
60
50
16.2.3 Delta-connected Winding
40
30
20
10
p)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
(percentage of winding)
Ip
IF
Figure 16.2 Earth fault current

in resistance-earthed star winding
No part of a delta-connected winding operates with a

voltage to earth of less than 50% of the phase voltage.
The range of fault current magnitude is therefore less
than for a star winding. The actual value of fault current
will still depend on the method of system earthing; it
should also be remembered that the impedance of a
delta winding is particularly high to fault currents
flowing to a centrally placed fault on one leg. The
impedance can be expected to be between 25% and
50%, based on the transformer rating, regardless of the
normal balanced through-current impedance. As the
prefault voltage to earth at this point is half the normal
phase voltage, the earth fault current may be no more
than the rated current, or even less than this value if the
source or system earthing impedance is appreciable. The
current will flow to the fault from each side through the
two half windings, and will be divided between two
256
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
Page 257
phases of the system. The individual phase currents may

therefore be relatively low, resulting in difficulties in
providing protection.
The graph in Figure 16.4 shows the corresponding data

for a typical transformer of 3.25% impedance with the
short-circuited turns symmetrically located in the centre
of the winding.
16.2.4 Phase to Phase Faults
16.2.5 Interturn Faults

In low voltage transformers, interturn insulation
breakdown is unlikely to occur unless the mechanical
force on the winding due to external short circuits has
caused insulation degradation, or insulating oil (if used)
has become contaminated by moisture.
A high voltage transformer connected to an overhead
transmission system will be subjected to steep fronted
impulse voltages, arising from lightning strikes, faults and
switching operations. A line surge, which may be of
several times the rated system voltage, will concentrate on
the end turns of the winding because of the high
equivalent frequency of the surge front. Part-winding
resonance, involving voltages up to 20 times rated voltage
may occur. The interturn insulation of the end turns is
reinforced, but cannot be increased in proportion to the
insulation to earth, which is relatively great. Partial
winding flashover is therefore more likely. The subsequent
progress of the fault, if not detected in the earliest stage,
may well destroy the evidence of the true cause.
A short circuit of a few turns of the winding will give rise
to a heavy fault current in the short-circuited loop, but
the terminal currents will be very small, because of the
high ratio of transformation between the whole winding
and the short-circuited turns.
16.2.6 Core Faults

A conducting bridge across the laminated structures of
the core can permit sufficient eddy-current to flow to
cause serious overheating. The bolts that clamp the core
together are always insulated to avoid this trouble. If
any portion of the core insulation becomes defective, the
resultant heating may reach a magnitude sufficient to
damage the winding.
The additional core loss, although causing severe local
heating, will not produce a noticeable change in input
current and could not be detected by the normal
electrical protection; it is nevertheless highly desirable
that the condition should be detected before a major
fault has been created. In an oil-immersed transformer,
core heating sufficient to cause winding insulation
damage will also cause breakdown of some of the oil
with an accompanying evolution of gas. This gas will
escape to the conservator, and is used to operate a
mechanical relay; see Section 16.15.3.
Faults between phases within a transformer are

relatively rare; if such a fault does occur it will give rise
to a substantial current comparable to the earth fault
currents discussed in Section 16.2.2.
16.2.7 Tank Faults

Loss of oil through tank leaks will ultimately produce a
dangerous condition, either because of a reduction in
winding insulation or because of overheating on load
due to the loss of cooling.
Overheating may also occur due to prolonged
overloading, blocked cooling ducts due to oil sludging or
failure of the forced cooling system, if fitted.
16.2.8 Externally Applied Conditions

Sources of abnormal stress in a transformer are:
10
Fault currentt in
short circuited turns
80
60
6
Primary input
current
40
20
Primary current (multiples of rated current)
Fault current (multiples of rated current)
100
5
10
15
20
25
Turns short-circuited (percentage of winding)
Figure 16.4 Interturn fault current/number
of turns short-circuited
a. overload
b. system faults
c. overvoltage
d. reduced system frequency
16.2.8.1 Overload
Overload causes increased 'copper loss' and a consequent
temperature rise. Overloads can be carried for limited
periods and recommendations for oil-immersed
transformers are given in IEC 60354.
The thermal time constant of naturally cooled
transformers lies between 2.5-5 hours. Shorter time
constants apply in the case of force-cooled transformers.
257
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
Page 258
16.2.8.2 System faults
16
Transformer reactance
(%)
Fault current
(Multiple of rating)
Permitted fault
duration (seconds)
4
5
6
7
25
20
16.6
14.2
2
2
2
2
16.3 MAGNETISING INRUSH

The phenomenon of magnetising inrush is a transient
condition that occurs primarily when a transformer is
energised. It is not a fault condition, and therefore
transformer protection must remain stable during the
inrush transient.
Table 16.1: Fault withstand levels
Normal peak flux
Flux
Maximum mechanical stress on windings occurs during

the first cycle of the fault. Avoidance of damage is a
matter of transformer design.
16.2.8.3 Overvoltages
Magnetising current
Overvoltage conditions are of two kinds:

(a) Typical magnetising characteristic
i. transient surge voltages

ii. power frequency overvoltage
Transient flux 80% residual

at switching
Transient overvoltages arise from faults, switching, and

lightning disturbances and are liable to cause interturn
faults, as described in Section 16.2.5. These overvoltages
are usually limited by shunting the high voltage
terminals to earth either with a plain rod gap or by surge
diverters, which comprise a stack of short gaps in series
with a non-linear resistor. The surge diverter, in contrast
to the rod gap, has the advantage of extinguishing the
flow of power current after discharging a surge, in this
way avoiding subsequent isolation of the transformer.
Voltage and flux
System short circuits produce a relatively intense rate of

heating of the feeding transformers, the copper loss
increasing in proportion to the square of the per unit
fault current. The typical duration of external short
circuits that a transformer can sustain without damage
if the current is limited only by the self-reactance is
shown in Table 16.1. IEC 60076 provides further
guidance on short-circuit withstand levels.
frequency, but operation must not be continued with a

high voltage input at a low frequency. Operation cannot
be sustained when the ratio of voltage to frequency, with
these quantities given values in per unit of their rated
values, exceeds unity by more than a small amount, for
instance if V/f >1.1. If a substantial rise in system
voltage has been catered for in the design, the base of
'unit voltage' should be taken as the highest voltage for
which the transformer is designed.
Transient flux no residual

at switching
Steady flux state
Voltage
Time
(b) Steady and maximum offset fluxes
Power frequency overvoltage causes both an increase in

stress on the insulation and a proportionate increase in
the working flux. The latter effect causes an increase in
the iron loss and a disproportionately large increase in
magnetising current. In addition, flux is diverted from
the laminated core into structural steel parts. The core
bolts, which normally carry little flux, may be subjected
to a large flux diverted from the highly saturated region
of core alongside. This leads to a rapid temperature rise
in the bolts, destroying their insulation and damaging
coil insulation if the condition continues.
Slow decrement
Zero axis
(c) Typical inrush current
Zero axis
(d) Inrush without offset, due to yoke saturation
16.2.8.4 Reduced system frequency
Figure 16.5: Transformer magnetising inrush
Reduction of system frequency has an effect with regard

to flux density, similar to that of overvoltage.
It follows that a transformer can operate with some
degree of overvoltage with a corresponding increase in
Figure 16.5(a) shows a transformer magnetising

characteristic. To minimise material costs, weight and
size, transformers are generally operated near to the
knee point of the magnetising characteristic.
258
17/06/02
9:58
Page 259
Consequently, only a small increase in core flux above

normal operating levels will result in a high magnetising
current.
Under normal steady-state conditions, the magnetising
current associated with the operating flux level is
relatively small (Figure 16.5(b)).
However, if a
transformer winding is energised at a voltage zero, with
no remanent flux, the flux level during the first voltage
cycle (2 x normal flux) will result in core saturation and
a high non-sinusoidal magnetising current waveform
see Figure 16.5(c). This current is referred to as
magnetising inrush current and may persist for several
cycles.
A number of factors affect the magnitude and duration
of the magnetising current inrush:
a. residual flux worst-case conditions result in the
flux peak value attaining 280% of normal value
b. point on wave switching
c. number of banked transformers
d. transformer design and rating
e. system fault level
The very high flux densities quoted above are so far
beyond the normal working range that the incremental
relative permeability of the core approximates to unity
and the inductance of the winding falls to a value near
that of the 'air-cored' inductance. The current wave,
starting from zero, increases slowly at first, the flux
having a value just above the residual value and the
permeability of the core being moderately high. As the
flux passes the normal working value and enters the
highly saturated portion of the magnetising
characteristic, the inductance falls and the current rises
rapidly to a peak that may be 500% of the steady state
magnetising current. When the peak is passed at the
next voltage zero, the following negative half cycle of
the voltage wave reduces the flux to the starting value,
the current falling symmetrically to zero. The current
wave is therefore fully offset and is only restored to the
steady state condition by the circuit losses. The time
constant of the transient has a range between 0.1
second (for a 100kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a
large unit). As the magnetising characteristic is nonlinear, the envelope of the transient current is not strictly
of exponential form; the magnetising current can be
observed to be still changing up to 30 minutes after
switching on.
Although correct choice of the point on the wave for a
singlephase transformer will result in no transient
inrush, mutual effects ensure that a transient inrush
occurs in all phases for three-phase transformers.
16.3.1 Harmonic Content of Inrush Waveform

The waveform of transformer magnetising current
contains a proportion of harmonics that increases as the
peak flux density is raised to the saturating condition.
The magnetising current of a transformer contains a
third harmonic and progressively smaller amounts of
fifth and higher harmonics. If the degree of saturation is
progressively increased, not only will the harmonic
content increase as a whole, but the relative proportion
of fifth harmonic will increase and eventually exceed the
third harmonic. At a still higher level the seventh would
overtake the fifth harmonic but this involves a degree of
saturation that will not be experienced with power
transformers.
The energising conditions that result in an offset inrush
current produce a waveform that is asymmetrical. Such
a wave typically contains both even and odd harmonics.
Typical inrush currents contain substantial amounts of
second and third harmonics and diminishing amounts of
higher orders. As with the steady state wave, the
proportion of harmonics varies with the degree of
saturation, so that as a severe inrush transient decays,
the harmonic makeup of the current passes through a
range of conditions.
Chap16-254-279
1 6 . 4 T R A N S F O R M E R O V E R H E AT I N G
The rating of a transformer is based on the temperature
rise above an assumed maximum ambient temperature;
under this condition no sustained overload is usually
permissible. At a lower ambient temperature some
degree of sustained overload can be safely applied.
Short-term overloads are also permissible to an extent
dependent on the previous loading conditions. IEC
60354 provides guidance in this respect.
The only certain statement is that the winding must not
overheat; a temperature of about 95C is considered to
be the normal maximum working value beyond which a
further rise of 8C-10C, if sustained, will halve the
insulation life of the unit.
Protection against overload is therefore based on
winding temperature, which is usually measured by a
thermal image technique. Protection is arranged to trip
the transformer if excessive temperature is reached. The
trip signal is usually routed via a digital input of a
protection relay on one side of the transformer, with
both alarm and trip facilities made available through
programmable logic in the relay. Intertripping between
the relays on the two sides of the transformer is usually
applied to ensure total disconnection of the transformer.
Winding temperature protection may be included as a
part of a complete monitoring package see Section
16.18 for more details.
259
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
Page 260
16.5 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION OVERVIEW
The problems relating to transformers described in

Sections 16.2-4 above require some means of protection.
Table 16.2 summarises the problems and the possible
forms of protection that may be used. The following
sections provide more detail on the individual protection
methods. It is normal for a modern relay to provide all
of the required protection functions in a single package,
in contrast to electromechanical types that would
require several relays complete with interconnections
and higher overall CT burdens.
16
Fault Type
Protection Used
Primary winding Phase-phase fault

Primary winding Phase-earth fault
Secondary winding Phase-phase fault
Secondary winding Phase-earth fault
Differential; Overcurrent
Differential; Overcurrent
Differential
Differential;
Restricted Earth Fault
Differential, Buchholz
Differential, Buchholz
Differential, Buchholz; Tank-Earth
Overfluxing
Thermal
Interturn Fault
Core Fault
Tank Fault
Overfluxing
Overheating
Transformer rating
Fuse
100
5.25
16
Operating time
at 3 x rating(s)
3.0
200
315
10.5
15.8
25
36
3.0
10.0
500
1000
26.2
52.5
50
90
20.0
30.0
kVA
Full load current (A)
Rated current (A)
Table 16.3: Typical fuse ratings
This table should be taken only as a typical example;

considerable differences exist in the time characteristic
of different types of HRC fuses. Furthermore grading
with protection on the secondary side has not been
considered.
16.6.2 Overcurrent relays
Table 16.2: Transformer faults/protection
16.6 TRANSFORMER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

Fuses may adequately protect small transformers, but
larger ones require overcurrent protection using a relay
and CB, as fuses do not have the required fault breaking
capacity.
With the advent of ring main units incorporating SF6

circuit breakers and isolators, protection of distribution
transformers can now be provided by overcurrent trips
(e.g. tripping controlled by time limit fuses connected
across the secondary windings of in-built current
transformers) or by relays connected to current
transformers located on the transformer primary side.
Overcurrent relays are also used on larger transformers
provided with standard circuit breaker control.
Improvement in protection is obtained in two ways; the
excessive delays of the HRC fuse for lower fault currents
are avoided and an earth-fault tripping element is
provided in addition to the overcurrent feature.
The time delay characteristic should be chosen to
discriminate with circuit protection on the secondary side.
16.6.1 Fuses
Fuses commonly protect small distribution transformers
typically up to ratings of 1MVA at distribution voltages.
In many cases no circuit breaker is provided, making fuse
protection the only available means of automatic
isolation. The fuse must have a rating well above the
maximum transformer load current in order to withstand
the short duration overloads that may occur. Also, the
fuses must withstand the magnetising inrush currents
drawn when power transformers are energised. High
Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses, although very fast in
operation with large fault currents, are extremely slow
with currents of less than three times their rated value.
It follows that such fuses will do little to protect the
transformer, serving only to protect the system by
disconnecting a faulty transformer after the fault has
reached an advanced stage.
Table 16.3 shows typical ratings of fuses for use with
11kV transformers.
A high-set instantaneous relay element is often provided,

the current setting being chosen to avoid operation for a
secondary short circuit. This enables high-speed
clearance of primary terminal short circuits.
16.7 RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

Conventional earth fault protection using overcurrent
elements fails to provide adequate protection for
transformer windings. This is particularly the case for a
star-connected winding with an impedance-earthed
neutral, as considered in Section 16.2.1.
The degree of protection is very much improved by the
application of restricted earth fault protection (or REF
protection). This is a unit protection scheme for one
winding of the transformer. It can be of the high impedance type as shown in Figure 16.6, or of the biased lowimpedance type. For the high-impedance type, the residual current of three line current transformers is balanced against the output of a current transformer in the
260
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
9:58
Page 261
neutral conductor. In the biased low-impedance version,

the three phase currents and the neutral current become
the bias inputs to a differential element.
The system is operative for faults within the region between current transformers, that is, for faults on the star
winding in question. The system will remain stable for all
faults outside this zone.
cover the complete transformer; this is possible because of

the high efficiency of transformer operation, and the close
equivalence of ampere-turns developed on the primary
and secondary windings. Figure 16.7 illustrates the principle. Current transformers on the primary and secondary
sides are connected to form a circulating current system.
Id>
>
Figure 16.7: Principle of transformer
High impedance relay
16.8.1 Basic Considerations for

Transformer Differential Protection
Figure 16.6: Restricted earth fault protection

for a star winding
The gain in protection performance comes not only from

using an instantaneous relay with a low setting, but also
because the whole fault current is measured, not merely
the transformed component in the HV primary winding (if
the star winding is a secondary winding). Hence, although
the prospective current level decreases as fault positions
progressively nearer the neutral end of the winding are
considered, the square law which controls the primary line
current is not applicable, and with a low effective setting,
a large percentage of the winding can be covered.
Restricted earth fault protection is often applied even
when the neutral is solidly earthed. Since fault current
then remains at a high value even to the last turn of the
winding (Figure 16.2), virtually complete cover for earth
faults is obtained. This is an improvement compared
with the performance of systems that do not measure
the neutral conductor current.
Earth fault protection applied to a delta-connected or
unearthed star winding is inherently restricted, since no
zero sequence components can be transmitted through
the transformer to the other windings.
Both windings of a transformer can be protected separately with restricted earth fault protection, thereby providing high-speed protection against earth faults for the
whole transformer with relatively simple equipment. A
high impedance relay is used, giving fast operation and
phase fault stability.
In applying the principles of differential protection to

transformers, a variety of considerations have to be
taken into account. These include:
a. correction for possible phase shift across the
transformer windings (phase correction)
b. the effects of the variety of earthing and winding
arrangements (filtering of zero sequence currents)
c. correction for possible unbalance of signals from
current transformers on either side of the windings
(ratio correction)
d. the effect of magnetising inrush during initial
energisation
e. the possible occurrence of overfluxing
In traditional transformer differential schemes, the
requirements for phase and ratio correction were met by
the application of external interposing current
transformers (ICTs), as a secondary replica of the main
winding connections, or by a delta connection of the
main CTs to provide phase correction only.
Digital/numerical relays implement ratio and phase
correction in the relay software instead, thus enabling
most combinations of transformer winding
arrangements to be catered for, irrespective of the
winding connections of the primary CTs. This avoids the
additional space and cost requirements of hardware
interposing CTs.
16.8 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
The restricted earth fault schemes described above in

Section 16.7 depend entirely on the Kirchhoff principle
that the sum of the currents flowing into a conducting
network is zero. A differential system can be arranged to
16.8.2 Line Current Transformer Primary Ratings

Line current transformers have primary ratings selected
to be approximately equal to the rated currents of the
261
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:00
Page 262
transformer windings to which they are applied. Primary

ratings will usually be limited to those of available
standard ratio CTs.
16.8.3 Phase Correction
Correct operation of transformer differential protection

requires that the transformer primary and secondary
currents, as measured by the relay, are in phase. If the
transformer is connected delta/star, as shown in Figure
16.8, balanced three-phase through current suffers a
phase change of 30. If left uncorrected, this phase
difference would lead to the relay seeing through current
as an unbalanced fault current, and result in relay
operation. Phase correction must be implemented.
16
A
B
C
Id>
Id>
Id>
designation. Phase compensation is then performed

automatically. Caution is required if such a relay is used
to replace an existing electromechanical or static relay, as
the primary and secondary line CTs may not have the
same winding configuration. Phase compensation and
associated relay data entry requires more detailed
consideration in such circumstances. Rarely, the available
phase compensation facilities cannot accommodate the
transformer winding connection, and in such cases
interposing CTs must be used.
16.8.4 Filtering of Zero Sequence Currents

As described in Chapter 10.8, it is essential to provide
some form of zero sequence filtering where a transformer
winding can pass zero sequence current to an external
earth fault. This is to ensure that out-of-zone earth faults
are not seen by the transformer protection as an in-zone
fault. This is achieved by use of delta-connected line CTs
or interposing CTs for older relays, and hence the winding
connection of the line and/or interposing CTs must take
this into account, in addition to any phase compensation
necessary. For digital/numerical relays, the required
filtering is applied in the relay software. Table 16.4
summarises the phase compensation and zero sequence
filtering requirements. An example of an incorrect choice
of ICT connection is given in Section 16.19.1.
Figure 16.8: Differential protection

for two-winding delta/star transformer
Electromechanical and static relays use appropriate

CT/ICT connections to ensure that the primary and
secondary currents applied to the relay are in phase.
For digital and numerical relays, it is common to use starconnected line CTs on all windings of the transformer
and compensate for the winding phase shift in software.
Depending on relay design, the only data required in such
circumstances may be the transformer vector group
Transformer connection
Transformer phase shift
Clock face vector
16.8.5 Ratio Correction

Correct operation of the differential element requires
that currents in the differential element balance under
load and through fault conditions. As the primary and
secondary line CT ratios may not exactly match the
transformer rated winding currents, digital/numerical
relays are provided with ratio correction factors for each
of the CT inputs. The correction factors may be
Phase compensation required
Yy0
Zd0
0
0
0
Dz0
Dd0
Yz1
Zy1
-30
1
30
Yd1
Dy1
Yy6
Zd6
-180
6
180
Dz6
Dd6
Yz11
Zy11
30
11
-30
Yd11
Dy11
YyH
YzH
YdH
ZdH
(H / 12) x 360
Hour 'H'
-(H / 12) x 360
DzH
DyH
DdH
'H': phase displacement 'clock number', according to IEC 60076-1
Table 16.4: Current transformer connections for power transformers of various vector groups
262
HV Zero sequence filtering
LV Zero sequence filtering
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
17/06/02
10:00
Page 263
calculated automatically by the relay from knowledge of

the line CT ratios and the transformer MVA rating.
However, if interposing CTs are used, ratio correction
may not be such an easy
task and may need to take into
_
account a factor of 3 if delta-connected CTs or ICTs are
involved. If the transformer is fitted with a tap changer,
line CT ratios and correction factors are normally chosen
to achieve current balance at the mid tap of the
transformer. It is necessary to ensure that current
mismatch due to off-nominal tap operation will not
cause spurious operation.
The example in Section 16.19.2 provides an illustration of
how ratio correction factors are used, and that of Section
16.9.3 shows how to set the ratio correction factors for a
transformer with an unsymmetrical tap range.
16.8.6 Bias Setting
When the power transformer has only one of its three

windings connected to a source of supply, with the other
two windings feeding loads, a relay with only two sets of
CT inputs can be used, connected as shown in Figure
16.10(a). The separate load currents are summated in
the CT secondary circuits, and will balance with the
infeed current on the supply side.
When more than one source of fault current infeed
exists, there is a danger in the scheme of Figure 16.10(a)
of current circulating between the two paralleled sets of
current transformers without producing any bias. It is
therefore important a relay is used with separate CT
inputs for the two secondaries - Figure 16.10(b).
When the third winding consists of a delta-connected
tertiary with no connections brought out, the
transformer may be regarded as a two winding
transformer for protection purposes and protected as
shown in Figure 16.10(c).
Differential current ( Id)
Bias is applied to transformer differential protection for

the same reasons as any unit protection scheme to
ensure stability for external faults while allowing
sensitive settings to pick up internal faults. The situation
is slightly complicated if a tap changer is present. With
line CT/ICT ratios and correction factors set to achieve
current balance at nominal tap, an off-nominal tap may
be seen by the differential protection as an internal fault.
By selecting the minimum bias to be greater than sum of
the maximum tap of the transformer and possible CT
errors, maloperation due to this cause is avoided. Some
relays use a bias characteristic with three sections, as
shown in Figure 16.9. The first section is set higher than
the transformer magnetising current. The second section
is set to allow for off-nominal tap settings, while the
third has a larger bias slope beginning well above rated
current to cater for heavy through-fault conditions.
Source
Loads
Id>
(a) Three winding transformer (one power source)
Possible
fault
infeed
Source
Id>
(b) Three winding transformer (three power sources)
Possible
fault
infeed
Source
3
Id>
2
(c) Three winding transformer with unloaded delta tertiary
Operate
70%
slope
Setting range
(0.1 - 0.5Id) 0
Chap16-254-279
Figure 16.10 Differential protection arrangements

for three-winding transformers (shown single
phase for simplicity)
30%
Restrain slope
3
4
Effective bias (x In)
16.9 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION STABILISATION

DURING MAGNETISING INRUSH CONDITIONS
Figure 16.9: Typical bias characteristic
16.8.7 Transformers with Multiple Windings

The unit protection principle remains valid for a system
having more than two connections, so a transformer
with three or more windings can still be protected by the
application of the above principles.
The magnetising inrush phenomenon described in

Section 16.3 produces current input to the energised
winding which has no equivalent on the other windings.
The whole of the inrush current appears, therefore, as
unbalance and the differential protection is unable to
263
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:00
Page 264
distinguish it from current due to an internal fault. The

bias setting is not effective and an increase in the
protection setting to a value that would avoid operation
would make the protection of little value. Methods of
delaying, restraining or blocking of the differential
element must therefore be used to prevent maloperation of the protection.
16.9.1 Time Delay
Since the phenomenon is transient, stability can be

maintained by providing a small time delay. However,
because this time delay also delays operation of the relay
in the event of a fault occurring at switch-on, the
method is no longer used.
16
16.9.2 Harmonic Restraint
overcome the operating tendency due to the whole of the

inrush current that flows in the operating circuit. By this
means a sensitive and high-speed system can be obtained.
16.9.3 Inrush Detection Blocking

Gap Detection Technique
Another feature that characterizes an inrush current can
be seen from Figure 16.5 where the two waveforms (c)
and (d) have periods in the cycle where the current is
zero. The minimum duration of this zero period is
theoretically one quarter of the cycle and is easily
_ seconds.
detected by a simple timer t1 that is set to 41
f
Figure 16.11 shows the circuit in block diagram form.
Timer t1 produces an output only if the current is zero for
_ seconds. It is reset when the
a time exceeding 41
f
instantaneous value of the differential current exceeds
the setting reference.
The inrush current, although generally resembling an inzone fault current, differs greatly when the waveforms
are compared. The difference in the waveforms can be
used to distinguish between the conditions.
As stated before, the inrush current contains all harmonic
orders, but these are not all equally suitable for providing
bias. In practice, only the second harmonic is used.
This component is present in all inrush waveforms. It is
typical of waveforms in which successive half period portions
do not repeat with reversal of polarity but in which mirrorimage symmetry can be found about certain ordinates.
The proportion of second harmonic varies somewhat
with the degree of saturation of the core, but is always
present as long as the uni-directional component of flux
exists. The amount varies according to factors in the
transformer design. Normal fault currents do not
contain second or other even harmonics, nor do distorted
currents flowing in saturated iron cored coils under
steady state conditions.
The output current of a current transformer that is
energised into steady state saturation will contain odd
harmonics but not even harmonics. However, should the
current transformer be saturated by the transient
component of the fault current, the resulting saturation
is not symmetrical and even harmonics are introduced
into the output current. This can have the advantage of
improving the through fault stability performance of a
differential relay. faults.
The second harmonic is therefore an attractive basis for a
stabilising bias against inrush effects, but care must be
taken to ensure that the current transformers are
sufficiently large so that the harmonics produced by
transient saturation do not delay normal operation of the
relay. The differential current is passed through a filter
that extracts the second harmonic; this component is then
applied to produce a restraining quantity sufficient to
Bias
Differential
Threshold
Differential Inhibit
comparator
Timer 1
t1 = 1
4f
Inhibit
Timer 2
t2 = 1
f
Trip
Figure 16.11: Block diagram to show waveform

gap-detecting principle
As the zero in the inrush current occurs towards the end

of the cycle, it is necessary to delay operation of the
_ seconds to ensure that the zero
differential relay by 1
f
condition can be detected if present. This is achieved by
using a second timer t2 that is held reset by an output
from timer t1.
_
When no current is flowing for a time exceeding 41
f
seconds, timer t2 is held reset and the differential relay
that may be controlled by these timers is blocked. When
a differential current exceeding the setting of the relay
flows, timer t1 is reset and timer t2 times out to give a
_ seconds. If the differential current is
trip signal in 1
f
characteristic of transformer inrush then timer t2 will be
reset on each cycle and the trip signal is blocked.
Some numerical relays may use a combination of the
harmonic restraint and gap detection techniques for
magnetising inrush detection.
16.10 COMBINED DIFFERENTIAL
AND RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT SCHEMES
The advantages to be obtained by the use of restricted
earth fault protection, discussed in Section 16.7, lead to
the system being frequently used in conjunction with an
overall differential system. The importance of this is
shown in Figure 16.12 from which it will be seen that if
the neutral of a star-connected winding is earthed
through a resistance of one per unit, an overall differential
system having an effective setting of 20% will detect
faults in only 42% of the winding from the line end.
264
17/06/02
10:00
Page 265
Implementation of a combined differential/REF

protection scheme is made easy if a numerical relay with
software ratio/phase compensation is used.
All
compensation is made internally in the relay.
100
fa
ul
tp
ro
te
ct
io
n
Where software ratio/phase correction is not available,

either a summation transformer or auxiliary CTs can be
used. The connections are shown in Figures 16.13 and
16.14 respectively.
ict
ed
ea
rth
60
40
20
80
60
l
tia
tec
pro
Care must be taken in calculating the settings, but the

only significant disadvantage of the Combined
Differential/REF scheme is that the REF element is likely
to operate for heavy internal faults as well as the
differential elements, thus making subsequent fault
analysis somewhat confusing. However, the saving in
CTs outweighs this disadvantage.
en
fer
Dif
100
tio
Re
str
Primary operating current

(percentage of rated current)
80
40
20
Percentage of winding protected
Chap16-254-279
Figure 16.12: Amount of winding protected

when transformer is resistance earthed and
ratings of transformer and resistor are equal
Restricted
earth
fault
relay
Id>
Id>
Id>
Differential relay
Figure 16.13 Combined differential and earth fault protection using summation current transformer
Restricted earth
fault relay
Phase correcting
auxiliary current
transformers
Id>
Id>
Id> Differential relay
Figure 16.14: Combined differential and restricted earth fault protection using auxiliary CTs
265
>
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:00
Page 266
16.10.1 Application when an Earthing Transformer

is connected within the Protected Zone
A delta-connected winding cannot deliver any zero

sequence current to an earth fault on the connected
system, any current that does flow is in consequence of
an earthed neutral elsewhere on the system and will
have a 2-1-1 pattern of current distribution between
phases. When the transformer in question represents a
major power feed, the system may be earthed at that
point by an earthing transformer or earthing reactor.
They are frequently connected to the system, close to the
main supply transformer and within the transformer
protection zone. Zero sequence current that flows
through the earthing transformer during system earth
16
faults will flow through the line current transformers on

this side, and, without an equivalent current in the
balancing current transformers, will cause unwanted
operation of the relays.
The problem can be overcome by subtracting the
appropriate component of current from the main CT
output. The earthing transformer neutral current is used
for this purpose. As this represents three times the zero
sequence current flowing, ratio correction is required.
This can take the form of interposing CTs of ratio
1/0.333, arranged to subtract their output from that of
the line current transformers in each phase, as shown in
Figure 16.15. The zero sequence component is cancelled,
restoring balance to the differential system.
A
B
C
1/0.333
Eart ing
transformer
Differential relay
Id>
Id>
Id>
I
>
Restricted earth fault relay

Figure 16.15: Differential protection with in-zone earthing transformer, with restricted earth fault relay
A
B
C
Earthing
transformer
Differential relay
Id>
Id>
Id>
Figure 16.16: Differential protection with in-zone earthing transformer; no earth fault relay
266
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:00
Page 267
A
B
C
>
Differential relay
Id>
Id>
Earthing
transformer
Id>
Figure 16.17: Differential protection with in-zone earthing transformer,

with alternative arrangement of restricted earth fault relay
Alternatively, numerical relays may use software to

perform the subtraction, having calculated the zero
sequence component internally.
A
B
C
A high impedance relay element can be connected in the

neutral lead between current transformers and
differential relays to provide restricted earth fault
protection to the winding.
I>
As an alternative to the above scheme, the circulating

current system can be completed via a three-phase
group of interposing transformers that are provided with
tertiary windings connected in delta. This winding
effectively short-circuits the zero sequence component
and thereby removes it from the balancing quantities in
the relay circuit; see Figure 16.16.
Provided restricted earth fault protection is not required, the
scheme shown in Figure 16.16 has the advantage of not
requiring a current transformer, with its associated mounting
and cabling requirements, in the neutral-earth conductor.
The scheme can also be connected as shown in Figure 16.17
when restricted earth fault protection is needed.
16.11 EARTHING TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

Earthing transformers not protected by other means can
use the scheme shown in Figure 16.18. The deltaconnected current transformers are connected to an
overcurrent relay having three phase-fault elements. The
normal action of the earthing transformer is to pass zero
sequence current. The transformer equivalent current
circulates in the delta formed by the CT secondaries
without energising the relay. The latter may therefore be
set to give fast and sensitive protection against faults in
the earthing transformer itself.
Earthing transformer
Figure 16.18: Earthing transformer protection
16.12 AUTOTRANSFORMER PROTECTION

Autotransformers are used to couple EHV power
networks if the ratio of their voltages is moderate. An
alternative to Differential Protection that can be applied
to autotransformers is protection based on the
application of Kirchhoff's law to a conducting network,
namely that the sum of the currents flowing into all
external connections to the network is zero.
A circulating current system is arranged between equal
ratio current transformers in the two groups of line
connections and the neutral end connections. If one
neutral current transformer is used, this and all the line
current transformers can be connected in parallel to a
single element relay, thus providing a scheme responsive
to earth faults only; see Figure 16.19(a).
If current transformers are fitted in each phase at the
neutral end of the windings and a three-element relay is
267
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:00
Page 268
used, a differential system can be provided, giving full

protection against phase and earth faults; see Figure
16.19(b). This provides high-speed sensitive protection.
It is unaffected by ratio changes on the transformer due
to tap-changing and is immune to the effects of
magnetising inrush current.
B
C
16
b. low system frequency

c. geomagnetic disturbances
The latter results in low frequency earth currents
circulating through a transmission system.
Since momentary system disturbances can cause
transient overfluxing that is not dangerous, time delayed
tripping is required. The normal protection is an IDMT or
definite time characteristic, initiated if a defined V/f
threshold is exceeded. Often separate alarm and trip
elements are provided. The alarm function would be
definite time-delayed and the trip function would be an
IDMT characteristic. A typical characteristic is shown in
Figure 16.20.
a. high system voltage
High
Id> impedance
relay
Geomagnetic disturbances may result in overfluxing

without the V/f threshold being exceeded. Some relays
provide a 5th harmonic detection feature, which can be
used to detect such a condition, as levels of this
harmonic rise under overfluxing conditions.
(a) Earth fault scheme

A
B
C
t=
Operating
time (s)
1000
0.8 + 0.18 x K
(M-1)
C
Id>
I>
100
Id>
=63
=40
K 20
K=
10
(b) Phase and earth fault scheme
=5
=1
Figure 16.19: Protection of auto-transformer

by high impedance differential relays
1.1
1.2
1.3
M=
It does not respond to interturn faults, a deficiency that is

serious in view of the high statistical risk quoted in Section
16.1. Such faults, unless otherwise cleared, will be left to
develop into earth faults, by which time considerably more
damage to the transformer will have occurred.
In addition, this scheme does not respond to any fault in
a tertiary winding. Unloaded delta-connected tertiary
windings are often not protected; alternatively, the delta
winding can be earthed at one point through a current
transformer that energises an instantaneous relay. This
system should be separate from the main winding
protection. If the tertiary winding earthing lead is
connected to the main winding neutral above the neutral
current transformer in an attempt to make a combined
system, there may be blind spots which the protection
cannot cover.
16.13 OVERFLUXING PROTECTION

The effects of excessive flux density are described in
Section 16.2.8. Overfluxing arises principally from the
following system conditions:
1.4
1.5
1.6
V/f
Setting
Figure 16.20: Typical IDMT characteristic

for overfluxing protection
16.14 TANK-EARTH PROTECTION

This is also known as Howard protection. If the
transformer tank is nominally insulated from earth (an
insulation resistance of 10 ohms being sufficient) earth
fault protection can be provided by connecting a relay to
the secondary of a current transformer the primary of
which is connected between the tank and earth. This
scheme is similar to the frame-earth fault busbar
protection described in Chapter 15.
16.15 OIL AND GAS DEVICES

All faults below oil in an oil-immersed transformer result
in localised heating and breakdown of the oil; some degree
of arcing will always take place in a winding fault and the
resulting decomposition of the oil will release gases.
When the fault is of a very minor type, such as a hot joint,
gas is released slowly, but a major fault involving severe
268
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:00
Page 269
arcing causes a very rapid release of large volumes of gas

as well as oil vapour. The action is so violent that the gas
and vapour do not have time to escape but instead build
up pressure and bodily displace the oil.
transformers fitted with a conservator. The Buchholz

relay is contained in a cast housing which is connected
in the pipe to the conservator, as in Figure 16.21.
When such faults occur in transformers having oil

conservators, the fault causes a blast of oil to pass up the
relief pipe to the conservator. A Buchholz relay is used
to protect against such conditions. Devices responding
to abnormally high oil pressure or rate-of-rise of oil
pressure are also available and may be used in
conjunction with a Buchholz relay.
3 x Internal pipe
diameter (min)
Conservator
5 x Internal pipe
diameter (min)
16.15.1 Oil Pressure Relief Devices
The surge of oil caused by a serious fault bursts the disc,

so allowing the oil to discharge rapidly. Relieving and
limiting the pressure rise avoids explosive rupture of the
tank and consequent fire risk. Outdoor oil-immersed
transformers are usually mounted in a catchment pit to
collect and contain spilt oil (from whatever cause),
thereby minimising the possibility of pollution.
A drawback of the frangible disc is that the oil remaining
in the tank is left exposed to the atmosphere after
rupture. This is avoided in a more effective device, the
sudden pressure relief valve, which opens to allow
discharge of oil if the pressure exceeds a set level, but
closes automatically as soon as the internal pressure falls
below this level. If the abnormal pressure is relatively
high, the valve can operate within a few milliseconds,
and provide fast tripping when suitable contacts are
fitted.
The device is commonly fitted to power transformers
rated at 2MVA or higher, but may be applied to
distribution transformers rated as low as 200kVA,
particularly those in hazardous areas.
16.15.2 Rapid Pressure Rise Relay
This device detects rapid rise of pressure rather than
absolute pressure and thereby can respond even quicker
than the pressure relief valve to sudden abnormally high
pressures. Sensitivities as low as 0.07bar/s are
attainable, but when fitted to forced-cooled
transformers the operating speed of the device may have
to be slowed deliberately to avoid spurious tripping
during circulation pump starts.
16.15.3 Buchholz Protection

Buchholz protection is normally provided on all
76mm typical
The simplest form of pressure relief device is the widely

used frangible disc that is normally located at the end
of an oil relief pipe protruding from the top of the
transformer tank.
Transformer
Figure 16.21: Buchholz relay
mounting arrangement
A typical Buchholz relay will have two sets of contacts.

One is arranged to operate for slow accumulations of
gas, the other for bulk displacement of oil in the event of
a heavy internal fault. An alarm is generated for the
former, but the latter is usually direct-wired to the CB
trip relay.
The device will therefore give an alarm for the following
fault conditions, all of which are of a low order of
urgency.
a. hot spots on the core due to short circuit of
lamination insulation
b. core bolt insulation failure
c. faulty joints
d. interturn faults or other winding faults involving
only lower power infeeds
e. loss of oil due to leakage
When a major winding fault occurs, this causes a surge
of oil, which displaces the lower float and thus causes
isolation of the transformer. This action will take place
for:
i. all severe winding faults, either to earth or
interphase
ii. loss of oil if allowed to continue to a dangerous
degree
An inspection window is usually provided on either side
of the gas collection space. Visible white or yellow gas
indicates that insulation has been burnt, while black or
grey gas indicates the presence of, dissociated oil. In
these cases the gas will probably be inflammable,
whereas released air will not. A vent valve is provided on
the top of the housing for the gas to be released or
269
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:01
Page 270
collected for analysis. Transformers with forced oil

circulation may experience oil flow to/from the
conservator on starting/stopping of the pumps. The
Buchholz relay must not operate in this circumstance.
Cleaning operations may cause aeration of the oil. Under

such conditions, tripping of the transformer due to
Buchholz operation should be inhibited for a suitable period.
Because of its universal response to faults within the
transformer, some of which are difficult to detect by
other means, the Buchholz relay is invaluable, whether
regarded as a main protection or as a supplement to
other protection schemes. Tests carried out by striking a
high voltage arc in a transformer tank filled with oil,
have shown that operation times of 0.05s-0.1s are
possible. Electrical protection is generally used as well,
either to obtain faster operation for heavy faults, or
because Buchholz relays have to be prevented from
tripping during oil maintenance periods. Conservators
are fitted to oil-cooled transformers above 1000kVA
rating, except those to North American design practice
that use a different technique.
16.16 TRANSFORMER-FEEDER PROTECTION

A transformer-feeder comprises a transformer directly
connected to a transmission circuit without the
intervention of switchgear. Examples are shown in
Figure 16.22.
HV LV
LV HV
protected as a single zone or be provided with separate

protections for the feeder and the transformer. In the
latter case, the separate protections can both be unit
type systems.
An adequate alternative is the
combination of unit transformer protection with an
unrestricted system of feeder protection, plus an
intertripping feature.
16.16.1 Non-Unit Schemes

The following sections describe how non-unit schemes
are applied to protect transformer-feeders against
various types of fault.
16.16.1.1 Feeder phase and earth faults
High-speed protection against phase and earth faults
can be provided by distance relays located at the end of
the feeder remote from the transformer. The transformer
constitutes an appreciable lumped impedance. It is
therefore possible to set a distance relay zone to cover
the whole feeder and reach part way into the
transformer impedance. With a normal tolerance on
setting thus allowed for, it is possible for fast Zone 1
protection to cover the whole of the feeder with
certainty without risk of over-reaching to a fault on the
low voltage side.
Although the distance zone is described as being set half
way into the transformer, it must not be thought that
half the transformer winding will be protected. The
effects of auto-transformer action and variations in the
effective impedance of the winding with fault position
prevent this, making the amount of winding beyond the
terminals which is protected very small. The value of the
system is confined to the feeder, which, as stated above,
receives high-speed protection throughout.
HV LV
16.16.1.2 Feeder phase faults
A distance scheme is not, for all practical purposes,

affected by varying fault levels on the high voltage
busbars and is therefore the best scheme to apply if the
fault level may vary widely. In cases where the fault level
is reasonably constant, similar protection can be
obtained using high set instantaneous overcurrent relays.
These should have a low transient over-reach, defined as:
16
HV LV
IS IF
100%
IF
Figure 16.22: Typical transformer-feeder circuits.
The saving in switchgear so achieved is offset by

increased complication in the necessary protection. The
primary requirement is intertripping, since the feeder
protection remote from the transformer will not respond
to the low current fault conditions that can be detected
by restricted earth fault and Buchholz protections.
Either unrestricted or restricted protection can be
applied; moreover, the transformer-feeder can be
where: IS = setting current

IF = steady - state r.m.s. value of fault current
which when fully offset just operates the
relay
The instantaneous overcurrent relays must be set
without risk of them operating for faults on the remote
side of the transformer.
270
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:01
Page 271
ZS
ZT
ZL
I>>
IF1
IF2
Setting ratio r =
IS
Transient
over-reach (%)
25
50
100
1.01
1.20
1.44
1.92
0.5
0.84
1.00
1.20
1.60
1.0
0.63
0.75
0.90
1.20
2.0
0.42
0.50
0.60
0.80
4.0
0.25
0.30
0.36
0.48
8.0
0.14
0.17
0.20
0.27
0.25
x=
ZT
ZS + ZL
Is = Relay setting = 1.2(1 + t)IF2

t = Transient over-reach (p.u.)
IF2
Figure 16.23: Over-reach considerations in the application of transformer-feeder protection
Referring to Figure 16.23, the required setting to ensure

that the relay will not operate for a fully offset fault IF2
is given by:
where:
x =
IS = 1.2 (1 + t) IF2
where IF2 is the fault current under maximum source
conditions, that is, when ZS is minimum, and the factor
of 1.2 covers possible errors in the system impedance
details used for calculation of IF2 , together with relay
and CT errors.
As it is desirable for the instantaneous overcurrent
protection to clear all phase faults anywhere within the
feeder under varying system operating conditions, it is
necessary to have a relay setting less than IF1 in order to
ensure fast and reliable operation.
Let the setting ratio resulting from setting IS be
I
r = S
I F1
Therefore,
rIF1 = 1.2(1 + t)IF2
Hence,
ZS + Z L
r = 1.2 (1 + t )
ZS + Z L + ZT
r = 1.2 (1 + t )
=
ZS + Z L
(1 + x )( Z S + Z L )
1.2 (1 + t )
1+x
ZT
ZS + Z L
It can be seen that for a given transformer size, the most

sensitive protection for the line will be obtained by using
relays with the lowest transient overreach. It should be
noted that where r is greater than 1, the protection will
not cover the whole line. Also, any increase in source
impedance above the minimum value will increase the
effective setting ratios above those shown. The
instantaneous protection is usually applied with a time
delayed overcurrent element having a lower current
setting. In this way, instantaneous protection is provided
for the feeder, with the time-delayed element covering
faults on the transformer.
When the power can flow in the transformer-feeder in
either direction, overcurrent relays will be required at
both ends. In the case of parallel transformer-feeders, it
is essential that the overcurrent relays on the low
voltage side be directional, operating only for fault
current fed into the transformer-feeder, as described in
Section 9.14.3.
16.16.1.3 Earth faults
Instantaneous restricted earth fault protection is
normally provided. When the high voltage winding is
delta connected, a relay in the residual circuit of the line
current transformers gives earth fault protection which
271
16
Chap16-254-279
16
17/06/02
10:02
Page 272
is fundamentally limited to the feeder and the associated

delta-connected transformer winding. The latter is
unable to transmit any zero sequence current to a
through earth fault.
above the maximum load. As the earthing of the neutral

at a receiving point is likely to be solid and the earth fault
current will therefore be comparable with the phase fault
current, high settings are not a serious limitation.
When the feeder is associated with an earthed starconnected winding, normal restricted earth fault
protection as described in Section 16.7 is not applicable
because of the remoteness of the transformer neutral.
Earth fault protection of the low voltage winding will be

provided by a restricted earth fault system using either
three or four current transformers, according to whether
the winding is delta or star-connected, as described in
Section 16.7.
Restricted protection can be applied using a directional

earth fault relay. A simple sensitive and high-speed
directional element can be used, but attention must be
paid to the transient stability of the element.
Alternatively, a directional IDMT relay may be used, the
time multiplier being set low. The slight inverse time
delay in operation will ensure that unwanted transient
operation is avoided.
When the supply source is on the high voltage star side,
an alternative scheme that does not require a voltage
transformer can be used. The scheme is shown in Figure
16.24. For the circuit breaker to trip, both relays A and
B must operate, which will occur for earth faults on the
feeder or transformer winding.
External earth faults cause the transformer to deliver zero
sequence current only, which will circulate in the closed
delta connection of the secondary windings of the three
auxiliary current transformers. No output is available to
relay B. Through phase faults will operate relay B, but
not the residual relay A. Relay B must have a setting
16.16.1.4 In-zone capacitance

The feeder portion of the transformer-feeder will have an
appreciable capacitance between each conductor and
earth. During an external earth fault the neutral will be
displaced, and the resulting zero sequence component of
voltage will produce a corresponding component of zero
sequence capacitance current. In the limiting case of full
neutral displacement, this zero sequence current will be
equal in value to the normal positive sequence current.
The resulting residual current is equal to three times the
zero sequence current and hence to three times the
normal line charging current. The value of this
component of in-zone current should be considered when
establishing the effective setting of earth fault relays.
16.16.2 Unit Schemes

The basic differences between the requirements of feeder
A
B
C
Relay A
>
Relay B
I>
I>
I>
B
+
A
Trip
circuit
Figure 16.24: Instantaneous protection of transformer-feeder
272
17/06/02
10:02
Page 273
and transformer protections lie in the limitation imposed

on the transfer of earth fault current by the transformer
and the need for high sensitivity in the transformer
protection, suggesting that the two components of a
transformer-feeder should be protected separately. This
involves mounting current transformers adjacent to, or
on, the high voltage terminals of the transformer.
Separate current transformers are desirable for the
feeder and transformer protections so that these can be
arranged in two separate overlapping zones. The use of
common current transformers is possible, but may
involve the use of auxiliary current transformers, or
special winding and connection arrangements of the
relays. Intertripping of the remote circuit breaker from
the transformer protection will be necessary, but this can
be done using the communication facilities of the feeder
protection relays.
The necessity for intertripping on transformer-feeders

arises from the fact that certain types of fault produce
insufficient current to operate the protection associated
with one of the circuit breakers. These faults are:
a. faults in the transformer that operate the Buchholz
relay and trip the local low voltage circuit breaker,
while failing to produce enough fault current to
operate the protection associated with the remote
high voltage circuit breaker
b. earth faults on the star winding of the transformer,
which, because of the position of the fault in the
winding, again produce insufficient current for
relay operation at the remote circuit breaker
c. earth faults on the feeder or high voltage deltaconnected winding which trip the high voltage
circuit breaker only, leaving the transformer
energised form the low voltage side and with two
high voltage phases at near line-to-line voltage
above earth. Intermittent arcing may follow and
there is a possibility of transient overvoltage
occurring and causing a further breakdown of
insulation
Although technically superior, the use of separate

protection systems is seldom justifiable when compared
with an overall system or a combination of non-unit
feeder protection and a unit transformer system.
An overall unit system must take into account the fact
that zero sequence current on one side of a transformer
may not be reproduced in any form on the other side.
This represents little difficulty to a modern numerical
relay using software phase/zero sequence compensation
and digital communications to transmit full information
on the phase and earth currents from one relay to the
other. However, it does represent a more difficult
problem for relays using older technology. The line
current transformers can be connected to a summation
transformer with unequal taps, as shown in Figure
16.25(a). This arrangement produces an output for phase
faults and also some response for A and B phase-earth
faults. However, the resulting settings will be similar to
those for phase faults and no protection will be given for
C phase-earth faults.
An alternative technique is shown in Figure 16.25(b).
The B phase is taken through a separate winding on
another transformer or relay electromagnet, to provide
another balancing system. The two transformers are
interconnected with their counterparts at the other end
of the feeder-transformer by four pilot wires. Operation
with three pilot cores is possible but four are preferable,
involving little increase in pilot cost.
16.17 INTERTRIPPING
In order to ensure that both the high and low voltage
circuit breakers operate for faults within the transformer
and feeder, it is necessary to operate both circuit
breakers from protection normally associated with one.
The technique for doing this is known as intertripping.
Chap16-254-279
Several methods are available for intertripping; these are

discussed in Chapter 8.
16.17.1 Neutral Displacement

An alternative to intertripping is to detect the condition
by measuring the residual voltage on the feeder. An
earth fault occurring on the feeder connected to an
unearthed transformer winding should be cleared by the
feeder circuit, but if there is also a source of supply on
the secondary side of the transformer, the feeder may be
still live. The feeder will then be a local unearthed
system, and, if the earth fault continues in an arcing
condition, dangerous overvoltages may occur.
A voltage relay is energised from the broken-delta
connected secondary winding of a voltage transformer
on the high voltage line, and receives an input
proportional to the zero sequence voltage of the line,
that is, to any displacement of the neutral point; see
Figure 16.26.
The relay normally receives zero voltage, but, in the
presence of an earth fault, the broken-delta voltage will
rise to three times the phase voltage. Earth faults
elsewhere in the system may also result in displacement
of the neutral and hence discrimination is achieved using
definite or inverse time characteristics.
16.18 CONDITION MONITORING OF TRANSFORMERS

It is possible to provide transformers with measuring
devices to detect early signs of degradation in various
273
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:02
Page 274
Feeder
D Bias winding
Differential relays
E Operating winding
(a) Circulating current system
16
Pilots
Relay electromagnets
(bias inherent)
(b) Balanced voltage system
Figure 16.25: Methods of protection for transformer-feeders using electromechanical static technology
274
17/06/02
10:02
Page 275
operator can make a better judgement as to the

frequency of maintenance, and detect early signs of
deterioration that, if ignored, would lead to an internal
fault occurring. Such techniques are an enhancement to,
but are not a replacement for, the protection applied to
a transformer.
A
B
C
Voltage
transformer
The extent to which condition monitoring is applied to

transformers on a system will depend on many factors,
amongst which will be the policy of the asset owner, the
suitability of the design (existing transformers may
require modifications involving a period out of service
this may be costly and not justified), the importance of
the asset to system operation, and the general record of
reliability. Therefore, it should not be expected that all
transformers would be, or need to be, so fitted.
Ursd >
Residual voltage relay
Figure 16.26: Neutral displacement detection
using voltage transformer.
components and provide warning to the operator in

order to avoid a lengthy and expensive outage due to
failure. The technique, which can be applied to other
plant as well as transformers, is called condition
monitoring, as the intent is to provide the operator with
regular information on the condition of the transformer.
By reviewing the trends in the information provided, the
Monitored Equipment
Chap16-254-279
A typical condition monitoring system for an oilimmersed transformer is capable of monitoring the
condition of various transformer components as shown
in Table 16.5. There can be some overlap with the
measurements available from a digital/numerical relay.
By the use of software to store and perform trend
analysis of the measured data, the operator can be
presented with information on the state of health of the
transformer, and alarms raised when measured values
exceed appropriate limits. This will normally provide the
Measured Quantity
Health Information
Voltage
Partial discharge measurement
(wideband voltage)
Bushings
Load current
Oil pressure
Oil temperature
Tank
Tap changer
Coolers
Conservator
Gas-in-oil content
Buchholz gas content
Moisture-in-oil content
Position
Drive power consumption
Total switched load current
OLTC oil temperature
Oil temperature difference
Cooling air temperature
Ambient temperature
Pump status
Oil level
Table 16.5: Condition monitoring for transformers
275
Insulation quality
Loading
Permissible overload rating
Hot-spot temperature
Insulation quality
Hot-spot temperature
Permissible overload rating
Oil quality
Winding insulation condition
Oil quality
Winding insulation condition
Frequency of use of each tap position
OLTC health
OLTC contact wear
OLTC health
Cooler efficiency
Cooling plant health
Tank integrity
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:02
Page 276
operator with early warning of degradation within one or

more components of the transformer, enabling
maintenance to be scheduled to correct the problem
prior to failure occurring. The maintenance can
obviously be planned to suit system conditions, provided
the rate of degradation is not excessive.
As asset owners become more conscious of the costs of
an unplanned outage, and electric supply networks are
utilised closer to capacity for long periods of time, the
usefulness of this technique can be expected to grow.
16.19 EXAMPLES OF TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
This section provides three examples of the application

of modern relays to transformer protection. The latest
MiCOM P630 series relay provides advanced software to
simplify the calculations, so an earlier ALSTOM type
KBCH relay is used to illustrate the complexity of the
required calculations.
16.19.1 Provision of Zero-Sequence Filtering

Figure 16.27 shows a delta-star transformer to be
protected using a unit protection scheme. With a main
winding connection of Dyn11, suitable choices of primary
and secondary CT winding arrangements, and software
phase compensation are to be made. With the KBCH
relay, phase compensation is selected by the user in the
form of software-implemented ICTs.
Primary CT's
Dyn 11
Secondary CT's
+30 or on the secondary side having a phase shift of

30. There is a wide combination of primary and
secondary ICT winding arrangements that can provide
this, such as Yd10 (+60) on the primary and Yd3 (-90)
on the secondary. Another possibility is Yd11 (+30) on
the primary and Yy0 (0) on the secondary. It is usual to
choose the simplest arrangements possible, and
therefore the latter of the above two possibilities might
be selected.
However, the distribution of current in the primary and
secondary windings of the transformer due to an
external earth fault on the secondary side of the
transformer must now be considered. The transformer
has an earth connection on the secondary winding, so it
can deliver zero sequence current to the fault. Use of
star connected main CTs and Yy0 connected ICTs
provides a path for the zero sequence current to reach
the protection relay. On the primary side of the
transformer, the delta connected main primary winding
causes zero-sequence current to circulate round the
delta and hence will not be seen by the primary side
main CTs. The protection relay will therefore not see any
zero-sequence current on the primary side, and hence
detects the secondary side zero sequence current
incorrectly as an in-zone fault.
The solution is to provide the ICTs on the secondary side
of the transformer with a delta winding, so that the
zero-sequence current circulates round the delta and is
not seen by the relay. Therefore, a rule can be developed
that a transformer winding with a connection to earth
must have a delta-connected main or ICT for unit
protection to operate correctly.
Selection of Yy0 connection for the primary side ICTs
and Yd1 (30o) for the secondary side ICTs provides the
Primary CT's
Yy0, 250/1
Id>
16
Primary ICT's
Unit protection relay
Secondary ICT's
10MVA
33/11kV
Z=10%
Dyn11
Secondary CT's
Yy0, 600/1
FLC = 525A
FLC = 175A
Figure 16.27: Transformer zero sequence

filtering example
600/1
With the Dyn11 connection, the secondary voltages and

currents are displaced by +30 from the primary.
Therefore, the combination of primary, secondary and
phase correction must provide a phase shift of 30 of
the secondary quantities relative to the primary.
For simplicity, the CTs on the primary and secondary
windings of the transformer are connected in star. The
required phase shift can be achieved either by use of ICT
connections on the primary side having a phase shift of
276
R=1000 A
Rstab
Id>
Primary ICT's
Yy0
Unit Protection
Relay
Secondary ICT's
Yd1
Figure 16.28: Transformer unit

protection example
17/06/02
10:02
Page 277
required phase shift and the zero-sequence trap on the

secondary side.
16.19.2 Unit Protection of a Delta-Star Transformer

Figure 16.28 shows a delta-star transformer to which
unit protection is to be applied, including restricted earth
fault protection to the star winding.
Referring to the figure, the ICTs have already been
correctly selected, and are conveniently applied in
software. It therefore remains to calculate suitable ratio
compensation (it is assumed that the transformer has no
taps), transformer differential protection settings and
restricted earth fault settings.
primary earth fault current of 25% rated earth fault

current (i.e. 250A). The prime task in calculating settings
is to calculate the value of the stabilising resistor Rstab
and stability factor K.
A stabilising resistor is required to ensure through fault
stability when one of the secondary CTs saturates while
the others do not. The requirements can be expressed as:
VS
= ISRstab and
VS > KIf (Rct + 2Rl + RB )

where:
VS
= stability voltage setting
VK
= CT knee point voltage
16.19.2.1 Ratio compensation
= relay stability factor
Transformer HV full load current on secondary of main

CTs is:
IS
= relay current setting
Rct
= CT winding resistance
Rl
= CT secondary lead resistance
RB
= resistance of any other components in

the relay circuit
175/250
= 0.7
Ratio compensation = 1/0.7
= 1.428
Select nearest value = 1.43
LV secondary current = 525/600
= 0.875
Ratio compensation = 1/0.875
= 1.14
Rstab = stabilising resistor

For this example:
VK
= 97V
A current setting of 20% of the rated relay current is

recommended. This equates to 35A primary current. The
KBCH relay has a dual slope bias characteristic with fixed
bias slope settings of 20% up to rated current and 80%
above that level. The corresponding characteristic is
Rct
= 3.7
Rl
= 0.057
For the relay used, the various factors are related by the
graph of Figure 16.30.
600
70
500
60
400
Operate
300
200
Restrain
100
0.1
50
0.2
40
0.3
30
Overall op time
Unstable
20
0.5
Stable
200
Effective bias (A)
400
600
800
differential current
6
VK VS
16.9.2.3 Restricted earth fault protection

The KBCH relay implements high-impedance Restricted
Earth Fault (REF) protection. Operation is required for a
K Factor
10
Figure 16.29: Transformer unit

protection characteristic
277
Figure 16.30: REF operating characteristic

for KBCH relay
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
10
K Factor
Overall operationtime - milliseconds
Differential current (A)
16.9.2.2 Transformer unit protection settings
Chap16-254-279
16
Chap16-254-279
17/06/02
10:02
Page 278
Starting with the desired operating time, the VK/VS ratio

and K factor can be found.
An operating of 40ms (2 cycles at 50Hz) is usually
acceptable, and hence, from Figure 16.30,
VK/VS
=4
= 0.5
The maximum earth fault current is limited by the

earthing resistor to 1000A (primary). The maximum
phase fault current can be estimated by assuming the
source impedance to be zero, so it is limited only by
transformer impedance to 5250A, or 10A secondary after
taking account of the ratio compensation. Hence the
stability voltage can be calculated as
16
VS = 0.5 x 10( 3.7 + 2 x 0.057) = 19.07V

Hence,
Calculated VK = 4 x 19.07 = 76.28V
and substituting values, VP = 544V. Thus a Metrosil is

not required.
16.9.3 Unit Protection for On-Load Tap
Changing Transformer
The previous example deals with a transformer having no
taps. In practice, most transformers have a range of taps
to cater for different loading conditions. While most
transformers have an off-load tap-changer, transformers
used for voltage control in a network are fitted with an
on-load tap-changer. The protection settings must then
take the variation of tap-change position into account to
avoid the possibility of spurious trips at extreme tap
positions. For this example, the same transformer as in
Section 16.19.2 will be used, but with an on-load
tapping range of +5% to -15%. The tap-changer is
located on the primary winding, while the tap-step
usually does not matter.
The stages involved in the calculation are as follows:
a. determine ratio correction at mid-tap and resulting
secondary currents
However,
Actual
VK = 91V and
b. determine HV currents at tap extremities with ratio

correction
VK/VS = 4.77
Thus from Figure 16.30, with K = 0.5, the protection is
unstable.
c. determine the differential current at the tap

extremities
By adopting an iterative procedure for values of VK/VS

and K, a final acceptable result of VK/VS = 4.55, K = 0.6,
is obtained. This results in an operating time of 40ms.
The required earth fault setting current Iop is 250A. The
chosen E/F CT has an exciting current Ie of 1%, and
hence using the equation:
Iop = CT ratio x (IS + nIe)
where:
n
= no of CTs in parallel (=4)
IS
= 0.377, use 0.38 nearest settable value.
e. check for sufficient margin between differential

and operating currents
16.19.3.1 Ratio correction
In accordance with Section 16.8.4, the mid-tap position
is used to calculate the ratio correction factors. The mid
tap position is 5%, and at this tap position:
Primary voltage to give rated secondary voltage:
= 33 x 0.95 = 31.35kV
The stabilising resistance Rstab can be calculated as

60.21.
The relay can only withstand a maximum of 3kV peak
under fault conditions. A check is required to see if this
voltage is exceeded if it is, a non-linear resistor, known
as a Metrosil, must be connected across the relay and
stabilising resistor. The peak voltage is estimated using
the formula:
V P = 2 2 V K (V F V K
d. determine bias current at tap extremities
and
Rated Primary Current = 184A
Transformer HV full load current on secondary of main
CTs is:
184/250 = 0.737
Ratio compensation
= 1/0.737
= 1.357
Select nearest value
LV secondary current
= 1.36
= 525/600
= 0.875
where:
VF = If (Rct + 2Rl + Rstab )
Ratio compensation
and
= 1/0.875
= 1.14
If = fault current in secondary of CT circuit
Both of the above values can be set in the relay.

278
17/06/02
10:02
Page 279
16.19.3.2 HV currents at tap extremities
16.19.3.5 Margin between differential

and operating currents
At the +5% tap, the HV full-load current will be:

10
33 1.05
The operating current of the relay is given by the formula

Iop = IS + 0.2Ibias
Hence, at the +5% tap, with IS = 0.2
=166.6A primary
Iopt1 = 0.2 + (0.2 x 0.952)
Hence, the secondary current with ratio correction:

166.6 1.36
=
250
= 0.3904A
At the 15% tap,
= 0.906A
Iop = IS + 0.2 +(Ibias - 1) x 0.8
At the -15% tap, the HV full-load current on the primary

of the CTs:
10
=
33 0.85
Iopt2 = 0.2 + 0.2 +(1.059 - 1) x 0.8

= 0.4472A
For satisfactory operation of the relay, the operating

current should be no greater than 90% of the differential
current at the tap extremities.
= 205.8 A
Hence, the secondary current with ratio correction:
=
(since the bias >1.0)
Chap16-254-279
205.8 1.36
250
For the +5% tap, the differential current is 24% of the

operating current, and at the 15% tap, the differential
current is 27% of the operating current. Therefore, a
setting of IS is satisfactory.
= 1.12 A
16.19.3.3 Determine differential current at tap extremities
The full load current seen by the relay, after ratio
correction is 0.875 x 1.14 = 0.998A.
At the +5% tap, the differential current
Idifft2 = 0.998 - 0.906 = 0.092A
At the 15% tap,
Idifft2 = 1.12 - 0.998 = 0.122A
16.19.3.4 Determine bias currents at tap extremities
The bias current is given by the formula:
I bias =
( I RHV
+ I RLV
where:
IRHV = relay HV current
IRLV = relay LV current
Hence,
I biast1 =
(0.998 + 0.906 )
2
= 0.952A
and
I biast 2 =
(0.998 + 1.12 )
2
= 1.059A
279
16
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:43
Page 280
17 Generator and
Generator Transformer Protection
Introduction
17.1
Generator earthing
17.2
Stator winding faults
17.3
Stator winding protection
17.4
Differential protection of
direct-connected generators
17.5
Differential protection of generator

transformer units
17.6
Overcurrent protection
17.7
Stator earth fault protection
17.8
Overvoltage protection
17.9
Undervoltage protection 17.10

Low forward power/reverse
power protection
17.11
Unbalanced loading 17.12

Protection against inadvertent energisation 17.13
Under/Overfrequency/Overfluxing protection 17.14
Rotor faults 17.15
Loss of excitation protection 17.16
Pole slipping protection 17.17
Overheating 17.18
Mechanical faults 17.19
Complete generator protection schemes 17.20
Embedded generation 17.21
Examples of generator protection settings 17.22
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:44
Page 281
17 Generator and
Generator-Transformer P rotection
17.1 INTRODUCTION
The core of an electric power system is the generation.
With the exception of emerging fuel cell and solar-cell
technology for power systems, the conversion of the
fundamental energy into its electrical equivalent
normally requires a 'prime mover' to develop mechanical
power as an intermediate stage.
The nature of this machine depends upon the source of
energy and in turn this has some bearing on the design
of the generator. Generators based on steam, gas, water
or wind turbines, and reciprocating combustion engines
are all in use. Electrical ratings extend from a few
hundred kVA (or even less) for reciprocating engine and
renewable energy sets, up to steam turbine sets
exceeding 1200MVA.
Small and medium sized sets may be directly connected
to a power distribution system. A larger set may be
associated with an individual transformer, through
which it is coupled to the EHV primary transmission
system.
Switchgear may or may not be provided between the
generator and transformer. In some cases, operational
and economic advantages can be attained by providing
a generator circuit breaker in addition to a high voltage
circuit breaker, but special demands will be placed on
the generator circuit breaker for interruption of
generator fault current waveforms that do not have an
early zero crossing.
A unit transformer may be tapped off the
interconnection between generator and transformer for
the supply of power to auxiliary plant, as shown in
Figure 17.1. The unit transformer could be of the order
of 10% of the unit rating for a large fossil-fuelled steam
set with additional flue-gas desulphurisation plant, but
it may only be of the order of 1% of unit rating for a
hydro set.
281
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:44
Page 282
Generator
required. The amount of protection applied will be

governed by economic considerations, taking into
account the value of the machine, and the value of its
output to the plant owner.
Main transformer
The following problems require consideration from the

point of view of applying protection:
HV busbars
Unit transformer
a. stator electrical faults

b. overload
Auxiliary
supplies switchboard
c. overvoltage
Generator and Generator-Transfor mer P rotection
Figure 17.1: Generator-transformer unit
d. unbalanced loading
e. overfluxing
Industrial or commercial plants with a requirement for

steam/hot water now often include generating plant
utilising or producing steam to improve overall
economics, as a Combined Heat and Power (CHP)
scheme. The plant will typically have a connection to the
public Utility distribution system, and such generation is
referred to as embedded generation. The generating
plant may be capable of export of surplus power, or
simply reduce the import of power from the Utility. This
is shown in Figure 17.2.
f. inadvertent energisation
e. rotor electrical faults
f. loss of excitation
g. loss of synchronism
h. failure of prime mover
j. lubrication oil failure
l. overspeeding
m. rotor distortion
Utility
n. difference in expansion between rotating and

stationary parts
o. excessive vibration
PCC
p. core lamination faults
Generator
Rating: yMW
17.2 GENERATOR EARTHING

The neutral point of a generator is usually earthed to
facilitate protection of the stator winding and associated
system. Earthing also prevents damaging transient
overvoltages in the event of an arcing earth fault or
ferroresonance.
Industrial plant
main busbar
17
For HV generators, impedance is usually inserted in the

stator earthing connection to limit the magnitude of
earth fault current. There is a wide variation in the earth
fault current chosen, common values being:
Plant feeders - total

demand: xMW
PCC: Point of Common Coupling
When plant generator is running:
If y>x, Plant may export to Utility across PCC
If x>y, Plant max demand from Utility is reduced
1. rated current
2. 200A-400A (low impedance earthing)
3. 10A-20A (high impedance earthing)
Figure 17.2: Embedded generation
A modern generating unit is a complex system

comprising the generator stator winding, associated
transformer and unit transformer (if present), the rotor
with its field winding and excitation system, and the
prime mover with its associated auxiliaries. Faults of
many kinds can occur within this system for which
diverse forms of electrical and mechanical protection are
The main methods of impedance-earthing a generator

are shown in Figure 17.3. Low values of earth fault
current may limit the damage caused from a fault, but
they simultaneously make detection of a fault towards
the stator winding star point more difficult. Except for
special applications, such as marine, LV generators are
normally solidly earthed to comply with safety
requirements. Where a step-up transformer is applied,
282
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:44
Page 283
the generator and the lower voltage winding of the

transformer can be treated as an isolated system that is
not influenced by the earthing requirements of the
power system.
sufficient that the transformer be designed to have a

primary winding knee-point e.m.f. equal to 1.3 times the
generator rated line voltage.
17.3 STATOR WINDING FAULTS

Failure of the stator windings or connection insulation
can result in severe damage to the windings and stator
core. The extent of the damage will depend on the
magnitude and duration of the fault current.
(a) Direct earthing

Typical setting
(% of earthing
resistor rating)
10
I>
17.3.1 Earth Faults

The most probable mode of insulation failure is phase to
earth. Use of an earthing impedance limits the earth
fault current and hence stator damage.
(b) Resistance earthing
Loading
resistor
U>
(c) Distribution transformer earthing

with overvoltage relay.
Loading
resistor
I>
(d) Distribution transformer earthing
with overcurrent relay
Figure 17.3: Methods of generator earthing
An earthing transformer or a series impedance can be

used as the impedance. If an earthing transformer is
used, the continuous rating is usually in the range 5250kVA. The secondary winding is loaded with a resistor
of a value which, when referred through the transformer
turns ratio, will pass the chosen short-time earth-fault
current. This is typically in the range of 5-20A. The
resistor prevents the production of high transient
overvoltages in the event of an arcing earth fault, which
it does by discharging the bound charge in the circuit
capacitance. For this reason, the resistive component of
fault current should not be less than the residual
capacitance current. This is the basis of the design, and
in practice values of between 3-5 Ico are used.
It is important that the earthing transformer never
becomes saturated; otherwise a very undesirable
condition of ferroresonance may occur. The normal rise
of the generated voltage above the rated value caused by
a sudden loss of load or by field forcing must be
considered, as well as flux doubling in the transformer
due to the point-on-wave of voltage application. It is
An earth fault involving the stator core results in burning

of the iron at the point of fault and welds laminations
together. Replacement of the faulty conductor may not
be a very serious matter (dependent on set
rating/voltage/construction) but the damage to the core
cannot be ignored, since the welding of laminations may
result in local overheating. The damaged area can
sometimes be repaired, but if severe damage has
occurred, a partial core rebuild will be necessary. A
flashover is more likely to occur in the end-winding
region, where electrical stresses are highest. The
resultant forces on the conductors would be very large
and they may result in extensive damage, requiring the
partial or total rewinding of the generator. Apart from
burning the core, the greatest danger arising from failure
to quickly deal with a fault is fire. A large portion of the
insulating material is inflammable, and in the case of an
air-cooled machine, the forced ventilation can quickly
cause an arc flame to spread around the winding. Fire
will not occur in a hydrogen-cooled machine, provided
the stator system remains sealed. In any case, the length
of an outage may be considerable, resulting in major
financial impact from loss of generation revenue and/or
import of additional energy.
17.3.2 Phase-Phase Faults

Phase-phase faults clear of earth are less common; they
may occur on the end portion of stator coils or in the
slots if the winding involves two coil sides in the same
slot. In the latter case, the fault will involve earth in a
very short time. Phase fault current is not limited by the
method of earthing the neutral point.
17.3.3 Interturn Faults

Interturn faults are rare, but a significant fault-loop
current can arise where such a fault does occur.
283
I>>
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:44
Page 284
Conventional generator protection systems would be

blind to an interturn fault, but the extra cost and
complication of providing detection of a purely interturn
fault is not usually justified. In this case, an interturn
fault must develop into an earth fault before it can be
cleared. An exception may be where a machine has an
abnormally complicated or multiple winding
arrangement, where the probability of an interturn fault
might be increased.
calculation, after measurement of the individual CT

secondary currents. In such relay designs, there is full
galvanic separation of the neutral-tail and terminal CT
secondary circuits, as indicated in Figure 17.5(a). This is
not the case for the application of high-impedance
differential protection. This difference can impose some
special relay design requirements to achieve stability for
biased differential protection in some applications.
17.5.1 Biased Differential Protection
17.4 STATOR WINDING PROTECTION
17
To respond quickly to a phase fault with damaging heavy

current, sensitive, high-speed differential protection is
normally applied to generators rated in excess of 1MVA.
For large generating units, fast fault clearance will also
maintain stability of the main power system. The zone
of differential protection can be extended to include an
associated step-up transformer. For smaller generators,
IDMT/instantaneous overcurrent protection is usually the
only phase fault protection applied. Sections 17.5-17.8
detail the various methods that are available for stator
winding protection.
The relay connections for this form of protection are

shown in Figure 17.5(a) and a typical bias characteristic
is shown in Figure 17.5(b). The differential current
threshold setting Is1 can be set as low as 5% of rated
generator current, to provide protection for as much of
the winding as possible. The bias slope break-point
threshold setting Is2 would typically be set to a value
above generator rated current, say 120%, to achieve
external fault stability in the event of transient
asymmetric CT saturation. Bias slope K2 setting would
typically be set at 150%.
I1
I2
17.5 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION OF DIRECT

CONNECTED GENERATORS
The theory of circulating current differential protection is
discussed fully in Section 10.4.
Stator
A
(a): Relay connections for biased differential protection
B
C
Idiffff
= I1+II2
IS1
Id>
Id>
Operate
K2
K1
Restrain
Id>
IS2
IBIAS =
I1+
(b) Biased differential operating characteristic

Figure 17.4: Stator differential protection
Figure 17.5: Typical generator biased
High-speed phase fault protection is provided, by use of

the connections shown in Figure 17.4. This depicts the
derivation of differential current through CT secondary
circuit connections. This protection may also offer earth
fault protection for some moderate impedance-earthed
applications.
Either biased differential or high
impedance differential techniques can be applied. A
subtle difference with modern, biased, numerical
generator protection relays is that they usually derive the
differential currents and biasing currents by algorithmic
17.5.2 High Impedance Differential Protection

This differs from biased differential protection by the
manner in which relay stability is achieved for external
faults and by the fact that the differential current must
be attained through the electrical connections of CT
secondary circuits. If the impedance of each relay in
Figure 17.4 is high, the event of one CT becoming
saturated by the through fault current (leading to a
284
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:44
Page 285
relatively low CT impedance), will allow the current from

the unsaturated CT to flow mainly through the saturated
CT rather than through the relay. This provides the
required protection stability where a tuned relay element
is employed. In practice, external resistance is added to
the relay circuit to provide the necessary high
impedance. The principle of high-impedance protection
application is illustrated in Figure 17.6, together with a
summary of the calculations required to determine the
value of external stabilising resistance.
To calculate the primary operating current, the following

expression is used:
Iop = N x (Is1 + nIe)
where:
Iop = primary operating current
N = CT ratio
Is1 = relay setting
n
= number of CTs in parallel with relay element
Ie = CT magnetising current at Vs
Saturated CT
Is1 is typically set to 5% of generator rated secondary

current.
Protected zone
Zm
RCT1
It can be seen from the above that the calculations for

the application of high impedance differential protection
are more complex than for biased differential protection.
However, the protection scheme is actually quite simple
and it offers a high level of stability for through faults
and external switching events.
RCT2
If
RL1
RL3
Rst
Vr
Id >
RL2
Healthy CT
RL4
Voltage across relay circuit Vr = If (RCT + 2RL) and Vs = KVr

where 1.0<K1.5
Stabilising resistor, Rst, limits spill current to <Is (relay setting)
V
Rst = s -RR
Is
when RR = relay burden
With the advent of multi-function numerical relays and

with a desire to dispense with external components, high
impedance differential protection is not as popular as
biased differential protection in modern relaying
practice.
Figure 17.6: Principle of high impedance

17.5.3 CT Requirements
In some applications, protection may be required to limit
voltages across the CT secondary circuits when the
differential secondary current for an internal phase fault
flows through the high impedance relay circuit(s), but
this is not commonly a requirement for generator
differential applications unless very high impedance
relays are applied. Where necessary, shuntconnected,
non-linear resistors, should be deployed, as shown in
Figure 17.7.
The CT requirements for differential protection will vary

according to the relay used. Modern numerical relays
may not require CTs specifically designed for differential
protection to IEC 60044-1 class PX (or BS 3938 class X).
However, requirements in respect of CT knee-point
voltage will still have to be checked for the specific
relays used. High impedance differential protection may
be more onerous in this respect than biased differential
protection.
Many factors affect this, including the other protection
functions fed by the CTs and the knee-point
requirements of the particular relay concerned. Relay
manufacturers are able to provide detailed guidance on
this matter.
NLR
NLR
Rst
NLR = Non-linear resistance
(Metrosil)
Figure 17.7: Relay connections for high
impedance differential protection
17.6 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION OF

GENERATOR-TRANSFORMERS
A common connection arrangement for large generators
is to operate the generator and associated step-up
transformer as a unit without any intervening circuit
breaker. The unit transformer supplying the generator
auxiliaries is tapped off the connection between
generator and step-up transformer.
Differential
protection can be arranged as follows.
285
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:44
Page 286
17.6.1 Generator/Step-up Transformer

Differential Protection
The generator stator and step-up transformer can be

protected by a single zone of overall differential
protection (Figure 17.8). This will be in addition to
differential protection applied to the generator only. The
current transformers should be located in the generator
neutral connections and in the transformer HV
connections.
Alternatively, CTs within the HV
switchyard may be employed if the distance is not
technically prohibitive. Even where there is a generator
circuit breaker, overall differential protection can still be
provided if desired.
17
Main
transformer
Generator
transformer rating is extremely low in relation to the

generator rating, e.g. for some hydro applications. The
location of the third set of current transformers is
normally on the primary side of the unit transformer. If
located on secondary side of the unit transformer, they
would have to be of an exceptionally high ratio, or
exceptionally high ratio interposing CTs would have to
be used. Thus, the use of secondary side CTs is not to be
recommended. One advantage is that unit transformer
faults would be within the zone of protection of the
generator. However, the sensitivity of the generator
protection to unit transformer phase faults would be
considered inadequate, due to the relatively low rating of
the transformer in relation to that of the generator.
Thus, the unit transformer should have its own
differential protection scheme. Protection for the unit
transformer is covered in Chapter 16, including methods
for stabilising the protection against magnetising inrush
conditions.
Protected zone
Id>
HV
busbars
17.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
Figure 17.8: Overall generator-transformer

The current transformers should be rated according to

Section 16.8.2. Since a power transformer is included
within the zone of protection, biased transformer
differential protection, with magnetising inrush restraint
should be applied, as discussed in Section 16.8.5.
Transient overfluxing of the generator transformer may
arise due to overvoltage following generator load
rejection. In some applications, this may threaten the
stability of the differential protection. In such cases,
consideration should be given to applying protection
with transient overfluxing restraint/blocking (e.g. based
on a 5th harmonic differential current threshold).
Protection against sustained overfluxing is covered in
Section 17.14.
Overcurrent protection of generators may take two

forms. Plain overcurrent protection may be used as the
principle form of protection for small generators, and
back-up protection for larger ones where differential
protection is used as the primary method of generator
stator winding protection.
Voltage dependent
overcurrent protection may be applied where differential
protection is not justified on larger generators, or where
problems are met in applying plain overcurrent
protection.
17.7.1 Plain Overcurrent Protection
17.6.2 Unit Transformer Differential Protection
It is usual to apply time-delayed plain overcurrent

protection to generators. For generators rated less than
1MVA, this will form the principal stator winding
protection for phase faults. For larger generators,
overcurrent protection can be applied as remote back-up
protection, to disconnect the unit from any uncleared
external fault. Where there is only one set of differential
main protection, for a smaller generator, the overcurrent
protection will also provide local back-up protection for
the protected plant, in the event that the main
protection fails to operate. The general principles of
setting overcurrent relays are given in Chapter 9.
The current taken by the unit transformer must be

allowed for by arranging the generator differential
protection as a three-ended scheme. Unit transformer
current transformers are usually applied to balance the
generator differential protection and prevent the unit
transformer through current being seen as differential
current. An exception might be where the unit
In the case of a single generator feeding an isolated

system, current transformers at the neutral end of the
machine should energise the overcurrent protection, to
allow a response to winding fault conditions. Relay
characteristics should be selected to take into account
the fault current decrement behaviour of the generator,
with allowance for the performance of the excitation
286
17/06/02
10:44
Page 287
system and its field-forcing capability. Without the

provision of fault current compounding from generator
CTs, an excitation system that is powered from an
excitation transformer at the generator terminals will
exhibit a pronounced fault current decrement for a
terminal fault. With failure to consider this effect, the
potential exists for the initial high fault current to decay
to a value below the overcurrent protection pick-up
setting before a relay element can operate, unless a low
current setting and/or time setting is applied. The
protection would then fail to trip the generator. The
settings chosen must be the best compromise between
assured operation in the foregoing circumstances and
discrimination with the system protection and passage
of normal load current, but this can be impossible with
plain overcurrent protection.
In the more usual case of a generator that operates in
parallel with others and which forms part of an extensive
interconnected system, back-up phase fault protection
for a generator and its transformer will be provided by HV
overcurrent protection. This will respond to the higherlevel backfeed from the power system to a unit fault.
Other generators in parallel would supply this current
and, being stabilised by the system impedance, it will not
suffer a major decrement. This protection is usually a
requirement of the power system operator. Settings must
be chosen to prevent operation for external faults fed by
the generator. It is common for the HV overcurrent
protection relay to provide both time-delayed and
instantaneous high-set elements. The time-delayed
elements should be set to ensure that the protected items
of plant cannot pass levels of through fault current in
excess of their short-time withstand limits. The
instantaneous elements should be set above the
maximum possible fault current that the generator can
supply, but less than the system-supplied fault current in
the event of a generator winding fault. This back-up
protection will minimise plant damage in the event of
main protection failure for a generating plant fault and
instantaneous tripping for an HV-side fault will aid the
recovery of the power system and parallel generation.
The choice depends upon the power system

characteristics and level of protection to be provided.
Voltage-dependent overcurrent relays are often found
applied to generators used on industrial systems as an
alternative to full differential protection.
17.7.2.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection has two
time/current characteristics which are selected according
to the status of a generator terminal voltage measuring
element. The voltage threshold setting for the switching
element is chosen according to the following criteria.
1. during overloads, when the system voltage is
sustained near normal, the overcurrent protection
should have a current setting above full load current
and an operating time characteristic that will prevent
the generating plant from passing current to a remote
external fault for a period in excess of the plant shorttime withstand limits
2. under close-up fault conditions, the busbar voltage
must fall below the voltage threshold so that the
second protection characteristic will be selected. This
characteristic should be set to allow relay operation
with fault current decrement for a close-up fault at
the generator terminals or at the HV busbars. The
protection should also time-grade with external
circuit protection. There may be additional infeeds to
an external circuit fault that will assist with grading
Typical characteristics are shown in Figure 17.9.
Current pick-up level
I>
KI>
17.7.2 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection
Vs
The plain overcurrent protection setting difficulty

referred to in the previous section arises because
allowance has to be made both for the decrement of the
generator fault current with time and for the passage of
full load current. To overcome the difficulty of
discrimination, the generator terminal voltage can be
measured and used to dynamically modify the basic relay
current/time overcurrent characteristic for faults close to
the generating plant. There are two basic alternatives
for the application of voltage-dependent overcurrent
protection, which are discussed in the following sections.
Chap17-280-315
Voltage level
Figure 17.9: Voltage controlled relay

characteristics
17.7.2.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection

The alternative technique is to continuously vary the
relay element pickup setting with generator voltage
variation between upper and lower limits. The voltage is
said to restrain the operation of the current element.
The effect is to provide a dynamic I.D.M.T. protection
characteristic, according to the voltage at the machine
287
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:46
Page 288
terminals. Alternatively, the relay element may be

regarded as an impedance type with a long dependent
time delay. In consequence, for a given fault condition,
the relay continues to operate more or less
independently of current decrement in the machine. A
typical characteristic is shown in Figure 17.10.
considerations.
17.8.1.2 Sensitive earth fault protection
This method is used in the following situations:
a. direct-connected generators operating in parallel
b. generators with high-impedance neutral earthing,
the earth fault current being limited to a few tens
of amps
Current pick-up level
c. installations where the resistance of the ground

fault path is very high, due to the nature of the
ground
I>
17
In these cases, conventional earth fault protection as

described in Section 17.8.1.1 is of little use.
The principles of sensitive earth fault protection are
described in Sections 9.17.1, 9.18 and 9.19. The earth
fault (residual) current can be obtained from residual
connection of line CTs, a line-connected CBCT, or a CT in
the generator neutral. The latter is not possible if
directional protection is used. The polarising voltage is
usually the neutral voltage displacement input to the
relay, or the residual of the three phase voltages, so a
suitable VT must be used. For Petersen Coil earthing, a
wattmetric technique (Section 9.19) can also be used.
KI>
VS2
VS1
Voltage level
Figure 17.10: Voltage restrained relay

characteristics
17.8 STATOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

Earth fault protection must be applied where impedance
earthing is employed that limits the earth fault current
to less than the pick-up threshold of the overcurrent
and/or differential protection for a fault located down to
the bottom 5% of the stator winding from the starpoint. The type of protection required will depend on the
method of earthing and connection of the generator to
the power system.
17.8.1 Direct-Connected Generators

A single direct-connected generator operating on an
isolated system will normally be directly earthed.
However, if several direct-connected generators are
operated in parallel, only one generator is normally
earthed at a time. For the unearthed generators, a
simple measurement of the neutral current is not
possible, and other methods of protection must be used.
The following sections describe the methods available.
17.8.1.1 Neutral overcurrent protection
With this form of protection, a current transformer in the
neutral-earth connection energises an overcurrent relay
element.
This provides unrestricted earth-fault
protection and so it must be graded with feeder
protection. The relay element will therefore have a timedelayed operating characteristic. Grading must be
carried out in accordance with the principles detailed in
Chapter 9. The setting should not be more than 33% of
the maximum earth fault current of the generator, and a
lower setting would be preferable, depending on grading
For direct connected generators operating in parallel,

directional sensitive earth fault protection may be
necessary. This is to ensure that a faulted generator will
be tripped before there is any possibility of the neutral
overcurrent protection tripping a parallel healthy
generator. When being driven by residually-connected
phase CTs, the protection must be stabilised against
incorrect tripping with transient spill current in the event
of asymmetric CT saturation when phase fault or
magnetising inrush current is being passed. Stabilising
techniques include the addition of relay circuit
impedance and/or the application of a time delay. Where
the required setting of the protection is very low in
comparison to the rated current of the phase CTs, it
would be necessary to employ a single CBCT for the earth
fault protection to ensure transient stability.
Since any generator in the paralleled group may be
earthed, all generators will require to be fitted with both
neutral overcurrent protection and sensitive directional
earth fault protection.
The setting of the sensitive directional earth fault
protection is chosen to co-ordinate with generator
differential protection and/or neutral voltage
displacement protection to ensure that 95% of the stator
winding is protected. Figure 17.11 illustrates the
complete scheme, including optional blocking signals
where difficulties in co-ordinating the generator and
downstream feeder earth-fault protection occur.
288
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:46
Page 289
sum residually.
Feeder
I >
I >
Ursd
I >
* Optional interlocked
earth-fault protection
if grading problems exist
I >>
I >
Block*
Ursd >
I >
As the protection is still unrestricted, the voltage setting

of the relay must be greater than the effective setting of
any downstream earth-fault protection. It must also be
time-delayed to co-ordinate with such protection.
Sometimes, a second high-set element with short time
delay is used to provide fast-acting protection against
major winding earth-faults. Figure 17.12 illustrates the
possible connections that may be used.
Block*
Open
Minimum earth fault level = IF
Re
Re
2
Re
Figure 17.11: Comprehensive earth-fault

protection scheme for direct-connected
generators operating in parallel
Va
Vb
c
For cases (b) and (c) above, it is not necessary to use a

directional facility. Care must be taken to use the correct
RCA setting for instance if the earthing impedance is
mainly resistive, this should be 0. On insulated or very
high impedance earthed systems, an RCA of -90 would
be used, as the earth fault current is predominately
capacitive.
Directional sensitive earth-fault protection can also be
used for detecting winding earth faults. In this case, the
relay element is applied to the terminals of the generator
and is set to respond to faults only within the machine
windings. Hence earth faults on the external system do
not result in relay operation. However, current flowing
from the system into a winding earth fault causes relay
operation. It will not operate on the earthed machine, so
that other types of earth fault protection must also be
applied. All generators must be so fitted, since any can
be operated as the earthed machine.
17.8.1.3 Neutral voltage displacement protection
In a balanced network, the addition of the three phaseearth voltages produces a nominally zero residual
voltage, since there would be little zero sequence voltage
present. Any earth fault will set up a zero sequence
system voltage, which will give rise to a non-zero
residual voltage. This can be measured by a suitable
relay element. The voltage signal must be derived from
a VT that is suitable i.e. it must be capable of
transforming zero-sequence voltage, so 3-limb types and
those without a primary earth connection are not
suitable. This unbalance voltage provides a means of
detecting earth faults. The relay element must be
insensitive to third harmonic voltages that may be
present in the system voltage waveforms, as these will
Vn
1 Derived from phase neutral voltages
2 Measured from earth impedance
3 Measured from broken delta VT
Figure 17.12: Neutral voltage displacement
protection
17.8.2 Indirectly-Connected Generators

As noted in Section 17.2, a directly-earthed generatortransformer unit cannot interchange zero-sequence
current with the remainder of the network, and hence an
earth fault protection grading problem does not exist.
The following sections detail the protection methods for
the various forms of impedance earthing of generators.
17.8.2.1 High resistance earthing neutral overcurrent
protection
A current transformer mounted on the neutral-earth
conductor can drive an instantaneous and/or time
delayed overcurrent relay element, as shown in Figure
17.13. It is impossible to provide protection for the whole
of the winding, and Figure 17.13 also details how the
percentage of winding covered can be calculated. For a
relay element with an instantaneous setting, protection is
typically limited to 90% of the winding. This is to ensure
that the protection will not maloperate with zero
sequence current during operation of a primary fuse for a
VT earth fault or with any transient surge currents that
could flow through the interwinding capacitance of the
step-up transformer for an HV system earth fault.
A time-delayed relay is more secure in this respect, and it
may have a setting to cover 95% of the stator winding.
Since the generating units under consideration are usually
large, instantaneous and time delayed relay elements are
289
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:46
Page 290
often applied, with settings of 10% and 5% of maximum

earth fault current respectively; this is the optimum
compromise in performance. The portion of the winding
left unprotected for an earth fault is at the neutral end.
Since the voltage to earth at this end of the winding is
low, the probability of an earth fault occurring is also low.
Hence additional protection is often not applied.
Loading
resistor
I>
17
(a) Protection using a current element

a
If
Is
If =
aV
R
IsR
V
%covered 1-a
Loading
resistor
U>
amin =
in
(b) Protection using a voltage element
) x 1100%
generator stator winding using a current element
Figure 17.14: Generator winding earth-fault

protection - distribution transformer earthing
Figure 17.13: Earth fault protection of high-resistance

earthed generator stator winding using a current element
17.8.2.2 Distribution transformer earthing

using a current element
In this arrangement, shown in Figure 17.14(a), the
generator is earthed via the primary winding of a
distribution transformer. The secondary winding is fitted
with a loading resistor to limit the earth fault current.
An overcurrent relay element energised from a current
transformer connected in the resistor circuit is used to
measure secondary earth fault current. The relay should
have an effective setting equivalent to 5% of the
maximum earth fault current at rated generator voltage,
in order to protect 95% of the stator winding. The relay
element response to third harmonic current should be
limited to prevent incorrect operation when a sensitive
setting is applied.
As discussed in Section 17.8.2.1 for neutral overcurrent
protection, the protection should be time delayed when
a sensitive setting is applied, in order to prevent
maloperation under transient conditions. It also must
grade with generator VT primary protection (for a VT
primary earth fault). An operation time in the range
0.5s-3s is usual. Less sensitive instantaneous protection
can also be applied to provide fast tripping for a heavier
earth fault condition.
17.8.2.3 Distribution transformer earthing

using a voltage element
Earth fault protection can also be provided using a voltagemeasuring element in the secondary circuit instead. The
setting considerations would be similar to those for the
current operated protection, but transposed to voltage.
The circuit diagram is shown in Figure 17.14(b).
Application of both voltage and current operated
elements to a generator with distribution transformer
earthing provides some advantages. The current
operated function will continue to operate in the event
of a short-circuited loading resistor and the voltage
protection still functions in the event of an opencircuited resistor. However, neither scheme will operate
in the event of a flashover on the primary terminals of
the transformer or of the neutral cable between the
generator and the transformer during an earth fault. A
CT could be added in the neutral connection close to the
generator, to energise a high-set overcurrent element to
detect such a fault, but the fault current would probably
be high enough to operate the phase differential
protection.
This can be applied in the same manner as for directconnected generators (Section 17.8.1.3). The only
290
17/06/02
10:46
Page 291
difference is that the are no grading problems as the

protection is inherently restricted. A sensitive setting
can therefore be used, enabling cover of up to 95% of
the stator winding to be achieved.
17.8.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

This technique can be used on small generators not fitted
with differential protection to provide fast acting earth
fault protection within a defined zone that encompasses
the generator. It is cheaper than full differential
protection but only provides protection against earth
faults. The principle is that used for transformer REF
protection, as detailed in Section 16.7. However, in
contrast to transformer REF protection, both biased lowimpedance and high-impedance techniques can be used.
17.8.3.1 Low-impedance biased REF protection
This is shown in Figure 17.15. The main advantage is
that the neutral CT can also be used in a modern relay to
provide conventional earth-fault protection and no
external resistors are used. Relay bias is required, as
described in Section 10.4.2, but the formula for
calculating the bias is slightly different and also shown
in Figure 17.15.
protection of a generator, using three residually

connected phase CTs balanced against a similar single
CT in the neutral connection. Settings of the order of 5%
of maximum earth fault current at the generator
terminals are typical. The usual requirements in respect
of stabilising resistor and non-linear resistor to guard
against excessive voltage across the relay must be taken,
where necessary.
17.8.4 Earth Fault Protection for

the Entire Stator Winding
All of the methods for earth fault protection detailed so
far leave part of the winding unprotected. In most cases,
this is of no consequence as the probability of a fault
occurring in the 5% of the winding nearest the neutral
connection is very low, due to the reduced phase to earth
voltage. However, a fault can occur anywhere along the
stator windings in the event of insulation failure due to
localised heating from a core fault. In cases where
protection for the entire winding is required, perhaps for
alarm only, there are various methods available.
17.8.4.1 Measurement of third harmonic voltage
17.8.3.2 High Impedance REF protection
One method is to measure the internally generated third

harmonic voltage that appears across the earthing
impedance due to the flow of third harmonic currents
through the shunt capacitance of the stator windings
etc. When a fault occurs in the part of the stator
winding nearest the neutral end, the third harmonic
voltage drops to near zero, and hence a relay element
that responds to third harmonic voltage can be used to
detect the condition. As the fault location moves
progressively away from the neutral end, the drop in
third harmonic voltage from healthy conditions becomes
less, so that at around 20-30% of the winding distance,
it no longer becomes possible to discriminate between a
healthy and a faulty winding. Hence, a conventional
earth-fault scheme should be used in conjunction with a
third harmonic scheme, to provide overlapping cover
of the entire stator winding. The measurement of third
harmonic voltage can be taken either from a star-point
VT or the generator line VT. In the latter case, the VT
must be capable of carrying residual flux, and this
prevents the use of 3-limb types. If the third harmonic
voltage is measured at the generator star point, an
undervoltage characteristic is used. An overvoltage
characteristic is used if the measurement is taken from
the generator line VT. For effective application of this
form of protection, there should be at least 1% third
harmonic voltage across the generator neutral earthing
impedance under all operating conditions.
The principle of high impedance differential protection is

given in Chapter 10 and also described further in Section
17.5.2. The same technique can be used for earth-fault
A problem encountered is that the level of third

harmonic voltage generated is related to the output of
the generator. The voltage is low when generator output
Phase CT ratio 1000/1

Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral CT ratio
200/1
/
IBIAS =
(highest of IA
B,
Nx
scaling factor)
2
200
=
= 0.2
1000
where scaling factor =

IDIFF = IA IB IC
(scaling factor
IN )
Figure 17.15: Low impedance biased REF

protection of a generator
The initial bias slope is commonly set to 0% to provide

maximum sensitivity, and applied up to the rated current
of the generator. It may be increased to counter the
effects of CT mismatch. The bias slope above generator
rated current is typically set to 150% of rated value. The
initial current setting is typically 5% of the minimum
earth fault current for a fault at the machine terminals.
Chap17-280-315
291
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:46
Page 292
is low. In order to avoid maloperation when operating at

low power output, the relay element can be inhibited
using an overcurrent or power element (kW, kvar or kVA)
and internal programmable logic.
17.8.4.2 Use of low-frequency voltage injection
17
Another method for protecting the entire stator winding

of a generator is to deploy signal injection equipment to
inject a low frequency voltage between the stator star
point and earth. An earth fault at any winding location
will result in the flow of a measurable injection current
to cause protection operation. This form of protection
can provide earth fault protection when the generator is
at standstill, prior to run-up. It is also an appropriate
method to apply to variable speed synchronous
machines. Such machines may be employed for variable
speed motoring in pumped-storage generation schemes
or for starting a large gas turbine prime mover.
17.9 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

Overvoltages on a generator may occur due to transient
surges on the network, or prolonged power frequency
overvoltages may arise from a variety of conditions.
Surge arrestors may be required to protect against
transient overvoltages, but relay protection may be used
to protect against power frequency overvoltages.
A sustained overvoltage condition should not occur for a
machine with a healthy voltage regulator, but it may be
caused by the following contingencies:
a. defective operation of the automatic voltage
regulator when the machine is in isolated operation
b. operation under manual control with the voltage
regulator out of service. A sudden variation of the
load, in particular the reactive power component,
will give rise to a substantial change in voltage
because of the large voltage regulation inherent in
a typical alternator
c. sudden loss of load (due to tripping of outgoing
feeders, leaving the set isolated or feeding a very small
load) may cause a sudden rise in terminal voltage due
to the trapped field flux and/or overspeed
Sudden loss of load should only cause a transient
overvoltage while the voltage regulator and governor act
to correct the situation. A maladjusted voltage regulator
may trip to manual, maintaining excitation at the value
prior to load loss while the generator supplies little or no
load. The terminal voltage will increase substantially,
and in severe cases it would be limited only by the
saturation characteristic of the generator. A rise in speed
simply compounds the problem. If load that is sensitive
to overvoltages remains connected, the consequences in
terms of equipment damage and lost revenue can be
severe. Prolonged overvoltages may also occur on
isolated networks, or ones with weak interconnections,

due to the fault conditions listed earlier.
For these reasons, it is prudent to provide power
frequency overvoltage protection, in the form of a timedelayed element, either IDMT or definite time. The time
delay should be long enough to prevent operation during
normal regulator action, and therefore should take
account of the type of AVR fitted and its transient
response. Sometimes a high-set element is provided as
well, with a very short definite-time delay or
instantaneous setting to provide a rapid trip in extreme
circumstances. The usefulness of this is questionable for
generators fitted with an excitation system other than a
static type, because the excitation will decay in
accordance with the open-circuit time constant of the
field winding. This decay can last several seconds. The
relay element is arranged to trip both the main circuit
breaker (if not already open) and the excitation; tripping
the main circuit breaker alone is not sufficient.
17.10 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

Undervoltage protection is rarely fitted to generators. It
is sometimes used as an interlock element for another
protection function or scheme, such as field failure
protection or inadvertent energisation protection, where
the abnormality to be detected leads directly or
indirectly to an undervoltage condition.
A transmission system undervoltage condition may arise
when there is insufficient reactive power generation to
maintain the system voltage profile and the condition
must be addressed to avoid the possible phenomenon of
system voltage collapse.
However, it should be addressed by the deployment of
system protection schemes. The generation should not
be tripped. The greatest case for undervoltage protection
being required would be for a generator supplying an
isolated power system or to meet Utility demands for
connection of embedded generation (see Section 17.21).
In the case of generators feeding an isolated system,
undervoltage may occur for several reasons, typically
overloading or failure of the AVR. In some cases, the
performance of generator auxiliary plant fed via a unit
transformer from the generator terminals could be
adversely affected by prolonged undervoltage.
Where undervoltage protection is required, it should
comprise an undervoltage element and an associated
time delay. Settings must be chosen to avoid
maloperation during the inevitable voltage dips during
power system fault clearance or associated with motor
starting. Transient reductions in voltage down to 80% or
less may be encountered during motor starting.
292
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:46
Page 293
17.11 LOW FORWARD POWER/REVERSE

POWER PROTECTION
Low forward power or reverse power protection may be
required for some generators to protect the prime mover.
Parts of the prime mover may not be designed to
experience reverse torque or they may become damaged
through continued rotation after the prime mover has
suffered some form of failure.
where a protection sensitivity of better than 3% is

required, a metering class CT should be employed to
avoid incorrect protection behaviour due to CT phase
angle errors when the generator supplies a significant
level of reactive power at close to zero power factor.
The reverse power protection should be provided with a
definite time delay on operation to prevent spurious
operation with transient power swings that may arise
following synchronisation or in the event of a power
transmission system disturbance.
17.11.1 Low Forward Power Protection
Motoring Power
(% of rated)
Possible Damage
Diesel Engine
5-25
Fire/explosion due
to unburnt fuel
Mechanical damage
to gearbox/shafts
Gas Turbine
Hydro
Steam Turbine
10-15
(split shaft)
>50%
(single shaft)
0.2-2
(blades out of water)
>2
(blades in water)
0.5-6
Protection Setting
gearbox damage
17.12.1 Effect of Negative Sequence Current

The negative sequence component is similar to the
positive sequence system, except that the resulting
reaction field rotates in the opposite direction to the d.c.
field system. Hence, a flux is produced which cuts the
rotor at twice the rotational velocity, thereby inducing
double frequency currents in the field system and in the
rotor body. The resulting eddy-currents are very large
and cause severe heating of the rotor.
A generator is assigned a continuous negative sequence

rating. For turbo-generators this rating is low; standard
values of 10% and 15% of the generator continuous
rating have been adopted. The lower rating applies when
the more intensive cooling techniques are applied, for
example hydrogen-cooling with gas ducts in the rotor to
facilitate direct cooling of the winding.
50%
of motoring
power
blade and runner

cavitation
turbine blade damage
gearbox damage
on geared sets
Table 17.1: Generator reverse power problems
Reverse power protection is applied to prevent damage

to mechanical plant items in the event of failure of the
prime mover. Table 17.1 gives details of the potential
problems for various prime mover types and the typical
settings for reverse power protection. For applications
A three-phase balanced load produces a reaction field

that, to a first approximation, is constant and rotates
synchronously with the rotor field system. Any
unbalanced condition can be resolved into positive,
negative and zero sequence components. The positive
sequence component is similar to the normal balanced
load. The zero sequence component produces no main
armature reaction.
So severe is this effect that a single-phase load equal to

the normal three-phase rated current can quickly heat
the rotor slot wedges to the softening point. They may
then be extruded under centrifugal force until they stand
above the rotor surface, when it is possible that they may
strike the stator core.
17.11.2 Reverse Power Protection

Prime Mover
17.12 UNBALANCED LOADING
Low forward power protection is often used as an

interlocking function to enable opening of the main
circuit breaker for non-urgent trips e.g. for a stator
earth fault on a high-impedance earthed generator, or
when a normal shutdown of a set is taking place. This is
to minimise the risk of plant overspeeding when the
electrical load is removed from a high-speed cylindrical
rotor generator. The rotor of this type of generator is
highly stressed mechanically and cannot tolerate much
overspeed. While the governor should control overspeed
conditions, it is not good practice to open the main
circuit breaker simultaneously with tripping of the prime
mover for non-urgent trips. For a steam turbine, for
example, there is a risk of overspeeding due to energy
storage in the trapped steam, after steam valve tripping,
or in the event that the steam valve(s) do not fully close
for some reason. For urgent trip conditions, such as
stator differential protection operation, the risk involved
in simultaneous prime mover and generator breaker
tripping must be accepted.
Short time heating is of interest during system fault

conditions and it is usual in determining the generator
negative sequence withstand capability to assume that
the heat dissipation during such periods is negligible.
Using this approximation it is possible to express the
heating by the law:
293
I 22t = K
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:46
Page 294
where:
I2R = negative sequence component
(per unit of MCR)
t = time (seconds)
K = constant proportional to the thermal capacity
of the generator rotor
sequence capacity and may not require protection.

Modern numerical relays derive the negative sequence
current level by calculation, with no need for special
circuits to extract the negative sequence component. A
true thermal replica approach is often followed, to allow
for:
a. standing levels of negative sequence current below
the continuous withstand capability. This has the
effect of shortening the time to reach the critical
temperature after an increase in negative sequence
current above the continuous withstand capability
I
M = 2 =
I2R
I2 t
1 e ( 2R )
I2R = negative phase sequence continuous rating in

per unit of MCR
The heating characteristics of various designs of
generator are shown in Figure 17.16.
The advantage of this approach is that cooling effects are

modelled more accurately, but the disadvantage is that
the tripping characteristic may not follow the withstand
characteristic specified by the manufacturer accurately.
The typical relay element characteristic takes the form of
2
I
2 set
t = 2 log e 1

I 2 set
I 2
10000
Equation 17.1
where:
1000
100
Indirectly cooled (air)
I flc
I 2 set = I 2 cmr
Ip
Indirectly cooled (H2)

350MW direct cooled
10
I n
660MW direct cooled
Kg
1000MW direct cooled

Using I22t model
17
= negative sequence withstand coefficient

(Figure 17.16)
I2cmr = generator maximum continuous I2 withstand
Using true thermal

model
0.1
0.01
0.01
t = time to trip
I flc
K = K g
Ip
b. cooling effects when negative sequence current

levels are below the continuous withstand
capability
where:
Time (sec)
For heating over a period of more than a few seconds, it

is necessary to allow for the heat dissipated. From a
combination of the continuous and short time ratings,
the overall heating characteristic can be deduced to be:
0.1
1
10
Negative sequence current (p.u.)
Figure 17.16: Typical negative phase sequence
current withstand of cylindrical
rotor generators
17.12.2 Negative Phase Sequence Protection

This protection is applied to prevent overheating due to
negative sequence currents.
Small salient-pole
generators have a proportionately larger negative
Iflc
= generator rated primary current
Ip
= CT primary current
IN
= relay rated current
Figure 17.16 also shows the thermal replica time

characteristic described by Equation 17.1, from which it
will be seen that a significant gain in capability is
achieved at low levels of negative sequence current.
Such a protection element will also respond to phaseearth and phase-phase faults where sufficient negative
sequence current arises. Grading with downstream
power system protection relays is therefore required. A
definite minimum time setting must be applied to the
negative sequence relay element to ensure correct
grading. A maximum trip time setting may also be used
to ensure correct tripping when the negative sequence
294
17/06/02
10:46
Page 295
current level is only slightly in excess of the continuous

withstand capability and hence the trip time from the
thermal model may depart significantly from the rotor
withstand limits.
17.13 PROTECTION AGAINST INADVERTENT

ENERGISATION
Accidental energisation of a generator when it is not
running may cause severe damage to it. With the
generator at standstill, closing the circuit breaker results
in the generator acting as an induction motor; the field
winding (if closed) and the rotor solid iron/damper
circuits acting as rotor circuits. Very high currents are
induced in these rotor components, and also occur in the
stator, with resultant rapid overheating and damage.
Protection against this condition is therefore desirable.
A combination of stator undervoltage and overcurrent
can be used to detect this condition. An instantaneous
overcurrent element is used, and gated with a threephase undervoltage element (fed from a VT on the
generator side of the circuit breaker) to provide the
protection. The overcurrent element can have a low
setting, as operation is blocked when the generator is
operating normally. The voltage setting should be low
enough to ensure that operation cannot occur for
transient faults. A setting of about 50% of rated voltage
is typical. VT failure can cause maloperation of the
protection, so the element should be inhibited under
these conditions.
17.14 UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY/
OVERFLUXING PROTECTION
These conditions are grouped together because these
problems often occur due to a departure from
synchronous speed.
17.14.1 Overfluxing
Overfluxing occurs when the ratio of voltage to
frequency is too high. The iron saturates owing to the
high flux density and results in stray flux occurring in
components not designed to carry it. Overheating can
then occur, resulting in damage. The problem affects
both direct-and indirectly-connected generators. Either
excessive voltage, or low frequency, or a combination of
both can result in overfluxing, a voltage to frequency
ratio in excess of 1.05p.u. normally being indicative of
this condition. Excessive flux can arise transiently, which
is not a problem for the generator. For example, a
generator can be subjected to a transiently high power
frequency voltage, at nominal frequency, immediately
after full load rejection. Since the condition would not
be sustained, it only presents a problem for the stability
of the transformer differential protection schemes

applied at the power station (see Chapter 16 for
transformer protection). Sustained overfluxing can arise
during run up, if excitation is applied too early with the
AVR in service, or if the generator is run down, with the
excitation still applied. Other overfluxing instances have
occurred from loss of the AVR voltage feedback signal,
due to a reference VT problem. Such sustained
conditions must be detected by a dedicated overfluxing
protection function that will raise an alarm and possibly
force an immediate reduction in excitation.
Most AVRs have an overfluxing protection facility
included. This may only be operative when the generator
is on open circuit, and hence fail to detect overfluxing
conditions due to abnormally low system frequency.
However, this facility is not engineered to protection
relay standards, and should not be solely relied upon to
provide overfluxing protection. A separate relay element
is therefore desirable and provided in most modern
relays.
Chap17-280-315
It is usual to provide a definite time-delayed alarm

setting and an instantaneous or inverse time-delayed
trip setting, to match the withstand characteristics of
the protected generator and transformer. It is very
important that the VT reference for overfluxing
protection is not the same as that used for the AVR.
17.14.2 Under/Overfrequency
The governor fitted to the prime mover normally provides
protection against overfrequency. Underfrequency may
occur as a result of overload of generators operating on
an isolated system, or a serious fault on the power
system that results in a deficit of generation compared
to load. This may occur if a grid system suffers a major
fault on transmission lines linking two parts of the
system, and the system then splits into two. It is likely
that one part will have an excess of generation over load,
and the other will have a corresponding deficit.
Frequency will fall fairly rapidly in the latter part, and the
normal response is load shedding, either by load
shedding relays or operator action. However, prime
movers may have to be protected against excessively low
frequency by tripping of the generators concerned.
With some prime movers, operation in narrow frequency
bands that lie close to normal running speed (either
above or below) may only be permitted for short periods,
together with a cumulative lifetime duration of
operation in such frequency bands. This typically occurs
due to the presence of rotor torsional frequencies in such
frequency bands. In such cases, monitoring of the period
of time spent in these frequency bands is required. A
special relay is fitted in such cases, arranged to provide
alarm and trip facilities if either an individual or
295
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:48
Page 296
cumulative period exceeds a set time.
17.15 ROTOR FAULTS
The field circuit of a generator, comprising the field

winding of the generator and the armature of the exciter,
together with any associated field circuit breaker if it
exists, is an isolated d.c. circuit which is not normally
earthed. If an earth fault occurs, there will be no steadystate fault current and the need for action will not be
evident.
Danger arises if a second earth fault occurs at a separate

point in the field system, to cause the high field current
to be diverted, in part at least, from the intervening
turns. Serious damage to the conductors and possibly
the rotor can occur very rapidly under these conditions.
More damage may be caused mechanically. If a large
portion of the winding is short-circuited, the flux may
adopt a pattern such as that shown in Figure 17.17. The
attracting force at the surface of the rotor is given by:
F=
B2A
8
produce a balancing force on this axis. The result is an

unbalanced force that in a large machine may be of the
order of 50-100 tons. A violent vibration is set up that
may damage bearing surfaces or even displace the rotor
by an amount sufficient to cause it to foul the stator.
17.15.1 Rotor Earth-Fault Protection

Two methods are available to detect this type of fault.
The first method is suitable for generators that
incorporate brushes in the main generator field winding.
The second method requires at least a slip-ring
connection to the field circuit:
a. potentiometer method
b. a.c. injection method
17.15.1.1 Potentiometer method
This is a scheme that was fitted to older generators, and
it is illustrated in Figure 17.18. An earth fault on the
field winding would produce a voltage across the relay,
the maximum voltage occurring for faults at the ends of
the winding.
A blind spot' would exist at the centre of the field
winding. To avoid a fault at this location remaining
undetected, the tapping point on the potentiometer
could be varied by a pushbutton or switch. The relay
setting is typically about 5% of the exciter voltage.
where:
A = area
B = flux density
Field Winding
Short Circuit
Field
winding
>
Exciter
17
Figure 17.18: Earth fault protection of field
circuit by potentiometer method
17.15.1.2 Injection methods
Figure 17.17: Flux distribution on rotor

with partial winding short circuit
It will be seen from Figure 17.17 that the flux is

concentrated on one pole but widely dispersed over the
other and intervening surfaces. The attracting force is in
consequence large on one pole but very weak on the
opposite one, while flux on the quadrature axis will
Two methods are in common use. The first is based on

low frequency signal injection, with series filtering, as
shown in Figure 17.19(a). It comprises an injection
source that is connected between earth and one side of
the field circuit, through capacitive coupling and the
measurement circuit. The field circuit is subjected to an
alternating potential at substantially the same level
throughout. An earth fault anywhere in the field system
will give rise to a current that is detected as an
equivalent voltage across the adjustable resistor by the
relay. The capacitive coupling blocks the normal d.c. field
voltage, preventing the discharge of a large direct
current through the protection scheme. The combination
296
17/06/02
10:48
Page 297
of series capacitor and reactor forms a low-pass tuned

circuit, the intention being to filter higher frequency
rotor currents that may occur for a variety of reasons.
Other schemes are based on power frequency signal
injection. An impedance relay element is used, a field
winding earth fault reducing the impedance seen by the
relay. These suffer the draw back of being susceptible to
static excitation system harmonic currents when there is
significant field winding and excitation system shunt
capacitance.
Greater immunity for such systems is offered by
capacitively coupling the protection scheme to both ends
of the field winding, where brush or slip ring access is
possible (Figure 17.19(b)).
The lowfrequency injection scheme is also
advantageous in that the current flow through the field
winding shunt capacitance will be lower than for a
power frequency scheme. Such current would flow
through the machine bearings to cause erosion of the
bearing surface. For power frequency schemes, a
solution is to insulate the bearings and provide an
earthing brush for the shaft.
Generator
field
winding
Exciter
L.F. injection
supply
U>
(a) Low frequency a.c. voltage injection - current measurement
Generator
field
winding
Exciter
Injection
supply
<
Z<
(b) Power frequency a.c. voltage injection impedance measurement
Figure 17.19: Earth fault protection

of field circuit by a.c. injection
17.15.2 Rotor Earth Fault Protection

for Brushless Generators
A brushless generator has an excitation system
consisting of:
1. a main exciter with rotating armature and
stationary field windings
2. a rotating rectifier assembly, carried on the main
shaft line out
3. a controlled rectifier producing the d.c. field
voltage for the main exciter field from an a.c.
source (often a small pilot exciter)
Hence, no brushes are required in the generator field
circuit. All control is carried out in the field circuit of the
main exciter. Detection of a rotor circuit earth fault is
still necessary, but this must be based on a dedicated
rotor-mounted system that has a telemetry link to
provide an alarm/data.
Chap17-280-315
17.15.3 Rotor Shorted Turn Protection

As detailed in Section 17.15 a shorted section of field
winding will result in an unsymmetrical rotor flux
pattern and in potentially damaging rotor vibration.
Detection of such an electrical fault is possible using a
probe consisting of a coil placed in the airgap. The flux
pattern of the positive and negative poles is measured
and any significant difference in flux pattern between
the poles is indicative of a shorted turn or turns.
Automated waveform comparison techniques can be
used to provide a protection scheme, or the waveform
can be inspected visually at regular intervals. An
immediate shutdown is not normally required unless the
effects of the fault are severe. The fault can be kept
under observation until a suitable shutdown for repair
can be arranged. Repair will take some time, since it
means unthreading the rotor and dismantling the
winding.
Since short-circuited turns on the rotor may cause
damaging vibration and the detection of field faults for
all degrees of abnormality is difficult, the provision of a
vibration a detection scheme is desirable this forms
part of the mechanical protection of the generator.
17.15.4 Protection against Diode Failure

A short-circuited diode will produce an a.c. ripple in the
exciter field circuit. This can be detected by a relay
monitoring the current in the exciter field circuit,
however such systems have proved to be unreliable. The
relay would need to be time delayed to prevent an alarm
being issued with normal field forcing during a power
system fault. A delay of 5-10 seconds may be necessary.
297
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:48
Page 298
Fuses to disconnect the faulty diode after failure may be

fitted. The fuses are of the indicating type, and an
inspection window can be fitted over the diode wheel to
enable diode health to be monitored manually.
17
A diode that fails open-circuit occurs less often. If there

is more than one diode in parallel for each arm of the
diode bridge, the only impact is to restrict the maximum
continuous excitation possible. If only a single diode per
bridge arm is fitted, some ripple will be present on the
main field supply but the inductance of the circuit will
smooth this to a degree and again the main effect is to
restrict the maximum continuous excitation. The set can
be kept running until a convenient shutdown can be
arranged.
17.15.5 Field Suppression

The need to rapidly suppress the field of a machine in
which a fault has developed should be obvious, because
as long as the excitation is maintained, the machine will
feed its own fault even though isolated from the power
system. Any delay in the decay of rotor flux will extend
the fault damage. Braking the rotor is no solution,
because of its large kinetic energy.
The field winding current cannot be interrupted
instantaneously as it flows in a highly inductive circuit.
Consequently, the flux energy must be dissipated to
prevent an excessive inductive voltage rise in the field
circuit. For machines of moderate size, it is satisfactory
to open the field circuit with an air-break circuit breaker
without arc blow-out coils. Such a breaker permits only
a moderate arc voltage, which is nevertheless high
enough to suppress the field current fairly rapidly. The
inductive energy is dissipated partly in the arc and partly
in eddy-currents in the rotor core and damper windings.
With generators above about 5MVA rating, it is better to
provide a more definite means of absorbing the energy
without incurring damage. Connecting a field discharge
resistor in parallel with the rotor winding before opening
the field circuit breaker will achieve this objective. The
resistor, which may have a resistance value of
approximately five times the rotor winding resistance, is
connected by an auxiliary contact on the field circuit
breaker. The breaker duty is thereby reduced to that of
opening a circuit with a low L/R ratio. After the breaker
has opened, the field current flows through the discharge
resistance and dies down harmlessly. The use of a fairly
high value of discharge resistance reduces the field time
constant to an acceptably low value, though it may still
be more than one second. Alternatively, generators
fitted with static excitation systems may temporarily
invert the applied field voltage to reduce excitation
current rapidly to zero before the excitation system is
tripped.
17.16 LOSS OF EXCITATION PROTECTION

Loss of excitation may occur for a variety of reasons. If
the generator was initially operating at only 20%-30%
of rated power, it may settle to run super-synchronously
as an induction generator, at a low level of slip. In doing
so, it will draw reactive current from the power system
for rotor excitation. This form of response is particularly
true of salient pole generators. In these circumstances,
the generator may be able to run for several minutes
without requiring to be tripped. There may be sufficient
time for remedial action to restore the excitation, but the
reactive power demand of the machine during the failure
may severely depress the power system voltage to an
unacceptable level. For operation at high initial power
output, the rotor speed may rise to approximately 105%
of rated speed, where there would be low power output
and where a high reactive current of up to 2.0p.u. may
be drawn from the supply.
Rapid automatic
disconnection is then required to protect the stator
windings from excessive current and to protect the rotor
from damage caused by induced slip frequency currents.
17.16.1 Protection against Loss of Excitation

The protection used varies according to the size of
generator being protected.
17.16.1.1 Small generators
On the smaller machines, protection against
asynchronous running has tended to be optional, but it
may now be available by default, where the functionality
is available within a modern numerical generator
protection package. If fitted, it is arranged either to
provide an alarm or to trip the generator. If the
generator field current can be measured, a relay element
can be arranged to operate when this drops below a
preset value. However, depending on the generator
design and size relative to the system, it may well be that
the machine would be required to operate synchronously
with little or no excitation under certain system
conditions.
The field undercurrent relay must have a setting below
the minimum exciting current, which may be 8% of that
corresponding to the MCR of the machine. Time delay
relays are used to stabilise the protection against
maloperation in response to transient conditions and to
ensure that field current fluctuations due to pole slipping
do not cause the protection to reset.
If the generator field current is not measurable, then the
technique detailed in the following section is utilised.
17.16.1.2 Large generators (>5MVA)
For generators above about 5MVA rating, protection
against loss of excitation and pole slipping conditions is
normally applied.
298
17/06/02
10:48
Page 299
Consider a generator connected to network, as shown in

Figure 17.20. On loss of excitation, the terminal voltage
will begin to decrease and the stator current will increase,
resulting in a decrease of impedance viewed from the
generator terminals and also a change in power factor.
The general case can be represented by a system of

circles with centres on the line CD; see Figure 17.21.
Also shown is a typical machine terminal impedance
locus during loss of excitation conditions.
EG
=1.5
ES
+jX
XG
ZS
XT
EG
1.8
ES
2.0
Load point
2.5
+jX
D
Loss of field
locus
5.0
ZS
XG+
T+ZS
-R
EG
1
ES
+R
XT
ZR
-R
Chap17-280-315
EG
=1
ES
+R
XG
0.5
0.6
0.7
C
-jX
Figure 17.21: Swing curves and
loss of synchronism locus
-jX
Figure 17.20: Basic interconnected system
A relay to detect loss of synchronism can be located at

point A. It can be shown that the impedance presented
to the relay under loss of synchronism conditions (phase
swinging or pole slipping) is given by:
ZR =
( X G + X T + Z S )n (n cos j sin )
(n cos ) 2 + sin 2
XG
Equation 17.2
where:
n = EG
ES
generated
voltage
system
= angle by which EG leads Es

If the generator and system voltages are equal, the above
expression becomes:
ZR =
( X G + X T + Z S )(1 j cot 2 ) X
2
The special cases of EG=ES and EG=0 result in a

straight-line locus that is the right-angled bisector of
CD, and in a circular locus that is shrunk to point C,
respectively.
When excitation is removed from a generator operating
synchronously the flux dies away slowly, during which
period the ratio of EG/ES is decreasing, and the rotor angle
of the machine is increasing. The operating condition
plotted on an impedance diagram therefore travels along
a locus that crosses the power swing circles. At the same
time, it progresses in the direction of increasing rotor
angle. After passing the anti-phase position, the locus
bends round as the internal e.m.f. collapses, condensing on
an impedance value equal to the machine reactance. The
locus is illustrated in Figure 17.21.
The relay location is displaced from point C by the
generator reactance XG. One problem in determining the
position of these loci relative to the relay location is that
the value of machine impedance varies with the rate of
slip. At zero slip XG is equal to Xd, the synchronous
reactance, and at 100% slip XG is equal to Xd, the subtransient reactance. The impedance in a typical case has
been shown to be equal to Xd, the transient reactance,
at 50% slip, and to 2Xd with a slip of 0.33%. The slip
likely to be experienced with asynchronous running is
299
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:48
Page 300
low, perhaps 1%, so that for the purpose of assessing the

power swing locus it is sufficient to take the value
XG=2Xd.
This consideration has assumed a single value for XG.

However, the reactance Xq on the quadrature axis differs
from the direct-axis value, the ratio of Xd/Xg being
known as the saliency factor. This factor varies with the
slip speed. The effect of this factor during asynchronous
operation is to cause XG to vary at slip speed. In
consequence, the loss of excitation impedance locus
does not settle at a single point, but it continues to
describe a small orbit about a mean point.
A protection scheme for loss of excitation must operate
decisively for this condition, but its characteristic must
not inhibit stable operation of the generator. One limit
of operation corresponds to the maximum practicable
rotor angle, taken to be at 120. The locus of operation
can be represented as a circle on the impedance plane,
as shown in Figure 17.22, stable operation conditions
lying outside the circle.
17
X
Normal machine operating impedance
R
-X
Xa2
+jX
Alarm
angle
ZS
Xb2
XT
-R
-X
Xa1
Locus of constant MVA
Xb1
+R
'd
2X'd
Xd
Figure 17.23: Loss of excitation protection

characteristics
Limiting
generation
point
Relay
scheme for loss of excitation could be based on

impedance measurement. The impedance characteristic
must be appropriately set or shaped to ensure decisive
operation for loss of excitation whilst permitting stable
generator operation within allowable limits. One or two
offset mho under impedance elements (see Chapter 11
for the principles of operation) are ideally suited for
providing loss of excitation protection as long as a
generator operating at low power output (20-30%Pn)
does not settle down to operate as an induction
generator. The characteristics of a typical two-stage loss
of excitation protection scheme are illustrated in Figure
17.23. The first stage, consisting of settings Xa1 and Xb1
can be applied to provide detection of loss of excitation
even where a generator initially operating at low power
output (20-30%Pn) might settle down to operate as an
induction generator.
Diameter =
Locus of constant load angle
d/2
-jX
Figure 17.22: Locus of limiting operating
conditions of synchronous machine
On the same diagram the full load impedance locus for

one per unit power can be drawn. Part of this circle
represents a condition that is not feasible, but the point
of intersection with the maximum rotor angle curve can
be taken as a limiting operating condition for setting
impedance-based loss of excitation protection.
17.16.2 Impedance-Based Protection Characteristics

Figure 17.21 alludes to the possibility that a protection
Pick-up and drop-off time delays td1 and tdo1 are

associated with this impedance element. Timer td1 is
used to prevent operation during stable power swings
that may cause the impedance locus of the generator to
transiently enter the locus of operation set by Xb1.
However, the value must short enough to prevent
damage as a result of loss of excitation occurring. If
pole-slipping protection is not required (see Section
17.17.2), timer tdo1 can be set to give instantaneous
reset. The second field failure element, comprising
settings Xb1, Xb2, and associated timers td2 and tdo2 can
be used to give instantaneous tripping following loss of
excitation under full load conditions.
17.16.3 Protection Settings

The typical setting values for the two elements vary
according to the excitation system and operating regime
of the generator concerned, since these affect the
generator impedance seen by the relay under normal and
abnormal conditions. For a generator that is never
300
17/06/02
10:48
Page 301
operated at leading power factor, or at load angles in

excess of 90 the typical settings are:
impedance element diameter Xb1 = Xd
impedance element offset Xa1 = -0.5Xd
time delay on pick-up, td1 = 0.5s 10s
time delay on drop-off, tdo1 = 0s
If a fast excitation system is employed, allowing load
angles of up to 120 to be used, the impedance diameter
must be reduced to take account of the reduced
generator impedance seen under such conditions. The
offset also needs revising. In these circumstances,
typical settings would be:
impedance element diameter Xb1 = 0.5Xd
impedance element offset Xa1 = -0.75Xd
time delay on pick-up, td1 = 0.5s 10s
time delay on drop-off, tdo1 = 0s
The typical impedance settings for the second element, if
used, are:
impedance element diameter
Xb2 =
kV 2
MVA
During pole-slipping, there will be periods where the

direction of active power flow will be in the reverse
direction, so a reverse power relay element can be used
to detect this, if not used for other purposes. However,
since the reverse power conditions are cyclical, the
element will reset during the forward power part of the
cycle unless either a very short pick-up time delay and/or
a suitable drop-off time delay is used to eliminate
resetting.
The main advantage of this method is that a reverse
power element is often already present, so no additional
relay elements are required. The main disadvantages are
the time taken for tripping and the inability to control
the system angle at which the generator breaker trip
command would be issued, if it is a requirement to limit
the breaker current interruption duty. There is also the
difficulty
of
determining
suitable
settings.
Determination of settings in the field, from a deliberate
pole-slipping test is not possible and analytical studies
may not discover all conditions under which poleslipping will occur.
17.17.2 Protection using an Under Impedance

Element
Xa2 = -0.5Xd
The time delay settings td2 and tdo2 are set to zero to give
instantaneous operation and reset.
17.17 POLE SLIPPING PROTECTION

A generator may pole-slip, or fall out of synchronism
with the power system for a number of reasons. The
principal causes are prolonged clearance of a heavy fault
on the power system, when the generator is operating at
a high load angle close to the stability limit, or partial or
complete loss of excitation. Weak transmission links
between the generator and the bulk of the power system
aggravate the situation. It can also occur with
embedded generators running in parallel with a strong
Utility network if the time for a fault clearance on the
Utility network slow, perhaps because only IDMT relays
are provided. Pole slipping is characterised by large and
rapid oscillations in active and reactive power. Rapid
disconnection of the generator from the network is
required to ensure that damage to the generator is
avoided and that loads supplied by the network are not
affected for very long.
Protection can be provided using several methods. The
choice of method will depend on the probability of pole
slipping occurring and on the consequences should it
occur.
17.17.1 Protection using Reverse Power Element
Chap17-280-315
With reference to Figure 17.21, a loss of excitation under

impedance characteristic may also be capable of
detecting loss of synchronism, in applications where the
electrical centre of the power system and the generator
lies behind the relaying point. This would typically be
the case for a relatively small generator that is
connected to a power transmission system (XG >> (XT +
XS)). With reference to Figure 17.23; if pole-slipping
protection response is required, the drop-off timer tdo1 of
the larger diameter impedance measuring element
should be set to prevent its reset of in each slip cycle,
until the td1 trip time delay has expired.
As with reverse power protection, this would be an
elementary form of pole-slipping protection. It may not
be suitable for large machines where rapid tripping is
required during the first slip cycle and where some
control is required for the system angle at which the
generator circuit breaker trip command is given. Where
protection against pole-slipping must be guaranteed, a
more sophisticated method of protection should be used.
A typical reset timer delay for pole-slipping protection
might be 0.6s. For generator transformer units, the
additional impedance in front of the relaying point may
take the system impedance outside the under impedance
relay characteristic required for loss of excitation
protection. Therefore, the acceptability of this poleslipping protection scheme will be dependent on the
application.
301
17
Chap17-280-315
17
17/06/02
10:48
Page 302
17.17.3 Dedicated Pole-Slipping Protection
17.17.3.2 Use of lenticular characteristic
Large generator-transformer units directly connected to

grid systems often require a dedicated pole-slipping
protection scheme to ensure rapid tripping and with
system angle control. Historically, dedicated protection
schemes have usually been based on an ohm-type
impedance measurement characteristic.
A more sophisticated approach is to measure the

impedance of the generator and use a lenticular
impedance characteristic to determine if a pole-slipping
condition exists. The lenticular characteristic is shown in
Figure 17.25. The characteristic is divided into two halves
by a straight line, called the blinder.
17.17.3.1 Pole slipping protection by impedance

measurement
The inclination, , of the lens and blinder is determined by

the angle of the total system impedance. The impedance
of the system and generator-transformer determines the
forward reach of the lens, ZA, and the transient reactance
of the generator determines the reverse reach ZB.
Although a mho type element for detecting the change

in impedance during pole-slipping can be used in some
applications, but with performance limits, a straight line
ohm characteristic is more suitable. The protection
principle is that of detecting the passage of the
generator impedance through a zone defined by two
such impedance characteristics, as shown in Figure
17.24. The characteristic is divided into three zones, A,
B, and C. Normal operation of the generator lies in zone
A. When a pole-slip occurs, the impedance traverses
zones B and C, and tripping occurs when the impedance
characteristic enters zone C.
Blinder
X
ZA
P
P'
+jX
ZS
Relayingg point
Lens
T
ZB
XG
Slip locus
EG=ES
Figure 17.25: Pole-slipping protection using

lenticular characteristic and blinder
-R
+R
The width of the lens is set by the angle and the line
PP, perpendicular to the axis of the lens, is used to
determine if the centre of the impedance swing during a
transient is located in the generator or power system.
-jX
Ohm relay 2
Ohm relay 1
Operation in the case of a generator is as follows. The

characteristic is divided into 4 zones and 2 regions, as
Figure 17.24: Pole slipping detection

by ohm relays
Tripping only occurs if all zones are traversed

sequentially. Power system faults should result in the
zones not being fully traversed so that tripping will not
be initiated. The security of this type of protection
scheme is normally enhanced by the addition of a plain
under impedance control element (circle about the origin
of the impedance diagram) that is set to prevent tripping
for impedance trajectories for remote power system
faults. Setting of the ohm elements is such that they lie
parallel to the total system impedance vector, and
enclose it, as shown in Figure 17.24.
Normal operation is with the measured impedance in

zone R1. If a pole slip develops, the impedance locus will
traverse though zones R2, R3, and R4. When entering
zone R4, a trip signal is issued, provided the impedance
lies below reactance line PP and hence the locus of
swing lies within or close to the generator i.e. the
generator is pole slipping with respect to the rest of the
system.
302
17/06/02
10:48
Page 303
windings and to issue an alarm or trip to prevent

damage.
Left-lens
A
ZS
Although current-operated thermal replica protection

cannot take into account the effects of ambient
temperature or uneven heat distribution, it is often
applied as a back-up to direct stator temperature
measuring devices to prevent overheating due to high
stator current. With some relays, the thermal replica
temperature estimate can be made more accurate
through the integration of direct measuring resistance
temperature devices.
Right-lens
B
Power Swing In System
O
P'
R4
R3 S
XT
R2
R1
T2
1
Stable Power Swing
X
ZB
Pole Slipping
Characteristic
Irrespective of whether current-operated thermal replica

protection is applied or not, it is a requirement to
monitor the stator temperature of a large generator in
order to detect overheating from whatever cause.
Blinder
Figure 17.26: Definition of zones for lenticular

characteristic
If the impedance locus lies above line PP, the swing lies
far out in the power system i.e. one part of the power
system, including the protected generator, is swinging
against the rest of the network. Tripping may still occur,
but only if swinging is prolonged meaning that the
power system is in danger of complete break-up. Further
confidence checks are introduced by requiring that the
impedance locus spends a minimum time within each
zone for the pole-slipping condition to be valid. The trip
signal may also be delayed for a number of slip cycles
even if a generator pole-slip occurs this is to both
provide confirmation of a pole-slipping condition and
allow time for other relays to operate if the cause of the
pole slip lies somewhere in the power system. Should
the impedance locus traverse the zones in any other
sequence, tripping is blocked.
17.18 STATOR OVERHEATING

Overheating of the stator may result from:
i. overload
Temperature sensitive elements, usually of the resistance

type, are embedded in the stator winding at hot-spot
locations envisaged by the manufacturer, the number
used being sufficient to cover all variations. The
elements are connected to a temperature sensing relay
element arranged to provide alarm and trip outputs. The
settings will depend on the type of stator winding
insulation and on its permitted temperature rise.
17.19 MECHANICAL FAULTS

Various faults may occur on the mechanical side of a
generating set. The following sections detail the more
important ones from an electrical point of view.
17.19.1 Failure of the Prime Mover

When a generator operating in parallel with others loses
its power input, it remains in synchronism with the
system and continues to run as a synchronous motor,
drawing sufficient power to drive the prime mover. This
condition may not appear to be dangerous and in some
circumstances will not be so. However, there is a danger
of further damage being caused. Table 17.1 lists some
typical problems that may occur.
Protection is provided by a low forward power/reverse
power relay, as detailed in Section 17.11
ii. failure of the cooling system

iii. overfluxing
17.19.2 Overspeed
iv. core faults

Accidental overloading might occur through the
combination of full active load current component,
governed by the prime mover output and an abnormally
high reactive current component, governed by the level
of rotor excitation and/or step-up transformer tap. With
a modern protection relay, it is relatively simple to
provide a current-operated thermal replica protection
element to estimate the thermal state of the stator
Chap17-280-315
The speed of a turbo-generator set rises when the steam

input is in excess of that required to drive the load at
nominal frequency. The speed governor can normally
control the speed, and, in any case, a set running in
parallel with others in an interconnected system cannot
accelerate much independently even if synchronism is
lost. However, if load is suddenly lost when the HV
circuit breaker is tripped, the set will begin to accelerate
303
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:50
Page 304
rapidly. The speed governor is designed to prevent a

dangerous speed rise even with a 100% load rejection,
but nevertheless an additional centrifugal overspeed trip
device is provided to initiate an emergency mechanical
shutdown if the overspeed exceeds 10%.
To minimise overspeed on load rejection and hence the
mechanical stresses on the rotor, the following sequence
is used whenever electrical tripping is not urgently
required:
i. trip prime mover or gradually reduce power input to
zero
ii. allow generated power to decay towards zero
17
iii. trip generator circuit breaker only when generated

power is close to zero or when the power flow
starts to reverse, to drive the idle turbine
17.19.3 Loss of Vacuum

A failure of the condenser vacuum in a steam turbine
driven generator results in heating of the tubes. This
then produces strain in the tubes, and a rise in
temperature of the low-pressure end of the turbine.
Vacuum pressure devices initiate progressive unloading
of the set and, if eventually necessary, tripping of the
turbine valves followed by the high voltage circuit
breaker. The set must not be allowed to motor in the
event of loss of vacuum, as this would cause rapid

overheating of the low-pressure turbine blades.
17.20 COMPLETE GENERATOR PROTECTION

SCHEMES
From the preceding sections, it is obvious that the
protection scheme for a generator has to take account of
many possible faults and plant design variations.
Determination of the types of protection used for a
particular generator will depend on the nature of the
plant and upon economic considerations, which in turn
is affected by set size. Fortunately, modern, multifunction, numerical relays are sufficiently versatile to
include all of the commonly required protection
functions in a single package, thus simplifying the
decisions to be made. The following sections provide
illustrations of typical protection schemes for generators
connected to a grid network, but not all possibilities are
illustrated, due to the wide variation in generator sizes
and types.
17.20.1 Direct-Connected Generator

A typical protection scheme for a direct-connected
generator is shown in Figure 17.27. It comprises the
following protection functions:
Electrical trip of governor
Governor
trip
Emergency push button
Stator differential (biased/high

impedance)
Stator E/F (or neutral voltage
displacement)
Back-up overcurrent (or voltage
dependent O/C)
Lubricating oil failure
Mechanical faults (urgent)
Reverse/low forward power
Underfrequency
Pole slipping
Overfluxing
Inadvertent energisation
Loss of excitation
Stator winding temperature
Unbalanced loading
Excitation
circuit
breaker
Under/overvoltage
Low power
interlock
Mechanical faults (non-urgent)
Generator
circuit
breaker
N.B. Alarms and time delays omitted for simplicity

Figure 17.27: Typical protection arrangement for a direct-connected generator
304
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:50
Page 305
1. stator differential protection

2. overcurrent protection conventional or voltage
dependent
3. stator earth fault protection
instantaneous electrical trip and which can be time

delayed until electrical power has been reduced to a low
value. The faults that require tripping of the prime mover
as well as the generator circuit breaker are also shown.
4. overvoltage protection
17.20.2 Generator-Transformer Units
5. undervoltage protection
6. overload/low forward power/ reverse power
protection (according to prime mover type)
7. unbalanced loading
8. overheating
9. pole slipping
These units are generally of higher output than directconnected generators, and hence more comprehensive
protection is warranted. In addition, the generator
transformer also requires protection, for which the
protection detailed in Chapter 16 is appropriate
10. loss of excitation

11. underfrequency
12. inadvertent energisation
13. overfluxing
14. mechanical faults
Figure 17.27 illustrates which trips require an
Overall biased generator/generator transformer

differential protection is commonly applied in addition,
or instead of, differential protection for the transformer
alone. A single protection relay may incorporate all of
the required functions, or the protection of the
transformer (including overall generator/generator
transformer differential protection) may utilise a
separate relay.
Figure 17.28 shows a typical overall scheme.
Electrical trip of governor
Governor
trip
Emergency push button
Stator differential (biased/high

impedance)
Stator E/F (or neutral voltage
displacement)
Back-up overcurrent (or voltage
dependent O/C)
Lubricating oil failure
Mechanical faults (urgent)
Reverse/low forward power
Underfrequency
Pole slipping
Overfluxing
Overall differential (transformer

differential)
Excitation
circuit
breaker
Buchholz
HV overcurrent
HV restricted E/F
Generator
circuit
breaker
Transformer winding temperature

Loss of excitation
Low power
interlock
Stator winding temperature

Unbalanced loading
Under/overvoltage
Mechanical faults (non-urgent)
N.B. Alarms and time delays omitted for simplicity
Figure 17.28: Typical tripping arrangements for generator-transformer unit
305
17
Chap17-280-315
17
17/06/02
10:50
Page 306
17.21 EMBEDDED GENERATION
frequency and voltage, or for other reasons.
In recent years, through de-regulation of the electricity

supply industry and the ensuing commercial
competition, many electricity users connected to MV
power distribution systems have installed generating sets
to operate in parallel with the public supply. The
intention is either to utilise surplus energy from other
sources, or to use waste heat or steam from the prime
mover for other purposes. Parallel connection of
generators to distribution systems did occur before deregulation, but only where there was a net power import
from the Utility. Power export to Utility distribution
systems was a relatively new aspect. Since generation of
this type can now be located within a Utility distribution
system, as opposed to being centrally dispatched
generation connected to a transmission system, the term
Embedded Generation is often applied. Figure 17.2
illustrates such an arrangement. Depending on size, the
embedded generator(s) may be synchronous or
asynchronous types, and they may be connected at any
voltage appropriate to the size of plant being considered.
From a Utility standpoint, the connection of embedded

generation may cause problems with voltage control and
increased fault levels. The settings for protection relays
in the vicinity of the plant may require adjustment with
the emergence of embedded generation. It must also be
ensured that the safety, security and quality of supply of
the Utility distribution system is not compromised. The
embedded generation must not be permitted to supply
any Utility customers in isolation, since the Utility supply
is normally the means of regulating the system voltage
and frequency within the permitted limits. It also
normally provides the only system earth connection(s), to
ensure the correct performance of system protection in
response to earth faults. If the Utility power infeed fails,
it is also important to disconnect the embedded
generation before there is any risk of the Utility power
supply returning on to unsynchronised machines. In
practice this generally requires the following protection
functions to be applied at the Point of Common
Coupling (PCC) to trip the coupling circuit breaker:
The impact of connecting generation to a Utility

distribution system that was originally engineered only
for downward power distribution must be considered,
particularly in the area of protection requirements. In
this respect, it is not important whether the embedded
generator is normally capable of export to the Utility
distribution system or not, since there may exist fault
conditions when this occurs irrespective of the design
intent.
If plant operation when disconnected from the Utility
supply is required, underfrequency protection (Section
17.4.2) will become an important feature of the in-plant
power system. During isolated operation, it may be
relatively easy to overload the available generation, such
that some form of load management system may be
required. Similarly, when running in parallel with the
Utility, consideration needs to be given to the mode of
generator operation if reactive power import is to be
controlled. The impact on the control scheme of a
sudden break in the Utility connection to the plant main
busbar also requires analysis. Where the in-plant
generation is run using constant power factor or
constant reactive power control, automatic reversion to
voltage control when the Utility connection is lost is
essential to prevent plant loads being subjected to a
voltage outside acceptable limits.
Limits may be placed by the Utility on the amount of
power/reactive power import/export. These may demand
the use of an in-plant Power Management System to
control the embedded generation and plant loads
accordingly. Some Utilities may insist on automatic
tripping of the interconnecting circuit breakers if there is
a significant departure outside permissible levels of
a. overvoltage
b. undervoltage
c. overfrequency
d. underfrequency
e. loss of Utility supply
In addition, particular circumstances may require
additional protection functions:
f. neutral voltage displacement
g. reverse power
h. directional overcurrent
In practice, it can be difficult to meet the protection
settings or performance demanded by the Utility without
a high risk of nuisance tripping caused by lack of coordination with normal power system faults and
disturbances that do not necessitate tripping of the
embedded generation. This is especially true when
applying protection specifically to detect loss of the
Utility supply (also called loss of mains) to cater for
operating conditions where there would be no
immediate excursion in voltage or frequency to cause
operation of conventional protection functions.
17.21.1 Protection Against Loss of Utility Supply

If the normal power infeed to a distribution system, or to
the part of it containing embedded generation is lost, the
effects may be as follows:
306
a. embedded generation may be overloaded, leading

to generator undervoltage/underfrequency
17/06/02
10:50
Page 307
b. embedded generation may be underloaded, leading

to overvoltage/overfrequency
c. little change to the absolute levels of voltage or
frequency if there is little resulting change to the
load flow through the PCC
The first two effects are covered by conventional voltage
and frequency protection. However, if condition (c)
occurs, conventional protection may not detect the loss
of Utility supply condition or it may be too slow to do so
within the shortest possible auto-reclose dead-times
that may be applied in association with Utility overhead
line protection. Detection of condition (c) must be
achieved if the requirements of the Utility are to be met.
Many possible methods have been suggested, but the
one most often used is the Rate of Change of Frequency
(ROCOF) relay. Its application is based on the fact that
the rate of change of small changes in absolute
frequency, in response to inevitable small load changes,
will be faster with the generation isolated than when the
generation is in parallel with the public, interconnected
power system. However, problems with nuisance
tripping in response to national power system events,
where the system is subject to significant frequency
excursions following the loss of a large generator or a
major power interconnector, have occurred.
This is particularly true for geographically islanded power
systems, such as those of the British Isles. An alternative
to ROCOF protection is a technique sometimes referred
to as voltage vector shift protection. In this technique
the rate of phase change between the directly measured
generator bus voltage is compared with a memorised a.c.
bus voltage reference.
Sources of embedded generation are not normally
earthed, which presents a potential safety hazard. In the
event of an Utility system earth fault, the Utility
protection should operate to remove the Utility power
infeed. In theory, this should also result in removal of the
embedded generation, through the action of the
stipulated voltage/frequency protection and dependable
loss of mains protection. However, in view of safety
considerations (e.g. fallen overhead line conductors in
public areas), an additional form of earth fault protection
may also be demanded to prevent the backfeed of an
earth fault by embedded generation. The only way of
detecting an earth fault under these conditions is to use
neutral voltage displacement protection. The additional
requirement is only likely to arise for embedded
generation rated above 150kVA, since the risk of the
small embedded generators not being cleared by other
means is negligible.
17.21.2 ROCOF Relay Description

A ROCOF relay detects the rate of change of frequency in
excess of a defined setpoint. The signal is obtained from
a voltage transformer connected close to the Point of
Common Coupling (PCC). The principal method used is
to measure the time period between successive zerocrossings to determine the average frequency for each
half-cycle and hence the rate of change of frequency.
The result is usually averaged over a number of cycles.
17.21.3 Voltage Vector Shift Relay Description

A voltage vector shift relay detects the drift in voltage
phase angle beyond a defined setpoint as long as it takes
place within a set period. Again, the voltage signal is
obtained from a voltage transformer connected close to
the Point of Common Coupling (PCC). The principal
method used is to measure the time period between
successive zero-crossings to determine the duration of
each half-cycle, and then to compare the durations with
the memorised average duration of earlier half-cycles in
order to determine the phase angle drift.
Chap17-280-315
17.21.4 Setting Guidelines

Should loss of the Utility supply occur, it is extremely
unlikely that there will be an exact match between the
output of the embedded generator(s) and the connected
load. A small frequency change or voltage phase angle
change will therefore occur, to which can be added any
changes due to the small natural variations in loading of
an isolated generator with time. Once the rate of change
of frequency exceeds the setting of the ROCOF relay for
a set time, or once the voltage phase angle drift exceeds
the set angle, tripping occurs to open the connection
between the in-plant and Utility networks.
While it is possible to estimate the rate of change of
frequency from knowledge of the generator set inertia
and MVA rating, this is not an accurate method for
setting a ROCOF relay because the rotational inertia of
the complete network being fed by the embedded
generation is required. For example, there may be other
embedded generators to consider. As a result, it is
invariably the case that the relay settings are determined
at site during commissioning. This is to ensure that the
Utility requirements are met while reducing the
possibility of a spurious trip under the various operating
scenarios envisaged. However, it is very difficult to
determine whether a given rate of change of frequency
will be due to a loss of mains incident or a
load/frequency change on the public power network, and
hence spurious trips are impossible to eliminate. Thus
the provision of Loss of Utility Supply protection to meet
power distribution Utility interface protection
307
17
Chap17-280-315
17
17/06/02
10:50
Page 308
requirements, may actually conflict with the interests of

the national power system operator. With the growing
contribution of non-dispatched embedded generation to
the aggregate national power demand, the loss of the
embedded generation following a transmission system
incident that may already challenge the security of the
system can only aggravate the problem. There have been
claims that voltage vector shift protection might offer
better security, but it will have operation times that vary
with the rate of change of frequency. As a result,
depending on the settings used, operation times might
not comply with Utility requirements under all
circumstances. Reference 17.1 provides further details
of the operation of ROCOF relays and the problems that
may be encountered.
Nevertheless, because such protection is a common
requirement of some Utilities, the loss of mains
protection may have to be provided and the possibility of
spurious trips will have to be accepted in those cases.
Site measurements over a period of time of the typical
rates of frequency change occurring may assist in
negotiations of the settings with the Utility, and with the
fine-tuning of the protection that may already be
commissioned.
17.22 EXAMPLES OF GENERATOR PROTECTION

SETTINGS
This section gives examples of the calculations required
for generator protection. The first is for a typical small
generator installed on an industrial system that runs in
parallel with the Utility supply. The second is for a larger
generator-transformer unit connected to a grid system.
17.22.1 Protection Settings of a

Small Industrial Generator
Generator Data
kVA
kW
PF
6250
5000
0.8
Generator type
Salient Pole
Earthing
resistor
31.7
CT Ratio
200/1
Rated
voltage
11000
Xd p.u.
2.349
Rated
Rated
current frequency
328
50
Rated Prime Mover

speed
type
1500 Steam Turbine
Generator Parameters
Xd p.u.
CT Ratio
0.297
500/1
Maximum earth
fault current
200A
Network Data
Minimum phase
fault current
145A
VT Ratio
11000/110
Salient details of the generator, network and protection

required are given in Table 17.2. The example
calculations are based on a MiCOM P343 relay in respect
of setting ranges, etc.
17.22.1.1 Differential protection
Biased differential protection involves the determination
of values for four setting values: Is1, Is2, K1 and K2 in
Figure 17.5. Is1 can be set at 5% of the generator rating,
in accordance with the recommendations for the relay,
and similarly the values of Is2 (120%) and K2 (150%) of
generator rating. It remains for the value of K1 to be
determined. The recommended value is generally 0%,
but this only applies where CTs that conform to IEC
60044-1 class PX (or the superseded BS 3938 Class X)
are used i.e. CTs specifically designed for use in
differential protection schemes. In this application, the
CTs are conventional class 5P CTs that meet the relay
requirements in respect of knee-point voltage, etc.
Where neutral tail and terminal CTs can saturate at
different times due to transiently offset magnetising
inrush or motor starting current waveforms with an r.m.s.
level close to rated current and where there is a high L/R
time constant for the offset, the use of a 0% bias slope
may give rise to maloperation. Such waveforms can be
encountered when plant of similar rating to the
generator is being energised or started. Differences
between CT designs or differing remanent flux levels can
lead to asymmetric saturation and the production of a
differential spill current. Therefore, it is appropriate to
select a non-zero setting for K1, and a value of 5% is
usual in these circumstances.
17.22.1.2 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
This protection is applied as remote backup to the
downstream overcurrent protection in the event of
protection or breaker failure conditions. This ensures
that the generator will not continue to supply the fault
under these conditions.
At normal voltage, the current setting must be greater
than the maximum generator load current of 328A. A
margin must be allowed for resetting of the relay at this
current (reset ratio = 95%) and for the measurement
tolerances of the relay (5% of Is under reference
conditions), therefore the current setting is calculated as:
I vcset >
Maximum downstream
phase fault current
850A
Existing Protection
Overcurrent Settings
Earth Fault Settings
Characteristic Setting
TMS
Characteristic Setting
TMS
SI
144A
0.176
SI
48A
0.15
Table 17.2: Data for small generator protection example
328
1.05
0.95
> 362.5 A
The nearest settable value is 365A, or 0.73In.
The minimum phase-phase voltage for a close-up singlephase to earth fault is 57%, so the voltage setting Vs
must be less than this. A value of 30% is typically used,
giving Vs = 33V. The current setting multiplying factor
308
17/06/02
10:50
Page 309
K must be chosen such that KIS is less than 50% of the

generator steady-state current contribution to an
uncleared remote fault. This information is not available
(missing data being common in protection studies).
However, the maximum sustained close-up phase fault
current (neglecting AVR action) is 145A, so that a setting
chosen to be significantly below this value will suffice. A
value of 87.5A (60% of the close-up sustained phase
fault current) is therefore chosen, and hence K = 0.6.
This is considered to be appropriate based on knowledge
of the system circuit impedances. The TMS setting is
chosen to co-ordinate with the downstream feeder
protection such that:
1. for a close-up feeder three-phase fault, that results
in almost total voltage collapse as seen by the relay
2. for a fault at the next downstream relay location, if
the relay voltage is less than the switching voltage
It should also be chosen so that the generator cannot be
subjected to fault or overload current in excess of the
stator short-time current limits. A curve should be
provided by the manufacturer, but IEC 60034-1 demands
that an AC generator should be able to pass 1.5 times
rated current for at least 30 seconds. The operating time
of the downstream protection for a three-phase fault
current of 850A is 0.682s, so the voltage controlled relay
element should have a minimum operating time of 1.09s
(0.4s grading margin used as the relay technology used
for the downstream relay is not stated see Table 9.2).
With a current setting of 87.5A, the operating time of
the voltage controlled relay element at a TMS of 1.0 is:
0.14
850
87.5
0.14
s
0.02
200
1
20
1.13
= 0.38 .
2.97
Use a setting of 0.4, nearest available setting.
=2.97s, so the required TMS is

This protection is provided as back-up earth-fault
protection for the generator and downstream system
(direct-connected generator). It must therefore have a
setting that grades with the downstream protection. The
protection is driven from the generator star-connected
VT, while the downstream protection is current operated.
It is therefore necessary to translate the current setting
of the downstream setting of the current-operated
earth-fault protection into the equivalent voltage for the
NVD protection. The equivalent voltage is found from
the formula:
V eff =
=
( I pe Z e ) 3
VT ratio
48 31.7 3
100
= 45.6 V
where:
= 3.01s
0.02
an operation time of not less than 1.13s. At a TMS of 1.0,

the generator protection relay operating time will be:
Chap17-280-315
Veff = effective voltage setting
Ipe = downstream earth-fault current setting

Ze = earthing resistance
Therefore a TMS of:
Hence a setting of 48V is acceptable. Time grading is

required, with a minimum operating time of the NVD
protection of 1.13s at an earth fault current of 200A.
Using the expression for the operation time of the NVD
element:
1.09
= 0.362
3.01
is required. Use 0.375, nearest available setting.
17.22.1.3 Stator earth fault protection
t = K/(M-1) sec
The maximum earth fault current, from Table 17.2, is

200A. Protection for 95% of the winding can be
provided if the relay is set to detect a primary earth fault
current of 16.4A, and this equates to a CT secondary
current of 0.033A. The nearest relay setting is 0.04A,
providing protection for 90% of the winding.
where:
The protection must grade with the downstream earth

fault protection, the settings of which are also given in
Table 17.2. At an earth fault current of 200A, the
downstream protection has an operation time of 0.73s.
The generator earth fault protection must therefore have
V
M =
V snvd
and
= voltage seen by relay
Vsnvd = relay setting voltage

the value of K can be calculated as 3.34. The nearest
settable value is 3.5, giving an operation time of 1.18s.
309
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:50
Page 310
17.22.1.5 Loss of excitation protection

Loss of excitation is detected by a mho impedance relay
element, as detailed in Section 17.16.2. The standard
settings for the P340 series relay are:
Xa = 0.5Xd x (CT ratio/VT ratio)
(in secondary quantities)
= -0.5 x 0.297 x 19.36 x 500/100
= -14.5
Xb = Xd x (CT ratio/VT ratio)
= 2.349 x 19.36 x (500/100)
= 227
17
The nearest settings provided by the relay are Xa = 14.5 Xb = 227. The time delay td1 should be set to
avoid relay element operation on power swings and a
typical setting of 3s is used. This value may need to be
modified in the light of operating experience. To prevent
cyclical pick-up of the relay element without tripping,
such as might occur during pole-slipping conditions, a
drop-off time delay tdo1 is provided and set to 0.5s.
17.22.1.6 Negative phase sequence current protection
This protection is required to guard against excessive
heating from negative phase sequence currents, whatever
the cause. The generator is of salient pole design, so from
IEC 60034-1, the continuous withstand is 8% of rating
and the I 22t value is 20s. Using Equation 17.1, the
required relay settings can found as I2>> = 0.05 and K =
8.6s. The nearest available values are I2>> = 0.05 and
K = 8.6s. The relay also has a cooling time constant
Kreset that is normally set equal to the value of K. To coordinate with clearance of heavy asymmetric system
faults, that might otherwise cause unnecessary operation
of this protection, a minimum operation time tmin should
be applied. It is recommended to set this to a value of 1.
Similarly, a maximum time can be applied to ensure that
the thermal rating of the generator is not exceeded (as
this is uncertain, data not available) and to take account
of the fact that the P343 characteristic is not identical
with that specified in IEC 60034. The recommended
setting for tmax is 600s.
17.22.1.7 Overvoltage protection
quantities (corresponding to 107% of rated stator

voltage) is typically used, with a definite time delay of
10s to allow for transients due to load switchoff/rejection, overvoltages on recovery from faults or
motor starting, etc.
The second element provides protection in the event of a
large overvoltage, by tripping excitation and the
generator circuit breaker (if closed). This must be set
below the maximum stator voltage possible, taking into
account saturation. As the open circuit characteristic of
the generator is not available, typical values must be
used. Saturation will normally limit the maximum
overvoltage on this type of generator to 130%, so a
setting of 120% (132V secondary) is typically used.
Instantaneous operation is required.
Generator
manufacturers are normally able to provide
recommendations for the relay settings. For embedded
generators, the requirements of the local Utility may also
have to be taken into account. For both elements, a
variety of voltage measurement modes are available to
take account of possible VT connections (single or threephase, etc.), and conditions to be protected against. In
this example, a three-phase VT connection is used, and
overvoltages on any phase are to be detected, so a
selection of Any is used for this setting.
17.22.1.8 Underfrequency protection
This is required to protect the generator from sustained
overload conditions during periods of operation isolated
from the Utility supply. The generating set manufacturer
will normally provide the details of machine short-time
capabilities. The example relay provides four stages of
underfrequency protection. In this case, the first stage is
used for alarm purposes and a second stage would be
applied to trip the set.
The alarm stage might typically be set to 49Hz, with a
time delay of 20s, to avoid an alarm being raised under
transient conditions, e.g. during plant motor starting.
The trip stage might be set to 48Hz, with a time delay of
0.5s, to avoid tripping for transient, but recoverable, dips
in frequency below this value.
17.22.1.9 Reverse power protection
The relay setting is 5% of rated power.
This is required to guard against various failure modes,

e.g. AVR failure, resulting in excessive stator voltage. A
two-stage protection is available, the first being a lowset time-delayed stage that should be set to grade with
transient overvoltages that can be tolerated following
load rejection. The second is a high-set stage used for
instantaneous tripping in the event of an intolerable
overvoltage condition arising.
Generators can normally withstand 105% of rated
voltage continuously, so the low-set stage should be set
higher than this value. A setting of 117.7V in secondary
0.05 5 10 6
setting =
CT ratio VT ratio
0.05 5 10 6
=
500 100
=5 W
This value can be set in the relay. A time delay is
required to guard against power swings while generating
at low power levels, so use a time delay of 5s. No reset
time delay is required.
310
17/06/02
Protection
Stator earth fault

Neutral voltage displacement
Loss of excitation
Voltage controlled overcurrent
Negative phase sequence
Overvoltage
Underfrequency
Reverse Power
10:50
Page 311
Quantity
Value
Is1
Is2
K1
K2
Ise
TMS
Vsnvd
K
Xa
Xb
td1
tDO1
Ivcset
Vs
K
TMS
I2>>
K
Kreset
tmin
tmax
V> meas mode
V> operate mode
V>1 setting
V>1 function
V>1 time delay
V>2 setting
V>2 function
V>2 time delay
F<1 setting
F<1 time delay
F<2 setting
F<2 time delay
P1 function
P1 setting
P1 time delay
P1 DO time
5%
120%
5%
150%
0.04
0.4
48V
3.5
-14.5
227
3s
0.5s
0.73
33
0.6
0.375
0.05
8.6s
8.6s
1.5s
600s
three-phase
any
107%
DT
10s
120%
DT
0sec
49Hz
20s
48Hz
0.5s
reverse power
5W
5s
0s
Parameter
Value
Generator MVA rating

187.65
Generator MW rating
160
Generator voltage
18
Synchronous reactance
1.93
Direct-axis transient reactance
0.189
Minimum operating voltage
0.8
Generator negative sequence capability
0.08
Generator negative sequence factor, Kg
10
Generator third harmonic voltage under load
0.02
Generator motoring power
0.02
alarm
1.1
Generator overvoltage
time delay
5
trip
1.3
Generator undervoltage
not required
Max pole slipping frequency
10
Generator transformer rating
360
Generator transformer leakage reactance
0.244
Generator transformer overflux alarm
1.1
Generator transformer overflux alarm
1.2
Network resistance (referred to 18kV)
0.56
Network reactance (referred to 18kV)
0.0199
System impedance angle (estimated)
80
Minimum load resistance
0.8
Generator CT ratio
8000/1
Generator VT ratio
18000/120
Number of generators in parallel
2
Unit
MVA
MW
kV
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
s
pu
Hz
MVA
pu
pu
pu
m
deg
Table 17.4: System data for large generator protection example
17.22.2.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection

The setting current Iset has to be greater than the fullload current of the generator (6019A). A suitable margin
must be allowed for operation at reduced voltage, so use
a multiplying factor of 1.2. The nearest settable value is
7200A. The factor K is calculated so that the operating
current is less than the current for a remote end three
phase fault. The steady-state current and voltage at the
generator for a remote-end three-phase fault are given
by the expressions:
Table 17.3: Small generator protection example relay settings
17.22.2 Large Generator Transformer Unit Protection

The data for this unit are given in Table 17.4. It is fitted
with two main protection systems to ensure security of
tripping in the event of a fault. To economise on space,
the setting calculations for only one system, that using a
MiCOM P343 relay are given. Settings are given in
primary quantities throughout.
I flt =
VN
( nR f ) + ( X d + X t + nX f ) 2
2
where:
17.22.2.1 Biased differential protection
If = minimum generator primary current for a

multi-phase feeder-end fault
VN = no-load phase-neutral generator voltage
The settings follow the guidelines previously stated. As

100% stator winding earth-fault protection is provided,
high sensitivity is not required and hence Is1 can be set
to 10% of generator rated current. This equates to 602A,
and the nearest settable value on the relay is 640A (=
0.08 of rated CT current). The settings for K1, Is2 and K2
follow the guidelines in the relay manual.
Chap17-280-315
311
Xd = generator d-axis synchronous reactance

Xt = generator transformer reactance
rf = feeder resistance
Xf = feeder reactance
n = number of parallel generators
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:50
Page 312
hence,
A TMS value of 10 is selected, to match the withstand

curve supplied by the manufacturer.
Iflt = 2893A
17.22.2.6 100% Stator earth fault protection
= 0.361N
This is provided by a combination of neutral voltage

displacement and third harmonic undervoltage
protection. For the neutral voltage displacement
protection to cover 90% of the stator winding, the
minimum voltage allowing for generator operation at a
minimum of 92% of rated voltage is:
and
V flt =
V N 3(( nR f ) 2 + ( X t + nX f ) 2 )
( nR f ) 2 + ( X d + X t + nX f ) 2
=1304 V
= 0.07U N
0.92 18 kV 0.1
3
A suitable value of K is therefore 0.3611.2 = 0.3 .
17
A suitable value of V2set is 120% of Vflt, giving a value

of 1565V. The nearest settable value is 3000V, minimum
allowable relay setting. The value of V1set is required to
be above the minimum voltage seen by the generator for
a close-up phase-earth fault. A value of 80% of rated
voltage is used for V1set, 14400V.
= 956.1V
Use a value of 935.3V, nearest settable value that
ensures 90% of the winding is covered. A 0.5s definite
time delay is used to prevent spurious trips. The third
harmonic voltage under normal conditions is 2% of rated
voltage, giving a value of:
17.22.2.3 Inadvertent energisation protection
18 kV 0.02
3
This protection is a combination of overcurrent with

undervoltage, the voltage signal being obtained from a
VT on the generator side of the system. The current
setting used is that of rated generator current of 6019A,
in accordance with IEEE C37.102 as the generator is for
installation in the USA. Use 6000A nearest settable
value. The voltage setting cannot be more than 85% of
the generator rated voltage to ensure operation does not
occur under normal operation. For this application, a
value of 50% of rated voltage is chosen.
The setting of the third harmonic undervoltage

protection must be below this value, a factor of 80%
being acceptable. Use a value of 166.3V. A time delay
of 0.5s is used. Inhibition of the element at low
generator output requires determination during
commissioning.
17.22.2.4 Negative phase sequence protection
17.22.2.7 Loss of excitation protection
The generator has a maximum steady-state capability of

8% of rating, and a value of Kg of 10. Settings of I2cmr
= 0.06 (=480A) and Kg = 10 are therefore used.
Minimum and maximum time delays of 1s and 1300s are
used to co-ordinate with external protection and ensure
tripping at low levels of negative sequence current are
used.
The client requires a two-stage loss of excitation

protection function. The first is alarm only, while the
second provides tripping under high load conditions. To
achieve this, the first impedance element of the P343
loss of excitation protection can be set in accordance
with the guidelines of Section 17.16.3 for a generator
operating at rotor angles up to 120o, as follows:
= 207.8 V
17.22.2.5 Overfluxing protection
Xb1 = 0.5Xd = 1.666
The generator-transformer manufacturer supplied the

following characteristics:
Xa1 = 0.75Xd = 0.245
Alarm: V f >1.1
Trip: V
>1.2 , inverse time characteristic
Use nearest settable values of 1.669 and 0.253. A

time delay of 5s is used to prevent alarms under
transient conditions. For the trip stage, settings for high
load as given in Section 17.16.3 are used:
18 2
kV 2
=
=1.727
MVA 187.65
Hence the alarm setting is 18000 1.05 60 = 315 V Hz .
X b2 =
A time delay of 5s is used to avoid alarms due to

transient conditions.
X a 2 = 0.75 X d = 0.1406
The trip setting is 18000 1.2 60 = 360 V Hz .
The nearest settable value for Xb2 is 1.725. A time

delay of 0.5s is used.
312
17/06/02
10:50
Page 313
17.22.2.8 Reverse power protection
Protection
The manufacturer-supplied value for motoring power is

2% of rated power. The recommended setting is
therefore 1.6MW. An instrumentation class CT is used in
conjunction with the relay for this protection, to ensure
accuracy of measurement. A time delay of 0.5s is used.
The settings should be checked at the commissioning
stage.
100% Stator earth fault

Neutral voltage displacement
17.22.2.9 Over/under-frequency protection

Loss of excitation
For under-frequency protection, the client has specified

the following characteristics:
Alarm: 59.3Hz, 0.5s time delay
Voltage controlled overcurrent
1st stage trip: 58.7Hz, 100s time delay

2nd stage trip: 58.2Hz, 1s time delay
Negative phase sequence
Similarly, the overfrequency is required to be set as follows:

Alarm: 62Hz, 30s time delay
Trip: 63.5Hz, 10s time delay
Overvoltage
These characteristics can be set in the relay directly.

17.22.2.10 Overvoltage protection
The generator manufacturers recommendation is:
Alarm: 110% voltage for 5s
Underfrequency
Trip: 130% voltage, instantaneous

This translates into the following relay settings:
Alarm: 19800V, 5s time delay
Trip: 23400V, 0.1s time delay
Reverse Power
17.22.2.11 Pole slipping protection

This is provided by the method described in Section
17.7.3.2. Detection at a maximum slip frequency of 10Hz
is required. The setting data, according to the relay
manual, is as follows.
Forward reach, ZA = Zn + Zt
Pole Slipping Protection
= 0.02 + 0.22
= 0.24
Reverse reach, ZB = ZGen
Reverse Power
= 2 x Xd
= 0.652
Reactance line, ZC = 0.9 x Z
Overfrequency
= 0.9 x 0.22
= 0.198
where:
Underfrequency
Z1 = generator transformer leakage impedance

Zn = network impedance
Quantity
Value
Is1
Is2
K1
K2
8%
100%
0%
150%
166.3V
0.5s
935.3V
0.5s
-0.245
1.666
5s
-0.1406
1.725
0.5s
0s
7200A
3
14400V
3000V
0.06
10
10
1s
1300s
three-phase
any
19800V
DT
5s
23400V
DT
0.1s
reverse power
1.6MW
0.5s
0s
6000A
9000V
0.243
0.656
0.206
90
80
15ms
15ms
62Hz
30s
63.5Hz
10s
reverse power
1.6MW
0.5s
0s
59.3Hz
0.5s
58.7Hz
100s
58.2Hz
1s
Vn3H<
Vn3H delay
Vsnvd
Time Delay
Xa1
Xb1
td1
Xa2
Xb2
td2
tDO1
Iset
K
V1set
V2set
I2>>
Kg
Kreset
tmin
tmax
V> meas mode
V> operate mode
V>1 setting
V>1 function
V>1 time delay
V>2 setting
V>2 function
V>2 time delay
P1 function
P1 setting
P1 time delay
P1 DO time
Dead Mach I>
Dead Mach V<
Za
Zb
Zc
T1
T2
F>1 setting
F>1 time delay
F>2 setting
F>2 time delay
P1 function
P1 setting
P1 time delay
P1 DO time
F<1 setting
F<1 time delay
F<2 setting
F<2 time delay
F<3 setting
F<3 time delay
Table 17.5: Relay settings for large generator protection example
313
Chap17-280-315
17
Chap17-280-315
17/06/02
10:50
Page 314
The nearest settable values are 0.243, 0.656, and

0.206 respectively.
The lens angle setting, , is found from the equation:
1.54 R l min
min =180 o 2 tan 1
(Z A + Z B )
and, substituting values,
min = 62.5
Use the minimum settable value of 90. The blinder angle,

, is estimated to be 80, and requires checking during
commissioning. Timers T1 and T2 are set to 15ms as
experience has shown that these settings are satisfactory
to detect pole slipping frequencies up to 10Hz.
This completes the settings required for the generator,
and the relay settings are given in Table 17.5. Of course,
additional protection is required for the generator
transformer, according to the principles described in
Chapter 16.
17.23 REFERENCES
17.1 Survey of Rate Of Change of Frequency Relays

and Voltage Phase Shift Relays for Loss of Mains
Protection. ERA Report 95-0712R, 1995. ERA
Technology Ltd.
17
314
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:19
18
Page 316
Industrial and Commercial

Power System Protection
Introduction
18.1
Busbar arrangement
18.2
Discrimination
18.3
HRC fuses
18.4
Industrial circuit breakers
18.5
Protection relays
18.6
Co-ordination problems
18.7
Fault current contribution

from induction motors
18.8
Automatic changeover systems
18.9
Voltage and phase reversal protection
18.10
Power factor correction

and protection of capacitors
18.11
Examples
18.12
References
18.13
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:20
Page 317
18 Industrial and Commercial

Power System P rotection
18.1 INTRODUCTION
As industrial and commercial operations processes and
plants have become more complex and extensive (Figure
18.1), the requirement for improved reliability of
electrical power supplies has also increased. The
potential costs of outage time following a failure of the
power supply to a plant have risen dramatically as well.
The introduction of automation techniques into industry
and commerce has naturally led to a demand for the
deployment of more power system automation, to
improve reliability and efficiency.
Figure 18.1: Large modern industrial plant
The protection and control of industrial power supply

systems must be given careful attention. Many of the
techniques that have been evolved for EHV power
systems may be applied to lower voltage systems also,
but typically on a reduced scale. However, industrial
systems have many special problems that have
warranted individual attention and the development of
specific solutions.
Many industrial plants have their own generation
installed. Sometimes it is for emergency use only,
feeding a limited number of busbars and with limited
capacity. This arrangement is often adopted to ensure
safe shutdown of process plant and personnel safety. In
317
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:20
Page 318
Industrial and Commercial Power System Protection
other plants, the nature of the process allows production

of a substantial quantity of electricity, perhaps allowing
export of any surplus to the public supply system at
either at sub-transmission or distribution voltage levels.
Plants that run generation in parallel with the public
supply distribution network are often referred to as cogeneration or embedded generation. Special protection
arrangements may be demanded for the point of
connection between the private and public Utility plant
(see Chapter 17 for further details).
Industrial systems typically comprise numerous cable
feeders and transformers. Chapter 16 covers the
protection of transformers and Chapters 9/10 the
protection of feeders.
of the standby generator facility. A standby generator is

usually of the turbo-charged diesel-driven type. On
detection of loss of incoming supply at any switchboard
with an emergency section, the generator is
automatically started. The appropriate circuit breakers
will close once the generating set is up to speed and
rated voltage to restore supply to the Essential Services
sections of the switchboards affected, provided that the
normal incoming supply is absent - for a typical diesel
generator set, the emergency supply would be available
within 10-20 seconds from the start sequence command
being issued.
110kV
18.2 BUSBAR ARRANGEMENT

*
The arrangement of the busbar system is obviously very

important, and it can be quite complex for some very
large industrial systems. However, in most systems a
single busbar divided into sections by a bus-section
circuit breaker is common, as illustrated in Figure 18.2.
Main and standby drives for a particular item of process
equipment will be fed from different sections of the
switchboard, or sometimes from different switchboards.
33kV
NO
B 6kV
NO
EDG
NO
HV supply
1
HV supply
2
NC
0.4kV
NO
NO
6kV
*
Transformer
1
Transformer
2
NO
A
2 out of 3
mechanical or electrical
interlock
NC B
NO
0.4kV
NO
18
A
NO
Bus section C - Essential supplies
EDG - Emergency generator
* - Two out of three interlock
Figure 18.2: Typical switchboard
configuration for an industrial plant
NC
B
0.4kV
Figure 18.3: Typical industrial power system
The main power system design criterion is that single

outages on the electrical network within the plant will
not cause loss of both the main and standby drives
simultaneously. Considering a medium sized industrial
supply system, illustrated in Figure 18.3, in more detail,
it will be seen that not only are duplicate supplies and
transformers used, but also certain important loads are
segregated and fed from Essential Services Board(s)
(also known as Emergency boards), distributed
throughout the plant. This enables maximum utilisation
The Essential Services Boards are used to feed equipment

that is essential for the safe shut down, limited operation
or preservation of the plant and for the safety of
personnel.
This will cover process drives essential for safe shutdown,
venting systems, UPS loads feeding emergency lighting,
process control computers, etc.
The emergency
generator may range in size from a single unit rated 2030kW in a small plant up to several units of 2-10MW
rating in a large oil refinery or similar plant. Large
318
17/06/02
11:20
Page 319
financial trading institutions may also have standby

power requirements of several MW to maintain
computer services.
18.3 DISCRIMINATION
Protection equipment works in conjunction with
switchgear. For a typical industrial system, feeders and
plant will be protected mainly by circuit breakers of
various types and by fused contactors. Circuit breakers
will have their associated overcurrent and earth fault
relays. A contactor may also be equipped with a
protection device (e.g. motor protection), but associated
fuses are provided to break fault currents in excess of the
contactor interrupting capability. The rating of fuses and
selection of relay settings is carried out to ensure that
discrimination is achieved i.e. the ability to select and
isolate only the faulty part of the system.
illustrated in Figure 18.4. When an unprotected circuit

is subjected to a short circuit fault, the r.m.s. current
rises towards a prospective (or maximum) value. The
fuse usually interrupts the short circuit current before it
can reach the prospective value, in the first quarter to
half cycle of the short circuit. The rising current is
interrupted by the melting of the fusible element,
subsequently dying away dying away to zero during the
arcing period.
Curve of asymmetrical
prospective short-circuit
current
Current trace
Ip
Time
Start of
short-circuit
Arcing
time
Pre-arcing time
18.4 HRC FUSES

The protection device nearest to the actual point of
power utilisation is most likely to be a fuse or a system
of fuses and it is important that consideration is given to
the correct application of this important device.
Total clearance time
Since the electromagnetic forces on busbars and

connections carrying short circuit current are related to the
square of the current, it will be appreciated that cut-off
significantly reduces the mechanical forces produced by
the fault current and which may distort the busbars and
connections if not correctly rated. A typical example of
cut-off current characteristics is illustrated in Figure 18.5.
HRC fuses remain consistent and stable in their breaking

characteristics in service without calibration and
maintenance. This is one of the most significant factors
for maintaining fault clearance discrimination. Lack of
discrimination through incorrect fuse grading will result
in unnecessary disconnection of supplies, but if both the
major and minor fuses are HRC devices of proper design
and manufacture, this need not endanger personnel or
cables associated with the plant.
18.4.1 Fuse Characteristics

The time required for melting the fusible element
depends on the magnitude of current. This time is known
as the pre-arcing time of the fuse. Vaporisation of the
element occurs on melting and there is fusion between
the vapour and the filling powder leading to rapid arc
extinction.
Fuses have a valuable characteristic known as cut-off,
1 Cycle
Figure 18.4: HRC fuse cut-off feature
319
1000
1250A
710A 800A
500A 630A
400A
200A 315A
125A
80A
50A
35A
25A
16A
100
Cut off current (peak kA)
The HRC fuse is a key fault clearance device for

protection in industrial and commercial installations,
whether mounted in a distribution fuseboard or as part
of a contactor or fuse-switch. The latter is regarded as a
vital part of LV circuit protection, combining safe circuit
making and breaking with an isolating capability
achieved in conjunction with the reliable short-circuit
protection of the HRC fuse. Fuses combine the
characteristics of economy and reliability; factors that
are most important in industrial applications.
Chap18-316-335
10
6A
1.0
2A
0.1
0.1
1.0
10
100
Prospective current (kA r.m.s. symmetrical)
Figure 18.5: Typical fuse cut-off current

characteristics
500
18
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:20
Page 320
It is possible to use this characteristic during the design

stage of a project to utilise equipment with a lower fault
withstand rating downstream of the fuse, than would be
the case if cut-off was ignored. This may save on costs,
but appropriate documentation and maintenance
controls are required to ensure that only replacement
fuses of very similar characteristics are used throughout
the lifetime of the plant concerned otherwise a safety
hazard may arise.

18
High ambient temperatures can influence the capability

of HRC fuses. Most fuses are suitable for use in ambient
temperatures up to 35C, but for some fuse ratings,
derating may be necessary at higher ambient
temperatures. Manufacturers' published literature
should be consulted for the de-rating factor to be
applied.
18.4.5 Protection of Motors
18.4.2 Discrimination Between Fuses
18.4.4 Effect of Ambient Temperature
Fuses are often connected in series electrically and it is

essential that they should be able to discriminate with
each other at all current levels. Discrimination is
obtained when the larger (major) fuse remains
unaffected by fault currents that are cleared by the
smaller (minor) fuse.
The fuse operating time can be considered in two parts:
i. the time taken for fault current to melt the
element, known as the pre-arcing time
ii. the time taken by the arc produced inside the fuse
to extinguish and isolate the circuit, known as the
arcing time
The total energy dissipated in a fuse during its operation
consists of pre-arcing energy and arc energy. The
values are usually expressed in terms of I2t, where I is the
current passing through the fuse and t is the time in
seconds. Expressing the quantities in this manner
provides an assessment of the heating effect that the
fuse imposes on associated equipment during its
operation under fault conditions.
To obtain positive discrimination between fuses, the total
I2t value of the minor fuse must not exceed the prearcing I2t value of the major fuse. In practice, this means
that the major fuse will have to have a rating
significantly higher than that of the minor fuse, and this
may give rise to problems of discrimination. Typically,
the major fuse must have a rating of at least 160% of
the minor fuse for discrimination to be obtained.
The manufacturers' literature should also be consulted

when fuses are to be applied to motor circuits. In this
application, the fuse provides short circuit protection but
must be selected to withstand the starting current
(possibly up to 8 times full load current), and also carry
the normal full load current continuously without
deterioration. Tables of recommended fuse sizes for both
direct on line and assisted start motor applications are
usually given. Examples of protection using fuses are
given in Section 18.12.1.
18.5 INDUSTRIAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Some parts of an industrial power system are most
effectively protected by HRC fuses, but the replacement
of blown fuse links can be particularly inconvenient in
others. In these locations, circuit breakers are used
instead, the requirement being for the breaker to
interrupt the maximum possible fault current
successfully without damage to itself. In addition to
fault current interruption, the breaker must quickly
disperse the resulting ionised gas away from the breaker
contacts, to prevent re-striking of the arc, and away from
other live parts of equipment to prevent breakdown. The
breaker, its cable or busbar connections, and the breaker
housing, must all be constructed to withstand the
mechanical forces resulting from the magnetic fields and
internal arc gas pressure produced by the highest levels
of fault current to be encountered.
The types of circuit breaker most frequently encountered
in industrial system are described in the following
sections.
18.4.3 Protection of Cables by Fuses

PVC cable is allowed to be loaded to its full nominal
rating only if it has close excess current protection. This
degree of protection can be given by means of a fuse link
having a fusing factor not exceeding 1.5, where:
Fusing factor =
Minimum Fusing Current

Current Rating
Cables constructed using other insulating materials (e.g.

paper, XLPE) have no special requirements in this respect.
18.5.1 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)

MCBs are small circuit breakers, both in physical size but
more importantly, in ratings. The basic single pole unit is
a small, manually closed, electrically or manually opened
switch housed in a moulded plastic casing. They are
suitable for use on 230V a.c. single-phase/400V a.c.
three-phase systems and for d.c. auxiliary supply
systems, with current ratings of up to 125A. Contained
within each unit is a thermal element, in which a bimetal
320
17/06/02
11:20
Page 321
strip will trip the switch when excessive current passes

through it. This element operates with a predetermined
inverse-time/current characteristic. Higher currents,
typically those exceeding 3-10 times rated current, trip
the circuit breaker without intentional delay by
actuating a magnetic trip overcurrent element. The
operating time characteristics of MCBs are not
adjustable. European Standard EN 60898-2 defines the
instantaneous trip characteristics, while the
manufacturer can define the inverse time thermal trip
characteristic. Therefore, a typical tripping characteristic
does not exist. The maximum a.c. breaking current
permitted by the standard is 25kA.
b. the breakers are larger, commensurate with the

level of ratings. Although available as single,
double or triple pole units, the multiple pole units
have a common housing for all the poles. Where
fitted, the switch for the neutral circuit is usually a
separate device, coupled to the multi-pole MCCB
Single-pole units may be coupled mechanically in groups

to form 2, 3 or 4 pole units, when required, by assembly
on to a rail in a distribution board. The available ratings
make MCB's suitable for industrial, commercial or
domestic applications, for protecting equipment such as
cables, lighting and heating circuits, and also for the
control and protection of low power motor circuits. They
may be used instead of fuses on individual circuits, and
they are usually backed-up by a device of higher fault
interrupting capacity.
e. the appropriate European specification is EN

60947-2
Various accessory units, such as isolators, timers, and

undervoltage or shunt trip release units may be
combined with an MCB to suit the particular circuit to be
controlled and protected. When personnel or fire
protection is required, a residual current device (RCD)
may be combined with the MCB. The RCD contains a
miniature core balance current transformer that
embraces all of the phase and neutral conductors to
provide sensitivity to earth faults within a typical range
of 0.05% to 1.5% of rated current, dependent on the
RCD selected. The core balance CT energises a common
magnetic trip actuator for the MCB assembly.
It is also possible to obtain current-limiting MCBs.
These types open prior to the prospective fault current
being reached, and therefore have similar properties to
HRC fuses. It is claimed that the extra initial cost is
outweighed by lifetime savings in replacement costs
after a fault has occurred, plus the advantage of
providing improved protection against electric shock if
an RCD is used. As a result of the increased safety
provided by MCBs fitted with an RCD device, they are
tending to replace fuses, especially in new installations.
18.5.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)

These circuit breakers are broadly similar to MCBs but
have the following important differences:
a. the maximum ratings are higher, with voltage
ratings up to 1000V a.c./1200V d.c. Current ratings
of 2.5kA continuous/180kA r.m.s break are possible,
dependent upon power factor
c. the operating levels of the magnetic and thermal

protection elements may be adjustable, particularly
in the larger MCCBs
d. because of their higher ratings, MCCBs are usually
positioned in the power distribution system nearer
to the power source than the MCBs
Chap18-316-335
Care must be taken in the short-circuit ratings of

MCCBs. MCCBs are given two breaking capacities, the
higher of which is its ultimate breaking capacity. The
significance of this is that after breaking such a current,
the MCCB may not be fit for continued use. The lower,
or service, short circuit breaking capacity permits
continued use without further detailed examination of
the device. The standard permits a service breaking
capacity of as little as 25% of the ultimate breaking
capacity. While there is no objection to use of MCCBs
to break short-circuit currents between the service and
ultimate values, the inspection required after such a trip
reduces the usefulness of the device in such
circumstances. It is also clearly difficult to determine if
the magnitude of the fault current was in excess of the
service rating.
The time-delay characteristics of the magnetic or
thermal timed trip, together with the necessity for, or
size of, a back-up device varies with make and size of
breaker. Some MCCBs are fitted with microprocessorcontrolled programmable trip characteristics offering a
wide range of such characteristics. Timedelayed
overcurrent characteristics may not be the same as the
standard characteristics for dependent-time protection
stated in IEC 60255-3. Hence, discrimination with other
protection must be considered carefully. There can be
problems where two or more MCBs or MCCBs are
electrically in series, as obtaining selectivity between
them may be difficult. There may be a requirement that
the major device should have a rating of k times the
minor device to allow discrimination, in a similar manner
to fuses the manufacturer should be consulted as to
value of k. Careful examination of manufacturers
literature is always required at the design stage to
determine any such limitations that may be imposed by
particular makes and types of MCCBs. An example of
co-ordination between MCCBs, fuses and relays is given
in Section 18.12.2.
321
18
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:20
Page 322
18.5.3 Air Circuit Breakers (ACBs)
Air circuit breakers are frequently encountered on

industrial systems rated at 3.3kV and below. Modern LV
ACBs are available in current ratings of up to 6.3kA with
maximum breaking capacities in the range of 85kA120kA r.m.s., depending on system voltage.
This type of breaker operates on the principle that the arc
produced when the main contacts open is controlled by
directing it into an arc chute. Here, the arc resistance is
increased and hence the current reduced to the point
where the circuit voltage cannot maintain the arc and
the current reduces to zero. To assist in the quenching
of low current arcs, an air cylinder may be fitted to each
pole to direct a blast of air across the contact faces as
the breaker opens, so reducing contact erosion.
Air circuit breakers for industrial use are usually
withdrawable and are constructed with a flush front
plate making them ideal for inclusion together with fuse
switches and MCBs/MCCBs in modular multi-tier
distribution switchboards, so maximising the number of
circuits within a given floor area.
Older types using a manual or dependent manual closing
mechanism are regarded as being a safety hazard. This
arises under conditions of closing the CB when a fault
exists on the circuit being controlled. During the closetrip operation, there is a danger of egress of the arc from
the casing of the CB, with a consequent risk of injury to
the operator. Such types may be required to be replaced
with modern equivalents.
Inverse
Very Inverse
Ultra Inverse
ACBs are normally fitted with integral overcurrent

protection, thus avoiding the need for separate
protection devices. However, the operating time
characteristics of the integral protection are often
designed
to
make
discrimination
with
MCBs/MCCBs/fuses easier and so they may not be in
accordance with the standard dependent time
characteristics given in IEC 60255-3. Therefore,
problems in co-ordination with discrete protection relays
may still arise, but modern numerical relays have more
flexible characteristics to alleviate such difficulties.
ACBs will also have facilities for accepting an external
trip signal, and this can be used in conjunction with an
external relay if desired. Figure 18.6 illustrates the
typical tripping characteristics available.
18.5.4 Oil Circuit Breakers (OCBs)

Oil circuit breakers have been very popular for many
years for industrial supply systems at voltages of 3.3kV
and above. They are found in both bulk oil and
minimum oil types, the only significant difference being
the volume of oil in the tank.
In this type of breaker, the main contacts are housed in
an oil-filled tank, with the oil acting as the both the
insulation and the arc-quenching medium. The arc
produced during contact separation under fault
conditions causes dissociation of the hydrocarbon
insulating oil into hydrogen and carbon. The hydrogen
extinguishes the arc. The carbon produced mixes with
the oil. As the carbon is conductive, the oil must be
changed after a prescribed number of fault clearances,
when the degree of contamination reaches an
unacceptable level.
Because of the fire risk involved with oil, precautions
such as the construction of fire/blast walls may have to
be taken when OCBs are installed.
Short Circuit
18
1000
18.5.5 Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCBs)

In recent years, this type of circuit breaker, along with
CBs using SF6, has replaced OCBs for new installations
in industrial/commercial systems at voltages of 3.3kV
and above.
100
10
Time (s)
Compared with oil circuit breakers, vacuum breakers

have no fire risk and they have high reliability with long
maintenance free periods. A variation is the vacuum
contactor with HRC fuses, used in HV motor starter
applications.
0.1
0.01
1
10
Current (multiple of setting)
Figure 18.6: Typical tripping characteristics

of an ACB
20
18.5.6 SF6 Circuit Breakers

In some countries, circuit breakers using SF6 gas as the
arc-quenching medium are preferred to VCBs as the
322
17/06/02
11:20
Page 323
CT
connections
A
Phase
elements
Residualcurrent
elements
(c)
3Ph. 3w
Ph. - Ph.
3Ph. 3w
(i) Ph. - Ph.

(ii) Ph. - E*
3Ph. 4w
(f)
(i) Ph. - Ph.

(ii) Ph. - E*
(iii) Ph. - N
* Earth-fault protection
only if earth-fault
current is not less
than twice primary
operating
current
Phase elements must

be in same phases at
all stations.
Earth-fault settings
may be less than full
load
3Ph. 3w
(i) Ph. - Ph.

(ii) Ph. - E
3Ph. 3w
(i) Ph. - Ph.

(ii) Ph. - E
load
3P . 4w
(i) Ph. - Ph.

(ii) Ph. - E
(iii) Ph. - N
load, but must be
greater than largest
Ph. - N load
3Ph. 4w
(i) Ph. - Ph.

(ii) Ph. - E
(iii) Ph. - N
load
(e)
Petersen coil and

unearthed systems.
(d)
Notes
(b)
Type of
fault
(a)
System
Chap18-316-335
(g)
3Ph. 3w
or
3Ph. 4w
(h)
Ph. - E
load
Ph. = phase ; w = wire ; E = earth ; N = neutral
Figure 18.7: Overcurrent and earth fault

relay connections
323
18
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:20
Page 324
replacement for air- and oil-insulated CBs. Some

modern types of switchgear cubicles enable the use of
either VCBs or SF6-insulated CBs according to customer
requirements. Ratings of up to 31.5kA r.m.s. fault break
at 36kV and 40kA at 24kV are typical. SF6-insulated CBs
also have advantages of reliability and maintenance
intervals compared to air- or oil-insulated CBs and are
of similar size to VCBs for the same rating.
18.6 PROTECTION RELAYS
18
When the circuit breaker itself does not have integral

protection, then a suitable external relay will have to be
provided. For an industrial system, the most common
protection relays are time-delayed overcurrent and earth
fault relays. Chapter 9 provides details of the application
of overcurrent relays.
Traditionally, for three wire systems, overcurrent relays
have often been applied to two phases only for relay
element economy. Even with modern multi-element
relay designs, economy is still a consideration in terms of
the number of analogue current inputs that have to be
provided. Two overcurrent elements will detect any
interphase fault, so it is conventional to apply two
elements on the same phases at all relay locations. The
phase CT residual current connections for an earth fault
relay element are unaffected by this convention. Figure
18.7 illustrates the possible relay connections and
limitations on settings.
connection to drive an earth fault relay provides earth

fault protection at the source of supply for a 4-wire
system. If the neutral CT is omitted, neutral current is
seen by the relay as earth fault current and the relay
setting would have to be increased to prevent tripping
under normal load conditions.
When an earth fault relay is driven from residually
connected CTs, the relay current and time settings must
be such that that the protection will be stable during the
passage of transient CT spill current through the relay.
Such spill current can flow in the event of transient,
asymmetric CT saturation during the passage of offset
fault current, inrush current or motor starting current.
The risk of such nuisance tripping is greater with the
deployment of low impedance electronic relays rather
than electromechanical earth fault relays which
presented significant relay circuit impedance. Energising
a relay from a core balance type CT generally enables
more sensitive settings to be obtained without the risk of
nuisance tripping with residually connected phase CTs.
When this method is applied to a four-wire system, it is
essential that both the phase and neutral conductors are
passed through the core balance CT aperture. For a 3wire system, care must be taken with the arrangement of
the cable sheath, otherwise cable faults involving the
sheath may not result in relay operation (Figure 18.8).
18.7 CO-ORDINATION PROBLEMS

There are a number of problems that commonly occur in
industrial and commercial networks that are covered in
the following sections.
Cable gland
Cable box
Cable gland /sheath

ground connection
I >
18.7.1.1 Earth Fault protection

with residually-connected CTs
For four-wire systems, the residual connection of three
phase CTs to an earth fault relay element will offer earth
fault protection, but the earth fault relay element must
be set above the highest single-phase load current to
avoid nuisance tripping. Harmonic currents (which may
sum in the neutral conductor) may also result in spurious
tripping. The earth fault relay element will also respond
to a phase-neutral fault for the phase that is not covered
by an overcurrent element where only two overcurrent
elements are applied. Where it is required that the earth
fault protection should respond only to earth fault
current, the protection element must be residually
connected to three phase CTs and to a neutral CT or to
a core-balance CT. In this case, overcurrent protection
must be applied to all three phases to ensure that all
phase-neutral faults will be detected by overcurrent
protection. Placing a CT in the neutral earthing
324
Relay does not operate

I >
(a) Incorrect
Relay operates
I >
(b) Correct
Figure 18.8: CBCT connection for
four-wire system
17/06/02
11:20
Page 325
18.7.2 Four-Wire Dual-Fed Substations
18.7.2.2 Use of single earth electrode
The co-ordination of earth fault relays protecting fourwire systems requires special consideration in the case of
low voltage, dual-fed installations. Horcher [18.1] has
suggested various methods of achieving optimum coordination. Problems in achieving optimum protection
for common configurations are described below.
A configuration sometimes adopted with four-wire dualfed substations where only a 3-pole bus section CB is
used is to use a single earth electrode connected to the
mid-point of the neutral busbar in the switchgear, as
shown in Figure 18.10. When operating with both
incoming main circuit breakers and the bus section
breaker closed, the bus section breaker must be opened
first should an earth fault occur, in order to achieve
discrimination. The co-ordination time between the
earth fault relays RF and RE should be established at
fault level F2 for a substation with both incoming supply
breakers and bus section breaker closed.
18.7.2.1 Use of 3-pole CBs

When both neutrals are earthed at the transformers and
all circuit breakers are of the 3-pole type, the neutral
busbar in the switchgear creates a double neutral to
earth connection, as shown in Figure 18.9. In the event
of an uncleared feeder earth fault or busbar earth fault,
with both the incoming supply breakers closed and the
bus section breaker open, the earth fault current will
divide between the two earth connections. Earth fault
relay RE2 may operate, tripping the supply to the healthy
section of the switchboard as well as relay RE1 tripping
the supply to the faulted section.
>
RS1
Chap18-316-335
>
RS2
I
Supply 1
>
Supply 2
F1
N
IF/2
IF/2
RE1
RE2
IF
IF/2
>
RF
Supply 1
IF/2
Neutral busbar
Supply 2
Figure 18.10: Dual fed four-wire systems:
use of single point neutral earthing
Bus section CB
IF
Figure 18.9: Dual fed four-wire systems:

use of 3-pole CBs
If only one incoming supply breaker is closed, the earth

fault relay on the energised side will see only a
proportion of the fault current flowing in the neutral
busbar. This not only significantly increases the relay
operating time but also reduces its sensitivity to lowlevel earth faults.
The solution to this problem is to utilise 4-pole CBs that
switch the neutral as well as the three phases. Then
there is only a single earth fault path and relay operation
is not compromised.
F2
When the substation is operated with the bus section

switch closed and either one or both of the incoming
supply breakers closed, it is possible for unbalanced
neutral busbar load current caused by single phase
loading to operate relay RS1 and/or RS2 and inadvertently
trip the incoming breaker. Interlocking the trip circuit of
each RS relay with normally closed auxiliary contacts on
the bus section breaker can prevent this.
However, should an earth fault occur on one side of the
busbar when relays RS are already operated, it is possible
for a contact race to occur. When the bus section
breaker opens, its break contact may close before the RS
relay trip contact on the healthy side can open (reset).
Raising the pick-up level of relays RS1 and RS2 above the
maximum unbalanced neutral current may prevent the
tripping of both supply breakers in this case. However,
the best solution is to use 4-pole circuit breakers, and
325
18
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:22
Page 326
independently earth both sides of the busbar.
18
If, during a busbar earth fault or uncleared feeder earth

fault, the bus section breaker fails to open when
required, the interlocking break auxiliary contact will
also be inoperative. This will prevent relays RS1 and RS2
from operating and providing back-up protection, with
the result that the fault must be cleared eventually by
slower phase overcurrent relays. An alternative method
of obtaining back-up protection could be to connect a
second relay RE, in series with relay RE, having an
operation time set longer than that of relays RS1 and
RS2. But since the additional relay must be arranged to
trip both of the incoming supply breakers, back-up
protection would be obtained but busbar selectivity
would be lost.
An example of protection of a typical dual-fed
switchboard is given in Section 18.12.3.
18.8 FAULT CURRENT CONTRIBUTION
FROM INDUCTION MOTORS
When an industrial system contains motor loads, the
motors will contribute fault current for a short time.
They contribute to the total fault current via the
following mechanism.
When an induction motor is running, a flux, generated by
the stator winding, rotates at synchronous speed and
interacts with the rotor. If a large reduction in the stator
voltage occurs for any reason, the flux in the motor
cannot change instantaneously and the mechanical
inertia of the machine will tend to inhibit speed
reduction over the first few cycles of fault duration. The
trapped flux in the rotor generates a stator voltage equal
initially to the back e.m.f. induced in the stator before
the fault and decaying according to the X/R ratio of the
associated flux and current paths. The induction motor
therefore acts as a generator resulting in a contribution
of current having both a.c. and d.c. components decaying
exponentially. Typical 50Hz motor a.c. time constants lie
in the range 10ms-60ms for LV motors and 60-200ms for
HV motors. This motor contribution has often been
neglected in the calculation of fault levels.
Industrial systems usually contain a large component of
motor load, so this approach is incorrect. The
contribution from motors to the total fault current may
well be a significant fraction of the total in systems
having a large component of motor load. Standards
relating to fault level calculations, such as IEC 60909,
require the effect of motor contribution to be included
where appropriate. They detail the conditions under
which this should be done, and the calculation method
to be used. Guidance is provided on typical motor fault
current contribution for both HV and LV motors if the
required data is not known. Therefore, it is now
relatively easy, using appropriate calculation software, to

determine the magnitude and duration of the motor
contribution, so enabling a more accurate assessment of
the fault level for:
a. discrimination in relay co-ordination
b. determination of the required switchgear/busbar
fault rating
For protection calculations, motor fault level
contribution is not an issue that is generally is important.
In industrial networks, fault clearance time is often
assumed to occur at 5 cycles after fault occurrence, and
at this time, the motor fault level contribution is much
less than just after fault occurrence. In rare cases, it may
have to be taken into consideration for correct time
grading for through-fault protection considerations, and
in the calculation of peak voltage for high-impedance
differential protection schemes.
It is more important to take motor contribution into
account when considering the fault rating of equipment
(busbars, cables, switchgear, etc.). In general, the initial
a.c. component of current from a motor at the instant of
fault is of similar magnitude to the direct-on-line
starting current of the motor. For LV motors, 5xFLC is
often assumed as the typical fault current contribution
(after taking into account the effect of motor cable
impedance), with 5.5xFLC for HV motors, unless it is
known that low starting current HV motors are used. It
is also accepted that similar motors connected to a
busbar can be lumped together as one equivalent motor.
In doing so, motor rated speed may need to be taken into
consideration, as 2 or 4 pole motors have a longer fault
current decay than motors with a greater number of
poles. The kVA rating of the single equivalent motor is
taken as the sum of the kVA ratings of the individual
motors considered. It is still possible for motor
contribution to be neglected in cases where the motor
load on a busbar is small in comparison to the total load
(again IEC 60909 provides guidance in this respect).
However, large LV motor loads and all HV motors should
be considered when calculating fault levels.
18.9 AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER SYSTEMS

Induction motors are often used to drive critical loads. In
some industrial applications, such as those involving the
pumping of fluids and gases, this has led to the need for
a power supply control scheme in which motor and other
loads are transferred automatically on loss of the normal
supply to an alternative supply. A quick changeover,
enabling the motor load to be re-accelerated, reduces
the possibility of a process trip occurring. Such schemes
are commonly applied for large generating units to
transfer unit loads from the unit transformer to the
station supply/start-up transformer.
326
17/06/02
11:22
Page 327
When the normal supply fails, induction motors that

remain connected to the busbar slow down and the
trapped rotor flux generates a residual voltage that
decays exponentially. All motors connected to a busbar
will tend to decelerate at the same rate when the supply
is lost if they remain connected to the busbar. This is
because the motors will exchange energy between
themselves, so that they tend to stay synchronised to
each other. As a result, the residual voltages of all the
motors decay at nearly the same rate. The magnitude of
this voltage and its phase displacement with respect to
the healthy alternative supply voltage is a function of
time and the speed of the motors. The angular
displacement between the residual motor voltage and
the incoming voltage will be 180 at some instant. If the
healthy alternative supply is switched on to motors
which are running down under these conditions, very
high inrush currents may result, producing stresses
which could be of sufficient magnitude to cause
mechanical damage, as well as a severe dip in the
alternative supply voltage.
Two methods of automatic transfer are used:
a. in-phase transfer system
b. residual voltage system
Preferred
feeder
Standby
feeder
Phase
angle
relay
High speed
CB
<
(a) In phase transfer method

Feeder No.2
Ursd <
Figure 18.11(b) illustrates the residual voltage method,

which is more common, especially in the petrochemical
industry.
Two feeders are used, supplying two busbar sections
connected by a normally open bus section breaker. Each
feeder is capable of carrying the total busbar load. Each
bus section voltage is monitored and loss of supply on
either section causes the relevant incomer CB to open.
Provided there are no protection operations to indicate
the presence of a busbar fault, the bus section breaker is
closed automatically to restore the supply to the
unpowered section of busbar after the residual voltage
generated by the motors running down on that section
has fallen to a an acceptable level. This is between 25%
and 40%, of nominal voltage, dependent on the
characteristics of the power system. The choice of
residual voltage setting will influence the reacceleration current after the bus section breaker closes.
For example, a setting of 25% may be expected to result
in an inrush current of around 125% of the starting
current at full voltage. Alternatively, a time delay could
be used as a substitute for residual voltage
measurement, which would be set with knowledge of the
plant to ensure that the residual voltage would have
decayed sufficiently before transfer is initiated.
18.10 VOLTAGE AND PHASE REVERSAL PROTECTION
Ursd <
Phase angle measurement is used to sense the relative

phase angle between the standby feeder voltage and the
motor busbar voltage.
When the voltages are
approximately in phase, or just prior to this condition
through prediction, a high-speed circuit breaker is used
to complete the transfer. This method is restricted to
large high inertia drives where the gradual run down
characteristic upon loss of normal feeder supply can be
predicted accurately.
The protection relay settings for the switchboard must

take account of the total load current and the voltage
dip during the re-acceleration period in order to avoid
spurious tripping during this time. This time can be
several seconds where large inertia HV drives are
involved.
Feeder No.1
The in-phase transfer method is illustrated in Figure

18.11(a). Normal and standby feeders from the same
power source are used.
(b) Residual voltage method

Figure 18.11: Auto-transfer systems
Chap18-316-335
Voltage relays have been widely used in industrial power

supply systems. The principle purposes are to detect
undervoltage and/or overvoltage conditions at
switchboards to disconnect supplies before damage can
be caused from these conditions or to provide
interlocking checks. Prolonged overvoltage may cause
damage to voltage-sensitive equipment (e.g. electronics),
while undervoltage may cause excessive current to be
327
18
17/06/02
11:22
Page 328
18
Reverse phase sequence voltage protection should be

applied where it may be dangerous for a motor to be
started with rotation in the opposite direction to that
intended. Incorrect rotation due to reverse phase
sequence might be set up following some error after
power system maintenance or repairs, e.g. to a supply
cable. Older motor control boards might have been fitted
with discrete relays to detect this condition. Modern
motor protection relays may incorporate this function. If
reverse phase sequence is detected, motor starting can be
blocked. If reverse phase sequence voltage protection is
not provided, the high-set negative phase sequence
current protection in the relay would quickly detect the
condition once the starting device is closed but initial
reverse rotation of the motor could not be prevented.
Capacitor kvar
kW
1
kV
A
Magnetising kvar
drawn by motor loads. Motors are provided with thermal

overload protection to prevent damage with excessive
current, but undervoltage protection is commonly
applied to disconnect motors after a prolonged voltage
dip. With a voltage dip caused by a source system fault,
a group of motors could decelerate to such a degree that
their aggregate re-acceleration currents might keep the
recovery voltage depressed to a level where the machines
might stall. Modern numerical motor protection relays
typically incorporate voltage protection functions, thus
removing the need for discrete undervoltage relays for
this purpose (see Chapter 19). Older installations may
still utilise discrete undervoltage relays, but the setting
criteria remain the same.
V
2
kVA lo
2 a
with co d current
mpensa
tion
1 lo
co ad c
mp ur
en ren
sa t w
tio
n itho
ut
Figure 18.12: Power factor correction principle
The following may be deduced from this vector diagram:

Uncorrected power factor =
18.11 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

AND PROTECTION OF CAPACITORS
To offset the losses and restrictions in plant capacity

they incur and to assist with voltage regulation, Utilities
usually apply tariff penalties to large industrial or
commercial customers for running their plant at
excessively low power factor. The customer is thereby
induced to improve the power factor of his system and it
may be cost-effective to install fixed or variable power
factor correction equipment to raise or regulate the
plant power factor to an acceptable level.
Shunt capacitors are often used to improve power factor.
The basis for compensation is illustrated in Figure 18.12,
where 1 represents the uncorrected power factor
angle and 2 the angle relating to the desired power
factor, after correction.
kW
kVA 1
= cos1
Corrected power factor =
Loads such as induction motors draw significant reactive

power from the supply system, and a poor overall power
factor may result. The flow of reactive power increases
the voltage-drops through series reactances such as
transformers and reactors, it uses up some of the current
carrying capacity of power system plant and it increases
the resistive losses in the power system.
Compensating kvar
Chap18-316-335
kW
kVA 2
= cos2
Reduction in kVA = kVA1 - kVA2
If the kW load and uncorrected power factors are known,
then the capacitor rating in kvar to achieve a given
degree of correction may be calculated from:
Capacitor kvar
= kW x (tan cos1-tan cos2)
A spreadsheet can easily be constructed to calculate the
required amount of compensation to achieve a desired
power factor.
18.11.1 Capacitor Control

Where the plant load or the plant power factor varies
considerably, it is necessary to control the power factor
correction, since over-correction will result in excessive
system voltage and unnecessary losses. In a few
industrial systems, capacitors are switched in manually
when required, but automatic controllers are standard
practice. A controller provides automatic power factor
correction, by comparing the running power factor with
328
17/06/02
11:22
Page 329
the target value. Based on the available groupings, an

appropriate amount of capacitance is switched in or out
to maintain an optimum average power factor. The
controller is fitted with a loss of voltage relay element
to ensure that all selected capacitors are disconnected
instantaneously if there is a supply voltage interruption.
When the supply voltage is restored, the capacitors are
reconnected progressively as the plant starts up. To
ensure that capacitor groups degrade at roughly the
same rate, the controller usually rotates selection or
randomly selects groups of the same size in order to even
out the connected time. The provision of overvoltage
protection to trip the capacitor bank is also desirable in
some applications. This would be to prevent a severe
system overvoltage if the power factor correction (PFC)

controller fails to take fast corrective action.
The design of PFC installations must recognise that many
industrial loads generate harmonic voltages, with the
result that the PFC capacitors may sink significant
harmonic currents. A harmonic study may be necessary
to determine the capacitor thermal ratings or whether
series filters are required.
18.11.2 Motor P.F. Correction

When dealing with power factor correction of motor
loads, group correction is not always the most
Chap18-316-335
From
incoming transformer
Metering
11kV
Trip
Lockout
P1
I >> I >>
I> I >
Metering
U>
PFC/V
Controller
U<
Id>
P2
Capacitor bank
I>
I>
I>
I>>
I>>
I>>
* Element fuses
329
Figure 18.13: Protection of capacitor banks
18
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:22
Page 330
economical method. Some industrial consumers apply

capacitors to selected motor substations rather than
applying all of the correction at the main incoming
substation busbars. Sometimes, power factor correction
may even be applied to individual motors, resulting in
optimum power factor being obtained under all
conditions of aggregate motor load. In some instances,
better motor starting may also result, from the
improvement in the voltage regulation due to the
capacitor. Motor capacitors are often six-terminal units,
and a capacitor may be conveniently connected directly
across each motor phase winding.
18
A
B
C
Capacitor
bank
Capacitor sizing is important, such that a leading power

factor does not occur under any load condition. If excess
capacitance is applied to a motor, it may be possible for
self-excitation to occur when the motor is switched off or
suffers a supply failure. This can result in the production
of a high voltage or in mechanical damage if there is a
sudden restoration of supply. Since most star/delta or
auto-transformer starters other than the Korndorffer
types involve a transitional break in supply, it is generally
recommended that the capacitor rating should not
exceed 85% of the motor magnetising reactive power.
18.11.3 Capacitor Protection

When considering protection for capacitors, allowance
should be made for the transient inrush current
occurring on switch-on, since this can reach peak values
of around 20 times normal current. Switchgear for use
with capacitors is usually de-rated considerably to allow
for this. Inrush currents may be limited by a resistor in
series with each capacitor or bank of capacitors.
Protection equipment is required to prevent rupture of
the capacitor due to an internal fault and also to protect
the cables and associated equipment from damage in
case of a capacitor failure. If fuse protection is
contemplated for a three-phase capacitor, HRC fuses
should be employed with a current rating of not less than
1.5 times the rated capacitor current.
Medium voltage capacitor banks can be protected by the
scheme shown in Figure 18.13. Since harmonics increase
capacitor current, the relay will respond more correctly if
it does not have in-built tuning for harmonic rejection.
Double star capacitor banks are employed at medium
voltage. As shown in Figure 18.14, a current transformer
in the inter star-point connection can be used to drive a
protection relay to detect the out-of-balance currents
that will flow when capacitor elements become shortcircuited or open-circuited. The relay will have
adjustable current settings, and it might contain a bias
circuit, fed from an external voltage transformer, that
can be adjusted to compensate for steady-state spill
current in the inter star-point connection.
IU >
Alarm
Trip
Figure 18.14: Protection of double star

capacitor banks
Some industrial loads such as arc furnaces involve large

inductive components and correction is often applied
using very large high voltage capacitors in various
configurations.
Another high voltage capacitor configuration is the split
phase arrangement where the elements making up each
phase of the capacitor are split into two parallel paths.
Figure 18.15 shows two possible connection methods for
the relay. A differential relay can be applied with a
current transformer for each parallel branch. The relay
compares the current in the split phases, using sensitive
current settings but also adjustable compensation for
the unbalance currents arising from initial capacitor
mismatch.
18.12 EXAMPLES
In this section, examples of the topics dealt with in the
Chapter are considered.
18.12.1 Fuse Co-ordination

An example of the application of fuses is based on the
arrangement in Figure 18.16(a). This shows an
unsatisfactory scheme with commonly encountered
shortcomings. It can be seen that fuses B, C and D will
discriminate with fuse A, but the 400A sub-circuit fuse
E may not discriminate, with the 500A sub-circuit fuse
D at higher levels of fault current.
330
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:22
Page 331
A
Rating
1000A
I>
Rating
500A
Rating
500A
Rating
500A
I>
Rating
400A
Rating
30A
each
C
F
(a) Incorrect layout giving rise to problems in discrimination
I>
Rating
1000A
Alarm
Trip
(a)
Rating
100A
Rating
400A
Rating
500A
B
Rating
500A
C
I>
Rating
30A
F
(b) Correct layout and discrimination
I>
Figure 18.16: Fuse protection: effect

of layout on discrimination
However, there are industrial applications where

discrimination is a secondary factor. In the application
shown in Figure 18.17, a contactor having a fault rating
of 20kA controls the load in one sub-circuit. A fuse
rating of 630A is selected for the minor fuse in the
contactor circuit to give protection within the throughfault capacity of the contactor.
I>
Alarm
Trip
(b)
Figure 18.15: Differential protection of split

phase capacitor banks
The solution, illustrated in Figure 18.16(b), is to feed the

400A circuit E direct from the busbars. The sub-circuit
fuse D may now have its rating reduced from 500A to a
value, of say 100A, appropriate to the remaining subcircuit. This arrangement now provides a discriminating
fuse distribution scheme satisfactory for an industrial
system.
The major fuse of 800A is chosen, as the minimum rating

that is greater than the total load current on the
switchboard. Discrimination between the two fuses is
not obtained, as the pre-arcing I2t of the 800A fuse is
less than the total I2t of the 630A fuse. Therefore, the
major fuse will blow as well as the minor one, for most
faults so that all other loads fed from the switchboard
will be lost. This may be acceptable in some cases. In
most cases, however, loss of the complete switchboard
for a fault on a single outgoing circuit will not be
acceptable, and the design will have to be revised.
331
18
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:22
Page 332
With the CT ratio of 2000/1A and a relay reset ratio of 95%

of the nominal current setting, a current setting of at least
80% would be satisfactory, to avoid tripping and/or failure
to reset with the transformer carrying full load current.
However, choice of a value at the lower end of this current
setting range would move the relay characteristic towards
that of the MCCB and discrimination may be lost at low
fault currents. It is therefore prudent to select initially a
relay current setting of 100%.
800A
400V
630A
18.12.2.2 Relay characteristic and

time multiplier selection
Fused contactor
Auxiliary circuits
Figure 18.17: Example of back-up protection
18.12.2 Grading of Fuses/MCCBs/ Overcurrent Relays

An example of an application involving a moulded case
circuit breaker, fuse and a protection relay is shown in
Figure 18.18. A 1MVA 3.3kV/400V transformer feeds the
LV board via a circuit breaker, which is equipped with a
MiCOM P141 numerical relay having a setting range of
8-400% of rated current and fed from 2000/1A CTs.
An EI characteristic is selected for the relay to ensure

discrimination with the fuse (see Chapter 9 for details).
From Figure 18.19, it may be seen that at the fault level
of 40kA the fuse will operate in less than 0.01s and the
MCCB operates in approximately 0.014s. Using a fixed
grading margin of 0.4s, the required relay operating time
becomes 0.4 + 0.014 = 0.414s. With a CT ratio of
2000/1A, a relay current setting of 100%, and a relay
TMS setting of 1.0, the extremely inverse curve gives a
relay operating time of 0.2s at a fault current of 40kA.
This is too fast to give adequate discrimination and
indicates that the EI curve is too severe for this
application. Turning to the VI relay characteristic, the
relay operation time is found to be 0.71s at a TMS of 1.0.
To obtain the required relay operating time of 0.414s:
TMS setting =
Fuse
= 0.583
1MVA
2000/1A
3300/415V
I>>
I>
0.414
0.71
10.0
LV board fault
level = 30kA
MCCB
400A
Characteristic for relay

Figure 18.18: Network diagram for protection
co-ordination example fuse/MCCB/relay
18
Discrimination is required between the relay and both the

fuse and MCCB up to the 40kA fault rating of the board.
To begin with, the time/current characteristics of both the
400A fuse and the MCCB are plotted in Figure 18.19.
18.12.2.1 Determination of relay current setting
Fuse
The relay current setting chosen must not be less than the
full load current level and must have enough margin to
allow the relay to reset with full load current flowing. The
latter may be determined from the transformer rating:
FLC
Operating time (s)
1.0
kVA
kV x 3
0.1
MCCB
0.01
1000
10,000
100,000
Operating current (A) to 415V base
Revised relay characteristic
Original relay characteristic
1000
=
= 1443 A
0.4 3
Figure 18.19: Grading curves for

Fuse/MCCB/relay grading example
332
17/06/02
11:22
Page 333
Use a TMS of 0.6, nearest available setting.

The use of a different form of inverse time characteristic
makes it advisable to check discrimination at the lower
current levels also at this stage. At a fault current of
4kA, the relay will operate in 8.1s, which does not give
discrimination with the MCCB. A relay operation time of
8.3s is required.
To overcome this, the relay
characteristic needs to be moved away from the MCCB
characteristic, a change that may be achieved by using a
TMS of 0.625. The revised relay characteristic is also
18.12.3 Protection of a Dual-Fed Substation

As an example of how numerical protection relays can be
used in an industrial system, consider the typical large
industrial substation of Figure 18.20. Two 1.6MVA,
11/0.4kV transformers feeding a busbar whose bussection CB is normally open. The LV system is solidly
earthed. The largest outgoing feeder is to a motor rated
160kW, 193kVA, and a starting current of 7 x FLC.
Relay C1
It is assumed that modern numerical relays are used. For

simplicity, a fixed grading margin of 0.3s is used.
18.12.3.2 Motor protection relay settings
Thermal element:
I >>
2500/1
current setting: 300A
Relay C2
2500/1
time constant: 20 mins
2500/1 NO
>>
I >>
I>
Relays C are not required to have directional

characteristics (see Section 9.14.3) as all three circuit
breakers are only closed momentarily during transfer
from a single infeeding transformer to two infeeding
transformers configuration. This transfer is normally an
automated sequence, and the chance of a fault occurring
during the short period (of the order of 1s) when all three
CBs are closed is taken to be negligibly small. Similarly,
although this configuration gives the largest fault level
at the switchboard, it is not considered from either a
switchboard fault rating or protection viewpoint.
From the motor characteristics given, the overcurrent

relay settings (Relay A) can be found using the guidelines
set out in Chapter 19 as:
1.6 MVA
11/0.4kV
Z=6.25%
>
I >>
amount of motor load. The contribution of motor load to

the fault level at the switchboard is usually larger than
that from a single infeeding transformer, as the
transformer restricts the amount of fault current infeed
from the primary side. The three-phase break fault level
at the switchboard under these conditions is assumed to
be 40kA rms.
Chap18-316-335
A2 0.4kV
50kA rms
Instantaneous element:
current setting: 2.32kA
Trip
These are the only settings relevant to the upstream

relays.
Relay B
>
I >>
300/1
Relay A
18.12.3.3 Relay B settings

Motor cable
M
160kW
Figure 18.20: Relay grading example

for dual-fed switchboard
The transformer impedance is to IEC standards. The LV

switchgear and bus bars are fault rated at 50kA rms. To
simplify the analysis, only the phase-fault LV protection
is considered.
18.12.3.1 General considerations

Analysis of many substations configured as in Figure
18.20 shows that the maximum fault level and feeder
load current is obtained with the bus-section circuit
breaker closed and one of the infeeding CBs open. This
applies so long as the switchboard has a significant
Relay B settings are derived from consideration of the

loading and fault levels with the bus-section breaker
between busbars A1 and A2 closed. No information is
given about the load split between the two busbars, but
it can be assumed in the absence of definitive
information that each busbar is capable of supplying the
total load of 1.6MVA. With fixed tap transformers, the
bus voltage may fall to 95% of nominal under these
conditions, leading to a load current of 2430A. The IDMT
current setting must be greater than this, to avoid relay
operation on normal load currents and (ideally) with
aggregate starting/re-acceleration currents. If the entire
load on the busbar was motor load, an aggregate starting
current in excess of 13kA would occur, but a current
setting of this order would be excessively high and lead
to grading problems further upstream. It is unlikely that
the entire load is motor load (though this does occur,
especially where a supply voltage of 690V is chosen for
motors an increasingly common practice) or that all
333
18
17/06/02
11:22
Page 334
motors are started simultaneously (but simultaneous reacceleration may well occur). What is essential is that
relay B does not issue a trip command under these
circumstances i.e. the relay current/time characteristic
is in excess of the current/time characteristic of the
worst-case starting/re-acceleration condition. It is
therefore assumed that 50% of the total bus load is
motor load, with an average starting current of 600% of
full load current (= 6930A), and that re-acceleration
takes 3s. A current setting of 3000A is therefore initially
used. The SI characteristic is used for grading the relay,
as co-ordination with fuses is not required. The TMS is
required to be set to grade with the thermal protection
of relay A under cold conditions, as this gives the
longest operation time of Relay A, and the reacceleration conditions. A TMS value of 0.41 is found to
provide satisfactory grading, being dictated by the motor
starting/re-acceleration transient. Adjustment of both
current and TMS settings may be required depending on
the exact re-acceleration conditions. Note that lower
current and TMS settings could be used if motor
starting/re-acceleration did not need to be considered.
Relayy A
Relayy B
Relayy C
I>
I>
Value Parameter Value

300A Time const 1200s
TMS
0.175
0.25
2750A TMS
Re-acceleration
Relay A setting
Relay B settingg
Relay C setting
tdinst
Value
0
0.32s
0.62s
I>
I>>
dinst
dinst
I>>
15000
(a) Relay settings

1000
100
10
1
0.1
0.01
100
I>
10000
1000
Current (A) referred to 0.4kV
(b) Grading curves
I>>
100000
Figure 18.22: Final relay grading curves
18.12.3.5 Comments on grading

Relay A
Relay B
Re-acceleration
Relayy A settingg
Relay B setting
100
Time (s)
18
Relay A
Relay B
Relay C
The high-set setting needs to be above the full load

current and motor starting/re-acceleration transient
current, but less than the fault current by a suitable
margin. A setting of 12.5kA is initially selected. A time
delay of 0.3s has to used to ensure grading with relay A
at high fault current levels; both relays A and B may see
a current in excess of 25kA for faults on the cable side of
the CB feeding the 160kW motor. The relay curves are
1000
The current setting has to be above that for relay B to

achieve full co-ordination, and a value of 3250A is
suitable. The TMS setting using the SI characteristic is
chosen to grade with that of relay B at a current of
12.5kA (relay B instantaneous setting), and is found to be
0.45. The high-set element must grade with that of relay
B, so a time delay of 0.62sec is required. The current
setting must be higher than that of relay B, so use a
value of 15kA. The final relay grading curves and
settings are illustrated in Figure 18.22.
Time (s)
Chap18-316-335
10
1
0.1
0.01
100
1000
10000
100000
Current (A) referred to 0.4kV

Figure 18.21: Grading of relays A and B
18.12.3.4 Relays C settings

The setting of the IDMT element of relays C1 and C2 has
to be suitable for protecting the busbar while grading
with relay B. The limiting condition is grading with relay
B, as this gives the longest operation time for relays C.
While the above grading may appear satisfactory, the

protection on the primary side of the transformer has not
been considered. IDMT protection at this point will have
to grade with relays C and with the through-fault shorttime withstand curves of the transformer and cabling.
This may result in excessively long operation times. Even
if the operation time at the 11kV level is satisfactory,
there is probably a Utility infeed to consider, which will
involve a further set of relays and another stage of time
grading, and the fault clearance time at the utility infeed
will almost certainly be excessive. One solution is to
accept a total loss of supply to the 0.4kV bus under
conditions of a single infeed and bus section CB closed.
This is achieved by setting relays C such that grading
with relay B does not occur at all current levels, or
omitting relay B from the protection scheme. The
argument for this is that network operation policy is to
ensure loss of supply to both sections of the switchboard
does not occur for single contingencies. As single infeed
operation is not normal, a contingency (whether fault or
maintenance) has already occurred, so that a further
fault causing total loss of supply to the switchboard
334
Chap18-316-335
17/06/02
11:22
Page 335
through tripping of one of relays B is a second

contingency. Total loss of supply is therefore acceptable.
The alternative is to accept a lack of discrimination at
some point on the system, as already noted in Chapter 9.
Another solution is to employ partial differential
protection to remove the need for Relay A, but this is
seldom used. The strategy adopted will depend on the
individual circumstances.
18.13 REFERENCES
18.1 Overcurrent Relay Co-ordination for Double

Ended Substations. George R Horcher. IEEE. Vol.
1A-14 No. 6 1978.
335
18
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 336
19
A.C. Motor Protection

Introduction
19.1
Modern relay design
19.2
Thermal (Overload) protection
19.3
Start/Stall protection
19.4
Short circuit protection
19.5
Earth fault protection
19.6
Negative phase sequence protection
19.7
Wound rotor induction

motor protection
19.8
RTD temperature detection
19.9
Bearing failures
19.10
Undervoltage protection
19.11
Loss-of-load protection
19.12
Additional protection
for synchronous motors
19.13
Motor protection examples
19.14
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 337
19 A.C. Motor P rotection

19.1 INTRODUCTION
There are a wide range of a.c. motors and motor
characteristics in existence, because of the numerous
duties for which they are used. All motors need
protection, but fortunately, the more fundamental
problems affecting the choice of protection are
independent of the type of motor and the type of load to
which it is connected. There are some important
differences between the protection of induction motors
and synchronous motors, and these are fully dealt with
in the appropriate section.
Motor characteristics must be carefully considered when
applying protection; while this may be regarded as
stating the obvious, it is emphasised because it applies
more to motors than to other items of power system
plant.
For example, the starting and stalling
currents/times must be known when applying overload
protection, and furthermore the thermal withstand of
the machine under balanced and unbalanced loading
must be clearly defined.
The conditions for which motor protection is required
can be divided into two broad categories: imposed
external conditions and internal faults. Table 19.1
provides details of all likely faults that require protection.
External Faults
Unbalanced supplies
Undervoltages
Single phasing
Reverse phase sequence
Internal faults
Bearing failures
Winding faults
Overloads
Table 19.1: Causes of motor failures
1 9 . 2 M O D E R N R E L AY D E S I G N
The design of a modern motor protection relay must be
adequate to cater for the protection needs of any one of
the vast range of motor designs in service, many of the
designs having no permissible allowance for overloads. A
relay offering comprehensive protection will have the
following set of features:
a. thermal protection
b. extended start protection
c. stalling protection
337
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 338
d. number of starts limitation
heat at a rate proportional to temperature rise. This is

the principle behind the thermal replica model of a
motor used for overload protection.
e. short circuit protection

f. earth fault protection
The temperature T at any instant is given by:
g. winding RTD measurement/trip
T = Tmax (1 - e-t/)
h. negative sequence current detection
where:
i. undervoltage protection
j. loss-of-load protection
Tmax = final steady state temperature

= heating time constant
k. out-of-step protection
Temperature rise is proportional to the current squared:
l. loss of supply protection
T = KI R2 (1 e t
m. auxiliary supply supervision
In addition, relays may offer options such as circuit

breaker condition monitoring as an aid to maintenance.
Manufacturers may also offer relays that implement a
reduced functionality to that given above where less
comprehensive protection is warranted (e.g. induction
motors of low rating).
The following sections examine each of the possible

failure modes of a motor and discuss how protection may
be applied to detect that mode.
19
where:
(items k and l apply to synchronous motors only)
1 9 . 3 T H E R M A L ( O V E R L O A D ) P R OT E C T I O N
The majority of winding failures are either indirectly or
directly caused by overloading (either prolonged or
cyclic), operation on unbalanced supply voltage, or single
phasing, which all lead through excessive heating to the
deterioration of the winding insulation until an electrical
fault occurs. The generally accepted rule is that
insulation life is halved for each 10 C rise in
temperature above the rated value, modified by the
length of time spent at the higher temperature. As an
electrical machine has a relatively large heat storage
capacity, it follows that infrequent overloads of short
duration may not adversely affect the machine.
However, sustained overloads of only a few percent may
result in premature ageing and insulation failure.
Furthermore, the thermal withstand capability of the
motor is affected by heating in the winding prior to a
fault. It is therefore important that the relay
characteristic takes account of the extremes of zero and
full-load pre-fault current known respectively as the
'Cold' and 'Hot' conditions.
The variety of motor designs, diverse applications, variety
of possible abnormal operating conditions and resulting
modes of failure result in a complex thermal relationship.
A generic mathematical model that is accurate is
therefore impossible to create. However, it is possible to
develop an approximate model if it is assumed that the
motor is a homogeneous body, creating and dissipating
IR = current which, if flowing continuously, produces

temperature Tmax in the motor
Therefore, it can be shown that, for any overload current
I , the permissible time t for this current to flow is:
1
t = log e
2
1 (I R I )
In general, the supply to which a motor is connected may

contain both positive and negative sequence
components, and both components of current give rise to
heating in the motor. Therefore, the thermal replica
should take into account both of these components, a
typical equation for the equivalent current being:
I eq =
(I
2
1
+ KI 22
where
I1 = positive sequence current
I2 = negative sequence current
and
negative sequence rotor resistance
K = ---------
positive sequence rotor resistance
at rated speed. A typical value of K is 3.
Finally, the thermal replica model needs to take into
account the fact that the motor will tend to cool down
during periods of light load, and the initial state of the
motor. The motor will have a cooling time constant, r ,
that defines the rate of cooling. Hence, the final thermal
model can be expressed as:
338
t = log e k 2 A 2
) (k
Equation 19.1
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 339
1 9 . 4 S TA R T / S TA L L P R OT E C T I O N
= heating time constant
I eq
I th
A 2 = initial state of motor (cold or hot)

Ith = thermal setting current
Equation 19.1 takes into account the cold and hot
characteristics defined in IEC 60255, part 8.
Some relays may use a dual slope characteristic for the
heating time constant, and hence two values of the
heating time constant are required. Switching between
the two values takes place at a pre-defined motor
current. This may be used to obtain better tripping
performance during starting on motors that use a stardelta starter. During starting, the motor windings carry
full line current, while in the run condition, they carry
only 57% of the current seen by the relay. Similarly,
when the motor is disconnected from the supply, the
heating time constant is set equal to the cooling time
constant r.
Since the relay should ideally be matched to the
protected motor and be capable of close sustained
overload protection, a wide range of relay adjustment is
desirable together with good accuracy and low thermal
overshoot.
When a motor is started, it draws a current well in excess

of full load rating throughout the period that the motor
takes to run-up to speed. While the motor starting
current reduces somewhat as motor speed increases, it is
normal in protection practice to assume that the motor
current remains constant throughout the starting period.
The starting current will vary depending on the design of
the motor and method of starting. For motors started
DOL (direct-on-line), the nominal starting current can be
4-8 times full-load current. However, when a star-delta
starter is used, the line current will only be 1
DOL starting current.
3 of the
Should a motor stall whilst running, or fail to start, due

to excessive loading, the motor will draw a current equal
to its locked rotor current. It is not therefore possible to
distinguish between a stall condition and a healthy start
solely on the basis of the current drawn. Discrimination
between the two conditions must be made based on the
duration of the current drawn. For motors where the
starting time is less than the safe stall time of the motor,
protection is easy to arrange.
However, where motors are used to drive high inertia
loads, the stall withstand time can be less than the
starting time. In these cases, an additional means must
be provided to enable discrimination between the two
conditions to be achieved.
where:
Typical relay setting curves are shown in Figure 19.1.

19.4.1 Excessive Start Time/Locked Rotor Protection
100 000
A motor may fail to accelerate from rest for a number of

reasons:
loss of a supply phase
10 000
Te1
=60min
e2
mechanical problems
Te1 Te2=54min
low supply voltage
Te1=T
Te2=48min
1000
T =T =42min
=36min
e1 e2
Operating time (seconds)
100
10
T =T
Te22=30min
Te1=T
Te2=24min
Te1
=12min
Te1 e2=6min
Te1
e2=1min
1
thermal threshold I>
10
Ieq in terms of the current
excessive load torque

etc.
A large current will be drawn from the supply, and cause
extremely high temperatures to be generated within the
motor. This is made worse by the fact that the motor is
not rotating, and hence no cooling due to rotation is
available. Winding damage will occur very quickly
either to the stator or rotor windings depending on the
thermal limitations of the particular design (motors are
said to be stator or rotor limited in this respect). The
method of protection varies depending on whether the
starting time is less than or greater than the safe stall
time. In both cases, initiation of the start may be sensed
by detection of the closure of the switch in the motor
feeder (contactor or CB) and optionally current rising
above a starting current threshold value typically
Figure 19.1: Thermal overload characteristic curves

Cold curves. Initial thermal state 0%
339
19
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 340
200% of motor rated current. For the case of both

conditions being sensed, they may have to occur within
a narrow aperture of time for a start to be recognised.
Special requirements may exist for certain types of
motors installed in hazardous areas (e.g. motors with
type of protection EEx e) and the setting of the relay
must take these into account. Sometimes a permissive
interlock for machine pressurisation (on EEx p
machines) may be required, and this can be conveniently
achieved by use of a relay digital input and the in-built
logic capabilities.
successful start is used to select relay timer used for the

safe run up time. This time can be longer than the safe
stall time, as there is both a (small) decrease in current
drawn by the motor during the start and the rotor fans
begin to improve cooling of the machine as it
accelerates. If a start is sensed by the relay through
monitoring current and/or start device closure, but the
speed switch does not operate, the relay element uses
the safe stall time setting to trip the motor before
damage can occur. Figure 19.3(a) illustrates the principle
of operation for a successful start, and Figure 19.3(b) for
an unsuccessful start.
19.4.1.1 Start time < safe stall time

Protection is achieved by use of a definite time
overcurrent characteristic, the current setting being
greater than full load current but less than the starting
current of the machine. The time setting should be a
little longer than the start time, but less than the
permitted safe starting time of the motor. Figure 19.2
illustrates the principle of operation for a successful
start.
Figure 19.3. Relay settings

for start time> stall time
1
CB Closed
Current
Speed
Switch
Information
Trip
Command
Time
1
0
Time
1
0
Time
1
0
CB Closed
Figure10019.2. Relay setting for successful start: start

time<stall time
Current
Speed
Switch
Information
Trip
Command
Relay current setting

Motor starting current
Relay time setting
1
0
Time
1
0
1
0
Stall time
setting
Time
Time
10
(b) Unsuccessful start

Figure 19.3: Motor start protection
Start time > Safe stall time
Time (s)
(a) Successful start
19.4.2 Stall Protection

Should a motor stall when running or be unable to start
because of excessive load, it will draw a current from the
supply equivalent to the locked rotor current. It is
obviously desirable to avoid damage by disconnecting
the machine as quickly as possible if this condition
arises.
19
0.1
0.1
1
Current (p.u. )
10
Figure 19.2: Motor start protection

start time < safe stall time
19.4.1.2 Start time => safe stall time

For this condition, a definite time overcurrent
characteristic by itself is not sufficient, since the time
delay required is longer than the maximum time that the
motor can be allowed to carry starting current safely. An
additional means of detection of rotor movement,
indicating a safe start, is required. A speed-sensing
switch usually provides this function. Detection of a
Motor stalling can be recognised by the motor current

exceeding the start current threshold after a successful
start i.e. a motor start has been detected and the motor
current has dropped below the start current threshold
within the motor safe start time. A subsequent rise in
motor current above the motor starting current
threshold is then indicative of a stall condition, and
tripping will occur if this condition persists for greater
than the setting of the stall timer. An instantaneous
overcurrent relay element provides protection.
In many systems, transient supply voltage loss (typically
up to 2 seconds) does not result in tripping of designated
motors. They are allowed to re-accelerate upon
restoration of the supply. During re-acceleration, they
340
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 341
Motor start detection
0
Time
No. of starts
0
Time
Supervising time
Supervising time
Start lockout
0
Time
Inhib. start time
Figure 19.4: Start lockout information.
draw a current similar to the starting current for a period

that may be several seconds. It is thus above the motor
stall relay element current threshold. The stall
protection would be expected to operate and defeat the
object of the re-acceleration scheme.
A motor protection relay will therefore recognise the
presence of a voltage dip and recovery, and inhibit stall
protection for a defined period. The undervoltage
protection element (Section 19.11) can be used to detect
the presence of the voltage dip and inhibit stall
protection for a set period after voltage recovery.
Protection against stalled motors in case of an
unsuccessful re-acceleration is therefore maintained.
The time delay setting is dependent on the reacceleration scheme adopted and the characteristics of
individual motors. It should be established after
performing a transient stability study for the reacceleration scheme proposed.
19.4.3 Number of Starts Limitation

Any motor has a restriction on the number of starts that
are allowed in a defined period without the permitted
winding, etc. temperatures being exceeded. Starting
should be blocked if the permitted number of starts is
exceeded. The situation is complicated by the fact the
number of permitted hot starts in a given period is less
than the number of cold starts, due to the differing
initial temperatures of the motor. The relay must
maintain a separate count of cold and hot starts. By
making use of the data held in the motor thermal replica,
hot and cold starts can be distinguished.
To allow the motor to cool down between starts, a time
delay may be specified between consecutive starts (again
distinguishing between hot and cold starts). The start
inhibit is released after a time determined by the motor
specification. The overall protection function is illustrated
in Figure 19.4.
341
19
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:42
Page 342
1 9 . 5 S H O R T- C I R C U I T P R OT E C T I O N
Motor short-circuit protection is often provided to cater

for major stator winding faults and terminal flashovers.
Because of the relatively greater amount of insulation
between phase windings, faults between phases seldom
occur. As the stator windings are completely enclosed in
grounded metal, the fault would very quickly involve
earth, which would then operate the instantaneous earth
fault protection. A single definite time overcurrent relay
element is all that is required for this purpose, set to
about 125% of motor starting current. The time delay is
required to prevent spurious operation due to CT spill
currents, and is typically set at 100ms. If the motor is fed
from a fused contactor, co-ordination is required with
the fuse, and this will probably involve use of a long time
delay for the relay element. Since the object of the
protection is to provide rapid fault clearance to minimise
damage caused by the fault, the protection is effectively
worthless in these circumstances. It is therefore only
provided on motors fed via circuit breakers.
19
Differential (unit) protection may be provided on larger HV

motors fed via circuit breakers to protect against phasephase and phase-earth faults, particularly where the
power system is resistance-earthed. Damage to the motor
in case of a fault occurring is minimised, as the differential
protection can be made quite sensitive and hence detects
faults in their early stages. The normal definite time
overcurrent protection would not be sufficiently sensitive,
and sensitive earth fault protection may not be provided.
The user may wish to avoid the detailed calculations
required of capacitance current in order to set sensitive
non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection
correctly on HV systems (Chapter 9) or there may be no
provision for a VT to allow application of directional
sensitive earth fault protection. There is still a lower limit
to the setting that can be applied, due to spill currents
from CT saturation during starting, while on some motors,
neutral current has been found to flow during starting,
even with balanced supply voltages, that would cause the
differential protection to operate. For details on the
application of differential protection, refer to Chapter 10.
However, non-directional earth fault overcurrent
protection will normally be cheaper in cases where
adequate sensitivity can be provided.
It is common, however, to provide both instantaneous

and time-delayed relay elements to cater for major and
slowly developing faults.
19.6.1 Solidly-Earthed System

Most LV systems fall into this category, for reasons of
personnel safety. Two types of earth fault protection are
commonly found depending on the sensitivity required.
For applications where a sensitivity of > 20% of motor
continuous rated current is acceptable, conventional
earth fault protection using the residual CT connection
of Figure 19.5 can be used. A lower limit is imposed on
the setting by possible load unbalance and/or (for HV
systems) system capacitive currents.
Figure 19.5.
protection
Residual CT connection for earth fault
c
a
b
c
Flow of
current
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ia+Ib+Ic
MiCOM
P241
Downstream
Figure 19.5: Residual CT connection
for earth fault protection
Care must be taken to ensure that the relay does not

operate from the spill current resulting from unequal CT
saturation during motor starting, where the high
currents involved will almost certainly saturate the
motor CTs. It is common to use a stabilising resistor in
series with the relay, with the value being calculated
using the formula:
1 9 . 6 E A R T H F A U LT P R OT E C T I O N
R stab =
One of the most common faults to occur on a motor is a

stator winding fault. Whatever the initial form of the
fault (phase-phase, etc.) or the cause (cyclic overheating,
etc.), the presence of the surrounding metallic frame and
casing will ensure that it rapidly develops into a fault
involving earth. Therefore, provision of earth fault
protection is very important. The type and sensitivity of
protection provided depends largely on the system
earthing, so the various types will be dealt with in turn.
Upstream
a
where:
Ist
I0
Rstab
Rct
Rl
342
I st
IO
( Rct
+ kR l + R r
Equation 19.2
= starting current referred to CT secondary

= relay earth fault setting (A)
= stabilising resistor value (ohms)
= d.c. resistance of CT secondary (ohms)
= CT single lead restistance (ohms)
20/06/02
10:42
Page 343
k = CT connection factor
(= 1 for star pt at CT
= 2 for star pt at relay)
Rr = relay input restistance (ohms)
The effect of the stabilising resistor is to increase the
effective setting of the relay under these conditions, and
hence delay tripping. When a stabilising resistor is used,
the tripping characteristic should normally be
instantaneous. An alternative technique, avoiding the use
of a stabilising resistor is to use a definite time delay
characteristic. The time delay used will normally have to
be found by trial and error, as it must be long enough to
prevent maloperation during a motor start, but short
enough to provide effective protection in case of a fault.
If a more sensitive relay setting is required, it is necessary

to use a core-balance CT. This is a ring type CT, through
which all phases of the supply to the motor are passed,
plus the neutral on a four-wire system. The turns ratio
of the CT is no longer related to the normal line current
expected to flow, so can be chosen to optimise the pickup current required. Magnetising current requirements
are also reduced, with only a single CT core to be
magnetised instead of three, thus enabling low settings
to be used. Figure 19.7 illustrates the application of a
core-balance CT, including the routing of the cable
sheath to ensure correct operation in case of core-sheath
cable faults.
Cable gland
Co-ordination with other devices must also be considered.

A common means of supplying a motor is via a fused
contactor. The contactor itself is not capable of breaking
fault current beyond a certain value, which will normally be
below the maximum system fault current reliance is
placed on the fuse in these circumstances. As a trip
command from the relay instructs the contactor to open,
care must be taken to ensure that this does not occur until
the fuse has had time to operate. Figure 19.6(a) illustrates
incorrect grading of the relay with the fuse, the relay
operating first for a range of fault currents in excess of the
contactor breaking capacity. Figure 19.6(b) illustrates
correct grading. To achieve this, it may require the use of
an intentional definite time delay in the relay.
Cable box
Cable gland /sheath

ground connection
SEF
(a) Connection
Chap19-336-351
No operation
SEF
(b) Incorrect wiring
Time
Fuse
Contactor
breaking
capacity
E/F relay
Current
(a) Incorrect
Operation
SEF
(c) Correct wiring
Time
Fuse
Figure 19.7: Application of core-balance CT
Contactor
breaking
capacity
E/F relay
Current
(b) Correct
19.6.2 Resistance-Earthed Systems

These are commonly found on HV systems, where the
intention is to limit damage caused by earth faults
through limiting the earth fault current that can flow.
Two methods of resistance earthing are commonly used:
Figure 19.6: Grading of relay with fused contactor
343
19
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:46
Page 344
19.6.2.1 Low resistance earthing

In this method, the value of resistance is chosen to limit
the fault current to a few hundred amps values of
200A-400A being typical. With a residual connection of
line CTs, the minimum sensitivity possible is about 10%
of CT rated primary current, due to the possibility of CT
saturation during starting. For a core-balance CT, the
sensitivity that is possible using a simple non-directional

earth fault relay element is limited to three times the
steady-state charging current of the feeder. The setting
should not be greater than about 30% of the minimum
earth fault current expected. Other than this, the
considerations in respect of settings and time delays are
as for solidly earthed systems.
Ia1
Ib1
IR1
-jXc1
IH1
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
-jXc2
IH2
19
Ia3
Ib3
IH1+IH2+IH3
IR3
-jXc3
IR3=IH1+ IH2+ IH3-IH3:IR3= IH1+ IH2

IH3
IH1+IH2
Figure 19.8: Current distribution in insulated-earth system for phase-earth fault

344
20/06/02
10:46
Page 345
19.6.2.2 High resistance earthing

In some HV systems, high resistance earthing is used to
limit the earth fault current to a few amps. In this case,
the system capacitive charging current will normally
prevent conventional sensitive earth fault protection
being applied, as the magnitude of the charging current
will be comparable with the earth fault current in the
event of a fault. The solution is to use a sensitive
directional earth fault relay. A core balance CT is used in
conjunction with a VT measuring the residual voltage of
the system, with a relay characteristic angle setting of
+45 (see Chapter 9 for details). The VT must be suitable
for the relay and therefore the relay manufacturer should
be consulted over suitable types some relays require
that the VT must be able to carry residual flux and this
rules out use of a 3-limb, 3-phase VT. A setting of 125%
of the single phase capacitive charging current for the
whole system is possible using this method. The time
delay used is not critical but must be fast enough to
disconnect equipment rapidly in the event of a second
earth fault occurring immediately after the first.
Minimal damage is caused by the first fault, but the
second effectively removes the current limiting
resistance from the fault path leading to very large fault
currents.
applying earth faults at various parts of the system and

measuring the resulting residual currents.
If it is possible to set the relay to a value between the
charging current on the feeder being protected and the
charging current for the rest of the system, the
directional facility is not required and the VT can be
dispensed with.
The comments made in earlier sections on grading with
fused contactors also apply.
Vaf
Restrain
IR1
Ib1
Operate
Ia1
Vbf
Vcpf
Vbpf
Vres
(=-3V
Vo)
An alternative technique using residual voltage detection

is also possible, and is described in the next section.
An RCA setting of +90 shifts

the MTA to here
IR3
H1+ IH2)
Figure 19.9: Relay vector diagram
19.6.3 Insulated Earth System

Earth fault detection presents problems on these systems
since no earth fault current flows for a single earth fault.
However, detection is still essential as overvoltages occur
on sound phases and it is necessary to locate and clear
the fault before a second occurs. Two methods are
possible, detection of the resulting unbalance in system
charging currents and residual overvoltage.
19.6.3.1 System charging current unbalance
Sensitive earth fault protection using a core-balance CT
is required for this scheme. The principle is that detailed
in Section 9.16.2, except that the voltage is phase shifted
by +90 instead of -90. To illustrate this, Figure 19.8
shows the current distribution in an Insulated system
subjected to a C-phase to earth fault and Figure 19.9 the
relay vector diagram for this condition. The residual
current detected by the relay is the sum of the charging
currents flowing in the healthy part of the system plus
the healthy phase charging currents on the faulted
feeder i.e. three times the per phase charging current
of the healthy part of the system. A relay setting of 30%
of this value can be used to provide protection without
the risk of a trip due to healthy system capacitive
charging currents. As there is no earth fault current, it is
also possible to set the relay at site after deliberately
Vapf
Chap19-336-351
19.6.3.2 Residual voltage method

A single earth fault results in a rise in the voltage
between system neutral and earth, which may be
detected by a relay measuring the residual voltage of the
system (normally zero for a perfectly balanced, healthy
system). Thus, no CTs are required, and the technique
may be useful where provision of an extensive number of
core-balance CTs is impossible or difficult, due to
physical constraints or on cost grounds. The VTs used
must be suitable for the duty, thus 3-limb, 3-phase VTs
are not suitable, and the relay usually has alarm and trip
settings, each with adjustable time delays. The setting
voltage must be calculated from knowledge of system
earthing and impedances, an example for a resistanceearthed system is shown in Figure 19.10.
Grading of the relays must be carried out with care, as
the residual voltage will be detected by all relays in the
affected section of the system. Grading has to be carried
out with this in mind, and will generally be on a time
basis for providing alarms (1st stage), with a high set
definite time trip second stage to provide backup.
345
19
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:46
Page 346
19.6.4 Petersen Coil Earthed System
loading, loss of a single phase, or single-phase faults.

The latter will normally be detected by earth fault
protection, however, a fault location in a motor winding
may not result in the earth fault protection operating
unless it is of the sensitive variety.
Earthing of a HV power system using a reactor equal to

the system shunt capacitance is known as Petersen Coil
(or resonant coil) earthing. With this method, a single
earth fault results in zero earth fault current flowing (for
perfect balance between the earthing inductance and
system shunt capacitance), and hence the system can be
run in this state for a substantial period of time while the
fault is located and corrected. The detailed theory and
protection method is explained in Section 9.17.
The actual value of the negative sequence current

depends on the degree of unbalance in the supply voltage
and the ratio of the negative to the positive sequence
impedance of the machine. The degree of unbalance
depends on many factors, but the negative sequence
impedance is more easily determined. Considering the
classical induction motor equivalent circuit with
magnetising impedance neglected of Figure 19.11:
19.7 NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE PROTECTION

Negative phase sequence current is generated from any
unbalanced voltage condition, such as unbalanced
A-G
S
S
A-G
A-G
G,F
V
B-G
C-G
G,F
G,F
V
C-G
B-G
C-G
B-G
19
V
RES
RES
B-G
A-G
C-G
C-G
Z
RES
A-G
SO
2Z
S1
+Z
SO
+3Z
+2Z
L1
B-G
A-G
B-G
RES
C-G
x3E
+Z
LO
+3Z
Figure 19.10: Residual voltage earth fault protection for resistance-earthed system.
346
20/06/02
10:46
Page 347
Motor positive sequence impedance at slip s
= R1 p + R 2' p
(2 s )
) (
2
+ X 1 p + X 2' p
leading to excessive heating. For the same motor,

negative sequence voltages in excess of 17% will result
in a negative sequence current larger than rated full load
current.
0.5
Negative sequence current is at twice supply frequency.

Skin effect in the rotor means that the heating effect in
the rotor of a given negative sequence current is larger
than the same positive sequence current. Thus, negative
sequence current may result in rapid heating of the
motor. Larger motors are more susceptible in this
respect, as the rotor resistance of such machines tends to
be higher. Protection against negative sequence currents
is therefore essential.
Hence, at standstill (s=1.0), impedance
= R1 p + R 2' p
) + (X
2
1p
+ X 2' p
0.5
The motor negative sequence impedance at slip s
= R1n + R 2' n s
) + (X
2
1n
+ X 2' n
0.5
and, at normal running speed, the impedance
= R1n + R 2' n 2
) + (X
2
1n
+ X 2' n
Modern motor protection relays have a negative

sequence current measurement capability, in order to
provide such protection. The level of negative sequence
unbalance depends largely upon the type of fault. For
loss of a single phase at start, the negative sequence
current will be 50% of the normal starting current. It is
more difficult to provide an estimate of the negative
sequence current if loss of a phase occurs while running.
This is because the impact on the motor may vary widely,
from increased heating to stalling due to the reduced
torque available.
0.5
where:
suffix p indicates positive sequence quantities
and
suffix n indicates negative sequence quantities
R1 + R '2
j(X1 + X '2)
[(1-s)/s] x R'2
(a) Positive phase sequence equivalent circuit
R1 + R '2
j(X1 + X'2)
[(s-1)/(2-s)] x R '2
(b) Negative phase sequence equivalent circuit

Figure 19.11: Induction motor equivalent circuit
Now, if resistance is neglected (justifiable as the

resistance is small compared to the reactance), it can be
seen that the negative sequence reactance at running
speed is approximately equal to the positive sequence
reactance at standstill. An alternative more meaningful
way of expressing this is:
1 9 . 8 F A U LT S I N R OTO R W I N D I N G S
positive seq. impedance starting current

---------- = ---------
negative seq. impedance
rated current
and it is noted that a typical LV motor starting current is
6xFLC. Therefore, a 5% negative sequence voltage (due
to, say, unbalanced loads on the system) would produce
a 30% negative sequence current in the machine,
A typical setting for negative sequence current

protection must take into account the fact that the
motor circuit protected by the relay may not be the
source of the negative sequence current. Time should be
allowed for the appropriate protection to clear the
source of the negative sequence current without
introducing risk of overheating to the motor being
considered. This indicates a two stage tripping
characteristic, similar in principle to overcurrent
protection. A low-set definite time-delay element can
be used to provide an alarm, with an IDMT element used
to trip the motor in the case of higher levels of negative
sequence current, such as loss-of-phase conditions at
start, occurring. Typical settings might be 20% of CT
rated primary current for the definite time element and
50% for the IDMT element. The IDMT time delay has to
be chosen to protect the motor while, if possible, grading
with other negative sequence relays on the system.
Some relays may not incorporate two elements, in which
case the single element should be set to protect the
motor, with grading being a secondary consideration.
On wound rotor machines, some degree of protection

against faults in the rotor winding can be given by an
instantaneous stator current overcurrent relay element.
As the starting current is normally limited by resistance
to a maximum of twice full load, the instantaneous unit
can safely be set to about three times full load if a slight
347
Chap19-336-351
19
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:46
Page 348
time delay of approximately 30 milliseconds is

incorporated. It should be noted that faults occurring in
the rotor winding would not be detected by any
differential protection applied to the stator.
1 9 . 9 R T D T E M P E R AT U R E D E T E C T I O N
RTDs are used to measure temperatures of motor
windings or shaft bearings. A rise in temperature may
denote overloading of the machine, or the beginning of
a fault in the affected part. A motor protection relay will
therefore usually have the capability of accepting a
number of RTD inputs and internal logic to initiate an
alarm and/or trip when the temperature exceeds the
appropriate setpoint(s). Occasionally, HV motors are fed
via a unit transformer, and in these circumstances, some
of the motor protection relay RTD inputs may be
assigned to the transformer winding temperature RTDs,
thus providing overtemperature protection for the
transformer without the use of a separate relay.
1 9 . 10 B E A R I N G F A I L U R E S
19
There are two types of bearings to be considered: the

anti-friction bearing (ball or roller), used mainly on small
motors (up to around 350kW), and the sleeve bearing,
used mainly on large motors.
The failure of ball or roller bearings usually occurs very
quickly, causing the motor to come to a standstill as
pieces of the damaged roller get entangled with the
others. There is therefore very little chance that any
relay operating from the input current can detect
bearing failures of this type before the bearing is
completely destroyed. Therefore, protection is limited to
disconnecting the stalled motor rapidly to avoid
consequential damage. Refer to Section 19.2 on stall
protection for details of suitable protection.
Failure of a sleeve bearing can be detected by means of
a rise in bearing temperature. The normal thermal
overload relays cannot give protection to the bearing
itself but will operate to protect the motor from
excessive damage. Use of RTD temperature detection, as
noted in Section 19.9, can provide suitable protection,
allowing investigation into the cause of the bearing
running hot prior to complete failure.
Motors fed by contactors have inherent undervoltage

protection, unless a latched contactor is used. Where a
specific undervoltage trip is required, a definite time
undervoltage element is used. If two elements are
provided, alarm and trip settings can be used. An
interlock with the motor starter is required to block relay
operation when the starting device is open, otherwise a
start will never be permitted. The voltage and time delay
settings will be system and motor dependent. They must
allow for all voltage dips likely to occur on the system
during transient faults, starting of motors, etc. to avoid
spurious trips. As motor starting can result in a voltage
depression to 80% of nominal, the voltage setting is
likely to be below this value. Re-acceleration is normally
possible for voltage dips lasting between 0.5-2 seconds,
depending on system, motor and drive characteristics,
and therefore the time delay will be set bearing these
factors in mind.
1 9 . 1 2 L O S S - O F - L O A D P R OT E C T I O N
Loss-of-load protection has a number of possible
functions. It can be used to protect a pump against
becoming unprimed, or to stop a motor in case of a
failure in a mechanical transmission (e.g. conveyor belt),
or it can be used with synchronous motors to protect
against loss-of-supply conditions. Implementation of
the function is by a low forward power relay element,
interlocked with the motor starting device to prevent
operation when the motor is tripped and thus preventing
a motor start. Where starting is against a very low load
(e.g. a compressor), the function may also need to be
inhibited for the duration of the start, to prevent
maloperation.
The setting will be influenced by the function to be
performed by the relay. A time delay may be required
after pickup of the element to prevent operation during
system transients. This is especially important for
synchronous motor loss-of supply protection.
1 9 . 1 3 A D D I T I O N A L P R OT E C T I O N
F O R S Y N C H R O N O U S M OTO R S
The differences in construction and operational
characteristics of synchronous motors mean that
additional protection is required for these types of motor.
This additional protection is discussed in the following
sections.
1 9 . 11 U N D E R V O LTA G E P R OT E C T I O N
19.13.1 Out-of-Step Protection
Motors may stall when subjected to prolonged

undervoltage conditions. Transient undervoltages will
generally allow a motor to recover when the voltage is
restored, unless the supply is weak.
A synchronous motor may decelerate and lose

synchronism (fall out-of-step) if a mechanical overload
exceeding the peak motor torque occurs. Other
conditions that may cause this condition are a fall in the
348
20/06/02
10:46
Page 349
applied voltage to stator or field windings. Such a fall

may not need to be prolonged, a voltage dip of a few
seconds may be all that is required. An out-of-step
condition causes the motor to draw excessive current
and generate a pulsating torque. Even if the cause is
removed promptly, the motor will probably not recover
synchronism, but eventually stall. Hence, it must be
disconnected from the supply.
The current drawn during an out-of-step condition is at
a very low power factor. Hence a relay element that
responds to low power factor can be used to provide
protection. The element must be inhibited during
starting, when a similar low power factor condition
occurs. This can conveniently be achieved by use of a
definite time delay, set to a value slightly in excess of the
motor start time.
A low forward power relay can detect this condition. See

Section 19.12 for details. A time delay will be required
to prevent operation during system transients leading to
momentary reverse power flow in the motor.
1 9 . 1 4 M OTO R P R OT E C T I O N E X A M P L E S
This section gives examples of the protection of HV and
LV induction motors.
19.14.1 Protection of a HV Motor
Table 19.2 gives relevant parameters of a HV induction
motor to be protected. Using a MiCOM P241 motor
protection relay, the important protection settings are
calculated in the following sections.
The power factor setting will vary depending on the rated

power factor of the motor. It would typically be 0.1 less
than the motor rated power factor i.e. for a motor rated
at 0.85 power factor, the setting would be 0.75.
Quantity
19.13.2 Protection against

Sudden Restoration of Supply
If the supply to a synchronous motor is interrupted, it
is essential that the motor breaker be tripped as quickly
as possible if there is any possibility of the supply
being restored automatically or without the machine
operators knowledge.
This is necessary in order to prevent the supply being
restored out of phase with the motor generated voltage.
Two methods are generally used to detect this condition,
in order to cover different operating modes of the motor.
19.13.2.1 Underfrequency protection
The underfrequency relay element will operate in the
case of the supply failing when the motor is on load,
which causes the motor to decelerate quickly. Typically,
two elements are provided, for alarm and trip
indications.
The underfrequency setting value needs to consider the
power system characteristics. In some power systems,
lengthy periods of operation at frequencies substantially
below normal occur, and should not result in a motor
trip. The minimum safe operating frequency of the
motor under load conditions must therefore be
determined, along with minimum system frequency.
19.13.2.2 Low-forward-power protection
This can be applied in conjunction with a time delay to
detect a loss-of-supply condition when the motor may
share a busbar with other loads. The motor may attempt
to supply the other loads with power from the stored
kinetic energy of rotation.
Value
Rated output
Rated Voltage
Rated frequency
Rated power factor/efficiency
Stall withstand time cold/hot
Starting current
1000kW CMR
3.3kV
50Hz
0.9/0.92
20/7s
550% DOL
Permitted starts cold/hot

CT ratio
Start time@100% voltage
Start time@ 80% voltage
Heating/cooling time constant
System earthing
Control device
3/2
250/1
4s
5.5s
25/75 min
Solid
Circuit Breaker
Chap19-336-351
Table 19.2: Motor data for example
19.14.1.1 Thermal protection

The current setting ITH is set equal to the motor full load
current, as it is a CMR rated motor. Motor full load
current can be calculated as 211A, therefore (in
secondary quantities):
I TH =
211
250
= 0.844
Use a value of 0.85, nearest available setting.

The relay has a parameter, K, to allow for the increased
heating effect of negative sequence currents. In the
absence of any specific information, use K=3.
Two thermal heating time constants are provided, 1 and
2. 2 is used for starting methods other than DOL,
otherwise it is set equal to 1. 1 is set to the heating
time constant, hence 1=2=25mins. Cooling time
constant r is set as a multiple of 1. With a cooling time
constant of 75mins,
349
r = 3 x 1
19
Chap19-336-351
20/06/02
10:46
Page 350
19.14.1.2 Short circuit protection

Following the recommendations of Section 19.5, with a
starting current of 550% of full load current, the shortcircuit element is set to 1.25 x 5.5 x 211A = 1450A. In
terms of the relay nominal current, the setting value is
1450/250 = 5.8IN.
resulting characteristic is shown in Figure 19.13. The

motor thermal protection, as it utilises a negative
sequence component, is used for protection of the motor
at low levels of negative sequence current.
Cold Thermal
Hot Thermal
S/C
Locked Rotor
Stall
Start Current (100%V)
Start Current (80%V)
There is a minimum time delay of 100ms for currents up

to 120% of setting to allow for transient CT saturation
during starting and 40ms above this current value. These
settings are satisfactory.
It is assumed that no CBCT is fitted. A typical setting of

30% of motor rated current is used, leading to an
earth fault relay setting of 0.3 x 211/250 = 0.25IN. A
stabilising resistor is required, calculated in accordance
with Equation 19.2 to prevent maloperation due to CT
spill current during starting as the CTs may saturate.
With the stabilising resistor present, instantaneous
tripping is permitted.
100
The current element must be set in excess of the rated

current of the motor, but well below the starting current
of the motor to ensure that a start condition is
recognised (this could also be achieved by use of an
auxiliary contact on the motor CB wired to the relay). A
setting of 500A (2 x IN) is suitable. The associated time
delay needs to be set to longer than the start time, but
less than the cold stall time. Use a value of 15s.
19
The same current setting as for locked rotor protection

can be used 500A. The time delay has to be less than
the hot stall time of 7s but greater than the start time by
a sufficient margin to avoid a spurious trip if the start
time happens to be a little longer than anticipated. Use
a value of 6.5s.
Time (sec)
10
1
0.1
0.01
The alternative is to omit the stabilising resistor and use

a definite time delay in association with the earth fault
element. However, the time delay must be found by trial
and error during commissioning.
Motor tripping characteristics.
1000
19.14.1.3 earth fault protection
0.01
1
Ith/I (pu)
10
Figure 19.12: Protection characteristics

for motor protection example
19.14.1.4 Locked rotor/Excessive start time protection
Time (sec)
10
0.1
19.14.1.5 Stall protection
10
The protection characteristics for Sections 19.14.1.1-5

19.14.1.6 Negative phase sequence protection
Two protection elements are provided, the first is definite
time-delayed to provide an alarm. The second is an IDMT
element used to trip the motor on high levels of negative
sequence current, such as would occur on a loss of phase
condition at starting.
In accordance with Section 19.7, use a setting of 20%
with a time delay of 30s for the definite time element
and 50% with a TMS of 1.0 for the IDMT element. The
Current (A)
10000
Figure 19.13: Motor protection examplenegative sequence protection characteristic
19.14.1.7 Other protection considerations

If the relay can be supplied with a suitable voltage signal,
stall protection can be inhibited during re-acceleration
after a voltage dip using the undervoltage element (set to
80-85% of rated voltage). Undervoltage protection (set
to approximately 80% voltage with a time delay of up to
several seconds, dependent on system characteristics)
and reverse phase protection can also be implemented to
provide extra protection. Unless the drive is critical to the
process, it is not justifiable to provide a VT specially to
enable these features to be implemented.
19.14.2 Protection of an LV Motor
LV motors are commonly fed via fused contactors and
therefore the tripping times of a protection relay for
350
20/06/02
10:46
Page 351
overcurrent must be carefully co-ordinated with the fuse

to ensure that the contactor does not attempt to break a
current in excess of its rating. Table 19.3(a) gives details
of an LV motor and associated fused contactor. A
MiCOM P211 motor protection relay is used to provide
the protection.
Unit
In = motor rated primary current

Ip = CT primary current
Hence, Ib = 5 x 132/150 = 4.4A
With a motor starting current of 670% of nominal, a
setting of the relay thermal time constant with motor
initial thermal state of 50% of 15s is found satisfactory,
as shown in Figure 19.14.
V
kW
kVA
A
%
s
A
A
A
250A
Contactor
P211
CT
Cable
Unit
A
s
%
s
s
M
(a) LV Motor Protection - contactor fed example
1000
100
Time
Parameter
Value
Standard
IEC 60034
Motor Voltage
400
Motor kW
75
Motor kVA
91.45
Motor FLC
132
Starting Current
670
Starting Time
4.5
Contactor rating
300
Contactor breaking capacity
650
Fuse rating
250
(a) LV motor example data
Parameter
Symbol
Value
Overcurrent
Disabled
Overload setting
Ib
4.4
Overload time delay
I>t
15
Unbalance
I2
20
Unbalance time delay
I2>t
25
Loss of phase time delay
<Ip
5
(b) Relay settings
Table 19.3: LV Motor protection setting example
where
Chap19-336-351
19.14.2.1 CT ratio
10
The relay is set in secondary quantities, and therefore a

suitable CT ratio has to be calculated. From the relay
manual, a CT with 5A secondary rating and a motor rated
current in the range of 4-6A when referred to the
secondary of CT is required. Use of a 150/5A CT gives a
motor rated current of 4.4A when referred to the CT
secondary, so use this CT ratio.
4
I/IIb
(b) Relay trip characteristic
trip time
start current
Figure 19.14: Motor protection example contactor-fed motor
19.14.2.2 Overcurrent (short-circuit) protection

The fuse provides the motor overcurrent protection, as the
protection relay cannot be allowed to trip the contactor on
overcurrent in case the current to be broken exceeds the
contactor breaking capacity. The facility for overcurrent
protection within the relay is therefore disabled.
19.14.2.3 Thermal (overload) protection
The motor is an existing one, and no data exists for it
except the standard data provided in the manufacturers
catalogue. This data does not include the thermal
(heating) time constant of the motor.
In these circumstances, it is usual to set the thermal
protection so that it lies just above the motor starting
current.
The current setting of the relay, Ib , is found using the
formula
Ib = 5 x In/Ip
19.14.2.4 Negative sequence

(phase unbalance) protection
The motor is built to IEC standards, which permit a
negative sequence (unbalance) voltage of 1% on a
continuous basis. This would lead to approximately 7%
negative sequence current in the motor (Section 19.7).
As the relay is fitted only with a definite time relay
element, a setting of 20% (from Section 19.7) is
appropriate, with a time delay of 25s to allow for short
high-level negative sequence transients arising from
other causes.
19.14.2.5 Loss of phase protection
The relay has a separate element for this protection. Loss
of a phase gives rise to large negative sequence currents,
and therefore a much shorter time delay is required. A
definite time delay of 5s is considered appropriate.
The relay settings are summarised in Table 19.3(b).
351
19
Chap20-352-369
22/06/02
10:27
20
Page 352
Protection of A.C.
Electrified Railways
Introduction
20.1
Protection philosophy
20.2
Classical single-phase feeding
20.3
Catenary thermal protection
20.4
Catenary backup protection
20.5
Autotransformer feeding
20.6
Feeder substation protection
20.7
Example of classical system protection
20.8
Chap20-352-369
22/06/02
10:28
Page 353
20 P rotection of A.C.
Electrified Railways
20.1 INTRODUCTION
Many regional, urban and high-speed inter-urban rail
networks worldwide are electrified, to provide the
motive power for trains (Figure 20.1).
Figure 20.1: Modern high-speed a.c. electric

inter-urban train
The electrification system serves as the contact interface

for current collection by each train, and in a.c. electrified
railways as the means to distribute power. In general,
one of two philosophies are followed: an overhead
catenary above the track, with power collection by a
pantograph; or conductor-rail electrification, with
current collection via contact shoes on a surface of a
special metallic conductor laid close to the running rails.
The latter arrangement is most commonly used for d.c.
traction, while the former arrangement is used for a.c.
and d.c. traction. Some rail routes have dual overhead
and conductor-rail electrification to facilitate route
sharing by different rail operators.
Overhead catenaries are generally considered to be safer,
as they are above the track, out of reach of rail personnel
and the public. They are the only way in which a traction
feed at high voltages can be engineered. They provide a
single-phase a.c. supply with a voltage in the range of
11kV-50kV with respect to the running rails, although
1.5kV and 3kV d.c. catenaries are predominant in some
353
Chap20-352-369
22/06/02
10:28
Page 354
countries. When a conductor-rail system is used, the

supply voltage is generally 600V to 1700V d.c.
This Chapter covers protection associated with HV
overhead a.c. catenary electrification. Due to the nature
of many rail routes and the limited electrical clearances
(especially where an existing non-electrified route is to
be electrified), catenary faults are common. A typical
fault rate is one fault per year per route kilometre of
track. The relatively high fault rate, coupled with the
high mechanical tension in the contact wire (typically 620kN) demands fast fault clearance. Should a fault not
be cleared quickly, the conductors that form the catenary
may break due to intense overheating, with the
consequent risk of further severe damage caused by
moving trains and lengthy disruption to train services.
become the standard. Figure 20.2 illustrates classical

25kV feeding with booster transformers (BT). The
booster transformers are used to force the traction
return current to flow in an aerially mounted return
conductor, anchored to the back of the supporting masts
(Figure 20.3). This arrangement limits traction current
returning through the rails and earth in a large crosssectional loop, thereby reducing electromagnetic
interference with adjacent telecommunication circuits.
A step-down transformer connected phase to phase
across the Utility grid is generally the source of the
traction supply. The electrical feed to the train is via the
overhead catenary, with the return current flowing via
the rails and then through the return conductor.
Supply
transformer
P rotection of A.C. Electrified Railways
20.2 PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY
20
The application of protection to electrical power

transmission schemes is biased towards security whilst
ensuring dependability only for the most severe faults within
the protected circuit. Being too adventurous with the
application of remote back-up protection should be avoided,
since the consequences of unwanted tripping are serious.
Path of traction current

BT
Return conductor
BT
Catenary
25kV
(nominal)
Rails
In the case of electrified railways, there is a high

probability that sustained electrical faults of any type
(high resistance, remote breaker/protection failure etc.)
may be associated with overhead wire damage or a
faulty traction unit. Fallen live wires caused by
mechanical damage or accident represent a greater
safety hazard with railways, due to the higher probability
of people being close by (railway personnel working on
the track, or passengers). Traction unit faults are a fire
hazard and a safety risk to passengers, especially in
tunnels. For these reasons, there will be a bias towards
dependability of back-up protection at the expense of
security. The consequences of an occasional unwanted
trip are far more acceptable (the control centre simply
recloses the tripped CB, some trains are delayed while
the control centre ensures it is safe to reclose) than the
consequences of a failure to trip for a fallen wire or a
traction unit fault.
BT: Booster transformer

Figure 20.2: Classical 25kV feeding with
booster transformers
Figure 20.3: Classical overhead line construction
20.3 CLASSICAL SINGLE-PHASE FEEDING

Classical single-phase a.c. railway electrification has been
used since the 1920s. Earlier systems used low frequency
supplies and in many countries, electrification systems
using 162/3Hz and 25Hz supplies are in use. The cost of
conversion of an extensive network, with a requirement
for through working of locomotives, throughout the
necessary changeover period, is usually prohibitive.
Starting from Western Europe and with the influence
spreading worldwide, single-phase a.c. electrification at
the standard power system frequency of 50/60Hz, has
As the running rails are bonded to earth at regular

intervals, they are nominally at earth potential. A singlepole circuit breaker is all that is required to disconnect
the supply to the catenary in the event of a fault.
20.3.1 Classical System - Feeding Diagram

In practice, single-track railway lines are rare, and two or
four parallel tracks are more common. The overhead line
equipment is then comprised of two or four electrically
independent catenaries, running in parallel. Figure 20.4
354
22/06/02
10:28
Page 355
shows the feeding diagram for a typical two-track

railway using a classical electrification system.
The infeed to the tracks in the northbound direction is
via grid transformer T1 at the Feeder Station (FS). The
power is then distributed via catenaries A and B above
the northbound and southbound tracks. At intervals, it is
usual to parallel the two catenaries at paralleling/subsectioning substations, as illustrated in the Figure 20.4.
Load current can then flow in the parallel paths, which
reduces the impedance to the load and hence the line
voltage drops. As the substation terminology implies, the
provision of circuit breakers for each of the outgoing
feeds to the catenaries also allows subsectioning i.e. the
ability to disconnect supply from sections of catenary, in
the event of a fault, or to allow for maintenance. For a
fault on catenary A in Figure 20.4, circuit breakers A at
the feeder station and at SS1 would be tripped to isolate
the faulted catenary. The supply to the healthy sections
of catenary B, C, D, E and F would be maintained.
Grid supply
T2
T1
Feeder station
north
A
B
Feeding South
SS1
Direction of travel
SS2
C
E
D
MPSS
F
BS2
Feeder Station, they are located at every point where

electrical isolation facilities are provided.
20.3.2 Classical System - Protection Philosophy

The grid infeed transformers are typically rated at 10 to
25MVA, with a reactance of around 10% (or 2.5 when
referred to the 25kV winding). Thus, even for a fault at
the Feeder Station busbar, the maximum prospective
short circuit current is low in comparison to a Utility
system (typically only 10 times the rating of a single
catenary). If a fault occurs further down the track, there
will be the additional impedance of the catenary and
return conductor to be added to the impedance of the
fault loop. A typical loop impedance would be 0.6/km
(1/mile). Account may have to be taken of unequal
catenary impedances for instance on a four-track
railway, the catenaries for the two centre tracks have a
higher impedance than those for the outer tracks due to
mutual coupling effects. For a fault at the remote end of
a protected section (e.g. Catenary section A in Figure
20.4), the current measured at the upstream circuit
breaker location (CB A at the FS) may be twice rated
current. Thus at Feeder Stations, overcurrent protection
can be applied, as there is a sufficient margin between
the maximum continuous load current and the fault
current at the remote ends of catenary sections.
However, overcurrent protection is often used only as
time-delayed back-up protection on railways, for the
following reasons:
Direction of travel
BS: Bus section
FS: Feeder station
SS: Paralleling/Sub-sectioning substation
MPSS: Mid Point substation
NS: Neutral section
Figure 20.4: Classical 25kV feeding diagram
The infeed from T1 generally feeds only as far as the

normally open bus section circuit breaker (BS2) at the
mid-point substation (MPSS). Beyond the MPSS there is a
mirror image of the electrical arrangements T1 to BS2
shown in Figure 20.4, with the remote end feeder station
often 40-60km distant from T1. BS2 must remain open
during normal feeding, to prevent Utility power transfer
via the single-phase catenary, or to avoid parallelling
supplies that may be derived from different phase pairs of
the Utility grid e.g. Phase A-B at T1, and B-C at the next
FS to the north. The same is true for BS1, which normally
remains open, as the T1 and T2 feeds are generally from
different phase pairs, in an attempt to balance the loading
on the three phase Utility grid. The neutral section (NS)
is a non-conducting section of catenary used to provide
continuity of the catenary for the pantographs of motive
power units while isolating electrically the sections of
track. While only two (one per rail track) are shown for
simplicity, separating the tracks fed by T1 and T2 at the
a. the protection needs to be discriminative, to ensure

that only the two circuit breakers associated with
the faulted line section are tripped. This demands
that the protection should be directional, to
respond only to fault current flowing into the
section. At location SS1, for example, the
protection for catenaries A and B would have to
look back towards the grid infeed. For a fault close
to the FS on catenary A, the remote end protection
will measure only the proportion of fault current
that flows via healthy catenary B, along the
hairpin path to SS1 and back along catenary A to
the location of the fault. This fault current
contribution may be less than rated load current
(see Figure 20.5)
SS1
A
Catenary section A
Fault current
contribution
Feeder
F
substation via CB A
Fault current contribution via section B
B
Catenary section B
Figure 20.5 Hairpin fault current contribution

355
Chap20-352-369
20
Chap20-352-369
22/06/02
10:28
Page 356
b. the prospective fault current levels at SS1, SS2 and

MPSS are progressively smaller, and the measured
fault currents at these locations may be lower than
rated current
c. during outages of grid supply transformers,
alternative feeding may be necessary. One possible
arrangement is to extend the normal feeding by
closing the bus section circuit breaker at the MPSS.
The prospective current levels for faults beyond the
MPSS will be much lower than normal
Overcurrent protection is detailed in Section 20.5.
zones. Three zones of protection (shown as Z1, Z2, Z3)

are commonly applied. For each zone, the forward and
resistive impedance reach settings must be optimised to
avoid tripping for load current, but to offer the required
catenary fault coverage. All fault impedance reaches for
distance zones are calculated in polar form, Z, where
Z is the reach in ohms, and is the line angle setting in
degrees. For railway systems, where all catenaries have
a similar fault impedance angle, it is often convenient to
add and subtract section impedances algebraically and
treat Z as a scalar quantity.
In addition to protection against faults, thermal

protection of the catenary is required to prevent
excessive contact wire sag, leading to possible
dewirements. Section 20.4 details the principles of
catenary thermal protection.
20
Max normal
load area
Z3
Distance protection has been the most proven method of

protecting railway catenaries, due to its inherent ability to
remain stable for heavy load current, whilst being able to
discriminatively trip for quite low levels of fault current.
For general details of distance protection, see Chapter 11.
Figure 20.5 shows how the fault current generally lags the
system voltage by a greater phase angle than is usual
under load conditions, and thus the impedance phase
angle measurement is an important attribute of distance
relays for discriminating between minimum load
impedance and maximum remote fault impedance.
20.3.3 Distance Protection Zone Reaches

Distance relays applied to a classical single-phase
electrified railway system have two measurement inputs:
a. a catenary to rail voltage signal derived from a line
or busbar connected voltage transformer
b. a track feeder current signal derived from a current
transformer for the circuit breaker feeding the
protected section
Distance relays perform a vector division of voltage by
current to determine the protected circuit loop
impedance (Z). Typical relay characteristics are shown in
the R+j X impedance plane, Figure 20.6.
Solid faults on the catenary will present impedances to
the relay along the dotted line in Figure 20.6. The
illustrated quadrilateral distance relay operating zones
have been set with characteristic angles to match the
catenary solid-fault impedance angle, which is usually
70 to 75 degrees. Two of the zones of operation have
been set as directional, with the third being semidirectional to provide back-up protection. The measured
fault impedance will be lower for a fault closer to the
relay location, and the relay makes a trip decision when
the measured fault impedance falls within its tripping
Typical solid fault impedance

characteristic
Z2
Z1
R
Max regenerative load area
Figure 20.6: Polar impedance plot of
typical trip characteristics
Relays at all of the track sectioning substations (SS1,

etc.) will see the reverse-looking load and regeneration
areas in addition to those in the forward direction shown
in Figure 20.6. The reverse-looking zones, which are
mirror images of the forward-looking zones, have been
omitted from the diagram for clarity.
20.3.3.1 Zone 1
The Zone 1 element of a distance relay is usually set to
protect as much of the immediate catenary section as
possible, without picking-up for faults that lie outside of
the section. In such applications Zone 1 tripping does
not need to be time-graded with the operation of other
protection, as the Zone 1 reach (Z1) cannot respond to
faults beyond the protected catenary section. Zone 1
tripping can be instantaneous (i.e. no intentional time
delay). For an under-reaching application, the Zone 1
reach must therefore be set to account for any possible
overreaching errors. These errors come from the relay,
the VTs and CTs and inaccurate catenary impedance
data. It is therefore recommended that the reach of the
Zone 1 element is restricted to 85% of the protected
catenary impedance, with the Zone 2 element set to
cover the final 15%.
20.3.3.2 Zone 2
To allow for under-reaching errors, the Zone 2 reach (Z2)
356
Chap20-352-369
22/06/02
10:28
Page 357
should be set to a minimum of 115% of the protected

catenary impedance for all fault conditions. This is to
guarantee coverage of the remote end not covered by
Zone 1. It is often beneficial to set Zone 2 to reach
further than this minimum, in order to provide faster
back-up protection for uncleared downstream faults. A
constraining requirement is that Zone 2 does not reach
beyond the Zone 1 reach of downstream catenary
protection. This principle is illustrated in Figure 20.7, for
a four-track system, where the local breaker for section
H has failed to trip.
Z = impedance of sections A, B, C, D
in parallel
The possibility of current following out and back along a
hairpin path to a fault has already been discussed and it
is essential that the relay does not overreach under these
conditions. The feeding scenario is shown in Figure 20.8.
Relay A
FS
SS1
Z<
A
B
Relay A
SS1
Hairpin
SS2
C
70% D
CB open
70% H
feeding
FS Z<
CB failed
closed
H
F
CB failed
closed
A = Protected section impedance
H = Shortest following section
CB open

D = Shortest 'Hairpin Fed' section
Figure 20.8: Fault scenario for maximum

Zone 2 reach (Hairpin Feeding)
Figure 20.7: Fault scenario for Zone 2 reach

constraint (Normal Feeding)
In order to calculate Z2 for the FS circuit breaker of

protected catenary A, a fault is imagined to occur at
70% of the shortest following section. This is the closest
location that unwanted overlap could occur with Z2 main
protection for catenary H. The value of 70% is
determined by subtracting a suitable margin for
measurement errors (15%) from the nominal 85% Z1
reach for catenary H protection. The apparent impedance
of the fault, as viewed from relay A at location FS is then
calculated, noting that any fault impedance beyond SS1
appears to be approximately four times its actual ohmic
impedance, due to the fault current parallelling along
four adjacent tracks. The setting applied to the relay is
the result of this calculation, with a further 15%
subtracted to allow for accommodate any measurement
errors at relay A location.
Figure 20.8 depicts a fault that has been cleared at one

end only, with the remote end breaker for section D
failing to trip. The fault is assumed to be on the lowest
impedance catenary, which is an important consideration
when there are more than two tracks. In a four-track
system, it is usual for mutual induction to cause inner
(middle) track catenaries to have a characteristic
impedance that is 13% higher than for the outside tracks.
The calculation principle is similar to that for normal
feeding, except that now the fault current is parallelling
along three (= number of tracks minus one) adjacent
tracks. The three catenaries concerned are the protected
catenary A, and the remainder of the healthy catenaries
(R), i.e. catenaries B and C.
The equation for the maximum hairpin Zone 2 reach
becomes:
The equation for the maximum Zone 2 reach becomes:
Z2 =
Z2 =
( A + R)
( Z + 0.7 H )
R
1.15
1.15
Equation 20.2
where:
D = impedance of shortest hairpin fed
section
A = impedance of protected section
R = impedance of sections B and C
in parallel
in parallel
Equation 20.1
where:
H = impedance of shortest following section
A = impedance of protected section
R = impedance of sections B, C, D
in parallel
( A + R)
( Z + 0.7 D )
R
357
20
Chap20-352-369
22/06/02
10:28
Page 358
To avoid overreaching for both normal feeding and

hairpin fed faults, the lower of the two calculated
impedances is used as the Zone 2 reach setting.
20.3.3.3 Zone 3
further, to offset the effects of trains with regenerative

braking, which would provide an additional current infeed
to the fault. An additional 5% reach increase would
generally be sufficient to allow for regenerative underreach.
The Zone 3 element would usually be used to provide

overall back-up protection for downstream catenary
sections. The Zone 3 reach (Z3) should typically be set to
at least 115% of the combined apparent impedance of
the protected catenary plus the longest downstream
catenary. Figure 20.9 shows the feeding considered:
Relay A
FS
SS1
Z<
A
Relay A
FS
SS1
Z<
SS2
100% D
20
Hairpin
Feeding
CB open
A = Protected section
impedance
100% E
CB failed
closed
E = Longest following section
CB open
F
20.3.3.4 Reverse Reaching Zones
The equation for the minimum Zone 3 reach (normal

feeding) for Relay A becomes:
An impedance measurement zone with reverse reach is

typically applied to provide back-up protection for the
local busbar at a paralleling/sectionalising substation. A
typical reverse reach is 25% of the Zone 1 reach of the
relay. Typically Zone 3 is set with a reverse offset to
provide this protection and also so that the Zone 3
element will satisfy the requirement for Switch-on-to
Fault (SOTF) protection.
20.3.3.5 Distance zone time delay settings
Equation 20.3
where:
E = impedance of lonest following section
A = protected section impedance
R = impedance of sections B, C, D in parallel
in parallel
It can be appreciated that hairpin feeding scenarios too
must be considered, and this is depicted in Figure 20.10:
The equation for the minimum Zone 3 reach (hairpin
feeding) becomes:
( A + R)
Z 3 = 1.15 ( Z + D )
D = Longest Hairpin Fed section
Figure 20.10: Fault scenario for Zone 3

minimum reach (Hairpin Feeding)
Figure 20.9: Fault scenario for Zone 3

minimum reach (Normal Feeding)
( A + R)
Z 3 = 1.15 ( Z + E )
CB failed
closed
Equation 20.4
where:
D = impedance of longest hairpin fed section
To avoid under-reaching for both normal feeding and
hairpin fed faults, the higher of the two calculated
impedances is used as the Zone 3 reach setting.
Occasionally the Zone 3 reach requirement may be raised
The Zone 1 time delay (tZ1) is generally set to zero,

giving instantaneous operation.
The Zone 2 time delay (tZ2) should be set to co-ordinate
with Zone 1 fault clearance time for downstream
catenaries. The total fault clearance time will consist of
the downstream Zone 1 operating time plus the
associated breaker operating time. Allowance must also
be made for the Zone 2 elements to reset following
clearance of an adjacent line fault and also for a safety
margin. A typical minimum Zone 2 time delay is of the
order of 150-200ms. This time may have to be adjusted
where the relay is required to grade with other Zone 2
protection or slower forms of back-up protection for
downstream circuits.
The Zone 3 time delay (tZ3) is typically set with the same
considerations made for the Zone 2 time delay, except
that the delay needs to co-ordinate with the
downstream Zone 2 fault clearance. A typical minimum
Zone 3 operating time would be in the region of 400ms.
Again, this may need to be modified to co-ordinate with
slower forms of back-up protection for adjacent circuits.
358
22/06/02
10:28
Page 359
20.3.4 Load Avoidance

Figure 20.4 shows how the distance relay trip
characteristics must avoid regions of the polar plot
where the traction load may be present. This has
historically been achieved by using shaped trip
characteristics, such as the lenticular characteristic.
Commencing around 1990, the benefits of applying
quadrilateral characteristics were realised with the
introduction of integrated circuit relays. A quadrilateral
characteristic permits the resistive reach to be set
independently of the required forward zone reach, which
determines the position of the top line of the
quadrilateral element. The resistive reach setting is then
set merely to avoid the traction load impedance by a safe
margin and to provide acceptable resistive fault
coverage. Figure 20.11 shows how the resistive reach
settings are determined:
by CTs, VTs etc. will be more pronounced. It is therefore

common to set the resistive reaches progressively
marginally smaller for zones with longer reaches. A
practical setting constraint to ensure that zones with
long reaches are not too narrow, and not overly affected
by angle measurement tolerances, is for the resistive
reach not to be less than 14% of the zone reach.
20.3.5 Enhanced Modern Relay Characteristics

Figure 20.12 illustrates the polygonal distance relay
characteristics of a modern numerical railway distance
relay. Introduction of a setting modifies the basic
quadrilateral characteristic into a polygonal one, in order
to optimise fault impedance coverage and load
avoidance for modern railway applications.
Chap20-352-369
Figure 20.12: Polygon distance characteristics
Figure 20.11: Resistive reach settings for load

avoidance
For all quadrilateral characteristics, impedance point B is

the critical loading to avoid. The magnitude of the
impedance is calculated from Z = V/I taking the
minimum operational catenary voltage and the
maximum short-term catenary current. The catenary
voltage is permitted to fall to 80% of nominal or less at
the train location under normal operating conditions,
and the short term current loading to rise to 160% of
nominal these worst-case measured values should be
used when aiming to find the lowest load impedance.
The phase angle of point B with respect to the resistive
axis is determined as:
=
Cos-1
(max lagging power factor)
The diagram shows how resistive reach E-F for Zone 1

has been chosen to avoid the worst-case loading by a
suitable margin of 10%-20%. Zones 2 and 3 reach
further, thus the effect of any angular errors introduced
The use of the setting allows a load avoidance notch to

be placed within the right-hand resistive reach line of
the quadrilateral. is chosen to be around 10 degrees
greater than the worst-case power factor load angle,
limiting the resistive reach to Rg to avoid all load
impedances. For impedance angles greater than , the
zone resistive reach R applies, and the fault arc resistive
coverage is improved. This is especially beneficial for
Zone 3 back-up protection of adjacent catenaries, where
the apparent level of arc resistance will be raised
through the effect of parallel circuit infeeds at the
intervening substation.
20.3.6 Impact of Trains with Regenerative Braking

It is common for the Zone 1 characteristic to apply to the
forward direction only. However, other zones may be set to
have a reverse reach see Section 20.3.3.4 for details.
Another case where reverse-reaching zones may be required
is where trains having regenerative braking are used.
Such trains usually regenerate at a leading power factor
359
20
Chap20-352-369
20/06/02
15:52
Page 360
to avoid the creation of overvoltages on the catenary.

Where a regenerating train contributes to fault current,
the fault impedance measured by distance relays may
shift up to 10 greater than . Some railway
administrations require that the fault impedance
remains within the trip characteristic, and does not stray
outside the top left hand resistive boundary of the
polygon. This can be obtained by setting the reverse
resistive reach (Rbw) to be greater than the forward
resistive reach (Rfw).
20.3.7 Other Relay Characteristics
20
Recent relay technology developments also allow the use

of detectors for rate of change of current and voltage
(di/dt and dv/dt). These detectors are used to control the
time delays associated with time-delayed Zones 2 and 3,
and hence obtain better discrimination between load and
fault impedances. The technique is still in its infancy, but
shows significant potential for the future.
20.4 CATENARY THERMAL PROTECTION

It is essential that railway catenaries remain in the correct
position relative to the track, thus ensuring good current
collection by train pantographs. The catenary is designed
to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to
its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with
heat dissipated by radiation etc. Overtemperature
conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of
rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. Economic
catenary design demands that the catenary rating be that
of the maximum average continuous load expected. Peaks
in loading due to peak-hour timetables, or trains starting
or accelerating simultaneously are accommodated using
the thermal capacity of the catenary - in much the same
way as use is made of transformer overload capacity to
cater for peak loading.
It can be shown that the temperatures during heating
follow exponential time constants and a similar
exponential decrease of temperature occurs during
cooling. It is important that the catenary is not allowed
to overheat, as this will lead to contact wire supporting
arms moving beyond acceptable limits, and loss of the
correct alignment with respect to the track. The period
of time for which the catenary can be overloaded is
therefore a function of thermal history of the catenary,
degree of overload, and ambient temperature.
The tension in the catenary is often maintained by
balance weights, suspended at each end of tension
lengths of contact wire. Overtemperature will cause the
catenary to stretch, with the balance weights eventually
touching the ground. Further heating will then result in
a loss of contact wire tension, and excessive sagging of
the contact wire. To provide protection against such

conditions, catenary thermal protection is provided.
20.4.1 Catenary Thermal Protection Method

Catenary thermal protection typically uses a current
based thermal replica, using load current to model
heating and cooling of the protected catenary. The
element can be set with both alarm (warning) and trip
stages.
The heat generated within the catenary is the resistive
loss (I2Rxt). Thus, the thermal time characteristic used in
the relay is therefore based on current squared,
integrated over time. The heating leads to a temperature
rise above ambient temperature, so in order to calculate
the actual catenary temperature, the relay must know
the ambient temperature along its length. This can be
either set as an assumed default ambient temperature,
or measured, typically using a temperature probe
mounted externally to the substation building. However,
the tension length of a contact wire may be over 1km,
and traverse cuttings and tunnels - with resulting
significant changes in the local ambient temperature.
Therefore, the probe should ideally be mounted in a
location that most accurately models the coolant air
around the catenary for the majority of the protected
section:
a. if exposed to direct sunlight, then the probe should
be mounted to face the sun
b. if shaded from sunlight, such as running in a
tunnel, then the probe should be mounted on an
exterior wall facing away from the sun
c. if running in a cutting, shielded from wind, the
probe should be mounted in the lee of the
substation
d. if exposed to the wind, the probe should also be
mounted on an exposed wall
It is virtually impossible to site the probe such as to
exactly model the ambient conditions along the
protected section, and thus a typical error in the
allowable temperature rise of between 1C and 3C will
result (for well-sited and poorly-sited probes,
respectively). RTD and CT errors, along with relay
tolerances may also introduce further errors of up to 1C
in the thermal model. Overall, the error in the
temperature reading above the 20C rated ambient could
be 4C. Therefore, relays may have a setting to
compensate for such measurement tolerances, to ensure
that the trip will not occur too late to prevent
mechanical damage. Some relays may have an option to
express the above tolerance as a percentage of the
temperature at which a trip is required, rather than in
absolute terms.
360
20/06/02
15:52
Page 361
20.5 CATENARY BACKUP PROTECTION

Railway systems often use overcurrent protection as
time-delayed back-up protection for the main distance
protection. Two different philosophies for overcurrent
protection are typical:
a. definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
b. back-up overcurrent protection (BUOC)
catenary feeding impedance with a classical feeding

arrangement depending on the section length being fed
and the traffic frequency (in both directions). To avoid a
decrease in train performance, feeder stations and
parallelling substations for classical systems would have to
be sited at prohibitively short intervals. In such
circumstances, especially where the route involves new
construction, autotransformer feeding is normally favoured.
20.5.1 Definite-time Overcurrent Protection (DTOC)
20.6.1 Description of Autotransformer Feeding
This form of protection is continually in service, in

parallel to the distance relay elements, either included
within the same relay as the distance function, or as a
separate relay. The latter approach is currently more
common for installations at Feeder Stations. This is due
to the perceived increase in security and reliability
obtained from the redundancy of separate devices.
However, the trends evident in other protection
applications to provide more functionality within a single
relay will in time surely apply to this area as well.
Autotransformer feeding uses a high voltage system

comprising of a centre-tapped supply transformer,
catenary wire and a feeder wire. The feeder wire is
aerially mounted on insulators along the back of the
overhead line masts. The running rails are connected to
the centre tap of the supply transformer, and hence a
train sees only half of the system voltage.
Autotransformers located at intervals along the tracks
ensure division of load current between catenary and
feeder wires that minimises the voltage drop between
the supply transformer and the train. Figure 20.13 shows
autotransformer feeding for the typical 25-0-25kV
system found in Western Europe.
It operates on the basis of conventional definite-time

overcurrent protection, as described in Chapter 9. The
time settings are chosen to ensure that the distance
relay elements should operate first, thus the overcurrent
elements only operate if the distance elements fail, or if
they are out of service for some reason.
Supply
pp y
transformer
20.5.2 Back-up Overcurrent Protection (BUOC)
Feeder
This form of back-up protection is switched in service

only during periods when the distance protection is out
of service. A typical example is where VT supervision or
a measuring circuit monitoring function detects a blown
VT fuse or an MCB trip. In such instances the distance
protection is automatically blocked, and the BUOC
elements can be automatically brought into service, such
that catenary protection is not lost.
Methods of setting overcurrent protection are covered in
Chapter 9. An example of using overcurrent protection
is given in Section 20.8.
20.6 AUTOTRANSFORMER FEEDING

High-speed rail lines, with maximum speeds in excess of
200km/h (125mph) have much higher traction power
demands. This is not only to cope with the peak power
required for rapid acceleration to high speed, but also to
cope with the steeper gradients that are commonly
encountered along such routes. The total traction power
per train may amount to 12-16MW, comprising two or
more power cars per unit and often two units coupled
together to form a complete train. The heavy load currents
drawn may cause significant voltage drops across the
Chap20-352-369
Ic
AT
Catenary
Rails
AT: Autotransformer
: 1 unit of load current
Figure 20.13: 25-0-25kV autotransformer
feeding
The use of autotransformers (AT) results in distribution

losses that are lower than for classical 25kV feeding, and
therefore can support the use of high power 25kV
traction units. Feeder substation spacing can also be
much greater than if a classical feeding system is used.
Fewer substations means less maintenance and reduced
operating costs. Two-pole switchgear is normally used
to isolate both the feeder and catenary wires in the
event of a fault on either wire. However, some
autotransformer systems allow single wire tripping,
where separate distance protection is provided for each
wire. The protection would then monitor the two halves
of the system independently, with Protection Zones 1
and 2 typically set to 85% and 120% of the protected
361
20
Chap20-352-369
20/06/02
15:52
Page 362
25-0-25 kV
Feeder substation
I>
as
*
Z<
To
I>
as
*
Z<
I>
Section switch
protection
NO
Z<
NO
To Track
via B
NO
F
C C
Up
F
F - feeder
NO
A.E.C - Aerial earth conductor
Figure 20.14: Autotransformer-fed system one-line diagram showing protection
1.20
Catenary wire
Contact wire
AEC
Feeder wire
Aerial earth
conductor
(AEC)
5.08
5.50
7.25
20
6.30
I>
as
Z<
1.34
3.57
3.25
4.50
Rail
level
750
CL
CL
Down
Up
0.3
Buried earth
conductor
(B.E.C)
Figure 20.15: Typical autotransformerfed and catenary layout
362
15:52
Page 363
circuit impedance - similar to the protection of a

classical catenary system. Figure 20.13 also illustrates
the distribution of load current for a train situated
midway between AT locations.
The topology of the AT system is often similar to the
classical system shown in Figure 20.4, except that the
grid supply transformer 50kV secondary winding is
wound as a centre-tapped AT winding, and ATs are
connected catenary-rail-feeder at each downstream
substation and at intervening locations.
Figure 20.14 shows a typical protection one-line diagram
for an autotransformer-fed system, while Figure 20.15
shows the construction of the catenary system.
20.6.2 Autotransformer System Protection Philosophy

From Figure 20.13 it can be seen that that the
summation (Ic - If) at any location will be equal to the
downstream traction load current. The same is true for
fault current, and so physically performing this current
summation, through the parallel connection of feeder
and catenary CT secondary windings, or mathematically
summating within a protection relay, can be the basis for
autotransformer circuit protection.
reclosure are detailed in Section 20.5.5. With high speed

lines generally being better fenced, and having fewer
overbridges and greater electrical clearances compared
to classical systems, the infrequent losses of supply
cause few operational problems. As tripping of circuit
breakers at the FS isolates all line faults, there is then no
need to have switchgear at downstream substations
rated to interrupt fault current. For economy, loadbreaking switches are used instead of breakers at SS1
and SS2 in Figure 20.4.
20.6.3 Distance Protection Zone Reaches

Figure 20.16 illustrates the typical locus of impedance
measured at the FS, for a catenary to earth fault, at a
variable location upstream of SS2, for any one track.
While a similar effect exists for classically-fed systems, it
is small by comparison and normally ignored. The
impedance measured is defined as:
Z =
To discriminate between normal load current and feeder

wire or catenary faults, distance protection is commonly
applied, with (Ic - If) being the measured current. The
measured voltage is generally the catenary to rail
voltage. The relatively low reactance of the ATs
typically 1% on a 10MVA base ensures that any fault
voltage drop on the catenary will be proportional to the
feeder wire voltage drop.
V catenary
catenary
feeder
Z
12
11
Zmax
B
Zmin
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Solid line
shows Z
measured
SS2
0
2
FS
When applying zones of distance protection to AT

systems, with double-pole tripping, it should be
appreciated that it is not usually possible to provide fully
discriminative protection. When the catenary and feeder
currents are combined, the relationship between
impedance and distance-to-fault is non-linear.
Consequently, it is more difficult to set Zone 1 to be
under-reaching and Zone 2 to be overreaching in the
normal manner. The approach that is normally adopted
is to set the Feeder Station distance protection to detect
all faults along any track, up to, but not beyond, the MidPoint Substation. It can be arranged that operation of
any distance relay will trip all Feeder Station breakers. In
the event of any fault up to the MPSS, simultaneous
tripping of all the track feeder circuit breakers at the FS
will cut supplies to all tracks. Where this scheme is
adopted, the application of auto-reclosing is essential to
restore supplies to all but the permanently faulted
section of catenary and feeder. The momentum of
moving trains will ensure that little speed is lost during
the dead time of the auto-reclose sequences.
Considerations relating to the application of auto-
(I
20/06/02
Fault impedance (ohms)
Chap20-352-369
8
10 12 14
Distance to fault (km)
16
18
Figure 20.16: Variation of impedance

measurement with fault location along track
For clarity, only the impedances measured for a catenary

to earth fault located upstream of SS2 are plotted. The
hump-like impedance locus in Figure 20:16 has a number
of identifiable trends:
363
a. the initial slope of the locus, in ohms/km, shown as

line A. This is according to the catenary-to-rail
loop impedance of (the 25kV loop in Figure 20.13),
since the fault current flows almost entirely in the
catenary-rail loop for faults close to a feeding
point
b. at AT locations, slope B shows how the effective
ohms/km trend is less than half the catenary-tofeeder loop impedance (the 50kV loop in Figure
20.13) due to the method of impedance
measurement and due to the fault current
distribution. For a catenary-earth fault located at
an autotransformer, the fault current will circulate
20
Chap20-352-369
20/06/02
15:52
Page 364
almost entirely in the catenary-feeder loop rather

than in the catenary-rail loop. Additionally, the
impedance of the catenary-feeder loop is lower
than that of the catenary-rail loop, as the feeder
cable is a better conductor than the rails
c. beyond SS1, the effect of parallel feeding from
other circuits between the FS and SS1 means that
slope C for a single circuit beyond SS1 is greater
than slope A. With reference to Figure 20.12, the
system simulated is four track, thus the gradient of
C will be approximately four times that of A
(marginally higher than four for the inner tracks,
and less than four for outer tracks)
Considerations for the setting of distance relay
reaches are detailed in the following sections.
20.6.3.1 Zone 1
20
The Zone 1 elements of any FS distance relay should not

overreach and trip for faults beyond the MPSS, when the
mid-point bus section breaker is closed. If it is known
that the MPSS is definitely open, then there is no real
reach constraint for distance protection. However, if the
mid-point breaker is closed, or no status information is
communicated to the protection to control overreach,
through reversion to an alternative setting group, then
the relay must not trip for the lowest impedance for a
fault at the MPSS busbar. Referring to Figure 20.16, this
fault impedance would be Zmin along slope B (to 15km
and 7.5). The applied Zone 1 setting should be
restricted to 85% of this impedance, to allow for all
measurement and impedance data tolerances.
protection for faults beyond the MPSS, or with a longer

reach to cover instances where ATs are switched out of
service, such that the effective normal feeding
impedance becomes higher.
20.6.4 Distance Zone Time Delay Settings

and Load Avoidance
The principles used are identical to those for classical
feeding, with one exception. A short time delay of the
order of 50ms may be used with the Zone 1 element if a
relay without magnetising inrush restraint is used.
The relay uses (Ic - If), which is measuring the combined
load current of all trains at their pantographs. Therefore,
the load impedance to avoid is that measured from
catenary to rail (the 25kV impedance in Figure 20.11).
20.6.5 Implications of using Two-Pole Switching

and Auto-Reclosure
A full discussion of operational implications is beyond
the scope of this Chapter, thus only the important points
are listed:
A lower reach setting might be necessary to prevent

unwanted tripping with aggregate magnetising inrush
currents following circuit energisation. This will depend
on the response of the relay elements to inrush current
and to the number of ATs applied. For relays that have
magnetising inrush restraint or some means of providing
immunity or reduced sensitivity to inrush currents such a
constraint may not apply.
20.6.3.2 Zone 2
Allowing for under-reaching errors, the Zone 2 reach (Z2)
should be set in excess of 115% of the protected line
impedance for all fault conditions. The relevant
impedance in Figure 20.16 would be the Zmax peak
between SS2 and MPSS. A typical value of Zmax would
be approximately 11.5 at 13km distance from the
feeder station. If trains with regenerative braking are in
service along the protected track a 20% additional reach
margin would typically be applied. With the stated Zone
1 and Zone 2 setting policy, relays at the Feeder Station
provide complete track protection up to the MPSS.
20.6.3.3 Zone 3
Zone 3 may be applied to provide remote back-up
364
a. it is usual to remove all parallelling between tracks

prior to any breaker reclosing. This avoids
repetitive re-tripping of healthy catenary sections
as multiple track feeder circuit breakers are being
reclosed after clearance of a fault on one feeder.
Paralleling is removed by opening the motorised
isolators at all SS and MPSS locations. Following
feeder breaker reclosure, the tracks will be radially
fed. A persistent fault would only result in retripping of the faulted track circuit breakers
b. in the period where tracks are being radially-fed,
the relays at the FS should only trip their own track
circuit breakers. Cross-tripping of parallel track
circuit breakers should be inhibited
c. protection at the FS can trip for an AT fault. Since
there would typically be no circuit breakers at the
SS and MPSS autotransformer locations, AT
protection should wait for loss of line voltage
during the dead time of FS circuit breakers before
initiating the opening of a local motorised
disconnector switch. This action should take place
within the dead time so that the faulted AT will
have been disconnected before reclosure of the FS
breakers
d. with radially fed tracks, multiple shot autoreclosing, is often applied to dislodge any debris
(wildlife or other stray material) that may have
caused a semi-permanent fault. Before the last
auto-reclose shot, it is common to disconnect all
ATs downstream of the FS. With all ATs and
20/06/02
15:53
Page 365
paralleling removed the faulted circuit distance

relays would then see a linear relationship between
the impedance measured and the distance to fault.
The results obtained from a conventional, integral
fault location algorithms would then offer
rectification crews a fairly accurate estimate of
where the permanent fault might be located
Substation S1 are to be calculated. The inputs to the relay are

derived from the track feeder CT adjacent to the circuit breaker,
and from a section busbar VT at busbar S1 (a catenary-side VT
would be equally suitable). The system data is given in Table
20.1. A MiCOM P438 relay is used in the example.
e. it may be necessary to automatically increase the

Zone reaches of distance relay elements before the
final auto-reclose attempt to allow for the higher
catenary to rail fault loop impedance up to the
MPSS rather than the lower catenary-feeder loop
impedance. This may be achieved by switching to
an alternative setting group with Z2 set higher
than previously
20.6.6 Backup Protection

Backup protection considerations for autotransformer
fed systems are similar, in principle, to those for classical
systems, as described in Section 20.5.
20.7 FEEDER SUBSTATION PROTECTION

Each feeder substation comprises transformers, busbars,
cables, switchgear, etc. All of these items require
protection. Due to the much higher frequency of faults
on the catenary system, special attention must be given
to ensuring that the substation protection remains stable
for catenary faults, whilst offering dependable
protection for substation faults.
Other than this, there are no special requirements for the
protection of feeder substation equipment and the forms
of protection detailed in Chapters 9-16 are directly
applicable, on a single phase basis.
275/26kV
Typical assumed max. winter temperature (610A rating)

Typical assumed max. spring/autumn temp (540A rating)
Typical assumed summer temperature (515A rating)
Worst-case assumed hottest ambient
Temperature for Balance Weights to touch ground
Temperature at which 20% loss of tension,
train speeds must be restricted
Temperature at which possible damage
due to clashing of supports at overlaps occurs
Heating time constant - daytime
Cooling time constant - nightime
10C
20C
23C
28C
38C
-18C to 38C
48C
56C
5 mins
7 mins
20.8.1 Section Impedance Data

The first step is to calculate the primary impedance for
the catenary sections to be protected. Zone 1 for the
relay associated with feeder TF-1 protects section 1,
however the backup protection offered by Zones 2 and 3
must discriminate with downstream relays and so the
impedance of sections 2, 3 and 4 needs to be calculated
too. In this example each pair of catenaries runs
between the common substations, and so the impedance
of adjacent sections will be identical. There are
situations where this is not the case, of which
a. the sections to be protected consist of four tracks
b. the two tracks follow different routes due to the
geography of the route and hence may not be of
the same length
Z<
TF1
Zt=10%88
c. if there is a junction within a section
600/1
are three examples.

2
Off-load
voltage
26kV
Data
0.26+j0.68/km
0.051+j0.21
every 3km
900A
Vacuum
0.065 s
0.045 s
Table 20.1: Electrified railway system data
20.8 EXAMPLE OF CLASSICAL SYSTEM PROTECTION

Busbar VT
26.4/11kV
Equipment
Catenary Impedance
Booster Transformer Impedance
Booster Transformer Spacing
Maximum Load Current
CB Type
CB trip time
Max Zone 1 protection trip time
Catenary Thermal Protection
Catenary design temperature range for correct tension
The equivalent section impedance per kilometre is given

by the formula:
TF2
S1
S2
12.2km
S3
Zsect/km = line impedance/km

+ (BT impedance/BT spacing)
13.7km
(0.26 +
Figure 20.17: Network Diagram

example calculation
Figure 20.17 depicts a typical 25kV system, where the

settings for the relay protecting track feeder TF-1 at
Chap20-352-369
365
(0.051 + j 0.21 )
j 0.68 ) +
= 0.277 + j0.75/km
= 0.869.7/km
20
Chap20-352-369
20/06/02
15:53
Page 366
This will be rounded up to 70 as the nearest settable value

of the common characteristic line angle of the relay, .
The setting required is the lowest of the above two

configurations.
Distance protection relays are often set and injectiontested in terms of the impedance on the secondary side
of the CTs/VTs used. Therefore, it is helpful for testing
if the primary impedances on the system are converted
to secondary quantities. The equation to be used is:
20.8.4.1 Follow-on configuration
Z sec
t = Z sec t
Figure 20.7 shows the condition to consider, with two

track feeding only for the area fed by Substation S1.
Equation 20.1 is used to calculate the reach:
Z2 =
where:
Zsect = system impedance referred
to primary

20
1.15
where:
Zsect = system impedance referred

to secondary
( A + R)
.
Z
E
+
0
7
(
)
CT ratio
VT ratio
Z = impedance of sections 1 and 2 in parallel

A = the track section of interest, section 1
Hence,
600
Z sec
t = Z sec t
26400
R = parallel fault current path (section 2)

1
E = shortest following section (3 or 4)
110
Hence,
= Z sec t 2.5
Z2 = (12.2 + 0.7 27.4 )
20.8.2 Section Impedance Calculations

The section impedances can be calculated as follows:
20.8.2.1 Sections 1 and 2

The impedances for sections 1 and 2 are:
2
1.15
= 54.6
Zsect = 9.76 x 2.5 = 24.4
Notice how for two track feeding, (A + R)/R above

becomes 2, due to a fault current split between two
identical parallel paths.
20.8.2.2 Sections 3 and 4

The impedances for sections 3 and 4 are:
Zsect = 13.7 x 0.8 = 10.96
20.8.4.2 Hairpin feeding configuration
Zsect = 10.96 x 2.5 = 27.4

20.8.3 Zone 1 Reach Calculation for TF-1
The Zone 1 forward reach is set to be 85% of the section
1 impedance, referred to the secondary of the relay.
Referring to Figure 20.8, it is apparent that with only two

tracks, inner tracks B and C are not present. Once circuit
breaker TF-2 at substation S1 is open, the impedance to
the fault is merely 170% times the impedance of track
section 1 or 2. Thus, from Equation 20.2:
Hence, the forward reach is calculated as
(0.7 24.4 )
Z2 = 24.4 +
1.15
Z1fw = 24.4 x 0.85 = 20.75

Zone 1 is not required to operate in the reverse direction,
so the setting Z1bw is set to Blocked.
= 36.1
For Zone 2 it is always the lower of the two calculated
results that is used. Therefore,

Two configurations have to be considered in the setting
of the Zone 2 reach. These are:
b. the Hairpin feeding configuration of Figure 20.8
1.15
= (12.2 + 0.7 27.4 )
Zsect = 12.2 x 0.8 = 9.76
a. the follow-on configuration of Figure 20.7
24.4 + 24.4
24.4
use a setting of:

Forward reach Z2fw = 36.1
The Reverse Reach, Z2bw, is set to Blocked, as only
forward directional operation is required.
366
20/06/02
15:53
Page 367

In similar fashion to the Zone 2 reach, the follow-on
and Hairpin fault configurations have to be considered.
As Zone 3 must tend to overreach rather than
underreach, 120% of the fault impedance calculated is
used as the setting and the higher of the two possible
settings is used.
20.8.5.1 Follow-On fault configuration
Figure 20.9 shows the configuration for a follow-on fault
with two tracks: It is apparent that the calculation is
exactly as for Zone 2 follow-on, except that the
multiplier of 0.7 (70%) is replaced by 1 (100%).
Z3 = (12.2 + 27.4) x 2 x 1.2
= 95.1
20.8.5.2 Hairpin feeding fault configuration
Repeating the same for hairpin feeding (Figure 20.10,
Equation 20.4):
The Zone 3 time delay can typically be set double the

minimum calculated above. However, as Zone 3 is often
most at risk of unwanted pickup due to train starting
currents or momentary overloads, a longer setting of
t3 = 500ms is applied.
20.8.7 Overcurrent Protection

Overcurrent protection can be applied to the 25kV
system in Figure 20.17. For railway applications, nondirectional overcurrent protection is normal. The
simplest application is for track feeders at Feeder
Stations, such as TF-1. At this location and with normal
feeding, any fault current will naturally be flowing away
from the busbar, and so no reverse operation can occur.
At downstream substations it will not be possible to
apply overcurrent protection in a similar way, and any
elements enabled would tend to be set with long time
delays to ensure that all of the distance protection zones
are given sufficient time to trip beforehand.
Chap20-352-369
20.8.7.1 Back-Up overcurrent (BUOC) at feeder stations
Z3 = (24.4 + 24.4) x 1.2

= 58.6
Hence, use a setting of:
Forward reach Z3fw = 95.1
For Zone 3, a reverse reach is required to act a backup to
the upstream protection. The usual setting is 25% of the
Zone 1 forward reach. Therefore, use a setting of:
Reverse reach Z3bw = 0.25 x 20.75
= 5.2
Should the distance protection be out of service, two

BUOC overcurrent elements could be set. Firstly a high
set overcurrent element is set to underreach the
protected section, mimicking Zone 1 operation. This can
be set for instantaneous tripping. Secondly, a lower-set
overcurrent element can be applied to complete
protection for the TB-1 section, to overreach the end of
the protected section at S2. The overcurrent element of
the relay would be set accordingly and with a definite
time delay.
20.8.7.2 Calculation of fault current
20.8.6 Zone Time Delays

The Zone 1 time delay will be set to instantaneous
operation (t1 = 0) it is not common practice to timegrade this zone with the primary protection fitted on
board the trains.
In order to determine the overcurrent settings, the fault

current measured by TF-1 CT for a fault adjacent to the
S2 busbar needs to be calculated. There are two possible
configurations to consider:
a. fault current for a fault at the end of section 1,
with two tracks in-service
Zone 2 (t2) should be delayed as follows:

t2 = CB max trip time + Relay max trip time
+ 50ms margin
Hence,
b. current for a fault at the end of section 1, with

section 2 isolated for maintenance
For the first configuration, the fault current per track can
be calculated as
t2 = 65 + 45 + 50
I f1=
= 160ms
As all of the protection and circuit breakers are identical,
this value can be used for t2. If the downstream relays
were electromechanical (typically 40-70ms slower than
numerical), or the circuit breakers were oil insulated
(OCBs, typically 40 to 60ms slower than VCBs), then the
t2 delay would need to be extended accordingly. The
50ms margin allows for the reset time of the Z2 element.
E
2 Z t +Z sp )
where:
367
E = source voltage = 26.4kV

Zt = transformer impedance = 4.588
Zsp = parallel impedance of sections 1 and 2
= 9.7670/2
20
Chap20-352-369
20/06/02
15:53
Page 368
Idtinst 1.5 x Iflc
Note that the fault current splits into two parallel paths,
fed via TF-1 and TF-2. Hence, the division by 2 in the
equation for calculating the per-track current measured
by the protection.
where:
Hence,
Hence,
Iflc = full load current of feeder

Idtinst = 1.5 x 600
= 900A
I f 1 = 1.4kA
For the second configuration,
Referred to the secondary side of the CT,

I f2=
E
Z t +Z s1
I ' dtinst =900
Zs1 = impedance of section 1
Hence,
20.8.8 Thermal Protection

I f 2 = 1.84kA
20.8.7.3 Overcurrent setting for BUOC

instantaneous stage
The thermal data for the catenary are also given in Table
20.1. The calculation of the thermal protection settings
is given in the following sections.
To prevent overreach, set at least 20% above the higher

of the two fault scenarios:
20.8.8.1 Thermal reference current/ temperature
Iinst = 1840 x 1.2 = 2200A

The secondary current setting on the relay is found by
dividing by the CT ratio:
I ' inst = 2200
600
The P438 requires a thermal rated current or reference

current, Iref, to be set that corresponds to full load
current. The ambient temperature at which this applies
qualifies this rated current. The reference current
referred to the CT primary is given in Table 20.1 as:
=3.68 A
Irefp = 540A
20.8.7.4 Overcurrent setting for BUOC definite-time

delayed stage
The relay setting is in terms of the secondary current.

Hence, the secondary current setting on the relay is
found by dividing by the CT ratio:
To ensure complete cover for short circuits in the

protected section, the setting should be no greater than
80% of the lower of the two fault scenarios:
I ' oc =1100
600
I refs =
540
=0.9 A
600
The ambient temperature tamb at which Irefp occurs is set

at 20C.
I oc 1400 x 0.8 = 1100A

In terms of secondary quantities,
20
=1.5 A
The time delay applied must be longer than the t3

distance zone delay, so tIdtinst would be acceptable.
where:
600
20.8.8.2 Mechanical damage protection
=1.86 A
A time setting no less than the Zone 2 distance time

delay would be used, so tI oc = 250ms is suitable.
All overcurrent protection must have a pickup in excess
of the maximum expected load current. Assuming that
the maximum overloading would never exceed 150% of
CT rating, the Iinst and I oc settings are acceptable.
20.8.7.5 Definite Time Overcurrent (DTOC)
It is not general practice to set instantaneous protection
elements that are running in parallel to the distance
zones. Thus often just one definite time delayed stage is
used. This setting can be applied at all locations, and
must be in excess of the maximum load and overload
current expected.
The catenary temperature at which mechanical damage

may begin to occur is 56C. This must correspond to the
P438 thermal trip command, and so:
tcatmax = 56C
Account must be taken of the measurement errors
described in Section 20.4.1. The P438 relay setting, trip,
must allow for these errors, which are taken to be 4C.
Hence,
trip = (56 - 4)C
= 52C
To avoid chattering of contacts when the load current is
close to the trip threshold, a hysteresis setting is
provided on reset. Typically the hysteresis is set to 2%,
such that following a trip, the thermal model must cool
by 2% before the trip contacts will reset.
368
20/06/02
15:53
Page 369
20.8.8.3 Dewirement protection
Parameter
Symbol
Zone 1 forward reach
Z1fw
Zone 1 backward reach
Z1bw
Z2fw
Z2bw
Z3fw
Z3bw
Zone 1 time delay
t1
Zone 2 time delay
t2
Zone 3 time delay
t3
Back-Up Overcurrent Instantaneous current setting
I'inst
Back-Up Overcurrent IDMT current setting
I'oc
Back-Up Overcurrent IDMT time delay setting
tI'oc
Definite Time Overcurrent protection current setting
I'dtinst
Definite Time Overcurrent protection time delay setting tI'dtinst
Thermal Protection reference current
Irefs
Ambient temperature reference
tamb
Thermal trip temperature
trip
Thermal warning temperature
warning
Maximum ambient temperature
tambmax
Default ambient temperature
tambdef
Heating time constant - daytime
h
Cooling time constant - nightime
c
An alarm should be issued to warn the rail operator when

speed restrictions are necessary, to avoid the risk of
dewirements. From Table 20.1, the catenary temperature
at which there is a danger of dewirement is 48C. The
same measurement errors apply as for the trip setting.
Hence the relay setting, warning, is:
warning = (48 - 4)C
= 44C
20.8.8.4 Maximum ambient temperature
It is possible to place a limit on the maximum ambient
temperature that will be used by the thermal model, to
avoid over-restrictive loading constraints being imposed.
From Table 20.1:
tambmax = 28C
20.8.8.5 Default ambient temperature
If ambient temperature compensation is not being used,
an assumed default coolant temperature ambient must
be chosen. The default ambient temperature must be
chosen to be sufficiently high to minimise the danger of
undetected problems occurring on hot days, when the
ambient temperature is well in excess of the default
value. Similarly, it must not be so high that alarms
and/or trips occur unnecessarily. A default ambient
temperature, tambdef, of 20C, would provide adequate
protection, except for a calculated risk on certain hot
summer days. Note that the rated thermal current at
this ambient is Irefs.
Value
20.75
Blocked
36.1
Blocked
95.1
5.2
0s
160ms
500ms
3.68A
1.86A
250ms
1.5A
800ms
0.9A
20C
52C
44C
28C
20C
5 min
7 min
Chap20-352-369
Table 20.2: Electrified railway system example-relay settings
20.8.8.6 Thermal time constants

The catenary thermal model requires heating and cooling
time constants to be specified. For most catenaries, the
heating and cooling time constants would be expected
to be equal. However, this may not always be the case,
for example the cooling time constant at night may be
longer than that applicable during the day. The relay can
accommodate different settings where required.
Conservative settings that assume the worst case time
constants for heating (h) and cooling (c) would be to
assume a daytime heating time constant and nightime
cooling time constant. Hence:
h = 5min
c = 7min
The P438 also allows the thermal rating of the protection
to be modified, based on signals from opto inputs.
However, this facility is not used in this example.
20.8.9 Summary of Catenary Protection Settings

The protection calculations for the catenary are now
complete. The relay settings are summarised in Table 20.2.
369
20
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:03
21
Page 370
Relay Testing
and Commissioning
Introduction
21.1
Electrical type tests
21.2
Electromagnetic compatibility tests
21.3
Product safety type tests
21.4
Environmental type tests
21.5
Software type tests
21.6
Dynamic validation type testing
21.7
Production testing
21.8
Commissioning tests
21.9
Secondary injection test equipment
21.10
Secondary injection testing
21.11
Primary injection testing 21.12

Testing of protection scheme logic 21.13
Tripping and alarm annunciation tests 21.14
Periodic maintenance tests 21.15
Protection scheme design for maintenance 21.16
References 21.17
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 371
21 Relay Testing
and Commissioning
21.1 INTRODUCTION
The testing of protection equipment schemes presents a
number of problems. This is because the main function
of protection equipment is solely concerned with
operation under system fault conditions, and cannot
readily be tested under normal system operating
conditions. This situation is aggravated by the
increasing complexity of protection schemes and use of
relays containing software.
The testing of protection equipment may be divided into
four stages:
i. type tests
ii. routine factory production tests
iii. commissioning tests
iv. periodic maintenance tests
21.1.1 Type Tests

Type tests are required to prove that a relay meets the
published specification and complies with all relevant
standards. Since the principal function of a protection
relay is to operate correctly under abnormal power
conditions, it is essential that the performance be
assessed under such conditions. Comprehensive type
tests simulating the operational conditions are therefore
conducted at the manufacturer's works during the
development and certification of the equipment.
The standards that cover most aspects of relay
performance are IEC 60255 and ANSI C37.90. However
compliance may also involve consideration of the
requirements of IEC 61000, 60068 and 60529, while
products intended for use in the EEC also have to comply
with the requirements of Directives 89/336/EEC and
73/23/EEC. Since type testing of a digital or numerical
relay involves testing of software as well as hardware,
the type testing process is very complicated and more
involved than a static or electromechanical relay.
371
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 372
21.1.2 Routine Factory Production Tests

These are conducted to prove that relays are free from
defects during manufacture. Testing will take place at
several stages during manufacture, to ensure problems
are discovered at the earliest possible time and hence
minimise remedial work. The extent of testing will be
determined by the complexity of the relay and past
manufacturing experience.
would take 4 years to write the functional type-test

specifications, 30 years to perform the tests and several
years to write the test reports that result. Automated
techniques/ equipment are clearly required, and are
covered in Section 21.7.2.
Element
I>1
I>2
Directionality
RCA
Characteristic
Definite Time Delay
Range
0.08 - 4.00In
0.08 - 32In
Forward/Reverse/Non-directional
-95 to +95
DT/IDMT
0 - 100s
IEC Standard Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC IDMT Time Delay
IEC Extremely Inverse
UK Long Time Inverse
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
0.025 - 1.2
IEEE Very Inverse
IEEE IDMT Time Delay
IEEE Extremely Inverse
US-CO8 Inverse
US-CO2 Short Time Inverse
Time Dial (TD)
0.5 - 15
IEC Reset Time (DT only)
0 - 100s
IEEE Reset Time
IDMT/DT
IEEE DT Reset Time
0 - 100s
IEEE Very Inverse
IEEE IDMT Reset Time
IEEE Extremely Inverse
US-CO8 Inverse
US-CO2 Short Time Inverse
21.1.3 Commissioning Tests
R e l a y Te s t i n g a n d C o m m i s s i o n i n g
These tests are designed to prove that a particular

protection scheme has been installed correctly prior to
setting to work. All aspects of the scheme are
thoroughly checked, from installation of the correct
equipment through wiring checks and operation checks
of the individual items of equipment, finishing with
testing of the complete scheme.
21.1.4 Periodic Maintenance Checks

These are required to identify equipment failures and
degradation in service, so that corrective action can be
taken. Because a protection scheme only operates under
fault conditions, defects may not be revealed for a
significant period of time, until a fault occurs. Regular
testing assists in detecting faults that would otherwise
remain undetected until a fault occurs.
21
1
0.01s
0.025
0.1
0.01s
0.01s
Table 21.1: Overcurrent relay element specification
21.2 ELECTRICAL TYPE TESTS

Various electrical type tests must be performed, as
follows:
21.2.1 Functional Tests
Step Size
0.01In
0.01In
The functional tests consist of applying the appropriate

inputs to the relay under test and measuring the
performance to determine if it meets the specification.
They are usually carried out under controlled
environmental conditions. The testing may be extensive,
even where only a simple relay function is being tested.,
as can be realised by considering the simple overcurrent
relay element of Table 21.1.
To determine compliance with the specification, the tests
listed in Table 21.2 are required to be carried out. This is
a time consuming task, involving many engineers and
technicians. Hence it is expensive.
When a modern numerical relay with many functions is
considered, each of which has to be type-tested, the
functional type-testing involved is a major issue. In the
case of a recent relay development project, it was
calculated that if one person had to do all the work, it
Test 1
Three phase non-directional pick up and drop off accuracy

over complete current setting range for both stages
Test 2
Three phase directional pick up and drop off accuracy

over complete RCA setting range in the forward direction,
current angle sweep
Test 3

over complete RCA setting range in the reverse direction,
current angle sweep
Test 4

over complete RCA setting range in the forward direction,
voltage angle sweep
Test 5

over complete RCA setting range in the reverse direction,
voltage angle sweep
Test 6
Three phase polarising voltage threshold test
Test 7
Accuracy of DT timer over complete setting range
Test 8
Accuracy of IDMT curves over claimed accuracy range
Test 9
Accuracy of IDMT TMS/TD
Test 10
Effect of changing fault current on IDMT operating times
Test 11
Minimum Pick-Up of Starts and Trips for IDMT curves
Test 12
Accuracy of reset timers
Test 13
Effect of any blocking signals, opto inputs, VTS, Autoreclose
Test 14
Voltage polarisation memory
Table 21.2: Overcurrent relay element functional type tests
372
20/06/02
16:04
Page 373
21.2.2 Rating Tests

Rating type tests are conducted to ensure that
components are used within their specified ratings and
that there are no fire or electric shock hazards under a
normal load or fault condition of the power system. This
is in addition to checking that the product complies with
its technical specification. The following are amongst
the rating type tests conducted on protection relays, the
specified parameters are normally to IEC 60255-6.
21.2.3 Thermal Withstand

The thermal withstand of VTs, CTs and output contact
circuits is determined to ensure compliance with the
specified continuous and short-term overload conditions.
In addition to functional verification, the pass criterion is
that there is no detrimental effect on the relay assembly,
or circuit components, when the product is subjected to
overload conditions that may be expected in service.
Thermal withstand is assessed over a time period of 1s
for CTs and 10s for VTs.
21.2.4 Relay Burden

The burdens of the auxiliary supply, optically isolated
inputs, VTs and CTs are measured to check that the
product complies with its specification. The burden of
products with a high number of input/output circuits is
application specific i.e. it increases according to the
number of optically isolated input and output contact
ports which are energised under normal power system
load conditions. It is usually envisaged that not more
than 50% of such ports will be energised in any
application.
21.2.5 Relay Inputs

Relay inputs are tested over the specified ranges. Inputs
include those for auxiliary voltage, VT, CT, frequency,
optically isolated digital inputs and communication
circuits.
seconds. This is carried out between all circuits and case

earth, between all independent circuits and across
normally open contacts. The acceptance criterion for a
product in new condition is a minimum of 100M. After
a damp heat test the pass criterion is a minimum of
10M.
21.2.7 Auxiliary Supplies

Digital and numerical protection relays normally require
an auxiliary supply to provide power to the on-board
microprocessor circuitry and the interfacing optoisolated input circuits and output relays. The auxiliary
supply can be either a.c. or d.c., supplied from a number
of sources or safe supplies - i.e. batteries, UPS,
generators, etc., all of which may be subject to voltage
dips, short interruptions and voltage variations. Relays
are designed to ensure that operation is maintained and
no damage occurs during a disturbance of the auxiliary
supply.
Tests are carried out for both a.c. and d.c. auxiliary
supplies and include mains variation both above and
below the nominal rating, supply interruptions derived by
open circuit and short circuit, supply dips as a
percentage of the nominal supply, repetitive starts. The
duration of the interruptions and supply dips range from
2ms to 60s intervals. A short supply interruption or dip
up to 20ms, possibly longer, should not cause any
malfunction of the relay. Malfunctions include the
operation of output relays and watchdog contacts, the
reset of microprocessors, alarm or trip indication,
acceptance of corrupted data over the communication
link and the corruption of stored data or settings. For a
longer supply interruption, or dip in excess of 20ms, the
relay self recovers without the loss of any function, data,
settings or corruption of data. No operator intervention
is required to restore operation after an interruption or
dip in the supply. Many relays have a specification that
exceeds this requirement, tolerating dips of up to 50ms
without operation being affected.
21.2.6 Relay Output Contacts
In addition to the above, the relay is subjected to a number

of repetitive starts or a sequence of supply interruptions.
Again the relay is tested to ensure that no damage or data
corruption has occurred during the repetitive tests.
Protection relay output contacts are type tested to

ensure that they comply with the product specification.
Particular withstand and endurance type tests have to be
carried out using d.c., since the normal supply is via a
station battery.
Specific tests carried out on d.c. auxiliary supplies

include reverse polarity, a.c. waveform superimposed on
the d.c. supply and the effect of a rising and decaying
auxiliary voltage. All tests are carried out at various
levels of loading of the relay auxiliary supply.
21.2.7 Insulation Resistance
21.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY TESTS
The insulation resistance test is carried out according to

IEC 60255-5, i.e. 500V d.c. 10%, for a minimum of 5
There are numerous tests that are carried out to

determine the ability of relays to withstand the electrical
373
Chap21-370-397
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 374
environment in which they are installed. The substation

environment is a very severe environment in terms of the
electrical and electromagnetic interference that can
arise. There are many sources of interference within a
substation, some originating internally, others being
conducted along the overhead lines or cables into the
substation from external disturbances. The most
common sources are:
a. switching operations
b. system faults
c. lightning strikes
d. conductor flashover
e. telecommunication operations e.g. mobile phones
21
The ability of equipment to co-exist in the same

electromagnetic environment
It is not a new subject and has been tested for by the
military ever since the advent of electronic equipment. EMC
can cause real and serious problems, and does need to be
taken into account when designing electronic equipment.
EMC tests determine the impact on the relay under test
of high-frequency electrical disturbances of various
kinds. Relays manufactured or intended for use in the
EEC have to comply with EEC Directive 89/336/EEC in
this respect. To achieve this, in addition to designing for
statutory compliance to this Directive, the following
range of tests are carried out:
The relay is powered from a battery supply, and both

short circuit and open circuit interruptions are carried
out. Each interruption is applied 10 times, and for
auxiliary power supplies with a large operating range,
the tests are performed at minimum, maximum, and
other voltages across this range, to ensure compliance
over the complete range.
21.3.2 A.C. Ripple on D.C. Supply

This test (IEC 60255-11) determines that the relay is able
to operate correctly with a superimposed a.c. voltage on
the d.c. supply. This is caused by the station battery being
charged by the battery charger, and the relevant waveform
is shown in Figure 21.1. It consists of a 12% peak-to-peak
ripple superimposed on the d.c. supply voltage.
60.00
a. d.c. interrupt test
50.00
b. a.c. ripple on d.c. supply test
40.00
c. d.c. ramp test

d. high frequency disturbance test
30.00
20.00
10.00
e. fast transient test
0.00
f. surge immunity test
1
88
175
262
349
436
523
610
697
784
871
958
1045
1132
1219
1306
1393
Broadly speaking, EMC can be defined as:
It simulates the effect of a loose fuse in the battery

circuit, or a short circuit in the common d.c. supply,
interrupted by a fuse. Another source of d.c. interruption
is if there is a power system fault and the battery is
supplying both the relay and the circuit breaker trip coils.
When the battery energises the coils to initiate the
circuit breaker trip, the voltage may fall below the
required level for operation of the relay and hence a d.c.
interrupt occurs. The test is specified in IEC 60255-11
and comprises a interruptions of 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 and
200ms. For interruptions lasting up to and including
20ms, the relay must not de-energise of maloperate,
while for longer interruptions it must not maloperate.
Voltage (V)
A whole suite of tests are performed to simulate these

types of interference, and they fall under the broad
umbrella of what is known as EMC, or Electromagnetic
Compatibility tests.
that the relay can withstand an interruption in the

auxiliary supply without de-energising, e.g. switching
off, and that when this time is exceeded and it does
transiently switch off, that no maloperation occurs.
g. power frequency interference test
Time (ms)
h. electrostatic discharge test
Figure 21.1: A.C. ripple superimposed on d.c.

supply test
i. conducted and radiated emissions tests

j. conducted and radiated immunity tests
k. power frequency magnetic field tests
21.3.1 D.C Interrupt Test

This is a test to determine the maximum length of time
For auxiliary power supplies with a large operating range,

the tests are performed at minimum, maximum, and
other voltages across this range, to ensure compliance
for the complete range. The interference is applied using
a full wave rectifier network, connected in parallel with
the battery supply. The relay must continue to operate
without malfunction during the test.
374
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 375
21.3.3 D.C. Ramp Down/Ramp Up
Burst period, 300 ms
This test simulates a failed station battery charger, which

would result in the auxiliary voltage to the relay slowly
ramping down. The ramp up part simulates the battery
being recharged after discharging. The relay must power
up cleanly when the voltage is applied and not
maloperate.
Burst duration (1/15 ms)
t
V
There is no international standard for this test, so individual

manufacturers can decide if they wish to conduct such a
test and what the test specification shall be.
5 ns rise time, 50 ns pulse width
Repetition period
Figure 21.3: Fast Transient Test waveform
21.3.4 High Frequency Disturbance Test
0
Time
Figure 21.2: High Frequency Disturbance

Test waveform
The product is energised in both normal (quiescent) and

tripped modes for this test. It must not maloperate when
the interference is applied in common mode via the
integral coupling network to each circuit in turn, for 60
seconds. Interference is coupled onto communications
circuits, if required, using an external capacitive coupling
clamp.
21.3.6 Surge Immunity Test

The Surge Immunity Test simulates interference caused
by major power system disturbances such as capacitor
bank switching and lightning strikes on overhead lines
within 5km of the substation. The test waveform has an
open circuit voltage of 4kV for common mode surges and
2kV for differential mode surges. The test waveshape
consists on open circuit of a 1.2/50ms rise/fall time and
a short circuit current of 8/20ms rise/fall time. The
generator is capable of providing a short circuit test
current of up to 2kA, making this test potentially
destructive. The surges are applied sequentially under
software control via dedicated coupling networks in both
differential and common modes with the product
energised in its normal (quiescent) state. The product
shall not maloperate during the test, shall still operate
within specification after the test sequence and shall not
incur any permanent damage.
21.3.5 Fast Transient Test
21.3.7 Power Frequency Interference
The Fast Transient Test simulates the HV interference

caused by disconnector operations in GIS substations or
breakdown of the SF6 insulation between conductors
and the earthed enclosure. This interference can either
be inductively coupled onto relay circuits or can be
directly introduced via the CT or VT inputs. It consists of
a series of 15ms duration bursts at 300ms intervals, each
burst consisting of a train of 50ns wide pulses with very
fast (5ns typical) rise times (Figure 21.3), with a peak
voltage magnitude of 4kV.
This test simulates the type of interference that is caused

when there is a power system fault and very high levels
of fault current flow in the primary conductors or the
earth grid. This causes 50 or 60Hz interference to be
induced onto control and communications circuits.
Voltage
The High Frequency Disturbance Test simulates high

voltage transients that result from power system faults
and plant switching operations. It consists of a 1MHz
decaying sinusoidal waveform, as shown in Figure 21.2.
The interference is applied across each independent
circuit (differential mode) and between each
independent circuit and earth (common mode) via an
external coupling and switching network. The product is
energised in both normal (quiescent) and tripped modes
for this test, and must not maloperate when the
interference is applied for a 2 second duration.
There is no international standard for this test, but one

used by some Utilities is:
375
a. 500V r.m.s., common mode

b. 250V r.m.s., differential mode
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 376
applied to circuits for which power system inputs are not

connected.
Tests are carried out on each circuit, with the relay in the
following modes of operation:
1. current and voltage applied at 90% of setting,
(relay not tripped)
(relay tripped)
3. main protection and communications functions
are tested to determine the effect of the
interference
The relay shall not maloperate during the test, and shall still
perform its main functions within the claimed tolerance.
21
This test simulates the type of high voltage interference

that occurs when an operator touches the relays front
panel after being charged to a high potential. This is exactly
the same phenomenon as getting an electric shock when
stepping out of a car or after walking on a synthetic fibre
carpet.
In this case the discharge is only ever applied to the front
panel of the relay, with the cover both on and off. Two
types of discharges are applied, air discharge and contact
discharge. Air discharges are used on surfaces that are
normally insulators, and contact discharges are used on
surfaces that are normally conducting. IEC 60255-22-2
is the relevant standard this test, for which the test
parameters are:
a. cover on: Class 4, 8kV contact discharge, 15kV air
discharge
b. cover off: Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air
discharge
In both cases above, all the lower test levels are also
tested.
The discharge current waveform is shown in Figure 21.4.
Current, % of Peak
21.3.8 Electrostatic Discharge Test
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Rise Time = 0.7 to 1.0 ns.

Current specified for 30 ns and 60 ns
10
20
30
40 50
Time, ns
60
70
80

(relay not tripped)
(relay tripped)
3. main protection and communications functions
are tested to determine the effect of the discharge
To pass, the relay shall not maloperate, and shall still
perform its main functions within the claimed tolerance.
21.3.9 Conducted and Radiated Emissions Tests

These tests arise primarily from the essential protection
requirements of the European Community (EU) directive
on EMC. These require manufacturers to ensure that any
equipment to be sold in the countries comprising the
European Union must not interfere with other
equipment. To achieve this it is necessary to measure the
emissions from the equipment and ensure that they are
below the specified limits.
Conducted emissions are measured only from the
equipments power supply ports and are to ensure that when
connected to a mains network, the equipment does not inject
interference back into the network which could adversely
affect the other equipment connected to the network.
Radiated emissions measurements are to ensure that the
interference radiated from the equipment is not at a
level that could cause interference to other equipment.
This test is normally carried out on an Open Area Test
Site (OATS) where there are no reflecting structures or
sources of radiation, and therefore the measurements
obtained are a true indication of the emission spectrum
of the relay. An example of a plot obtained during
conducted emissions tests is shown in Figure 21.5.
The test arrangements for the conducted and radiated
emissions tests are shown in Figure 21.6.
When performing these two tests, the relay is in a
quiescent condition, that is not tripped, with currents
and voltages applied at 90% of the setting values. This
is because for the majority of its life, the relay will be in
the quiescent state and the emission of electromagnetic
interference when the relay is tripped is considered to be
of no significance. Tests are conducted in accordance
with IEC 60255-25 and EN 50081-2, and are detailed in
Table 21.3.
90
Frequency Range
30 - 230MHz
Figure 21.4: ESD Current Waveform
Radiated
230 - 1000MHz
The test is performed with single discharges repeated on

each test point 10 times with positive polarity and 10
times with negative polarity at each test level. The time
interval between successive discharges is greater than 1
second. Tests are carried out at each level, with the relay
in the following modes of operation:
0.15 - 0.5MHz
Conducted
0.5 - 30MHz
Specified Limits
30dB(V/m)
at 30m
37dB(V/m)
at 30m
79dB(V)
quasi-peak
66dB(V) average
73dB(V)
quasi-peak
60dB(V) average
Test Limits
40dB(V/m)
at 10m
47dB(V/m)
at 10m
79dB(V)
quasi-peak
66dB(V) average
73dB(V)
quasi-peak
60dB(V) average
Table 21.3: Test criteria for Conducted and

Radiated Emissions tests
376
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 377
100
90
Quasi-peak limits
80
Average limits
Emissions Level, dBuV
70
Typical trace
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.1
10
Frequency, MHz
100
Figure 21.5: Conducted Emissions Test Plot
Screened room
Ante-chamber
Access panel
E.U.T.
Impedance network
Support/analysis
equipment
(a) Conducted EMC emissions test arrangement
10m
Antenna
E.U.T.
Turntable
Earth Plane
(b) Radiated Emissions test arrangement on an OATS

E.U.T. - Equipment under test
Figure 21.6: EMC test arrangements
377
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:04
Page 378
21.3.10 Conducted and Radiated Immunity Tests

These tests are designed to ensure that the equipment is
immune to levels of interference that it may be subjected
to. The two tests, conducted and radiated, arise from the
fact that for a conductor to be an efficient antenna, it
must have a length of at least 1/4 of the wavelength of
the electromagnetic wave it is required to conduct.
operate their radios/mobile phones without fear of relay

maloperation.
IEC 60255-22-3 specifies the radiated immunity tests to
be conducted (ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 is used for equipment
built to US standards), with signal levels of:
1. IEC: Class III, 10V/m, 80MHz -1000MHz
2. ANSI/IEEE: 35V/m 25MHz - 1000MHz with no
modulation, and again with 100% pulse
modulation
If a relay were to be subjected to radiated interference at

150kHz, then a conductor length of at least
= 300 x106/(150 x 103 x 4)
IEC 60255-22-6 is used for the conducted immunity test,

with a test level of:
= 500 m
21
would be needed to conduct the interference. Even with

all the cabling attached and with the longest PCB track
length taken into account, it would be highly unlikely
that the relay would be able to conduct radiation of this
frequency, and the test therefore, would have no effect.
The interference has to be physically introduced by
conduction, hence the conducted immunity test.
However, at the radiated immunity lower frequency limit
of 80MHz, a conductor length of approximately 1.0m is
required. At this frequency, radiated immunity tests can
be performed with the confidence that the relay will
conduct this interference, through a combination of the
attached cabling and the PCB tracks.
Although the test standards state that all 6 faces of the
equipment should be subjected to the interference, in
practice this is not carried out. Applying interference to
the sides and top and bottom of the relay would have
little effect as the circuitry inside is effectively screened
by the earthed metal case. However, the front and rear
of the relay are not completely enclosed by metal and are
therefore not at all well screened, and can be regarded as
an EMC hole. Electromagnetic interference when
directed at the front and back of the relay can enter
freely onto the PCBs inside.
Class III, 10V r.m.s., 150kHz - 80MHz.
21.3.11 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Tests

These tests are designed to ensure that the equipment is
immune to magnetic interference. The three tests,
steady state, pulsed and damped oscillatory magnetic
field, arise from the fact that for different site conditions
the level and waveshape is altered.
23.3.11.1 Steady state magnetic field tests
These tests simulate the magnetic field that would be
experienced by a device located within close proximity of
the power system. Testing is carried out by subjecting
the relay to a magnetic field generated by two induction
coils. The relay is rotated such that in each axis it is
subjected to the full magnetic field strength. IEC 610004-6 is the relevant standard, using a signal level of:
Level 5: 300A/m continuous and 1000A/m short duration
The test arrangement is shown in Figure 21.7.
When performing these two tests, the relay is in a

quiescent condition, that is not tripped, with currents
and voltages applied at 90% of the setting values. This
is because for the majority of its life, the relay will be in
the quiescent state and the coincidence of an
electromagnetic disturbance and a fault is considered to
be unlikely.
Induction coil
Induction coil
E.U.T.
However, spot checks are performed at selected

frequencies when the main protection and control
functions of the relay are exercised, to ensure that it will
operate as expected, should it be required to do so.
The frequencies for the spot checks are in general
selected to coincide with the radio frequency broadcast
bands, and in particular, the frequencies of mobile
communications equipment used by personnel working
in the substation. This is to ensure that when working in
the vicinity of a relay, the personnel should be able to
378
Ground plane
E.U.T. - Equipment under test

Figure 21.7: Power frequency magnetic
field set-up
20/06/02
16:04
Page 379
To pass the steady-state test, the relay shall not

maloperate, and shall still perform its main functions
within the claimed tolerance. During the application of
the short duration test, the main protection function
shall be exercised and verified that the operating
characteristics of the relay are unaffected.
21.3.11.2 Pulsed magnetic field
the power system during a transient fault condition.
According to IEC 61000-4-9, the generator for the
induction coils shall produce a 6.4/16s waveshape with
test level 5, 100A/m with the equipment configured as
for the steady state magnetic field test. The relay shall
not maloperate, and shall still perform its main functions
within the claimed tolerance during the test.
21.3.11.3 Damped oscillatory magnetic field
the power system during a transient fault condition. IEC
61000-4-10 specifies that the generator for the coil shall
produce an oscillatory waveshape with a frequency of
0.1MHz and 1MHz, to give a signal level in accordance
with Level 5 of 100A/m, and the equipment shall be
configured as in Figure 21.7.
21.4 PRODUCT SAFETY TYPE TESTS
3. 1.0kV r.m.s., 50/60Hz for 1 minute across the

normally open contacts of watchdog or
changeover output relays, in accordance with IEC
60255-5
The routine dielectric voltage withstand test time may be
shorter than for the 1 minute type test time, to allow a
reasonable production throughput, e.g. for a minimum of
1 second at 110% of the voltage specified for 1 minute.
21.4.2 Insulation Withstand for Overvoltages

The purpose of the High Voltage Impulse Withstand type
test is to ensure that circuits and their components will
withstand overvoltages on the power system caused by
lightning. Three positive and three negative high voltage
impulses, 5kV peak, are applied between all circuits and
the case earth and also between the terminals of
independent circuits (but not across normally open
contacts). As before, different requirements apply in the
case of circuits using D-type connectors.
The test generator characteristics are as specified in IEC
60255-5 and are shown in Figure 21.8. No disruptive
discharge (i.e. flashover or puncture) is allowed.
If it is necessary to repeat either the Dielectric Voltage or
High Voltage Impulse Withstand tests these should be
carried out at 75% of the specified level, in accordance
with IEC 60255-5, to avoid overstressing insulation and
components.
Voltage
A number of tests are carried out to demonstrate that

the product is safe when used for its intended
application. The essential requirements are that the
relay is safe and will not cause an electric shock or fire
hazard under normal conditions and in the presence of a
single fault. A number of specific tests to prove this may
be carried out, as follows.
open contacts intended for connection to tripping

circuits, in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.90
21.4.1 Dielectric Voltage Withstand

Dielectric Voltage Withstand testing is carried out as a
routine test i.e. on every unit prior to despatch. The
purpose of this test is to ensure that the product build is
as intended by design. This is done by verifying the
clearance in air, thus ensuring that the product is safe to
operate under normal use conditions. The following tests
are conducted unless otherwise specified in the product
documentation:
1. 2.0kV r.m.s., 50/60Hz for 1 minute between all
terminals and case earth and also between
independent circuits, in accordance with IEC
60255-5. Some communication circuits are
excluded from this test, or have modified test
requirements e.g. those using D-type connectors
2. 1.5kV r.m.s., 50/60Hz for 1 minute across normally
Chap21-370-397
5kV peak
Rise time (10 % to 90 %) = 1.2 s
Duration (50 %) = 50 s
Time
Figure 21.8: Test generator characteristics

for insulation withstand test
21.4.3 Single Fault Condition Assessment

An assessment is made of whether a single fault
condition such as an overload, or an open or short circuit,
applied to the product may cause an electric shock or fire
379
21
20/06/02
16:08
Page 380
hazard. In the case of doubt, type testing is carried out

to ensure that the product is safe.
21.4.4 Earth Bonding Impedance

Class 1 products that rely on a protective earth
connection for safety are subjected to an earth bonding
impedance (EBI) type test. This ensures that the earth
path between the protective earth connection and any
accessible earthed part is sufficiently low to avoid
damage in the event of a single fault occurring. The test
is conducted using a test voltage of 12V maximum and a
test current of twice the recommended maximum
protective fuse rating. After 1 minute with the current
flowing in the circuit under test, the EBI shall not exceed
0.1.
A CE mark on the product, or its packaging, shows that

compliance is claimed against relevant European
Community directives e.g. Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Directive 89/336/EEC.
The humidity test is performed to ensure that the

product will withstand and operate correctly when
subjected to 93% relative humidity at a constant
temperature of 40C for 56 days. Tests are performed to
ensure that the product functions correctly within
specification after 21 and 56 days. After the test, visual
inspections are made for any signs of unacceptable
corrosion and mould growth.
21.5.3 Cyclic Temperature/Humidity Test

This is a short-term test that stresses the relay by
subjecting it to temperature cycling in conjunction with
high humidity.
The test does not replace the 56 day humidity test, but is
used for testing extension to ranges or minor
modifications to prove that the design is unaffected.
The applicable standard is IEC 60068-2-30 and test
conditions of:
+25C 3C and 95% relative humidity/+55C 2C and
95% relative humidity
are used, over the 24 hour cycle shown in Figure 21.9.
21.5 ENVIRONMENTAL TYPE TESTS

Various tests have to be conducted to prove that a relay
can withstand the effects of the environment in which it
is expected to work. They consist of: the following tests:
21
96%
95%
95%
90%
80%
15min
End of temperature
rise
temperature
Time
+55C
1. temperature
2. humidity
3. enclosure protection
4. mechanical
100
90
80
70
Ambient Temperature C
21.4.5 CE Marking
21.5.2 Humidity Test
Relative humidity %
Chap21-370-397
These tests are described in the following sections.
0.5h
+28C
+25C
3h
3h
12h0.5h
21.5.1 Temperature Test
+22C
Time
6h
24h
Temperature tests are performed to ensure that a

product can withstand extremes in temperatures, both
hot and cold, during transit, storage and operating
conditions. Storage and transit conditions are defined as
a temperature range of 25C to +70C and operating as
25C to +55C.
Dry heat withstand tests are performed at 70C for 96
hours with the relay de-energised. Cold withstand tests
are performed at 40C for 96 hours with the relay deenergised. Operating range tests are carried out with the
product energised, checking all main functions operate
within tolerance over the specified working temperature
range 25C to +55C.
Figure 21.9: Cyclic temperature/humidity

test profile
For these tests the relay is placed in a humidity cabinet,

and energised with normal in-service quantities for the
complete duration of the tests. In practical terms this
usually means energising the relay with currents and
voltages such that it is 10% from the threshold for
operation. Throughout the duration of the test the relay is
monitored to ensure that no unwanted operations occur.
Once the relay is removed from the humidity cabinet, its
insulation resistance is measured to ensure that it has
not deteriorated to below the claimed level. The relay is
then functionally tested again, and finally dismantled to
380
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:08
Page 381
check for signs of component corrosion and growth.

The acceptance criterion is that no unwanted operations
shall occur including transient operation of indicating
devices. After the test the relays insulation resistance
should not have significantly reduced, and it should
perform all of its main protection and communications
functions within the claimed tolerance. The relay should
also suffer no significant corrosion or growth, and
photographs are usually taken of each PCB and the case
as a record of this.
21.5.4 Enclosure Protection Test

Figure 21.10: Relay undergoing seismic test
1.2A
A
0.8A
Pulse shape (half sine)
+0.2A
0
-0.2A
0.4D
21.5.5 Mechanical Tests
2.5D
Mechanical tests simulate a number of different

mechanical conditions that the product may have to
endure during its lifetime. These fall into two categories
6D = T2
D - duration of nominal pulse
A - peak acceleration of nominal pulse
T1- minimum time for monitoring of pulse when conventional
shock/bump machine is used
T2 - as T1 when a vibration generator is used
b. response to disturbances during transportation

(de-energised state)
Tests in the first category are concerned with the
response to vibration, shock and seismic disturbance.
The tests are designed to simulate normal in-service
conditions for the product, for example earthquakes.
These tests are performed in all three axes, with the
product energised in its normal (quiescent) state. During
the test, all output contacts are continually monitored
for change using contact follower circuits. Vibration
levels of 1gn, over a 10Hz-150Hz frequency sweep are
used. Seismic tests use excitation in a single axis, using
a test frequency of 35Hz and peak displacements of
7.5mm and 3.5mm in the x and y axes respectively below
the crossover frequency and peak accelerations of 2.0gn
and 1.0gn in these axes above the crossover frequency.
The second category consists of vibration endurance,
shock withstand and bump tests. They are designed to
simulate the longer-term affects of shock and vibration
that could occur during transportation. These tests are
performed with the product de-energised. After these
tests, the product must still operate within its
specification and show no signs of permanent
mechanical damage. Equipment undergoing a seismic
type test is shown in Figure 21.10, while the waveform
for the shock/bump test is shown in Figure 21.11
2.5D
2.4D = T1
a. response to disturbances while energised
Enclosure protection tests prove that the casing system

and connectors on the product protect against the ingress
of dust, moisture, water droplets (striking the case at predefined angles) and other pollutants. An acceptable level
of dust or water may penetrate the case during testing,
but must not impair normal product operation, safety or
cause tracking across insulated parts of connectors.
Figure 21.11: Shock/Bump Impulse waveform
The test levels for shock and bump tests are:

Shock response (energised):
3 pulses, each 10g, 11ms duration
Shock withstand (de-energised):
3 pulses, 15g, 11ms duration
Bump (de-energised):
1000 pulses, 10g, 16ms duration
21.6 SOFTWARE TYPE TESTS

Digital and numerical relays contain software to
implement the protection and measurement functions of
a relay. This software must be thoroughly tested, to
ensure that the relay complies with all specifications and
that disturbances of various kinds do not result in
unexpected results. Software is tested in various stages:
381
a. unit testing
b. integration testing
c. functional qualification testing
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:08
Page 382
The purpose of unit testing is to determine if an

individual function or procedure implemented using
software, or small group of closely related functions, is
free of data, logic, or standards errors. It is much easier
to detect these types of errors in individual units or small
groups of units than it is in an integrated software
architecture and/or system. Unit testing is typically
performed against the software detailed design and by
the developer of the unit(s).
Integration testing typically focuses on these interfaces

and also issues such as performance, timings and
synchronisation that are not applicable in unit testing.
Integration testing also focuses on stressing the
software and related interfaces.
Integration testing is black box in nature, i.e. it does not
take into account the structure of individual units. It is
typically performed against the software architectural
and detailed design. The specified software requirements
would typically also be used as a source for some of the
test cases.
21
Both Dynamic and Static Unit Testing are performed in

the host environment rather than the target
environment. Dynamic Unit Testing uses a test harness
to execute the unit(s) concerned. The test harness is
designed such that it simulates the interfaces of the
unit(s) being tested - both software-software interfaces
and software-hardware interfaces - using what are
known as stubs. The test harness provides the test data
to those units being tested and outputs the test results
in a form understandable to a developer. There are many
commercially available testing tools to automate test
harness production and the execution of tests.
21.6.4 Software/Software Integration Testing

Software/Software Integration Testing is performed in
the host environment. It uses a test harness to simulate
inputs and outputs, hardware calls and system calls (e.g.
the target environment operating system).
21.6.5 Software/Hardware Integration Testing

21.6.1 Static Unit Testing
Static Unit Testing (or static analysis as it is often called)
analyses the unit(s) source code for complexity, precision
tracking, initialisation checking, value tracking, strong
type checking, macro analysis etc. While Static Unit
Testing can be performed manually, it is a laborious and
error prone process and is best performed using a
proprietary automated static unit analysis tool. It is
important to ensure that any such tool is configured
correctly and used consistently during development.
21.6.2 Dynamic Testing
21.6.3 Unit Testing Environment
Software/Hardware Integration Testing is performed in

the target environment, i.e. it uses the actual target
hardware, operating system, drivers etc. It is usually
performed after Software/Software Integration Testing.
Testing the interfaces to the hardware is an important
feature of Software/Hardware Integration Testing.
Test cases for Integration Testing are typically based on
those defined for Validation Testing. However the
emphasis should be on finding errors and problems.
Performing a dry run of the validation testing often
completes Integration Testing.
21.6.6 Validation Testing
Dynamic Testing is concerned with the runtime

behaviour of the unit(s) being tested and so therefore,
the unit(s) must be executed. Dynamic unit testing can
be sub-divided into black box testing and white box
testing. Black box testing verifies the implementation
of the requirement(s) allocated to the unit(s). It takes no
account of the internal structure of the unit(s) being
tested. It is only concerned with providing known inputs
and determining if the outputs from the unit(s) are
correct for those inputs. White box testing is concerned
with testing the internal structure of the unit(s) and
measuring the test coverage, i.e. how much of the code
within the unit(s) has been executed during the tests.
The objective of the unit testing may, for example, be to
achieve 100% statement coverage, in which every line of
the code is executed at least once, or to execute every
possible path through the unit(s) at least once.
The purpose of Validation Testing (also known as

Software Acceptance Testing) is to verify that the
software meets its specified functional requirements.
Validation Testing is performed against the software
requirements specification, using the target
environment.
In ideal circumstances, someone
independent of the software development performs the
tests. Validation Testing is black box in nature, i.e. it
does not take into account the internal structure of the
software. For relays, the non-protection functions
included in the software are considered to be as
important as the protection functions, and hence tested
in the same manner.
Each validation test should have predefined evaluation
criteria, to be used to decide if the test has passed or
failed. The evaluation criteria should be explicit with no
room for interpretation or ambiguity.
382
20/06/02
16:08
Page 383
Power system simulators can be divided into two types:
21.6.7 Traceability of Validation Tests
a. those which use analogue models of a power

system
Traceability of validation tests to software requirements

is vital. Each software requirement documented in the
software requirements specification should have at least
one validation test, and it is important to be able to
prove this.
21.7.1 Use of Power System Analogue Models
21.6.8 Software Modifications - Regression Testing

Regression Testing is not a type test in its own right. It
is the overall name given to the testing performed when
an existing software product is changed. The purpose of
Regression Testing is to show that unintended changes
to the functionality (i.e. errors and defects) have not
been introduced.
Each change to an existing software product must be
considered in its own right. It is impossible to specify a
standard set of regression tests that can be applied as a
catch-all for introduced errors and defects. Each
change to the software must be analysed to determine
what risk there might be of unintentional changes to the
functionality being introduced. Those areas of highest
risk will need to be regression tested. The ultimate
regression test is to perform the complete Validation
Testing programme again, updated to take account of
the changes made.
Regression Testing is extremely important. If it is not
performed, there is a high risk of errors being found in
the field. Performing it will not reduce to zero the
chance of an error or defect remaining in the software,
but it will reduce it. Determining the Regression Testing
that is required is made much easier if there is
traceability from properly documented software
requirements through design (again properly
documented and up to date), coding and testing.
21.7 DYNAMIC VALIDATION TYPE TESTING

There are two possible methods of dynamically proving
the satisfactory performance of protection relays or
schemes; the first method is by actually applying faults
on the power system and the second is to carry out
comprehensive testing on a power system simulator.
The former method is extremely unlikely to be used
lead times are lengthy and the risk of damage occurring
makes the tests very expensive. It is therefore only used
on a very limited basis and the faults applied are
restricted in number and type. Because of this, a proving
period for new protection equipment under service
conditions has usually been required. As faults may
occur on the power system at infrequent intervals, it can
take a number of years before any possible shortcomings
are discovered, during which time further installations
may have occurred.
b. those which model the power system

mathematically using digital simulation techniques
For many years, relays have been tested on analogue models

of power systems such as artificial transmission lines, or test
plant capable of supplying significant amounts of current
[21.1]. However, these approaches have significant
limitations in the current and voltage waveforms that can
be generated, and are not suitable for automated,
unattended, testing programmes. While still used on a
limited basis for testing electromechanical and static relays,
a radically different approach is required for dynamic
testing of numerical relays.
Chap21-370-397
21.7.2 Use of Microprocessor Based Simulation

Equipment
The complexity of numerical relays, reliant on software
for implementation of the functions included, dictates
some kind of automated test equipment. The functions
of even a simple numerical overcurrent relay (including
all auxiliary functions) can take several months of
automated, 24 hours/day testing to test completely. If
such test equipment was able to apply realistic current
and voltage waveforms that closely match those found
on power systems during fault conditions, the equipment
can be used either for type testing of individual relay
designs or of a complete protection scheme designed for
a specific application. In recognition of this, a new
generation of power system simulators has been
developed, which is capable of providing a far more
accurate simulation of power system conditions than has
been possible in the past. The simulator enables relays
to be tested under a wide range of system conditions,
representing the equivalent of many years of site
experience.
21.7.2.1 Simulation hardware
Equipment is now available to provide high-speed, highly
accurate modelling of a section of a power system. The
equipment is based on distributed microprocessor-based
hardware containing software models of the various
elements of a power system, and is shown in Figure 21.12.
The modules have outputs linked to current and voltage
sources that have a similar transient capability and have
suitable output levels for direct connection to the inputs
of relays i.e. 110V for voltage and 1A/5A for current.
Inputs are also provided to monitor the response of relays
under test (contact closures for tripping, etc.) and these
inputs can be used as part of the model of the power
383
21
Chap21-370-397
21
20/06/02
16:08
Page 384
Figure 21.12: Digital power system simulator

for relay/protection scheme testing
system. The software is also capable of modelling the

dynamic response of CTs and VTs accurately.
Where it is desired to check the response of a relay or
protection scheme to an actual power system transient,
the transient can be simulated using sophisticated power
systems analysis software and the results transferred
digitally to the simulator, or the event recorder recording
of the transient can be used, in either digital or analogue
form as inputs to the simulator model. Output signal
conversion involves circuits to eliminate the quantisation
steps normally found in conventional D/A conversion.
Analogue models of the system transducer
characteristics can be interposed between the signal
processors and the output amplifiers when required.
This equipment shows many advantages over traditional
test equipment:
a. the power system model is capable of reproducing
high frequency transients such as travelling waves
b. tests involving very long time constants can be
carried out
c. it is not affected by the harmonic content, noise
and frequency variations in the a.c. supply
d. it is capable of representing the variation in the
current associated with generator faults and power
swings
e. saturation effects in CTs and VTs can be modelled
f. a set of test routines can be specified in software and
then left to run unattended (or with only occasional
monitoring) to completion, with a detailed record of
test results being available on completion

A block schematic of the equipment is shown in Figure
21.13, is based around a computer which calculates and
stores the digital data representing the system voltages
and currents. The computer controls conversion of the
digital data into analogue signals, and it monitors and
controls the relays being tested.
21.7.2.2 Simulation software
Unlike most traditional software used for power systems
analysis, the software used is suitable for the modelling
the fast transients that occur in the first few
milliseconds after fault inception. Two very accurate
simulation programs are used, one based on time domain
and the other on frequency domain techniques. In both
programs, single and double circuit transmission lines are
represented by fully distributed parameter models. The
line parameters are calculated from the physical
construction of the line (symmetrical, asymmetrical,
transposed or non-transposed), taking into account the
effect of conductor geometry, conductor internal
impedance and the earth return path. It also includes,
where appropriate, the frequency dependence of the line
parameters in the frequency domain program. The
frequency dependent variable effects are calculated
using Fast Fourier Transforms and the results are
converted to the time domain. Conventional current
transformers and capacitor voltage transformers can be
simulated.
The fault can be applied at any one point in the system and
can be any combination of phase to phase or phase
384
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:08
Page 385
IA
IB
Linear
interpolation
circuits
D/A
conversion
CT
model
Current
amplifier
IC
VDU
Computer
I/O
Subsystem
VB
VDU
Keyboard
Equipment
under
test
Linear
interpolation
circuits
D/A
conversion
CVT
model
Voltage
amplifier
VC
Contact
status
monitor
Storage
Key :
CT - Current transformer
CVT - Capacitor voltage transformer
VDU - Visual display unit
Communications
link to second
RTDS
(When required)
Signalling
Channel
Simulation
To second RTDS
Keyboard
VA
Figure 21.13: Block diagram of microprocessor-based automated relay test system
to earth, resistive, or non-linear phase to earth arcing faults.

For series compensated lines, flashover across a series
capacitor following a short circuit fault can be simulated.
power frequency
h. the use of direct coupled current amplifiers allows
time constants of any length
The frequency domain model is not suitable for

developing faults and switching sequences, therefore the
widely used Electromagnetic Transient Program (EMTP),
working in the time domain, is employed in such cases.
i. capable of simulating slow system changes
In addition to these two programs, a simulation program

based on lumped resistance and inductance parameters
is used. This simulation is used to represent systems with
long time constants and slow system changes due, for
example, to power swings.
k. transducer models can be included
21.7.2.3 Simulator applications

The simulator is used for checking the accuracy of
calibration and performing type tests on a wide range of
protection relays during their development. It has the
following advantages over existing test methods:
a. 'state of the art' power system modelling data can
be used to test relays
b. freedom from frequency variations and noise or
harmonic content of the a.c. supply
c. the relay under test does not burden the power
system simulation
d. all tests are accurately repeatable
e. wide bandwidth signals can be produced
f. a wide range of frequencies can be reproduced
g. selected harmonics may be superimposed on the
j. reproduces fault currents whose peak amplitude

varies with time
l. automatic testing removes the likelihood of

measurement and setting errors
m. two such equipments can be linked together to
simulate a system model with two relaying points
The simulator is also used for the production testing of
relays, in which most of the advantages listed above
apply. As the tests and measurements are made
automatically, the quality of testing is also greatly
enhanced. Further, in cases of suspected malfunction of
a relay in the field under known fault conditions, the
simulator can be used to replicate the power system and
fault conditions, and conduct a detailed investigation
into the performance of the relay. Finally, complex
protection schemes can be modelled, using both the
relays intended for use and software models of them as
appropriate, to check the suitability of the proposed
scheme under a wide variety of conditions. To illustrate
this, Figure 21.14(a) shows a section of a particular power
system modelled. The waveforms of Figure 21.14(b) show
the three phase voltages and currents at the primaries of
VT1 and CT1 for the fault condition indicated in Figure
21.14(a).
385
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:08
Page 386
N
3G
L
Infinite bus
4G
CB3
F3
CT3
F4
CT4
CB4
Line 2
8G
9G
LR3
CT1
CB1
LR4
F1
load 1
F2
CT2
CB2
11G
Line 1
load 2
VT1
VT2
load 3
LR1
21
LR2
Relay 1
Relay 2
(a) Example power system

Va
Vb
Vc
Ia
Ib
Figure 21.14: Example of application study

Ic
0
0.08
0.16
0.24
0.32
0.4
0.48
0.56
(b) Voltages and currents at VT1/CT1
21.8 PRODUCTION TESTING

Production testing of protection relays is becoming far
more demanding as the accuracy and complexity of the
products increase. Electronic power amplifiers are used
to supply accurate voltages and currents of high stability
to the relay under test. The inclusion of a computer in the
test system allows more complex testing to be performed
at an economical cost, with the advantage of speed and
repeatability of tests from one relay to another.
Figure 21.15 shows a modern computer-controlled test
bench. The hardware is mounted in a special rack. Each
unit of the test system is connected to the computer via
an interface bus. Individual test programs for each type
of relay are required, but the interface used is standard
for all relay types. Control of input waveforms and
analogue measurements, the monitoring of output
signals and the analysis of test data are performed by the
computer. A printout of the test results can also be
produced if required.
Figure 21.15: Modern computer-controlled

test bench
Because software is extensively tested at the typetesting stage, there is normally no need to check the
correct functioning of the software. Checks are limited
to determining that the analogue and digital I/O is
functioning correctly. This is achieved for inputs by
386
20/06/02
16:08
Page 387
b. general inspection of the equipment, checking all

connections, wires on relays terminals, labels on
terminal boards, etc.
applying known voltage and current inputs to the relay

under test and checking that the software has captured
the correct values. Similarly, digital outputs are
exercised by using test software to actuate each output
and checking that the correct output is energised.
Provided that appropriate procedures are in place to
ensure that only type-tested software is downloaded,
there is no need to check the correct functioning of the
software in the relay. The final step is to download the
software appropriate to the relay and store it in the
EPROM fitted in the relay.
c. insulation resistance measurement of all circuits

d. perform relay self-test procedure and external
communications checks on digital/numerical relays
e. test main current transformers
f. test main voltage transformers
g. check that protection relay alarm/trip settings
have been entered correctly
h. tripping and alarm circuit checks to prove correct
functioning
21.9 COMMISSIONING TESTS

Installation of a protection scheme at site creates a
number of possibilities for errors in the implementation
of the scheme to occur. Even if the scheme has been
thoroughly tested in the factory, wiring to the CTs and
VTs on site may be incorrectly carried out, or the
CTs/VTs may have been incorrectly installed. The impact
of such errors may range from simply being a nuisance
(tripping occurs repeatedly on energisation, requiring
investigation to locate and correct the error(s)) through
to failure to trip under fault conditions, leading to major
equipment damage, disruption to supplies and potential
hazards to personnel. The strategies available to remove
these risks are many, but all involve some kind of testing
at site.
Commissioning tests at site are therefore invariably
performed before protection equipment is set to work.
The aims of commissioning tests are:
1. to ensure that the equipment has not been
damaged during transit or installation
2. to ensure that the installation work has been
carried out correctly
3. to prove the correct functioning of the protection
scheme as a whole
The tests carried out will normally vary according to the
protection scheme involved, the relay technology used,
and the policy of the client. In many cases, the tests
actually conducted are determined at the time of
commissioning by mutual agreement between the
clients representative and the commissioning team.
Hence, it is not possible to provide a definitive list of
tests that are required during commissioning. This
section therefore describes the tests commonly carried
out during commissioning.
The following tests are invariably carried out, since the
protection scheme will not function correctly if faults exist.
a. wiring diagram check, using circuit diagrams
showing all the reference numbers of the
interconnecting wiring
In addition, the following checks may be carried out,

depending on the factors noted earlier.
i. secondary injection test on each relay to prove
operation at one or more setting values
j. primary injection tests on each relay to prove
stability for external faults and to determine the
effective current setting for internal faults (essential
for some types of electromechanical relays)
Chap21-370-397
k. testing of protection scheme logic

This section details the tests required to cover items
(a)(g) above. Secondary injection test equipment is
covered in Section 21.10 and Section 21.11 details the
secondary injection that may be carried out. Section
21.12 covers primary injection testing, and Section 21.13
details the checks required on any logic involved in the
protection scheme. Finally, Section 21.14 details the tests
required on alarm/tripping circuits tripping/alarm
circuits.
21.9.1 Insulation Tests

All the deliberate earth connections on the wiring to be
tested should first be removed, for example earthing
links on current transformers, voltage transformers and
d.c. supplies. Some insulation testers generate impulses
with peak voltages exceeding 5kV. In these instances
any electronic equipment should be disconnected while
the external wiring insulation is checked.
The insulation resistance should be measured to earth
and between electrically separate circuits. The readings
are recorded and compared with subsequent routine
tests to check for any deterioration of the insulation.
The insulation resistance measured depends on the
amount of wiring involved, its grade, and the site
humidity. Generally, if the test is restricted to one
cubicle, a reading of several hundred megohms should be
obtained. If long lengths of site wiring are involved, the
reading could be only a few megohms.
387
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:08
Page 388
21.9.2 Relay Self-Test Procedure
Digital and numerical relays will have a self-test

procedure that is detailed in the appropriate relay
manual. These tests should be followed to determine if
the relay is operating correctly. This will normally involve
checking of the relay watchdog circuit, exercising all
digital inputs and outputs and checking that the relay
analogue inputs are within calibration by applying a test
current or voltage. For these tests, the relay outputs are
normally disconnected from the remainder of the
protection scheme, as it is a test carried out to prove
correct relay, rather than scheme, operation.
Unit protection schemes involve relays that need to
communicate with each other. This leads to additional
testing requirements.
The communications path
between the relays is tested using suitable equipment to
ensure that the path is complete and that the received
signal strength is within specification. Numerical relays
may be fitted with loopback test facilities that enable
either part of or the entire communications link to be
tested from one end.
After completion of these tests, it is usual to enter the
relay settings required. This can be done manually via
the relay front panel controls, or using a portable PC and
suitable software. Whichever method is used, a check by
a second person that the correct settings have been used
is desirable, and the settings recorded. Programmable
scheme logic that is required is also entered at this stage.
21.9.3 Current Transformer Tests
Several points should be checked on each current

transformer magnetisation curve. This can be done by
energising the secondary winding from the local mains
supply through a variable auto-transformer while the
primary circuit remains open; see Figure 21.17. The
characteristic is measured at suitable intervals of applied
voltage, until the magnetising current is seen to rise very
rapidly for a small increase in voltage. This indicates the
approximate knee-point or saturation flux level of the
current transformer. The magnetising current should
then be recorded at similar voltage intervals as it is
reduced to zero.
Care must be taken that the test equipment is suitably
rated. The short-time current rating must be in excess of
the CT secondary current rating, to allow for the
measurement of the saturation current. This will be in
excess of the CT secondary current rating. As the
magnetising current will not be sinusoidal, a moving iron
or dynamometer type ammeter should be used.
It is often found that current transformers with
secondary ratings of 1A or less have a knee-point voltage
higher than the local mains supply. In these cases, a
step-up interposing transformer must be used to obtain
the necessary voltage to check the magnetisation curve.
21.9.3.1 Polarity check
21
21.9.3.2 Magnetisation Curve
The following tests are normally carried out prior to

energisation of the main circuits.
A
P2
robust moving coil, permanent magnet, centre-zero type.

A low voltage battery is used, via a single-pole pushbutton switch, to energise the primary winding. On
closing the push-button, the d.c. ammeter, A, should give
a positive flick and on opening, a negative flick.
Test plug isolating

current transformers
from relay coils
P1
S2
S1
Variable transformer
250V 8A
To relay
coils
P1 S
1
250V
a.c. supply
Step-up transformer
if required
P2 S2
Main circuit
breaker open
_
A
+
Figure 21.17: Testing current transformer
magnetising curve
21.9.4 Voltage Transformer Tests

Voltage transformers require testing for polarity and
phasing.
Figure 21.16: Current transformer

polarity check
Each current transformer should be individually tested to

verify that the primary and secondary polarity markings
are correct; see Figure 21.16. The ammeter connected to
the secondary of the current transformer should be a
21.9.4.1 Polarity check

The voltage transformer polarity can be checked using
the method for CT polarity tests. Care must be taken to
connect the battery supply to the primary winding, with
388
20/06/02
16:08
Page 389
the polarity ammeter connected to the secondary

winding. If the voltage transformer is of the capacitor
type, then the polarity of the transformer at the bottom
of the capacitor stack should be checked.
21.9.4.2 Ratio check
This check can be carried out when the main circuit is
first made live. The voltage transformer secondary
voltage is compared with the secondary voltage shown
on the nameplate.
21.9.4.3 Phasing check
The secondary connections for a three-phase voltage
transformer or a bank of three single-phase voltage
transformers must be carefully checked for phasing.
With the main circuit alive, the phase rotation is checked
using a phase rotation meter connected across the three
phases, as shown in Figure 21.18. Provided an existing
proven VT is available on the same primary system, and
that secondary earthing is employed, all that is now
necessary to prove correct phasing is a voltage check
between, say, both A phase secondary outputs. There
should be nominally little or no voltage if the phasing is
correct. However, this test does not detect if the phase
sequence is correct, but the phases are displaced by 120
from their correct position, i.e. phase A occupies the
position of phase C or phase B in Figure 21.18. This can
be checked by removing the fuses from phases B and C
(say) and measuring the phase-earth voltages on the
secondary of the VT. If the phasing is correct, only phase
A should be healthy, phases B and C should have only a
small residual voltage.
A
B
C
A
V1
C
V2
VN
V
VL
Correct phasing should be further substantiated when

carrying out on load tests on any phase-angle sensitive
relays, at the relay terminals. Load current in a known
phase CT secondary should be compared with the
associated phase to neutral VT secondary voltage. The
phase angle between them should be measured, and
should relate to the power factor of the system load.
If the three-phase voltage transformer has a brokendelta tertiary winding, then a check should be made of
the voltage across the two connections from the broken
delta VN and VL, as shown in Figure 21.18. With the
rated balanced three-phase supply voltage applied to the
voltage transformer primary windings, the broken-delta
voltage should be below 5V with the rated burden
connected.
21.9.5 Protection Relay Setting Checks

At some point during commissioning, the alarm and trip
settings of the relay elements involved will require to be
entered and/or checked. Where the complete scheme is
engineered and supplied by a single contractor, the
settings may already have been entered prior to despatch
from the factory, and hence this need not be repeated.
The method of entering settings varies according to the
relay technology used. For electromechanical and static
relays, manual entry of the settings for each relay
element is required. This method can also be used for
digital/numerical relays. However, the amount of data to
be entered is much greater, and therefore it is usual to
use appropriate software, normally supplied by the
manufacturer, for this purpose. The software also makes
the essential task of making a record of the data entered
much easier.
Once the data has been entered, it should be checked for
compliance with the recommended settings as
calculated from the protection setting study. Where
appropriate software is used for data entry, the checks
can be considered complete if the data is checked prior
to download of the settings to the relay. Otherwise, a
check may required subsequent to data entry by
inspection and recording of the relay settings, or it may
be considered adequate to do this at the time of data
entry. The recorded settings form an essential part of the
commissioning documentation provided to the client.
V2
21.10 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST EQUIPMENT

V1
A B C
Phase rotation
meter
Secondary injection tests are always done prior to

primary injection tests. The purpose of secondary
injection testing is to prove the correct operation of the
protection scheme that is downstream from the inputs to
the protection relay(s). Secondary injection tests are
always done prior to primary injection tests. This is
Figure 21.18: Voltage transformer

phasing check
389
Chap21-370-397
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:11
Page 390
because the risks during initial testing to the LV side of

the equipment under test are minimised. The primary
(HV) side of the equipment is disconnected, so that no
damage can occur. These tests and the equipment
necessary to perform them are generally described in the
manufacturer's manuals for the relays, but brief details
are given below for the main types of protection relays.
21.10.1 Test Blocks/Plugs for Secondary

Injection Equipment
It is common practice to provide test blocks or test

sockets in the relay circuits so that connections can
readily be made to the test equipment without
disturbing wiring. Test plugs of either multi-finger or
single-finger design (for monitoring the current in one
CT secondary circuit) are used to connect test equipment
to the relay under test.
21
The top and bottom contact of each test plug finger is

separated by an insulating strip, so that the relay circuits
can be completely isolated from the switchgear wiring
when the test plug is inserted. To avoid open-circuiting
CT secondary terminals, it is therefore essential that CT
shorting jumper links are fitted across all appropriate
live side terminals of the test plug BEFORE it is inserted.
With the test plug inserted in position, all the test
circuitry can now be connected to the isolated relay
side test plug terminals. Some modern test blocks
incorporate the live-side jumper links within the block
and these can be set to the closed or open position as
appropriate, either manually prior to removing the cover
and inserting the test plug, or automatically upon
removal of the cover. Removal of the cover also exposes
the colour-coded face-plate of the block, clearly
indicating that the protection scheme is not in service,
and may also disconnect any d.c. auxiliary supplies used
for powering relay tripping outputs.
Withdrawing the test plug immediately restores the
connections to the main current transformers and
voltage transformers and removes the test connections.
Replacement of the test block cover then removes the
short circuits that had been applied to the main CT
secondary circuits. Where several relays are used in a
protection scheme, one or more test blocks may be fitted
on the relay panel enabling the whole scheme to be
tested, rather than just one relay at a time.
Test blocks usually offer facilities for the monitoring and
secondary injection testing of any power system
protection scheme. The test block may be used either
with a multi-fingered test plug to allow isolation and
monitoring of all the selected conductor paths, or with a
single finger test plug that allows the currents on
individual conductors to be monitored. A modern test
block and test plugs are illustrated in Figure 21.19.
Figure 21.19: Modern test block/plugs
21.10.2 Secondary Injection Test Sets

The type of the relay to be tested determines the type of
equipment used to provide the secondary injection
currents and voltages. Many electromechanical relays
have a non-linear current coil impedance when the relay
operates and this can cause the test current waveform to
be distorted if the injection supply voltage is fed directly
to the coil. The presence of harmonics in the current
waveform may affect the torque of electromechanical
relays and give unreliable test results, so some injection
test sets use an adjustable series reactance to control the
current. This keeps the power dissipation small and the
equipment light and compact.
Many test sets are portable and include precision
ammeters and voltmeters and timing equipment. Test
sets may have both voltage and current outputs. The
former are high-voltage, low current outputs for use
with relay elements that require signal inputs from a VT
as well as a CT. The current outputs are high-current,
low voltage to connect to relay CT inputs. It is
important, however, to ensure that the test set current
outputs are true current sources, and hence are not
affected by the load impedance of a relay element
current coil. Use of a test set with a current output that
is essentially a voltage source can give rise to serious
problems when testing electromechanical relays. Any
significant impedance mismatch between the output of
the test set and the relay current coil during relay
operation will give rise to a variation in current from that
desired and possible error in the test results. The relay
operation time may be greater than expected (never less
than expected) or relay chatter may occur. It is quite
common for such errors to only be found much later,
after a fault has caused major damage to equipment
through failure of the primary protection to operate.
Failure investigation then shows that the reason for the
primary protection to operate is an incorrectly set relay,
due in turn to use of a test set with a current output
consisting of a voltage-source when the relay was last
tested. Figure 21.20 shows typical waveforms resulting
from use of test set current output that is a voltage
390
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:11
Page 391
V relay/source
Time
Saturation level of
magnetic circuit (current)
limited only by D.C.
resistance of
relay coil
Relay with saturation

of CDG magnetic circuit
(phase shift from CDG
inductive load shown).
a) Relay current coil waveform distorted due to use of voltage source
Sinusoidal CURRENT when

changing impedance of relay
is swamped out by high
source impedance
Time
Typical VOLTAGE waveform

appearing across relay
current coils with sinusoidal I
above the relay setting (10 x shown).
b) Undistorted relay current coil current distorted due to use of current source
Figure 21.20: Relay current coil waveforms
source the distorted relay coil current waveform gives

rise to an extended operation time compared to the
expected value.
Modern test sets are computer based. They comprise a
PC (usually a standard laptop PC with suitable software)
and a power amplifier that takes the low-level outputs
from the PC and amplifies them into voltage and current
signals suitable for application to the VT and CT inputs of
the relay. The phase angle between voltage and current
outputs will be adjustable, as also will the phase angles
between the individual voltages or currents making up a
3-phase output set. Much greater precision in the

setting of the magnitudes and phase angles is possible,
compared to traditional test sets. Digital signals to
exercise the internal logic elements of the relays may
also be provided. The alarm and trip outputs of the relay
are connected to digital inputs on the PC so that correct
operation of the relay, including accuracy of the relay
tripping characteristic can be monitored and displayed
on-screen, saved for inclusion in reports generated later,
or printed for an immediate record to present to the
client. Optional features may include GPS time
synchronising equipment and remote-located amplifiers
391
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:11
Page 392
to facilitate testing of unit protection schemes, and

digital I/O for exercising the programmable scheme logic
of modern relays.
The software for modern test sets is capable of testing

the functionality of a wide variety of relays, and
conducting a set of tests automatically. Such sets ease
the task of the commissioning engineer. The software
will normally offer options for testing, ranging from a
test carried out at a particular point on the characteristic
to complete determination of the tripping characteristic
automatically. This feature can be helpful if there is any
reason to doubt that the relay is operating correctly with
the tripping characteristic specified. Figure 21.21
illustrates a modern PC-based test set.
Traditional test sets use an arrangement of adjustable

transformers and reactors to provide control of current
and voltage without incurring high power dissipation.
Some relays require adjustment of the phase between
the injected voltages and currents, and so phase shifting
transformers may be used. Figure 21.22 shows the
circuit diagram of a traditional test set suitable for
overcurrent relay resting, while Figure 21.23 shows the
circuit diagram for a test set for directional/distance
relays. Timers are included so that the response time of
the relay can be measured.
21.11 SECONDARY INJECTION TESTING

The purpose of secondary injection testing is to check
that the protection scheme from the relay input
terminals onwards is functioning correctly with the
settings specified. This is achieved by applying suitable
inputs from a test set to the inputs of the relays and
checking if the appropriate alarm/trip signals occur at
the relay/control room/CB locations. The extent of
Figure 21.21: Modern PC-based secondary

injection test set
testing will be largely determined by the client

specification and relay technology used, and may range
from a simple check of the relay characteristic at a single
point to a complete verification of the tripping
characteristics of the scheme, including the response to
transient waveforms and harmonics and checking of
relay bias characteristics. This may be important when
the protection scheme includes transformers and/or
generators.
21
A
Coarse
control
reactor
Range
adjusting CT
K2
250V
a.c. supply
K1
Fine control
variable
transformer
I>
Start
timer
Backing
transformer
10% control
Medium
control
reactor
Injection
transformer
Relay
coil
Stop
timer
Relay short-circuiting
switch
Relay current, I = Ammeter reading (A) K1 x K2
Figure 21.22: Circuit diagram of traditional test set for overcurrent relays
392
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:11
Page 393
Fault A-N
Supply switch
A
B
C
N
X( )
440V
3 pphase
4 wire supply
Choke
Variable
transformer
22.5
20.0
17.5
15.0
12.5
Relay
control
adjusting CT
A
10.0
PA
A
7.5
440/110V
pphase
shiftingg
transformer
PA
A
> voltage element

Variable transformer for current control
To other voltage
elements
of relayy
under test
(if required)
5.0
2.5
V Voltmeter
A Ammeter
PA Phase angle
meter
0.0
-2.5
-5.0
-7.5
Figure 21.23: Circuit diagram for traditional

test set for directional/distance relays
-10.0
-15.0
-10.0
-5.0
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0
R( )
Figure 21.24: Distance relay zone checking

using search technique and tolerance bands
The testing should include any scheme logic. If the logic

is implemented using the programmable scheme logic
facilities available with most digital or numerical relays,
appropriate digital inputs may need to be applied and
outputs monitored (see Section 21.13). It is clear that a
modern test set can facilitate such tests, leading to a
reduced time required for testing.
Zn
21.11.1 Schemes using Digital or Numerical

Relay Technology
R
PSB-Zone
The policy for secondary injection testing varies widely.

In some cases, manufacturers recommend, and clients
accept, that if a digital or numerical relay passes its selftest, it can be relied upon to operate at the settings used
and that testing can therefore be confined to those parts
of the scheme external to the relay. In such cases,
secondary injection testing is not required at all. More
often, it is required that one element of each relay
(usually the simplest) is exercised, using a secondary
injection test set, to check that relay operation occurs at
the conditions expected, based on the setting of the
relay element concerned. Another alternative is for the
complete functionality of each relay to be exercised. This
is rarely required with a digital or numerical relay,
probably only being carried out in the event of a
suspected relay malfunction.
To illustrate the results that can be obtained, Figure
21.24 shows the results obtained by a modern test set
when determining the reach settings of a distance relay
using a search technique. Another example is the testing
of the Power Swing blocking element of a distance relay.
Figure 21.25 illustrates such a test, based on using
discrete impedance points. This kind of test may not be
adequate in all cases, and test equipment may have the
ability to generate the waveforms simulating a power
swing and apply them to the relay (Figure 21.26).
Figure 21.25: Testing of power swing

blocking element discrete points
Figure 21.26: Simulated power swing waveform
21.11.2 Schemes using

Electromechanical/Static Relay Technology
Schemes using single function electromechanical or
static relays will usually require each relay to be
exercised. Thus a scheme with distance and back-up
overcurrent elements will require a test on each of these
functions, thereby taking up more time than if a digital
or numerical relay is used. Similarly, it may be important
393
21
Chap21-370-397
20/06/02
16:11
Page 394
to check the relay characteristic over a range of input

currents to confirm parameters for an overcurrent relay
such as:
i. the minimum current that gives operation at each
current setting
ii. the maximum current at which resetting takes
place
iii. the operating time at suitable values of current
iv. the time/current curve at two or three points with
the time multiplier setting TMS at 1
v. the resetting time at zero current with the TMS at 1
Similar considerations apply to distance and unit
protection relays of these technologies.
21.11.3 Test Circuits for Secondary Injection Testing
21
The test circuits used will depend on the type of relay

and test set being used. Unless the test circuits are
simple and obvious, the relay commissioning manual will
give details of the circuits to be used. Commonly used
test circuits can also be found in Chapter 23 of reference
[21.1]. When using the circuits in this reference, suitable
simplifications can easily be made if digital or numerical
relays are being tested, to allow for their built-in
measurement capabilities external ammeters and
voltmeters may not be required.
All results should be carefully noted and filed for record
purposes. Departures from the expected results must be
thoroughly investigated and the cause determined. After
rectification of errors, all tests whose results may have
been affected (even those that may have given correct
results) should be repeated to ensure that the protection
scheme has been implemented according to
specification.
of VTs/CTs may not then be discovered until either

spurious tripping occurs in service, or more seriously,
failure to trip on a fault. This hazard is much reduced
where digital/numerical relays are used, since the current
and voltage measurement/display facilities that exist in
such relays enable checking of relay input values against
those from other proven sources. Many connection/wiring
errors can be found in this way, and by isolating
temporarily the relay trip outputs, unwanted trips can be
avoided.
Primary injection testing is, however, the only way to
prove correct installation and operation of the whole of
a protection scheme. As noted in the previous section,
primary injection tests are always carried out after
secondary injection tests, to ensure that problems are
limited to the VTs and CTs involved, plus associated
wiring, all other equipment in the protection scheme
having been proven satisfactory from the secondary
injection tests.
21.12.1 Test Facilities

An alternator is the most useful source of power for
providing the heavy current necessary for primary
injection. Unfortunately, it is rarely available, since it
requires not only a spare alternator, but also spare
busbars capable of being connected to the alternator and
circuit under test. Therefore, primary injection is usually
carried out by means of a portable injection transformer
(Figure 21.27), arranged to operate from the local mains
supply and having several low voltage, heavy current
windings. These can be connected in series or parallel
according to the current required and the resistance of
the primary circuit. Outputs of 10V and 1000A can be
obtained. Alternatively, modern PC-controlled test sets
have power amplifiers capable of injecting currents up to
about 200A for a single unit, with higher current ratings
being possible by using multiple units in parallel.
21.12 PRIMARY INJECTION TESTS

This type of test involves the entire circuit; current
transformer primary and secondary windings, relay coils,
trip and alarm circuits, and all intervening wiring are
checked. There is no need to disturb wiring, which
obviates the hazard of open-circuiting current
transformers, and there is generally no need for any
switching in the current transformer or relay circuits.
The drawback of such tests is that they are time
consuming and expensive to organise. Increasingly,
reliance is placed on all wiring and installation diagrams
being correct and the installation being carried out as
per drawings, and secondary injection testing being
completed satisfactorily. Under these circumstances, the
primary injection tests may be omitted. However, wiring
errors between VTs/CTs and relays, or incorrect polarity
394
A
250V a.c.
supply
Variable transformer
40A
Injection transformer
250/10 + 10 + 10 + 10V
10kVA
Figure 21.27: Traditional primary

injection test set
20/06/02
16:11
Page 395
If the main current transformers are fitted with test

windings, these can be used for primary injection instead
of the primary winding. The current required for primary
injection is then greatly reduced and can usually be
obtained using secondary injection test equipment.
Unfortunately, test windings are not often provided,
because of space limitations in the main current
transformer housings or the cost of the windings.
21.12.2 CT Ratio Check

Current is passed through the primary conductors and
measured on the test set ammeter, A1 in Figure 21.28.
The secondary current is measured on the ammeter A2 or
relay display, and the ratio of the value on A1 to that on
A2 should closely approximate to the ratio marked on
the current transformer nameplate.
A
the residual circuit, or relay display, will give a reading of

a few milliamperes with rated current injected if the
current transformers are of correct polarity. A reading
proportional to twice the primary current will be
obtained if they are of wrong polarity. Because of this, a
high-range ammeter should be used initially, for example
one giving full-scale deflection for twice the rated
secondary current. If an electromechanical earth-fault
relay with a low setting is also connected in the residual
circuit, it is advisable to temporarily short-circuit its
operating coil during the test, to prevent possible
overheating. The single-phase injection should be
carried out for each pair of phases.
Temporary
three-phase
short circuit
250V a.c.
supply
Primary
injection
test set
Test plug
insulation
u
Relay
Chap21-370-397
Temporary
short circuit
Figure 21.29: Polarity check on main current

transformers
Relay
P1
S1
P2
21.12.4 Primary Injection Testing of Relay Elements

As with secondary injection testing, the tests to be
carried out will be those specified by the client, and/or
those detailed in the relay commissioning manual.
Digital and numerical relays usually require far fewer
tests to prove correct operation, and these may be
restricted to observations of current and voltage on the
relay display under normal load conditions.
S2
Relay or test block
contact fingers
A1
Primary injection
test set
21.13 TESTING OF PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC
250V
a.c. supply
Figure 21.28: Current transformer ratio check
21.12.3 CT Polarity Check

If the equipment includes directional, differential or
earth fault relays, the polarity of the main current
transformers must be checked. It is not necessary to
conduct the test if only overcurrent relays are used.
The circuit for checking the polarity with a single-phase
test set is shown in Figure 21.29. A short circuit is placed
across the phases of the primary circuit on one side of
the current transformers while single-phase injection is
carried out on the other side. The ammeter connected in
Protection schemes often involve the use of logic to

determine the conditions under which designated circuit
breakers should be tripped. Simple examples of such
logic can be found in Chapters 9-14. Traditionally, this
logic was implemented by means of discrete relays,
separate from the relays used for protection. Such
implementations would occur where electromechanical
or static relay technology is used. However, digital and
numerical relays normally include programmable logic as
part of the software within the relay, together with
associated digital I/O. This facility (commonly referred to
as Programmable Scheme Logic, or PSL) offers important
advantages to the user, by saving space and permitting
modifications to the protection scheme logic through
software if the protection scheme requirements change
with time. Changes to the logic are carried out using
395
21
Chap21-370-397
21
20/06/02
16:11
Page 396
software hosted on a PC (or similar computer) and

downloaded to the relay. Use of languages defined in IEC
61131, such as ladder logic or Boolean algebra is
common for such software, and is readily understood by
Protection Engineers. Further, there are several
commonly encountered protection functions that
manufacturers may supply with relays as one or more
default logic schemes.
Many designs of withdrawable circuit breaker can be

operated while in the maintenance position, so that
substation operation can continue unaffected except for
the circuit controlled by the circuit breaker involved. In
other cases, isolators can be used to avoid the need for
busbar de-energisation if the circuit involved is not ready
for energisation.
Because software is used, it is essential to carefully test

the logic during commissioning to ensure correct
operation. The only exception to this may be if the
relevant default scheme is used. Such logic schemes
will have been proven during relay type testing, and so
there is no need for proving tests during commissioning.
However, where a customer generates the scheme logic,
it is necessary to ensure that the commissioning tests
conducted are adequate to prove the functionality of the
scheme in all respects. A specific test procedure should
be prepared, and this procedure should include:
21.15 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE TESTS
a. checking of the scheme logic specification and

diagrams to ensure that the objectives of the logic
are achieved
Periodic testing is necessary to ensure that a protection

scheme continues to provide satisfactory performance
for many years after installation. All equipment is
subject to gradual degradation with time, and regular
testing is intended to identify the equipment concerned
so that remedial action can be taken before scheme
maloperation occurs. However, due care should be taken
in this task, otherwise faults may be introduced as a
direct result of the remedial work.
The clearance of a fault on the system is correct only if
the number of circuit breakers opened is the minimum
necessary to remove the fault. A small proportion of
faults are incorrectly cleared, the main reasons being:
b. testing of the logic to ensure that the functionality

of the scheme is proven
a. limitations in protection scheme design

b. faulty relays
c. testing of the logic, as required, to ensure that no

output occurs for the relevant input signal
combinations
c. defects in the secondary wiring

d. incorrect connections
The degree of testing of the logic will largely depend on

the criticality of the application and complexity of the
logic. The responsibility for ensuring that a suitable test
procedure is produced for logic schemes other than the
default one(s) supplied lies with the specifier of the
logic. Relay manufacturers cannot be expected to take
responsibility for the correct operation of logic schemes
that they have not designed and supplied.
21.14 TRIPPING AND ALARM ANNUNCIATION TESTS

If primary and/or secondary injection tests are not carried
out, the tripping and alarm circuits will not have been
checked. Even where such checks have been carried out,
CB trip coils and/or Control Room alarm circuits may have
been isolated. In such cases, it is essential that all of the
tripping and alarm circuits are checked.
This is done by closing the protection relay contacts
manually and checking that:
1. the correct circuit breakers are tripped
2. the alarm circuits are energised
3. the correct flag indications are given
4. there is no maloperation of other apparatus that
may be connected to the same master trip relay or
circuit breaker
e. incorrect settings
f. known application shortcomings accepted as
improbable occurrences
g. pilot wire faults due to previous unrevealed
damage to a pilot cable
h. various other causes, such as switching errors,
testing errors, and relay operation due to
mechanical shock
The self-checking facilities of numerical relays assist in
minimising failures due to faulty relays. Defects in
secondary wiring and incorrect connections are virtually
eliminated if proper commissioning after scheme
installation/alteration is carried out. The possibility of
incorrect settings is minimised by regular reviews of
relay settings. Network fault levels change over time,
and hence setting calculations may need to be revised.
Switching and testing errors are minimised by adequate
training of personnel, use of proven software, and welldesigned systematic working procedures. All of these
can be said to be within the control of the user.
The remaining three causes are not controllable, while
two of these three are unavoidable engineering is not
science and there will always be situations that a
protection relay cannot reasonably be expected to cover
at an affordable cost.
396
20/06/02
16:11
Page 397
21.15.1 Frequency of Inspection and Testing

Although protection equipment should be in sound
condition when first put into service, problems can
develop unchecked and unrevealed because of its
infrequent operation. With digital and numerical relays,
the in-built self-testing routines can be expected to
reveal and annunciate most faults, but this does not
cover any other components that, together, comprise the
protection scheme. Regular inspection and testing of a
protection scheme is therefore required. In practice, the
frequency of testing may be limited by lack of staff or by
the operating conditions on the power system.
21.16 PROTECTION SCHEME DESIGN

FOR MAINTENANCE
If the following principles are adhered to as far as
possible, the danger of back-feeds is lessened and fault
investigation is made easier:
i. test blocks should be used, to enable a test plug to
be used, and a defective unit to be replaced quickly
without interrupting service
ii. circuits should be kept as electrically separate as
possible, and the use of common wires should be
avoided, except where these are essential to the
correct functioning of the circuits
It is desirable to carry out maintenance on protection

equipment at times when the associated power apparatus
is out of service. This is facilitated by co-operation
between the maintenance staff concerned and the
network operations control centre. Maintenance tests
may sometimes have to be made when the protected
circuit is on load. The particular equipment to be tested
should be taken out of commission and adequate back-up
protection provided for the duration of the tests. Such
back-up protection may not be fully discriminative, but
should be sufficient to clear any fault on the apparatus
whose main protection is temporarily out of service.
iii. each group of circuits which is electrically

separate from other circuits should be earthed
through an independent earth link
iv. where a common voltage transformer or d.c.
supply is used for feeding several circuits, each
circuit should be fed through separate links or
fuses. Withdrawal of these should completely
isolate the circuit concerned
v. power supplies to protection schemes should be
segregated from those supplying other equipment and
provided with fully discriminative circuit protection
Maintenance is assisted by the displays of measured

quantities provided on digital and numerical relays. Incorrect
display of a quantity is a clear indication that something is
wrong, either in the relay itself or the input circuits.
vi. a single auxiliary switch should not be used for

interrupting or closing more than one circuit
vii. terminations in relay panels require good access,
as these may have to be altered if extensions are
made. Modern panels are provided with special
test facilities, so that no connections need be
disturbed during routine testing
21.15.2 Maintenance Tests

Primary injection tests are normally only conducted out
during initial commissioning. If scheme maloperation
has occurred and the protection relays involved are
suspect, or alterations have been made involving the
wiring to the relays from the VTs/CTs, the primary
injection tests may have to be repeated.
viii. junction boxes should be of adequate size and, if

outdoors, must be made waterproof
ix. all wiring should be ferruled for identification and
phase-coloured
Secondary injection tests may be carried out at suitable

intervals to check relay performance, and, if possible, the
relay should be allowed to trip the circuit breakers
involved. The interval between tests will depend upon
the criticality of the circuit involved, the availability of
the circuit for testing and the technology of the relays
used. Secondary injection testing is only necessary on
the selected relay setting and the results should be
checked against those obtained during the initial
commissioning of the equipment.
x. electromechanical relays should have high

operating and restraint torques and high contact
pressures; jewel bearings should be shrouded to
exclude dust and the use of very thin wire for coils
and connections should be avoided. Dust-tight
cases with an efficient breather are essential on
these types of electromechanical element
xi. static, digital and numerical relays should have test
facilities accessible from the front to assist in fault
finding. The relay manual should clearly detail the
expected results at each test point when healthy
It is better not to interfere with relay contacts at all

unless they are obviously corroded. The performance of
the contacts is fully checked when the relay is actuated.
Insulation tests should also be carried out on the relay
wiring to earth and between circuits, using a 1000V
tester. These tests are necessary to detect any
deterioration in the insulation resistance.
Chap21-370-397
21.17 REFERENCES
397
21.1 Protective Relays Application Guide, 3rd edition.

ALSTOM Transmission and Distribution,
Protection and Control, 1987.
21
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:15
22
Page 398
Power System Measurements
Introduction
22.1
General characteristics
22.2
Digital transducer technology
22.3
Analogue transducer technology
22.4
Transducer selection
22.5
Measurement centres
22.6
Tariff metering
22.7
Synchronisers
22.8
Disturbance recorders
22.9
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:15
Page 399
22 Power System Measurements
22.1 INTRODUCTION
The accurate measurement of the voltage, current or
other parameter of a power system is a prerequisite to
any form of control, ranging from automatic closed-loop
control to the recording of data for statistical purposes.
Measurement of these parameters can be accomplished
in a variety of ways, including the use of direct-reading
instruments as well as electrical measuring transducers.
Transducers produce an accurate d.c. analogue output,
usually a current, which corresponds to the parameter
being measured (the measurand). They provide electrical
isolation by transformers, sometimes referred to as
Galvanic Isolation, between the input and the output.
This is primarily a safety feature, but also means that the
cabling from the output terminals to any receiving
equipment can be lightweight and have a lower
insulation specification. The advantages over discrete
measuring instruments are as follows:
a. mounted close to the source of the measurement,
reducing instrument transformer burdens and
increasing safety through elimination of long
wiring runs
b. ability to mount display equipment remote from
transducer
c. ability to use multiple display elements per transducer
d. the burden on CTs/VTs is considerably less
Outputs from transducers may be used in many ways
from simple presentation of measured values for an
operator, to being utilised by a network automation
scheme to determine the control strategy.
22.2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

Transducers may have single or multiple inputs and/or
outputs. The inputs, outputs and any auxiliary circuits
will all be isolated from each other. There may be more
than one input quantity and the measurand may be a
function of one or more of them.
399
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:15
Page 400
Whatever measurement transducer is being used, there

will usually be a choice between discrete and modular
types, the latter being plug-in units to a standard rack.
The location and user-preferences will dictate the choice
of transducer type.
22.2.1 Transducer Inputs
The input of a transducer is often taken from

transformers and these may be of many different types.
Ideally, to obtain the best overall accuracy, meteringclass instrument transformers should be used, since the
transformer errors will be added, albeit algebraically, to
the transducer errors. However, it is common to apply
transducers to protection-class instrument transformers
and that is why transducers are usually characterised to
be able to withstand significant short-term overloads on
their current inputs. A typical specification for the
current input circuits of a transducer suitable for
connection to protection-class instrument transformers
is to withstand:
22
22.2.3 Transducer Accuracy

Accuracy is usually of prime importance, but in making
comparisons, it should be noted that accuracy can be
defined in several ways and may only apply under very
closely defined conditions of use. The following
attempts to clarify some of the more common terms and
relate them to practical situations, using the terminology
given in IEC 60688.
The accuracy of a transducer will be affected, to a
greater or lesser extent, by many factors, known as
influence quantities, over which the user has little, or no,
control. Table 22.1 provides a complete list of influence
quantities. The accuracy is checked under an agreed set
of conditions known as reference conditions. The
reference conditions for each of the influence quantities
can be quoted as a single value (e.g. 20C) or a range (e.g.
10-40C).
Input current
Input quantity distortion
Power factor
Continuous operation
Interaction between measuring elements
Auxiliary supply voltage
External magnetic fields
Series mode interference
External heat
a. 300% of full-load current continuously

b. 2500% for three seconds
c. 5000% for one second
The input impedance of any current input circuit will be
kept as low as possible, and that for voltage inputs will
be kept as high as possible. This reduces errors due to
impedance mismatch.
22.2.2 Transducer Outputs

The output of a transducer is usually a current source.
This means that, within the output voltage range
(compliance voltage) of the transducer, additional
display devices can be added without limit and without
any need for adjustment of the transducer. The value of
the compliance voltage determines the maximum loop
impedance of the output circuit, so a high value of
compliance voltage facilitates remote location of an
indicating instrument.
Where the output loop is used for control purposes,
appropriately rated Zener diodes are sometimes fitted
across the terminals of each of the devices in the series
loop to guard against the possibility of their internal
circuitry becoming open circuit. This ensures that a
faulty device in the loop does not cause complete failure
of the output loop. The constant-current nature of the
transducer output simply raises the voltage and
continues to force the correct output signal round the
loop.
Input voltage
Input quantity frequency
Unbalanced currents
Output load
Ambient temperature
Auxiliary supply frequency
Self heating
Common mode interference
Table 22.1: Transducer influence quantities
The error determined under reference conditions is

referred to as the intrinsic error. All transducers having
the same intrinsic error are grouped into a particular
accuracy class, denoted by the class index. The class
index is the same as the intrinsic error expressed as a
percentage (e.g. a transducer with an intrinsic accuracy
of 0.1% of full scale has a class index of 0.1). The class
index system used in IEC 60688 requires that the
variation for each of the influence quantities be strictly
related to the intrinsic error. This means that the higher
the accuracy claimed by the manufacturer, the lower
must be all of the variations.
Because there are many influence quantities, the
variations are assessed individually, whilst maintaining
all the other influence quantities at reference conditions.
The nominal range of use of a transducer is the normal
operating range of the transducer as specified by the
manufacturer. The nominal range of use will naturally be
wider than the reference value or range. Within the
nominal range of use of a transducer, additional errors
accumulate resulting in an additional error. This
additional error is limited for any individual influence
quantity to, at most, the value of the class index. Table
22.2 gives performance details of a typical range of
transducers according to the standard.
400
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:15
Influence Quantity
Input current,In
Input voltage,Vn
Input frequency
Power factor
Unbalanced current
Interaction between measuring elements
Continuous operation
Self Heating
Output load
Waveform crest factor
Ambient temperature
Aux. supply
d.c. voltage
A.C. Aux. Supply frequency, fn
External magnetic fields
Output series mode interference
Output common mode interference
Page 401
Accuracy Class of Transducer: 0.5

Reference Range
Max. Error- Reference Range %
In=1A, 5A 20120%
Vn=50500V 80120%
4565Hz
Cos = 0.51
0100%
Current input 0360
Continuous > 6h
130min
10100%
1.41 (sine wave)
0-50 C
24250V DC
90110% fn
00.4kA/m
1V 50Hz r.m.s. in series
with output
100V 50Hz r.m.s.
output to earth
Nominal Working Range
Max. Error- Nominal Range
0.5%
0.25%
0.5%
0.25%
0.5%
0.25%
0.5%
0.5%
0.25%
0.5%
0.25%
0.25%
0.5%
0.5%
0-120%
0-120%
Cos = 01
1.21.8
-1060 C
19V-300V
-
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
1.0%
0.25%
-
0.5%
Table 22.2: Typical transducer performance
Under changing conditions of the measurand, the output

signal does not follow the changes instantaneously but
is time-delayed. This is due to the filtering required to
reduce ripple or, in transducers using numerical
technology, prevent aliasing. The amount of the delay is
called the response time. To a certain extent, ripple and
response time are interrelated. The response time can
usually be shortened at the expense of increased ripple,
and vice-versa. Transducers having shorter response
times than normal can be supplied for those instances
where the power system suffers swings, dips, and low
frequency oscillations that must be monitored.
Transducers having a current output have a maximum
output voltage, known as the compliance voltage. If the
load resistance is too high and hence the compliance
voltage is exceeded, the output of the transducer is no
longer accurate.
Certain transducers are characterised by the
manufacturer for use on systems where the waveform is
not a pure sinusoid. They are commonly referred to as
true r.m.s. sensing types. For these types, the distortion
factor of the waveform is an influence quantity. Other
transducers are referred to as mean-sensing and are
adjusted to respond to the r.m.s. value of a pure sine

wave. If the input waveform becomes distorted, errors
will result. For example, the error due to third harmonic
distortion can amount to 1% for every 3% of harmonic.
Confusion also arises in specifying the performance

under real operating conditions. The output signal is
often a d.c. analogue of the measurand, but is obtained
from alternating input quantities and will, inevitably,
contain a certain amount of alternating component, or
ripple. Ripple is defined as the peak-to-peak value of the
alternating component of the output signal although
some manufacturers quote mean-to-peak or r.m.s.
values. To be meaningful, the conditions under which
the value of the ripple has been measured must be
stated, e.g. 0.35% r.m.s. = 1.0% peak-to-peak ripple.
Once installed, the user expects the accuracy of a

transducer to remain stable over time. The use of high
quality components and conservative power ratings will
help to ensure long-term stability, but adverse site
conditions can cause performance changes which may
need to be compensated for during the lifetime of the
equipment.
22.3 DIGITAL TRANSDUCER TECHNOLOGY

Digital power system transducers make use of the same
technology as that described for digital and numerical
relays in Chapter 7. The analogue signals acquired from
VTs and CTs are filtered to avoid aliasing, converted to
digital form using A/D conversion, and then signal
processing is carried out to extract the information
required. Basic details are given in Chapter 7. Sample
rates of 64 samples/cycle or greater may be used, and the
accuracy class is normally 0.5.
Outputs may be both digital and analogue. The analogue
outputs will be affected by the factors influencing
accuracy as described above. Digital outputs are
typically in the form of a communications link with
RS232 and/or RS485 types available. The response time
may suffer compared to analogue transducers,
depending on the rate at which values are transferred to
the communications link and the delay in processing
data at the receiving end. In fact, all of the influence
quantities that affect a traditional analogue transducer
also are present in a digital transducer in some form, but
401
22
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:15
Page 402
the errors resulting may be much less than in an

analogue transducer and it may be more stable over a
long period of time.
The advantages of a transducer using numerical

technology are:
1. improved long-term stability
2. more accurate r.m.s measurements
3. improved communications facilities
4. programmability of scaling
5. wider range of functions
6. reduced size
The improved long term stability reduces costs by
extending the intervals between re-calibration. More
accurate r.m.s measurements provide the user with data
of improved accuracy, especially on supplies with
significant harmonic content.
The improved
communications facilities permit many transducers to
share the same communications link, and each
transducer to provide several measurements. This leads
to economy in interconnecting wiring and number of
transducers used. Remote or local programmable scaling
of the transducer permits scaling of the transducer in the
field. The scaling can be changed to reflect changes in
the network, or to be re-used elsewhere. Changes can be
downloaded via the communications link, thus removing
the need for a site visit. It also minimises the risk of the
user specifying an incorrect scaling factor and having to
return the transducer to the manufacturer for
adjustment. Suppliers can keep a wider range of
transducers suitable for a wide range of applications and
inputs in stock, thus reducing delivery times.
Transducers are available with a much wider range of
functions in one package, thus reducing space
requirements in a switchboard. Functions available
include harmonics up to the 31st, energy, and maximum
demand information. The latter are useful for tariff
negotiations.
22
22.4 ANALOGUE TRANSDUCER TECHNOLOGY
All analogue transducers have the following essential
features:
a. an input circuit having impedance Zin
These features are shown diagrammatically in Figure 22.1.
I1
I2
Qin
Zin
Zin
Z0
I0
Figure 22.1: Schematic of an analogue

transducer
Output ranges of 0-10mA, 0-20mA, and 4-20mA are

common. Live zero (e.g. 4-20mA), suppressed zero (e.g.
0-10mA for 300-500kV) and linear inverse range (e.g.
10-0mA for 0-15kV) transducers normally require an
auxiliary supply. The dual-slope type has two linear
sections to its output characteristic, for example, an
output of 0-2mA for the first part of the input range, 08kV, and 2-10mA for the second part, 8-15kV.
22.5 TRANSDUCER SELECTION

The selection of the correct transducer to perform a
measurement function depends on many factors. These
are detailed below.
22.5.1 Current Transducers

Current transducers are usually connected to the
secondary of an instrument current transformer with a
rated output of 1 or 5 amps. Mean-sensing and true
r.m.s. types are available. If the waveform contains
significant amounts of harmonics, a true r.m.s sensing
type must be used for accurate measurement of the
input. They can be self-powered, except for the true
r.m.s. types, or when a live zero output (for example 420mA) is required. They are not directional and,
therefore, are unable to distinguish between export and
import current. To obtain a directional signal, a voltage
input is also required.
b. isolation (no electrical connection) between input

and output
c. an ideal current source generating an output
current, I1, which is an accurate and linear
function of Qin, the input quantity
d. a parallel output impedance, Zo. This represents
the actual output impedance of the current source
and shunts a small fraction, I2, of the ideal output
e. an output current, Io, equal to (I1 - I2)
22.5.2 Voltage Transducers

Connection is usually to the secondary of an instrument
voltage transformer but may be direct if the measured
quantity is of sufficiently low voltage. The suppressed
zero type is commonly used to provide an output for a
specific range of input voltage where measurement of
zero on the input quantity is not required. The linear
inverse type is often used as an aid to synchronising.
402
20/06/02
16:16
Page 403
22.5.3 Frequency
phase angle transducer use the zero crossing point of the

input waveform to obtain the phase information and are
thus prone to error if the input contains significant
amounts of harmonics.
Accurate measurement of frequency is of vital

importance to transmission system operators but not
quite so important, perhaps, for the operator of a diesel
generator set. Accuracy specifications of 0.1% and
0.01% are available, based on percent of centre scale
frequency. This means, for example that a device quoted
as 0.1% and having a centre scale value of 50Hz will
have a maximum error of 50mHz under reference
conditions.
Calculating the power factor from the values of the

outputs of a watt and a var transducer will give a true
measurement in the presence of harmonics.
22.5.5 Power Quantities

The measurement of active power (watts) and reactive
power (vars) is generally not quite as simple as for the
other quantities. More care needs to be taken with the
selection of these types because of the variety of
configurations. It is essential to select the appropriate
type for the system to be measured by taking into
account factors such as system operating conditions
(balanced or unbalanced load), the number of current
and voltage connections available and whether the
power flow is likely to be import, export, or both. The
range of the measurand will need to encompass all
required possibilities of over-range under normal
conditions so that the transducer and its indicating
instrument, or other receiving equipment, is not used
above the upper limit of its effective range. Figure 22.2
illustrates the connections to be used for the various
types of measurement.
22.5.4 Phase Angle

Transducers for the measurement of phase angle are
frequently used for the display of power factor. This is
achieved by scaling the indicating instrument in a nonlinear fashion, following the cosine law. For digital
indicators and SCADA equipment, it is necessary for the
receiving equipment to provide appropriate conversions
to achieve the correct display of power factor. Phase
angle transducers are available with various input
ranges. When the scaling is -1800180, there is an
ambiguous region, of about 2 at the extremes of the
range. In this region, where the output is expected to be,
for example, 10mA or +10mA, the output may jump
sporadically from one of the full-scale values to the
other. Transducers are also available for measurement of
the angle between two input voltages. Some types of
Transducer
Transducer
Van
Vab
Vca
Ia
S1
A
S2
P1
P2
C
N
S1
A
P1
Ic
Ia
S1
S2
S2
P1
P2
Transducer
Van
Vcn
Ic
Ib
S2
P2
A
P1
B
S1
S1
To load
3 phase, 3 wire balanced load
V Transducer
Vb
Vc
Transducer
Ia
Ia
To load
3 phase, 4 wire balanced load
Vab
Vca
Chap 22-398-409
P1
P2
S1
P1
S2
P2
S2
P2
S1
P1
S1
S2
P1
P2
S1
S2
P1
S2
P2
P2
S1
S2
P1
P2
C
N
To load
3 phase, 3 wire unbalanced load
Ic
Ib
Ia
To load
3 phase, 4 wire unbalanced load
To load
3 phase, 4 wire unbalanced
(21/
el.) load
Figure 22.2: Connections for 3-phase watt/var transducers

403
22
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:16
Page 404
22.5.6 Scaling
The relationship of the output current to the value of the

measurand is of vital importance and needs careful
consideration. Any receiving equipment must, of course,
be used within its rating but, if possible, some kind of
standard should be established.
22
As an example, examine the measurement of a.c. voltage.

The primary system has a nominal value of 11kV and the
transformer has a ratio of 11kV/110V. To specify the
conversion coefficient for a 0-10mA voltage transducer
to be 110V/10mA would not necessarily be the optimum.
One of the objectives must be to have the capability of
monitoring the voltage over a range of values so an
upper limit must be selected for instance +20%, or
132V. Using the original conversion coefficient, the
maximum output of the transducer is required to be
12mA. This is within the capability of most 0-10mA
transducers, the majority of which can accommodate an
over-range of 25%, but it does mean any associated
analogue indicating instrument must have a sensitivity
of 12mA. However, the scale required on this instrument
is now 0-13.2kV, which may lead to difficulty in drawing
the scale in such a way as to make it readable (and
conforms to the relevant standard). In this example, it
would be more straightforward to establish the full-scale
indication as 15kV and to make this equivalent to 10mA,
thus making the specification of the display instrument
much easier. The transducer will have to be specified
such that an input of 0-150V gives an output of 0-10mA.
In the case of transducers with a 4-20mA output, great
care is required in the output scaling, as there is no overrange capability. The 20mA output limit is a fixed one
from a measurement point of view. Such outputs are
typically used as inputs to SCADA systems, and the
SCADA system is normally programmed to assume that a
current magnitude in excess of 20mA represents a
transducer failure. Thus, using the above example, the
output might be scaled so that 20mA represents 132V
and hence the nominal 110V input results in an output of
16.67mA. A more convenient scaling might be to use
16mA as representing110V, with 20mA output being
equal to 137.5V (i.e. 25% over-range instead of the 20%
required). It would be incorrect to scale the transducer
so that 110V input was represented by 20mA output, as
the over-range capability required would not be
available.
Similar considerations apply to current transducers and,
with added complexity, to watt transducers, where the
ratios of both the voltage and the current transformers
must be taken into account. In this instance, the output
will be related to the primary power of the system. It
should be noted that the input current corresponding to
full-scale output may not be exactly equal to the
secondary rating of the current transformer but this does
not matter - the manufacturer will take this into account.
Some of these difficulties do not need to be considered

if the transducer is only feeding, for example, a SCADA
outstation. Any receiving equipment that can be
programmed to apply a scaling factor to each individual
input can accommodate most input signal ranges. The
main consideration will be to ensure that the transducer
is capable of providing a signal right up to the full-scale
value of the input, that is, it does not saturate at the
highest expected value of the measurand.
22.5.7 Auxiliary Supplies

Many transducers do not require any auxiliary supply.
These are termed self-powered transducers. Of those
that do need a separate supply, the majority have a
biased, or live zero output, such as 4-20mA. This is
because a non-zero output cannot be obtained for zero
input unless a separate supply is available. Transducers
that require an auxiliary supply are generally provided
with a separate pair of terminals for the auxiliary circuit
so that the user has the flexibility of connecting the
auxiliary supply input to the measured voltage, or to a
separate supply. However, some manufacturers have
standardised their designs such that they appear to be of
the self-powered type, but the auxiliary supply
connection is actually internal. For a.c. measuring
transducers, the use of a d.c. auxiliary supply enables the
transducer to be operated over a wider range of input.
The range of auxiliary supply voltage over which a
transducer can be operated is specified by the
manufacturer. If the auxiliary voltage is derived from an
input quantity, the range of measurement will be
restricted to about 20% of the nominal auxiliary supply
voltage. This can give rise to problems when attempting
to measure low values of the input quantity.
22.6 MEASUREMENT CENTRES

A Measurement Centre is effectively a collection of
discrete transducers mounted in a common case. This is
largely impractical if analogue technology for signal
processing is used, but no such limitation exists if digital
or numerical technology is adopted.
Therefore,
Measurement Centres are generally only found
implemented using these technologies. As has been
already noted in Chapter 7, a numerical relay can provide
many measurements of power system quantities.
Therefore, an alternative way of looking at a
Measurement Centre that uses numerical technology is
that it is a numerical relay, stripped of its protection
functions and incorporating a wide range of power
system parameter measurements.
404
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:16
Page 405
This is rather an oversimplification of the true situation,

as there are some important differences. A protection
relay has to provide the primary function of protection
over a very large range of input values; from perhaps 5%
to 500% or greater of rated values. The accuracy of
measurement, whilst important, is not required to be as
accurate as, for instance, metering for tariff purposes.
Metering does not have to cover quite such a wide range
of input values, and therefore the accuracy of
measurement is often required to be higher than for a
protection relay. Additional functionality over that
provided by the measurement functions of a protection
relay is often required for a typical set of functions
provided by a measurement centre, see Table 22.3.
R.M.S. line currents

Neutral current
Average current
Negative sequence voltage
Power (each phase and total)
Apparent Power (each phase and total)
Phase angle (voltage/current)
each phase
Demand current in period
Demand reactive power in period
Demand power factor in period
On the other hand, the fundamental measurement

process in a measurement centre based on numerical
technology is identical to that of a numerical relay, so
need not be repeated here. The only differences are the
ranges of the input quantities and the functionality. The
former is dealt with by suitable design of the input signal
conditioning and A/D conversion, the latter is dealt with
by the software provided.
R.M.S. line voltages
R.M.S. phase voltages
Average voltage
Negative sequence current
Reactive Power (each phase and total)
Power factor (each phase and total)
Demand time period
Demand power in period
Demand VA in period
Maximum demand current (each phase
and total) since reset
Energy, Wh
Figure 22.3: Typical transducers/Measurement Centres
Maximum demand (W and var)

since reset
Energy, varh
Frequency
Individual harmonics (to 31st)
%THD (voltage) each phase and total
%THD (current) each phase and total Programmable multiple analogue outputs
22.7 TARIFF METERING
Table 22.3: Typical function set provided

by a Measurement Centre
The advantages of a Measurement Centre are that a

comprehensive set of functions are provided in a single
item of equipment, taking up very little extra space
compared to a discrete transducer for a much smaller
number of parameters. Therefore, when the requisite
CTs and VTs are available, it may well make sense to use
a Measurement Centre even if not all of the functionality
is immediately required. History shows that more and
more data is required as time passes, and incorporation
of full functionality at the outset may make sense.
Figure 22.3 illustrates the wide variety of transducers
and Measurement Centres available.
Tariff metering is a specialised form of measurement,

being concerned with the measurement of electrical
power, reactive power or energy for the purposes of
charging the consumer. As such, it must conform to the
appropriate national standards for such matters. Primary
tariff metering is used for customer billing purposes, and
may involve a measurement accuracy of 0.2% of reading,
even for readings that are 5% or less of the nominal
rated value. Secondary tariff metering is applied where
the user wishes to include his own metering as a check
on the primary tariff metering installed by the supplier,
or within a large plant or building to gain an accurate
picture of the consumption of energy in different areas,
perhaps for the purpose of energy audits or internal cost
allocation. The accuracy of such metering is rather less,
an overall accuracy of 0.5% over a wide measurement
405
22
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:16
Page 406
range being typically required. As this is the overall

accuracy required, each element in the metering chain
(starting with the CTs/VTs) must have an accuracy rather
better than this. Careful attention to wiring and mounting
of the transducer is required to avoid errors due to
interference, and the accuracy may need to be maintained
over a fairly wide frequency range. Thus a tariff metering
scheme requires careful design of all of the equipment
included in the scheme. Facilities are normally included to
provide measurements over a large number of defined
time periods (e.g. 24 half-hour periods for generator
energy tariff metering) so that the exporter of the energy
can produce an overall invoice for the user according to
the correct rates for each tariff period. The time intervals
that these periods cover may change according to the time
of year (winter, spring, etc.) and therefore flexibility of
programming of the energy metering is required. Remote
communications are invariably required, so that the data
is transferred to the relevant department on a regular
basis for invoicing purposes.
be tolerated without leading to excessive current/voltage

transients on CB closure. The check synchroniser has
programmable error limits to define the limits of
acceptability when making the comparison.
CB
close
controls
Check
synchroniser
Close
Generator
Network
Busbar
(a) Application to generator
CB
close
controls
Check
synchroniser
Close
22.8 SYNCHRONISERS
22
Synchronisers are required at points on a power system

where two supplies (either generator and grid, or two
grid supplies) may need to be paralleled. They are more
than just a measuring device, as they will provide
contact closures to permit circuit breaker closing when
conditions for paralleling (synchronising) are within
limits. However, they are not regarded as protection
relays, and so are included in this Chapter for
convenience. There are two types of synchronisers auto-synchronisers and check synchronisers.
22.8.1 Check Synchronisers

The function of a check synchroniser is to determine if
two voltages are in synchronism, or nearly so, and
provide outputs under these conditions. The outputs are
normally in the form of volt-free contacts, so that they
may be used in CB control circuits to permit or block CB
closing. When applied to a power system, the check
synchroniser is used to check that it is safe to close a CB
to connect two independent networks together, or a
generator to a network, as in Figure 22.4. In this way,
the check synchroniser performs a vital function in
blocking CB closure when required.
Synchronism occurs when two a.c. voltages are of the
same frequency and magnitude, and have zero phase
difference. The check synchroniser, when active,
monitors these quantities and enables CB close circuits
when the differences are within pre-set limits. While CB
closure at the instant of perfect synchronism is the ideal,
this is very difficult to obtain in practice and some
mismatch in one or more of the monitored quantities can
Network
#2
Line A
Network
#1
CB 1
Busbar B
(b) Application to two networks
Figure 22.4: Check synchroniser applications
The conditions under which a check synchroniser is

required to provide an output are varied. Consider the
situation of a check synchroniser being used as a
permissive device in the closing control circuit of a CB
that couples two networks together at a substation
Figure 22.4(b). It is not sufficient to assume that both
networks will be live, situations where either Line A or
Busbar B may be dead may have to be considered,
leading to the functionality shown in Table 22.4(a).
Live bus/live line synchronising
Dead bus/live line synchronising
Live bus/dead line synchronising

Network supply voltage #1 deviation
from nominal
Network supply voltage #2 deviation

Voltage difference within limits
from nominal
Frequency difference within limits
Phase angle difference within limits
CB closing advance time
CB closing pulse time
Maximum number of synchronising
attempts
(a): Check synchroniser functionality
Incoming supply frequency deviation Incoming supply voltage signal
from nominal
raise/lower
Incoming supply voltage raise/lower
Incoming supply frequency raise/lower
mode (pulse/continuous)
mode (pulse/continuous)
Incoming supply voltage setpoint
Incoming supply frequency setpoint
Voltage raise/lower pulse time
Frequency raise/lower pulse time
(b) Additional functions for auto-synchroniser
Table 22.4: Synchroniser function set
406
20/06/02
16:16
Page 407
When the close signal is permitted, it may be given only

for a limited period of time, to minimise the chances of
a CB close signal remaining after the conditions have
moved outside of limits. Similarly, circuits may also be
provided to block closure if the CB close signal from the
CB close controls is present prior to satisfactory
conditions being present this ensures that an operator
must be monitoring the synchronising displays and only
initiating closure when synchronising conditions are
correct, and also detects synchronising switch contacts
that have become welded together.
A check synchroniser does not initiate any adjustments if
synchronising conditions are not correct, and therefore
acts only as a permissive control in the overall CB closing
circuit to provide a check that conditions are satisfactory.
In a substation, check-synchronisers may be applied
individually to all required CBs. Alternatively, a reduced
number may be installed, together with suitable switching
arrangements in the signal input/output circuits so that a
single device may be selected to cover several CBs.
22.8.2 Auto-synchroniser
An auto-synchroniser contains additional functionality
compared to a check synchroniser. When an autosynchroniser is placed in service, it measures the
frequency and magnitude of the voltages on both sides
of the circuit breaker, and automatically adjusts one of
the voltages if conditions are not correct. Application of
auto-synchronisers is normally restricted to generators
i.e. the situation shown in Figure 22.4(a), replacing the
check synchroniser with an auto-synchroniser. This is
because it is generally not possible to adjust either of the
network voltages by changing the settings of one or a
very few equipments in a network. When applied to a
generator, it is relatively easy to adjust the frequency and
magnitude of the generated voltage by transmitting
signals to the Governor and AVR respectively.
The auto-synchroniser will check the voltage of the
incoming generator against the network voltage for
compliance with the following (Table 22.4(a), (b)):
a. slip frequency within limits (i.e. difference in
frequency between the generator and network)
b. phase difference between the voltages within
limits
c. voltage magnitude difference within limits
The CB close command is issued automatically when all
three conditions are satisfied. Checks may also be made
that the network frequency and voltage is within pre-set
limits, and if not the synchronising sequence is locked
out. This prevents synchronising under unusual network
conditions, when it may not be desirable. This facility
should be used with caution, since under some
emergency conditions, it could block the synchronising

of a generator that was urgently required in service to
help assist in overcoming the condition.
If (a) above is not within limits, signals are sent
automatically to the governor of the generating set to
adjust the speed setpoint appropriately. In the case of (c)
not in limits, similar signals are sent to the Automatic
Voltage Regulator to raise or lower the setpoint. The
signals are commonly in the form of pulses to raise or
lower the setpoint, but could be continuous signals if
that is what the particular equipment requires. It is
normal for the speed and voltage of the generator to be
slightly higher than that of the network, and this can be
accommodated either by initial settings on the
Governor/AVR or by providing setpoint values in the
synchroniser. This ensures stable synchronising and
export of power at lagging power factor to the network
by the generator after CB closure. The possibility of
tripping due to reverse/low forward power conditions
and/or field failure/under-excitation is avoided. Use of
an auto-synchroniser also helps avoid human error if
manual synchronising were employed there is potential
for damage to equipment, primarily the generator, if
synchronising outside of permitted limits occurs.
Chap 22-398-409
To ensure that the CB is closed at the correct instant, the

CB close time is normally a required data item. The autosynchroniser calculates from a knowledge of this and the
slip frequency the correct time in advance of phase coincidence to issue the CB close command. This ensures
that the CB closes as close to the instant of phase coincidence as possible. Upon receipt of the signal
indicating CB closed a further signal to raise frequency
may be sent to the governor to ensure stable export of
power is achieved. Conversely, failure of the CB to close
within a set time period will reset the auto-synchroniser,
ready for another attempt, and if further attempts are
still unsuccessful, the auto-synchroniser will lock out
and raise an alarm.
Practice in respect of fitting of auto-synchronisers varies
widely between Utilities. Where policy is flexible, it is
most common when the time to synchronise is important
i.e. emergency standby and peak lopping sets. Many
Utilities still relay on manual synchronising procedures. It
is also possible for both an auto-synchroniser and checksynchroniser to be fitted in series. This provides protection
against internal failure of the auto-synchroniser leading
to a CB close command being given incorrectly.
22.9 DISTURBANCE RECORDERS
Power systems suffer from various types of disturbances.
In post-fault analysis, it is beneficial to have a detailed
record of a disturbance to enable the initiating event to
be distinguished from the subsequent effects. Especially
where the disturbance causes further problems (e.g.
407
22
Chap 22-398-409
20/06/02
16:16
Page 408
single-phase fault develops into 3-phase), a detailed

recording of the fault may be required to distinguish
between cause and effect. If the effects of a fault are
spread over a wide area, records of the disturbance from
a number of locations can assist in determining the
location of the disturbance. The equipment used for this
purpose is known as a disturbance, or fault, recorder.
22.9.1 Disturbance Recorder Features

A disturbance recorder will normally have the following
capabilities:
a. multi-channel analogue input waveform recording
b. multi-channel digital input recording
c. storage of several fault records, ready for
download/analysis
d. recording time of several seconds per disturbance
e. triggering from any analogue or digital input

channel, or quantity derived from a combination of
inputs, or manually
22
f. distance to fault location for one or more feeders

g. variable pre/post trigger recording length
h. time synchronisation (IRIG-B, GPS, etc.)
i. programmable sampling rates
j. standard data transfer formats (IEEE COMTRADE
(now IEC 60255-24), etc.
k. communication links to control centre, etc.
(Ethernet, modem, etc.)
Power system disturbances may last from periods of a

few seconds to several minutes. To ensure that
maximum benefit is obtained from the investment, a
disturbance recorder must be able to capture events over
a wide range of timescales. This leads to the provision of
programmable sampling rates, to ensure that short-term
transients are captured with sufficient resolution while
also ensuring that longer-term ones have sufficient of
the transient captured to enable a meaningful analysis to
be undertaken. The record for each disturbance is
divided into sections covering pre-fault, fault, and
postfault periods, and each of these periods may have
different sampling rates. Time synchronisation is also a
vital feature, to enable a recording from one recorder to
be aligned with another of the same event from a
different recorder to obtain a complete picture of events.
Since most distrubance recorders are fitted in
substations that are normally unmanned, the provision
to download captured information is essential. Each
fault recording will contain a large amount of data, and
it is vital that the data is uniquely identified in respect of
recorder, fault event, channel, etc. Standards exist in
field to facilitate the interchange of data, of which
perhaps the best known is the IEEE COMTRADE format,
now also an IEC standard. Once downloaded, the data
from a disturbance recorder can be analysed by various
software packages, such as WinAnalyse, Eview, or
TOP2000. The software will often have the ability to
calculate the fault location (distance-to-fault),
superimpose waveforms to assist in fault analysis, and
perform harmonic and other analyses.
l. self-monitoring/diagnostics
Analogue channels are provided to record the important
currents and voltages at the fault recorder location.
High resolution is required to ensure accurate capture of
the waveforms, with 14 or 16 bit A/D conversion being
usual. Digital inputs are provided to capture signals such
as CB opening, protection relay operation, intertrip
signals, etc. so that a complete picture of the sequence
of events can be built up. The information can then be
used to check that the sequence of operations post-fault
is correct, or assist in determining the cause of an
unexpected sequence of operations. To avoid loss of the
disturbance data, sufficient memory is provided to
capture and store the data from several faults prior to
transfer of the data for analysis. Flexibility in the
triggering arrangements is extremely important, as it is
pointless to install a disturbance recorder, only for it to
miss recording events due to lack of appropriate
triggering facilities. It is normal for triggering to be
available if the relevant threshold is crossed on any
analogue or digital channel, or a quantity that can be
derived from a combination of inputs.
408
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 410
23
Power Quality
Introduction
23.1
Power Quality classification
23.2
Causes and impact of Power

Quality problems
23.3
Power Quality monitoring
23.4
Remedial measures
23.5
Examples
23.6
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 411
23 Power Quality
23.1 INTRODUCTION
Over the last thirty years or so, the amount of equipment
containing electronics has increased dramatically. Such
equipment can both cause and be affected by
electromagnetic disturbances. A disturbance that
affects a process control computer in a large industrial
complex could easily result in shutdown of the process.
The lost production and product loss/recycling during
start-up represents a large cost to the business.
Similarly, a protection relay affected by a disturbance
through conduction or radiation from nearby conductors
could trip a feeder or substation, causing loss of supply
to a large number of consumers. At the other end of the
scale, a domestic user of a PC has to re-boot the PC due
to a transient voltage dip, causing annoyance to that
and other similarly affected users.
Therefore,
transporters and users of electrical energy have become
much more interested in the nature and frequency of
disturbances in the power supply. The topic has become
known by the title of Power Quality.
23.2 CLASSIFICATION OF POWER SYSTEM

DISTURBANCES
To make the study of Power Quality problems useful, the
various types of disturbances need to be classified by
magnitude and duration. This is especially important for
manufacturers and users of equipment that may be at
risk. Manufacturers need to know what is expected of
their equipment, and users, through monitoring, can
determine if an equipment malfunction is due to a
disturbance or problems within the equipment itself.
Not surprisingly, standards have been introduced to
cover this field. They define the types and sizes of
disturbance, and the tolerance of various types of
equipment to the possible disturbances that may be
encountered.
The principal standards in this field are IEC 61000, EN
50160, and IEEE 1159. Standards are essential for
manufacturers and users alike, to define what is
411
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 412
reasonable in terms of disturbances that might occur and

what equipment should withstand.
Table 23.2 lists the limits given in Standard EN 50160

and notes where other standards have similar limits.
Table 23.1 provides a broad classification of the

disturbances that may occur on a power system, some
typical causes of them and the potential impact on
equipment. From this Table, it will be evident that the
electricity supply waveform, often thought of as
composed of pure sinusoidal quantities, can suffer a wide
variety of disturbances. The following sections of this
Chapter describe the causes in more detail, along with
methods of measurement and possible remedial
measures.
Causes
Voltage dips
Local and remote faults

Inductive loading
Switch on of large loads
Power Quality
Voltage surges
23
Capacitor switching
Switch off of large loads
Phase faults
Short
Interruptions
Long
Interruptions
Transient
Overvoltage
Voltage
unbalance
Undervoltage
Impacts
Tripping of sensitive
equipment
Resetting of control
systems
Motor stalling/tripping
Tripping of sensitive
equipment
Damage to insulation
and windings
Damage to power
supplies for electronic
equipment
Overvoltage
Load switching
Capacitor switching
System voltage regulation
Problems with equipment

that requires constant
steady-state voltage
Harmonics
Industrial furnaces
Non-linear loads
Transformers/generators
Rectifier equipment
Mal-operation of sensitive
equipment and relays
Capacitor fuse or
capacitor failures
Telephone interference
Loss of generation
Extreme loading
conditions
Negligible most of time

Motors run slower
De-tuning of harmonic
filters
Voltage
fluctuation
AC motor drives
Inter-harmonic current
components
Welding and arc furnaces
Flicker in:
Fluorescent lamps
Incandescent lamps
Rapid voltage
change
Motor starting
Transformer tap
changing
Light flicker
Tripping of
equipment
Voltage
imbalance
Unbalanced loads
Unbalanced
impedances
Overheating in
motors/generators
Interruption of 3-phase
operation
Short and long

voltage
interruptions
Power system faults

Equipment failures
Control malfunctions
CB tripping
Loss of supply
to customer equipment
Computer shutdowns
Motor tripping
Undervoltage
Heavy network loading

Loss of generation
Poor power factor
Lack of var support
All equipment
without backup
supply facilities
Transients
Lightning
Capacitive switching
Non linear switching loads
System voltage regulation
Control system resetting

Damage to sensitive
electronic components
Damage to insulation
Power frequency
variation
Rapid voltage
changes
Voltage surge
Voltage
fluctuations
Frequency
variation
Harmonics
Limits from
EN50160
+/- 10%
230V
5% to 10%
1kV-35kV
<6%
230V
>99%
230V
>99%
230V
Generally
<6kV
Measurement
Typical Other applicable
period
duration
standards
95% of
1 week
10-1000/year 10ms 1sec
IEEE 1159
Several
Short
per day
duration
Short
Per day
IEEE 1159
duration
20-200
Up to 3 mins EN61000-4-11
per year
10-50
>3 mins
IEEE 1159
per year
Not specified
<1ms
IEEE 1159
<-10%
Not specified
<150%
of
230V nominal voltage Not specified
>1 min
IEEE 1159
>200ms
IEEE 1159
230V
<200ms
IEC 60827
230V
230V
3%
10 min
+/- 1%
+4%, -6%
THD<8% up
to 40th
95% of 1 week Not specified Measured over 10s

100% of 1 week Not specified Measured over 10s
95% of
Not specified
1 week
Table 23.2: Power system disturbance

classification to EN 50160
For computer equipment, a common standard that

manufacturers use is the ITI (Information Technology
Industry) curve, illustrated in Figure 23.1. Voltage
disturbances that lie in the area indicated as safe
should not cause a malfunction in any way.
However, some disturbances at LV levels that lie within
the boundaries defined by EN50160 might cause a
malfunction because they do not lie in the safe area of
the ITI curve. It may be necessary to check carefully
which standards are applicable when considering
equipment susceptibility.
Percentage of nominal voltage (r.m.s.)
Category
Type of
Voltage
disturbance Level
Voltage
230V
Variation
Voltage Dips 230V
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
Affected by disturbance
Withstand
disturbance
150
100
50
0
0.001 0.01 0.1
Affected by disturbance
1
10
100 1000 10000 100000
Duration of disturbance (ms)
Figure 23.1: ITI curve for equipment
susceptibility
Table 23.1: Power Quality issues
412
Page 413
23.3 CAUSES AND IMPACT OF POWER

QUALITY PROBLEMS
Each of the Power Quality disturbance categories
detailed in Table 23.1 is now examined in more detail as
to the possible causes and the impact on consumers.
23.3.1 Voltage Dips

Figure 23.2 shows the profile of a voltage dip, together
with the associated definitions. The major cause of
voltage dips on a supply system is a fault on the system,
that is sufficiently remote electrically that a voltage
interruption does not occur. Other sources are the starting
of large loads (especially common in industrial systems),
and, occasionally, the supply of large inductive loads.
insulator flashover, collisions due to birds, and

excavations damaging cables. Multiple voltage dips, as
illustrated in Figure 23.3, cause more problems for
equipment than a single isolated dip.
The impact on consumers may range from the annoying
(non-periodic light flicker) to the serious (tripping of
sensitive loads and stalling of motors). Where repeated
dips occur over a period of several hours, the repeated
shutdowns of equipment can give rise to serious
production problems. Figure 23.4 shows an actual
voltage dip, as captured by a Power Quality recorder.
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
Vrms
Nom. High
PQ Standards
Figure 23.4: Recording of a voltage dip
User defined setpoints
Retained voltage
61-70%
0-10%
81-90%
41-50%
91-100%
51-60%
Number of undervoltage disturbances recorded
Vrms
Nom. High
Nom. Low
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
<0.5ms
PQ Standards
Retained Voltage
Duration of disturbance
Interruption
91-100%
71-80%
51-60%
31-40%
11-20%
Retained voltage
Time
Figure 23.5: Undervoltage disturbance histogram

Figure 23.3: Multiple voltage dip
Other network-related fault causes are weatherrelated

(such as snow, ice, wind, salt spray, dust) causing
Power Quality
Voltage dips due to the latter are usually due to poor design
of the network feeding the consumer. A voltage dip is the
most common supply disturbance causing interruption of
production in an industrial plant. Faults on a supply
network will always occur, and in industrial systems, it is
often practice to specify equipment to ride-through
voltage dips of up to 0.2s. The most common exception is
contactors, which may well drop out if the voltage dips
below 80% of rated voltage for more than 50-100ms.
Motor protection relays that have an undervoltage element
setting that is too sensitive is another cause. Since
contactors are commonly used in circuits supplying motors,
the impact of voltage dips on motor drives, and hence the
process concerned, requires consideration.
>10s
Figure 23.2: Voltage dip profile
Typical data for undervoltage disturbances on power

systems during evolving faults are shown in Figure 23.5.
Disturbances that lie in the front right-hand portion of
the histogram are the ones that cause most problems,
but fortunately these are quite rare.
1-5s
5-10s
Time
0.5-1s
Retained Voltage
Number of incidents/yr
Interruption
100-500ms
Nom. Low
x % below nominal
o a
Time
10-50ms
50-100ms
16:21
1-5ms
5-10ms
20/06/02
0.5-1ms
Chap23 exe
23.3.2 Voltage Surges/Spikes

Voltage surges/spikes are the opposite of dips a rise
413
23
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 414
that may be nearly instantaneous (spike) or takes place

over a longer duration (surge). These are most often
caused by lightning strikes and arcing during switching
operations on circuit breakers/contactors (fault
clearance, circuit switching, especially switch-off of
inductive loads). Figure 23.6 shows the profile of a
voltage surge.
are sufficiently high enough, protective devices may shut

the equipment down to avoid damage. Some equipment,
such as certain protection devices, may maloperate and
cause unnecessary shutdowns.
150
100
50
Vrms
Nom. High
Time
-50
Nom. Low
PQ Standards
-100
-150
Figure 23.7: Supply waveform distorted
due to the presence of harmonics
Interruption
Equipment may suffer serious damage from these causes,

ranging from insulation damage to destruction of
sensitive electronic devices. The damage may be
immediate and obvious by the fact that equipment stops
working, through to failure at a much later date from
deterioration initiated from a surge or spike of voltage.
These latter failures are very difficult to distinguish from
random failures due to age, minor manufacturing
defects, etc.
Special provision may have to be made to filter

harmonics from the measured signals in these
circumstances.
Interference may be caused to
communication systems.
Overloading of neutral
conductors in LV systems has also occurred (the
harmonics in each phase summing in the neutral
conductor, not cancelling) leading to failure due to
overheating. This is a particular risk in buildings that
have a large number of PCs, etc., and in such cases a
neutral conductor rated at up to 150% of the phase
conductors has been known to be required. Busbar risers
in buildings are also at risk, due to harmonic-induced
vibration causing joint securing bolts, etc. to work loose.
23.3.3 Overvoltages
23.3.5 Frequency Variations
Sustained overvoltages are not common. The most likely

causes are maladjusted voltage regulators on generators
or on-load tap changers, or incorrectly set taps on fixedtap transformers. Equipment failures may immediately
result in the case of severe overvoltages, but more likely
is accelerated degradation leading to premature failure
without obvious cause. Some equipment that is
particularly sensitive to overvoltages may have to be
shut down by protective devices.
Frequency variations that are large enough to cause

problems are most often encountered in small isolated
networks, due to faulty or maladjusted governors. Other
causes are serious overloads on a network, or governor
failures, though on an interconnected network, a single
governor failure will not cause widespread disturbances
of this nature. Network overloads are most common in
areas with a developing electrical infrastructure, where a
reduction in frequency may be a deliberate policy to
alleviate overloading. Serious network faults leading to
islanding of part of an interconnected network can also
lead to frequency problems.
Time
Power Quality
Figure 23.6: Voltage surge profile
23
23.3.4 Harmonics
This is a very common problem in the field of Power
Quality. The main causes are Power Electronic Devices,
such as rectifiers, inverters, UPS systems, static var
compensators, etc. Other sources are electric discharge
lamps, arc furnaces and arc welders. In fact, any nonlinear load will be a source of harmonics. Figure 23.7
illustrates a supply waveform that is distorted due to the
presence of harmonics. Harmonics usually lead to
heating in rotating equipment (generators and motors),
and transformers, leading to possible shutdown.
Capacitors may be similarly affected. If harmonic levels
Few problems are normally caused by this problem.

Processes where product quality depends on motor speed
control may be at risk but such processes will normally
have closed-loop speed controllers. Motor drives will
suffer output changes, but process control mechanisms
will normally take care of this.
Extreme under- or overfrequency may require the
tripping of generators, leading to the possibility of
progressive network collapse through network
overloading/underfrequency causes.
414
20/06/02
16:21
Page 415
23.3.6 Voltage Fluctuations
23.3.9 Undervoltage
These are mainly caused by load variations, especially

large rapid ones such as are likely to occur in arc and
induction heating furnaces, rolling mills, mine winders,
and resistance welders.
Excessive network loading, loss of generation, incorrectly

set transformer taps and voltage regulator malfunctions,
cause undervoltage. Loads with a poor power factor (see
Chapter 18 for Power Factor Correction) or a general lack
of reactive power support on a network also contribute.
The location of power factor correction devices is often
important, incorrect location resulting in little or no
improvement.
Flicker in incandescent lamps is the most usual effect of

voltage fluctuations. It is a serious problem, with the
human eye being particularly sensitive to light flicker in
the frequency range of 5-15Hz. Because of the wide use
of such lamps, the effects are widespread and inevitably
give rise to a large number of complaints. Fluorescent
lamps are also affected, though to a lesser extent.
23.3.7 Voltage Unbalance

Unbalanced loading of the network normally causes
voltage unbalance. However, parts of the supply network
with unbalanced impedances (such as untransposed
overhead transmission lines) will also cause voltage
unbalance, though the effect of this is normally small.
Overheating of rotating equipment results from voltage
unbalance. In serious cases, tripping of the equipment
occurs to protect it from damage, leading to
generation/load imbalance or loss of production.
23.3.8 Supply Interruptions

Faults on the power system are the most common cause,
irrespective of duration. Other causes are failures in
equipment, and control and protection malfunctions.
Electrical equipment ceases to function under such
conditions, with undervoltage protection devices leading
to tripping of some loads.
Short interruptions may be no more than an
inconvenience to some consumers (e.g. domestic
consumers), but for commercial and industrial
consumers (e.g. semiconductor manufacture) may lead
to lengthy serious production losses with large financial
impact. Longer interruptions will cause production loss
in most industries, as induction and synchronous motors
cannot tolerate more than 1-2 seconds interruption
without having to be tripped, if only to prevent excessive
current surges and resulting large voltage dips on supply
restoration.
On the other hand, vital computer systems are often fed
via a UPS supply that may be capable of supplying power
from batteries for several hours in the event of a mains
supply failure. More modern devices such as Dynamic
Voltage Restorers can also be used to provide continuity
of supply due to a supply interruption. For interruptions
lasting some time, a standby generator can be provide a
limited supply to essential loads, but cannot be started in
time to prevent an interruption occurring.
The symptoms of undervoltage problems are tripping of

equipment through undervoltage trips. Lighting will run
at reduced output. Undervoltage can also indirectly lead
to overloading problems as equipment takes an increased
current to maintain power output (e.g. motor loads).
Such loads may then trip on overcurrent or thermal
protection.
23.3.10 Transients
Transients on the supply network are due to faults,
control and protection malfunctions, lightning strikes,
etc.
Voltage-sensitive devices and insulation of electrical
equipment may be damaged, as noted above for
voltage surges/spikes. Control systems may reset.
Semiconductor manufacture can be seriously affected
unless the supplies to critical process plant are suitably
protected.
Power Quality
Chap23 exe
23.4 POWER QUALITY MONITORING

If an installation or network is thought to be suffering
from problems related to Power Quality, suitable
measurements should to be taken to confirm the initial
diagnosis. These measurements will also help quantify
the extent of the problem(s) and provide assistance in
determining the most suitable solutions. Finally, followup measurements after installation will confirm the
effectiveness of the remedial measures taken.
23.4.1 Type of Installation

Monitoring equipment for Power Quality may be suitable
for either temporary or permanent installation on a
supply network. Permanent installation is most likely to
be used by Utilities for routine monitoring of parts of
their networks to ensure that regulatory limits are being
complied with and to monitor general trends in respect
of power quality issues. Consumers with sensitive loads
may also install permanent monitoring devices in order
to monitor Power Quality and provide supporting
evidence in the event of a claim for compensation being
made against the supplier if loss occurs due to a power
quality problem whose source is in the Utility network.
415
23
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 416
The performance of any devices installed to improve

Power Quality can also be monitored.
Such devices may have a data link to a DCS or data
logger in order to provide historical data recording and
data processing/presentation facilities. They are quite
small and are fitted in a suitable cubicle forming part of
a switchboard line-up. The data link may be hard-wired,
use a modem connection to a telephone line, or in the
case of a utility with many geographically-dispersed
substations, radio links for data transmission may be
used. Internal data storage will be provided to ensure
effective use of the data link. The units may be self- or
auxiliary supply powered, and in the case of important
Utility substations may have battery-backed supplies to
ensure capture of voltage interruptions.
Time
synchronisation may be required to ensure accurate
identification of events.
Power Quality
For investigation of particular problems, a portable

instrument is more suitable. The same range of Power
Quality measurement capabilities is provided as for
permanent instrumentation. The instrument may have
built-in analysis/data storage capabilities, but external
storage in the form of floppy discs or a data link to a
laptop or desktop PC is commonplace. Analysis/report
writing software running on a PC is often available,
which may be more comprehensive than that provide in
the instrument itself.
Figure 23.8 illustrates a Power Quality meter that is

available (MiCOM M720 range).
23.4.2 Connection to the Supply

Connection to the supply being monitored may present
problems. For LV supplies, the voltage inputs are usually
taken directly to the instrument in single-phase or threephase form as required. Monitoring of currents may be
through a current shunt or suitable CT, depending on
circuit rating. At higher voltages, VTs and CTs already
fitted for instrumentation/protection purposes are used.
In general, the conventional electromagnetic voltage or
current transformer is suitable for use without special
considerations being required, but capacitor voltage
transformers often have a low-pass filter on the output
that has the potential to seriously affect readings of
harmonics and transient phenomena. In such cases, the
input to the monitoring device must be taken prior to
filtering, or the filter characteristics must be determined
and the measured signals processed to take account of
the filtering prior to analysis being undertaken. In
addition, the CVT itself may have a non-linear transfer
function with respect to frequency, though the variety of
types of CVT and difficulties of testing make
confirmation of this point virtually impossible at present.
Where harmonics or high-frequency phenomena are
being measured, suitable connecting leads between the
transducers and the measuring instrument are required to
avoid signal distortion. This is especially important if long
cable runs are used; this may be the case if the measuring
instruments are centralised but measurements are being
made at a number of switchboards.
23.4.3 Types of Power Quality Measurements

Instruments for power quality monitoring may not offer
the full range of measurements for all Power Quality
issues. Care is therefore required that the instrument
chosen is suited for the purpose. Most instruments will
provide provide measurements of current and voltage
harmonics, and capture of voltage dips and frequency
excursions (Figure 23.9).
23
Measurements to the commonly encountered standards

may be built-in. For capture of surges, spikes and
interruptions, more specialised instrumentation may be
required as transient high-speed waveform capture is
required. This requires a high sampling rate and large
memory storage.
Figure 23.8: MiCOM M720 Power Quality meter
Most instruments designed for Power Quality use A/D

conversion of the input waveforms. The raw waveform is
stored and either transferred to a computer for analysis,
or the instrument contains built-in software to carry out
analysis of power quality in line with accepted standards.
Often the software will have a choice of standards for
user selection. Figure 23.10 shows the capture of data
and analysis for a period of one week to determine
compliance with EN 50160.
416
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 417
More detailed analysis using the same instrument can

show directly how the results compare with this
standard, as shown in Figure 23.11.
To facilitate the interchange of data between locations
and/or users, the public-domain PQDIF data interchange
format for Power Quality may be used and facilities
provided for in the software.
23.4.4 Instrument Location

The location of the measuring instrument also requires
consideration. By careful placement and observing the
relative polarities, it is possible to deduce if the source of
the disturbance is on the source or load side of the
monitoring device.
23.5 REMEDIAL MEASURES
Equipment
UPS
Earthing practices
Filters (Active/Passive)
Energy Storage Devices
Application
Voltage variations
Supply interruptions
Frequency variations
Harmonics
Harmonics
Voltage variations
Supply interruptions
Power Quality
Figure 23.9: Transient voltage

disturbance capture
There are many methods available for correcting Power

Quality problems. The most common are given in Table
23.3. Brief details of each method are given below, but
it is emphasised that the solution adopted will be
tailored specifically to the problem and site.
Table 23.3: Power system disturbance

classification to EN 50160
23.5.1 UPS Systems

Figure 23.10: Data capture for analysis
of data to EN50160
A UPS system consists of the following:

a. an energy storage device normally a battery
b. a rectifier and inverter
c. transfer switches
Figure 23.11: THD analysis to EN50160
The UPS may be on-line (continuously in operation) or

offline (switched in when a disturbance occurs). The
former eliminates all problems due to voltage
surges/spikes/dips and interruptions (within the capacity
of the storage device) while the latter passes some of the
disturbance through, until the supply is transferred from
the normal source to the UPS. Harmonics originating in
the source may be reduced, but not eliminated in the
load, because the UPS itself is a source of harmonics, as
it contains Power Electronic Devices. Thus it may
increase harmonic distortion on the source side.
417
23
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 418
Rectifier/
Inverter
Supply
Load
Energy
storage
Figure 23.12: UPS system
The main disadvantages of UPS systems are cost and

efficiency. An on-line UPS incurs continuous losses, while
both types require energy storage devices that can be
expensive. Fast-acting switches to transfer load to the
energy storage device are required for offline devices, while
transfer switches to bypass the rectifier/inverter when
these are undergoing maintenance may also be required.
Figure 23.12 illustrates conceptually both types of UPS.
(voltage source converter) technologies are possible.

Passive filters may take up significant space, depending
on the harmonics being filtered and the connection
voltage. A voltage source converter may be used instead
to provide a reduced footprint. It can filter several
frequencies simultaneously and track changes in the
frequencies of the harmonics as the fundamental
frequency changes. It can be expensive when used solely
as an active filter, but be viable where space is at a
premium. Figure 23.14 shows the concept of an active
harmonic filter. A danger with filters is the possibility of
resonance with part of the power system at some
frequency, giving rise to problems that would not
otherwise occur.
Load
Network
Coupling
inductance
23.5.2 Dynamic Voltage Restorer (DVR)
Energy
storage
system
23
IGBT
power section
DC-link capacitor
Figure 23.14: Active harmonic filter concept
23.5.5 Static Var Compensator (SVC)
D.C.-D.C.
D.C.-D.C.
Modular 3-phase power

electronic inverters
A.C.-D.C.
Disturbance free supply
Disturbed incoming supply
A.C.-D.C.
Power Quality
This is a voltage source converter and energy store,

connected in series (either directly or via an injection
transformer) that controls the voltage downstream
directly by injection of suitable voltage in series with the
source. Ratings of up to several MW are possible at
voltages up to 11kV. Figure 23.13 illustrates the concept.
D.C.-D.C.
Figure 23.13: Dynamic Voltage Restorer concept
23.5.3 Earthing Practices

A site that suffers from problems with harmonics may
need to investigate the earthing of equipment. The high
neutral currents that result can give rise to
overheating/failure of neutral/earth connections, while
high neutral-earth impedances can give rise to commonmode voltage problems.
All neutral and earth
connections need to be checked to ensure they are
adequately sized and have sound joints.
This is a shunt-connected assembly of capacitors, and

possibly reactors, which provides reactive power to a
network during disturbances to minimise them. It is
normally applied to transmission networks to counter
voltage dips/surges during faults and enhance power
transmission capacity on long transmission circuits. The
devices are switched either in discrete steps or made
continuously variable through the use of PEDs. It works
by providing reactive power (leading/lagging as required)
to assist in keeping the voltage at the point of
connection constant. Voltage variations at that point are
reflected in var variations, so provision of reactive power
of appropriate sign can reduce the voltage fluctuations.
The STATCOM is a SVC comprised of a self commutated
static converter and capacitor energy storage. The
switching of the converter is controlled to supply
reactive power of appropriate sign to the network.
23.5.6 Ferro-resonant Transformer

23.5.4 Filters
These are shunt-connected devices used to eliminate
harmonics. Either passive (LC or RLC) networks or active
This is a transformer that is designed to run highly

saturated. Thus, input voltage dips and surges have little
effect on the output voltage. Voltage interruptions of
very short duration result in the magnetic stored energy
418
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:21
Page 419
being used up in maintaining output voltage and current.

The transformer is normally of 1:1 ratio, although taps
may be provided for fine adjustment of output voltage.
Appropriate shielding of the windings enables the impact
of voltage spikes to be reduced. It is used in LV systems,
with a power output of up to a few tens of kVA.
23.6 EXAMPLES
The dips can also be seen using the graphical viewing

facilities of the instrument. Figure 23.16(a) shows the
display of the envelope of the r.m.s. voltage, and Figure
23.16(b), the same data magnified. The number,
magnitude and frequency of the dips can be clearly seen.
A detailed view of one dip shows clearly that the dips are
only just outside the normal supply voltage limits (Figure
23.17).
The following sections show some examples of the

measurement of Power Quality problems, using an
ALSTOM M720 Power Quality meter.
23.6.1 Flicker Detection on a LV network,

using Power Quality Monitoring Instruments
Figure 23.17: Detailed analysis
on a single voltage dip
Using the waveform capture facility, the problem can be

viewed in great detail, as shown in Figure 23.18.
Power Quality
In a network known to have a high incidence of

disturbances, some local industries were identified as the
source of pollution of the electrical network, reducing
the level of Power Quality at LV voltages. Measurements
using a Power Quality meter show many voltage dips to
about 88% of the nominal voltage, as illustrated in
Figure 23.15. The voltage dips were found to occur at
frequencies of up to 8 dips/second.
Figure 23.15: Voltage dip recording

Figure 23.18: Detailed view of
voltage dip waveform
Using this information, and knowledge of the operating

cycle of the industries causing the dip, the particular
equipment responsible for causing the voltage dip can be
identified and remedial measures implemented.
(a)
(b)
Figure 23.16: Graphical view of voltage dip data
23.6.2 Investigation of Harmonic Pollution

Problems on an Industrial Plant
An industrial plant was suffering Power Quality
problems, and harmonic pollution was suspected as the
cause. A Power Quality meter was installed at various
parts of the network to determine the extent of the
problem and the equipment causing the problem.
Confirmation of the pollution as being due to harmonics
was readily obtained. This can be seen in Figure 23.19,
for the equipment identified as the source of the
disturbance. The graphics enable rapid and clear
identification of the frequency and amount by which the
generated harmonics exceed the permitted limit. A
Power System Analysis of the network was then
419
23
Chap23 exe
20/06/02
16:22
Page 420
conducted to replicate the measured results, and then

used for testing the effectiveness of harmonic filter
designs. The most cost-effective filter design and
location can then be selected for implementation.
Power Quality
Figure 23.19: Harmonic pollution

measurement
23
420
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:14
Page 422
24
Substation Control
and Automation
Introduction
24.1
Topology and functionality
24.2
Hardware implementation
24.3
Communication protocols
24.4
Substation automation functionality
24.5
System configuration and testing
24.6
Examples of substation automation
24.7
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:15
Page 423
24 Substation Control
and Automation
24.1 INTRODUCTION
The sometimes complex interlocking and sequence
control requirements that are to be found in a
substation of any significant size lend themselves
naturally to the application of automation. These
requirements can be readily expressed in mathematical
logic (truth tables, boolean algebra, etc.) and this branch
of mathematics is well-suited to the application of
computers and associated software. Hence, computers
have been applied to the control of electrical networks
for many years, and examples of them being applied to
substation control/automation were in use in the early
1970s. The first applications were naturally in the bulk
power transmission field, as a natural extension of a
trend to centralised control rooms for such systems. The
large capital investment in such systems and the
consequences of major system disruption made the cost
of such schemes justifiable. In the last ten years or so,
continuing cost pressures on Utilities and advances in
computing power and software have led to the
application of computers to substation control/
automation on a much wider basis.
This Chapter outlines the current technology and
provides examples of modern practice in the field.
24.2 TOPOLOGY AND FUNCTIONALITY

The topology of a substation control system is the
architecture of the computer system used. The
functionality of such a system is the complete set of
functions that can be implemented in the control system
but note that a particular substation may only utilise
a subset of the functionality possible.
All computer control systems utilise one of two basic
topologies:
a. centralised
b. distributed
and the basic concepts of each are illustrated in Figure
423
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:15
Page 424
24.1. Early examples of substation automation used the

centralised concept, due to limitations in technology,
both of processor power and communication techniques.
Latest examples use a distributed architecture, in that a
number of Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) such as
microprocessor based relays may be linked via a
multidrop serial link to a local processor. The local
processor may control one or more bays in a substation.
All of the local processors are, in turn, connected to a
Human Machine Interface (or HMI), and possibly also to
a local or remote SCADA system for overall network
monitoring/control.
I/O may include digital and analogue I/O (for

interfacing to discrete devices such as CB close/trip
circuits, isolator motors, non-microprocessor based
protection relays) and communications links (serial
or parallel as required) to IEDs
c. Human Machine Interface (HMI). This is the
principal user interface and would normally take
the form of a computer. The familiar desktop PC is
commonly used, but specialised computers are also
possible, while normally unmanned substations
may dispense with a permanently installed HMI
and rely on operations/maintenance staff bringing
a portable computer equipped with the appropriate
software with them when attendance is required.
It is usual to also provide one or more printers
linked to the HMI in order to provide hard-copy
records of various kinds (Sequence of Events
recorder, alarm list, etc.)
Substation Control and Automation
Control Centre
24
d. A communications bus or busses, linking the

various devices. In a new substation, all of the
elements of the automation system will normally
use the same bus, or at most two busses,
to obtain cost-effectiveness. Where a substation
automation system is being retrofitted to an
existing substation, it may be necessary to use
existing communications busses to communicate
with some existing devices. This can lead to a
multiplicity of communications busses within the
automation system
Outstations
(a) Centralised topology
Outstation
Control
centre
Control
centre
Control
centre
Outstation
Outstation
Outstation
e. A link to a remote SCADA system. This may be

provided by a dedicated interface unit, be part of
the HMI computer or part of an IED. It perhaps
may not be provided at all though since one of
the benefits of substation automation is the
capability of remote control/ monitoring, this
would be highly unusual. It may only occur during
a staged development of an automation scheme at
a time when the bay operations are being
automated but the substation is still manned, prior
to implementing remote control capability
Outstation
Outstation
(b) Distributed topology
Figure 24.1: Basic substation automation

system topologies
24.2.1 System Elements

The main system elements in a substation control system
are:
a. IEDs, implementing a specific function or
functions on a circuit or busbar in a substation.
The most common example of an IED is a
microprocessor based protection relay, but it could
also be a microprocessor based measurement
device, interface unit to older relays or control, etc.
24.2.3 System Requirements

A substation control/automation scheme will normally
be required to possess the following features:
b. Bay Module (or controller). This device will

normally contain all of the software required for
the control and interlocking of a single bay (feeder,
etc.) in the substation, and sufficient I/O to
interface to all of the required devices required for
measurement/protection/control of the bay. The
424
a. control of all substation electrical equipment from

a central point
b. monitoring of all substation electrical equipment
from a central point
c. interface to remote SCADA system
d. control of electrical equipment in a bay locally
e. monitoring of electrical equipment in a bay locally
20/06/02
15:15
Page 425
f. status monitoring of all connected substation

automation equipment
g. system database management
h. energy management
i. condition monitoring of substation electrical
equipment (switchgear, transformers, relays, IEDs)
control will be possible if the computer fails for any

reason. Such a topology is therefore only suited to small
MV substations where the consequences of computer
failure (requiring a visit from a repair crew to remedy)
are acceptable. Bay Modules are not used, the software
for control and interlocking of each substation bay runs
as part of the HMI computer software.
The system may be required to be fault-tolerant,

implying that redundancy in devices and communication
paths is provided. The extent of fault-tolerance provided
will depend on the size and criticality of the substation
to the operator, and the normal manning status
(manned/ unmanned). Many of the functions may be
executed from a remote location (e.g. a System Control
Centre) in addition to the substation itself.
Master clock
(GPS, radio)
SCADA
interface
Remote HMI
HMI
Station bus
Internet
or PSTN
Telecontrol or
bus interface
Bus interface I/O, devices

CT, VT
Bus interface
Certain of the above functions will be required even in

the most elementary application. However, the selection
of the complete set of functions required for a particular
application is essentially the responsibility of the enduser (Utility, etc.). Due to a modular, building block
approach to software design, it is relatively easy to add
functionality at a later stage. This often occurs through
changing operators needs and/or electrical network
development. Compatibility of the underlying database
of network data must be addressed to ensure that
historical data can still be accessed.
IED's
Legacy bus
Chap24 exe
Computer
IED's
The HMI, telecontrol interface, and the bus interface could be:
separate equipment
integrated into the same PC
Figure 24.2: HMI-based hardware topology
24.3.2 RTU-based Topology

24.3 HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION
To form a substation control system, the various
elements described above must be assembled into some
form of topology. Three major hardware topologies can
be identified as being commonly used, as follows:
24.3.1 HMI-based Topology
This topology is an enhancement of the HMI topology

and is shown in Figure 24.3. A microprocessor-based
RTU is used to host the automation software, freeing the
HMI computer for operator interface duties only. The
HMI computer can therefore be less powerful and usually
takes the form of a standard PC, or for not-normallymanned substations, visiting personnel can use a
portable PC.
This takes the form of Figure 24.2. The software to

implement the control/automation functions resides in
the HMI computer and this has direct links to IEDs using
one or more communications protocols. The link to a
remote SCADA system is normally also provided in the
HMI computer, though a separate interface unit may be
provided to offload some of the processor requirements
from the HMI computer, especially if a proprietary
communications protocol to the SCADA system is used.
For this topology, a powerful HMI computer is clearly
required if large numbers of IEDs are to be
accommodated. In practice, costs usually dictate the use
of a standard PC, and hence there will be limitations on
substation size that it can be applied to because of a
resulting limit to the number of IEDs that can be
connected. The other important issue is one of reliability
and availability there is only one computer that can
control the substation and therefore only local manual
425
SCADA
interface
HMI
Internet
or PSTN
Telecontrol or
bus interface
RTU
Bus interface
Master clock
(GPS, radio)
Legacy bus
IED's
I/O, devices
CT, VT
The RTU, telecontrol interface and the bus interface could be:
separate equipment
integrated into the same computer
Figure 24.3: RTU-based topology
24
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:15
Page 426
The RTU is purpose designed and can house one or more

powerful microprocessors. A greater number of I/O
points can be accommodated than in the HMI topology,
while the possibility exists of hosting a wider variety of
communication protocols for IEDs and the remote
SCADA connection. Bay Modules are not required, the
associated software for interlocking and control
sequences is part of the RTU software.
HMI
computer
Bay
Modules
Bay
Modules
Bay
Modules
24.3.3 Decentralised Topology
24
(a) Star connection of bay modules
This topology is illustrated in Figure 24.4. In it, each bay

of the substation is controlled by a Bay Module, which
houses the control and interlocking software, interfaces
to the various IEDs required as part of the control and
protection for the bay, and an interface to the HMI. It is
possible to use an HMI computer to take local control of
an individual bay for commissioning/testing and fault
finding purposes. The amount of data from the various
substation I/O points dictates that a separate SCADA
interface unit is provided (often called an RTU or
Gateway), while it is possible to have more than one HMI
computer, the primary one being dedicated to operations
and others for engineering use. Optionally, a remote HMI
computer may be made available via a separate link. It
is always desirable in such schemes to separate the realtime operations function from engineering tasks, which
do not have the same time-critical importance.
SCADA
interface
Master clock
(GPS, radio)
Remote HMI
HMI
Telecontrol or
bus interface
Internet
or PSTN
Computer
Station bus
Bus interface Bay Module
Legacy
bus
The Bay Module and bus

interface could be:
separate equipments
integrated into
the Bay Module
Bay
Modules
Computer
IED's
I/O, devices
CT, VT
Figure 24.4: Decentralised topology
The connection between the various Bay Modules and

the HMI computer is of some interest. Simplest is the
star arrangement of Figure 24.5(a). This is the least-cost
solution but suffers from two disadvantages. Firstly, a
break in the link will result in loss of remote control of
the bay affected; only local control via a local HMI
computer connected to the bay is then possible.
Secondly, the number of communication ports available
on the HMI computer will limit the number of Bay
Modules.
HMI
computer
Bay
Modules
Bay
Modules
Bay
Modules
Bay
Modules
(b) Ring connection of Bay Modules

Figure 24.5: Methods of hardware
interconnection
Of course, it is possible to overcome the first problem by

duplicating links and running the links in physically
separate routes. However, this makes the I/O port
problem worse, while additional design effort is required
in ensuring cable route diversity.
An alternative is to connect the Bay Modules, HMI
computer and SCADA gateway in a ring, as shown in
Figure 24.5(b). By using a communication architecture
such as found in a LAN network, each device is able to
talk to any other device on the ring without any message
conflicts. A single break in the ring does not result in
loss of any facilities. The detection of ring breakage and
re-configuration required can be made automatically.
Thus, the availability and fault tolerance of the network
is improved. Multiple rings emanating from the HMI
computer can be used if the number of devices exceeds
the limit for a single ring. It can be easier to install on a
step-by-step basis for retrofit applications, but of course,
all these advantages have a downside. The cost of such
a topology is higher than that of the other solutions, so
this topology is reserved for situations where the highest
reliability and availability is required - i.e. HV and EHV
transmission substations.
Redundancy can also be provided at the individual device
level. Relays and other IEDs may be duplicated, though
this would not be usual unless required for other reasons
(e.g. EHV transmission lines may be required to have
duplicate main protections this is not strictly speaking
426
20/06/02
15:15
Page 427
duplication of individual devices - which would require

each individual main protection to have two identical
relays voting on a 1 out of 2 basis). It is usual to have
more than one operators HMI, either for operational
reasons or for fault-tolerance. The system computer may
be duplicated on a hot-standby or dual-redundant
basis, or tasks may be normally shared between two or
more system computers with each of them having the
capability of taking over the functions of one of the
others in the event of a failure.
The total I/O count in a major substation will become
large and it must be ensured that the computer hardware
and communication links have sufficient performance to
ensure prompt processing of incoming data. Overload in
this area can lead to one or more of the following:
a. undue delay in updating the system status
diagrams/events log/alarm log in response to an
incident
b. corruption of system database, so that the
information presented to the operator is not an
accurate representation of the state of the actual
electrical system
c. system lockup
As I/O at the bay level, both digital and analogue will
typically be handled by intelligent relays or specialised
IEDs, it is therefore important to ensure that these
devices have sufficient I/O capacity. If additional IEDs
have to be provided solely for ensuring adequate I/O
capacity, cost and space requirements will increase.
There will also be an increase in the number of
communication links required.
A practical specification for system response times is
given in Table 24.1. Table 24.2 gives a typical
specification for the maximum I/O capacities of a
substation automation system.
Signal Type
Digital Input
Analogue Input
Digital Output
Disturbance Record File
Response Time to/from HMI

1s
1s
0.75s
3s
Table 24.1: Practical system response times for

a substation automation scheme
I/O Type
Capacity
Digital Input
8196
Digital Output
2048
Analogue Input
2048
Analogue Output
512
Table 24.2: Typical I/O capacities for a substation
automation system
A significant problem to be overcome in the

implementation of communication links is the possibility
of electromagnetic interference. The low voltage levels
that are used on most types of communication link may
be prone to interference as a result. Careful design of
the interfaces between the devices used and the
communication bus, involving the use of opto-couplers
and protocol converters, is required to minimise the risk.
Care over the arrangement of the communication cables
is also required. It may also help to use a communication
protocol that incorporates a means of error
detection/correction. While it may not be possible to
correct all errors, detection offers the opportunity to
request re-transmission of the message, and also for
statistics to be gathered on error rates on various parts
of the system. An unusually high error rate on a part of
the communication system can be flagged to
maintenance crews for investigation.
Chap24 exe
24.4 COMMUNICATION METHODS

Digital communication between items of hardware is
divided into three elements:
a. the protocol, consisting of the hardware, such as
connectors, connector pin functions, and signal
levels
b. the format, consisting of the control of the flow of
data
c. the language, or how the information in the data
flow is organised
Each of these areas is covered so that an appreciation of
the complexities of digital communications is
understood.
24.4.1 Communication Protocols and Formats

Anyone trying to connect up the various elements of a
Hi-Fi system if they have purchased them from different
manufacturers will be aware of the number of different
protocols in use. The situation is the same in the
industrial field. Manufacturers of devices are often
tempted to utilise a proprietary protocol, for no better
reason sometimes than to encourage the sole use of their
devices. Users, of course, have the opposite interest;
they would like every manufacturer to use the same
protocol so that they have the widest choice. In practice,
protocols have evolved over time, and some protocols are
more appropriate to some communication requirements
than others. The protocol used is also linked to the
format used, since the number of conductors required
may depend on the format used.
There are two basic formats in use for data
communications:
a. serial
b. parallel
427
24
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:15
Page 428
Serial format involves sending the data one bit at a time

along the communication channel. Parallel format
involves sending several bits simultaneously. Clearly,
parallel communication requires more wires than serial
communication (a disadvantage) but can transmit a
given amount of data faster. In practice, parallel
communication is limited to communication over a few
metres, and hence the majority of communications use
serial format. There are a number of popular serial
communication protocols in common use in the
substation automation field.
Thus devices can be located throughout a substation

without causing communications problems and significant
amounts of data can be transmitted rapidly. The main
drawback is that it is a half-duplex system, so that
communications use a kind of question and answer
technique known as polling. The equipment that needs
the data (e.g. a substation computer or bay controller) must
ask each device in turn for the data requested and then
wait for the response prior to moving on to the next device.
Master
station
24.4.1.1 RS232C Protocol
24
The RS232C protocol allows for full duplex

communications between two devices. The basic
specification is given in Table 24.3. The hardware
specification can vary nine conductors are the minimum
required for a full implementation, while a 25 pin
connector is commonly encountered. If flow control of
data is not required, only three signals are required (data
transmit/receive and ground).
Being limited to
communication between two devices, this protocol is not
useful in substation automation schemes. However, it is
described, because it is regularly encountered in remote
communication applications, such as those between a
small substation and a control centre using modems to
transfer the data over a telephone line.
Max. number of transmitters
Max. number of receivers
Connection type
Mode of operation
Maximum distance of transmission
Maximum data rate
Transmitter voltage
Receiver sensitivity
Driver slew rate
1
1
25 core shielded
DC coupling
15m
20kbit/s
5V min, 15V max
3V
30V/sec
This protocol is detailed in Table 24.4, and is much more

useful for substation automation schemes. This is
because, many devices can be attached to one data
channel, the maximum distance over which
communications can take place is quite large, and the
maximum bit rate is quite high. It only requires a simple
twisted pair connection, with all devices daisy-chained
on the link, as shown in Figure 24.6.
Max. number of receivers

Connection type
Mode of operation
Maximum distance of transmission
Maximum data rate
Transmitter voltage
Receiver sensitivity
32
Shielded Twisted Pair
Differential
1200m
10Mbit/s
1.5V min
300mV
IED
IED
Terminating
resistor
IED
IED
Figure 24.6: Daisy-chain connection

of RS485 devices
Where devices connected to the communications

channel may need to flag alarm conditions, this dictates
continual polling of all devices connected to the
communications channel. If more than 31 devices need
to be connected, more than one RS485 communications
link can be provided.
The two commonly used protocols are IEC 60870-5-101

and IEC 60870-5-103.
24.4.1.2 RS485 Protocol
32
IED
24.4.1.3 IEC 60870-5 Protocols
Table 24.3: RS232C specification
Max. number of transmitters
IED
IEC 60870-5-101 is used for communications between

devices over long distances. A typical application would
be communications between a substation and a Central
Control Room (CCR). A bit serial communication
technique is used, and transmission speeds of up to
64kbit/s are possible, depending on the transmission
protocol selected from those specified in the standard.
Modems can be used, and hence there is no practical
limitation of the distance between devices.
IEC60870-5-103 specifies a communication protocol
between a master station and protection devices (e.g.
protection relays). The standard is based on, and is a
superset of, the German VDEW communication protocol.
Either fibre optic transmission or an RS485 link can be
used, and transmission speeds are either 9600kbit/s or
19200kbit/s. Maximum transmission distance is 1000m
using fibre-optic transmission . Communication is on a
master/slave basis, in which the master station
continually polls the slaves (relays) to determine if any
information is ready to be sent by the slaves. While some
messages are defined by the standard, these are of
Table 24.4: RS485 specification

428
20/06/02
15:15
Page 429
limited functionality. In addition, the standard allows the

use of manufacturer-specific private messages. These
permit much greater functionality, but at the same time
hinder interoperability of equipment from different
manufacturers because there is no need for the format of
such messages to be made public. This is arguably the
greatest drawback of the standard, since extensive use of
private messages by manufacturers of devices essentially
turns the standard into several proprietary ones.
OSI Layer
Telephone Call Analogy
Physical
Conversion of voice into electrical signals. Defines type

of connector, no. of pins, signal levels, etc. Optical fibres
and wires that make up the physical telephone network
Data Link
Message transmission, error control and conferencing facilities.

Words not clearly received are requested to be re-transmitted,
using agreed procedures. For conferencing, defines how control
passes from one person to the next.
Network
Call routing, by specifying the method of allocating telephone

numbers and provision of dialling facilities. Includes operator
facilities for routing to extensions. If the message is from several
sheets of paper, ensures that all sheets have been received and are
in the correct order.
Transport
Monitors transmission quality and implements procedures if quality

is unaceptable - e.g. requests both parties to hang up and one
to re-dial. Also provides a mechanism to ensure that the correct
persons are communicating, and searches for them
(e.g. uses telephone directory) if not.
Session
Provides facilities for automatically making calls at pre-defined times,

and ensures that the correct persons are present when the call
is made. A session may be interrupted and re-established later,
using the same or a different network/transport connection.
As calls are half-duplex, provides flow control procedures e.g one person says 'over' to invite the other to speak.
Presentation
Removes language difficulties by ensuring that the same language

is spoken by both parties, or provides translation facilities.
Also provides encryption facilities for confidential calls.
Application
Specifies the format in which a message will be sent when used

in a specific application- e.g. if the application is to convey
information about meetings attended by a person, will define
the format used for the place, time, and purpose of the meeting.
24.4.2 Network Protocols

So far, the protocols described are useful for
implementing communications over a relatively
restricted geographical area. A substation automation
scheme may extend over a very wide area, and hence
suitable protocols are needed for this situation. The
most common protocols in use conform to the ISO 7layer model of a network. This model is internationally
recognised as the standard for the requirements for
communications between data processing systems.
24.4.2.1 ISO 7-layer model
The ISO 7-layer model is shown in Figure 24.7. It
represents a communications system as a number of
layers, each layer having a specific function. This
approach ensures modularity, and hence assists in
ensuring that products from different vendors that
comply with the standard will work together. The
functions of each layer are best described by making an
analogy with a telephone call, as given in Table 24.5.
Selects appropriate service for application
Application
Provides code conversion, data reformatting
Presentation
Co-ordinates interaction between end

application processes
Session
Provides for end-to-end data integrity and

quality of service
Transport
Switches and routes information
Network
Transfers unit of information to other end of

physical link
Data Link
Transmits bit stream to medium
Physical
There are a number of network protocols that are

compliant with the OSI model, such as TCP/IP, Modbus,
DNP. This does not mean that the devices using different
protocols are interchangeable, or even that devices using
the same protocol are interchangeable.
Table 24.5: OSI 7-layer model Telephone call analogy
The same data item may be stored at different addresses

within different devices, and hence re-programming of
the client that receives the information is necessary
when one device is replaced by a different one, even if
the functionality is unchanged. It can easily be seen how
a substation equipped with a variety of devices from
different manufacturers and maybe using different
protocols for communication makes the problem of
applying an automation system very difficult and
expensive. The major cost in such cases is developing the
software translation routines for protocol conversion and
building of the required database specifying where each
item of data to be acquired is held.
24.4.2.2 Utility Communications Architecture protocol
Figure 24.7: OSI 7-layer interconnection

model
Chap24 exe
A recent protocol, the Utility Communications

Architecture v2.0 (UCA v2.0), seeks to overcome these
handicaps by adopting an object-oriented approach to
the data held in a measurement/control device, plus an
internationally recognised protocol (ISO 9506) in the
application layer. Data objects and services available
within a device follow a specified naming system. The
client can extract a description of the data objects that
a device can supply, and services that it can perform, so
that it is easier to program the client. Scaling factors
and units for data items are built into the
self-description, so that the effort required
during commissioning is reduced. Devices are not
interchangeable, in the sense that a device from one
429
24
Chap24 exe
24
20/06/02
15:15
Page 430
manufacturer cannot be removed and replaced by a

device of similar functionality from another vendor.
Rather, this protocol ensures interoperability; that is the
ability for devices from different suppliers and of
different functionality to communicate successfully with
each other. The transport protocol has been separated
from the application protocol, so problems with register
addresses, etc. no longer exist. All that has to be
addressed is the transport protocols used, and clients will
normally be able to communicate with devices using one
of a number of common transport protocols. This
standard has an IEC equivalent, IEC 61850. To begin
with, IEC 61850 covers only the field of substation
automation, but will gradually be extended to cover the
same fields as UCA v2.0. Manufacturers are increasingly
moving away from protocols with a proprietary element
in them to UCA v2.0/IEC 61850. It is likely that within a
short time, most protection and control devices will use
one or other of these standards for communications.
One important reason guiding this change is that these
standards permit the use of the XML language for
exchange of data between databases.
As the
information stored in an automation system or control
centre comprises a series of databases, information
exchange is therefore facilitated.
24.4.3 Languages
A communications language is the interpretation of the
data contained in a message. The communications
language normally forms part of the overall
communications protocol. Obviously, it is necessary for
both transmitter and recipient of the message to use the
same language. While a number of communications
standards attempt to specify the language used, there is
often flexibility provided, leading to manufacturerspecific implementations. A popular work-around is for
a number of organisations to agree common standards
and set up a certifying body to check for compliance
against these standards. Thus, equipment that complies
becomes to large degree, interoperable. However, the
latest trend, as exemplified by the UCA v2.0/IEC 61850
Functional area
Interlocking
CB's
Tripping sequences
CB failure
Switching sequences
Automatic transformer changeover
Load management
Load shedding
Transformer supervision
OLTC control
Energy monitoring
Import/export control
Switchgear monitoring
AIS monitoring
Equipment status
Relay status
Parameter setting
Relays
Access control
HMI functionality
Trend curves
Interface to SCADA
protocol, is to define the language very precisely at a

high level, and require such details to be included as a
part of each message so that the recipient can interpret
the message without the need for any translator
software.
24.5 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION FUNCTIONALITY

The hardware implementation provides the physical
means to implement the functionality of the substation
automation scheme. The software provided in the
various devices is used to implement the functionality
required. The software may be quite simple or extremely
complex Table 24.6 illustrates the functionality that
may be provided in a large scheme.
The description of the electrical network and the
characteristics of the various devices associated with the
network are held within the computer as a database or
set of databases. Within each database, data is
organised into tables, usually on a per device basis that
reflects the important characteristics of the device and
its interrelationship with other devices on the network.
Electrical system configuration changes require
modification of the database using an appropriate
software tool supplied by the automation system vendor.
The tool is normally a high level, user-friendly interface,
so that modifications to the one-line can be drawn
directly on-screen, with pick-andplace facilities for
relays, IEDs, etc. This work would normally be done
offline on the Engineers workstation, if available, or as a
background task on the control computer if not. Careful
and extensive checking of the data is required, both
before and after entry into the database, to ensure that
no errors have been made. Full testing on the new
configuration using a simulator is recommended prior to
use of the new database on the main control computer
to ensure that there is minimal possibility of errors.
The software is written as a set of well-proven, standard
modules, so there is little or no need for new modules to
be written and tested for a particular substation. The
required data for the calculations performed by the
Functionality
Isolators
Contactors
Intertripping
Automatic busbar changeover
Restoration of supply following fault
Load restoration
Generator despatch
Load management
Energy management
Power factor control
GIS monitoring
CB status
Isolator status
Transformers
Switching sequences
One-line views
System views
Harmonic analysis
Remote access
Alarm processing
512
Simultaneous trips
Network re-configuration
IED configuration
Event logging
Disturbance analysis
Table 24.6: Typical substation automation functionality
430
20/06/02
15:15
Page 431
software is held in the network database. This means

that adding functionality later is not difficult, so long as
the database design has considered this possibility.
There may be problems if the electrical system
configuration is altered or additional functionality added
in reading historical data prior to the change. Training of
operations personnel will inevitably be required in
operation of the system, configuration management and
automation system maintenance. Automation system
suppliers will be able to provide configuration
management and system maintenance services under
contract if required, often with defined cost schedules
and response times so financial management of the
automation scheme once installed is well-defined.
The issuing of commands to switching devices in the
system has to be carefully structured, in order to prevent
commands that would cause a hazard from being issued.
A hierarchical structure is commonly used as shown in
Figure 24.8, beginning with the requirement for an
operator wishing to issue a command to switching
devices to log-in to the system using a password.
Select user
Operator/
authorised
person
Password
Senior
authorised
person
Password
Engineer
Password
System
engineer
Password
Administrator
Password
List of available
functions
Different levels of authority, allowing for restrictions on

the type and/or location of switching commands capable
of being issued by a particular operator may be
implemented at this stage. The next level in the
hierarchy is to structure the issuing of commands on an
issue/confirm/execute basis (Figure 24.9), so that the
operator is given an opportunity to check that the
command entered is correct prior to execution.
Interlocking
List of
available
actions
Action
select
Action
confirm
Action
execute
Cancel
Figure 24.9: Device selection/operation
The final level in the hierarchy is implemented in

software at the bay level and is actioned after the
operator confirms that the switching action is to be
a. devices locked out (i.e. prevented from operation)

b. interlocking of devices/switching sequences
to ensure that the command issued is safe to carry out.
The action is cancelled and operator informed if it is not
safe to proceed, otherwise the action is carried out and
the operator informed when it is complete.
In a number of systems, some routine switching
operations (e.g. transfer of a feeder from one busbar to
the other in a double-bus substation) are automated in
software. The operator need only request the bustransfer action to be carried out on a particular feeder,
and the software is able to work out the correct
switching sequence required. This minimises the
possibility of operator error, but at the expense of some
extra complexity in the software and more extensive
checking at the factory test stage. However, since
software is modular in nature, substation electrical
topology is restricted to a small number of
configurations and such sequences are very common, the
software development is essentially a one-off activity for
any particular substation control system.
The
development cost can be spread over the sale of a
number of such systems, and hence the cost to any
individual user is small compared with the potential
benefits.
24.5.1 Future Developments
Figure 24.8: Hierarchical command structure
Device
select
executed. At this stage, prior to execution, the operation

is checked against:
Chap24 exe
The functionality of a substation automation system is

still evolving, with new applications being steadily
added. Expansion of the functionality of such systems is
proceeding in many areas, but two main areas currently
are attracting significant interest. These are condition
monitoring and web-access.
Condition monitoring packages are already implemented
in automation systems for switchgear, while stand-alone
packages are available for transformers (Chapter 16).
Under development are similar packages for generators,
CTs, VTs, and batteries. It can be expected that all of
these facilities will be offered as part of a comprehensive
condition monitoring package in substation automation
schemes in the near future. The advantage for the user
is that the condition monitoring package can then form
a component of the Asset Management policy, in order
to determine the schedule for maintenance and
replacement, plus the acquisition of statistics on failure
rates. These can then be used in conjunction with
manufacturers to enhance the design to improve
availability.
There has already been discussion on the various
communication techniques available. Use of the Internet
431
24
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:18
Page 432
communication techniques for communications to/from

a substation offers a cheap, well-proven, widely
accessible route for this function. It also enables access
to the data from a broader community, which may be
useful in some circumstances. However, great emphasis
must be placed on the use of secure Internet
communications techniques, such as those used in the
financial sphere, as the opportunity for unauthorised
malicious access leading to major incidents or loss of
confidential data is much greater. As cost is the main
driver, it can be expected that automation systems using
such communications techniques will appear in the
future, using secure communications techniques, and
that users will have to become more aware of the threats
involved in order to apply suitable countermeasures.
24.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TESTING
24
These tasks, along with project management, are the most

time consuming tasks in the process of realising a control and
monitoring system for an electrical network. The strategies
available for dealing with these problems vary between
manufacturers, but typical approaches are as follows.
24.6.1 System Configuration

Software tools exist that assist in configuring a modern
substation or network automation system. The extent to
which the task is automated will vary, but all require as a
minimum the details of the network to be controlled,
extending to the individual device level (circuit breaker,
isolator, disconnector, etc.). Where communication to an
existing SCADA system is required, data on the logical
addresses expected by the SCADA system and devices
controlled remotely from the SCADA system will also be
part of the data input. Use can also be made of existing
databases that cover pre-defined network configurations
for example the interlocking equations for a substation bay.
Software tools will check the data for consistency, prior
to creation of:
a. the required equipment that forms the automation
scheme,
together
with
the
required
interconnections
b. the databases for each individual device
The data will be divided into domains, according to the
use made of the data:
a. process CB/isolator position, interlocking
equation, values of current/voltage
b. system number of bay computers, hardware
configuration of each bay computer, automated
sequences
c. graphical the links between each mimic display
and the data to be displayed

d. operator security access levels, alarm texts, etc.
e. external constraints data addresses for external
database access
Once all the data has been defined, the configurator
tools can define the hardware configuration to provide
the required functions at least cost, and the data
required for implementation of the automation scheme.
24.6.2 System Testing

The degree of testing to be carried will be defined by the
customer and encapsulated in a specification for system
testing. It is normal for testing of the complete
functionality of the scheme to be required prior to
despatch from the manufacturer. The larger and more
complex the automation scheme, the more important for
all parties that such testing is carried out. It is accepted
wisdom that the earlier problems are discovered, the
cheaper and quicker it is to fix them. Remediation of
problems on-site during commissioning is the most
expensive and time-consuming activity. Manual testing
of a network automation scheme is only practical for
small networks, due to the cost of testing. Simulation
tools are necessary for all other automation schemes.
These tools fall into two categories:
a. simulator tools that re-create the network to be
controlled by the automation system.
b. test management tools
24.6.2.1 Simulator tools

Simulator tools are dedicated to the network being
tested. They will normally be provided with a simulation
language that the test team can use to play scenarios,
and hence determine how the automation system will
react to various stimuli.
Process simulator tools may be hardware and/or software
based and emulate the response of the various devices to
be controlled (CBs/isolators/VTs/protection relays, etc).
They must be capable of closely following the dynamic
response of such devices under multiple and cascade fault
conditions. Specific tools and libraries are developed as
required, including the use of complex software such as
EMTP for simulation of the response to impulse-type
phenomena and the dynamic response of protection
algorithms. They may simulate the response of equipment
within the control span of the automation equipment, or
that of equipment outside of the span of control, in order
that the response of the automation system can be tested.
Communications simulator tools are used both to load
the internal communications network within the
432
Page 433
24.6.3 Test Strategy

The strategy adopted for the testing of the automation
system must naturally satisfy client requirements, and
generally follow one of two approaches:
a. a single test is carried out when all equipment for
the scheme has been assembled,
b. incremental tests are carried out as the automation
system is built up, with simulator used to represent
missing equipment.
The former solution is quickest and cheapest, but can
give rise to problems where it is not easy to locate
problems down to the device level. It is therefore used
principally when an upgrade to an existing system is
being carried out.
The control of personnel working in the system test area

is also of importance, to ensure tests are unbiased. To
meet this objective, test team personnel are normally
independent of those of the design team. If incremental
testing is used, it is sound practice that the final
integration test team is also independent of the test
team(s) that carried out the incremental tests.
24.7 EXAMPLES OF SUBSTATION AUTOMATION

A significant advantage to an asset-owner of using a
substation automation system is the space-savings that
result. Space costs money, and hence minimisation of
space enables new substations to occupy a smaller
physical space. Alternatively, expansion of an existing
substation can be undertaken making use of currently
spare bays, but where there is a problem in tightly packed
relay rooms in accommodating the extra equipment.
A common need is to update an existing substation,
presently based on electromechanical or electronic
relays, with modern devices. Figure 24.10 illustrates how
the transition to use of a substation automation system
may be managed of course, there are other possibilities
depending on the priority assigned by the asset-owner.
It is usual for all of the functionality to be tested,

including that specified for normal conditions and
specified levels of degradation within the automation
system. This leads to a large number of tests being
required. Over 500 separate tests may be required for an
automation system of average size in order to
demonstrate compliance with the specification.
Wall mimic
RTU
Sequence of events
Control
room
Marshalling cabinets
Protection 1
Protection 1
Protection 2
Protection 2
Cubicles
Auxiliary
relaying
3 cubicles/bay
24.6.4 Management of System Tests
Auxiliary
relaying
(a): Current situation
Wall mimic
New RTU
Sequence of events
Control
room
..........
The large number of tests required to demonstrate the

compliance of an automation system with specification
makes manual techniques for management of the tests
cumbersome and time consuming. The end result is
increased cost and timescale. Moreover, each test may
result in a large amount of data to be analysed. The
results of the analysis need to be presented in an easily
understood form and stored for some time. If changes
are made to software for any reason over the lifetime of
the equipment, the different versions must be stored,
together with a record of what the changes between
versions were, and why they were made. The
management of this becomes very complex, and
software tools are normally used to address the issues of
test schedules, test result presentation, software version
control, and configuration management.
Protection 1
Protection 2
Auxiliary
relaying
Protection 1
Cubicles
Protection 2
Auxiliary
relaying
3 cubicles/bay
(b): Step 1: RTU Renovation (HW obsolescence & new SCADA protocol)
Figure 24.10: Upgrade path for an existing substation
433
automation system to ensure that all devices are

communicating correctly and that performance of the
overall automation system is within specification during
periods of high communications traffic. These simulators
are standardised and a single simulator may be able to
emulate several items of equipment.
External
communications simulators test the communications with
an external system, such as a remote control centre. These
will normally be customer-specific, but some standard
simulators may be possible if a standard communications
protocol such as IEC 60870-5-101 is used.
..........
15:18
..........
20/06/02
..........
Chap24 exe
24
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:18
Page 434
New RTU
New SOE
was installed, using an ALSTOM PSCN3020 substation

automation system. The simplified 33/11kV one-line
diagram is shown in Figure 24.11. Total generation
capacity amounts to over 170MW. Not shown on the
diagram is an extensive LV network and a number of
3.3kV switchboards feeding motors.
Substation control
HMI
Control
room
..........
..........
Protection 1
Protection 2
Protection 1
132kV network
Cubicles
Protection 2
Auxiliary
relaying
Auxiliary
relaying
3 cubicles/bay
(c): Step 2: SOE Renovation and wall mimic change
33kV
New SOE
New RTU
Substation control
HMI
Control
room
..........
11kV
Protection 1
Bay computer
Protection 1
Protection 2
Cubicles
Auxiliary
relaying
Protection 2
11kV
2 cubicles/bay
(d): Step 3: Progressive decentralisation and protection integration
11kV
Substation control
HMI
Figure 24.11: HV Single-line diagram: industrial

system substation automation example
Control
room
..........
The system has two features that make it unusual from

a control point of view. Firstly, the generation within the
system is distributed, and this results in the possibility of
several island networks being created in the event of a
major electrical incident, each of which are to be run
independently until such time as paralleling of the
islands becomes possible. Secondly, the grid system is
weak, so that import has to be limited to a maximum of
40MW, even under transient disturbances such as the
simultaneous loss of two generators, each of over 30MW
capacity.
Bay computer
..........
Bay computer
Protection 1
..........
Cubicles
Protection 1
24
Protection 2
Protection 2
2 cubicles/bay
(e): Step 4: Full decentralisation
Figure 24.10 (cont): Upgrade path for an existing

substation
Examples of automation systems on order or installed are

given in the following sections.
24.7.1 Industrial Network Automation Project

A large industrial network was significantly expanded
due to the addition of extra processing facilities. As part
of the expansion, a new substation automation system
As a result of these requirements, the standard software

was enhanced to allow simultaneous control of up to 3
autonomous islands within the overall network, each
island having the full range of control facilities including
circuit/device switching, active/reactive power control of
generators, voltage and frequency control of each island
and load shedding. Due to the restrictions on grid
import, a fast load shedding algorithm was developed, as
studies indicated that conventional under-frequency
434
20/06/02
15:19
Page 435
load shedding did not provide the required performance.

The fast load shedding scheme involves continuous
calculation of the amount of load to be shed in the event
of loss of one or more generators and/or the grid
connection, and determination of which loads should be
shed, based on operator-set priorities and actual power
consumption. In the event of generation loss, load that
is at least equal to the amount of lost generation is
disconnected immediately, after which a conventional
under-frequency/grid import load shedding strategy is
invoked to cater for any further generation/load
imbalance occurring.
The substation automation configuration is shown in
Figure 24.12, while a sample operator display captured
during system testing is shown in Figure 24.13.
the main and reserve busbars. Each 345kV bus is split

into 4 sections, with bus section CBs linking the
sections. Similarly, the 138kV busbars are split into 3
sections. The 20kV busbar is also of double bus
configuration. An ALSTOM PSCN3020 substation
automation system has been installed to provide local
and remote control and monitoring of the switchgear at
all voltage levels. For the 138kV and 20kV busbars,
monitoring is provided by MiCOM M301 Measurement
Centres, communicating with BM9100 or BM9200 Bay
Modules using K-Bus proprietary communications link.
Control is exercised directly from the Bay Modules.
Protection relays are generally from ALSTOMs K-series
and EPAC range, also communicating with the Bay
Modulus using K-Bus. However, line differential and
transformer differential relays are from another
manufacturer, and communicate with the same Bay
Modules using the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, thus
illustrating the use of Bay Modules to provide more than
one communications protocol. For the 345kV busbars,
existing electromechanical-type relays were in use, and
monitoring of these is by use of contacts on the relays
wired back to the Bay Modules.
Chap24 exe
Communication from the Master Station to the Bay

Modules is by a dual-redundant fibre-optic ring (EFI.P).
Time synchronisation uses a GPS interface to the Master
Station. Remote control/monitoring facilities are
provided, both from a Remote Control Room and a
remote Network Control Centre. The latter uses the
DNP3.0 protocol, so that the complete scheme uses 4
different communication protocols.
Figure 24.12: System architecture: industrial system

substation automation example
Figure 24.14 illustrates the system architecture, while

Figures 24.15/16 show part of the 345kV and 138kV
busbars respectively.
24.7.3 Substation Control for an Electrified Railway

A high-speed (auto-transformer fed) railway has a route
length of 500km. A total of 8 traction supply substations
and 41 auto-transformer substations are required to
provide traction power and auxiliary supplies to the rail
line.
Figure 24.13: Sample operator display: industrial

system substation automation example
24.7.2 Utility Substation Automation Project

This project concerns a 345/138/20kV substation. The
substation consists of two 345kV lines, 2 x 345/138kV
transformers and 2 x 345/20kV/20kV transformers. Each
of the 345kV and 138kV busbars is of conventional
double-bus configuration, with bus couplers connecting
All of the forty-nine substations are interconnected by

means of an Ethernet OPC fibre-optic network, forming
the communications spine of the system. Each
substation has a proprietary EFI.P fibre-optic ring
(3.5Mbit/s) that interconnects the Bay Modules with the
communications spine and local operator workstations.
The ring is composed of dual fibre-optic cables in a single
sheath, thus providing two communications channels.
Figure 24.17 illustrates the network involved.
435
24
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:19
Page 436
Local control room

Modem
Modem
EOP-2
Hot stand by
EOP-1
Gateway
Remote control room

HUB
GPS
Network
control
centre
Data acquisition
es: Cambuci 1 & 2

2 X BM9100
345kV Line: Cabo Norte 1 & 2
24
345/138kV Transformers:
Lado de Alta
4 X BM9100
K-bus
MiCOM
M301
EPAC
relays
K-series relays
K-bus
345/138kV Earthing transformers
2 X BM9200
K-bus
MiCOM
M301
MiCOM M301
345/138kV Transformers
345/20/20kV Transformers
2 X BM9100
K-bus
MiCOM
M301 K-series relays
IEC 60870-5-103
K-bus
345kV: Bus section 1

1 X BM9100

1 X BM9100
Relay PQ741
MiCOM
M301
345/138kV Transformers: Lado de Baixa

2 X BM9100
EFI.P Dual redundant

Fibre optic ring
K-bus
K-bus
1 X BM9100
MiCOM
MiCOM
345kV: Bus coupler

2 X BM9100
138kV Lines: Wilson 1 & 2

2 X BM9100
K-bus
345kV: Reactor 1
1 X BM9100
K-bus
MiCOM
MiCOM
M301
K-bus
EPAC
relays
K-series
relays
MiCOM
M301
345kV: Bus coupler
1 X BM9100
138kV Lines:
Ipiranga 1 & 2
2 X BM9100
K-bus
138kV Bus section 2
1 X BM9100
K-bus
MiCOM
M301
20kV Busbar
2 X BM9100
MiCOM
M301
K-bus
MiCOM
M301
EPAC
relays
K-bus
K-series relays
MiCOM
Figure 24.14: System architecture: Utility substation automation project
436
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:19
Page 437
345kV Busbar
(Future)
Line: Cabo Norte 1
Transformer 1
345/88/138kV
Line: Cabo Norte 2
Section 2C
Section 2D
Section D
Section C
345KV
Section 1D
Section 1C
Earthing transformers
Reactor 1
Transformer 1
345/20/20kV
1B
2B
1A
Transformer 2
345/20/20kV
2A
Figure 24.15: Single line diagram: Utility substation 345kV busbar (part)
138kV Busbar
Transformer 3
345/88/138kV
Transformer 2
345/88/138kV
(future)
Section 3A
Section 4A
Section A
138kV Line: 138kV Line:

Mariana 2 Brigadeiro 2
(future)
(future)
Section B
138kV Line:
Ipiranga 2
(future)
138kV
Section 3B
Section 4B
138kV Line: Ipiranga 1

(future)
138kV Line
Wilson 2
Earthing transformer 2
Figure 24.16: Single line diagram: Utility substation 138kV busbar (part)
437
24
438
GPS
Catenary/feeder
EFI.P
ring
BM9200
BM9200
BM9200
EFI.P
ring
BM9200
xxx
c filter
e
mer
P921
P921
xxx
BM920
GPS
BM9200
xxx
BM9200
xxx
OPC server
PC
Ethernet Network
Gateway T103/OPC
BM9200
GPS
Dual redundant PC:

inter-substation automation
Printer
Printer
OPC server
PC
IIntermediate
termediate Autotransformer
Autotra sformer
Substations
34 off
44-55 per tractio
traction substation
substatio
Figure 24.17 Substation automation scheme High-speed railway line
Isolators for track

catenary/feeder
Track catenary/feeder
P632
Traction autotransformer
P632
Bus see
Buss
Auxiliary transformer
n
Track feeder isolators

l
BM9200
BM9200
BM9200
BM9200
BM9200
BM9200
Intermediate Autotransformer
Substation
OPC server
Traction autotransformer
PC
P438
BM9200
BM9200
Dual redundant OPC server
P632
P632
P632
P632
Isolators for track

catenary/feeder
action
ransformer
Traction
Traction
transformer
Traction
otransformer
BM9200
GPS
BM9200
BM9200
BM9200
BM9100
BM9200
ring
BM9200
x
xxx
OPC server
PC
Final Autotransformer
Substation
7 off
Portable PC for site maintenance staff
xxx
Bus section
Auxiliary
transformer
Auxiliary
transformer
Auxiliary
transformer
Auxiliary
SCADA
Harmonic filter
Maintenance Workstation:
Parameter settings and
disturbance analysis
Maintenance Control Centre

x3
15:19
55kV line b
ming line
24
20/06/02
P139
Traction Substations
8 off
Chap24 exe
Page 438
Chap24 exe
20/06/02
15:19
Page 439
The substation automation scheme used is the ALSTOM

PSCN3020. Traction substations have an incoming
supply at either 225kV or 400kV, transformed down to
27.5kV for traction and lower voltages for auxiliary
supplies. Redundancy in control and supervision is
provided through the operator at each substation being
able to view and control those substations immediately
adjacent as well. There is an overall Control Centre to
monitor the complete system, using a Gateway on the
Ethernet spine. Approximately 500 Bay Modules are
used, providing control and measurement facilities and
also acting as interfaces to the protection relays.
The significant aspect of this application is the distance

over which the automation scheme is applied using a
standard substation automation scheme. The overall
length of 500km is large for a substation automation

scheme and illustrates the geographical span now
possible. Figure 24.18 shows the topology of the
substation automation equipment at a traction
substation, while Figures 24.19-21 show the different
levels of detail available to a substation controller via the
HMI. Operator functions include control and monitoring
of the substations, remote setting of all relays and
automatic retrieval of disturbance recordings from relays
for remote analysis. Data is refreshed at approximately
1 second intervals. A notable automation feature is the
automatic reconfiguration of the power distribution
network during faults or other outages to maintain
continuity of traction power supplies.
Figure 24.18: Configuration of a traction substation
439
24
20/06/02
15:19
Page 440
Chap24 exe
Figure 24.19: Overview of traction power supplies
24
Figure 24.20: Autotransformer one-line diagram

440
20/06/02
15:19
Page 441
Chap24 exe
Figure 24.21: Incoming supplies at a traction substation
441
24
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:30
Page 442
25
Distribution System
Automation
Introduction
25.1
Factors influencing the application

of automation to distribution networks
25.2
Primary distribution system automation
25.3
Secondary distribution networks urban areas
25.4
Secondary distribution networks rural areas
25.5
Communications
25.6
Distribution system automation

software tools
25.7
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:30
Page 443
25 Distribution System
Automation
25.1 INTRODUCTION
Distribution systems are generally considered to be
supply networks operating at 132kV and below, and to
which consumers are normally connected. Within a
distribution system, a division into primary and secondary
distribution systems is often made, with primary
distribution systems having voltages above 22kV and
secondary distribution systems voltage below this value.
Automation of distribution systems has existed for many
years. The extent to which automation has been applied
has been determined by a combination of technology
and cost. For many years the available technology
limited the application of automation to those parts of
the distribution system where loss of supply had an
impact on large numbers of consumers. Technology was
not available to handle the large amount of
geographically dispersed data required for automation of
distribution systems in rural areas. Even when
developments in technology began to overcome these
problems, the cost of applying the technology was large
in relation to the benefits gained. Often, there was no
financial incentive to apply automation in rural
distribution systems, and consumers were not entitled to
compensation for loss of supply. As relatively few
consumers would be affected by a fault on a rural
distribution system, compared to a similar fault in an
urban distribution system, the number of customer
complaints received was not a sufficiently important
factor to justify investment in network reliability.
Interruptions to consumers in rural areas were treated as
being inevitable.
Recent developments such as privatisation started to
focus attention on the cost to the consumer of a loss in
supply. Interruptions in supply began to be reflected in
cost penalties (directly or indirectly) to the Utility, thus
providing a financial incentive to improve matters. Rural
consumers gradually became more aware of the disparity
in the number of supply interruptions between rural and
urban distribution networks. This led, in conjunction
with an increasing emphasis on Power Quality issues (see
443
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:30
Page 444
Chapter 23), to pressure on Utilities to improve the

situation. In addition, the population in rural areas
became more dependent on electrical equipment, and
thus the consequences of a supply outage were more
significant.
The term automation conjures up the use of
microprocessors, maybe linked together over a
communications network and running special purpose
software to execute a sequence of actions automatically.
While such technology is employed and forms part of
distribution system automation, the term automation
may imply nothing more than the ability to close or open
a switch remotely in addition to local (hand) control. It
may involve nothing more than the addition of an
actuator, and simple on/off remote control facilities.

Technology has been applied to reduce the cost of such
devices, thus improving the economics of their
application. Therefore, the field of distribution system
automation is a very broad one, and the solution applied
to any particular problem will reflect the particular
circumstances of problem and regulatory regime of the
Utility concerned.
Figure 25.1 shows typical distribution systems that form
the subject of this chapter, complete with the elements
of the distribution system to which automation
techniques are applied. The remaining sections of this
chapter describe the various automation techniques
available, together with typical applications.
Distribution System Automation
Transmission system
110kV
110/
11kV
110kV
110/
33kV
110/
33kV
110/
11kV
110kV
Large consumers
33kV
RMU
RMU
33/11kV
25
Urban
distribution
network
Load
RMU
33/11kV
33/11kV
Load
Load
RMU
RMU
33kV
RMU
33/11kV
Urban
Distribution
Network
Load
33/11kV
Load
Spur lines
33/11kV
Load
Spur lines
Main circuit
Normally open point
Rural distribution network

Figure 25.1: Elements of a distribution system
444
21/06/02
8:30
Page 445
25.2 FACTORS INFLUENCING THE APPLICATION

OF AUTOMATION TO DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
Cost is the main driving factor in the application of an
automation scheme to a distribution network.
Regulatory pressure may also influence the decision. The
cost may arise in many different ways. Savings from
implementing distribution system automation result
from reducing:
a. revenue foregone during outages
b. cost of handling customer complaints
c. cost of control/maintenance staff
d. cost of compensation to consumers for outages
Less tangible benefits can also be identified, such as
deferral of system enhancement (i.e. deferral of capital
expenditure) through better knowledge of network
performance. The financial advantage to the Utility of
such benefits may be more difficult to calculate, but
should be incorporated in any financial comparison for a
proposed scheme.
There are inevitably costs incurred through use of an
automation scheme:
a. cost of implementation (capital cost)
b. cost of operation
c. cost of maintenance
widespread. At the same time, overhead lines in rural

areas suffer many more faults leading to consumer
supply loss than urban cable networks. These findings
are not surprising rural distribution networks are
commonly in the form of radial feeders whereas urban
networks are often in the form of ring or meshed
networks to minimise the chances of supply loss to large
groups of consumers. Similarly, overhead lines are
normally more prone to faults than underground cables.
Because the fault incidence on EHV overhead lines is
significantly lower than for those on distribution
systems, it is also arguable that the technical standards
relating to overhead lines on distribution networks also
require review.
Therefore, developments in distribution system
automation have concentrated largely on applications to
the secondary distribution system.
25.3 PRIMARY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION

The primary distribution system is generally accepted as
comprising those elements of the distribution system
operating at voltages above 22kV. Distribution uses both
cable and overhead lines, and the power levels involved
will enable either a large group of domestic consumers,
or several industrial plants to be served. Very large
industrial plants may justify their own dedicated feeders
from the primary distribution substation (Figure 25.2).
and clearly the total costs saved must be in excess of the

total costs of implementation and use to make a scheme
viable.
For many years, automation has been implemented at
voltages above 22kV, simply due to the number of
consumers inconvenienced by a supply outage and the
resulting costs (in whatever form). However, in recent
years, the traditional balance of cost/benefit has been
changed, due to:
1. increasing dependence by communities/industry
on electricity
Bulk transmission network
110kV
To Primary
distribution
substation
Large consumers
110/50kV
2. privatisation (in some countries)

3. the spread of electricity supply to ever more
remote areas
4. the cost of training and retaining skilled staff
5. increasing emphasis on Power Quality issues
50kV
This change has been in favour of increased automation

of the distribution system, including system voltages
down to LV. Regulatory pressure to improve the
reliability and quality of electricity supply to end-users
produces an outcome that the associated costs are only
acceptable if technology is applied to automate the
secondary distribution system. Therefore, automation of
the secondary distribution system has become more
Feeders to secondary
distribution system
50kV
Feeders to secondary
distribution system
Figure 25.2: Primary distribution system
445
Chap25 exe
25
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:30
Page 446
Automation of the primary distribution system is well

established, due to the impact of supply loss on the many
and diverse consumers that it serves. In addition, the
distribution system is usually interconnected, so that loss
of supply to consumers in the event of a circuit outage is
minimised. The circuit breakers and protection systems
used in the system will already be capable of remote
control/monitoring.
However, status information
on a circuit may be confined to simple
on/off/open/closed/tripped indications, and determination
of the cause of a trip will still require despatch of a
maintenance crew to the equipment concerned. Only
after the cause of a trip has been determined can fault
location and rectification take place.
Hence modern network automation techniques can be
usefully applied. Application of such techniques brings
the following advantages:
a. ability to control a much larger area
25
b. provision of detailed network performance

information
c. reduction in space requirements
d. reduction in staffing
25.3.1 Control Area Size

The modern electric power network has tight coupling
between the various elements - a problem in one area
may have knock-on effects over a wide area. Hence,
traditional distribution control rooms serving a limited
geographical area are being replaced by fewer (perhaps
only one for a Utility serving up to 10,000km2 area) and
in these cases older automation systems may not be able
to handle the total I/O count. Either the upper limit on
I/O points will have been reached, or response times to
an event become too slow to be of practical use. Use of
a modern automation system permits a reduction in the
number of control centres used, with each centre able to
oversee a much wider geographical area. Thus, incidents
that have an impact outside of the immediate area can
be dealt with more effectively and hence result in a
better response to the incident and fewer customer
complaints.
25.3.2 Detailed Network Performance Information

Modern microprocessor-based relays can store a wealth
of information relating to the cause of a trip and
transmit such data, when requested, to a Control Centre.
Hence, the nature and possibly the location of a fault can
be identified. The maintenance/repair crew can be
provided with better information, thus shortening circuit
downtime and enhancing distribution network
availability. Data relating to network loading and
voltage variations can also be stored and downloaded at

regular intervals and provides two main benefits. Firstly,
monitoring of Power Quality can be undertaken and
hence customer complaints readily investigated.
Sufficient information may well be available to establish
the short-term actions required to correct or minimise
the problem, resulting in fewer customer complaints, and
a possible reduction in financial penalties. Secondly, a
review of the loading profile of circuits against time can
be undertaken. Using appropriate plant thermal ageing
models, the rating of circuits can be reviewed and
adjusted. This may result in an enhanced rating being
given to circuits, and hence the postponement of capital
expenditure.
25.3.3 Space Requirements

Many countries have significant pressure on land-use for
infrastructure requirements. A modern microprocessor
relay can now undertake the functions previously
requiring several discrete relays, and of measurement
devices, thus eliminating numerous VTs and CTs,
measurement transducers/indicators, auxiliary contacts
on circuit breakers, etc. Wiring between plant items is
much reduced. Use of modern communications
techniques such as data transmission by mobile radio
networks can similarly reduce wiring requirements
to/from the Control Centre. The space requirements in a
substation for housing the relays associated with the
circuits of a distribution network can be reduced, giving
a significant reduction in expenditure on the buildings
associated with the substation. Benefits can also be
obtained from eliminating separate metering devices,
reducing space provision and hence cost.
25.3.4 Staffing Levels

The reduction in the number of Control Centres leads
naturally to a reduction in the staffing requirement for
such places. More importantly, the ability of intelligent
relays to report their settings and measured values to a
Control Centre, and to accept revised settings
downloaded from the control centre can lead to
significant improvements in the quality of supply, while at
the same time reducing the staffing required compared to
a manual system. Distribution systems are subject to
regular changes in configuration and loading, and these
may require changes to protection relay settings.
Manual means of determining protection relay settings
involve site surveys at the substations concerned to
record existing settings, followed by further visits to
carry out changes as required. Pressures on staffing may
mean that such exercises are carried out at extended
intervals. A modern automated distribution system
eliminates much of the manual effort by automation of
446
21/06/02
8:31
Page 447
the reporting and downloading of relay settings. While

scope still exists for introducing errors into relay setting
values, the incidence of these is reduced. Regular
comparison of settings against desired values increases
the possibility of incorrect settings being identified and
corrected, thus minimising the resulting disruption.
25.4 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS URBAN AREAS

A high level of interconnection, either ring or mesh, to
ensure a high degree of availability of supply to the
consumer, characterises secondary distribution networks in
urban areas. Domestic, industrial and commercial
consumers will suffer great inconvenience through only a
relatively short loss in supply of only a few hours, with
business likely to suffer considerable financial loss if an
interruption is longer than 2-4 hours. For domestic
consumers, loss of supply for between 4-8 hours is largely
an inconvenience, though loss may result from spoilage of
freezer contents, etc. and in cold weather may place
vulnerable sections of the community at risk. Such hazards
for a privatised Utility give rise to the potential for
significant financial loss, through claims for compensation.
A typical urban secondary distribution system is shown

in Figure 25.3. There is a large proportion of
underground cable, and final feeders to LV distribution
substations take the form of feeders from Ring Main
Units (RMUs). Several RMUs are connected in a loop fed
from one or more substations, the loop normally being
open at some point. The open point is normally chosen
to equalise loading at both ends of the ring as far as
possible. The cables forming the ring and all associated
switchgear, etc., are sized for single-end feeding of the
whole ring, to allow for an outage affecting the ring
between a substation and the first RMU, or at the
substation itself.
The arrangement of an individual RMU is shown in Figure
25.4(a). For many years, only local operation and
indications (trip/healthy) were provided, so that
switching operations required a visit from field staff.
Trips at an RMU resulting in loss of supply to consumers
were annunciated through customer complaints, no
direct indication to the control room was provided.
Chap25 exe
Ring
Ring
Primary distribution network
Ring Main Unit

Spur
33kV
(a) Basic Ring Main Unit
To Secondary
distribution 33/11kV
substation
33/11kV
Ring
Ring
11kV
RMU
I>
RMU
RMU
Remote
interface
RMU
11/0.4kV
11/0.4kV
11/0.4kV
11/0.4kV
Ring Main Unit

Spur
Final distribution
(b) Automated Ring Main Unit

RMU
RMU
11/0.4kV
11/0.4kV
RMU
RMU
11/0.4kV
RMU
11/0.4kV
11/0.4kV
Final distribution
Figure 25.3: Typical urban secondary
distribution system
Figure 25.4: Ring Main Unit
The individual items of plant have developed over many

years and are generally reliable, taken individually. Major
failures of a complete distribution system are rare, and
usually stem from inadequate specification of the
original equipment, or failure to monitor the condition of
447
25
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:31
Page 448
equipment with time. This is especially the case where

loading and/or environmental conditions have changed.
However, once a fault occurs (and sooner or later this is
inevitable), location, repair and restoration of normal
supply can take time. In particular, repair of faults in
underground cables may take some time, as the location
must first be identified to within a few metres, and then
the ground excavated to effect the repair. In the centre
of a large city, excavation is not popular and will be
expensive. Traffic congestion will ensure that the
response time for a repair crew to arrive at a substation
after a fault has been reported is not trivial, especially
where (in some privatised Utilities), penalties may be
imposed for loss of supply to consumers lasting more
than 60 minutes.
The application of automation techniques has therefore

many advantages. This will usually require the provision
of extra features to an RMU. The most common features
added are:
25
a. capability for remote operation addition of

actuators for open/close operation of the various
devices that are capable of being operated from a
remote location
b. provision of remote indications of status of the
various devices
c. addition of Fault Passage Indicators (FPIs). An FPI
is a sensor that detects passage of current in excess
of a defined value, and therefore provides an
indication that the fault is further from the supply
point (for a radial-fed system) than the FPI
d. addition of a protection relay for phase/earth faults
Note that once it has been decided to provide remote
control or indication, some form of communications
interface is also required and the incremental cost of
providing both remote control and indication instead of
one or the other is very small
compensation paid can be justification in itself.

Interrogation of relays/(FPIs) can then determine the
feeder circuit on which the fault has occurred, thus
enabling restoration of supply to customers unaffected
by the fault to begin immediately. In some cases, it may
be possible to devise automatic sequences for this, thus
relieving the control room operator of this duty and
enabling concentration on the task of precise fault
location and repair.
Equipment that is used rarely may fail to operate when
called upon to do so. Much effort has been paid in
protection relay design to avoid this problem, and digital
and numerical relays generally have a self-checking
function that runs regularly and is arranged to alarm if
the function detects an internal fault. However, circuit
breakers and other switching devices that may not
operate for a considerable period can get stuck in their
normal position and thus fail to operate when
commanded to. A number of major system collapses
have been known to occur because of such problems, it
being not always possible to provide backup protection
that will operate in sufficient time. One solution to this
problem is to exercise such equipment on a regular basis.
This can be done at little cost to the Utility if carried out
remotely, but is prohibitively expensive if carried out on
a local manual basis. Finally, through an improved
knowledge of network performance, network
enhancements may be able to be postponed or
eliminated, which is a substantial bonus as the costs of
installing new cables in urban areas can be very high.
Figure 25.5 shows a modern RMU suitable for
installation indoors practice varies between countries
in such matters, with outdoor installation also being
common.
A typical configuration for an RMU with all options fitted

is shown in Figure 25.4(b).
Traditional manual operation of RMUs can be replaced
by remote control. Many existing designs of RMU can be
adapted in this way, while all new designs have this
feature as standard. The remote communications feature
provides the following features:
1. issuing of commands to open/close the circuit
breaker, etc.
2. provision of status
availability) etc.
information
(position,
3. voltage and current data

Provision of remote indication of status to a Control
Centre enables the response time to a fault to be
reduced. The reduction in customer complaints and
Figure 25.5: Modern indoor RMU
448
21/06/02
8:31
Page 449
25.5 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS RURAL AREAS

The challenges in network automation for rural areas are
similar to those in urban areas, however the network
topology may be very different.
A typical conventional network topology is shown in
Figure 25.6. Due to relatively sparse population, feeders
are generally radial, often with spur lines, and can be
quite lengthy 60km length of main feeder at 11kV
being possible. The feeders are usually conventional
overhead lines with uninsulated conductors, and fault
rates for these lines are high in comparison with cables
or EHV overhead lines. In some countries, lightly
insulated conductors are used, and these reduce the fault
rates experienced.
25.5.1 Circuit Breaker Remote Control/Monitoring

This provides a small advantage in alerting the operator
to a loss of supply, and a larger one in minimising
restoration time. Most OHL faults are transient in
nature, and therefore circuit breaker reclosure after a
short time interval is likely to result in supply being
restored. The operator may therefore attempt a manual
closure of the circuit breaker to restore supply. Use of an
auto-reclose scheme (see Chapter 14) may further
reduce the disconnection time and relieve the control
room operator of workload, especially in conditions of
poor weather when many distribution feeders may suffer
transient faults.
25.5.2 Automatic Sectionalisers

An automatic sectionaliser is a switching device that
detects the flow of current in excess of a set value and
opens a switch to disconnect the network downstream of
the device. Because such devices are usually polemounted, in locations remote from a suitable electricity
supply, the sensing and switching mechanism is arranged
to be self-powered. The expense of a transformer, etc. to
provide such a supply from the supply side of the line is
not justified and adds additional complication. By
placing automatic sectionalisers at intervals along the
line, it is possible to disconnect only the faulted section
of line and those beyond it. The number of consumers
affected by a permanent fault is minimised, and a more
precise indication of the location is possible. For circuits
that have more than one feed and a normally open point
(Figure 25.7), loss of supply until the fault is repaired can
be limited to the section in which the fault lies. The
sectionaliser at point B opens automatically and the
operator can take action to open the one at point C. The
faulted section is thus isolated and (subject to system
conditions being satisfactory) the sectionaliser at the
normally open point may be closed.
Normally
open
point
Normally
open
point
NB: Consumer connections not shown
Chap25 exe
Figure 25.6: Rural distribution network
Response times for location and repair of faults may be

lengthy, as the only indication of a fault having occurred
may be customer complaints of loss of supply due to the
source circuit breaker having tripped. In this case, all
consumers fed by the line will suffer loss of supply, and
determining the location of the fault may take a
considerable time.
Sectionaliser operates
B
Fault
Many possible enhancements taking advantage of

automation techniques to the basic feeder topology are
possible to improve the situation:
a. add remote control/monitoring to the circuit
breaker
b. add automatic sectionalisers

Figure 25.7: Automatic sectionaliser operation
449
Normally
open
point
25
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:31
Page 450
However, there can be drawbacks as well. Grading of the

feeder circuit breaker with the sectionalisers may be
difficult and result in longer fault clearance times for
faults in the section between the circuit breaker and first
sectionaliser. The circuit breaker must be rated for the
resulting fault duty. Consumers situated in healthy
sections of line may suffer extended voltage dips,
which may give rise to problems with equipment. An
illustration of the device is given in Figure 25.8.
RTU
RTU
RTU
Normally
open
* point
RTU
*
RTU
RTU
RTU
RTU
RTU
*
RTU
RTU
RTU
Normally
open
point

* CB's/reclosers/sectionalisers fitted with
transducers for volts/amps and Fault Passage Indicator
CB's/reclosers fitted with overcurrent/
earth fault relay and automatic reclosing device.
Figure 25.9: Automated rural distribution
network
The benefits provided are:

a. rapid restoration of supply to all consumers
following transient faults
b. disconnection of the minimum number of
consumers following a permanent fault
c. indication of network performance to the control
centre, including fault location and network
loading
Figure 25.8: Modern automatic sectionaliser
25
RTU
RTU
A development of the automatic sectionaliser is the

automatic recloser. This device opens when a fault is
sensed, and subsequently re-closes according to a preset sequence. It can be thought of as the distribution
network equivalent to an auto-reclose scheme applied to
circuit breakers on an EHV transmission line. It
overcomes the disadvantage of a sectionaliser in that
transient faults do not result in loss of supply to
consumers downstream of the device.
RTU
The first automatic reclosure operates a short time after

opening and will usually be successful if the fault is a
transient one. Should a fault still be detected upon the
first reclosure, the recloser deliberately remains closed
for a significant time to try and clear the fault by using
the arc energy to burn out the cause of the fault. The
recloser then opens, and closes after a pre-set dead time.
Should the fault still exist, a further burn
time/open/reclose cycle is carried out, after which a final
open/lockout operation is performed if the fault still
exists. The usual remote control and indication facilities
are provided. Some form of condition monitoring may be
used, so that maintenance is requested only when
required, and not on the usual basis of the number of
switching operations carried out. Figure 25.9 shows the
distribution network of Figure 25.6 after application of
full automation as described above.
d. reduced requirement of field crews to carry out

manual switching
e. reduced fault location time
In common with other distribution systems, intelligent
devices such as circuit breakers and sectionalisers fitted
with remote control and current/power sensing devices
can be used to gather information on network operating
conditions and hence be used as inputs when network
enhancement is being considered. With existing
equipment, such information may not be available at all
unless a field measurement exercise is undertaken. The
information can be used not only to identify constraints
in the network, but also to determine spare capacity
much more accurately (in terms of permissible shortterm overloads possible without excessive temperature
rises occurring). Network re-inforcement may then
possibly be postponed or even eliminated, resulting in
450
21/06/02
8:31
Page 451
reduced capital expenditure requirements. There is also

the potential for improved thermal modelling of plant, to
produce a more accurate thermal loss-of life indication.
25.6 COMMUNICATIONS
Perhaps the most difficult task in automating a
distribution network is selection of the appropriate
communications technique for implementation of the
remote control/reporting facilities. Several techniques
are available, as follows:
properly specified. Reported experience on schemes in

operation suggest that call set-up times may be slow,
and line quality (even in densely populated urban areas)
may not be high, leading to slow data rates and hence
restrictions in the amount of data that can be
transmitted in a reasonable time.
25.6.3 Mobile Radio
Trials to date appear to indicate that the choice of

communications medium is critical. Therefore, extensive
investigations in this area are required. Not all of the
possibilities are suitable for all types of distribution
system or geographical area, and this needs to be kept in
mind.
Mobile radio is a quite attractive option. Many

companies offer packet-switched data techniques to
business users. Field experience reported to date
indicates that this method is well suited to both urban
and rural areas. The main problem in urban areas
appears to be shielding of the required antennas by other
buildings or parked vehicles a problem shared by all
communications techniques involving radio. In rural
areas, investment may be required to provide the
necessary area of cover, and this may take time to
achieve, depending on the priorities of the telecomms
provider involved. However, mobile telecomms service
providers are usually keen to expand service coverage
and sites for the required masts may conveniently be
located along the right-of-way of the distribution
system lines.
25.6.1 Hard-Wired Communication
25.6.4 Conventional Radio
Hard-wired communication is generally not a viable

option, as the infrastructure will not be available. The
costs of installing the required cabling will be large, and
it will normally be found that there are less expensive
solutions available. However, in cases where there is
infrastructure already available, this solution will be
attractive. All cabling suffers from the possibility of
faults, and therefore an alternate route, maybe sourced
from a telecomms provider, may be required as backup.
Use of radio as a telecomms medium is well established

amongst Utilities. Low powered radio has been used in a
number of trial installations of distribution system
automation schemes without significant problems. The
requirements for base stations are similar to those for
mobile telecomms, together with the same possible
hazards. One possible drawback to greater adoption of
such techniques is that low-powered radio is not subject
to regulation in some countries. There is no guarantee
that interference from systems operating on the same or
nearby frequencies will not occur, nor is there any
mechanism available to ensure that a frequency, once
chosen, is reserved solely for the user in that area. The
regulatory situation could be expected to change if wider
use of such techniques occurred.
a. hard-wired
b. Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
c. mobile radio (packet switched data)
d. conventional or low-powered radio (including
Microwave)
e. Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
25.6.2 Use of PSTN Network

Use of the existing fixed public telecomms infrastructure
will normally be feasible for urban distribution networks.
For rural networks, the required infrastructure probably
does not exist. Line quality will be of critical importance
and equipment to ensure detection of errors in
transmission, and request repeat transmission of data,
will probably be required. Similarly, as substations are
areas of high electrical interference, appropriate
measures to protect the required hardware in substations
will be required. Technical solutions to these problems
readily exist, but appropriate data on the probable
interference levels, especially those occurring transiently
under fault conditions or due to lightning strikes on
overhead lines are required to ensure that equipment is
25.6.5 Microwave Transmission

Microwave transmission is a possibility, although
severely handicapped by the fact that it relies on lineofsight communications. Numerous repeater stations
may therefore be required in hilly terrain. It does not
appear to have been used in trials reported on to date so
the practical performance cannot be judged. However,
given appropriate terrain, it still merits consideration.
451
Chap25 exe
25
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:31
Page 452
25.6.6 PLC Communications
Power Line Carrier is a technique that is well known to

Utilities and makes extensive use of existing Utilityowned infrastructure. However, additional equipment is
needed at each substation to ensure that the signal only
travels along the desired path and is prevented from
travelling along others and causing unwanted
interference. The additional equipment required can
make a new installation expensive, and retrofit on
existing distribution systems at lower voltages probably
prohibitively so. Space provision for the required line
traps and coupling transformers is required, which may
be difficult to find at many locations. At higher
distribution voltage levels (e.g. 66kV/110/132kV), it is
more attractive, especially as it may already have been
installed for other reasons. Data rates may be limited
and transmission failure may occur under fault
conditions, just at the time when it is most needed.
25
Whichever communications medium is chosen, care is

also needed in the choice of communications protocol.
The common IEC 60870-5-103 master/slave protocol
used by many protection/measurement devices is not
wholly appropriate for such techniques. It requires
polling by the master station of the slave devices on a
regular basis, whereas initiation by field devices is ideally
required, in order to limit the communications
bandwidth required. Protocol converters may be
required in the field, making one additional source of
unreliability. At the Control Centre, a protocol converter
will almost certainly be required, to interface to the
SCADA system in use. Each element in the scheme must
be reliable in operation and not be prone to false
operation in any way, otherwise credibility is rapidly lost.
Not only will the scheme fall rapidly into disuse, but also
the experience will colour the assessment of future
schemes for many years to come. More information on
data transmission protocols is to be found in Chapter 24.
25.7 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AUTOMATION

SOFTWARE TOOLS
To assist the operator of a distribution network, there are
a number of software tools that can be used to assist in
making decisions and implementing them. They are:
a. topology analysis
b. power system calculations
c. power quality management
d. system configuration management
The tools may be available as on-line interactive tools, to
assist in decision-making, or as off-line tools to study
the impact of decisions (what-if scenarios). Some of
the technology is available now, especially in off-line
form, but all features described are under active
development and can be expected to be available soon,

producing further enhancements in distribution network
performance.
25.7.1 Topology Analysis

In its simplest form, topology analysis can be simply an
operator display of the distribution network, using
colours to differentiate between the various states in the
network. The network may be displayed in terms of its
state (energised/non-energised), voltage level, or source
of supply.
More advanced software tools may involve state
estimation of the network, using historical or assumed
data. This is used to fill in gaps in the known network
topology, due perhaps to communications failures or use
of legacy equipment without communications facilities
on some parts of the network. The results of the analyses
are displayed and are used as inputs to other software
tools.
25.7.2 Power System Calculations

These involve load flow and fault level calculations to
determine network loading, possible overloads on
equipment and to ensure equipment is operated within
fault level ratings. Special requirements may exist in
implementing solution techniques due to the radial
nature of the network. It may also be necessary to
predict network performance in the future by assuming
loads, or to assume data where it is lacking, by use of
state estimation techniques.
The losses in the
distribution system, or any part of it, can be evaluated to
determine the efficiency of the network and as an input
to intelligent configuration tools to assist the operator in
selecting the most appropriate configuration as network
conditions change.
25.7.3 Power Quality Management

Power Quality has been covered in Chapter 23. Software
can be used for calculating various performance indices
relating to Power Quality. The results, whether obtained
off-line or in real-time, can be used to influence the
operation of the network to minimise either one or
several of the performance indicators. There may be
economic benefits for the Utility through more efficient
use of the network and avoidance of financial penalties
where performance targets are not met. The tool will use
inputs from the Topology Analysis and Power System
Calculation tools in order for the functions to be carried
out. Typical user outputs are tap changer and capacitor
switching schedules, energy losses for the whole or
selected parts of the network for defined periods of time,
harmonic levels, data relating to supply interruptions
452
Chap25 exe
21/06/02
8:31
Page 453
(Customer Minutes Lost, etc), and reliability indices for

the network. The data relating to losses can be split into
those that are load related and those that are
independent of load. This data can be input into tools
relating to Asset Management, as the choice of feeder
type/rating and design of transformers, etc. can be
influenced by such factors.
25.7.4 System Configuration Tool
This tools can be used either off-line to examine the

impact of proposed changes to the network, or on-line to
suggest changes to a network to yield optimal results,
according to a number of user-specified criteria. The
impact of proposed switching sequences is also analysed,
to ensure that the duty imposed is within rating. The
user-specified criteria may include those relating to
Power Quality, while required inputs are the outputs
from the Topology and Power System Calculation tools.
A further function of this tool is to calculate the optimal
order of switching in a network to restore supplies after
an incident, while maintaining safety. Alternative
sequences that can be adopted in the event of failure of
a device to respond to a command are also available.
453
25
Appendix 2-466-467
21/06/02
10:56
Page 466
Appendix 2
ANSI/IEC Relay Symbols
Appendix 2-466-467
21/06/02
10:56
Page 467
Appendix 2
ANSI/IEC Relay Symbols
There are two methods for indicating protection relay

functions in common use. One is given in ANSI Standard
C37-2, and uses a numbering system for various
functions. The functions are supplemented by letters
where amplification of the function is required. The
other is given in IEC 60617, and uses graphical symbols.
To assist the Protection Engineer in converting from one
system to the other, a select list of ANSI device numbers
and their IEC equivalents is given in Figure A2.1.
Description
ANSI
IEC 60617
Description
ANSI
Overspeed relay
12
>
Inverse time earth fault

overcurrent relay
51G
Underspeed relay
14
<
Definite time earth fault

overcurrent relay
51N
Distance relay
21
<
Voltage restrained/controlled
overcurrent relay
51V
U I>
Overtemperature relay
26
>
Power factor relay
55
cos >
Undervoltage relay
27
U<
Overvoltage relay
59
U>
Directional overpower
relay
32
P>
Neutral point displacement

relay
59N
Ursd >
Underpower relay
37
P<
Earth-fault relay
64
Undercurrent relay
37
I<
Directional overcurrent relay
67
Negative sequence relay
46
I2 >
Directional earth fault relay
67N
Negative sequence voltage

relay
47
U2 >
Phase angle relay
78
>
Thermal relay
49
Autoreclose relay
79
Instantaneous overcurrent
relay
50
I >>
Underfrequency relay
81U
f<
Inverse time overcurrent

relay
51
I>
Overfrequency relay
81O
f>
Differential relay
87
Id>
>
Figure A2.1 ANSI number/IEC symbol comparison

467
IEC 60617
I
>
>
>
>
I>
>
>
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:51
Page 454
Appendix 1
Ter minolog y
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:51
Page 455
Appendix 1
Terminolog y
The introduction of computer technology means that the

Protection Engineer must now be familiar with a range
of technical terms in this field, in addition to the terms
long associated with Protection and Control. Below is a
list of terms and their meanings that are now commonly
encountered in the Protection and Control field.
AC
Alternating Current
ACB
Air Circuit Breaker
Accuracy
The accuracy of a transducer is defined by the limits of
intrinsic error and by the limits of variations.
Accuracy class
A number used to indicate the accuracy range of a
measurement transducer, according to a defined
standard.
Active power (watt) transducer
A transducer used for the measurement of active
electrical power
ADC
Analogue to Digital Converter
A/D Conversion
The process of converting an analogue signal into an
equivalent digital one, involving the use of an analogue
to digital converter
Adjustment
The operation intended to bring a transducer into a state
of performance suitable for its use
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AI
Analogue Input
AIS
Air Insulated Switchgear
455
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:51
Page 456
Alarm
An alarm is any event (see below) tagged as an alarm
during the configuration phase
Bay
Set of LV, MV, or HV plant and devices, usually controlled
by a bay computer
All-or-nothing relay
An electrical relay which is intended to be energised by
a quantity, whose value is either higher than that at
which it picks up or lower than that at which it drops out
BC
Bay Computer. Computer dedicated to the control of one
or several bays within a substation
Anti-pumping device
A feature incorporated in a Circuit Breaker or reclosing
scheme to prevent repeated operation where the closing
impulse lasts longer than the sum of the relay and CB
operating times
AO
Analogue Output
AR
Auto Reclose: A function associated with CB,
implemented to carry out reclosure automatically to try
to clear a transient fault
A p p e n d i x 1 - Te r m i n o l o g y
ARBITER
Proprietary protocol for time synchronisation from
ARBITER Systems, Inc. Paso Robles, California USA
A1
Arcing time
The time between instant of separation of the CB
contacts and the instant of arc extinction
Auto-transformer
A power transformer that does not provide galvanic
isolation between primary and secondary windings
AUX
Auxiliary
Auxiliary circuit
A circuit which is usually energised by the auxiliary
supply but is sometimes energised by the measured
quantity
Auxiliary relay
An all-or-nothing relay energised via another relay, for
example a measuring relay, for the purpose of providing
higher rated contacts, or introducing a time delay, or
providing multiple outputs from a single input.
Auxiliary supply
An a.c. or d.c. electrical supply other than the measured
quantity which is necessary for the correct operation of
the transducer
AV R
Automatic Voltage Regulator
BCD
Binary Coded Decimal
BCP
Bay Control Point. A local keypad at bay level to control
the elements of a single bay
Biased relay
A relay in which the characteristics are modified by the
introduction of some quantity other than the actuating
quantity, and which is usually in opposition to the
actuating quantity
Bias current
The current used as a bias quantity in a biased relay
BIOS
Basic Input/Output System (of a computer or
microprocessor)
BT
Booster Transformer
B o o s t e r Tr a n s f o r m e r
A current transformer whose primary winding is in series
with the catenary and secondary winding in the return
conductor of a classically-fed a.c. overhead electrified
railway. Used at intervals to ensure that stray traction
return currents, with their potential to cause
interference in nearby communication circuits, are
minimised
Burden
The loading imposed by the circuits of the relay on the
energising power source or sources, expressed as the
product of voltage and current (volt-amperes, or watts if
d.c.) for a given condition, which may be either at
setting or at rated current or voltage. The rated output
of measuring transformers, expressed in VA, is always at
rated current or voltage and it is important, in assessing
the burden imposed by a relay, to ensure that the value
of burden at rated current is used
C
Capacitance
CAD
Computer Aided Design
Back-up protection
A protection system intended to supplement the main
protection in case the latter should be ineffective, or to
deal with faults in those parts of the power system that
are not readily included in the operating zones of the
main protection
Calibration
The set of operations which establish, under specified
conditions, the relationship between values indicated by
a transducer and the corresponding values of a quantity
realized by a reference standard. (This should not be
confused with adjustment, q.v.)
456
21/06/02
10:51
Page 457
CB
Circuit Breaker
CBC
Compact Bay Controller. Small capacity bay computer
for Medium Voltage applications
CBCT
Core Balance Current Transformer
CCR
Central Control Room
CDM
Conceptual Data Modelling is an activity whose aims are:
to define objects and links and naming conventions for
their identifications
to guarantee interoperability between subsystems
to define standard exchange formats between system
configurator and subsystem configurators
Characteristic angle
The angle between the vectors representing two of the
energising quantities applied to a relay and used for the
declaration of the performance of the relay
Characteristic curve
The curve showing the operating value of the
characteristic quantity corresponding to various values
or combinations of the energising quantities
Characteristic Impedance Ratio (C.I.R.)
The maximum value of the System Impedance Ratio up
to which the relay performance remains within the
prescribed limits of accuracy
Characteristic quantity
A quantity, the value of which characterises the
operation of the relay, for example, current for an
overcurrent relay, voltage for a voltage relay, phase angle
for a directional relay, time for an independent time
delay relay, impedance for an impedance relay
Check protection system
An auxiliary protection system intended to prevent
tripping due to inadvertent operation of the main
protection system
CHP
Combined Heat and Power
Circuit insulation voltage
The highest circuit voltage to earth on which a circuit of
a transducer may be used and which determines its
voltage test
Class index
The number which designates the accuracy class
Closing Impulse time
The time during which a closing impulse is given to the
CB
Closing Time
The time for a CB to close, from the time of energisation
of the closing circuit to making of the CB contacts
Compliance voltage (accuracy limiting
output voltage)
For current output signals only, the output voltage up to
which the transducer meets its accuracy specification
Conjunctive test
A test of a protection system including all relevant
components and ancillary equipment appropriately
interconnected. The test may be parametric or specific
Conversion coefficient
The relationship of the value of the measurand to the
corresponding value of the output
C o r e B a l a n c e C u r r e n t Tr a n s f o r m e r
A ring-type Current Transformer in which all primary
conductors are passed through the aperture of the CBCT.
Hence the secondary current is proportional only to any
imbalance in current. Used for sensitive earth-fault
protection
Counting Relay
A relay that counts the number of times it is energised
and actuates an output after a desired count has been
reached.
Appendix 1-454-465
CSV
Character (or Comma) Separated Values format. A
widely used format for the exchange of data between
different software, in which the individual data items a
separated by a known character usually a comma
CT
Current Transformer
Current transducer
A transducer used for the measurement of a.c. current
CVT
Capacitor Voltage Transformer. A voltage transformer
that uses capacitors to obtain a voltage divider effect.
Used at EHV voltages instead of an electromagnetic VT
for size/cost reasons
DAC
Digital to Analogue Converter
DAR
Delayed auto-reclose
D AT
Digital Audio Tape
DBMS
Data Base Management system
DCF77
LF transmitter located at Mainflingen, Germany,
broadcasting a time signal on a 77.5kHz frequency
457
A1
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:51
Page 458
DCP
Device Control Point: local keypad on device level to
control the switchgear, often combined with
local/remote switch
DCS
Distributed Control System
Dead Time (auto-reclose)
The time between the fault arc being extinguished and
the CB contacts re-making
De-ionisation time (auto-reclose)
The time required for dispersion of ionised air after a
fault is cleared so that the arc will not re-strike on reenergisation
Delayed Auto-Reclose
An auto-reclosing scheme which has a time delay in
excess of the minimum required for successful operation
Dependent time measuring relay

A measuring relay for which times depend, in a specified
manner, on the value of the characteristic quantity
A1
Direct-on-Line
A method of motor starting, in which full line voltage is
applied to a stationary motor
Drop-out (or drop-off)
A relay drops out when it moves from the energised
position to the un-energised position
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
The ratio of the limiting values of the characteristic
quantity at which the relay resets and operates. This
value is sometimes called the differential of the relay
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
DT
Definite time
Earth fault protection system
A protection system which is designed to respond only to
faults to earth
DFT
Discrete Fourier Transform
Earthing transformer
A three-phase transformer intended essentially to
provide a neutral point to a power system for the
purpose of earthing
Digital Signal Processor

A microprocessor optimised in both hardware
architecture and software instruction set for the
processing of analogue signals digitally, through use of
the DFT and similar techniques
Effective range
The range of values of the characteristic quantity or
quantities, or of the energising quantities to which the
relay will respond and satisfy the requirements
concerning it, in particular those concerning precision
Digital Signal Processing

A technique for the processing of digital signals by
various filter algorithms to obtain some desired
characteristics in the output. The input signal to the
processing algorithm is usually the digital representation
of an analogue signal, obtained by A/D conversion
Effective setting
The setting of a protection system including the effects
of current transformers. The effective setting can be
expressed in terms of primary current or secondary
current from the current transformers and is so
designated as appropriate
Directional relay
A protection relay in which the tripping decision is
dependent in part upon the direction in which the
measured quantity is flowing
Electrical relay
A device designed to produce sudden predetermined
changes in one or more electrical circuits after the
appearance of certain conditions in the electrical circuit
or circuits controlling it
Discrimination
The ability of a protection system to distinguish between
power system conditions for which it is intended to
operate and those for which it is not intended to operate
Distortion factor
The ratio of the r.m.s. value of the harmonic content to
the r.m.s. value of the non-sinusoidal quantity
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol.
A proprietary
communication protocol used on secondary networks
between HMI, substation computers or Bay Computers
and protective devices
DOL
Direct-on-Line
NOTE: The term relay includes all the ancillary

equipment calibrated with the device
Electromechanical relay
An electrical relay in which the designed response is
developed by the relative movement of mechanical
elements under the action of a current in the input
circuit
EMC
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Embedded generation
Generation that is connected to a distribution system
(possibly at LV instead of HV) and hence poses particular
problems in respect of electrical protection
458
21/06/02
10:51
Page 459
e.m.f.
Electro-motive Force ( or voltage)
Energising quantity
The electrical quantity, either current or voltage, which
along or in combination with other energising quantities,
must be applied to the relay to cause it to function
EPROM
Electrically Programmable Read Only Memory
Error (of a transducer)
The actual value of the output minus the intended value
of the output, expressed algebraically
G l o b a l Po s i t i o n i n g S y s t e m
A system used for locating objects on Earth precisely,
using a system of satellites in geostationary orbit in
Space. Used by some numerical relays to obtain accurate
time information
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GPS
Global Positioning System
G TO
Gate Turn-off Thyristor
Event
An event is any information acquired or produced by the
digital control system
Half- duplex communications

A communications system in which data can travel in
both directions, but only in one direction at a time
F AT
Factory Acceptance Test.
Validation procedures
witnessed by the customer at the factory
High-speed reclosing
A reclosing scheme where re-closure is carried out
without any time delay other than that required for deionisation, etc.
F a u l t Pa s s a g e I n d i c a t o r
A sensor that detects the passage of current in excess of
a set value (i.e. current due to a fault) at the location of
the sensor. Hence, it indicates that the fault lies
downstream of the sensor
FBD
Functional Block Diagram:
programming languages
One of the IEC 61131-3
Fiducial value
A clearly specified value to which reference is made in
order to specify the accuracy of a transducer. (For
transducers, the fiducial value is the span, except for
transducers having a reversible and symmetrical output
when the fiducial value may be either the span or half
the span as specified by the manufacturer. It is still
common practice, however, for statements of accuracy
for frequency transducers to refer to percent of centrescale frequency and, for phase angle transducers, to an
error in electrical degrees.)
FPI
Fault Passage Indicator
Frequency transducer
A transducer used for the measurement of the frequency
of an a.c. electrical quantity
Full duplex communications
A communications system in which data can travel
simultaneously in both directions
Gateway
The Gateway is a computer which provides interfaces
between the local computer system and one or several
SCADA (or RCC) systems
GIS
Gas Insulated Switchgear (usually SF6)
HMI
Human Machine Interface. The means by which a human
inputs data to and receives data from a computer-based
system. Usually takes the form of a Personal Computer
(PC) (desktop or portable) with keyboard, screen and
pointing device
Appendix 1-454-465
HRC
High Rupturing Capacity (applicable to fuses)
HSR
High Speed Reclosing
HV
High Voltage
HVDC
High Voltage Direct Current
I
Current
ICCP
Term used for IEC 60870-6-603 protocol
ICT
Interposing Current Transformer (software implemented)
I . D . M . T.
Inverse Definite Minimum Time
I G BT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
I/O
Input/Output
IED
Intelligent Electronic Device. Equipment containing a
microprocessor and software used to implement one or
more functions in relation to an item of electrical
459
A1
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:53
Page 460
equipment (e.g. a bay controller, remote SCADA

interface/protocol converter). A microprocessor-based
numerical relay is also an IED. IED is a generic term used
to describe any microprocessor-based equipment, apart
from a computer
I G BT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
Independent time measuring relay
A measuring relay, the specified time for which can be
considered as being independent, within specified limits,
of the value of the characteristic quantity
Influence quantity
A quantity which is not the subject of the measurement
but which influences the value of the output signal for a
constant value of the measurand
Input quantity
The quantity, or one of the quantities, which constitute
the signals received by the transducer from the measured
system
Instantaneous relay
A relay that operates and resets with no intentional time
delay.
A1
NOTE: All relays require some time to operate; it is

possible, within the above definition, to discuss the
operating time characteristics of an instantaneous relay
I n s u l a t e d G a t e B i p o l a r Tr a n s i s t o r
A special design of transistor that is suitable for handling
high voltages and currents (relative to an ordinary
transistor). Frequently used in static power control
equipment (inverters, controlled rectifiers, etc) due to the
flexibility of control of the output
Intrinsic error
An error determined when the transducer is under
reference conditions
Inverse time delay relay
A dependent time delay relay having an operating time
which is an inverse function of the electrical
characteristic quantity
Inverse time relay with definite minimum
t i m e ( I . D . M . T. )
An inverse time relay having an operating time that
tends towards a minimum value with increasing values
of the electrical characteristic quantity
Knee-point e.m.f.
That sinusoidal e.m.f. applied to the secondary terminals
of a current transformer, which, when increased by 10%,
causes the exciting current to increase by 50%
L
Inductance
LAN
Local Area Network
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LD
Ladder Diagram. One of the IEC 61131-3 programming
languages
LDC
Line drop compensator
Limiting value of the output current
The upper limit of output current which cannot, by
design, be exceeded under any conditions
Local Control Mode
When set for a given control point it means that the
commands can be issued from this point
Lock-out (auto-reclose)
Prevention of a CB reclosing after tripping
Long-term stability
The stability over a period of one year
Low-speed auto-reclose
See Delayed Auto-Reclose
LV
Low Voltage
Main protection
The protection system which is normally expected to
operate in response to a fault in the protected zone
Maximum permissible values of the input
current and voltage
Values of current and voltage assigned by the
manufacturer which the transducer will withstand
indefinitely without damage
MCB
Miniature Circuit Breaker
IRIG-B
An international standard for time synchronisation
MCCB
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
ISO
International Standards Organisation
Mean-sensing transducer
A transducer which actually measures the mean
(average) value of the input waveform but which is
adjusted to give an output corresponding to the r.m.s.
value of the input when that input is sinusoidal
K-bus (K-bus Courier)

Term used for the Courier protocol on K-Bus interface for
K-Relay range manufactured by Alstom
460
21/06/02
10:53
Page 461
Measurand
A quantity subjected to measurement
Measuring element
A unit or module of a transducer which converts the
measurand, or part of the measurand, into a
corresponding signal
Measuring range
That part of the span where the performance complies
with the accuracy requirements
Measuring relay
An electrical relay intended to switch when its
characteristic quantity, under specified conditions and
with a specified accuracy attains its operating value
Metering (non-tariff)
Values computed depending on the values of digital or
analogue inputs during variable periods
Metering (tariff)
Energy values computed from digital and/or analogue
inputs during variable periods and dedicated to energy
measurement for billing (tariff) purposes
M i d Po i n t S e c t i o n i n g S u b s t a t i o n
A substation located at the electrical interface of two
sections of electrified railway. It contains provision for
the coupling of the sections electrically in the event of
loss of supply to one section
ModBus
Proprietary communication protocol used on secondary
networks between HMI, substation computers or Bay
Computers and protective devices
MPSS
Mid Point Sectioning Substation (electrified railways)
Nominal range of use

A specified range of values which it is intended that an
influence quantity can assume without the output signal
of the transducer changing by amounts in excess of
those specified
Notching relay
A relay which switches in response to a specific number
of applied impulses
NPS
Negative Phase Sequence
NS
Neutral Section (electrified railways)
Numerical relay
A protection relay which utilises a Digital Signal
Processor to execute the protection algorithms in
software
OCB
Oil Circuit Breaker
O f f - L o a d Ta p C h a n g e r
A tap changer that is not designed for operation while
the transformer is supplying load
OHL
Overhead line
O LTC
On Load Tap Changer.
O n L o a d Ta p C h a n g e r
A tap changer that can be operated while the
transformer is supplying load.
Opening time
The time between energisation of a CB trip coil and the
instant of contact parting
Multi-element transducer
A transducer having two or more measuring elements.
The signals from the individual elements are combined to
produce an output signal corresponding to the
measurand
Operating current (of a relay)

The current at which a relay will pick up
Multi-section transducer
A transducer having two or more independent measuring
circuits for one or more functions
Operating time (relay)

With a relay de-energised and in its initial condition, the
time which elapses between the application of a
characteristic quantity and the instant when the relay
operates
Multi-shot reclosing
A reclosing scheme that permits more than one reclosing
operation of a CB after a fault occurs before lock-out
occurs
MV
Medium Voltage
N/C
Normally Closed
Operating time (CB)

The time between energisation of a CB trip coil and arc
extinction
Operating time characteristic

The curve depicting the relationship between different
values of the characteristic quantity applied to a relay
and the corresponding values of operating time
Operating value
The limiting value of the characteristic quantity at which
the relay actually operates
N/O
Normally Open
Appendix 1-454-465
461
A1
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:53
Page 462
OPGW
Optical Ground Wire a ground wire that includes
optical fibres to provide a communications link
OSI 7-layer model
The Open Systems Interconnection 7-layer model is a
model developed by ISO for modelling of a
communications network.
A1
Pick-up
A relay is said to pick-up when it changes from the deenergised position to the energised position
Output common mode interference voltage

An unwanted alternating voltage which exists between
each of the output terminals and a reference point
Pilot channel
A means of interconnection between relaying points for
the purpose of protection
Output current (of a transducer)

The current produced by the transducer which is an
analogue function of the measurand
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller. A specialised computer
for implementing control sequences using software
Output load
The total effective resistance of the circuits and
apparatus connected externally across the output
terminals
PLCC
Power Line Carrier Communication
Output power (of a transducer)

The power available at the transducer output terminals
Phase angle transducer

A transducer used for the measurement of the phase
angle between two a.c. electrical quantities having the
same frequency
Output series mode interference voltage

An unwanted alternating voltage appearing in series
between the output terminals and the load
Output signal
An analogue or digital representation of the measurand
Output span (span)
The algebraic difference between the lower and upper
nominal values of the output signal
Overcurrent relay
A protection relay whose tripping decision is related to
the degree by which the measured current exceeds a set
value.
Overshoot time
The overshoot time is the difference between the
operating time of the relay at a specified value of the
input energising quantity and the maximum duration of
the value of input energising quantity which, when
suddenly reduced to a specific value below the operating
level, is insufficient to cause operation
Pa r a m e t r i c c o n j u n c t i v e t e s t
A conjunctive test that ascertains the range of values of
each parameter for which the test meets specific
performance requirements
PCB
Printed Circuit Board
PCC
Point of Common Coupling
PED
Power Electronic Device
Po i n t o f C o m m o n C o u p l i n g
The interface between an in-plant network containing
embedded generation and the utility distribution
network to which the in-plant network is connected
POW
Point-on- Wave. Point-on-wave switching is the process
to control moment of switching to minimise the effects
(inrush currents, overvoltages)
Po w e r E l e c t r o n i c D e v i c e
An electronic device (e.g. thyristor or IGBT) or assembly
of such devices (e.g. inverter). Typically used in a power
transmission system to provide smooth control of output
of an item of plant
Po w e r f a c t o r
The factor by which it is necessary to multiply the
product of the voltage and current to obtain the active
power
Po w e r L i n e C a r r i e r C o m m u n i c a t i o n
A mean of transmitting information over a power
transmission line by using a cariier fraquency
superimpozed on the normal power frequency.
PPS
Positive Phase Sequence
Protected zone
The portion of a power system protected by a given
protection system or a part of that protection system
Protection equipment
The apparatus, including protection relays, transformers
and ancillary equipment, for use in a protection system
Protection relay
A relay designed to initiate disconnection of a part of an
electrical installation or to operate a warning signal, in
the case of a fault or other abnormal condition in the
installation. A protection relay may include more than
one electrical element and accessories
462
21/06/02
10:53
Page 463
Protection scheme
The co-ordinated arrangements for the protection of one
or more elements of a power system. A protection
scheme may comprise several protection systems
Protection system
A combination of protection equipment designed to
secure, under predetermined conditions, usually
abnormal, the disconnection of an element of a power
system, or to give an alarm signal, or both
Protocol
A set of rules that define the method in which a function
is carried out commonly used in respect of
communications links, where it defines the hardware and
software
features
necessary
for
successful
communication between devices.
Reclaim time (auto-reclose)

The time between a successful closing operation,
measured from the time the auto-reclose relay closing
contact makes until a further reclosing sequence is
permitted in the event of a further fault occurring
REF
Restricted Earth Fault
Reference conditions
Conditions of use for a transducer prescribed for
performance testing, or to ensure valid comparison of
results of measurement
Reference range
A specified range of values of an influence quantity
within which the transducer complies with the
requirements concerning intrinsic errors
PSM
Plug Setting Multiple a term used in conjunction with
electromechanical relays, denoting the ratio of the fault
current to the current setting of the relay
Reference value
A specified single value of an influence quantity at which
the transducer complies with the requirements
concerning intrinsic errors
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
Relay
See Protection relay
P T 10 0
Platinum resistance temperature probe
Resetting value
The limiting value of the characteristic quantity at which
the relay returns to its initial position
R
Resistance
R.M.S.-sensing transducer
A transducer specifically designed to respond to the true
r.m.s. value of the input and which is characterised by
the manufacturer for use on a specified range of
waveforms
Ratio correction
A feature of digital/numerical relays that enables
compensation to be carried out for a CT or VT ratio that
is not ideal
Rating
The nominal value of an energising quantity that appears
in the designation of a relay. The nominal value usually
corresponds to the CT and VT secondary ratings
Residual current
The algebraic sum, in a multi-phase system, of all the
line currents
Residual voltage
The algebraic sum, in a multi-phase system, of all the
line-to-earth voltages
Response time
The time from the instant of application of a specified
change of the measurand until the output signal reaches
and remains at its final steady value or within a specified
band centred on this value
Reversible output current
An output current which reverses polarity in response to
a change of sign or direction of the measurand
RCD
Residual Current Device. A protection device which is
actuated by the residual current
Ripple content of the output

With steady-state input conditions, the peak-to-peak
value of the fluctuating component of the output
RCP
Remote Control Point. The Remote Control Point is a
SCADA interface. Several RCPs may be managed with
different communication protocols.
Physical
connections are done at a Gateway or at substation
computers or at a substation HMI
r. m . s .
Root Mean Square
Reactive power (var) transducer

A transducer used for the measurement of reactive
electrical power
Appendix 1-454-465
RMU
Ring Main Unit
ROCOF
Rate Of Change Of Frequency (protection relay)
RSVC
Relocatable Static Var Compensator
463
A1
Appendix 1-454-465
21/06/02
10:53
Page 464
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector
Specific conjunctive test

A conjunctive test using specific values of each of the
parameters
R TO S
Real Time Operating System
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit. An IED used specifically for
interfacing between a computer and other devices.
Sometimes may include control/monitoring/storage
functions
S AT
Site Acceptance Test. Validation procedures for
equipment executed with the customer on site
SCADA
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCL
Substation Configuration Language.
Normalised
configuration language for substation modelling (as
expected by IEC 61850-6)
SCP
Substation Control Point. HMI computers at substation
level allowing the operators to control the substation
SCS
Substation Control System
A1
Simplex communications system

A communications system in which data can only travel
in one direction
Setting
The limiting value of a characteristic or energising
quantity at which the relay is designed to operate under
specified conditions. Such values are usually marked on
the relay and may be expressed as direct values,
percentages of rated values, or multiples
SFC
Sequential Function Chart:
programming languages
One of the IEC 61131-3
Short-term stability
The stability over a period of 24 hours
Single-shot reclosing
An auto-reclose sequence that provides only one
reclosing operation, lock-out of the CB occurring if it
subsequently trips
S.I.R.
System Impedance Ratio
Single element transducer
A transducer having one measuring element
SOE
Sequence Of Events
S OT F
Switch on to Fault (protection)
Spring winding time

For spring-closed CBs, the time for the spring to be fully
charged after a closing operation
ST
Structured Text: One of the IEC 61131-3 programming
languages
Stability (of a transducer)
The ability of a transducer to keep its performance
characteristics unchanged during a specified time, all
conditions remaining constant
Stability (of a protection system)
The quantity whereby a protection system remains
inoperative under all conditions other than those for
which it is specifically designed to operate
Stability limits (of a protection system)
The r.m.s. value of the symmetrical component of the
through fault current up to which the protection system
remains stable
Starting relay
A unit relay which responds to abnormal conditions and
initiates the operation of other elements of the
protection system
S TATC O M
A particular type of Static Var Compensator, in which
Power Electronic Devices such as GTOs are used to
generate the reactive power required, rather than
capacitors and inductors
Static relay
An electrical relay in which the designed response is
developed by electronic, magnetic, optical or other
components without mechanical motion. Excludes
relays using digital/numeric technology
S t a t i c Va r C o m p e n s a t o r
A device that supplies or consumes reactive power,
comprised solely of static equipment. It is shuntconnected on transmission lines to provide reactive
power compensation
S TC
Short Time Current (rating of a CT)
Storage conditions
The conditions, defined by means of ranges of the
influence quantities, such as temperature, or any special
conditions, within which the transducer may be stored
(non-operating) without damage
SVC
Static Var Compensator
464
21/06/02
10:53
Page 465
System disturbance time (auto-reclose)

The time between fault inception and CB contacts
making on successful re-closure
System impedance ratio
The ratio of the power system source impedance to the
impedance of the protected zone
T 101
Term used for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol
Ta p c h a n g e r
A mechanism, usually fitted to the primary winding of a
transformer, to alter the turns ratio of the transformer by
small discrete amounts over a defined range
TC P / I P
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A
common protocol for the transmission of messages over
the Internet
TC S
Trip Circuit Supervision
Unit protection
A protection system that is designed to operate only for
abnormal conditions within a clearly defined zone of the
power system
Unrestricted protection
A protection system which has no clearly defined zone of
operation and which achieves selective operation only by
time grading
UCA
Utility Communications Architecture
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
U TC
Universal Time Coordinates
V
Voltage
VCB
Vacuum Circuit Breaker
TC 5 7
Technical Committee 57 working for the IEC and
responsible for producing standards in the field of
Protection (e.g. IEC 61850)
TF
a) Transfer Function of a device (usually an element of a
control system
b) Transient Factor (of a CT)
Through fault current
The current flowing through a protected zone to a fault
beyond that zone
Time delay
A delay intentionally introduced into the operation of a
relay system
Time delay relay
A relay having an intentional delaying device
VDEW
Term used for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The VDEW
protocol is a subset of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Ve c t o r g r o u p c o m p e n s a t i o n
A feature of digital and numerical relays that
compensates for the phase angle shift that occurs in
transformers (including VTs) due to use of dissimilar
winding connections e.g. transformers connected
delta/star
Vo l t a g e t r a n s d u c e r
A transducer used for the measurement of a.c. voltage
VT
Voltage Transformer
X
Reactance
Z
Impedance
TPI
Tap Position Indicator (for transformers)
Transducer
(electrical
measuring
transducer)
A device that provides a d.c. output quantity having a
definite relationship to the a.c. measurand
Tr a n s d u c e r w i t h o f f s e t z e r o ( l i v e z e r o )
A transducer which gives a predetermined output other
than zero when the measurand is zero
Tr a n s d u c e r w i t h s u p p r e s s e d z e r o
A transducer whose output is zero when the measurand
is less than a certain value
Unit electrical relay
A single relay that can be used alone or in combinations
with others
Appendix 1-454-465
465
A1
Appendix 3-468-475
21/06/02
11:04
Page 468
Appendix 3
A p p l i c a t i o n Ta b l e s
Appendix 3-468-475
21/06/02
11:05
Page 469
Appendix 3
Application Tables
Table A3.1 contains a list of protection, control and

monitoring devices available from ALSTOM. Due to
space limitations, the functionality of some products is
summarised. The list is accurate at the time of
compilation, but new products are continually being
developed. For a current list of products for a particular
application, availability of older products not listed here,
or full details of the functionality of a specific product,
please contact your local ALSTOM representative, or
view details on-line at www.tde.alstom.com.
469
Plain Feeder
Differential
Protection
Plain Feeder
Overcurrent
Protection
470
P545
N: non-directional
P544
P543
P542
P541
P523
P521
P522
P143
P125
P126
P127
P139
P141
P142
P124
21
27
X
X
X
X
32P 37P 37N
X
X
46 46BC 47
X
X
59
59N
64 67W 78
Single-phase sensing
49 50BF 50P 50N 51P 51N 51V
79
81O 81U
87
VTS CTS
N
N N
N
N
N N
N
N
N N
N
3P
X
N
N N
N
Self powered version. Dual powered version also includes negative sequence overcurrent, broken conductor detection, cold load pickup
N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X
X X
X
X
X N N+D N N+D
X
X
3P
X
X X
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X X
X
3P
X
X
X
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X X
X
X
3P X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D X
X X
X
X
3P X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D X
X X
X
X
3P X
X
X
X
Additional features: live line working, sequence co-ordination with downstream reclosing equipment
X
X
X N
N N
N
X
Compact case version of P521, reduced I/O
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D X
X
3P
X
X
X X
With magnetising inrush restraint - suitable for transformer feeders
X
X
X N
N N
N
X
X
Suitable for 2 and 3 terminal lines, and transformer feeders
X
X
X N
N N
N
3P
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X 1P/3P
Suitable for 2 and 3 terminal lines
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X
X
X
X
Suitable for 2 and 3 terminal lines, and two breaker configurations
As P543, with increased I/O
N+D: directional/non-directional C: Control only M: Monitoring only 1P: Single pole 3P: Three pole
25
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
2
4
4
4
4
1
2
2
1
11:05
P121
P122
P123
P120
Product
A3
21/06/02
Application
Dis
tan
ce
p
r
o
Che
tec
ck
tion
syn
c
h
Un
ron
d
e
isin
r
vol
g
tag
Rev
e
er
s
e
pow
Pha
er
se
und
e
r
N
cur
e
utr
ren
al u
t
nd
N
e
r
e
c
gat
urr
ive
ent
se
Bro
q
u
enc
ken
eo
con
ve
d
r
Ne
c
u
urr
cto
gat
ent
r
ive
s
e
The
q
uen
rm
ce
al
o
v
e
rvo
C
B
ltag
fail
ure
e
Ins
tan
tan
e
o
Ins
u
sp
tan
has
tan
e
e
o
o
v
T
u
e
i
s
m
rcu
neu
ed
rren
ela
tra
t
ye
lo
T
d
v
i
m
e
p
rcu
has
ed
rren
ela
eo
ye
ve
t
Vol
d
r
c
neu
urr
tag
ent
tra
ed
lo
e
p
v
Ove
e
e
nde
rcu
rvo
nt
rren
ltag
ov
t
e
e
r
Res
c
urr
idu
ent
al
o
v
erv
Res
olta
tric
ge
te
d
/
sen
Wa
siti
ttm
ve
e
t
e
a
rth
Pow ric
fau
er s
lt
wi
n
g
A
u
blo
tor
cki
ecl
ng
ose
Ove
r
f
r
equ
enc
Un
y
de
r
f
r
equ
enc
Cur
y
ren
td
i
f
f
VT
e
ren
s
u
tial
p
erv
isio
CT
n
s
u
per
visi
CT
on
vec
tor
g
r
VT
o
up/
vec
rat
tor
io
g
c
rou
om
Trip
p
pen
/
C
r
ircu
atio
s
it S
com ation
CB
up
p
c
e
e
ont
r
nsa
visi
rol/
tion
on
m
Me
o
nito
as
u
r
ring
em
ent
Eve
s
n
t
rec
ord
D
ing
i
s
tur
ban
ce
P
r
r
e
o
cor
gra
der
m
ma
Set
ble
tin
sc
h
g
e
Gro
me
ups
log
ic
Appendix 3
Appendix 3-468-475
Page 470
471
Busbar Protection
Transformer Feeder
Overcurrent
/Differential
Protection
Transformer
Protection
N: non-directional
P740
MCAG14
MBCI
P542
P541
P523
P634
P633
P632
P631
MBCI
MHOR4
MHOA/B/C
32P 37P 37N
46 46BC 47
59
59N
64 67W 78
79
81O 81U
As P544 with increased I/O

X
X
N
N
N N
X
Phase Comparison differential protection, using Power Line Carrier communications
Fibre-optic to G703 interface for MiCOM P54x series relays
Fibre-optic to V35 interface for MiCOM P54x series relays
Fibre-optic to X21 interface for MiCOM P54x series relays
GPS time synchronising module for up to 4 MiCOM products
49 50BF 50P 50N 51P 51N 51V
87
VTS CTS
X
Pilot wire differential protection for 2 or 3 terminal lines. Recommended only where compatibility with existing TRANSLAY electromechanical relays is required
X
Pilot wire differential protection
X
Pilot wire differential protection. Recommended for metallic pilot wire protection up to 2.5k, isolation up to 15kV
X
X
X
N N N
N
X
X
Suitable for 2 winding transformers. Harmonic/overfluxing/CT saturation restraint
X
X
X
X
N N N
N
X
X
X X
X
X
Suitable for 2 winding transformers. Harmonic/overfluxing/CT saturation restraint, additional PT100 input
X
X
X
X
N N
N N
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N N
N N
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D X
X
3P
X
X
X
X
X
X
With magnetising inrush restraint - suitable for transformer feeders
X
N
N N
N
X
X
X
X
X
N
N N
N
3P
X
X
X
X
X
Translay 'S' pilot wire differential protection. Recommended for metallic pilot wire protection up to 2.5k, isolation up to 15kV
X
N
N N
N
X
X
X
X
High-impedance relay for Frame-Earth (Howard) protection
27
Appendix 3
25
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Dis
tan
ce
p
r
o
Che
tec
ck
tion
syn
c
h
Un
ron
d
e
isin
r
vol
g
tag
Rev
e
er
s
e
pow
Pha
er
se
und
e
r
N
cur
e
utr
ren
al u
t
nd
N
e
r
e
c
gat
urr
ive
ent
s
equ
Bro
enc
ken
e
c
o
o
v
n
e
duc
rcu
Ne
gat
rren
tor
ive
t
s
e
The
q
uen
rm
ce
al
o
v
e
rvo
C
B
ltag
fail
ure
e
Ins
tan
tan
e
o
Ins
u
sp
tan
has
tan
eo
e
o
v
T
u
e
i
s
m
rcu
neu
ed
rren
ela
tra
t
yed
lo
T
v
i
m
e
p
rcu
has
ed
rren
ela
eo
ye
ve
t
Vol
d
r
c
neu
urr
tag
ent
tra
ed
lo
e
p
v
Ove
e
e
nde
rcu
rvo
nt
rren
ltag
ov
t
e
e
r
Res
c
urr
idu
ent
al o
v
e
Res
rvo
tric
ltag
te
e
d
/
sen
Wa
siti
ttm
ve
e
t
e
a
rth
Pow ric
fau
er s
lt
wi
n
g
A
u
blo
tor
cki
ecl
ng
ose
Ove
r
f
r
equ
enc
Un
y
de
r
f
r
equ
enc
Cur
y
ren
td
i
f
f
VT
e
ren
s
u
tial
p
erv
isio
CT
n
s
u
per
visi
CT
on
vec
tor
g
r
VT
o
up/
vec
rat
tor
io
g
c
rou
om
Trip
p
pen
/
C
r
ircu
atio
s
it S
com ation
CB
up
p
c
e
e
ont
r
nsa
visi
rol/
tion
on
m
Me
o
nito
as
u
r
ring
em
ent
Eve
s
n
t
rec
ord
D
ing
i
s
tur
ban
ce
P
r
r
e
o
cor
gra
der
m
ma
Set
ble
tin
sc
h
g
e
Gro
me
ups
log
ic
21
11:05
P591
P592
P593
P594
P547
P546
Product
21/06/02
Plain Feeder
Differential
Protection
Application
Appendix 3-468-475
Page 471
A3
472
Generator + Generator
Transformer
Protection
Generator
Protection
System
Interconnection
Distance
Protection
32P 37P 37N
46 46BC 47
X
59
59N
64 67W 78
Rotor earth fault detection
79
See details of individual relays for functions provided
Includes generator abnormal frequency protection
49 50BF 50P 50N 51P 51N 51V
81O 81U
87
VTS CTS
N
N
X
X 3P X X
X
C
Also includes Switch-on-to-Fault protection
X
X
X
X
N
N N+D N+D
X
X
X
3P X X
X
PT100 input
X
X
X
X
N
N N+D N+D
X
X
X
X 1P/3P X X
X
PT100 input
X
X
X
N N N+D N+D
X
X
X 1P/3P X
X
X
Zone extension facility for single-phase to ground faults
X
X
X
X
X
N N N+D N+D
X
X
3P X
X
X
X
One-box' solution, including bay control/monitoring of up to 6 switching devices, 200 pre-programmed bay types, Switch-on-to-Fault detection, PT100 RTD input
X
X X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X
3P
X
X
X X
Includes Switch-on-to-Fault/Trip-on-Fault function and Stub Bus protection
X
X X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X 1P/3P
X
X
X X
Includes Switch-on-to-Fault/Trip-on-Fault function and Stub Bus protection
X
X X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X 1P/3P
X
X
X X
Increased number of digital I/O compared to P442
X
X
X
X
X
X N+D N+D N+D N+D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
Includes ROCOF and Voltage Vector Shift protection functions. 64 function is either directional/non-directional SEF, or REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N N N
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X M
Also includes loss of excitation, overfluxing, stator winding temperature using PT100 RTD's. 64 function is either directional/non-directional SEF, or REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N N N
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X M
Also includes 100% stator winding earth fault, loss of excitation, overfluxing, inadvertent energisation at standstill, stator winding temperature using PT100 RTD's,
and enhanced pole-slipping protection. 64 function is either directional/non-directional SEF, or REF
27
25
N: non-directional
P342/343
+ P630
series
P940
MX31PG2A
+X2/IPG2A
P343
P342
P341
P444
P442
P441
P439
P437
P435
21
11:05
P433
P430
Product
A3
21/06/02
Application
Dis
tan
ce
p
r
o
Che
tec
ck
tion
syn
c
h
Un
ron
d
e
isin
r
vol
g
tag
Rev
e
er
s
e
pow
Pha
er
se
und
e
r
N
cur
e
utr
ren
al u
t
nd
N
e
r
e
c
gat
urr
ive
ent
s
equ
Bro
enc
ken
e
c
o
o
v
n
e
duc
rcu
Ne
gat
rren
tor
ive
t
s
e
The
q
uen
rm
ce
al
o
v
e
rvo
C
B
ltag
fail
ure
e
Ins
tan
tan
e
o
Ins
u
sp
tan
has
tan
eo
e
o
v
T
u
e
i
s
m
rcu
neu
ed
rren
ela
tra
t
yed
lo
T
v
i
m
e
p
rcu
has
ed
rren
ela
eo
ye
ve
t
Vol
d
r
c
neu
urr
tag
ent
tra
ed
lo
e
p
v
Ove
e
e
nde
rcu
rvo
nt
rren
ltag
ov
t
e
e
r
Res
c
urr
idu
ent
al o
v
e
Res
rvo
tric
ltag
te
e
d
/
sen
Wa
siti
ttm
ve
e
t
e
a
rth
Pow ric
fau
er s
lt
wi
n
g
A
u
blo
tor
cki
ecl
ng
ose
Ove
r
f
r
equ
enc
Un
y
de
r
f
r
equ
enc
Cur
y
ren
td
i
f
f
VT
e
ren
s
u
tial
p
erv
isio
CT
n
s
u
per
visi
CT
on
vec
tor
g
r
VT
o
up/
vec
rat
tor
io
g
c
rou
om
Trip
p
pen
/
C
r
ircu
atio
s
it S
com ation
CB
up
p
c
e
e
ont
r
nsa
visi
rol/
tion
on
m
Me
o
nito
as
u
r
ring
em
ent
Eve
s
n
t
rec
ord
D
ing
i
s
tur
ban
ce
P
r
r
e
o
cor
gra
der
m
ma
Set
ble
tin
sc
h
g
e
Gro
me
ups
log
ic
Appendix 3
Appendix 3-468-475
Page 472
473
Motor Protection
Auto-reclose
Load Shedding
Under/Over Voltage/
Frequency
X
X
X
27
46 46BC 47
49 50BF 50P 50N 51P 51N 51V
59
59N
64 67W 78
79
81O 81U
87
VTS CTS
X
X
N
N
X
X
X
Catenary Protection for 25, 50, 60Hz systems. Includes switch-on-to fault and defrost protection, train start-up restraint, wrong phase coupling
As P438, for 16 2/3Hz systems
X
N
N N
N
X
Busbar/feeder protection. Applicable for all system frequencies
X
X
N
N N
N
X
X
Transformer protection. Includes Buchholz, tank-earth and overfluxing protection. Applicable for all system frequencies
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Includes ROCOF protection
32P 37P 37N

X
X
X
X
X
X
M
M
X
X
X
Appendix 3
Instantaneous operation. Multiple heavy-duty output contacts

X
X
X
X
X
Frequency protection includes ROCOF and frequency supervision characteristics. Load restoration function also available
X
1P/3P
X
X
X
High speed 1P/3P auto-reclose/3P delayed auto-reclose relay for 2/3 CB's in breaker-and-a-half substations
X
3P
X
X
X
Delayed auto-reclose of 2/3 CB's in mesh-connected substation, including auto-isolation of circuit disconnectors
X
X
X
Basic LV motor protection relay, with PT100 inputs for winding temperature measurement/protection
X
X
X
N N
X
LV motors only. Also includes motor winding temperature measurement/tripping using PT100 inputs. DIN rail mounted
X
X
X
N N
X
X
X
Also includes protection against excessive start time, locked rotor, winding temperature measurement/trip, speed switch input. Facilities for number of starts limitation and re-acceleration
X
X
X
X X
N N N N
X
X
X
X
X
Also includes protection against excessive start time, locked rotor, stalling, reverse power, anti-backspin. Facilities for number of starts limitation, winding temperature measurement/trip,
speed switch input and re-acceleration
Compact case version of P225
X
X
X
X
X
N N N
N
X
X N+D X
X
X
X
X
X
Also includes protection against excessive start time, locked rotor, stalling, reverse power. Facilities for number of starts limitation, winding temperature measurement/trip using PT100 RTD's
speed switch input and re-acceleration. Out of step protection for synchronous motors
N: non-directional
P241
P226
P225
P220
P211
P210
P842
P841
P940 series
MVAG
P923
P921
P922
P638
25
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
2
Dis
tan
ce
p
r
o
Che
tec
ck
tion
syn
c
h
Un
ron
d
e
isin
r
vol
g
tag
Rev
e
er
s
e
pow
Pha
er
se
und
e
r
N
cur
e
utr
ren
al u
t
nd
N
e
r
e
c
gat
urr
ive
ent
s
equ
Bro
enc
ken
e
c
o
o
v
n
e
duc
rcu
Ne
gat
rren
tor
ive
t
s
e
The
q
uen
rm
ce
al
o
v
e
rvo
C
B
ltag
fail
ure
e
Ins
tan
tan
e
o
Ins
u
sp
tan
has
tan
eo
e
o
v
T
u
e
i
s
m
rcu
neu
ed
rren
ela
tra
t
yed
lo
T
v
i
m
e
p
rcu
has
ed
rren
ela
eo
ye
ve
t
Vol
d
r
c
neu
urr
tag
ent
tra
ed
lo
e
p
v
Ove
e
e
nde
rcu
rvo
nt
rren
ltag
ov
t
e
e
r
Res
c
urr
idu
ent
al o
v
e
Res
rvo
tric
ltag
te
e
d
/
sen
Wa
siti
ttm
ve
e
t
e
a
rth
Pow ric
fau
er s
lt
wi
n
g
A
u
blo
tor
cki
ecl
ng
ose
Ove
r
f
r
equ
enc
Un
y
de
r
f
r
equ
enc
Cur
y
ren
td
i
f
f
VT
e
ren
s
u
tial
p
erv
isio
CT
n
s
u
per
visi
CT
on
vec
tor
g
r
VT
o
up/
vec
rat
tor
io
g
c
rou
om
Trip
p
pen
/
C
r
ircu
atio
s
it S
com ation
CB
up
p
c
e
e
ont
r
nsa
visi
rol/
tion
on
m
Me
o
nito
as
u
r
ring
em
ent
Eve
s
n
t
rec
ord
D
ing
i
s
tur
ban
ce
P
r
r
e
o
cor
gra
der
m
ma
Set
ble
tin
sc
h
g
e
Gro
me
ups
log
ic
21
11:05
P138
P436
P438
Product
21/06/02
A.C. Electrified
Railway Protection
Application
Appendix 3-468-475
Page 473
A3
474
RTU
Bay Controllers
Substation
Automation
Test Blocks/Plugs
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relays
Control/Tripping
Relays
25
27
32P 37P 37N
46 46BC 47
49 50BF 50P 50N 51P 51N 51V
59
59N
64 67W 78
79
81O 81U
87
VTS CTS
Electromechanical interposing relays for remote control of CB's, etc. Insensitive to a.c. voltages. Hand reset flag available
Compact electromechanical auxiliary relays in hand, electrical and self reset versions, with or without flag
Electromechanical auxiliary relays in hand, electrical and self reset versions, with or without flag. Greater current carrying/breaking capacity than Prima relays
Time delayed version of the MVAA relay
Relay for switching protection relay elements in/out of service
Test plug for use with MMLG test blocks. Single or multi-finger design
Test block for use with all varieties of protection relays, particularly Midos series relays
Test Block for use with all varieties of protection relays
Multi-finger test plug for use with P991. Visible automatic shorting of CT circuits on insertion into test block
Single finger test plug for use with P991. For CT circuit monitoring - isolated voltage output.
Distributed digital substation control system, expandable from a single bay to a complete substation
These products provide a comprehensive range of control, measurement and automation facilities, and are customised according to specific requirements.
Contact the local Alstom sales office for further details of these products
Compact Bay Controller for up to 6 switching devices, mimic, metering, optional communications facilities
X
X
1P/3P
X
X
For up to 24 switchgear units, including user-defined bay types, tap change controller, and PT100 inputs
X
X
1P/3P
X
X
X
Comprehensive Bay Controller facilities, including energy and harmonics measurment, Power Quality monitoring, load profiling, Gateway to higher level communication networks
Compact bay controller, for control of single bays, with mimic diagram. Wide variety of communications protocols for interfacing
Bay Controller with mimic display, local/remote control, communications facilities, GPS time synchronisation, in-built logic facilities. Suitable for control of small networks
Compact version of BM9100, reduced I/O capability and no mimic diagram
RTU for acquisition of substation information and transmission to a SCADA system. Can act as a Sequence of Events Recorder
RTU for Distribution System Automation Applications
Compact RTU controlling up to 35 switching devices. Programmable logic, synchronism check and tap change control facilities
X
X
X
Suitable for LV/MV networks. Includes tap changer control and logic for autoreclose, auto-sectionalising, auto-restoration and source transfer
X
X
X
X
Comprehensive RTU, including multi-bay monitoring/control, load profiling, Power Quality measurements, under-frequency load shedding, transformer management, tap changer control
Heavy duty electromechanical control/CB tripping/intertripping relays, available in a variety of configurations
1
1
X
X
Tap change controller, including line drop compensation, circulating current control, tap changer maintenance monitor and tap change failure detection, tap position indicator, measurements and event recording
Digital time delay relay - either delay on pick-up or drop-off
N: non-directional
C964/6
C922
C452/4/6
BM9100
BM9200
S900
C122
C952/4/6
C264/8
C434
MVAW
Prima
MVAA
MVUA
MVAZ04
MMLB
MMLG
P991
P992
P993
PACiS
SPACE 2000
PSCN3020
C232
MVAJ
KVGC202
MVTT
Tap Change Control
21
11:05
Time Delay Relays
Product
A3
21/06/02
Application
Dis
tan
ce
p
r
o
Che
tec
ck
tion
syn
c
h
Un
ron
d
e
isin
r
vol
g
tag
Rev
e
er
s
e
pow
Pha
er
se
und
e
r
N
cur
e
utr
ren
al u
t
nd
N
e
r
e
c
gat
urr
ive
ent
se
Bro
q
u
enc
ken
eo
con
ve
d
r
Ne
c
u
urr
cto
gat
ent
r
ive
s
e
The
q
uen
rm
ce
al
o
v
e
rvo
C
B
ltag
fail
ure
e
Ins
tan
tan
e
o
Ins
u
sp
tan
has
tan
e
e
o
o
v
T
u
e
i
s
m
rcu
neu
ed
rren
ela
tra
t
ye
lo
T
d
v
i
m
e
p
rcu
has
ed
rren
ela
eo
ye
v
t
e
Vol
d
r
c
neu
urr
tag
ent
tra
ed
lo
e
p
v
Ove
e
e
nde
rcu
rvo
nt
rren
ltag
ov
t
e
e
r
Res
c
urr
idu
ent
al
o
v
erv
Res
olta
tric
ge
te
d
/
sen
Wa
siti
ttm
ve
e
t
e
r
a
ic
rth
Po
w
fau
er s
lt
win
g
A
u
b
tor
loc
ecl
kin
ose
g
Ove
r
f
r
equ
enc
Un
y
de
r
f
r
equ
enc
Cur
y
ren
td
i
f
f
VT
e
ren
s
u
tial
p
erv
isio
CT
n
s
u
per
visi
CT
on
vec
tor
g
r
VT
o
up/
vec
rat
tor
io
g
c
rou
om
Trip
p
pen
/
C
r
ircu
atio
s
it S
com ation
CB
up
p
c
e
e
ont
r
nsa
visi
rol/
tion
on
m
Me
o
nito
as
u
r
ring
em
ent
Eve
s
n
t
rec
ord
D
ing
i
s
tur
ban
ce
Pro
r
e
cor
gra
der
m
ma
Set
ble
tin
sc
h
g
e
Gro
me
ups
log
ic
Appendix 3
Appendix 3-468-475
Page 474
475
Programmable Logic
Controller
Power Factor
Controller
Battery Alarm
Measurement
Centres
32P 37P 37N
46 46BC 47
49 50BF 50P 50N 51P 51N 51V
59
59N
64 67W 78
79
81O 81U
87
VTS CTS
N: non-directional
C664/6
Appendix 3
Table A3.1: ALSTOM Equipment Application List
Power factor correction capacitor control. 6 stages, 8 switching sequences. Monitor/alarm for under/over voltage and harmonics
PLC for power applications. Built-in sequences for tap changer control, trip circuit supervision. Suitable for implementing interlocks on CB's, Isolators, etc.
PLC for power applications. Built-in sequences for tap changer control, load shedding, auto-reclose, check synchronisation, trip circuit supervision.
Suitable for implementing interlocks on CB's, Isolators, etc.
C622
Battery monitor for under- and over-voltage, high internal impedance, earth faults
High performance measurement of power system parameters (voltage, current, power, demand, energy). Harmonics/THD measurement. Programmable by user.
UCA v2/IEC 61850 communications available. Some models include event/disturbance recording, overcurrent protection, and measurements to tariff metering standards.
Measurement of power system parameters (voltage, current power, energy), with accuracy to tariff metering standards. Harmonic measurement. Programmable by user. DIN rail mounting
Measurement of power system parameters (voltage, current, power, power factor, frequency, energy), with accuracy to tariff metering standards. Harmonic measurement. Panel or DIN rail mounting
Measurement of power system parameters (voltage, current, power, power factor, frequency, energy, maximum demand), with accuracy to tariff metering standards.
Harmonic measurement. Compact case/panel mounting
Measurement of power system parameters (voltage, current, power, power factor, frequency, energy, max demand). Energy measurements to 1% accuracy. DIN rail mounting
Measurement of power system parameters (voltage, current, power, energy). Energy measurements to 1% accuracy. DIN rail mounting
Energy measurements (kWh, kvarh) to 1% accuracy. DIN rail mounting
Stand-alone Power Quality meters for all voltage levels and Power Quality measurements, with remote upload facilities
Compact multi-function stand-alone disturbance recorder, with analogue and digital inputs, comprehensive triggering and sampling rates and upload facilities. Also includes
phase-phase and phase-ground overvoltage protection, neutral voltage displacement and negative sequence voltages, and phase-phase and phase-ground undervoltage protection
Multi-function stand-alone disturbance recorder, with analogue and digital inputs, comprehensive triggering and sampling rates and upload facilities
27
Novar 315
M220
M210
M100
Battery
Alarm 300
M230
I400 range
M300 range
M870 range
M720 range
M840
25
Dis
tan
ce
p
r
o
Che
tec
ck
tion
syn
c
h
Un
ron
d
e
isin
r
vol
g
tag
Rev
e
er
s
e
pow
Pha
er
se
und
e
r
N
cur
e
utr
ren
al u
t
nd
N
e
r
e
c
gat
urr
ive
ent
se
Bro
q
u
enc
ken
eo
con
ve
d
r
Ne
c
u
urr
cto
gat
ent
r
ive
s
e
The
q
uen
rm
ce
al
o
v
e
rvo
C
B
ltag
fail
ure
e
Ins
tan
tan
e
o
Ins
u
sp
tan
has
tan
e
e
o
o
v
T
u
e
i
s
m
rcu
neu
ed
rren
ela
tra
t
ye
lo
T
d
v
i
m
e
p
rcu
has
ed
rren
ela
eo
ye
v
t
e
Vol
d
r
c
neu
urr
tag
ent
tra
ed
lo
e
p
v
Ove
e
e
nde
rcu
rvo
nt
rren
ltag
ov
t
e
e
r
Res
c
urr
idu
ent
al
o
v
erv
Res
olta
tric
ge
te
d
/
sen
Wa
siti
ttm
ve
e
t
e
r
a
ic
rth
Po
w
fau
er s
lt
win
g
A
u
b
tor
loc
ecl
kin
ose
g
Ove
r
f
r
equ
enc
Un
y
de
r
f
r
equ
enc
Cur
y
ren
td
i
f
f
VT
e
ren
s
u
tial
p
erv
isio
CT
n
s
u
per
visi
CT
on
vec
tor
g
r
VT
o
up/
vec
rat
tor
io
g
c
rou
om
Trip
p
pen
/
C
r
ircu
atio
s
it S
com ation
CB
up
p
c
e
e
ont
r
nsa
visi
rol/
tion
on
m
Me
o
nito
as
u
r
ring
em
ent
Eve
s
n
t
rec
ord
D
ing
i
s
tur
ban
ce
Pro
r
e
cor
gra
der
m
ma
Set
ble
tin
sc
h
g
e
Gro
me
ups
log
ic
21
11:05
Power Quality
Monitoring
M830
Product
21/06/02
Disturbance Recorder
Application
Appendix 3-468-475
Page 475
A3

NPAG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NPAG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NPAG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapt1-2-3

Network Protection & Automation Guide

Primary and back-up protection

Relay output devices

Relay tripping circuits

Trip circuit supervision 2.12

Figure 2.1: Modern power station

Network Protection & Automation Guide

Hydro power station

Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice

Steam power station

Figure 2.2: Example power system

Network Protection & Automation Guide

Figure 2.4: Possible consequence of inadequate protection

The definitions that follow are generally used in relation

c. Protection Scheme: a collection of protection

Many items of equipment are very expensive, and so the

In order to fulfil the requirements of protection with the

This is the measure of the importance of protection

Network Protection & Automation Guide

Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice

In many cases, it is not feasible to protect against all

The terminology used in describing protection systems

Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice

To limit the extent of the power system that is

Figure 2.6: CT Locations

the circuit breaker A that is not completely protected

The point of connection of the protection with the power

Figure 2.5: Division of power system

Figure 2.7: Overlapping zones

Alternatively, the zone may be unrestricted; the start will

Network Protection & Automation Guide

The need for a high degree of reliability is discussed in

Comprehensive testing is just as important, and this

The design of a protection scheme is of paramount

2.4.5 Deterioration in Service

Testing should preferably be carried out without

Subsequent to installation in perfect condition,

It is essential to ensure that settings are chosen for

The quality of testing personnel is an essential feature

Network Protection & Automation Guide

2.4.6 Protection Performance

Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice

as an incident and only those that are cleared by the

2.5.1 Time Grading

Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice

This principle of assessment gives an accurate evaluation

Complete reliability is unlikely ever to be achieved by

2.5.2 Unit Systems

Where multiple protection systems are used, the tripping

Unit protection usually involves comparison of quantities

a. all protection systems must operate for a tripping

The function of protection systems is to isolate faults on

When a fault occurs, the protection scheme is required

Network Protection & Automation Guide

As the loading on a power system increases, the phase

System stability is not, however, the only consideration.

Network Protection & Automation Guide

Fundamentals of P rotection P ractice